Mikroc Dspic Manual v100 PDF

mikroC PRO for dsPIC ™
Manual
mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 is a full-featured C compiler

for dsPIC30, dsPIC33 and PIC24 MCUs from Microchip. It is designed
for developing, building and debugging dsPIC30/33 and PIC24-
based embedded applications. This development environment has a
wide range of features such as: easy-to-use IDE, very compact and
efficient code, many hardware and software libraries, comprehensive
documentation, software simulator, COFF file generation, SSA
optimization (up to 30% code reduction) and many more. Numerous
ready-to-use and well-explained examples will give a good start for
your embedded project.
Compiler
MikroElektronika
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 32
INTRODUCTION 32
Introduction to mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 33
Features 33
Where to Start 33
What’s new in mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 34
Compiler Changes 34
IDE Changes 34
Software License Agreement 35
mikroElektronika Associates License Statement and Limited Warranty 35
IMPORTANT - READ CAREFULLY 35
LIMITED WARRANTY 35
HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES 36
GENERAL PROVISIONS 36
Technical Support 37
How to Register 37
Who Gets the License Key 37
How to Get License Key 37
After Receving the License Key 39
CHAPTER 2 41
mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 Environment 41
Main Menu Options 42
File 43
File Menu Options 43
Edit 44
Edit Menu Options 44
Find Text 45
Replace Text 45
Find In Files 46
Go To Line 46
Regular expressions option 46
View 47
View Menu Options 47
Project 49
Project Menu Options 49
Build 50
Build Menu Options 50
Run 51
Run Menu Options 51
Tools 52
Tools Menu Options 52
MikroElektronika
2
mikroC PRO for dsPIC
Help 53
Help Menu Options 53
mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 IDE 54
IDE Overview 54
Code Editor 55
Editor Settings 55
Auto Save 56
Highlighter 56
Spelling 56
Comment Style 56
Code Folding 56
Code Assistant 57
Parameter Assistant 57
Bookmarks 57
Go to Line 57
Column Select Mode 58
Editor Colors 58
Auto Correct 59
Auto Complete (Code Templates) 60
Code Explorer 62
Routine List 63
Project Manager 63
Project Settings 65
Library Manager 66
Managing libraries using Package Manager 67
Statistics 68
Memory Usage Windows 68
RAM Memory Usage 69
Used RAM Locations 69
SFR Locations 70
ROM Memory Usage 70
ROM Memory Constants 71
Functions 71
Functions Sorted By Name Chart 72
Functions Sorted By Size Chart 72
Functions Sorted By Addresses 73
Function Tree 73
Memory Summary 74
Messages Window 75
Quick Converter 76
Macro Editor 76
Image Preview 77
Toolbars 79
File Toolbar 80
Edit Toolbar 80
MikroElektronika
3
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Advanced Edit Toolbar 81

Find/Replace Toolbar 81
Project Toolbar 82
Build Toolbar 82
Debug Toolbar 83
Styles Toolbar 83
Tools Toolbar 84
View Toolbar 84
Layout Toolbar 85
Help Toolbar 85
Customizing IDE Layout 86
Docking Windows 86
Saving Layout 87
Auto Hide 87
Options 88
Code editor 88
Tools 88
Output settings 89
Integrated Tools 91
Active Comments Editor 91
ASCII Chart 92
EEPROM Editor 93
Filter Designer 93
Graphic Lcd Bitmap Editor 94
HID Terminal 95
Lcd Custom Character 96
Seven Segment Editor 97
UDP Terminal 97
USART Terminal 98
Active Comments 99
New Active Comment 99
Renaming Active Comment 106
Deleting Active Comment 107
Export Project 108
Jump To Interrupt 109
Regular Expressions 110
Introduction 110
Simple matches 110
Escape sequences 110
Character classes 110
Metacharacters 111
Metacharacters - Line separators 111
Metacharacters - Predefined classes 112
Metacharacters - Word boundaries 112
Metacharacters - Iterators 112
Metacharacters - Alternatives 113
MikroElektronika
4
Metacharacters - Subexpressions 113

Metacharacters - Backreferences 113
Keyboard Shortcuts 114
CHAPTER 3 116
mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 Command Line Options 116
CHAPTER 4 118
mikroICD (In-Circuit Debugger) 118
Introduction 118
mikroICD Debugger Options 120
Debugger Options 120
mikroICD Debugger Example 121
mikroICD Debugger Windows 125
Debug Windows 125
Breakpoints Window 125
Watch Values Window 125
RAM Window 127
Stopwatch Window 127
EEPROM Watch Window 128
Code Watch Window 129
CHAPTER 5 130
Software Simulator Overview 130
Software Simulator 131
Software Simulator Debug Windows 132
Debug Windows 132
Breakpoints Window 132
Watch Values Window 132
RAM Window 134
Stopwatch Window 134
EEPROM Watch Window 135
Code Watch Window 136
Software Simulator Debugger Options 137
Debugger Options 137
CHAPTER 6 138
mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 Specifics 138
GOTO Table 139
ANSI Standard Issues 140
Divergence from the ANSI C Standard 140
C Language Extensions 140
Implementation-defined Behavior 140
Predefined Globals and Constants 141
Predefined project level defines 141
Accessing Individual Bits 142
sbit type 143
MikroElektronika
5
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
at keyword 144
bit type 144
Interrupts 145
Function Calls from Interrupt 145
Disable Context Saving 145
Interrupt Handling 145
Interrupt Example 146
Linker Directives 147
Directive absolute 147
Directive orgall 147
Directive funcorg 148
Indirect Function Calls 148
Built-in Routines 149
Lo 150
Hi 150
Higher 151
Highest 151
LoWord 152
HiWord 152
Delay_us 153
Delay_ms 153
Vdelay_ms 153
VDelay_Advanced_ms 154
Delay_Cyc 154
Delay_Cyc_Long 154
Clock_kHz 155
Clock_Mhz 155
Get_Fosc_kHz 155
Get_Fosc_Per_Cyc 156
Code Optimization 157
Constant folding 157
Constant propagation 157
Copy propagation 157
Value numbering 157
"Dead code" ellimination 157
Stack allocation 157
Local vars optimization 157
Better code generation and local optimization 157
Single Static Assignment Optimization 158
Introduction 158
Proper Coding Recommendations 159
Asm code and SSA optimization 160
Debugging Notes 160
Warning Messages Enhancement 160
Common Object File Format (COFF) 161
COFF File Format 161
MikroElektronika
6
COFF File Generation 161

CHAPTER 7 163
dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 Specifics 163
Types Efficiency 164
Nested Calls Limitations 164
Limits of Indirect Approach Through PSV 164
Limits of Pointer to Function 164
Variable, constant and routine alignment 164
dsPIC Memory Organization 165
Program Memory (ROM) 165
Data Memory (RAM) 166
SFR Memory Space 166
X and Y Data RAM 166
DMA RAM 167
Unimplemented Memory Space 167
Memory Type Specifiers 168
code 168
data 168
rx 168
sfr 168
xdata 169
ydata 169
dma 169
Memory Type Qualifiers 170
Near Memory Qualifier 170
Far Memory Qualifier 170
Read Modify Write Problem 171
CHAPTER 8 175
mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 Language Reference 175
Lexical Elements Overview 178
Whitespace 179
Whitespace in Strings 179
Line Splicing with Backslash (\) 179
Comments 180
C comments 180
C++ comments 180
Nested comments 180
Tokens 181
Token Extraction Example 181
Constants 182
Integer Constants 182
Long and Unsigned Suffixes 182
Decimal 182
Hexadecimal 183
MikroElektronika
7
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Binary 183
Octal 183
Floating Point Constants 184
Character Constants 184
Escape Sequences 184
Disambiguation 185
String Constants 186
Line Continuation with Backslash 186
Enumeration Constants 187
Pointer Constants 187
Constant Expressions 188
Keywords 189
Identifiers 190
Case Sensitivity 190
Uniqueness and Scope 191
Identifier Examples 191
Punctuators 191
Brackets 191
Parentheses 192
Braces 192
Comma 192
Semicolon 193
Colon 193
Asterisk (Pointer Declaration) 193
Equal Sign 194
Pound Sign (Preprocessor Directive) 194
Concepts 195
Objects 195
Objects and Declarations 195
Lvalues 196
Rvalues 196
Scope and Visibility 196
Scope 196
Visibility 196
Name Spaces 197
Duration 198
Static Duration 198
Local Duration 198
Types 199
Type Categories 199
Fundamental Types 200
Arithmetic Types 200
Integral Types 200
Floating-point Types 201
MikroElektronika
8
Enumerations 201
Enumeration Declaration 201
Anonymous Enum Type 202
Enumeration Scope 202
Void Type 203
Void Functions 203
Generic Pointers 203
Derived Types 203
Arrays 204
Array Declaration 204
Array Initialization 204
Arrays in Expressions 205
Multi-dimensional Arrays 205
Pointers 206
Pointer Declarations 206
Null Pointers 207
Assign an address to a Function Pointer 207
Function Pointers 209
Assign an address to a Function Pointer 209
Pointer Arithmetic 210
Arrays and Pointers 210
Assignment and Comparison 211
Pointer Addition 212
Pointer Subtraction 213
Structures 213
Structure Declaration and Initialization 213
Incomplete Declarations 214
Untagged Structures and Typedefs 215
Anonymous Structures 215
Working with Structures 216
Assignment 216
Size of Structure 216
Structures and Functions 216
Structure Member Access 217
Accessing Nested Structures 218
Structure Uniqueness 218
Unions 219
Union Declaration 219
Size of Union 219
Union Member Access 219
Anonymous Unions 220
Anonymous Union Member Access 220
Bit Fields 221
Bit Fields Declaration 221
Bit Fields Access 222
MikroElektronika
9
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Types Conversions 222

Standard Conversions 223
Arithmetic Conversions 223
Pointer Conversions 224
Explicit Types Conversions (Typecasting) 224
Declarations 225
Declarations and Definitions 225
Declarations and Declarators 226
Linkage 226
Linkage Rules 227
Internal Linkage Rules 227
Storage Classes 227
Auto 228
Register 228
Static 228
Extern 228
Type Qualifiers 229
Qualifier const 229
Qualifier volatile 229
Typedef Specifier 229
asm Declaration 230
Accessing variables 230
Asm code and SSA optimization 231
Initialization 232
Automatic Initialization 232
Functions 233
Function Declaration 233
Function Prototypes 234
Function Definition 234
Functions reentrancy 235
Function Calls and Argument Conversions 235
Function Calls 235
Argument Conversions 236
Ellipsis (‘...’) Operator 237
Operators 238
Operators Precedence and Associativity 239
Binary Arithmetic Operators 240
Unary Arithmetic Operators 240
Relational Operators 241
Relational Operators Overview 241
Relational Operators in Expressions 241
Bitwise Operators 242
Bitwise Operators Overview 242
Logical Operations on Bit Level 242
MikroElektronika
10
Bitwise Shift Operators 243

Bitwise vs. Logical 243
Logical Operators 244
Logical Operators Overview 244
Logical Operations 244
Logical Expressions and Side Effects 244
Logical vs. Bitwise 245
Conditional Operator ? : 245
Conditional Operator Rules 245
Assignment Operators 246
Simple Assignment Operator 246
Compound Assignment Operators 246
Assignment Rules 246
Unary Operators 247
Unary Arithmetic Operators 247
Unary Logical Operator 248
Unary Bitwise Operator 248
Address and Indirection Operator 248
Sizeof Operator 249
Sizeof Applied to Expression 249
Sizeof Applied to Type 249
Expressions 250
Comma Expressions 250
Statements 251
Labeled Statements 251
Expression Statements 252
Selection Statements 252
If Statement 252
Nested If statements 252
Switch Statement 253
Nested switch 254
Iteration Statements (Loops) 254
While Statement 254
Do Statement 254
For Statement 255
Jump Statements 256
Break and Continue Statements 256
Break Statement 256
Continue Statement 256
Goto Statement 257
Return Statement 257
Compound Statements (Blocks) 258
Preprocessor 258
MikroElektronika
11
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Preprocessor Directives 258

Line Continuation with Backslash (\) 259
Macros 259
Defining Macros and Macro Expansions 259
Macros with Parameters 260
Undefining Macros 261
File Inclusion 261
Explicit Path 262
Preprocessor Operators 263
Operator # 263
Operator ## 263
Conditional Compilation 264
Directives #if, #elif, #else, and #endif 264
Directives #ifdef and #ifndef 265
CHAPTER 9 266
mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 Libraries 266
Hardware Libraries 267
Digital Signal Processing Libraries 267
Standard ANSI C Libraries 268
Miscellaneous Libraries 268
Hardware Libraries 269
ADC Library 269
Library Routines 270
ADCx_Init 270
ADCx_Init_Advanced 271
ADCx_Get_Sample 272
ADCx_Read 272
ADC_Set_Active 273
Library Example 273
CAN Library 275
CANxSetOperationMode 276
CANxGetOperationMode 276
CANxInitialize 277
CANxSetBaudRate 278
CANxSetMask 279
CANxSetFilter 280
CANxRead 281
CANxWrite 282
CAN Constants 283
CAN_OP_MODE Constants 283
CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS Constants 283
CAN_TX_MSG_FLAGS Constants 284
CAN_RX_MSG_FLAGS Constants 285
MikroElektronika
12
CAN_MASK Constants 285

CAN_FILTER Constants 286
Library Example 286
HW Connection 289
CANSPI Library 290
Library Dependency Tree 290
External dependencies of CANSPI Library 290
CANSPISetOperationMode 291
CANSPIGetOperationMode 292
CANSPIInitialize 292
CANSPISetBaudRate 294
CANSPISetMask 295
CANSPISetFilter 296
CANSPIRead 297
CANSPIWrite 298
CANSPI Constants 298
CANSPI_OP_MODE Constants 298
CANSPI_TX_MSG_FLAGS Constants 300
CANSPI_RX_MSG_FLAGS Constants 300
CANSPI_MASK Constants 301
CANSPI_FILTER Constants 301
Library Example 302
HW Connection 305
Compact Flash Library 306
External dependencies of Compact Flash Library 307
Cf_Init 309
Cf_Detect 310
Cf_Enable 310
Cf_Disable 310
Cf_Read_Init 311
Cf_Read_Byte 311
Cf_Write_Init 311
Cf_Write_Byte 312
Cf_Read_Sector 312
Cf_Write_Sector 312
Cf_Fat_Init 313
Cf_Fat_QuickFormat 313
Cf_Fat_Assign 314
Cf_Fat_Reset 315
Cf_Fat_Read 315
Cf_Fat_Rewrite 316
Cf_Fat_Append 316
Cf_Fat_Delete 316
Cf_Fat_Write 317
MikroElektronika
13
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Cf_Fat_Set_File_Date 317
Cf_Fat_Get_File_Date 318
Cf_Fat_Get_File_Date_Modified 318
Cf_Fat_Get_File_Size 319
Cf_Fat_Get_Swap_File 319
Library Example 321
HW Connection 323
ECAN Library 324
ECANxDmaChannelInit 325
ECANxSetOperationMode 325
ECANxGetOperationMode 326
ECANxInitialize 327
ECANxSelectTxBuffers 328
ECANxFilterDisable 328
ECANxFilterEnable 329
ECANxSetBufferSize 329
ECANxSetBaudRate 330
ECANxSetMask 331
ECANxSetFilter 332
ECANxRead 333
ECANxWrite 334
ECAN Constants 335
ECAN_OP_MODE Constants 335
ECAN_CONFIG_FLAGS Constants 335
ECAN_TX_MSG_FLAGS Constants 336
ECAN_RX_MSG_FLAGS Constants 336
ECAN_MASK Constants 337
ECAN_FILTER Constants 337
ECAN_RX_BUFFER Constants 338
Library Example 339
HW Connection 343
EEPROM Library 343
EEPROM_Erase 344
EEPROM_Erase_Block 344
EEPROM_Read 344
EEPROM_Write 345
EEPROM_Write_Block 345
Library Example 345
Epson S1D13700 Graphic Lcd Library 347
External dependencies of the Epson S1D13700 Graphic Lcd Library 347
S1D13700_Init 349
S1D13700_Write_Command 350
S1D13700_Write_Parameter 351
S1D13700_Read_Parameter 351
MikroElektronika
14
S1D13700_Fill 351
S1D13700_GrFill 352
S1D13700_TxtFill 352
S1D13700_Display_GrLayer 352
S1D13700_Display_TxtLayer 353
S1D13700_Set_Cursor 353
S1D13700_Display_Cursor 354
S1D13700_Write_Char 354
S1D13700_Write_Text 355
S1D13700_Dot 355
S1D13700_Line 356
S1D13700_H_Line 356
S1D13700_V_Line 357
S1D13700_Rectangle 357
S1D13700_Box 358
S1D13700_Rectangle_Round_Edges 358
S1D13700_Rectangle_Round_Edges_Fill 359
S1D13700_Circle 359
S1D13700_Circle_Fill 360
S1D13700_Image 360
S1D13700_PartialImage 361
Flash Memory Library 362
dsPIC30: 362
PIC24 and dsPIC33: 362
24F04KA201 and 24F16KA102 Family Specifics : 363
dsPIC30 Functions 363
PIC24 and dsPIC33 Functions 363
dsPIC30 Functions 363
FLASH_Erase32 364
FLASH_Write_Block 364
FLASH_Write_Compact 365
FLASH_Write_Init 365
FLASH_Write_Loadlatch4 366
FLASH_Write_Loadlatch4_Compact 367
FLASH_Write_DoWrite 368
FLASH_Read4 368
FLASH_Read4_Compact 369
PIC24 and dsPIC33 Functions 369
FLASH_Erase 369
FLASH_Write 370
FLASH_Write_Compact 370
FLASH_Read 371
FLASH_Read_Compact 371
Library Example 372
Graphic Lcd Library 373
MikroElektronika
15
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
External dependencies of Graphic Lcd Library 374

Glcd_Init 375
Glcd_Set_Side 377
Glcd_Set_X 377
Glcd_Set_Page 377
Glcd_Read_Data 378
Glcd_Write_Data 378
Glcd_Fill 379
Glcd_Dot 379
Glcd_Line 379
Glcd_V_Line 380
Glcd_H_Line 380
Glcd_Rectangle 381
Glcd_Rectangle_Round_Edges 381
Glcd_Rectangle_Round_Edges_Fill 382
Glcd_Box 382
Glcd_Circle 383
Glcd_Circle_Fill 383
Glcd_Set_Font 384
Glcd_Write_Char 385
Glcd_Write_Text 385
Glcd_Image 386
Glcd_PartialImage 386
Library Example 387
HW Connection 389
I²C Library 390
I2Cx_Init 390
I2Cx_Start 391
I2Cx_Restart 391
I2Cx_Is_Idle 392
I2Cx_Read 392
I2Cx_Write 393
I2Cx_Stop 393
Library Example 394
HW Connection 394
Keypad Library 395
External dependencies of Keypad Library 395
Keypad_Init 395
Keypad_Key_Press 396
Keypad_Key_Click 396
Library Example 397
HW Connection 398
Lcd Library 399
MikroElektronika
16

Lcd_Init 400
Lcd_Out 401
Lcd_Out_Cp 401
Lcd_Chr 401
Lcd_Chr_Cp 402
Lcd_Cmd 402
Available Lcd Commands 402
Library Example 403
Manchester Code Library 405
Man_Receive_Init 406
Man_Receive 407
Man_Send_Init 407
Man_Send 408
Man_Synchro 408
Man_Break 409
Library Example 410
Connection Example 412
Multi Media Card Library 413
Secure Digital Card 413
Secure Digital High Capacity Card 413
External dependencies of MMC Library 414
Mmc_Init 415
Mmc_Read_Sector 416
Mmc_Write_Sector 416
Mmc_Read_Cid 417
Mmc_Read_Csd 417
Mmc_Fat_Init 418
Mmc_Fat_QuickFormat 419
Mmc_Fat_Assign 420
Mmc_Fat_Reset 421
Mmc_Fat_Read 421
Mmc_Fat_Rewrite 422
Mmc_Fat_Append 422
Mmc_Fat_Delete 422
Mmc_Fat_Write 423
Mmc_Fat_Set_File_Date 423
Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Date 424
Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Date_Modified 425
Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Size 425
Mmc_Fat_Get_Swap_File 426
Library Example 427
HW Connection 431
MikroElektronika
17
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
OneWire Library 432

Ow_Reset 432
Ow_Read 433
Ow_Write 433
Library Example 434
HW Connection 436
Peripheral Pin Select Library 437
Unlock_IOLOCK 437
Lock_IOLOCK 437
PPS_Mapping 438
Direction Parameters 438
Input Functions 438
Output Functions 439
Port Expander Library 441
External dependencies of Port Expander Library 441
Expander_Init 442
Expander_Init_Advanced 443
Expander_Read_Byte 444
Expander_Write_Byte 444
Expander_Read_PortA 444
Expander_Read_PortB 445
Expander_Read_PortAB 445
Expander_Write_PortA 446
Expander_Write_PortB 446
Expander_Write_PortAB 447
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA 447
Expander_Set_DirectionPortB 448
Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB 448
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortA 448
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortB 449
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortAB 449
HW Connection 451
PS/2 Library 452
External dependencies of PS/2 Library 452
Ps2_Config 453
Ps2_Key_Read 453
Special Function Keys 454
Library Example 455
HW Connection 456
PWM Library 456
MikroElektronika
18
PWM_Init 457
PWM_Set_Duty 457
PWM_Start 458
PWM_Stop 458
Library Example 458
HW Connection 460
PWM Motor Control Library 460
PWMx_Mc_Init 461
PWMx_Mc_Set_Duty 462
PWMx_Mc_Start 462
PWMx_Mc_Stop 463
HW Connection 464
RS-485 Library 464
External dependencies of RS-485 Library 465
RS485Master_Init 465
RS485Master_Receive 466
RS485Master_Send 466
RS485Slave_Init 467
RS485Slave_Receive 468
RS485Slave_Send 468
Library Example 469
HW Connection 472
Message format and CRC calculations 473
Software I²C Library 474
External dependencies of Software I²C Library 474
Soft_I2C_Init 475
Soft_I2C_Start 475
Soft_I2C_Read 476
Soft_I2C_Write 476
Soft_I2C_Stop 477
Soft_I2C_Break 478
Library Example 479
Software SPI Library 481
External dependencies of Software SPI Library 481
Soft_SPI_Init 482
Soft_SPI_Read 483
Soft_SPI_Write 483
Library Example 483
Software UART Library 485
Soft_UART_Init 485
MikroElektronika
19
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Soft_UART_Read 486
Soft_UART_Write 486
Soft_UART_Break 487
Library Example 488
Sound Library 489
Sound_Init 489
Sound_Play 489
HW Connection 491
SPI Library 492
SPIx_Init 493
SPIx_Init_Advanced 494
SPIx_Read 496
SPIx_Write 496
SPI_Set_Active 497
Library Example 497
HW Connection 498
SPI Ethernet Library 499
External dependencies of SPI Ethernet Library 500
SPIx_Write 501
SPIx_Write 502
SPI_Ethernet_Enable 503
SPI_Ethernet_Disable 504
SPI_Ethernet_doPacket 505
SPI_Ethernet_putByte 505
SPI_Ethernet_putBytes 506
SPI_Ethernet_putConstBytes 506
SPI_Ethernet_putString 506
SPI_Ethernet_putConstString 507
SPI_Ethernet_getByte 507
SPI_Ethernet_getBytes 507
SPI_Ethernet_UserTCP 508
SPI_Ethernet_UserUDP 509
SPI_Ethernet_getIpAddress 510
SPI_Ethernet_getDnsIpAddress 510
SPI_Ethernet_getIpMask 510
SPI_Ethernet_confNetwork 511
SPI_Ethernet_arpResolve 511
SPI_Ethernet_sendUDP 512
SPI_Ethernet_dnsResolve 512
SPI_Ethernet_initDHCP 513
SPI_Ethernet_doDHCPLeaseTime 514
SPI_Ethernet_renewDHCP 514
Library Example 515
MikroElektronika
20
HW Connection 522
SPI Ethernet ENC24J600 Library 523
External dependencies of SPI Ethernet ENC24J600 Library 524
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_Init 526
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_Enable 528
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_Disable 529
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_doPacket 530
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_putByte 530
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_putBytes 531
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_putConstBytes 531
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_putString 532
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_putConstString 532
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getByte 532
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getBytes 533
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_UserTCP 533
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_UserUDP 534
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getIpAddress 534
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getGwIpAddress 535
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getDnsIpAddress 535
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getIpMask 536
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_confNetwork 536
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_arpResolve 537
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_sendUDP 537
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_dnsResolve 538
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_initDHCP 539
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_doDHCPLeaseTime 540
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_renewDHCP 540
Library Example 540
SPI Graphic Lcd Library 541
External dependencies of SPI Lcd Library 541
SPI_Glcd_Init 542
SPI_Glcd_Set_Side 543
SPI_Glcd_Set_Page 543
SPI_Glcd_Set_X 543
SPI_Glcd_Read_Data 544
SPI_Glcd_Write_Data 544
SPI_Glcd_Fill 545
SPI_Glcd_Dot 545
SPI_Glcd_Line 546
SPI_Glcd_V_Line 546
SPI_Glcd_H_Line 547
SPI_Glcd_Rectangle 547
SPI_Glcd_Rectangle_Round_Edges 548
MikroElektronika
21
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Glcd_Rectangle_Round_Edges_Fill 548
SPI_Glcd_Box 549
SPI_Glcd_Circle 549
SPI_Glcd_Circle_FIll 550
SPI_Glcd_Set_Font 551
SPI_Glcd_Write_Char 552
SPI_Glcd_Write_Text 552
SPI_Glcd_Image 553
SPI_Glcd_PartialImage 553
Library Example 554
HW Connection 556
SPI Lcd Library 557
SPI_Lcd_Config 558
SPI_Lcd_Out 558
SPI_Lcd_Out_Cp 559
SPI_Lcd_Chr 559
SPI_Lcd_Chr_Cp 559
SPI_Lcd_Cmd 560
SPI_Lcd_Cmd 560
Library Example 561
Default Pin Configuration 561
SPI Lcd8 (8-bit interface) Library 563
SPI_Lcd8_Config 564
SPI_Lcd8_Out 565
SPI_Lcd8_Out_Cp 565
SPI_Lcd8_Chr 565
SPI_Lcd8_Chr_Cp 566
SPI_Lcd8_Cmd 566
Available SPI Lcd8 Commands 567
Library Example 567
SPI T6963C Graphic Lcd Library 570
External dependencies of SPI T6963C Graphic Lcd Library 570
SPI_Lcd8_Cmd 572
SPI_T6963C_writeData 573
SPI_T6963C_writeCommand 573
SPI_T6963C_setPtr 574
SPI_T6963C_waitReady 574
SPI_T6963C_fill 574
SPI_T6963C_dot 575
MikroElektronika
22
SPI_T6963C_write_char 575
SPI_T6963C_write_text 576
SPI_T6963C_line 577
SPI_T6963C_rectangle 577
SPI_T6963C_rectangle_round_edges 578
SPI_T6963C_rectangle_round_edges_fill 578
SPI_T6963C_box 579
SPI_T6963C_circle 579
SPI_T6963C_circle_fill 579
SPI_T6963C_image 580
SPI_T6963C_PartialImage 580
SPI_T6963C_sprite 581
SPI_T6963C_set_cursor 581
SPI_T6963C_clearBit 581
SPI_T6963C_setBit 582
SPI_T6963C_negBit 582
SPI_T6963C_displayGrPanel 582
SPI_T6963C_displayTxtPanel 583
SPI_T6963C_setGrPanel 583
SPI_T6963C_setTxtPanel 583
SPI_T6963C_panelFill 584
SPI_T6963C_grFill 584
SPI_T6963C_txtFill 584
SPI_T6963C_cursor_height 585
SPI_T6963C_graphics 585
SPI_T6963C_text 585
SPI_T6963C_cursor 586
SPI_T6963C_cursor_blink 586
Library Example 586
HW Connection 591
T6963C Graphic Lcd Library 592
SPI_T6963C_cursor 595
T6963C_writeData 596
T6963C_writeCommand 597
T6963C_setPtr 597
T6963C_waitReady 597
T6963C_fill 598
T6963C_dot 598
T6963C_write_char 599
T6963C_write_text 600
T6963C_line 600
T6963C_rectangle 601
T6963C_rectangle_round_edges 601
T6963C_rectangle_round_edges_fill 602
MikroElektronika
23
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
T6963C_box 602
T6963C_circle 602
T6963C_circle_fill 603
T6963C_image 603
T6963C_PartialImage 604
T6963C_sprite 604
T6963C_set_cursor 605
T6963C_clearBit 605
T6963C_setBit 605
T6963C_negBit 606
T6963C_displayGrPanel 606
T6963C_displayTxtPanel 606
T6963C_setGrPanel 607
T6963C_setTxtPanel 607
T6963C_panelFill 607
T6963C_grFill 608
T6963C_txtFill 608
T6963C_cursor_height 608
T6963C_graphics 609
T6963C_text 609
T6963C_cursor 609
T6963C_cursor_blink 610
Library Example 610
HW Connection 614
TFT Library 615
External dependencies of TFT Library 615
TFT_Init 617
TFT_Set_Index 618
TFT_Write_Command 618
TFT_Write_Data 618
TFT_Set_Active 619
TFT_Set_Font 620
TFT_Write_Char 621
TFT_Write_Text 621
TFT_Fill_Screen 622
TFT_Dot 623
TFT_Set_Pen 624
TFT_Set_Brush 625
TFT_Line 627
TFT_H_Line 628
TFT_V_Line 628
TFT_Rectangle_Round_Edges 629
TFT_Circle 629
TFT_Image 629
TFT_Partial_Image 630
TFT_Image_Jpeg 630
MikroElektronika
24
TFT_RGBToColor16bit 631
TFT_Color16bitToRGB 631
HW Connection 632
Touch Panel Library 633
External dependencies of Touch Panel Library 633
TP_Init 634
TP_Set_ADC_Threshold 634
TP_Press_Detect 635
TP_Get_Coordinates 636
TP_Calibrate_Bottom_Left 636
TP_Calibrate_Upper_Right 637
TP_Get_Calibration_Consts 637
TP_Set_Calibration_Consts 638
Library Example 638
Touch Panel TFT Library 643
External dependencies of Touch Panel TFT Library 643
TP_TFT_Init 644
TP_TFT_Set_ADC_Threshold 644
TP_TFT_Press_Detect 645
TP_TFT_Get_Coordinates 646
TP_TFT_Calibrate_Min 646
TP_TFT_Calibrate_Max 647
TP_TFT_Get_Calibration_Consts 647
TP_TFT_Set_Calibration_Consts 648
HW Connection 648
UART Library 649
UARTx_Init 650
UARTx_Init_Advanced 651
UARTx_Data_Ready 653
UARTx_Tx_Idle 654
UARTx_Read 655
UARTx_Read_Text 656
UARTx_Write 657
UARTx_Write_Text 658
UART_Set_Active 659
Library Example 660
HW Connection 661
USB Library 662
USB HID Class 662
HID_Enable 663
MikroElektronika
25
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
HID_Read 663
HID_Write 664
HID_Disable 664
USB_Interrupt_Proc 665
USB_Polling_Proc 665
Gen_Enable 666
Gen_Read 666
Gen_Write 667
Library Example 668
HW Connection 668
DSP Libraries 669
Digital Signal Processing Libraries 669
FIR Filter Library 670
FIR_Radix 670
IIR Filter Library 671
IIR_Radix 671
FFT Library 672
FFT 672
Twiddle Factors: 673
TwiddleCoeff_64 673
TwiddleCoeff_128 673
Bit Reverse Complex Library 676
BitReverseComplex 676
Vectors Library 677
Vector_Set 677
Vector_Power 678
Vector_Subtract 678
Vector_Scale 679
Vector_Negate 679
Vector_Multiply 680
Vector_Min 680
Vector_Max 681
Vector_Dot 681
Vector_Correlate 682
Vector_Convolve 683
Vector_Add 684
Matrices Library 685
Matrix_Transpose 685
MikroElektronika
26
Matrix_Subtract 686
Matrix_Scale 686
Matrix_Multiply 687
Matrix_Add 688
Standard ANSI C Libraries 689
ANSI C Ctype Library 689
Library Functions 689
isalnum 690
isalpha 690
iscntrl 690
isdigit 690
isgraph 691
islower 691
ispunct 691
isspace 691
isupper 692
isxdigit 692
toupper 692
tolower 692
ANSI C Math Library 693
acos 693
asin 694
atan 694
atan2 694
ceil 694
cos 695
cosh 695
exp 695
fabs 695
floor 695
frexp 696
ldexp 696
log 696
log10 696
modf 697
pow 697
sin 697
sinh 697
sqrt 698
tan 698
tanh 698
ANSI C Stdlib Library 699
abs 699
MikroElektronika
27
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
atof 700
atoi 700
atol 700
div 700
ldiv 701
uldiv 701
labs 701
max 701
min 702
rand 702
srand 702
xtoi 702
Div Structures 703
ANSI C String Library 704
memchr 704
memcmp 705
memcpy 705
memmove 705
memset 706
strcat 706
strchr 706
strcmp 707
strcpy 707
strlen 707
strncat 708
strncpy 708
strspn 708
strncmp 709
strstr 709
strcspn 710
strpbrk 710
strrchr 710
strtok 711
Miscellaneous Libraries 712
Button Library 712
strrchr 712
Conversions Library 714
ByteToStr 715
ShortToStr 715
WordToStr 716
IntToStr 716
LongToStr 717
MikroElektronika
28
LongWordToStr 717
FloatToStr 718
WordToStrWithZeros 719
IntToStrWithZeros 719
LongWordToStrWithZeros 720
LongIntToStrWithZeros 720
ByteToHex 721
ShortToHex 721
WordToHex 722
IntToHex 722
LongWordToHex 723
LongIntToHex 723
Dec2Bcd 724
Bcd2Dec 724
Dec2Bcd16 725
Bcd2Dec16 725
Rtrim 726
Ltrim 726
PrintOut Library 727
PrintOut 727
Setjmp Library 731
Setjmp 731
Longjmp 732
Library Example 732
Sprint Library 734
Functions 734
sprintf 734
sprintl 736
sprinti 736
Library Example 737
Time Library 738
Time_dateToEpoch 738
Time_epochToDate 739
Time_dateDiff 740
Library Example 741
Trigonometry Library 742
sinE3 742
cosE3 743
CHAPTER 10 744
Tutorials 744
MikroElektronika
29
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Managing Project 744

Projects 744
New Project 745
New Project Wizard Steps 745
New Project 748
New Project Wizard Steps 748
Customizing Projects 752
Managing Project Group 752
Add/Remove Files from Project 752
Project Level Defines: 753
Add/Remove Files from Project 754
Project Level Defines: 755
Source Files 756
Managing Source Files 756
Creating new source file 756
Opening an existing file 756
Printing an open file 756
Saving file 756
Saving file under a different name 757
Closing file 757
Search Paths 757
Paths for Source Files (.c) 758
Paths for Header Files (.h) 758
Edit Project 759
Source Files 760
Managing Source Files 760
Creating new source file 760
Opening an existing file 760
Printing an open file 760
Saving file 760
Saving file under a different name 761
Closing file 761
Search Paths 761
Paths for Source Files (.c) 762
Paths for Header Files (.h) 762
Clean Project Folder 763
Compilation 764
Output Files 764
Assembly View 764
Multiple Library Versions 765
Using Microchip MPLAB® IDE with mikroElektronika compilers 766
Debugging Your Code 766
Using MPLAB® ICD 2 Debugger 766
Using MPLAB® Simulator 773
MikroElektronika
30
Frequently Asked Questions 778

Can I use your compilers and programmer on Windows Vista (Windows 7) ? 778
I am getting “Access is denied” error in Vista, how to solve this problem ? 778
What are differences between mikroC PRO, mikroPascal PRO and mikroBasic PRO compilers ?
Why do they have different prices ? 778
Why do your PIC compilers don’t support 12F508 and some similar chips ? 778
What are limitations of demo versions of mikroElektronika’s compilers ? 778
Why do I still get demo limit error when I purchased and installed license key ? 778
I have bought license for the older version, do I have to pay license for the new version of the com-
piler ? 779
Do your compilers work on Windows Vista (Windows 7) ? 779
What does this function/procedure/routine do ? 779
I try to compile one of the provided examples and nothing happens, what is the problem? 779
Can I get your library sources ? I need to provide all sources with my project. 779
Can I use code I developed in your compilers in commercial purposes ? Are there some limitations
? 779
Why does an example provided with your compilers doesn’t work ? 779
Your example works if I use the same MCU you did, but how to make it work for another MCU ?779
I need this project finished, can you help me ? 780
Do you have some discount on your compilers/development systems for students/professors ? 780
I have a question about your compilers which is not listed here. Where can I find an answer ? 780
MikroElektronika
31
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 is a powerful, feature-rich development tool for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24
microcontrollers. It is designed to provide the programmer with the easiest possible solution to developing applications
for embedded systems, without compromising performance or control.
mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 IDE
MikroElektronika
32
Introduction to mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24

dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 and C fit together well: dsPIC is designed as PIC with digital signal processing capabilities.
These are Microchip’s first inherent 16-bit (data) microcontrollers. They build on the PIC’s existing strength offering
hardware MAC (multiply-accumulate), barrel shifting, bit reversal, (16x16)-bit multiplication and other digital signal
processing operations. Having a wide range of application, being prized for its efficiency, dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 MCUs
are a natural choice for developing embedded systems. mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a successful
match featuring highly advanced IDE, ANSI compliant compiler, broad set of hardware libraries, comprehensive
documentation, and plenty of ready-to-run examples.
Features
mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 allows you to quickly develop and deploy complex applications:
- Write your source code using the built-in Code Editor (Code and Parameter Assistants, Code Folding,
Syntax Highlighting, Auto Correct, Code Templates, and more.)
- Use included mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 libraries to dramatically speed up the development:
data acquisition, memory, displays, conversions, communication etc.
- Monitor your program structure, variables, and functions in the Code Explorer.
- Generate commented, human-readable assembly, and standard HEX compatible with all programmers.
- Use the integrated mikroICD (In-Circuit Debugger) Real-Time debugging tool to monitor program execution
on the hardware level.
- Inspect program flow and debug executable logic with the integrated Software Simulator.
- Generate COFF(Common Object File Format) file for software and hardware debugging under Microchip’s
MPLAB software.
- Use Single Static Assignment optimization to shrink your code to even smaller size.
- Get detailed reports and graphs: RAM and ROM map, code statistics, assembly listing, calling tree,
and more.
- Active Comments enable you to make your comments alive and interactive.
- mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides plenty of examples to expand, develop, and use as
building bricks in your projects. Copy them entirely if you deem fit – that’s why we included them
with the compiler.
Where to Start
- In case that you’re a beginner in programming dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 microcontrollers, read carefully the
dsPIC Specifics chapter. It might give you some useful pointers on dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 constraints,
code portability, and good programming practices.
- If you are experienced in C programming, you will probably want to consult mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33
and PIC24 Specifics first. For language issues, you can always refer to the comprehensive Language
Reference. A complete list of included libraries is available at mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and
PIC24 Libraries.
- If you are not very experienced in C programming, don’t panic! mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24
provides plenty of examples making it easy for you to go quickly. We suggest that you first consult Projects
and Source Files, and then start browsing the examples that you’re the most interested in.
Copyright (c) 2002-2010 mikroElektronika. All rights reserved.

What do you think about this topic ? Send us feedback!
MikroElektronika
33
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
What’s new in mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24

IDE build 4.60
Command line build 4.60
New features and enhancements in the following areas will boost your productivity by helping you complete many tasks
more easily and in less time.
For a complete version history of mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24, visit the following link : http://www.mikroe.
com/download/eng/documents/compilers/mikroc/pro/dspic/version_history.txt
- Compiler Changes
- IDE Changes
Compiler Changes
Fixed :
- Optimization issues in specific cases when destination variable is in Rx space.

- Alignment not set for the first variable which is the first in block of initializers.
IDE Changes
Fixed :
- Error in Code Explorer in case void interrup is defined (without brackets).

- Compiler version is not visible in caption if no projects are open.
- Parameter assistant ignores commas when switching to another parameter.
- Occasional lost of configuration flags when swithing between projets.
- Improper display of RAM memory usage in statistics.
Improved :
- Communication to programmer concerning supported chips.

- License Key Request form.
MikroElektronika
34
Software License Agreement

mikroElektronika Associates License Statement and Limited Warranty
IMPORTANT - READ CAREFULLY

This license statement and limited warranty constitute a legal agreement (“License Agreement”) between you (either as
an individual or a single entity) and mikroElektronika (“mikroElektronika Associates”) for software product (“Software”)
identified above, including any software, media, and accompanying on-line or printed documentation.
BY INSTALLING, COPYING, OR OTHERWISE USING SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL TERMS
AND CONDITIONS OF THE LICENSE AGREEMENT.
Upon your acceptance of the terms and conditions of the License Agreement, mikroElektronika Associates grants you
the right to use Software in a way provided below.
This Software is owned by mikroElektronika Associates and is protected by copyright law and international copyright
treaty. Therefore, you must treat this Software like any other copyright material (e.g., a book).
You may transfer Software and documentation on a permanent basis provided. You retain no copies and the recipient
agrees to the terms of the License Agreement. Except as provided in the License Agreement, you may not transfer,
rent, lease, lend, copy, modify, translate, sublicense, time-share or electronically transmit or receive Software, media
or documentation. You acknowledge that Software in the source code form remains a confidential trade secret of
mikroElektronika Associates and therefore you agree not to modify Software or attempt to reverse engineer, decompile,
or disassemble it, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding
this limitation.
If you have purchased an upgrade version of Software, it constitutes a single product with the mikroElektronika
Associates software that you upgraded. You may use the upgrade version of Software only in accordance with the
License Agreement.
LIMITED WARRANTY
Respectfully excepting the Redistributables, which are provided “as is”, without warranty of any kind, mikroElektronika
Associates warrants that Software, once updated and properly used, will perform substantially in accordance with the
accompanying documentation, and Software media will be free from defects in materials and workmanship, for a period
of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt. Any implied warranties on Software are limited to ninety (90) days.
mikroElektronika Associates’ and its suppliers’ entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be, at mikroElektronika
Associates’ option, either (a) return of the price paid, or (b) repair or replacement of Software that does not meet
mikroElektronika Associates’ Limited Warranty and which is returned to mikroElektronika Associates with a copy of
your receipt. DO NOT RETURN ANY PRODUCT UNTIL YOU HAVE CALLED MIKROELEKTRONIKA ASSOCIATES
FIRST AND OBTAINED A RETURN AUTHORIZATION NUMBER. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of Software
has resulted from an accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any replacement of Software will be warranted for the rest of
the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer.
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, MIKROELEKTRONIKA ASSOCIATES AND ITS
SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDED, BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT, WITH REGARD TO SOFTWARE, AND THE PROVISION OF OR
FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT SERVICES.
MikroElektronika
35
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
IN NO EVENT SHALL MIKROELEKTRONIKA ASSOCIATES OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS AND BUSINESS INFORMATION, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR
ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE SOFTWARE PRODUCT
OR THE PROVISION OF OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT SERVICES, EVEN IF MIKROELEKTRONIKA
ASSOCIATES HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN ANY CASE, MIKROELEKTRONIKA
ASSOCIATES’ ENTIRE LIABILITY UNDER ANY PROVISION OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE LIMITED
TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR SOFTWARE PRODUCT PROVIDED, HOWEVER, IF YOU HAVE
ENTERED INTO A MIKROELEKTRONIKA ASSOCIATES SUPPORT SERVICES AGREEMENT, MIKROELEKTRONIKA
ASSOCIATES’ ENTIRE LIABILITY REGARDING SUPPORT SERVICES SHALL BE GOVERNED BY THE TERMS OF
THAT AGREEMENT.
HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES

Software is not fault-tolerant and is not designed, manufactured or intended for use or resale as on-line control
equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities,
aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life support machines, or weapons systems, in
which the failure of Software could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage
(“High Risk Activities”). mikroElektronika Associates and its suppliers specifically disclaim any expressed or implied
warranty of fitness for High Risk Activities.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
This statement may only be modified in writing signed by you and an authorised officer of mikroElektronika Associates.
If any provision of this statement is found void or unenforceable, the remainder will remain valid and enforceable
according to its terms. If any remedy provided is determined to have failed for its essential purpose, all limitations of
liability and exclusions of damages set forth in the Limited Warranty shall remain in effect.
This statement gives you specific legal rights; you may have others, which vary, from country to country. mikroElektronika
Associates reserves all rights not specifically granted in this statement.
mikroElektronika
Visegradska 1A,
11000 Belgrade,
Europe.
Phone: + 381 11 36 28 830

Fax: +381 11 36 28 831
Web: www.mikroe.com
E-mail: [email protected]
MikroElektronika
36
Technical Support
The latest software can be downloaded free of charge via Internet (you might want to bookmark the page so you could
check news, patches, and upgrades later on): www.mikroe.com/en/compilers/mikroC PRO/dspic/download.htm .
In case you encounter any problem, you are welcome to our support forums at www.mikroe.com/forum/. Here, you may
also find helpful information, hardware tips, and practical code snippets. Your comments and suggestions on future
development of the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 are always appreciated — feel free to drop a note or two
on our Wishlist.
In our Knowledge Base www.mikroe.com/en/kb/ you can find the answers to Frequently Asked Questions and solutions
to known problems. If you can not find the solution to your problem in Knowledge Base then report it to Support Desk
www.mikroe.com/en/support/. In this way, we can record and track down bugs more efficiently, which is in our mutual
interest. We respond to every bug report and question in a suitable manner, ever improving our technical support.
How to Register
The latest version of the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 is always available for downloading from our website.
It is a fully functional software with the mikroICD(in-circuit Debugger), all the libraries, examples, and comprehensive
help included.
The only limitation of the free version is that it cannot generate hex output over 2K of program words. Although it might
sound restrictive, this margin allows you to develop practical, working applications with no thinking of demo limit. If you
intend to develop really complex projects in the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24, then you should consider the
possibility of purchasing the license key.
Who Gets the License Key

Buyers of the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 are entitled to the license key. After you have completed the
payment procedure, you have an option of registering your mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24. In this way you can
generate hex output without any limitations.
How to Get License Key
After you have completed the payment procedure, start the program. Select Help › How to Register from the drop-
down menu or click the How To Register Icon .
You can choose between two registering methods, I work online or I work offline, based on your current internet
connection and click Request license key now button :
MikroElektronika
37
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
If you choose I work online registering method, following page will be opened in your default browser :
MikroElektronika
38
Fill out the registration form, select your distributor, and click the Submit button.
If you choose I work offline registering method, following window will be opened :
Fill out the registration form, select your distributor, and click the Submit button.
This will start your e-mail client with message ready for sending. Review the information you have entered, and add the
comment if you deem it necessary. Please, do not modify the subject line.
Upon receiving and verifying your request, we will send the license key to the e-mail address you specified in the
form.
After Receving the License Key

The license key comes as a small autoextracting file – just start it anywhere on your computer in order to activate
your copy of compiler and remove the demo limit. You do not need to restart your computer or install any additional
components. Also, there is no need to run the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 at the time of activation.
MikroElektronika
39
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Important :
- The license key is valid until you format your hard disk. In case you need to format the hard disk,
you should request a new activation key.
- Please keep the activation program in a safe place. Every time you upgrade the compiler
you should start this program again in order to reactivate the license.
MikroElektronika
40
CHAPTER 2
mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and
PIC24 Environment
MikroElektronika
41
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Main Menu Options

Available Main Menu options are:
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts, Toolbars
MikroElektronika
42
File
File Menu Options
The File menu is the main entry point for manipulation with the source files.
File Description
Open a new editor window.
Open source file for editing or image file for viewing.
Reopen recently used file.
Save changes for active editor.
Save the active source file with the different name or change the file type.
Close active source file.
Close all opened files.
Print Preview.
Print.
Exit IDE.
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts, File Toolbar, Managing Source Files
MikroElektronika
43
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Edit
Edit Menu Options
The Edit Menu contains commands for editing the contents of the current document.
Edit Description
Undo last change.
Redo last change.
Cut selected text to clipboard.
Copy selected text to clipboard.
Paste text from clipboard.
Delete selected text.
Select all text in active editor.
Find text in active editor.
Find next occurence of text in active editor.
Find previous occurence of text in active editor.
Replace text in active editor.
Find text in current file, in all opened files, or in files from desired folder.
Go to line to the desired line in active editor.
Advanced Code Editor options
MikroElektronika
44
Advanced » Description
Comment selected code or put single line comment if there is no selection.
Uncomment selected code or remove single line comment if there is no selection.
Indent selected code.
Outdent selected code.
Changes selected text case to lowercase.
Changes selected text case to uppercase.
Changes selected text case to titlercase.
Find Text
Dialog box for searching the document for the specified text. The search is performed in the direction specified. If the
string is not found a message is displayed.
Replace Text
Dialog box for searching for a text string in file and replacing it with another text string.
MikroElektronika
45
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Find In Files
Dialog box for searching for a text string in current file, all opened files, or in files on a disk.
The string to search for is specified in the Text to find field. If Search in directories option is selected, The files to search
are specified in the Files mask and Path fields.
Go To Line
Dialog box that allows the user to specify the line number at which the cursor should be positioned.
Regular expressions option

By checking this box, you will be able to advance your search, through Regular expressions.
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts, Edit Toolbar, Advanced Edit Toolbar
MikroElektronika
46
View
View Menu Options
View Menu contains commands for controlling the on-screen display of the current project.
MikroElektronika
47
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
View Description
Show/Hide Software Simulator / mikroICD (In-Circuit Debugger) Debug Windows.
Show/Hide Toolbars.
Show/Hide Bookmarks window.
Show/Hide Code Explorer window.
Show/Hide Library Manager window.
Show/Hide Macro Editor window.
Show/Hide Messages window.
Show/Hide Project Manager window.
Show/Hide Project Settings window.
Show/Hide Routine List in active editor.
Show/Hide Quick Converter window.
Show/Hide View Image Preview window.
View Assembly.
View Listing.
View Statistics.
Show Window List window.
The Tools toolbar can easily be customized by adding new tools in Options(F12) window.
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts, Integrated Tools
MikroElektronika
48
Project
Project Menu Options
Project Menu allows user to easily manipulate current project.
Project Description
Open New Project Wizard
Open existing project.
Open project group.
Open recently used project or project group.
Save current project.
Save active project file with the different name.
Close active project.
Close project group.
Add file to project.
Remove file from project.
Edit search paths.
Edit project settings
Clean Project Folder
Export Project.
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts, Project Toolbar, Creating New Project, Project Manager, Project Settings
MikroElektronika
49
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Build
Build Menu Options
Build Menu allows user to easily manage building and compiling process.
Build Description
Build active project.
Rebuild all sources in acrive project.
Build all projects.
Stop building of all projects.
Build and program active project.
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts, Project Toolbar, Creating New Project, Project Manager, Project Settings
MikroElektronika
50
Run
Run Menu Options
Run Menu is used to debug and test compiled code on a software or harware level.
Run Description
Start Software Simulator or mikroICD (In-Circuit Debugger).
Stop debugger.
Run/Pause Debugger.
Step Into.
Step Over.
Step Out.
Run To Cursor.
Jump to interrupt in current project.
Toggle Breakpoint.
Clear Breakpoints.
Toggle between source and disassembly.
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts, Debug Toolbar
MikroElektronika
51
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Tools
Tools Menu Options
Tools Menu contain a number of applications designed to ease the use of compiler and included library routines.
Tools Description
Run mikroElektronika Programmer.
Run Package Manager.
Show/Hide Active Comment Editor window.
Run ASCII Chart
Run EEPROM Editor
Generate HTML code suitable for publishing source code on the web.
Run Filter Designer Tool.
Run Glcd bitmap editor
Run HID Terminal
Run Lcd custom character
Run Seven Segment Editor
Run UDP communication terminal
Run USART Terminal
Open Options window
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts, Tools Toolbar
MikroElektronika
52
Help
Help Menu Options
Help Description
Оpen Help File.
Оpen Code Migration Document.
Check if new compiler version is available.
Open mikroElektronika Support Forums in a default browser.
Open mikroElektronika Web Page in a default browser.
Information on how to register
Open About window.
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts, Help Toolbar
MikroElektronika
53
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 IDE

IDE Overview
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 is an user-friendly and intuitive environment.
For a detailed information on a certain part of IDE, simply click on it (hovering a mouse cursor above a desired IDE part
will pop-up its name) :
- The Code Editor features adjustable Syntax Highlighting, Code Folding, Code Assistant, Parameters Assistant, Spell
Checker, Auto Correct for common typos and Code Templates (Auto Complete).
- The Code Explorer is at your disposal for easier project management.
- The Project Manager alows multiple project management
- General project settings can be made in the Project Settings window
- Library manager enables simple handling libraries being used in a project
- The Messages Window displays all messages during compiling and linking.
- The source-level Software Simulator lets you debug executable logic step-by-step by watching the program flow.
- The New Project Wizard is a fast, reliable, and easy way to create a project.
- Help files are syntax and context sensitive.
- Like in any modern Windows application, you may customize the layout of mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24
to suit your needs best.
- Spell checker underlines identifiers which are unknown to the project. In this way it helps the programmer to spot
potential problems early, much before the project is compiled.
Spell checker can be disabled by choosing the option in the Preferences dialog (F12).
MikroElektronika
54
Code Editor
The Code Editor is advanced text editor fashioned to satisfy needs of professionals. General code editing is the
same as working with any standard text-editor, including familiar Copy, Paste and Undo actions, common for Windows
environment.
Available Code Editor options are: Editor Settings, Editor Colors, Auto Correct, Auto Complete and Style.
Editor Settings
Main Editor Settings Features are :
- Auto Save
- Highlighter
- Spelling
- Comment Style
- Code Folding
- Code Assistant
- Parameter Assistant
- Bookmarks and Go to Line
MikroElektronika
55
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Auto Save
Auto Save is a function which saves an opened project automatically, helping to reduce the risk of data loss in case of
a crash or freeze. Autosaving is done in time intervals defined by the user.
Highlighter
Highlighting is a convenient feature for spotting brackets which notate begin or end of a routine, by making them
visually distinct.
Spelling
The Spell Checker underlines unknown objects in the code, so they can be easily noticed and corrected before compiling
your project.
Select Tools › Options from the drop-down menu, or click the Show Options Icon and then select the Spell
Checker Tab.
Comment Style
Code Editor has a feature to change the comment style to either single-line or multi-line. Commenting or uncommenting
the selected code is done by a simple click of a mouse, using the Comment Icon and Uncomment Icon from
the Advanced Edit Toolbar.
Code Folding
Code folding is IDE feature which allows users to selectively hide and display sections of a source file. In this way it is
easier to manage large regions of code within one window, while still viewing only those subsections of the code that
are relevant during a particular editing session.
While typing, the code folding symbols ( and ) appear automatically. Use the folding symbols to hide/unhide the
code subsections.
MikroElektronika
56
Another way of folding/unfolding code subsections is by using Alt+← and Alt+→.
If you place a mouse cursor over the tooltip box, the collapsed text will be shown in a tooltip style box.
Code Assistant
If you type the first few letters of a word and then press Ctrl+Space, all valid identifiers matching the letters you have
typed will be prompted in a floating panel (see the image below). Now you can keep typing to narrow the choice, or you
can select one from the list using the keyboard arrows and Enter.
Parameter Assistant
The Parameter Assistant will be automatically invoked when you open parenthesis “(” or press Shift+Ctrl+Space. If the
name of a valid function precedes the parenthesis, then the expected parameters will be displayed in a floating panel.
As you type the actual parameter, the next expected parameter will become bold.
Bookmarks
Bookmarks make navigation through a large code easier. To set a bookmark, use Ctrl+Shift+number. The same
princliple applies to the removal of the bookmarks. To jump to a bookmark, use Ctrl+number.
Go to Line
The Go to Line option makes navigation through a large code easier. Use the shortcut Ctrl+G to activate this option.
MikroElektronika
57
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Column Select Mode

This mode changes the operation of the editor for selecting text. When column select mode is used, highlighted text
is based on the character column position of the first character selected to the column of the last character of text
selected.
Text selected in this mode does not automatically include all text between the start and end position, but includes all
text in the columns between the first and last character selected.
Column mode editing is sometimes referred to as block mode editing as the act of selecting text forms a rectangle.
To enter this mode, press Alt + Left mouse button, drag the mouse towards the desired direction thus selecting the
text.
Editor Colors
MikroElektronika
58
Editor Colors option allows user to set, change and save text and color settings organized in schemes. Schemes
represent custom graphical appearance that can be applied to GUI(Graphical User Interface) to satifsy tastes of
different users.
Auto Correct
Auto Correct option facilitate user in such a fashion that it automatically corrects common typing or spelling errors as
it types.
This option is already set up to automatically correct some words. For example, if you type whiel, it will be corrected to
while when you press the spacebar :
MikroElektronika
59
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
User can easily add its common typos by entering original typo, for example btye, to the Original box, and replacement,
byte, to the Replacement box, and just click "Add" button.
Next time when the typo occurs, it will be automatically corrected.
Auto Complete (Code Templates)

Auto Complete option saves lots of keystrokes for commonly used phrases by automatically completing user's typing.
MikroElektronika
60
User can insert the Code Template by typing the name of the template (for instance, dow), then press Ctrl+J and the
Code Editor will automatically generate a code :
You can add your own templates to the list by entering the desired keyword, description and code of your template in
appropriate boxes.
Autocomplete macros can retreive system and project information :
- %DATE% - current system date

- %TIME% - current system time
- %DEVICE% - device(MCU) name as specified in project settings
- %DEVICE_CLOCK% - clock as specified in project settings
- %COMPILER% - current compiler version
These macros can be used in template code, see template ptemplate provided with mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and
PIC24 installation.
MikroElektronika
61
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Code Explorer
The Code Explorer gives clear view of each item declared inside the source code. You can jump to a declaration of
any item by double clicking it, or pressing the Enter button. Also, besides the list of defined and declared objects, code
explorer displays message about first error and it's location in code.
Following options are available in the Code Explorer:
Icon Description
Expand/Collapse all nodes in tree.
Locate declaration in code.
MikroElektronika
62
Routine List
Routine list diplays list of routines, and enables filtering routines by name. Routine list window can be accessed by
pressing Ctrl+L.
You can jump to a desired routine by double clicking on it, or pressing the Enter button. Also, you can sort routines by
size or by address.
Project Manager
Project Manager is IDE feature which allows users to manage multiple projects. Several projects which together make
project group may be open at the same time. Only one of them may be active at the moment.
Setting project in active mode is performed by double clicking the desired project in the Project Manager, which will
result in bolding the project's name.
Also, the name of the currently active project will be diplayed in the Program Manager window title, alongside with the
number of projects in project group.
MikroElektronika
63
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Following options are available in the Project Manager:
Icon Description
Save project Group.
Open project group.
Close the active project.
Close project group.
Add project to the project group.
Remove project from the project group.
Add file to the active project.
Remove selected file from the project.
Build the active project.
Run mikroElektronika’s Flash programmer.
For details about adding and removing files from project see Add/Remove Files from Project.
Related topics: Project Settings, Project Menu Options, File Menu Options, Project Toolbar, Build Toolbar, Add/Remove
Files from Project
MikroElektronika
64
Project Settings
Following options are available in the Project Settings :
- Device - select the appropriate device from the device drop-down list.
- MCU Clock - enter the clock frequency value.
- Build/Debugger Type - choose debugger type.
Related topics: Edit Project, Customizing Projects, Project Manager
MikroElektronika
65
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Library Manager
Library Manager enables simple handling libraries being used in a project. Library Manager window lists all libraries
(extension .mcl) which are instantly stored in the compiler Uses folder. The desirable library is added to the project by
selecting check box next to the library name.
In order to have all library functions accessible, simply press the button Check All and all libraries will be selected.
In case none library is needed in a project, press the button Clear All and all libraries will be cleared from the
project.
Only the selected libraries will be linked.
Icon Description
Refresh Library by scanning files in “Uses” folder.Useful when new libraries are added by copying files to
“Uses” folder.
Rebuild all available libraries. Useful when library sources are available and need refreshing.
Include all available libraries in current project.
No libraries from the list will be included in current project.
Restore library to the state just before last project saving.
MikroElektronika
66
Managing libraries using Package Manager

The Package Manager is a tool which enables users to easily install their own libraries in the mikroIDE. Libraries are
distributed in the form of a package, which is an archive composed of one or more files, containing libraries. For more
information on Package Manager, visit our website.
Upon package installation, a new node with the package name will be created in the Library Manager. For example :
From the Library Manager, user can also uninstall the desired package by right clicking the the appropriate node, and
from the drop-down menu choose Uninstall package :
MikroElektronika
67
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Related topics: mikroC PRO for PIC Libraries, Creating New Library
Statistics
After successful compilation, you can review statistics of your code. Click the Statistics Icon .
Memory Usage Windows

Provides overview of RAM and ROM usage in the various forms.
MikroElektronika
68
RAM Memory Usage

Displays RAM memory usage in a pie-like form.
Used RAM Locations

Displays used RAM memory locations and their names.
MikroElektronika
69
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SFR Locations
Displays list of used SFR locations.
ROM Memory Usage

Displays ROM memory space usage in a pie-like form.
MikroElektronika
70
ROM Memory Constants

Displays ROM memory constants and their addresses.
Functions
Sorts and displays functions in various ways.
MikroElektronika
71
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Functions Sorted By Name Chart

Sorts and displays functions by their name, in the ascending order.
Functions Sorted By Size Chart

Sorts and displays functions by their sizes in a chart-like form.
MikroElektronika
72
Functions Sorted By Addresses

Sorts and displays functions by their addresses, in the ascending order.
Function Tree
Displays Function Tree with the relevant data for each function.
MikroElektronika
73
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Memory Summary
Displays summary of RAM and ROM memory in a pie-like form.
MikroElektronika
74
Messages Window
Messages Window displays various informations and notifications about the compilation process.
It reports for example, time needed for preprocessing, compilation and linking; used RAM and ROM space, generated
baud rate with error percentage, etc.
User can filter which notifications will Messages Window display by checking Errors, Warning and Hints box.
In case that errors were encountered during compiling, the compiler will report them and won’t generate a hex file. The
Messages Window will display errros at the bottom of the window by default.
The compiler also reports warnings, but these do not affect the output; only errors can interefere with the generation
of hex.
Double click the message line in the Message Window to highlight the line where the error was encountered.
MikroElektronika
75
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Quick Converter
Quick Converter enables user to easily transform numbers from one base to another.
User can convert integers of various sizes (8, 16 or 32 bits), signed and unsigned, using different representation
(decimal, hexadecimal, binary and character).
Also, Quick Converter features float point numbers conversion from/to Float Decimal, Float 32bit (IEEE), Float 32bit
(Microchip) and Radix 1.15 for dsPIC family of MCUs.
Macro Editor
A macro is a series of keystrokes that have been 'recorded' in the order performed. A macro allows you to 'record' a
series of keystrokes and then 'playback', or repeat, the recorded keystrokes.
MikroElektronika
76
The Macro offers the following commands:
Icon Description
Starts ‘recording’ keystrokes for later playback.
Stops capturing keystrokes that was started when the Start Recording command was selected.
Allows a macro that has been recorded to be replayed.
New macro.
Delete macro.
Related topics: Code Editor, Code Templates
Image Preview
There are a lot of occassions in which the user besides the code, must look at the appropriate schematics in order to
succesfully write the desired program.
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides this possibility through a Image Preview Window.
To add a image to the Image Preview Window, right click the Image Files node in the Project Manager :
MikroElektronika
77
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Now, navigate to the desired image file, and simply add it :
Next, right click the added file, and choose Set As Preview Image :
MikroElektronika
78
Once you have added the image, it will appear in the Image Preview Window :
Also, you can add multiple images to the Image Files node, but only the one that is set will be automatically displayed
in the Image Preview Window upon opening the project.
By changing the Image Preview Window size, displayed image will be fit by its height in such a way that its proportions
will remain intact.
Toolbars
This section provides an overview of the toolbars available in mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 Help :
- File Toolbar
- Edit Toolbar
- Advanced Edit Toolbar
- Find Toolbar
- Project Toolbar
- Build Toolbar
- Debug Toolbar
- Styles Toolbar
- Tools Toolbar
- View Toolbar
- Layout Toolbar
- Help Toolbar
MikroElektronika
79
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
File Toolbar
File Toolbar is a standard toolbar with following options:
Icon Description
Opens a new editor window.
Open source file for editing or image file for viewing.
Save changes for active window.
Save changes in all opened windows.
Print Preview.
Print.
Edit Toolbar
Edit Toolbar is a standard toolbar with following options:
Icon Description
Undo last change.
Redo last change.
Cut selected text to clipboard.
Copy selected text to clipboard.
Paste text from clipboard.
MikroElektronika
80
Advanced Edit Toolbar
Advanced Edit Toolbar comes with following options:
Icon Description
Comment selected code or put single line comment if there is no selection
Uncomment selected code or remove single line comment if there is no selection.
Select text from starting delimiter to ending delimiter.
Go to ending delimiter.
Go to line.
Indent selected code lines.
Outdent selected code lines.
Generate HTML code suitable for publishing current source code on the web.
Find/Replace Toolbar
Find/Replace Toolbar is a standard toolbar with following options:
Icon Description
Find text in current editor.
Find next occurence.
Find previous occurence.
Replace text.
Find text in files.
MikroElektronika
81
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Project Toolbar
Project Toolbar comes with following options:
Icon Description
New project.
Open Project
Save Project
Edit project settings.
Close current project.
Clean project folder.
Add File To Project
Remove File From Project
Build Toolbar
Build Toolbar comes with following options:
Icon Description
Build current project.
Build all opened projects.
Build and program active project.
Start programmer and load current HEX file.
MikroElektronika
82
Debug Toolbar
Debug Toolbar comes with following options:
Icon Description
Start Software Simulator or mikroICD (In-Circuit Debugger).
Run/Pause Debugger.
Stop Debugger.
Step Into.
Step Over.
Step Out.
Run To Cursor.
Toggle Breakpoint.
View Breakpoints Window
Clear Breakpoints.
View Watch Window
View Stopwatch Window
Styles Toolbar
Styles toolbar allows you to easily change colors of your workspace.
MikroElektronika
83
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Tools Toolbar
Tools Toolbar comes with following default options:
Icon Description
Run USART Terminal
EEPROM
ASCII Chart
Seven Segment Editor.
Open Active Comment editor.
Options menu
Tip : The Tools toolbar can easily be customized by adding new tools in Options menu window.
View Toolbar
View Toolbar provides access to assembly code, listing file and statistics windows.
Icon Description
Open assembly code in editor.
Open listing file in editor.
View statistics for current project.
MikroElektronika
84
Layout Toolbar
Styles toolbar allows you to easily customize workspace through a number of different IDE layouts.
Help Toolbar
Help Toolbar provides access to information on using and registering compilers :
Icon Description
Open Help file.
How To Register.
Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts, Integrated Tools
MikroElektronika
85
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Customizing IDE Layout

Docking Windows
You can increase the viewing and editing space for code, depending on how you arrange the windows in the IDE.
Step 1: Click the window you want to dock, to give it focus.
Step 2: Drag the tool window from its current location. A guide diamond appears. The four arrows of the diamond point
towards the four edges of the IDE.
MikroElektronika
86
Step 3: Move the pointer over the corresponding portion of the guide diamond. An outline of the window appears in the
designated area.
Step 4: To dock the window in the position indicated, release the mouse button.
Tip : To move a dockable window without snapping it into place, press CTRL while dragging it.
Saving Layout
Once you have a window layout that you like, you can save the layout by typing the name for the layout and pressing
the Save Layout Icon .
To set the layout select the desired layout from the layout drop-down list and click the Set Layout Icon .
To remove the layout from the drop-down list, select the desired layout from the list and click the Delete Layout
Icon .
Auto Hide
Auto Hide enables you to see more of your code at one time by minimizing tool windows along the edges of the IDE
when not in use.
- Click the window you want to keep visible to give it focus.

- Click the Pushpin Icon on the title bar of the window.
MikroElektronika
87
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
When an auto-hidden window loses focus, it automatically slides back to its tab on the edge of the IDE. While a window
is auto-hidden, its name and icon are visible on a tab at the edge of the IDE. To display an auto-hidden window, move
your pointer over the tab. The window slides back into view and is ready for use.
Options
Options menu consists of three tabs: Code Editor, Tools and Output settings
Code editor
The Code Editor is advanced text editor fashioned to satisfy needs of professionals.
Tools
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 includes the Tools tab, which enables the use of shortcuts to external
programs, like Calculator or Notepad.
You can set up to 10 different shortcuts, by editing Tool0 - Tool9.
MikroElektronika
88
Output settings
By modifying Output Settings, user can configure the content of the output files.
You can enable or disable, for example, generation of ASM and List file.
Also, user can choose optimization level, and compiler specific settings, which include case sensitivity, dynamic link for
string literals setting (described in mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 specifics).
Build all files as library enables user to use compiled library (*.mcl) on any MCU (when this box is checked), or for a
selected MCU (when this box is left unchecked).
For more information on creating new libraries, see Creating New Library.
MikroElektronika
89
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
MikroElektronika
90
Integrated Tools
Active Comments Editor
Active Comments Editor is a tool, particularly useful when working with Lcd display. You can launch it from the drop-
down menu Tools › Active Comments Editor or by clicking the Active Comment Editor Icon from Tools toolbar.
MikroElektronika
91
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
ASCII Chart
The ASCII Chart is a handy tool, particularly useful when working with Lcd display. You can launch it from the drop-
down menu Tools › ASCII chart or by clicking the View ASCII Chart Icon from Tools toolbar.
MikroElektronika
92
EEPROM Editor
The EEPROM Editor is used for manipulating MCU's EEPROM memory. You can launch it from the drop-down menu
Tools › EEPROM Editor.
When you run mikroElektronika programmer software from mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 IDE - project_
name.hex file will be loaded automatically while ihex file must be loaded manually.
Filter Designer
The Filter designer is a tool for designing FIR and IIR filters. It has an user-friendly visual interface for setting the filter
parameters. Filter designer output is the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 compatible code. You can launch it
from the drop-down menu Tools › Filter Designer.
MikroElektronika
93
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Graphic Lcd Bitmap Editor

The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 includes the Graphic Lcd Bitmap Editor. Output is the mikroC PRO for
dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 compatible code. You can launch it from the drop-down menu Tools › Glcd Bitmap Editor.
MikroElektronika
94
HID Terminal
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 includes the HID communication terminal for USB communication. You
can launch it from the drop-down menu Tools › HID Terminal.
MikroElektronika
95
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Lcd Custom Character

mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 includes the Lcd Custom Character. Output is mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and
PIC24 compatible code. You can launch it from the drop-down menu Tools › Lcd Custom Character.
MikroElektronika
96
Seven Segment Editor

The Seven Segment Editor is a convenient visual panel which returns decimal/hex value for any viable combination you
would like to display on seven segment display. Click on the parts of seven segment image to get the requested value
in the edit boxes. You can launch it from the drop-down menu Tools › Seven Segment Editor or by clicking the Seven
Segment Editor Icon from Tools toolbar.
UDP Terminal
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 includes the UDP Terminal. You can launch it from the drop-down menu
Tools › UDP Terminal.
MikroElektronika
97
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
USART Terminal
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 includes the USART communication terminal for RS232 communication.
You can launch it from the drop-down menu Tools › USART Terminal or by clicking the USART Terminal Icon from
Tools toolbar.
MikroElektronika
98
Active Comments
The idea of Active Comments is to make comments alive and give old fashioned comments new meaning and look.
From now on, you can assign mouse event on your comments and 'tell' your comments what to do on each one. For
example, on left mouse click, open some web address in your browser, on mouse over show some picture and on
mouse double click open some file.
Let suppose we are writing a example for a GSM/GPSR module which is connected to EasyPIC6 and we would like to
provide a photo of our hardware (jumpers, cables, etc.). within the example.
Also, it would be also nice to put some documentation about chip we are using and a GSM module extra board. Now
we can have all those things defined in one single comment using Active Comment Editor.
New Active Comment

When you start Active Comment Editor for the first time (from the View menu, from editor's pop-up menu, or by pressing
Ctrl + Alt + P) you will get an empty editor :
By clicking the button you are prompted to enter a name for the comment :
MikroElektronika
99
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
You can notice that when you start typing a name, properties pane is automatically displayed so you can edit properties
if you wish. A Comment will be is created when you click button.
Properties are consisted of two major categories - Attributes and Events.
Attributes can be :
- URL - Valid web address.

- Image - Image has to be previously added to Project (Project Manager > Images).
- File - File has to be previously added to Project (Project Manager > Other Files).
There are four predefined event types you can apply to an Active Comment :
1. OnLeftClick + Alt
2. OnRightClick
3. OnDoubleClick
4. OnMouseOver
MikroElektronika
100
First three event types can have one of the following three actions :
1. OpenUrl - Opens entered URL in default Web browser.

2. OpenFile - Opens a file within a default program associated with the file extension (defined by Windows).
3. None - Does nothing.
Fourth event, OnMouseOver, has only 2 actions :
1. PreviewImage - Shows image when cursor is moved over a comment.

2. None - Does nothing.
Attributes are tightly bounded with events. For example, you can not have OnLeftClick + Alt -> OpenFile if there is no
file attribute set, or if there is no file added to project. Same behavior applies to image attribute.
Let's start editing our Active Comment by entering some valid web address in the URL field :
For every Active Comment a XML file will be created, containing all valid information regarding the Active Comment -
attributes, events, etc. and it is automatically added to Project manager after saving it :
MikroElektronika
101
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
You can see the contents of the created XML file by expanding Active Comment Editor :
As we mentioned above you can add image or file which are already included in project. If the the desired image or file
aren't added, you can do it directly from here by clicking the or button.
MikroElektronika
102
Next file dialog will be opened :
There, you should select the desired image to be added. In our example, Easy_GSM_GPRS.jpg image will be added.
Selected picture is automatically added to the drop down list of the Image field in Active Comment Editor :
MikroElektronika
103
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Now, when image has been selected, we can assign an event for it. For example, OnMouseOver will be used for
PreviewImage action, and OnLeftClick + Alt will be assigned to OpenUrl action :
Now we can save our changes to Active Comment by clicking the Save button.
Note : Setting file attributes is same as for image, so it won't be explained separately.
Once we have finished creating our active comment, we can notice that it has been added to source file on current caret
position with ac: prefix 'telling' IDE that it is active comment :
Now let's try it. If you LeftClick+Alt on it, URL in default Web browser will be opened. If you hover the mouse over it,
you will see an Image preview:
MikroElektronika
104
There is another way to add an active comment to an active project. You can do it simply by typing a comment in old
fashion way, except with ac: prefix. So it would look like this :
Notice that when you stop typing, Add Comment To Project button will show. By clicking on it, you will open Active
Comment Editor and comment name will be already set, so you need only to adjust attributes and settings.
After saving you can always edit your active comment by Active Comment Editor, and switch between comments
directly from editor.
If you remove a file from the Project Manager or add an Active Comment File which contains information about the file
which is no longer in project, and hover the mouse over the comment, you will be prompted to either add file to project
or remove event definition from Active Comment for this file :
If you remove active comment file from the Project Manager, you'll receive this message:
Click on Yes button you'll prompted for an active comment file :
MikroElektronika
105
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
If you click No, comment will be removed from the source code.
Renaming Active Comment

When you click on rename button, you will be prompted to enter new name :
MikroElektronika
106
Now click again Rename button. Now you have renamed your Active Comment in such a way that its filename, source
code name are changed :
Deleting Active Comment

Deleting active comment works similar like renaming it. By clicking on delete button, you will remove an active comment
from both code and Project Manager.
MikroElektronika
107
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Export Project
This option is very convenient and finds its use in relocating your projects from one place to another (e.g. from your
work computer to your home computer).
Often, project contains complicated search paths (files involved within your project could be in a different folders, even
on different hard disks), so it is very likely that some files will be forgotten during manual relocation.
In order to simplify this, Export Project gives you opportunity to do this task automatically.
To open Export Project, from Project menu select Export Project or hit Ctrl + Alt + E. Following window will appear :
In the empty input boxes, current location and the destination folder of the desired project should be entered.
By default, currently active project will be set for export. You can change it any time by clicking the Open Button .
Once you have entered the appropriate data, click Export Project button. After exporting is done, and if everything was
OK, you'll receive a message :
Now, Export Project has copied all project files into desired folder and changed project search paths, so you can easily
move the entire folder to another location and run the project.
MikroElektronika
108
Jump To Interrupt
Lets you choose which interrupt you want to jump to.
Requirement: Interrupt routine is included in project.
You can call Jump To Interrupt by selecting Run › Jump To Interrupt from the drop-down menu, or by clicking the Jump
To Interrupt Icon , from the Watch Values Window.
By checking the Only Used box, you can display only the used breakpoints.
MikroElektronika
109
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Regular Expressions
Introduction
Regular Expressions are a widely-used method of specifying patterns of text to search for. Special metacharacters
allow you to specify, for instance, that a particular string you are looking for, occurs at the beginning, or end of a line, or
contains n recurrences of a certain character.
Simple matches
Any single character matches itself, unless it is a metacharacter with a special meaning described below. A series of
characters matches that series of characters in the target string, so the pattern "short" would match "short" in the
target string. You can cause characters that normally function as metacharacters or escape sequences to be interpreted
by preceding them with a backslash "\".
For instance, metacharacter "^" matches beginning of string, but "\^" matches character "^", and "\\" matches
"\", etc.
Examples :
unsigned matches string 'unsigned'

\ûnsigned matches string 'ûnsigned'
Escape sequences
Characters may be specified using a escape sequences: "\n" matches a newline, "\t" a tab, etc. More generally, \
xnn, where nn is a string of hexadecimal digits, matches the character whose ASCII value is nn.
If you need wide (Unicode) character code, you can use '\x{nnnn}', where 'nnnn' - one or more hexadecimal
digits.
\xnn - char with hex code nn

\x{nnnn)- char with hex code nnnn (one byte for plain text and two bytes for Unicode)
\t - tab (HT/TAB), same as \x09
\n - newline (NL), same as \x0a
\r - car.return (CR), same as \x0d
\f - form feed (FF), same as \x0c
\a - alarm (bell) (BEL), same as \x07
\e - escape (ESC) , same as \x1b
Examples:
unsigned\x20int matches 'unsigned int' (note space in the middle)

\tunsigned matches 'unsigned' (predecessed by tab)
Character classes
You can specify a character class, by enclosing a list of characters in [], which will match any of the characters from the
list. If the first character after the “[“ is “^”, the class matches any character not in the list.
MikroElektronika
110
Examples:
count[aeiou]r finds strings 'countar', 'counter', etc. but not 'countbr', 'countcr', etc.
count[âeiou]r finds strings 'countbr', 'countcr', etc. but not 'countar', 'counter', etc.
Within a list, the "-" character is used to specify a range, so that a-z represents all characters between "a" and "z",
inclusive.
If you want "-" itself to be a member of a class, put it at the start or end of the list, or precede it with a backslash.
If you want ']', you may place it at the start of list or precede it with a backslash.
Examples:
[-az] matches 'a', 'z' and '-'

[az-] matches 'a', 'z' and '-'
[a\-z] matches 'a', 'z' and '-'
[a-z] matches all twenty six small characters from 'a' to 'z'
[\n-\x0D] matches any of #10,#11,#12,#13.
[\d-t] matches any digit, '-' or 't'.
[]-a] matches any char from ']'..'a'.
Metacharacters
Metacharacters are special characters which are the essence of regular expressions. There are different types of
metacharacters, described below.
Metacharacters - Line separators

^ - start of line
$ - end of line
\A - start of text
\Z - end of text
. - any character in line
Examples:
^PORTA - matches string ‘ PORTA ‘ only if it’s at the beginning of line

PORTA$ - matches string ‘ PORTA ‘ only if it’s at the end of line
^PORTA$ - matches string ‘ PORTA ‘ only if it’s the only string in line
PORT.r - matches strings like ‘PORTA’, ‘PORTB’, ‘PORT1’ and so on
The “^” metacharacter by default is only guaranteed to match beginning of the input string/text, and the “$”
metacharacter only at the end. Embedded line separators will not be matched by “^” or “$”.
You may, however, wish to treat a string as a multi-line buffer, such that the “^” will match after any line separator within
the string, and “$” will match before any line separator.
Regular expressions works with line separators as recommended at
http://www.unicode.org/unicode/reports/tr18/
MikroElektronika
111
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Metacharacters - Predefined classes

\w - an alphanumeric character (including "_")
\W - a nonalphanumeric character
\d - a numeric character
\D - a non-numeric character
\s - any space (same as [\t\n\r\f])
\S - a non space
You may use \w, \d and \s within custom character classes.
Example:
routi\de - matches strings like 'routi1e', 'routi6e' and so on, but not 'routine', 'routime' and
so on.
Metacharacters - Word boundaries

A word boundary ("\b") is a spot between two characters that has an alphanumeric character ("\w") on one side,
and a nonalphanumeric character ("\W") on the other side (in either order), counting the imaginary characters off the
beginning and end of the string as matching a "\W".
\b - match a word boundary)

\B - match a non-(word boundary)
Metacharacters - Iterators
Any item of a regular expression may be followed by another type of metacharacters - iterators. Using this
metacharacters,you can specify number of occurences of previous character, metacharacter or subexpression.
* - zero or more (“greedy”), similar to {0,}

+ - one or more (“greedy”), similar to {1,}
? - zero or one (“greedy”), similar to {0,1}
{n} - exactly n times (“greedy”)
{n,} - at least n times (“greedy”)
{n,m} - at least n but not more than m times (“greedy”)
*? - zero or more (“non-greedy”), similar to {0,}?
+? - one or more (“non-greedy”), similar to {1,}?
?? - zero or one (“non-greedy”), similar to {0,1}?
{n}? - exactly n times (“non-greedy”)
{n,}? - at least n times (“non-greedy”)
{n,m}? - at least n but not more than m times (“non-greedy”)
So, digits in curly brackets of the form, {n,m}, specify the minimum number of times to match the item n and the
maximum m. The form {n} is equivalent to {n,n} and matches exactly n times. The form {n,} matches n or more
times. There is no limit to the size of n or m, but large numbers will chew up more memory and slow down execution.
If a curly bracket occurs in any other context, it is treated as a regular character.
MikroElektronika
112
Examples:
count.*r ß- matches strings like 'counter', 'countelkjdflkj9r' and 'countr'

count.+r - matches strings like 'counter', 'countelkjdflkj9r' but not 'countr'
count.?r - matches strings like 'counter', 'countar' and 'countr' but not 'countelkj9r'
counte{2}r - matches string 'counteer'
counte{2,}r - matches strings like 'counteer', 'counteeer', 'counteeer' etc.
counte{2,3}r - matches strings like 'counteer', or 'counteeer' but not 'counteeeer'
A little explanation about "greediness". "Greedy" takes as many as possible, "non-greedy" takes as few as possible.
For example, 'b+' and 'b*' applied to string 'abbbbc' return 'bbbb', 'b+?' returns 'b', 'b*?' returns empty
string, 'b{2,3}?' returns 'bb', 'b{2,3}' returns 'bbb'.
Metacharacters - Alternatives
You can specify a series of alternatives for a pattern using "|" to separate them, so that bit|bat|bot will match
any of "bit", "bat", or "bot" in the target string as would "b(i|a|o)t)". The first alternative includes everything
from the last pattern delimiter ("(", "[", or the beginning of the pattern) up to the first "|", and the last alternative
contains everything from the last "|" to the next pattern delimiter. For this reason, it's common practice to include
alternatives in parentheses, to minimize confusion about where they start and end.
Alternatives are tried from left to right, so the first alternative found for which the entire expression matches, is the
one that is chosen. This means that alternatives are not necessarily greedy. For example: when matching rou|rout
against "routine", only the "rou" part will match, as that is the first alternative tried, and it successfully matches the
target string (this might not seem important, but it is important when you are capturing matched text using parentheses.)
Also remember that "|" is interpreted as a literal within square brackets, so if you write [bit|bat|bot], you're really
only matching [biao|].
Examples:
rou(tine|te) - matches strings 'routine' or 'route'.
Metacharacters - Subexpressions
The bracketing construct ( ... ) may also be used for define regular subexpressions. Subexpressions are numbered
based on the left to right order of their opening parenthesis. First subexpression has number ‘1’
Examples:
(int){8,10} matches strings which contain 8, 9 or 10 instances of the ‘int’

routi([0-9]|a+)e matches ‘routi0e’, ‘routi1e’ , ‘routine’, ‘routinne’, ‘routinnne’ etc.
Metacharacters - Backreferences
Metacharacters \1 through \9 are interpreted as backreferences. \ matches previously matched subexpression #.
Examples:
(.)\1+ matches ‘aaaa’ and ‘cc’.

(.+)\1+ matches ‘abab’ and ‘123123’
([‘”]?)(\d+)\1 matches “13” (in double quotes), or ‘4’ (in single quotes) or 77 (without quotes) etc
MikroElektronika
113
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Keyboard Shortcuts
Below is a complete list of keyboard shortcuts available in mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 IDE.
IDE Shortcuts Advanced Editor Shortcuts

F1 Help Ctrl+Space Code Assistant
Ctrl+N New Unit Ctrl+Shift+Space Parameters Assistant
Ctrl+O Open Ctrl+D Find Declaration
Ctrl+Shift+O Open Project Ctrl+E Incremental Search
Ctrl+Shift+N New Project Ctrl+L Routine List
Ctrl+K Close Project Ctrl+G Goto Line
Ctrl+F4 Close unit Ctrl+J Insert Code Template
Ctrl+Shift+E Edit Project Ctrl+Shift+. Comment Code
Ctrl+F9 Build Ctrl+Shift+, Uncomment Code
Shift+F9 Build All Ctrl+number Goto Bookmark
Ctrl+F11 Build And Program Ctrl+Shift+number Set Bookmark
Shift+F4 View Breakpoints Ctrl+Shift+I Indent Selection
Ctrl+Shift+F5 Clear Breakpoints Ctrl+Shift+U Unindent Selection
F11 Start mE Programmer TAB Indent Selection
Ctrl+Shift+F11 Project Manager Shift+TAB Unindent Selection
F12 Options Alt+Select Select Columns
Alt + X Close mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 Ctrl+Alt+Select Select Columns
and PIC24 Alt + Left Arrow Fold Region (if available)
Basic Editor Shortcuts Alt + Right Arrow Unfold Region (if available)
F3 Find, Find Next Ctrl+Alt+L Convert Selection to Lowercase
Shift+F3 Find Previous Ctrl+Alt+U Convert Selection to Uppercase
Alt+F3 Grep Search, Find In Files Ctrl+Alt+T Convert to Titlecase
Ctrl+A Select All Ctrl+T USART Terminal
Ctrl+C Copy Ctrl+Q Quick Converter
Ctrl+F Find mikroICD Debugger and Software Simulator
Ctrl+R Replace Shortcuts
Ctrl+P Print F2 Jump To Interrupt
Ctrl+S Save Unit F4 Run to Cursor
Ctrl+Shift+S Save All F5 Toggle Breakpoint
Ctrl+V Paste F6 Run/Pause Debugger
Ctrl+X Cut F7 Step Into
Ctrl+Y Delete Entire Line F8 Step Over
Ctrl+Z Undo F9 Start Debugger
Ctrl+Shift+Z Redo Ctrl+F2 Stop Debugger
MikroElektronika
114
Ctrl+F5 Add to Watch List

Ctrl+F8 Step Out
Alt+D Disassembly View
Shift+F5 Open Watch Window
Ctrl+Shift+A Show Advanced Breakpoints
MikroElektronika
115
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
CHAPTER 3
PIC24 Command Line Options
Usage: mikroCdsPIC.exe [-<opts> [-<opts>]] [<infile> [-<opts>]] [-<opts>]]
Infile can be of *.c, *.mcl and *.pld type.
The following parameters are valid :
-P <devicename> : MCU for which compilation will be done.

-FO <oscillator> : Set oscillator [in MHz].
-SP <directory> : Add directory to the search path list.
-IP <directory> : Add directory to the #include search path list.
-N <filename> : Output files generated to file path specified by filename.
-B <directory> : Save compiled binary files (*.mcl) to 'directory'.
-O : Miscellaneous output options.
-DBG : Generate debug info.
-L : Check and rebuild new libraries.
-DL : Build all files as libraries.
-Y : Dynamic link for string literals.
-UICD : ICD build type.
-EH <filename> : Full EEPROM HEX file name with path.
-LHF : Generate Long hex format.
-GC : Generate COFF file.
Example:
mikroCdsPIC.exe -MSF -DBG -p30F4013 -Y -DL -O11111114 -fo80 -N”C:\Lcd\Lcd.mcpds” -SP”C:\

Program Files\Mikroelektronika\mikroC PRO for dsPIC\Defs”
-SP”C:\Program Files\Mikroelektronika\mikroC PRO for dsPIC\Uses” -SP”C:\
Lcd\” “Lcd.c” “__Lib_Math.mcl” “__Lib_MathDouble.mcl”
“__Lib_System.mcl” “__Lib_Delays.mcl” “__Lib_LcdConsts.mcl” “__Lib_Lcd.
mcl”
MikroElektronika
116
Parameters used in the example:
-MSF : Short Message Format; used for internal purposes by IDE.

-DBG : Generate debug info.
-p30F4013 : MCU 30F4013 selected.
-Y : Dynamic link for string literals enabled.
-DL : All files built as libraries.
-O11111114 : Miscellaneous output options.
-fo80 : Set oscillator frequency [in MHz].
-N"C:\Lcd\Lcd.mcpds" -SP"C:\Program Files\Mikroelektronika\mikroC PRO for dsPIC\
Defs\" : Output files generated to file path specified by filename.
-SP"C:\Program Files\Mikroelektronika\mikroC PRO for dsPIC\Defs\" : Add directory to
the search path list.
-SP"C:\Program Files\Mikroelektronika\mikroC PRO for dsPIC\Uses\" : Add directory to
the search path list.
-SP"C:\Lcd\" : Add directory to the search path list.
"Lcd.c" "__Lib_Math.mcl" "__Lib_MathDouble.mcl" "__Lib_System.mcl" "__Lib_Delays.
mcl" "__Lib_LcdConsts.mcl" "__Lib_Lcd.mcl" : Specify input files.
MikroElektronika
117
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
CHAPTER 4
mikroICD (In-Circuit Debugger)
Introduction
The mikroICD is a highly effective tool for a Real-Time debugging on hardware level. The mikroICD debugger enables
you to execute the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 program on a host dsPIC30/33 or PIC24 microcontroller and
view variable values, Special Function Registers (SFR), RAM, CODE and EEPROM memory along with the mikroICD
code execution on hardware.
MikroElektronika
118
If you have appropriate hardware and software for using the mikroICD select mikroICD Debug Build Type before
compiling the project.
Now, compile the project by pressing Ctrl + F9, or by pressing Build Icon on Build Toolbar.
Run the mikroICD by selecting Run › Start Debugger from the drop-down menu or by clicking the Start Debugger
Icon . Starting the Debugger makes more options available: Step Into, Step Over, Run to Cursor, etc. Line that is
to be executed is color highlighted (blue by default). There is also notification about the program execution and it can
be found in the Watch Window (yellow status bar). Note that some functions take more time to execute; execution is
indicated with "Running..." message in the Watch Window Status Bar.
Related topics: mikroICD Debugger Example, mikroICD Debug Windows, mikroICD Debugger Options
MikroElektronika
119
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
mikroICD Debugger Options

Debugger Options
Function Toolbar
Name Description
Key Icon
Start Debugger Starts Debugger. F9
Stop Debugger Stop Debugger. Ctrl + F2
Run/Pause Debugger Run/Pause Debugger. F6
Executes the current program line, then halts. If the executed

Step Into program line calls another routine, the debugger steps into the F7
routine and halts after executing the first instruction within it.
program line calls another routine, the debugger will not step into
Step Over F8
it. The whole routine will be executed and the debugger halts at
the first instruction following the call.
Executes all remaining program lines within the subroutine. The
Step Out Ctrl + F8
debugger halts immediately upon exiting the subroutine.
Run To Cursor Executes the program until reaching the cursor position. F4
Toggle breakpoints option sets new breakpoints or removes those

Toggle Breakpoint F5
already set at the current cursor position.
Related topics: Run Menu, Debug Toolbar
MikroElektronika
120
mikroICD Debugger Example

Here is a step-by-step mikroICD Debugger Example.
First you have to write a program. We will show how the mikroICD works using this example :
// Lcd module connections

sbit LCD_RS at LATD0_bit;
sbit LCD_EN at LATD1_bit;
sbit LCD_D4 at LATB0_bit;
sbit LCD_RS_Direction at TRISD0_bit;

sbit LCD_EN_Direction at TRISD1_bit;
sbit LCD_D4_Direction at TRISB0_bit;
// End Lcd module connections
char text[] = "mikroElektronika";

char i;
void Move_Delay() {
Delay_ms(500);
}
void main() {
ADPCFG = 0xFFFF;
Lcd_Init();
Lcd_Cmd(_LCD_CLEAR);
Lcd_Cmd(_LCD_CURSOR_OFF);
for(i = 1; i < 17; i++) {

Lcd_Chr(1, i, text[i-1]);
}
}
MikroElektronika
121
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
After successful compilation and MCU programming press F9 to start the mikroICD. After the mikroICD initialization a
blue active line should appear.
We will debug the program line by line. To execute code line by line press [F8]. However, it is not recommended to use
Step Over [F8] over Delay routines and routines containing delays. In this case use Run to cursor [F4] function or Run
[F6] function combined with Breakpoints.
MikroElektronika
122
Step Into [F7], Step Over [F8] and Step Out [Ctrl+F8] are mikroICD debugger functions that are used in stepping mode.
There is also a Real-Time mode supported by the mikroICD. Functions that are used in the Real-Time mode are Run/
Pause Debugger [F6] and Run to cursor [F4]. Pressing F4 executes the code until the program reaches the cursor
position line.
Run(Pause) Debugger [F6] and Toggle Breakpoints [F5] are mikroICD debugger functions that are used in the Real-
Time mode. Pressing F5 marks the line selected by the user for breakpoint. F6 executes code until the breakpoint
is reached. After reaching that breakpoint Debugger halts. Here in our example we will use breakpoints for writing a
word "mikroElektronika" on LCD char by char. Breakpoint is set on LCD_Chr and the program will stop every time this
function is reached. After reaching breakpoint we must press F6 again to continue the program execution.
MikroElektronika
123
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Breakpoints are divided into two groups: hardware and software breakpoints. The hardware breakpoints are placed
in the MCU and provide fastest debugging. Number of hardware breakpoints is limited (4 for PIC24 and dsPIC33
family, for dsPIC30 family this number depends on the MCU used). If all hardware brekpoints are used, then the next
breakpoint will be software breakpoint. These breakpoints are placed inside the mikroICD and simulate hardware
breakpoints. Software breakpoints are much slower than hardware breakpoints. These differences between hardware
and software breakpoints are not visible in the mikroICD software but their different timings are quite notable. That's
why it is important to know that there are two types of breakpoints.
The picture below demonstrates step-by-step execution of the code used in above mentioned examples.
Common Errors :
- Trying to program the MCU while the mikroICD is active.

- Trying to debug Release build version of the program with the mikroICD debugger.
- Trying to debug program code which has been changed, but has not been compiled and programmed into the MCU.
- Trying to select line that is empty for Run to cursor [F4] and Toggle Breakpoints [F5] functions.
- Trying to debug MCU with mikroICD while Watch Dog Timer is enabled.
- Trying to debug MCU with mikroICD while Power Up Timer is enabled.
- Trying to Step Into [F7] the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 Library routines. Use Step Over [F8] command
for these routines.
- It is not possible to force Code Protect while trying to debug MCU with mikroICD.
- Trying to debug MCU with mikroICD with pull-up resistors set to ON on RB6 and RB7.
Related topics: mikroICD Debugger, mikroICD Debug Windows, mikroICD Debugger Options
MikroElektronika
124
mikroICD Debugger Windows

Debug Windows
This section provides an overview of available Debug Windows in mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 :
- Breakpoints Window
- Watch Values Window
- RAM Window
- Stopwatch Window
- EEPROM Watch Window
- Code Watch Window
Breakpoints Window
The Breakpoints window manages the list of currently set breakpoints in the project. Doubleclicking the desired
breakpoint will cause cursor to navigate to the corresponding location in source code.
In situations when multiple breakpoints are used within the code, it is sometimes handy to enable/disable certain
breakpoints. To do this, just check/uncheck the desired breakpoint using the checkbox in front of the breakpoint’s
name.
Watch Values Window

Watch Values Window is the main Debugger window which allows you to monitor program execution. To show the
Watch Values Window, select Debug Windows › Watch from the View drop-down menu.
The Watch Values Window displays variables and registers of the MCU, with their addresses and values. Values are
updated along with the code execution. Recently changed items are coloured red.
There are two ways to add variable/register into the watch list :
- by its real name (variable’s name in program code). Just select wanted variable/register from Select
variable from list drop-down menu and click the button.
- by its name ID (assembly variable name). Simply type name ID of the variable/register you want to
display into Search for variable by assemby name box and click the button.
MikroElektronika
125
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Also, it is possible to add all variables in the Watch Values Window by clicking button.
To remove a variable from the Watch Values Window, just select the variable that you want to remove and then click
the button, or press the Delete key.
It is possible to remove all variables from the Watch Values Window by clicking button.
You can also expand/collapse complex variables i.e. struct type variables, strings, etc, by clicking the appropriate
button ( or ) beside variable name.
Double clicking a variable or clicking the button opens the Edit Value window in which you can assign a
new value to the selected variable/register. Also, you can choose the format of variable/register representation between
decimal, hexadecimal, binary, float or character. All representations except float are unsigned by default. For signed
representation click the check box next to the Signed label.
An item's value can also be changed by double clicking item's value field and typing the new value directly.
MikroElektronika
126
RAM Window
The RAM Window is available from the drop-down menu, View › Debug Windows › RAM.
The RAM Window displays the map of MCU’s RAM, with recently changed items colored red. The user can edit and
change the values in the RAM window.
mikroICD Specific : RAM window content will be written to the MCU before the next instruction execution.
Stopwatch Window
The Software Simulator Stopwatch Window is available from the drop-down menu, View › Debug Windows ›
Stopwatch.
The Stopwatch Window displays a Current Count of cycles/time since the last Software Simulator action.
Stopwatch measures the execution time (number of cycles) from the moment Software Simulator has started and can
be reset at any time.
Delta represents the number of cycles between the lines where Software Simulator action has started and ended.
MikroElektronika
127
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Notes :
- The user can change the clock in the Stopwatch Window, which will recalculate values for the latest
specified frequency.
- Changing the clock in the Stopwatch Window does not affect actual project settings – it only provides a simulation.
- Stopwatch is available only when Software Simulator is selected as a debugger.
EEPROM Watch Window

Note : EEPROM Watch Window is available only when mikroICD is selected as a debugger.
To show the EEPROM Watch Window, select Debug Windows › EEPROM from the View drop-down menu.
The EEPROM Watch Window shows current content of the MCU's internal EEPROM memory.
There are two action buttons concerning the EEPROM Watch Window :
- Reads data from MCU's internal EEPROM memory and loads it up into the EEPROM window.
- Writes data from the EEPROM window into MCU's internal EEPROM memory.
MikroElektronika
128
Code Watch Window

Note : Code Watch Window is available only when mikroICD is selected as a debugger.
To show the Code Watch Window, select Debug Windows › Code from the View drop-down menu.
The Code Watch Window shows code (hex format) written into the MCU.
There is one action button concerning the Code Watch Window :
- Reads code from the MCU and loads it up into the Code Window. Code reading is resources
consuming operation so the user should wait until the reading is over.
Also, you can set an address scope in which hex code will be read.
MikroElektronika
129
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
CHAPTER 5
Software Simulator Overview
MikroElektronika
130
Software Simulator
The Source-level Software Simulator is an integral component of the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24
environment. It is designed to simulate operations of the Microchip dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 MCUs and assist the users
in debugging code written for these devices.
Upon completion of writing your program, choose Release build Type in the Project Settings window:
After you have successfuly compiled your project, you can run the Software Simulator by selecting Run › Start
Debugger from the drop-down menu, or by clicking the Start Debugger Icon from the Debugger Toolbar.
Starting the Software Simulator makes more options available: Step Into, Step Over, Step Out, Run to Cursor, etc. Line
that is to be executed is color highlighted (blue by default).
Note : The Software Simulator simulates the program flow and execution of instruction lines, but it cannot fully emulate
dsPIC device behavior, i.e. it doesn’t update timers, interrupt flags, etc.
Related topics: Software Simulator Debug Windows, Software Simulator Debugger Options
MikroElektronika
131
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Software Simulator Debug Windows

Debug Windows
This section provides an overview of available Debug Windows in mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 :
- Breakpoints Window
- Watch Values Window
- RAM Window
- Stopwatch Window
- EEPROM Watch Window
- Code Watch Window
Breakpoints Window
The Breakpoints window manages the list of currently set breakpoints in the project. Doubleclicking the desired
breakpoint will cause cursor to navigate to the corresponding location in source code.
In situations when multiple breakpoints are used within the code, it is sometimes handy to enable/disable certain
breakpoints. To do this, just check/uncheck the desired breakpoint using the checkbox in front of the breakpoint's
name.
Watch Values Window

Watch Values Window is the main Debugger window which allows you to monitor program execution. To show the
Watch Values Window, select Debug Windows › Watch from the View drop-down menu.
The Watch Values Window displays variables and registers of the MCU, with their addresses and values. Values are
updated along with the code execution. Recently changed items are coloured red.
There are two ways to add variable/register into the watch list :
- by its real name (variable's name in program code). Just select wanted variable/register from Select
variable from list drop-down menu and click the button.
- by its name ID (assembly variable name). Simply type name ID of the variable/register you want to
display into Search for variable by assemby name box and click the button.
MikroElektronika
132
Also, it is possible to add all variables in the Watch Values Window by clicking button.
To remove a variable from the Watch Values Window, just select the variable that you want to remove and then click
the button, or press the Delete key.
It is possible to remove all variables from the Watch Values Window by clicking button.
You can also expand/collapse complex variables i.e. struct type variables, strings, etc, by clicking the appropriate
button ( or ) beside variable name.
Double clicking a variable or clicking the button opens the Edit Value window in which you can assign a
new value to the selected variable/register. Also, you can choose the format of variable/register representation between
decimal, hexadecimal, binary, float or character. All representations except float are unsigned by default. For signed
representation click the check box next to the Signed label.
An item's value can also be changed by double clicking item's value field and typing the new value directly.
MikroElektronika
133
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
RAM Window
The RAM Window is available from the drop-down menu, View › Debug Windows › RAM.
The RAM Window displays the map of MCU’s RAM, with recently changed items colored red. The user can edit and
change the values in the RAM window.
mikroICD Specific : RAM window content will be written to the MCU before the next instruction execution.
Stopwatch Window
The Software Simulator Stopwatch Window is available from the drop-down menu, View › Debug Windows ›
Stopwatch.
The Stopwatch Window displays a Current Count of cycles/time since the last Software Simulator action.
Stopwatch measures the execution time (number of cycles) from the moment Software Simulator has started and can
be reset at any time.
Delta represents the number of cycles between the lines where Software Simulator action has started and ended.
MikroElektronika
134
Notes :
The user can change the clock in the Stopwatch Window, which will recalculate values for the latest specified
frequency.
Changing the clock in the Stopwatch Window does not affect actual project settings – it only provides a simulation.
Stopwatch is available only when Software Simulator is selected as a debugger.
EEPROM Watch Window

Note : EEPROM Watch Window is available only when mikroICD is selected as a debugger.
To show the EEPROM Watch Window, select Debug Windows › EEPROM from the View drop-down menu.
The EEPROM Watch Window shows current content of the MCU's internal EEPROM memory.
There are two action buttons concerning the EEPROM Watch Window :
- Reads data from MCU's internal EEPROM memory and loads it up into the EEPROM window.
- Writes data from the EEPROM window into MCU's internal EEPROM memory.
MikroElektronika
135
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Code Watch Window

Note : Code Watch Window is available only when mikroICD is selected as a debugger.
To show the Code Watch Window, select Debug Windows › Code from the View drop-down menu.
The Code Watch Window shows code (hex format) written into the MCU.
There is one action button concerning the Code Watch Window :
- Reads code from the MCU and loads it up into the Code Window. Code reading is resources
consuming operation so the user should wait until the reading is over.
Also, you can set an address scope in which hex code will be read.
MikroElektronika
136
Software Simulator Debugger Options

Debugger Options
Function Toolbar
Name Description
Key Icon
Start Debugger Starts Debugger. F9
Stop Debugger Stop Debugger. Ctrl + F2
Run/Pause Debugger Run/Pause Debugger. F6

Step Into program line calls another routine, the debugger steps into the F7
routine and halts after executing the first instruction within it.
program line calls another routine, the debugger will not step into
Step Over F8
it. The whole routine will be executed and the debugger halts at
the first instruction following the call.
Executes all remaining program lines within the subroutine. The
Step Out Ctrl + F8
debugger halts immediately upon exiting the subroutine.
Run To Cursor Executes the program until reaching the cursor position. F4
Toggle breakpoints option sets new breakpoints or removes those

Toggle Breakpoint F5
already set at the current cursor position.
Related topics: Run Menu, Debug Toolbar
MikroElektronika
137
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
CHAPTER 6
PIC24 Specifics
The following topics cover the specifics of mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 compiler:
- ANSI Standard Issues

- Predefined Globals and Constants
- Accessing Individual Bits
- Interrupts
- Linker Directives
- Built-in Routines
- Code Optimization
MikroElektronika
138
GOTO Table
If a certain routine is allocated on the address higher than 64kB and can not be accessed directly, a GOTO table is
created just after the Interrupt Vector Table to enable this routine call.
GOTO table comprises of addresses of those routines that are allocated on the addresses higher than 64kB.
So, whenever a call is made to a routine which is not directly accessible, it jumps to an assigned GOTO table block
which contains address of a desired routine. From there, a GOTO call is generated to that address, and the routine is
executed.
MikroElektronika
139
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
ANSI Standard Issues

Divergence from the ANSI C Standard
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 diverges from the ANSI C standard in a few areas. Some of these
modifications are improvements intended to facilitate dsPIC programming, while others are the result of dsPIC30/33
and PIC24 hardware limitations.
- Case Sensitivity. Check identifiers

- The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 treats identifiers declared with the const qualifier as “true
constants” (C++ style). This allows using const objects in places where ANSI C expects a constant
expression. If aiming at portability, use the traditional preprocessor defined constants. See Type Qualifiers
and Constants.
- The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 allows C++ style single–line comments using two adjacent
slashes (//). The comment can start at any position and extends until the next new line. See Comments.
- A number of standard C libraries (ctype, math, stdlib, string) have been implemented; check the individual
functions for divergence.
- The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 does not provide automatic initialization for objects.
Uninitialized globals and objects with static duration will take random values from memory.
- Anonymous unions and structures are now supported.
C Language Extensions
mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 has additional set of keywords that do not belong to the ANSI standard C
language keywords:
- code
- data
- rx
- sfr
- xdata
- ydata
- dma
- near
- far
- at
- sbit
- bit
- iv
Implementation-defined Behavior
Certain sections of the ANSI standard have implementation-defined behavior. This means that the exact behavior of
some C code can vary from compiler to compiler. This Help contains the sections describing how the mikroC PRO for
dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 compiler behaves in such situations.
The most notable specifics include:
- Storage Classes
- Bit Fields
Related topics: Keywords, dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 Specifics
MikroElektronika
140
Predefined Globals and Constants

To facilitate dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 programming, the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 implements a number
of predefined globals and constants.
All dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 SFR registers are implicitly declared as global variables of volatile unsigned int. These
identifiers have an external linkage, and are visible in the entire project. When creating a project, the mikroC PRO for
dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 will include an appropriate (*.c) file from defs folder, containing declarations of available SFR
registers and constants (such as PORTB, ADPCFG, etc). All identifiers are in upper case, identical to nomenclature
in the Microchip datasheets. All dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 SFR registers are also available as structures with bitfields
named identically to the Microchip datasheets in order to facilitate bit access e.g
TRISBbits.TRISB3 = 1.
For a complete set of predefined globals and constants, look for “Defs” in the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24
installation folder, or probe the Code Assistant for specific letters (Ctrl+Space in the Code Editor).
Predefined project level defines

mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides several predefined project level defines that you can use in your
project :
- First one is equal to the name of selected device for the project i.e. if P30f4013 is selected device, then P30f4013
token will be defined as 1, so it can be used for conditional compilation :
#ifdef P30F4013
...
#endif
- The second one is value of frequency (in kHz) for which the project is built :
#ifdef __FOSC__ == 80000
...
#endif
- Third one is for identifying mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 compiler :
#ifdef __MIKROC_PRO_FOR_DSPIC__
...
#endif
- Fourth one is for identifying the build version. For instance, if a desired build version is 142, user should put this in
his code :
#if __MIKROC_PRO_FOR_DSPIC_BUILD__ == 142
...
#endif
Related topics: Project Level Defines
MikroElektronika
141
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Accessing Individual Bits

The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 allows you to access individual bits of 16-bit variables. It also supports
sbit and bit data types.
Lets use the Zero bit as an example. This bit is defined in the definition file of the particular MCU as :
const register unsigned short int Z = 1;

sbit Z_bit at SR.B1;
To access this bit in your code by its name, you can write something like this:
// Clear Zero bit

SR.Z = 0;
In this way, if Zero bit changes its position in the register, you are sure that the appropriate bit will be affected.
But, if Zero bit is not located in the designated register, you may get errors.
Another way of accesing bits is by using the direct member selector (.) with a variable, followed by one of identifiers B0,
B1, … , B15, or F0, F1, … F15, with F15 being the most significant bit, to access the desired bit :
// predefined globals as bit designators

// Clear Zero bit
SR.B1 = 0;
// Set Zero bit

SR.F1 = 1;
In this way, if the target bit changes its position in the register, you cannot be sure that you are invoking the appropriate
bit.
This kind of selective access is an intrinsic feature of mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 and can be used anywhere
in the code. Identifiers B0–B15 are not case sensitive and have a specific namespace.
You may override them with your own members B0–B15 within any given structure.
When using literal constants as bit designators instead of predefined ones, make sure not to exceed the appropriate
type size.
Also, you can access the desired bit by using its alias name, in this case Z_bit :
// Set Zero Bit

C_bit = 1;
In this way, if the Zero bit changes its register or position in the register, you are sure that the appropriate bit will be
affected.
For backward compatibility, you can access bits in this way also :
// Clear TRISB3
TRISBbits.TRISB3 = 0;
MikroElektronika
142
Note : If aiming at portability, avoid this style of accessing individual bits, use the bit fields instead.
See Predefined Globals and Constants for more information on register/bit names.
sbit type
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 compiler has sbit data type which provides access to registers, SFRs,
variables, etc.
You can declare a sbit variable in a unit in such way that it points to a specific bit in SFR register:
extern sfr sbit Abit; // Abit is precisely defined in some external file, for example in
the main program unit
In the main program you have to specify to which register this sbit points to, for example:
sbit Abit at PORTB.B0; // this is where Abit is fully defined

...
void main() {
...
}
In this way the variable Abit will actually point to PORTB.0. Please note that we used the keyword sfr for declaration
of Abit, because we are pointing it to PORTB which is defined as a sfr variable.
Note : Declaring a sbit variable is not possible via F0, F1, … F15 identifiers.
In case we want to declare a bit over a variable which is not defined as sfr, then the keyword sfr is not necessary,
for example:
extern sbit AnotherBit; // AnotherBit is precisely defined in some external file, for
example in the main program unit
char MyVar;
sbit AnotherBit at MyVar.B0; // this is where AnotherBit is fully defined
...
void main() {
...
}
MikroElektronika
143
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
at keyword
You can use the keyword "at" to make an alias to a variable, for example, you can write a library without using register
names, and later in the main program to define those registers, for example :
extern char PORTAlias; // here in the library we can use its symbolic name
char PORTAlias at PORTB; // this is where PORTAlias is fully defined

...
void main() {
...
}
Note : Bear in mind that when using at operator in your code over a variable defined through a extern modifier,
appropriate memory specifer must be appended also.
bit type
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 compiler provides a bit data type that may be used for variable
declarations. It can not be used for argument lists, and function-return values.
bit bf; // bit variable
There are no pointers to bit variables:
bit *ptr; // invalid
An array of type bit is not valid:
bit arr [5]; // invalid
Note :
- Bit variables can not be initialized.

- Bit variables can not be members of structures and unions.
- Bit variables do not have addresses, therefore unary operator & (address of) is not applicable to these variables.
Related topics: Bit fields, Predefined globals and constants, Extern modifier
MikroElektronika
144
Interrupts
The dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 interrupt controller module reduces numerous peripheral interrupt request signals to a
single interrupt request signal to the dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 CPU and has the following features:
- Up to 8 processor exceptions and software traps

- 7 user-selectable priority levels
- Interrupt Vector Table (IVT) with up to 62 vectors (dsPIC30) or up to 118 vectors (dsPIC33 and PIC24)
- A unique vector for each interrupt or exception source
- Fixed priority within a specified user priority level
- Alternate Interrupt Vector Table (AIVT) for debug support
ISRs are organized in IVT. ISR is defined as a standard function but with the iv directive afterwards which connects the
function with specific interrupt vector. For example iv IVT_ADDR_T1INTERRUPT is IVT address of Timer1 interrupt
source of the dsPIC 30F3014 MCU. For more information on IVT refer to the dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 Family Reference
Manual.
Function Calls from Interrupt

Calling functions from within the interrupt routine is possible. The compiler takes care about the registers being used,
both in "interrupt" and in "main" thread, and performs "smart" context-switching between two of them, saving only the
registers that have been used in both threads. It is not recommended to use a function call from interrupt. In case of
doing that take care of stack depth.
Disable Context Saving

Use the #pragma disablecontexsaving to instruct the compiler not to automatically perform context-switching.
This means that no register will be saved/restored by the compiler on entrance/exit from interrupt service routine,
except STATUS, WREG and BSR registers in high priority interrupt ('Fast Register Stack').
This exception can be overrided by placing an asm RETFIE, 0 instruction at the end of the high priority interrupt routine
(with redirecting all routine exits to this instruction).
Thus, #pragma disablecontexsaving pragma enables the user to manually write code for saving registers upon
entrance and to restore them before exit from interrupt.
Interrupt Handling
For the sake of interrupt handling convenience, new keyword, iv, is introduced. It is used to declare Interrupt Vector
Table (IVT) address for a defined interrupt routine :
void int1() iv IVT_ADDR_U1RXINTERRUPT{

asm nop;
}
Now it is possible to explicitly declare interrupt routine address :
void int1() org 0x600 iv IVT_ADDR_U1RXINTERRUPT {

asm nop;
}
MikroElektronika
145
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
For the sake of backward compatibility, user may write also :
void int1() org IVT_ADDR_U1RXINTERRUPT {

asm nop;
}
which is equivalent to :
void int1() iv IVT_ADDR_U1RXINTERRUPT {

asm nop;
}
Is is recommended that interrupts are handled in this way for the sake of better readability of the user projects.
Interrupt Example
Here is a simple example of handling the interrupts from Timer1 (if no other interrupts are allowed):
// Interrupt routine
void Timer1Int() iv IVT_ADDR_T1INTERRUPT {
//** it is necessary to clear manually the interrupt flag:
IFS0 = IFS0 & 0xFFF7; // Clear TMR1IF
//** user code starts here

LATB = ~ PORTB; // Invert PORTB
//** user code ends here
}
MikroElektronika
146
Linker Directives
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 uses an internal algorithm to distribute objects within memory. If you need
to have a variable or routine at specific predefined address, use the linker directives absolute and org.
Directive absolute
Directive absolute specifies the starting address in RAM for a variable or a starting address in ROM for a constant. If
the variable or constant is multi-byte, higher bytes will be stored at the consecutive locations.
Directive absolute is appended to declaration of a variable or constant :
// Variable x will occupy 1 byte at address 0x22 :

short x absolute 0x22;
// Variable y will occupy 2 bytes at addresses 0x23 and 0x24 :

int y absolute 0x23;
// Array elements will be placed on the consecutive locations starting from 0x1000 :
const short ConstantArray[] = {1,2,3} absolute 0x1000;
Note :
If you want to place simple type constant into Flash memory, instead of following declaration:
const short SimpeConstant = 0xAA absolute 0x2000;
use an array consisting of single element :
const short SimpleConstant[] = {0xAA} absolute 0x2000;
In first case, compiler will recognize your attempt, but in order to save Flash space, and boost performance, it will
automatically replace all instances of this constant in code with it's literal value.
In the second case your constant will be placed in Flash in the exact location specified.
Be careful when using the absolute directive, as you may overlap two variables by accident. For example:
// Variable i will occupy 1 byte at address 0x33

char i absolute 0x33;
// Variable will occupy 4 bytes at 0x30, 0x31, 0x32, 0x33; thus,

// changing i changes jjjj highest byte at the same time, and vice versa
long jjjj absolute 0x30;
Directive orgall
If the user wants to place his routines, constants, etc, above a specified address in ROM, #pragma orgall directive
should be used:
#pragma orgall 0x200
MikroElektronika
147
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Directive funcorg
You can use the #pragma funcorg directive to specify the starting address of a routine in ROM using routine name
only:
#pragma funcorg <func_name> <starting_address>
Related topics: Indirect Function Calls
Indirect Function Calls

If the linker encounters an indirect function call (by a pointer to function), it assumes that any of the functions addresses
of which were taken anywhere in the program, can be called at that point. Use the #pragma funcall directive to instruct
the linker which functions can be called indirectly from the current function:
#pragma funcall <func_name> <called_func>[, <called_func>,...]
A corresponding pragma must be placed in the source module where the function func_name is implemented. This
module must also include declarations of all functions listed in the called_func list.
These functions will be linked if the function func_name is called in the code no matter whether any of them was called
or not.
Note : The #pragma funcall directive can help the linker to optimize function frame allocation in the compiled
stack.
Related topics: Linker Directives
MikroElektronika
148
Built-in Routines
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 compiler provides a set of useful built-in utility functions.
The Lo, Hi, Higher, Highest, LoWord, HiWord routines are implemented as macros. If you want to use these
functions you must include built_in.h header file (located in the inlclude folder of the compiler) into your project.
The Delay_us and Delay_ms routines are implemented as “inline”; i.e. code is generated in the place of a call, so the
call doesn’t count against the nested call limit.
The Vdelay_ms, Vdelay_advanced_ms, Delay_Cyc, Delay_Cyc_Long, Get_Fosc_kHz and Get_

Fosc_Per_Cyc are actual C routines. Their sources can be found in Delays.c file located in the uses folder of the
compiler.
- Lo
- Hi
- Higher
- Highest
- LoWord
- HiWord
- Delay_us
- Delay_ms
- Vdelay_ms
- Vdelay_Advanced_ms
- Delay_Cyc
- Delay_Cyc_Long
- Clock_kHz
- Clock_MHz
- Get_Fosc_kHz
- Get_Fosc_Per_Cyc
MikroElektronika
149
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Lo
Prototype #define Lo(param) ((char *)&param)[0]
Description The function returns low byte of number. The function does not interpret bit patterns of number – it
merely returns 8 bits as found in register.
This is an “inline” routine; code is generated in the place of the call, so the call doesn’t count against
the nested call limit.
Parameters number: input number
Returns Low byte of number, bits 7..0.
Requires Nothing.
Example d = 0x12345678;
tmp = Lo(d); // Equals 0x78
Lo(d) = 0xAA; // d equals 0x123456AA

Notes None.
Hi
Prototype #define Hi(param) ((char *)&param)[1]
Description The function returns high byte of number. The function does not interpret bit patterns of number – it
Returns High byte of number, bits 15..8.
Requires Nothing.
Example d = 0x12345678;
tmp = Hi(d); // Equals 0x56
Hi(d) = 0xAA; // d equals 0x1234AA78

Notes None.
MikroElektronika
150
Higher
Prototype #define Higher(param) ((char *)&param)[2]
Description The function returns higher byte of number. The function does not interpret bit patterns of number –
it merely returns 8 bits as found in register.
Returns Higher byte of number, bits 23..16.
Requires Nothing.
Example d = 0x12345678;
tmp = Higher(d); // Equals 0x34
Higher(d) = 0xAA; // d equals 0x12AA5678

Notes None.
Highest
Prototype #define Highest(param) ((char *)&param)[3]
Description The function returns highest byte of number. The function does not interpret bit patterns of number
– it merely returns 8 bits as found in register.
Returns Highest byte of number, bits 31..24.
Requires Nothing.
Example d = 0x12345678;
tmp = Highest(d); // Equals 0x12
Highest(d) = 0xAA; // d equals 0xAA345678

Notes None.
MikroElektronika
151
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
LoWord
Prototype unsigned int LoWord(unsigned long number);
Description The function returns low word of number. The function does not interpret bit patterns of number – it
Returns Low word of number, bits 15..0.
Requires Nothing.
Example d = 0x12345678;
tmp = LoWord(d); // Equals 0x5678
LoWord(d) = 0xAAAA; // d equals 0x1234AAAA

Notes None.
HiWord
Prototype unsigned int HiWord(unsigned long number);
Description The function returns high word of number. The function does not interpret bit patterns of number – it
Returns High word of number, bits 31..16.
Requires Nothing.
Example d = 0x12345678;
tmp = HiWord(d); // Equals 0x1234
HiWord(d) = 0xAAAA; // d equals 0xAAAA5678

Notes None.
MikroElektronika
152
Delay_us
Prototype void Delay_us(const unsigned long time_in_us);
Description Creates a software delay in duration of time_in_us microseconds.
Parameters time_in_us: delay time in microseconds. Valid values: constant values, range of applicable
constants depends on the oscillator frequency
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example Delay_us(10); /* Ten microseconds pause */
Notes None.
Delay_ms
Prototype void Delay_ms(const unsigned int time_in_ms);
Description Creates a software delay in duration of time_in_ms milliseconds.
Parameters time_in_ms: delay time in milliseconds. Valid values: constant values, range of applicable constants
depends on the oscillator frequency
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example Delay_ms(1000); /* One second pause */
Notes For generating delays with variable as input parameter use the Vdelay_ms routine.
Vdelay_ms
Prototype void Vdelay_ms(unsigned Time_ms);
Description Creates a software delay in duration of Time_ms milliseconds. Generated delay is not as precise as
the delay created by Delay_ms.
Parameters Time_ms: delay time in milliseconds
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example unsignedpause = 1000;
...
Vdelay_ms(pause); // ~ one second pause
Notes Vdelay_ms is a library function rather than a built-in routine; it is presented in this topic for the sake
of convenience.
MikroElektronika
153
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
VDelay_Advanced_ms
Prototype void VDelay_Advanced_ms(unsigned time_in_ms, unsigned Current_Fosc_kHz);
Description Creates a software delay in duration of time_in_ms milliseconds (a variable), for a given oscillator
frequency. Generated delay is not as precise as the delay created by Delay_ms.
Parameters Time_ms: delay time in milliseconds
Current_Fosc_kHz: desiredoscillator frequency
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example pause = 1000;
fosc = 10000;
VDelay_Advanced_ms(pause, fosc); // Generates approximately one second

pause, for a oscillator frequency of 10 MHz
Notes Note that VDelay_Advanced_ms is library function rather than a built-in routine; it is presented in
this topic for the sake of convenience.
Delay_Cyc
Prototype void Delay_Cyc(unsigned int x, unsigned int y);
Description Creates a delay based on MCU clock. Delay lasts for x*16384 + y MCU clock cycles.
Parameters x: NumberOfCycles divided by 16384
y: remainder of the NumberOfCycles/16384 division
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example Delay_Cyc(1, 10); /* 1x16384 + 10 = 16394 cycles pause */
Notes Delay_Cyc is a library function rather than a built-in routine; it is presented in this topic for the sake
of convenience.
Delay_Cyc_Long
Prototype void Delay_Cyc_Long(unsigned long CycNo);
Description Creates a delay based on MCU clock. Delay lasts for CycNo MCU clock cycles.
Parameters CycNo: number of cycles
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example Delay_Cyc_Long(16394); // 16394 cycles pause
Notes Delay_Cyc_Long is a library function rather than a built-in routine; it is presented in this topic for
the sake of convenience.
MikroElektronika
154
Clock_kHz
Prototype unsigned long Clock_kHz();
Description Function returns device clock in kHz, rounded to the nearest integer.
Parameters None.
Returns Device clock in kHz, rounded to the nearest integer.
Requires Nothing.
Example unsigned long clk;
...
clk = Clock_kHz();
Notes None.
Clock_Mhz
Prototype unsigned long Clock_MHz();
Description Function returns device clock in MHz, rounded to the nearest integer.
Parameters None.
Returns Device clock in MHz, rounded to the nearest integer.
Requires Nothing.
...
clk = Clock_Mhz();
Notes None.
Get_Fosc_kHz
Prototype unsigned long Get_Fosc_kHz();
Description Function returns device clock in kHz, rounded to the nearest integer.
Note that Get_Fosc_kHz is library function rather than a built-in routine; it is presented in this topic
for the sake of c?nvenience.
Parameters None.
Returns Device clock in kHz, rounded to the nearest integer.
Requires Nothing.
...
clk = Get_Fosc_kHz();
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
155
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Get_Fosc_Per_Cyc
Prototype unsigned int Get_Fosc_Per_Cyc();
Description Function returns device’s clock per cycle, rounded to the nearest integer.
Note that Get_Fosc_Per_Cyc is library function rather than a built-in routine; it is presented in this
topic for the sake of convenience.
Parameters None.
Returns Device’s clock per cycle, rounded to the nearest integer.
Requires Nothing.
Example unsigned int clk_per_cyc;
...
clk_per_cyc = Get_Fosc_Per_Cyc();
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
156
Code Optimization
Optimizer has been added to extend the compiler usability, cut down the amount of code generated and speed-up its
execution. The main features are:
Constant folding
All expressions that can be evaluated in the compile time (i.e. constant) are being replaced by their results. (3 + 5 ->
8);
Constant propagation
When a constant value is being assigned to a certain variable, the compiler recognizes this and replaces the use of the
variable by constant in the code that follows, as long as the value of a variable remains unchanged.
Copy propagation
The compiler recognizes that two variables have the same value and eliminates one of them further in the code.
Value numbering
The compiler "recognizes" if two expressions yield the same result and can therefore eliminate the entire computation
for one of them.
"Dead code" ellimination

The code snippets that are not being used elsewhere in the programme do not affect the final result of the application.
They are automatically removed.
Stack allocation
Temporary registers ("Stacks") are being used more rationally, allowing VERY complex expressions to be evaluated
with a minimum stack consumption.
Local vars optimization

No local variables are being used if their result does not affect some of the global or volatile variables.
Better code generation and local optimization

Code generation is more consistent and more attention is payed to implement specific solutions for the code "building
bricks" that further reduce output code size.
Related topics: SSA Optimization, dsPIC specifics, mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 specifics, Memory type
specifiers
MikroElektronika
157
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Single Static Assignment Optimization

Introduction
In compiler design, static single assignment form (often abbreviated as SSA form or SSA) is an intermediate
representation (IR) in which every variable is assigned exactly once.
An SSA-based compiler modifies the program representation so that every time a variable is assigned in the original
program, a new version of the variable is created.
A new version of the variable is distinguished (renamed) by subscripting the variable name with its version number or
an index, so that every definition of each variable in a program becomes unique.
At a joining point of the control flow graph where two or more different definitions of a variable meet, a hypothetical
function called a phi-function is inserted so that these multiple definitions are merged.
In mikroC PRO for dsPIC, SSA's main goal is in allocating local variables into the RX space (instead onto the frame).
To do that, SSA has to make an alias and data flow analysis of the Control Flow Graph.
Besides these savings, there are a number of compiler optimization algorithms enhanced by the use of SSA, like :
- Constant Propagation
- Dead Code Elimination
- Global Value Numbering
- Register Allocation
Changes that SSA brings is also in the way in which routine parameters are passed. When the SSA is enabled,
parameters are passed through a part of the RX space which is reserved exclusively for this purpose (W10-W13 for
dsPIC).
Allocating local variables and parameters in RX space has its true meaning for those architectures with hardware
frame.
Enabling SSA optimization in compiler is done by checking box from the Output Settings Menu.
Lets consider a trivial case :
void main() {
int y,k;
if(y+k)
asm nop;
}
With SSA enabled, this example is consisted of 3 asm instructions :
;rbuild.c,10 :: if(y+k)
0x0212 0x408002 ADD _WREG1, _WREG2, _WREG0
0x0214 0x320001 BRA Z L_main0
L__main2:
;rbuild.c,11 :: asm nop;
0x0216 0x000000 NOP
MikroElektronika
158
Without SSA enabled, this example is consisted of 5 asm instructions :
;rbuild.c,10 :: if(y+k)
0x0218 0x90008E MOV [_WREG14+0], _WREG1
0x021A 0x470062 ADD _WREG14, #2, _WREG0
0x021C 0x408010 ADD _WREG1, [_WREG0], _WREG0
0x021E 0x320001 BRA Z L_main0
L__main2:
;rbuild.c,11 :: asm nop;
0x0220 0x000000 NOP
Proper Coding Recommendations

To get the maximum out of the SSA, user should regard the following rules during the coding process :
- Routines should not contain too many parameters (not more than 4 words).
- Don’t change the value of the parameter in the function body (it is better to use a new local variable).
- If the function1 parameters are passed as function2 parameters, then parameter order should
remain the same :
f2(int a, int b) { }
f1(int x, int y) {
// routine call
f2(x,y); // x->a and y->b (1 to 1 and 2 to 2) is far more efficient than :
f2(y,x); // y->a and x->b (1 to 2 and 2 to 1)
}
- Large amount of nested loops and complex structures as its members should be avoided.
- When writing a code in assembly, keep in mind that there are registers reserved exclusively for
routine parameters.
- Using goto and label statements in nested loops should be avoided.
- Obtaining address of the local variable with the global pointer and using it to alter the variable’s address
should be avoided.
Notes :
- mcl files compiled with or without SSA enabled are fully compatible and can be used and mixed without
any restrictions, except function pointers.
- All function prototypes and function pointers have to be built using the same optimizer because of different
calling conventions in different optimizers. In SSA, function parameters are passed via working registers,
and without SSA they end up on the function frame.
- This means that you cannot have a function implementation which is optimized using SSA optimizer, and to
call this function via function pointer in another module which is optimized using NON-SSA.
When using pointers to functions, compiler must know exactly how to pass function parameters and how to
execute function call.
MikroElektronika
159
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Asm code and SSA optimization

If converting code from an earlier version of the compiler, which consists of mixed asm code with the C
code, keep in mind that the generated code can substantially differ when SSA optimization option is enabled
or disabled.
This is due to the fact that SSA optimization uses certain working registers to store routine parameters
(W10-W13), rather than storing them onto the function frame.
Because of this, user must be very careful when writing asm code as existing values in the working registers
used by SSA optimization can be overwritten.
To avoid this, it is recommended that user includes desired asm code in a separate routine.
Debugging Notes
SSA also influences the code debugging in such a way that the local variables will be available in the Watch Window
only in those parts of the procedure where they have useful value (eg. on entering the procedure, variable isn't available
until its definition).
Variables can be allocated in one part of the procedure in register W4, and in another part of the procedure in register
W2, if the optimizer estimates that it is better that way. That means that the local variable has no static address.
Warning Messages Enhancement

Besides the smaller code, SSA also deals with the intensive code analysis, which in turn has the consequence in
enhancing the warning messages.
For example, compiler will warn the user that the uninitialized variable is used :
void main() {
int y;
if (y) // Variable y might not have been initialized

PORTD = 0;
}
Related topics: Code Optimization, dsPIC Specifics, mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 specifics, Memory type
specifiers
MikroElektronika
160
Common Object File Format (COFF)
COFF File Format

The Common Object File Format (COFF) is a specific file format suitable for code debugging.
The COFF incorporates symbolic procedure, function, variable and constant names information; line number information,
breakpoints settings, code highlighter and all the necessary information for effective and fast debugging.
By using COFF, it is possible to import and debug code generated by mikroElektronika compilers under Microchip's
MPLAB®.
COFF File Generation

1. Start mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 and open the desired project. For example, UART project for
EasydsPIC4A board and dsPIC30F4013 will be opened :
MikroElektronika
161
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
2. When the project is opened, go to Tools › Options › Output settings, and check the "Generate COFF file" option,
and click the OK button :
3. Now, compile the project. In the messages window, appropriate message on COFF file generation should appear :
4. Generated COFF file will be created in the project folder, with the .cof extension.
Related topics: Using MPLAB® ICD 2 Debugger, Using MPLAB® Simulator
MikroElektronika
162
CHAPTER 7
dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 Specifics
In order to get the most from the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 compiler, the user should be familiar with certain
aspects of dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 MCU. This knowledge is not essential, but it can provide a better understanding of
the dsPIC30/33 and PIC24’s capabilities and limitations, and their impact on the code writing as well.
MikroElektronika
163
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Types Efficiency
First of all, the user should know that dsPIC30/33 and PIC24’s ALU, which performs arithmetic operations, is optimized
for working with 16-bit types. Although mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 is capable of handling types like char or
short, dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 will generate a better code for 16-bit types, like int. Therefore, use char and short only in
places where you can significantlly save RAM (e.g. for arrays char a[30]).
Nested Calls Limitations

There are no Nested Calls Limitations, except by RAM size. A Nested call represents a function call within the function
body, either to itself (recursive calls) or to another function.
Recursive calls, as a form of cross-calling, are supported by mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24, but they should
be used very carefully due to dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 stack and memory limitations. Also calling functions from interrupt
is allowed. Calling function from both interrupt and main thread is allowed. Be carefull because this programming
technique may cause unpredictable results if common resources are used in both main and interrupt.
Limits of Indirect Approach Through PSV

Constant aggregates are stored in Flash and are accessible through PSV. mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 can
allocate more than 32KByte of constants. See near and far memory specifiers.
Limits of Pointer to Function

Currently pointer to functions are 16-bit variables. For functions which address exceeds 16 bit limit, the compiler uses
handle (16-bit pointer on GOTO). A handle usage is automatic compiler process so there is no need for the user to
intervene.
Variable, constant and routine alignment

Simple type variables whose size exceeds 1 byte (int, long, float, double, long double) are always set to alignment 2
(i.e. are always allocated on even address).
Derived types and constant aggregates whose at least one element exceeds size of 1 byte are set to alignment 2.
Routines are always set to aligment 2.
MikroElektronika
164
dsPIC Memory Organization

The dsPIC microcontroller’s memory is divided into Program Memory and Data Memory. Program Memory (ROM) is
used for permanent saving program being executed, while Data Memory (RAM) is used for temporarily storing and
keeping intermediate results and variables.
Program Memory (ROM)

Program Memory (ROM) is used for permanent saving program code being executed, and it is divided into several
sections, as on the picture below. The size of these sections is device dependant.
The program memory map is divided into the User Memory Space and Configuration Memory Space. The User Memory
Space contains the Reset vector, interrupt vector tables, program memory and data EEPROM memory (dsPIC30 family
and some PIC24 family MCU’s).
The Configuration Memory Space contains non-volatile configuration bits for setting device options and the device ID
locations.
Program Memory (ROM) Organization
1. dsPIC33F Program Memory Organization
MikroElektronika
165
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Data Memory (RAM)

Data memory consists of:
- SFR Memory Space

- X and Y Data RAM
- DMA RAM (only for dsPIC33F Family)
- Unimplemented Memory Space
Data Memory (RAM) Organization
1. PIC24F Data Memory Organization

2. dsPIC33F Data Memory Organization
SFR Memory Space

The first 2kB of data memory is allocated to the Special Function Registers (SFRs). The SFRs are control and status
register for core and peripheral functions in the dsPIC.
X and Y Data RAM

Up to 8 kB of data RAM is implemented after the SFRs. This is general purpose RAM that can be used for data storage.
This RAM is split into X and Y memory for dsPIC instructions.
This allows DSP instructions to support dual operand reads, so that data can be fetched from X and Y memory space
at the same time for a single instruction.
The X and Y data space boundary is fixed for any given device. When not doing DSP instructions, the memory is all
treated as a single block of X memory.
MikroElektronika
166
DMA RAM
Every dsPIC33F device contains a portion of dual ported DMA RAM located at the end of Y data space. Direct Memory
Access (DMA) is a very efficient mechanism of copying data between peripheral SFRs and buffers or variables stored
in RAM, with minimal CPU intervention.
The DMA controller can automatically copy entire blocks of data without requiring the user software to read or write the
peripheral Special Function Registers (SFRs) every time a peripheral interrupt occurs.
The DMA controller uses a dedicated bus for data transfers and therefore, does not steal cycles from the code execution
flow of the CPU. To exploit the DMA capability, the corresponding user buffers or variables must be located in DMA
RAM.
Unimplemented Memory Space

The last segment of data RAM space is not implemented, but can be mapped into program space for Program Space
Visibility. This allows program memory to be read as though it were in data RAM.
Notes:
- Boundaries between memory spaces are device specific. Please, refer to the appropriate datasheet for details.
- Memory spaces are not shown to scale. Please, refer to the appropriate datasheet for details.
There are seven memory type specifiers that can be used to refer to the data memory: rx, data, code, sfr,
xdata, ydata, and dma
Related topics: Accessing individual bits, SFRs, Memory type specifiers, dsPIC Memory Type QualifiersC
MikroElektronika
167
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Memory Type Specifiers

The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 supports usage of all memory areas.
Each variable may be explicitly assigned to a specific memory space by including a memory type specifier in the
declaration, or implicitly assigned.
The following memory type specifiers can be used:
- code
- data
- rx
- sfr
- xdata
- ydata
- dma
code
Description The code memory type may be used for allocating constants in program memory.
Example // puts txt in program memory

const code char txt[] = “ENTER PARAMETER:”;
data
Description This memory specifier is used when storing variable to the Data RAM.
Example // puts x in data ram

data unsigned char x;
rx
Description This memory specifier allows variable to be stored in the working registers space
(WREG0-WREG15).
Example // puts y in working register space

rx char y;
sfr
Description This memory specifier allows user to access special function registers. It also
instructs compiler to maintain same identifier in source and assembly.
Example sfr char y; // puts y in SFR space
MikroElektronika
168
xdata
Description This memory specifier allows user to access X Data memory space.
Example xdata char x; // puts x in xdata memory space
ydata
Description This memory specifier allows user to access Y Data memory space.
Example ydata char y; // puts y in ydata memory space
dma
Description This memory specifier allows user to access DMA memory space (dsPIC33F
specific).
Example dma char y; // puts y in DMA memory space
Note: If none of the memory specifiers are used when declaring a variable, data specifier will be set
as default by the compiler.
Related topics: dsPIC Memory Organization, dsPIC Memory Type Qualifiers, Accessing individual
bits, SFRs, Constants, Functions
MikroElektronika
169
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Memory Type Qualifiers

In addition to the standard storage qualifiers(const, volatile) the compiler introduces storage qualifiers of near
and far.
Near Memory Qualifier

1. Data Memory Objects
The qualifier near is used to denote that a variable is allocated in near data space (the first 8 kB of Data
memory). Such variables can sometimes be accessed more efficiently than variables not allocated (or not
known to be allocated) in near data space.
If variables are allocated in the near data section, the compiler is often able to generate better (more
compact) code than if the variables are not allocated in the near data section.
2. Program Memory Objects
The qualifier near is used to denote that a constant is allocated in the default program memory page
(32kB segment of program memory). Default program memory page is the one with most free space and
is set by the compiler by analyzing program memory pages.
This qualifier is set as default by the compiler, if no other qualifier is used.
Far Memory Qualifier

1 Data Memory Objects
The qualifier far is used to denote that a variable will not be in near data space (i.e. the variable can be
located anywhere in data memory). This qualifier is set as default by the compiler, if no other qualifier is
used.
2. Program Memory Objects
The qualifier far is used to denote that a constant can be allocated anywhere in the program memory, in
the page pointed to by PSVPAG register.
Location of object based on memory qualifiers:

Qualifier/Memory Data Memory Program Memory
near First 8 kB of RAM In default page
far Anywhere in RAM In page pointed to PSVPAG register
Example:
char i; // far memory qualifier is set, variable i can allocated somewhere in data memory
char near j; // near memory qualifier is set, variable j will be allocated in the first 8kB of data memory
const int k = 10; // near memory qualifier is set, constant k will be allocated in the default memory page
Related topics: dsPIC Memory Organization, dsPIC Memory Type Specifiers
MikroElektronika
170
Read Modify Write Problem

The Microchip microcontrollers use a sequence known as Read-Modify-Write (RMW) when changing an output state
(1 or 0) on a pin. This can cause unexpected behavior under certain circumstances.
When your program changes the state on a specific pin, for example RB0 in PORTB, the microcontroller first READs
all 8 bits of the PORTB register which represents the states of all 8 pins in PORTB (RB7-RB0).
The microcontroller then stores this data in the MCU. The bit associated with RB that you’ve commanded to MODIFY
is changed, and then the microcontroller WRITEs all 8 bits (RB7-RB0) back to the PORTB register.
During the first reading of the PORT register, you will be reading the actual state of the physical pin.
The problem arises when an output pin is loaded in such a way that its logic state is affected by the load. Instances of
such loads are LEDs without current-limiting resistors or loads with high capacitance or inductance.
For example, if a capacitor is attached between pin and ground, it will take a short while to charge when the pin is set to 1.
On the other hand, if the capacitor is discharged, it acts like a short circuit, forcing the pin to ‘0’ state, and, therefore, a
read of the PORT register will return 0, even though we wrote a 1 to it.
Lets analyze the following example:
PORTB.B0 = 1;
PORTB.B1 = 1;
Assume that the PORTB is initially set to zero, and that all pins are set to output. Let’s say we connect a discharged
capacitor to RB0 pin.
The first line, PORTB.B0 = 1; will be decoded like in this way:

READ PORTB is read: STORE Data is stored inside a temporary internal
register in the MCU :
MikroElektronika
171
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Actual voltage levels on MCU pins are relevant.
MODIFY Data is modified to set the RB0 bit: WRITE PORTB is written with the modified data.
The output driver for RB0 turns on, and the
capacitor starts to charge:
The second line, PORTB.B1 = 1; will be decoded like in this way:
READ PORTB is read: STORE Because the capacitor is still charging, the
voltage at RB0 is still low and reads as a ‘0’
(since we are reading from the pins directly,
not from the PORTB register) :
Actual voltage levels on MCU pins are relevant.
MODIFY Data is modified to set the bit: WRITE PORTB is written with the new data. The
output driver for RB1 turns on, but the
driver for RB0 turns back off:
MikroElektronika
172
To correct the problem in the code, insert a delay after each PORTB.Bx = 1 line, or modify the entire PORTB register
in a single line PORTB = 0b00000011.
This problem can be avoided by using LATx register when writing to ports, rather than using PORTx registers.
Writing to a LATx register is equivalent to writing to a PORTx register, but readings from LATx registers return the
data value held in the port latch, regardless of the state of the actual pin.
For example, lets analyze the following example:
LATB.B0 = 1;
LATB.B1 = 1;
The first line, LATB.B0 = 1; will be decoded like in this way:
READ LATB is read: STORE Data is stored inside a temporary internal

register in the MCU :
Actual voltage levels on MCU pins are no longer relevant when using LATx for output
MODIFY Data is modified to set the RB0 bit: WRITE LATB is written with the modified data.
The output driver for RB0 turns on, and the
capacitor starts to charge:
MikroElektronika
173
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
The second line, LATB.B1 = 1; will be decoded like in this way :

READ LATB is read: STORE Since the voltage levels on MCU pins are no
longer relevant, we get the expected value:
Actual voltage levels on MCU pins are no longer relevant when using LATx for output
MODIFY Data is modified to set the bit: WRITE LATB is written with the new data. The
output driver for RB1 turns on, and the output
driver for RB0 remains turned on:
When to use LATx instead of PORTx
Depending on your hardware, one may experience unpredictable behavior when using PORTx bits for driving output.
Displays (GLCD, LCD), chip select pins in SPI interfaces and other cases when you need fast and reliable output, LATx
should be used instead of PORTx.
MikroElektronika
174
CHAPTER 8
PIC24 Language Reference
MikroElektronika
175
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
- Lexical Elements
- Whitespace
- Comments
- Tokens
- Constants
- Constants Overview
- Integer Constants
- Floating Point Constants
- Character Constants
- String Constants
- Enumeration Constants
- Pointer Constants
- Constant Expressions
- Keywords
- Identifiers
- Punctuators
- Concepts
- Objects and Lvalues

- Scope and Visibility
- Name Spaces
- Duration
- Types
- Fundamental Types
- Arithmetic Types
- Enumerations
- Void Type
- Derived Types
- Arrays
- Pointers
- Introduction to Pointers
- Pointer Arithmetic
- Structures
- Introduction to Structures
- Working with Structures
- Structure Member Access
- Unions
- Bit Fields
MikroElektronika
176
- Types Conversions
- Standard Conversions
- Explicit Typecasting
- Declarations
- Introduction to Declarations
- Linkage
- Storage Classes
- Type Qualifiers
- Typedef Specifier
- ASM Declaration
- Initialization
- Functions
- Introduction to Functions
- Function Calls and Argument Conversion
- Operators
- Introduction to Operators
- Operators Precedence and Associativity
- Arithmetic Operators
- Relational Operators
- Bitwise Operators
- Logical Operators
- Conditional Operator
- Assignment Operators
- Sizeof Operator
- Expressions
- Introduction to Expressions
- Comma Expressions
- Statements
- Introduction
- Labeled Statements
- Expression Statements
- Selection Statements
- If Statement
- Switch Statement
- Iteration Statements (Loops)
- While Statement
- Do Statement
- For Statement
MikroElektronika
177
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
- Jump Statements
- Break and Continue Statements

- Goto Statement
- Return Statement
- Compound Statements (Blocks)
- Preprocessor
- Introduction to Preprocessor
- Preprocessor Directives
- Macros
- File Inclusion
- Preprocessor Operators
- Conditional Compilation
Lexical Elements Overview

The following topics provide a formal definition of the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 lexical elements. They
describe different categories of word-like units (tokens) recognized by the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24.
In the tokenizing phase of compilation, the source code file is parsed (that is, broken down) into tokens and whitespace.
The tokens in the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 are derived from a series of operations performed on your
programs by the compiler and its built-in preprocessor.
MikroElektronika
178
Whitespace
Whitespace is a collective name given to spaces (blanks), horizontal and vertical tabs, newline characters and comments.
Whitespace can serve to indicate where tokens start and end, but beyond this function, any surplus whitespace is
discarded. For example, two sequences
int i; float f;
and
int
i;
float f;
are lexically equivalent and parse identically to give six tokens:
int
i
;
float
f
;
Whitespace in Strings
The ASCII characters representing whitespace can occur within string literals. In that case they are protected from the
normal parsing process (they remain as a part of the string). For example,
char name[] = “mikro foo”;
parses into seven tokens, including a single string literal token:
char
name
[
]
=
“mikro foo” /* just one token here! */
;
Line Splicing with Backslash (\)

A special case occurs if a line ends with a backslash (\). Both backslash and new line character are discarded, allowing
two physical lines of a text to be treated as one unit. So, the following code
“mikroC PRO for \
dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 Compiler”
parses into “mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 Compiler”. Refer to String Constants for more information.
MikroElektronika
179
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Comments
Comments are pieces of a text used to annotate a program and technically are another form of whitespace. Comments
are for the programmer’s use only; they are stripped from the source text before parsing. There are two ways to delineate
comments: the C method and the C++ method. Both are supported by mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24.
You should also follow the guidelines on the use of whitespace and delimiters in comments, discussed later in this topic
to avoid other portability problems.
C comments
C comment is any sequence of characters placed after the symbol pair /*. The comment terminates at the first occurance
of the pair */ following the initial /*. The entire sequence, including four comment-delimiter symbols, is replaced by one
space after macro expansion.
In the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24,
int /* type */ i /* identifier */;
parses as:
int i;
Note that the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 does not support a nonportable token pasting strategy using /**/.
For more information on token pasting, refer to the Preprocessor Operators.
C++ comments
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 allows single-line comments using two adjacent slashes (//). The comment
can start in any position and extends until the next new line.
The following code
int i; // this is a comment

int j;
parses as:
int i;
int j;
Nested comments
ANSI C doesn’t allow nested comments. The attempt to nest a comment like this
/* int /* declaration */ i; */
fails, because the scope of the first /* ends at the first */. This gives us
i; */
which would generate a syntax error.
MikroElektronika
180
Tokens
Token is the smallest element of a C program that compiler can recognize. The parser separates tokens from the input
stream by creating the longest token possible using the input characters in a left–to–right scan.
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 recognizes the following kinds of tokens:
- keywords
- identifiers
- constants
- operators
- punctuators (also known as separators)
Tokens can be concatenated (pasted) by means of the preprocessor operator ##. See the Preprocessor Operators for
details.
Token Extraction Example

Here is an example of token extraction. Take a look at the following example code sequence:
inter = a+++b;
First, note that inter would be parsed as a single identifier, rather than as the keyword int followed by the identifier
er.
The programmer who has written the code might have intended to write inter = a + (++b), but it wouldn’t work
that way. The compiler would parse it into the seven following tokens:
inter // variable identifier

= // assignment operator
a // variable identifier
++ // postincrement operator
+ // addition operator
b // variable identifier
; // statement terminator
Note that +++ parses as ++ (the longest token possible) followed by +.
According to the operator precedence rules, our code sequence is actually:
inter (a++)+b;
MikroElektronika
181
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Constants
Constants or literals are tokens representing fixed numeric or character values.
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 supports:
- integer constants
- floating point constants
- character constants
- string constants (strings literals)
- enumeration constants
The data type of a constant is deduced by the compiler using such clues as a numeric value and format used in the
source code.
Integer Constants
Integer constants can be decimal (base 10), hexadecimal (base 16), binary (base 2), or octal (base 8). In the absence
of any overriding suffixes, the data type of an integer constant is derived from its value.
Long and Unsigned Suffixes

The suffix L (or l) attached to any constant forces that constant to be represented as a long. Similarly, the suffix U (or
u) forces a constant to be unsigned. Both L and U suffixes can be used with the same constant in any order or case:
ul, Lu, UL, etc.
In the absence of any suffix (U, u, L, or l), a constant is assigned the “smallest” of the following types that can
accommodate its value: short, unsigned short, int, unsigned int, long int, unsigned long int.
Otherwise:
- If a constant has the U suffix, its data type will be the first of the following that can accommodate its value:
unsigned short, unsigned int, unsigned long int.
- If a constant has the L suffix, its data type will be the first of the following that can accommodate its value: long
int, unsigned long int.
- If a constant has both L and U suffixes, (LU or UL), its data type will be unsigned long int.
Decimal
Decimal constants from -2147483648 to 4294967295 are allowed. Constants exceeding these bounds will produce
an “Out of range” error. Decimal constants must not use an initial zero. An integer constant that has an initial zero is
interpreted as an octal constant. Thus,
int i = 10; /* decimal 10 */

int i = 010; /* decimal 8 */
int i = 0; /* decimal 0 = octal 0 */
MikroElektronika
182
In the absence of any overriding suffixes, the data type of a decimal constant is derived from its value, as shown
below:
Value Assigned to Constant Assumed Type

< -2147483648 Error: Out of range!
-2147483648 – -32769 long
-32768 – -129 int
-128 – 127 short
128 – 255 unsigned short
256 – 32767 int
32768 – 65535 unsigned int
65536 – 2147483647 long
2147483648 – 4294967295 unsigned long
> 4294967295 Error: Out of range!
Hexadecimal
All constants starting with 0x (or 0X) are taken to be hexadecimal. In the absence of any overriding suffixes, the data
type of an hexadecimal constant is derived from its value, according to the rules presented above. For example,
0xC367 will be treated as unsigned int.
Binary
All constants starting with 0b (or 0B) are taken to be binary. In the absence of any overriding suffixes, the data type
of an binary constant is derived from its value, according to the rules presented above. For example, 0b11101 will be
treated as short.
Octal
All constants with an initial zero are taken to be octal. If an octal constant contains the illegal digits 8 or 9, an error
is reported. In the absence of any overriding suffixes, the data type of an octal constant is derived from its value,
according to the rules presented above. For example, 0777 will be treated as int.
MikroElektronika
183
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Floating Point Constants

A floating-point constant consists of:
- Decimal integer
- Decimal point
- Decimal fraction
- e or E and a signed integer exponent (optional)
- Type suffix: f or F or l or L (optional)
Either decimal integer or decimal fraction (but not both) can be omitted. Either decimal point or letter e (or E) with
a signed integer exponent (but not both) can be omitted. These rules allow conventional and scientific (exponent)
notations.
Negative floating constants are taken as positive constants with an unary operator minus (-) prefixed.
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 limits floating-point constants to the range ±1.17549435082 * 10-38 ..
±6.80564774407 * 1038.
Here are some examples:
0. // = 0.0
-1.23 // = -1.23
23.45e6 // = 23.45 * 10^6
2e-5 // = 2.0 * 10^-5
3E+10 // = 3.0 * 10^10
.09E34 // = 0.09 * 10^34
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 floating-point constants are of the type double. Note that the mikroC PRO
for dsPIC’s implementation of ANSI Standard considers float and double (together with the long double variant)
to be the same type.
Character Constants
A character constant is one or more characters enclosed in single quotes, such as ‘A’, ‘+’, or ‘\n’. In the mikroC
PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24, single-character constants are of the unsigned int type. Multi-character constants
are referred to as string constants or string literals. For more information refer to String Constants.
Escape Sequences
A backslash character (\) is used to introduce an escape sequence, which allows a visual representation of certain
nongraphic characters. One of the most common escape constants is the newline character (\n).
A backslash is used with octal or hexadecimal numbers to represent an ASCII symbol or control code corresponding
to that value; for example, ‘\x3F’ for the question mark. Any value within legal range for data type char (0 to 0xFF
for the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24) can be used. Larger numbers will generate the compiler error “Out of
range”.
MikroElektronika
184
For example, the octal number \777 is larger than the maximum value allowed (\377) and will generate an error. The
first nonoctal or nonhexadecimal character encountered in an octal or hexadecimal escape sequence marks the end
of the sequence.
Note: You must use the sequence \\ to represent an ASCII backslash, as used in operating system paths.
The following table shows the available escape sequences:
Sequence Value Char What it does?

\a 0x07 BEL Audible bell
\b 0x08 BS Backspace
\f 0x0C FF Formfeed
\n 0x0A LF Newline (Linefeed)
\r 0x0D CR Carriage Return
\t 0x09 HT Tab (horizontal)
\v 0x0B VT Vertical Tab
\\ 0x5C \ Backslash
\’ 0x27 ‘ Single quote (Apostrophe)
\” 0x22 “ Double quote
\? 0x3F ? Question mark
\O any O = string of up to 3 octal digits
\xH any H = string of hex digits
\XH any H = string of hex digits
Disambiguation
Some ambiguous situations might arise when using escape sequences.
Here is an example:
Lcd_Out_Cp(“\x091.0 Intro”);
This is intended to be interpreted as \x09 and “1.0 Intro”. However, the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24
compiles it as the hexadecimal number \x091 and literal string “.0 Intro”. To avoid such problems, we could
rewrite the code in the following way:
Lcd_Out_Cp(“\x09” “1.0 Intro”);
For more information on the previous line, refer to String Constants.
Ambiguities might also arise if an octal escape sequence is followed by a nonoctal digit. For example, the following
constant:
“\118”
would be interpreted as a two-character constant made up of the characters \11 and 8, because 8 is not a legal octal digit.
MikroElektronika
185
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
String Constants
String constants, also known as string literals, are a special type of constants which store fixed sequences of characters.
A string literal is a sequence of any number of characters surrounded by double quotes:
“This is a string.”
The null string, or empty string, is written like “”. A literal string is stored internally as a given sequence of characters
plus a final null character. A null string is stored as a single null character.
The characters inside the double quotes can include escape sequences. This code, for example:
“\t\”Name\”\\\tAddress\n\n”
prints like this:
“Name”\ Address
The “Name” is preceded by two tabs; The Address is preceded by one tab. The line is followed by two new lines. The
\” provides interior double quotes. The escape character sequence \\ is translated into \ by the compiler.
Adjacent string literals separated only by whitespace are concatenated during the parsing phase. For example:
“This is “ “just”
“ an example.”
is equivalent to
“This is just an example.”
Line Continuation with Backslash

You can also use the backslash (\) as a continuation character to extend a string constant across line boundaries:
“This is really \
a one-line string.”
MikroElektronika
186
Enumeration Constants
Enumeration constants are identifiers defined in enum type declarations. The identifiers are usually chosen as
mnemonics to contribute to legibility. Enumeration size is calculated according to the enumerators (enumeration
elements). They can be used in any expression where integer constants are valid.
For example:
enum weekdays { SUN = 0, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT };
The identifiers (enumerators) used must be unique within the scope of the enum declaration. Negative initializers are
allowed. See Enumerations for details about enum declarations.
Pointer Constants
A pointer or pointed-at object can be declared with the const modifier. Anything declared as const cannot change its
value. It is also illegal to create a pointer that might violate a non-assignability of the constant object.
Consider the following examples:
int i; // i is an int
int * pi; // pi is a pointer to int (uninitialized)
int * const cp = &i; // cp is a constant pointer to int
const int ci = 7; // ci is a constant int
const int * pci; // pci is a pointer to constant int
const int * const cpc = &ci; // cpc is a constant pointer to a constant int
The following assignments are legal:
i = ci; // Assign const-int to int

*cp = ci; // Assign const-int to
// object-pointed-at-by-a-const-pointer
++pci; // Increment a pointer-to-const
pci = cpc; // Assign a const-pointer-to-a-const to a pointer-to-const
The following assignments are illegal:
ci = 0; // NO--cannot assign to a const-int

ci--; // NO--cannot change a const-int
*pci = 3; // NO--cannot assign to an object
// pointed at by pointer-to-const.
cp = &ci; // NO--cannot assign to a const-pointer,
// even if value would be unchanged.
cpc++; // NO--cannot change const-pointer
pi = pci; // NO--if this assignment were allowed,
// you would be able to assign to *pci
//(a const value) by assigning to *pi.
Similar rules are applayed to the volatile modifier. Note that both const and volatile can appear as modifiers
to the same identifier.
MikroElektronika
187
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Notes:
- Pointer to constant space (Flash memory) is allocated in RAM.

- Due to the previous note, it is not possible to define an extern const.
- Constants of a simple type are not allocated in the Flash memory nor in RAM, but changed in the compile time, and
therefore, address of a such constant can not be obtained.
Constant Expressions
A constant expressions can be evaluated during translation rather that runtime and accordingly may be used in any
place that a constant may be.
Constant expressions can consist only of the following:
- literals,
- enumeration constants,
- simple constants (no constant arrays or structures),
- sizeof operators.
Constant expressions cannot contain any of the following operators, unless the operators are contained within the
operand of a sizeof operator: assignment, comma, decrement, function call, increment.
Each constant expression can evaluate to a constant that is in the range of representable values for its type.
Constant expression can be used anywhere a constant is legal.
MikroElektronika
188
Keywords
Keywords are words reserved for special purposes and must not be used as normal identifier names.
Beside standard C keywords, all relevant SFR are defined as global variables and represent reserved words that
cannot be redefined (for example: TMR0, PCL, etc). Probe the Code Assistant for specific letters (Ctrl+Space in Editor)
or refer to Predefined Globals and Constants.
Here is an alphabetical listing of keywords in C:
- absolute
- asm
- at
- auto
- bit
- bool
- break
- case
- catch
- char
- class
- code
- const
- continue
- data
- default
- delete
- dma
- do
- double
- else
- enum
- explicit
- extern
- false
- far
- float
- for
- friend
- goto
- if
- inline
- int
- iv
- long
- mutable
- namespace
- near
- operator
- org
- pascal
- private
MikroElektronika
189
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
- protected
- public
- register
- return
- rx
- sfr
- short
- signed
- sizeof
- static
- struct
- switch
- template
- this
- throw
- true
- try
- typedef
- typeid
- typename
- union
- unsigned
- using
- virtual
- void
- volatile
- while
- xdata
- ydata
Also, the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 includes a number of predefined identifiers used in libraries. You
could replace them by your own definitions, if you want to develop your own libraries. For more information, see mikroC
PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 Libraries.
Identifiers
Identifiers are arbitrary names of any length given to functions, variables, symbolic constants, user-defined data types
and labels. All these program elements will be referred to as objects throughout the help (don’t get confused with the
meaning of object in object-oriented programming).
Identifiers can contain the letters a to z and A to Z, underscore character “_”, and digits from 0 to 9. The only restriction
is that the first character must be a letter or an underscore.
Case Sensitivity
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 identifiers aren’t case sensitive by default, so that Sum, sum, and suM
represent an equivalent identifier. Case sensitivity can be activated or suspended in Output Settings window. Even if
case sensitivity is turned off Keywords remain case sensitive and they must be written in lower case.
MikroElektronika
190
Uniqueness and Scope

Although identifier names are arbitrary (according to the stated rules), if the same name is used for more than one
identifier within the same scope and sharing the same name space then error arises. Duplicate names are legal for
different name spaces regardless of scope rules. For more information on scope, refer to Scope and Visibility.
Identifier Examples
Here are some valid identifiers:
temperature_V1
Pressure
no_hit
dat2string
SUM3
_vtext
… and here are some invalid identifiers:
7temp // NO -- cannot begin with a numeral

%higher // NO -- cannot contain special characters
int // NO -- cannot match reserved word
j23.07.04 // NO -- cannot contain special characters (dot)
Punctuators
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 punctuators (also known as separators) are:
- [ ] – Brackets
- ( ) – Parentheses
- { } – Braces
- , – Comma
- ; – Semicolon
- : – Colon
- * – Asterisk
- = – Equal sign
- # – Pound sign
Most of these punctuators also function as operators.
Brackets
Brackets [ ] indicate single and multidimensional array subscripts:
char ch, str[] = “mikro”;
int mat[3][4]; /* 3 x 4 matrix */

ch = str[3]; /* 4th element */
MikroElektronika
191
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Parentheses
Parentheses ( ) are used to group expressions, isolate conditional expressions, and indicate function calls and
function parameters:
d = c * (a + b); /* override normal precedence */
if (d == z) ++x; /* essential with conditional statement */

func(); /* function call, no args */
void func2(int n); /* function declaration with parameters */
Parentheses are recommended in macro definitions to avoid potential precedence problems during an expansion:
#define CUBE(x) ((x) * (x) * (x))
For more information, refer to Operators Precedence And Associativity and Expressions.
Braces
Braces { } indicate the start and end of a compound statement:
if (d == z) {
++x;
func();
}
Closing brace serves as a terminator for the compound statement, so a semicolon is not required after }, except in
structure declarations. Sometimes, the semicolon can be illegal, as in
if (statement)
{ ... }; /* illegal semicolon! */
else
{ ... };
For more information, refer to the Compound Statements.
Comma
Comma (,) separates the elements of a function argument list:
void func(int n, float f, char ch);
Comma is also used as an operator in comma expressions. Mixing two uses of comma is legal, but you must use
parentheses to distinguish them. Note that (exp1, exp2) evalutates both but is equal to the second:
func(i, j); /* call func with two args */

func((exp1, exp2), (exp3, exp4, exp5)); /* also calls func with two args! */
MikroElektronika
192
Semicolon
Semicolon (;) is a statement terminator. Any legal C expression (including the empty expression) followed by a
semicolon is interpreted as a statement, known as an expression statement. The expression is evaluated and its value
is discarded. If the expression statement has no side effects, the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 might ignore
it.
a + b; /* Evaluate a + b, but discard value */

++a; /* Side effect on a, but discard value of ++a */
; /* Empty expression, or a null statement */
Semicolons are sometimes used to create an empty statement:
for (i = 0; i < n; i++);
For more information, see the Statements.
Colon
Use colon (:) to indicate the labeled statement:
start: x = 0;
...
goto start;
Labels are discussed in the Labeled Statements.
Asterisk (Pointer Declaration)

Asterisk (*) in a variable declaration denotes the creation of a pointer to a type:
char *char_ptr; /* a pointer to char is declared */
Pointers with multiple levels of indirection can be declared by indicating a pertinent number of asterisks:
int **int_ptr; /* a pointer to an array of integers */

double ***double_ptr; /* a pointer to a matrix of doubles */
You can also use asterisk as an operator to either dereference a pointer or as multiplication operator:
i = *int_ptr;
a = b * 3.14;
For more information, see the Pointers.
MikroElektronika
193
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Equal Sign
Equal sign (=) separates variable declarations from initialization lists:
int test[5] = { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 };
int x = 5;
Equal sign is also used as an assignment operator in expressions:
int a, b, c;
a = b + c;
For more information, see Assignment Operators.
Pound Sign (Preprocessor Directive)

Pound sign (#) indicates a preprocessor directive when it occurs as the first nonwhitespace character on a line. It
signifies a compiler action, not necessarily associated with a code generation. See the Preprocessor Directives for
more information.
# and ## are also used as operators to perform token replacement and merging during the preprocessor scanning
phase. See the Preprocessor Operators.
MikroElektronika
194
Concepts
This section covers some basic concepts of language, essential for understanding of how C programs work. First, we
need to establish the following terms that will be used throughout the help:
- Objects and lvalues

- Scope and Visibility
- Name Spaces
- Duration
Objects
An object is a specific region of memory that can hold a fixed or variable value (or set of values). This use of a term
object is different from the same term, used in object-oriented languages, which is more general. Our definiton of the
word would encompass functions, variables, symbolic constants, user-defined data types, and labels.
Each value has an associated name and type (also known as a data type). The name is used to access the object and
can be a simple identifier or complex expression that uniquely refers the object.
Objects and Declarations

Declarations establish a necessary mapping between identifiers and objects. Each declaration associates an identifier
with a data type.
Associating identifiers with objects requires each identifier to have at least two attributes: storage class and type
(sometimes referred to as data type). The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 compiler deduces these attributes
from implicit or explicit declarations in the source code. Usually, only the type is explicitly specified and the storage class
specifier assumes the automatic value auto.
Generally speaking, an identifier cannot be legally used in a program before its declaration point in the source code.
Legal exceptions to this rule (known as forward references) are labels, calls to undeclared functions, and struct or union
tags.
The range of objects that can be declared includes:
- Variables
- Functions
- Types
- Arrays of other types
- Structure, union, and enumeration tags
- Structure members
- Union members
- Enumeration constants
- Statement labels
- Preprocessor macros
The recursive nature of the declarator syntax allows complex declarators. You’ll probably want to use typedefs to
improve legibility if constructing complex objects.
MikroElektronika
195
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Lvalues
Lvalue is an object locator: an expression that designates an object. An example of lvalue expression is *P, where P is
any expression evaluating to a non-null pointer. A modifiable lvalue is an identifier or expression that relates to an object
that can be accessed and legally changed in memory. A const pointer to a constant, for example, is not a modifiable
lvalue. A pointer to a constant can be changed (but its dereferenced value cannot).
Historically, l stood for “left”, meaning that lvalue could legally stand on the left (the receiving end) of an assignment
statement. Now only modifiable lvalues can legally stand to the left of an assignment operator. For example, if a and
b are nonconstant integer identifiers with properly allocated memory storage, they are both modifiable lvalues, and
assignments such as a = 1 and b = a + b are legal.
Rvalues
The expression a + b is not lvalue: a + b = a is illegal because the expression on the left is not related to an object.
Such expressions are sometimes called rvalues (short for right values).
Scope and Visibility

Scope
The scope of an identifier is a part of the program in which the identifier can be used to access its object. There are
different categories of scope: block (or local), function, function prototype, and file. These categories depend on how
and where identifiers are declared.
- Block: The scope of an identifier with block (or local) scope starts at the declaration point and ends at
the end of the block containing the declaration (such block is known as the enclosing block). Parameter
declarations with a function definition also have block scope, limited to the scope of the function body.
- File: File scope identifiers, also known as globals, are declared outside of all blocks; their scope is from the
point of declaration to the end of the source file.
- Function: The only identifiers having function scope are statement labels. Label names can be used with
goto statements anywhere in the function in which the label is declared. Labels are declared implicitly by
writing label_name: followed by a statement. Label names must be unique within a function.
- Function prototype: Identifiers declared within the list of parameter declarations in a function prototype
(not as a part of a function definition) have a function prototype scope. This scope ends at the end of the
function prototype.
Visibility
The visibility of an identifier is a region of the program source code from which an identifier’s associated object can be
legally accessed.
Scope and visibility usually coincide, though there are circumstances under which an object becomes temporarily
hidden by the appearance of a duplicate identifier: the object still exists but the original identifier cannot be used to
access it until the scope of the duplicate identifier ends.
MikroElektronika
196
Technically, visibility cannot exceed a scope, but a scope can exceed visibility. See the following example:
void f (int i) {
int j; // auto by default
j = 3; // int i and j are in scope and visible
{ // nested block
double j; // j is local name in the nested block
j = 0.1; // i and double j are visible;
// int j = 3 in scope but hidden
}
// double j out of scope
j += 1; // int j visible and = 4
}
// i and j are both out of scope
Name Spaces
Name space is a scope within which an identifier must be unique. The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 uses
four distinct categories of identifiers:
1. goto label names - must be unique within the function in which they are declared.
2. Structure, union, and enumeration tags - must be unique within the block in which they are defined. Tags
declared outside of any function must be unique.
3. Structure and union member names - must be unique within the structure or union in which they are
defined. There is no restriction on the type or offset of members with the same member name in different
structures.
4. Variables, typedefs, functions, and enumeration members - must be unique within the scope in which they
are defined. Externally declared identifiers must be unique among externally declared variables.
Duplicate names are legal for different name spaces regardless of the scope rules.
For example:
int blue = 73;
{ // open a block
enum colors { black, red, green, blue, violet, white } c;
/* enumerator blue = 3 now hides outer declaration of int blue */
struct colors { int i, j; }; // ILLEGAL: colors duplicate tag

double red = 2; // ILLEGAL: redefinition of red
}
blue = 37; // back in int blue scope
MikroElektronika
197
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Duration
Duration, closely related to a storage class, defines a period during which the declared identifiers have real, physical
objects allocated in memory. We also distinguish between compile-time and run-time objects. Variables, for instance,
unlike typedefs and types, have real memory allocated during run time. There are two kinds of duration: static and
local.
Static Duration
Memory is allocated to objects with static duration as soon as execution is underway; this storage allocation lasts until
the program terminates. Static duration objects usually reside in fixed data segments allocated according to the memory
specifier in force. All globals have static duration. All functions, wherever defined, are objects with static duration. Other
variables can be given static duration by using the explicit static or extern storage class specifiers.
In the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24, static duration objects are not initialized to zero (or null) in the absence
of any explicit initializer.
Don’t mix static duration with file or global scope. An object can have static duration and local scope – see the example
below.
Local Duration
Local duration objects are also known as automatic objects. They are created on the stack (or in a register) when an
enclosing block or a function is entered. They are deallocated when the program exits that block or function. Local
duration objects must be explicitly initialized; otherwise, their contents are unpredictable.
The storage class specifier auto can be used when declaring local duration variables, but it is usually redundant,
because auto is default for variables declared within a block.
An object with local duration also has local scope because it does not exist outside of its enclosing block. On the other
hand, a local scope object can have static duration. For example:
void f() {
/* local duration variable; init a upon every call to f */
int a = 1;
/* static duration variable; init b only upon first call to f */
static int b = 1;
/* checkpoint! */
a++;
b++;
}
void main() {
/* At checkpoint, we will have: */
f(); // a=1, b=1, after first call,
f(); // a=1, b=2, after second call,
f(); // a=1, b=3, after third call,
// etc.
}
MikroElektronika
198
Types
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 is a strictly typed language, which means that every object, function,
and expression must have a strictly defined type, known in the time of compilation. Note that the mikroC PRO for
dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 works exclusively with numeric types.
The type serves:
- to determine the correct memory allocation required,

- to interpret the bit patterns found in the object during subsequent accesses,
- in many type-checking situations, to ensure that illegal assignments are trapped.
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 supports many standard (predefined) and user-defined data types, including
signed and unsigned integers in various sizes, floating-point numbers with various precisions, arrays, structures, and
unions. In addition, pointers to most of these objects can be established and manipulated in memory.
The type determines how much memory is allocated to an object and how the program will interpret the bit patterns
found in the object’s storage allocation. A given data type can be viewed as a set of values (often implementation-
dependent) that identifiers of that type can assume, together with a set of operations allowed with these values. The
compile-time operator sizeof allows you to determine the size in bytes of any standard or user-defined type.
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 standard libraries and your own program and header files must provide
unambiguous identifiers (or expressions derived from them) and types so that the mikroC PRO for dsPIC can
consistently access, interpret, and (possibly) change the bit patterns in memory corresponding to each active object in
your program.
Type Categories
A common way to categorize types is to divide them into:
- fundamental
- derived
The fudamental types represent types that cannot be split up into smaller parts. They are sometimes referred to as
unstructured types. The fundamental types are void, char, int, float, and double, together with short, long,
signed, and unsigned variants of some of them. For more information on fundamental types, refer to the topic
Fundamental Types.
The derived types are also known as structured types and they include pointers to other types, arrays of other types,
function types, structures, and unions. For more information on derived types, refer to the topic Derived Types.
MikroElektronika
199
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Fundamental Types
The fudamental types represent types that cannot be divided into more basic elements, and are the model for
representing elementary data on machine level. The fudamental types are sometimes referred to as unstructured types,
and are used as elements in creating more complex derived or user-defined types.
The fundamental types include:
- Arithmetic Types
- Enumerations
- Void Type
Arithmetic Types
The arithmetic type specifiers are built up from the following keywords: void, char, int, float and double,
together with the prefixes short, long, signed and unsigned. From these keywords you can build both integral
and floating-point types.
Integral Types
The types char and int, together with their variants, are considered to be integral data types. Variants are created
by using one of the prefix modifiers short, long, signed and unsigned.
In the table below is an overview of the integral types – keywords in parentheses can be (and often are) omitted.
The modifiers signed and unsigned can be applied to both char and int. In the absence of the unsigned prefix,
signed is automatically assumed for integral types. The only exception is char, which is unsigned by default. The
keywords signed and unsigned, when used on their own, mean signed int and unsigned int, respectively.
The modifiers short and long can only be applied to int. The keywords short and long, used on their own,
mean short int and long int, respectively.
Type Size in bytes Range

bit 1-bit 0 or 1
sbit 1-bit 0 or 1
(unsigned) char 1 0 .. 255
signed char 1 - 128 .. 127
(signed) short (int) 1 - 128 .. 127
unsigned short (int) 1 0 .. 255
(signed) int 2 -32768 .. 32767
unsigned (int) 2 0 .. 65535
(signed) long (int) 4 -2147483648 .. 2147483647
unsigned long (int) 4 0 .. 4294967295
MikroElektronika
200
Floating-point Types
The types float and double, together with the long double variant, are considered to be floating-point types. The
mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24’s implementation of an ANSI Standard considers all three to be the same
type.
Floating point in the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 is implemented using the Microchip AN575 32-bit format
(IEEE 754 compliant).
An overview of the floating-point types is shown in the table below:
Type Size in bytes Range

float 4 -1.5 * 1045 .. +3.4 * 1038
double 4 -1.5 * 1045 .. +3.4 * 1038
long double 4 -1.5 * 1045 .. +3.4 * 1038
Enumerations
An enumeration data type is used for representing an abstract, discreet set of values with appropriate symbolic
names.
Enumeration Declaration
Enumeration is declared like this:
enum tag {enumeration-list};
Here, tag is an optional name of the enumeration; enumeration-list is a comma-delimited list of discreet values,
enumerators (or enumeration constants). Each enumerator is assigned a fixed integral value. In the absence of
explicit initializers, the first enumerator is set to zero, and the value of each succeeding enumerator is set to a value of
its predecessor increased by one.
Variables of the enum type are declared the same as variables of any other type. For example, the following
declaration:
establishes a unique integral type, enum colors, variable c of this type, and set of enumerators with constant integer
values (black = 0, red = 1, ...). In the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24, a variable of an enumerated type can be
assigned any value of the type int – no type checking beyond that is enforced. That is:
c = red; // OK
c = 1; // Also OK, means the same
MikroElektronika
201
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
With explicit integral initializers, you can set one or more enumerators to specific values. The initializer can be any
expression yielding a positive or negative integer value (after possible integer promotions). Any subsequent names
without initializers will be increased by one. These values are usually unique, but duplicates are legal.
The order of constants can be explicitly re-arranged. For example:
enum colors { black, // value 0

red, // value 1
green, // value 2
blue=6, // value 6
violet, // value 7
white=4 }; // value 4
Initializer expression can include previously declared enumerators. For example, in the following declaration:
enum memory_sizes { bit = 1, nibble = 4 * bit, byte = 2 * nibble,

kilobyte = 1024 * byte };
nibble would acquire the value 4, byte the value 8, and kilobyte the value 8192.
Anonymous Enum Type

In our previous declaration, the identifier colors is an optional enumeration tag that can be used in subsequent
declarations of enumeration variables of the enum colors type:
enum colors bg, border; /* declare variables bg and border */
Like with struct and union declarations, you can omit the tag if no further variables of this enum type are required:
/* Anonymous enum type: */

enum { black, red, green, blue, violet, white } color;
Enumeration Scope
Enumeration tags share the same name space as structure and union tags. Enumerators share the same name space
as ordinary variable identifiers:
int blue = 73;
{ // open a block
/* enumerator blue = 3 now hides outer declaration of int blue */
struct colors { int i, j; }; // ILLEGAL: colors duplicate tag

double red = 2; // ILLEGAL: redefinition of red
}
blue = 37; // back in int blue scope
MikroElektronika
202
Void Type
void is a special type indicating the absence of any value. There are no objects of void; instead, void is used for
deriving more complex types.
Void Functions
Use the void keyword as a function return type if the function does not return a value.
void print_temp(char temp) {

Lcd_Out_Cp(“Temperature:”);
Lcd_Out_Cp(temp);
Lcd_Chr_Cp(223); // degree character
Lcd_Chr_Cp(‘C’);
}
Use void as a function heading if the function does not take any parameters. Alternatively, you can just write empty
parentheses:
main(void) { // same as main()

...
}
Generic Pointers
Pointers can be declared as void, which means that they can point to any type. These pointers are sometimes called
generic.
Derived Types
The derived types are also known as structured types. They are used as elements in creating more complex user-
defined types.
The derived types include:
- arrays
- pointers
- structures
- unions
MikroElektronika
203
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Arrays
Array is the simplest and most commonly used structured type. A variable of array type is actually an array of objects
of the same type. These objects represent elements of an array and are identified by their position in array. An array
consists of a contiguous region of storage exactly large enough to hold all of its elements.
Array Declaration
Array declaration is similar to variable declaration, with the brackets added after identifer:
type array_name[constant-expression]
This declares an array named as array_name and composed of elements of type. The type can be any scalar type
(except void), user-defined type, pointer, enumeration, or another array. Result of constant-expression within the
brackets determines a number of elements in array. If an expression is given in an array declarator, it must evaluate to
a positive constant integer. The value is a number of elements in an array.
Each of the elements of an array is indexed from 0 to the number of elements minus one. If a number of elements is n,
elements of array can be approached as variables array_name[0] .. array_name[n-1] of type.
Here are a few examples of array declaration:
#define MAX = 50
int vector_one[10]; /* declares an array of 10 integers */
float vector_two[MAX]; /* declares an array of 50 floats */
float vector_three[MAX - 20]; /* declares an array of 30 floats */
Array Initialization
An array can be initialized in declaration by assigning it a comma-delimited sequence of values within braces. When
initializing an array in declaration, you can omit the number of elements – it will be automatically determined according
to the number of elements assigned. For example:
/* Declare an array which holds number of days in each month: */

int days[12] = {31,28,31,30,31,30,31,31,30,31,30,31};
/* This declaration is identical to the previous one */

int days[] = {31,28,31,30,31,30,31,31,30,31,30,31};
If you specify both the length and starting values, the number of starting values must not exceed the specified length. The opposite
is possible, in this case the trailing “excess” elements will be assigned to some encountered runtime values from memory.
In case of array of char, you can use a shorter string literal notation. For example:
/* The two declarations are identical: */

const char msg1[] = {‘T’, ‘e’, ‘s’, ‘t’, ‘\0’};
const char msg2[] = “Test”;
For more information on string literals, refer to String Constants.
MikroElektronika
204
Arrays in Expressions
When the name of an array comes up in expression evaluation (except with operators & and sizeof), it is implicitly
converted to the pointer pointing to array’s first element. See Arrays and Pointers for more information.
Multi-dimensional Arrays
An array is one-dimensional if it is of scalar type. One-dimensional arrays are sometimes referred to as vectors.
Multidimensional arrays are constructed by declaring arrays of array type. These arrays are stored in memory in such
way that the right most subscript changes fastest, i.e. arrays are stored “in rows”. Here is a sample of 2-dimensional
array:
float m[50][20]; /* 2-dimensional array of size 50x20 */
A variable m is an array of 50 elements, which in turn are arrays of 20 floats each. Thus, we have a matrix of 50x20
elements: the first element is m[0][0], the last one is m[49][19]. The first element of the 5th row would be m[4]
[0].
If you don’t initialize the array in the declaration, you can omit the first dimension of multi-dimensional array. In that
case, array is located elsewhere, e.g. in another file. This is a commonly used technique when passing arrays as
function parameters:
int a[3][2][4]; /* 3-dimensional array of size 3x2x4 */
void func(int n[][2][4]) { /* we can omit first dimension */

...
n[2][1][3]++; /* increment the last element*/
}
void main() {
...
func(a);
}
You can initialize a multi-dimensional array with an appropriate set of values within braces. For example:
int a[3][2] = {{1,2}, {2,6}, {3,7}};
MikroElektronika
205
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Pointers
Pointers are special objects for holding (or “pointing to”) memory addresses. In the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and
PIC24, address of an object in memory can be obtained by means of an unary operator &. To reach the pointed object,
we use an indirection operator (*) on a pointer.
A pointer of type “pointer to object of type” holds the address of (that is, points to) an object of type. Since pointers are
objects, you can have a pointer pointing to a pointer (and so on). Other objects commonly pointed to include arrays,
structures, and unions.
A pointer to a function is best thought of as an address, usually in a code segment, where that function’s executable
code is stored; that is, the address to which control is transferred when that function is called.
Although pointers contain numbers with most of the characteristics of unsigned integers, they have their own rules and
restrictions for declarations, assignments, conversions, and arithmetic. The examples in the next few sections illustrate
these rules and restrictions.
Pointer Declarations
Pointers are declared the same as any other variable, but with * ahead of identifier. A type at the beginning of declaration
specifies the type of a pointed object. A pointer must be declared as pointing to some particular type, even if that type
is void, which really means a pointer to anything. Pointers to void are often called generic pointers, and are treated
as pointers to char in the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24.
If type is any predefined or user-defined type, including void, the declaration
type *p; /* Uninitialized pointer */
declares p to be of type “pointer to type”. All scoping, duration, and visibility rules are applied to the p object just
declared. You can view the declaration in this way: if *p is an object of type, then p has to be a pointer to such object
(object of type).
Note: You must initialize pointers before using them! Our previously declared pointer *p is not initialized (i.e.
assigned a value), so it cannot be used yet.
In case of multiple pointer declarations, each identifier requires an indirect operator. For example:
int *pa, *pb, *pc;
// is same as :
int *pa;
int *pb;
int *pc;
Once declared, though, a pointer can usually be reassigned so that it points to an object of another type. The mikroC
PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 lets you reassign pointers without typecasting, but the compiler will warn you unless
the pointer was originally declared to be pointing to void. You can assign the void* pointer to the non-void* pointer
– refer to void for details.
MikroElektronika
206
Null Pointers
A null pointer value is an address that is guaranteed to be different from any valid pointer in use in a program. Assigning
the integer constant 0 to a pointer assigns a null pointer value to it.
For example:
int *pn = 0; /* Here’s one null pointer */
/* We can test the pointer like this: */

if ( pn == 0 ) { ... }
The pointer type “pointer to void” must not be confused with the null pointer. The declaration
void *vp;
declares that vp is a generic pointer capable of being assigned to by any “pointer to type” value, including null, without
complaint.
Assignments without proper casting between a “pointer to type1” and a “pointer to type2”, where type1 and type2
are different types, can invoke a compiler warning or error. If type1 is a function and type2 isn’t (or vice versa),
pointer assignments are illegal. If type1 is a pointer to void, no cast is needed. If type2 is a pointer to void, no
cast is needed.
Assign an address to a Function Pointer

It’s quite easy to assign the address of a function to a function pointer. Simply take the name of a suitable and known
function. Using the address operator & infront of the function’s name is optional.
//Assign an address to the function pointer
int DoIt (float a, char b, char c){ return a+b+c; }

pt2Function = &DoIt; // assignment
MikroElektronika
207
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Example:
int addC(char x,char y){
return x+y;
}
int subC(char x,char y){
return x-y;
}
int mulC(char x,char y){
return x*y;
}
int divC(char x,char y){
return x/y;
}
int modC(char x,char y){
return x%y;
}
//array of pointer to functions that receive two chars and returns int
int (*arrpf[])(char,char) = { addC ,subC,mulC,divC,modC};
int res;
char i;
void main() {
for (i=0;i<5;i++){
res = arrpf[i](10,20);
}
MikroElektronika
208
Function Pointers
Function Pointers are pointers, i.e. variables, which point to the address of a function.
// Define a function pointer

int (*pt2Function) (float, char, char);
Note: Thus functions and function pointers with different calling convention (argument order, arguments type or
return type is different) are incompatible with each other.
Assign an address to a Function Pointer

It’s quite easy to assign the address of a function to a function pointer. Simply take the name of a suitable and known
function. Using the address operator & infront of the function’s name is optional.
//Assign an address to the function pointer
int DoIt (float a, char b, char c){ return a+b+c; }

pt2Function = &DoIt; // assignment
Example:
int addC(char x,char y){
return x+y;
}
int subC(char x,char y){
return x-y;
}
int mulC(char x,char y){
return x*y;
}
int divC(char x,char y){
return x/y;
}
int modC(char x,char y){
return x%y;
}
MikroElektronika
209
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
//array of pointer to functions that receive two chars and returns int
int (*arrpf[])(char,char) = { addC ,subC,mulC,divC,modC};
int res;
char i;
void main() {
for (i=0;i<5;i++){
res = arrpf[i](10,20);
}
Pointer Arithmetic
Pointer arithmetic in the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 is limited to:
- assigning one pointer to another,

- comparing two pointers,
- comparing pointer to zero,
- adding/subtracting pointer and an integer value,
- subtracting two pointers.
The internal arithmetic performed on pointers depends on the memory specifier in force and the presence of any
overriding pointer modifiers. When performing arithmetic with pointers, it is assumed that the pointer points to an array
of objects.
Arrays and Pointers

Arrays and pointers are not completely independent types in the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24. When the
name of an array comes up in expression evaluation (except with operators & and sizeof), it is implicitly converted to
the pointer pointing to array’s first element. Due to this fact, arrays are not modifiable lvalues.
Brackets [ ] indicate array subscripts. The expression
id[exp]
is defined as
*((id) + (exp))
where either:
- id is a pointer and exp is an integer, or

- id is an integer and exp is a pointer.
MikroElektronika
210
The following statements are true:
&a[i] = a + i
a[i] = *(a + i)
According to these guidelines, it can be written:
pa = &a[4]; // pa points to a[4]

x = *(pa + 3); // x = a[7]
/* .. but: */
y = *pa + 3; // y = a[4] + 3
Also the care should be taken when using operator precedence:
*pa++; // Equal to *(pa++), increments the pointer

(*pa)++; // Increments the pointed object!
The following examples are also valid, but better avoid this syntax as it can make the code really illegible:
(a + 1)[i] = 3;
// same as: *((a + 1) + i) = 3, i.e. a[i + 1] = 3
(i + 2)[a] = 0;
// same as: *((i + 2) + a) = 0, i.e. a[i + 2] = 0
Assignment and Comparison

The simple assignment operator (=) can be used to assign value of one pointer to another if they are of the same type.
If they are of different types, you must use a typecast operator. Explicit type conversion is not necessary if one of the
pointers is generic (of the void type).
Assigning the integer constant 0 to a pointer assigns a null pointer value to it.
Two pointers pointing to the same array may be compared by using relational operators ==, !=, <, <=, >, and >=.
Results of these operations are the same as if they were used on subscript values of array elements in question:
int *pa = &a[4], *pb = &a[2];
if (pa == pb) {... /* won’t be executed as 4 is not equal to 2 */ }

if (pa > pb) {... /* will be executed as 4 is greater than 2 */ }
You can also compare pointers to zero value – testing in that way if the pointer actually points to anything. All pointers
can be successfully tested for equality or inequality to null:
if (pa == 0) { ... }
if (pb != 0) { ... }
Note: Comparing pointers pointing to different objects/arrays can be performed at programmer’s own responsibility
— a precise overview of data’s physical storage is required
MikroElektronika
211
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Pointer Addition
You can use operators +, ++, and += to add an integral value to a pointer. The result of addition is defined only if the
pointer points to an element of an array and if the result is a pointer pointing to the same array (or one element beyond
it).
If a pointer is declared to point to type, adding an integral value n to the pointer increments the pointer value by n *
sizeof(type) as long as the pointer remains within the legal range (first element to one beyond the last element). If
type has a size of 10 bytes, then adding 5 to a pointer to type advances the pointer 50 bytes in memory. In case of
the void type, the size of a step is one byte.
For example:
int a[10]; /* array a containing 10 elements of type int */

int *pa = &a[0]; /* pa is pointer to int, pointing to a[0] */
*(pa + 3) = 6; /* pa+3 is a pointer pointing to a[3], so a[3] now equals 6 */
pa++; /* pa now points to the next element of array a: a[1] */
There is no such element as “one past the last element”, of course, but the pointer is allowed to assume such value. C
“guarantees” that the result of addition is defined even when pointing to one element past array. If P points to the last
array element, P + 1 is legal, but P + 2 is undefined.
This allows you to write loops which access the array elements in a sequence by means of incrementing pointer — in
the last iteration you will have the pointer pointing to one element past the array, which is legal. However, applying an
indirection operator (*) to a “pointer to one past the last element” leads to undefined behavior.
For example:
void f (some_type a[], int n) {

/* function f handles elements of array a; */
/* array a has n elements of type some_type */
int i;
some_type *p=&a[0];
for ( i = 0; i < n; i++ ) {

/* .. here we do something with *p .. */
p++; /* .. and with the last iteration p exceeds
the last element of array a */
}
/* at this point, *p is undefined! */
}
MikroElektronika
212
Pointer Subtraction
Similar to addition, you can use operators -, -- , and -= to subtract an integral value from a pointer.
Also, you may subtract two pointers. The difference will be equal to the distance between two pointed addresses, in
bytes.
For example:
int a[10];
int *pi1 = &a[0];
int *pi2 = &a[4];
i = pi2 - pi1; /* i equals 8 */
pi2 -= (i >> 1); /* pi2 = pi2 - 4: pi2 now points to [0] */
Structures
A structure is a derived type usually representing a user-defined collection of named members (or components). These
members can be of any type, either fundamental or derived (with some restrictions to be discussed later), in any
sequence. In addition, a structure member can be a bit field.
Unlike arrays, structures are considered to be single objects. The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 structure
type lets you handle complex data structures almost as easily as single variables.
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 supports anonymous structures.
Structure Declaration and Initialization

Structures are declared using the keyword struct:
struct tag {member-declarator-list};
Here, tag is the name of a structure; member-declarator-list is a list of structure members, actually a list of
variable declarations. Variables of structured type are declared the same as variables of any other type.
The member type cannot be the same as the struct type being currently declared. However, a member can be a pointer
to the structure being declared, as in the following example:
struct mystruct {mystruct s;}; /* illegal! */

struct mystruct {mystruct *ps;}; /* OK */
MikroElektronika
213
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Also, a structure can contain previously defined structure types when declaring an instance of declared structure. Here
is an example:
/* Structure defining a dot: */

struct Dot {float x, y;};
/* Structure defining a circle: */

struct Circle {
float r;
struct Dot center;
} o1, o2;
/* declare variables o1 and o2 of Circle */
Note that the structure tag can be omitted, but then additional objects of this type cannot be declared elsewhere. For
more information, see the Untagged Structures below.
Structure is initialized by assigning it a comma-delimited sequence of values within braces, similar to array. For
example:
/* Referring to declarations from the example above: */
/* Declare and initialize dots p and q: */

struct Dot p = {1., 1.}, q = {3.7, -0.5};
/* Declare and initialize circle o1: */

struct Circle o1 = {1., {0., 0.}}; // radius is 1, center is at (0, 0)
Incomplete Declarations
Incomplete declarations are also known as forward declarations. A pointer to a structure type A can legally appear in
the declaration of another structure B before A has been declared:
struct A; // incomplete
struct B {struct A *pa;};
struct A {struct B *pb;};
The first appearance of A is called incomplete because there is no definition for it at that point. An incomplete declaration
is allowed here, because the definition of B doesn’t need the size of A.
MikroElektronika
214
Untagged Structures and Typedefs

If the structure tag is omitted, an untagged structure is created. The untagged structures can be used to declare the
identifiers in the comma-delimited member-declarator-list to be of the given structure type (or derived from it),
but additional objects of this type cannot be declared elsewhere.
It is possible to create a typedef while declaring a structure, with or without tag:
/* With tag: */
typedef struct mystruct { ... } Mystruct;
Mystruct s, *ps, arrs[10]; /* same as struct mystruct s, etc. */
/* Without tag: */
typedef struct { ... } Mystruct;
Mystruct s, *ps, arrs[10];
Usually, there is no need to use both tag and typedef: either can be used in structure type declarations.
Untagged structure and union members are ignored during initialization.
Anonymous Structures
mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 allows you to declare a structure variable within another structure without
giving it a name.
These nested structures are called anonymous structures.
You can access the members of an anonymous structure as if they were members in the containing structure:
struct phone{
int areacode;
long number;
};
struct person {
char name[30];
char gender;
int age;
int weight;
struct phone; // Anonymous structure; no name needed
} Jim;
Jim.number = 1234567;
}
Related topics: Working with structures
MikroElektronika
215
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Working with Structures

Structures represent user-defined types. A set of rules regarding the application of structures is strictly defined.
Assignment
Variables of the same structured type may be assigned one to another by means of simple assignment operator (=).
This will copy the entire contents of the variable to destination, regardless of the inner complexity of a given structure.
Note that two variables are of the same structured type only if they are both defined by the same instruction or using
the same type identifier. For example:
/* a and b are of the same type: */

struct {int m1, m2;} a, b;
/* But c and d are _not_ of the same type although

their structure descriptions are identical: */
struct {int m1, m2;} c;
struct {int m1, m2;} d;
Size of Structure
The size of the structure in memory can be retrieved by means of the operator sizeof. It is not necessary that the
size of the structure is equal to the sum of its members’ sizes. It is often greater due to certain limitations of memory
storage.
Structures and Functions

A function can return a structure type or a pointer to a structure type:
mystruct func1(void); /* func1() returns a structure */

mystruct *func2(void); /* func2() returns pointer to structure */
A structure can be passed as an argument to a function in the following ways:
void func1(mystruct s;); /* directly */

void func2(mystruct *sptr;); /* via a pointer */
MikroElektronika
216
Structure Member Access

Structure and union members are accessed using the following two selection operators:
- . (period)
- -> (right arrow)
The operator . is called the direct member selector and it is used to directly access one of the structure’s members.
Suppose that the object s is of the struct type S and m is a member identifier of the type M declared in s, then the
expression
s.m // direct access to member m
is of the type M, and represents the member object m in S.
The operator -> is called the indirect (or pointer) member selector. Suppose that the object s is of the struct type S and
ps is a pointer to s. Then if m is a member identifier of the type M declared in s, the expression
ps->m // indirect access to member m;

// identical to (*ps).m
is of the type M, and represents the member object m in s. The expression ps->m is a convenient shorthand for
(*ps).m.
For example:
struct mystruct {
int i;
char str[21];
double d;
} s, *sptr = &s;
...
s.i = 3; // assign to the i member of mystruct s

sptr -> d = 1.23; // assign to the d member of mystruct s
The expression s.m is lvalue, providing that s is lvalue and m is not an array type. The expression sptr->m is an lvalue
unless m is an array type.
MikroElektronika
217
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Accessing Nested Structures

If the structure B contains a field whose type is the structure A, the members of A can be accessed by two applications
of the member selectors:
struct A {
int j; double x;
};
struct B {
int i; struct A aa; double d;
} s, *sptr;
...
s.i = 3; // assign 3 to the i member of B

s.aa.j = 2; // assign 2 to the j member of A
sptr->d = 1.23; // assign 1.23 to the d member of B
sptr->aa.x = 3.14; // assign 3.14 to x member of A
Structure Uniqueness
Each structure declaration introduces a unique structure type, so that in
struct A {
int i,j; double d;
} aa, aaa;
struct B {
int i,j; double d;
} bb;
the objects aa and aaa are both of the type struct A, but the objects aa and bb are of different structure types.
Structures can be assigned only if the source and destination have the same type:
aa = aaa; /* OK: same type, member by member assignment */

aa = bb; /* ILLEGAL: different types */
/* but you can assign member by member: */

aa.i = bb.i;
aa.j = bb.j;
aa.d = bb.d;
MikroElektronika
218
Unions
Union types are derived types sharing many of syntactic and functional features of structure types. The key difference
is that a union members share the same memory space.
Note: The mikroC PRO for PIC supports anonymous unions.
Union Declaration
Unions have the same declaration as structures, with the keyword union used instead of struct:
union tag { member-declarator-list };
Unlike structures’ members, the value of only one of union’s members can be stored at any time. Here is a simple
example:
union myunion { // union tag is ‘myunion’

int i;
double d;
char ch;
} mu, *pm;
The identifier mu, of the type myunion, can be used to hold a 2-byte int, 4-byte double or single-byte char, but only
one of them at a certain moment. The identifier pm is a pointer to union myunion.
Size of Union
The size of a union is the size of its largest member. In our previous example, both sizeof(union myunion) and
sizeof(mu) return 4, but 2 bytes are unused (padded) when mu holds the int object, and 3 bytes are unused when
mu holds char.
Union Member Access

Union members can be accessed with the structure member selectors (. and ->), be careful when doing this:
/* Referring to declarations from the example above: */

pm = μ
mu.d = 4.016;
tmp = mu.d; // OK: mu.d = 4.016
tmp = mu.i; // peculiar result
pm->i = 3;
tmp = mu.i; // OK: mu.i = 3
The third line is legal, since mu.i is an integral type. However, the bit pattern in mu.i corresponds to parts of the
previously assigned double. As such, it probably won’t provide an useful integer interpretation.
When properly converted, a pointer to a union points to each of its members, and vice versa.
MikroElektronika
219
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Anonymous Unions
Anonymous unions are unions that are declared without tag or declarator:
union { member-declarator-list };
Such union declarations do not declare types; they declare an unnamed objects.
The name of each union member must be unique within the scope where the union is declared.
In C, an anonymous union can have a tag; it cannot have declarators. Names declared in an anonymous union are
used directly, like nonmember variables.
In addition to the restrictions listed above in Union, anonymous unions are subject to additional restrictions:
- They must also be declared as static if declared in global scope. If declared in local scope, they must be
either static or automatic, not external
- They can have only public members; private and protected members in anonymous unions generate
errors.
- They cannot have function members.
Here is a simple example:
union { // no union tag

int i;
float f;
union { // no union tag
unsigned char uc;
char c;
}; // no declarator
}; // no declarator
Anonymous Union Member Access

Anonymous union members are accessed directly because they are in the scope containing the anonymous union :
// Referring to declarations from the example above:

i = 1;
f = 3.14;
uc = ‘c’;
c = ‘u’;
MikroElektronika
220
Bit Fields
Bit fields are specified numbers of bits that may or may not have an associated identifier. Bit fields offer a way of
subdividing structures into named parts of user-defined sizes.
Structures and unions can contain bit fields that can be up to 16 bits.
You cannot take the address of a bit field.
Note: If you need to handle specific bits of 8-bit variables (char and unsigned short) or registers, you don’t
need to declare bit fields.
Much more elegant solution is to use the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24’s intrinsic ability for
individual bit access — see Accessing Individual Bits for more information.
Bit Fields Declaration

Bit fields can be declared only in structures and unions. Declare a structure normally and assign individual fields like
this (fields need to be unsigned):
struct tag {
unsigned bitfield-declarator-list;
}
Here, tag is an optional name of the structure; bitfield-declarator-list is a list of bit fields. Each component
identifer requires a colon and its width in bits to be explicitly specified. Total width of all components cannot exceed two
bytes (16 bits).
As an object, bit fields structure takes two bytes. Individual fields are packed within two bytes from right to left. In
bitfield-declarator-list, you can omit identifier(s) to create an artificial “padding”, thus skipping irrelevant bits.
For example, if there is a need to manipulate only bits 2–4 of a register as one block, create a structure like this:
struct {
unsigned : 2, // Skip bits 0 and 1, no identifier here
mybits : 3; // Relevant bits 2, 3 and 4
// Bits 5, 6 and 7 are implicitly left out
} myreg;
Here is an example:
typedef struct {
lo_nibble : 4;
hi_nibble : 4;
high_byte : 8;} myunsigned;
which declares the structured type myunsigned containing three components: lo_nibble (bits 3..0), hi_nibble
(bits 7..4) and high_byte (bits 15..8).
MikroElektronika
221
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Bit Fields Access

Bit fields can be accessed in the same way as the structure members. Use direct and indirect member selector (. and
->). For example, we could work with our previously declared myunsigned like this:
// Declare a bit field Value_For_PortB:

myunsigned Value_For_PortB;
// Declare a pointer to mybitfield type:

mybitfield *TimerControl;
void main() {
TimerControl = (mybitfield *) (void *) &T2CON ; // explicit casting of pointer to
T2CON, so it can be assigned
...
Value_For_PortB.lo_nibble = 7;
Value_For_PortB.hi_nibble = 0x0C;
Value_For_PortB.high_byte = 0xAA;
PORTB = *(unsigned *) (void *)&Value_For_PortB;
// typecasting :
// 1. address of structure to pointer to void
// 2. pointer to void to pointer to unsigned
// 3. dereferencing to obtain the value
}
Types Conversions
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 is a strictly typed language, with each operator, statement and function
demanding appropriately typed operands/arguments. However, we often have to use objects of “mismatching” types in
expressions. In that case, type conversion is needed.
Conversion of object of one type means that object’s type is changed into another type. The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33
and PIC24 defines a set of standard conversions for built-in types, provided by compiler when necessary. For more
information, refer to the Standard Conversions.
Conversion is required in the following situations:
- if a statement requires an expression of particular type (according to language definition), and we use an
expression of different type,
- if an operator requires an operand of particular type, and we use an operand of different type,
- if a function requires a formal parameter of particular type, and we pass it an object of different type,
- if an expression following the keyword return does not match the declared function return type,
- if intializing an object (in declaration) with an object of different type.
In these situations, compiler will provide an automatic implicit conversion of types, without any programmer’s interference.
Also, the programmer can demand conversion explicitly by means of the typecast operator. For more information, refer
to the Explicit Typecasting.
MikroElektronika
222
Standard Conversions
Standard conversions are built in the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24. These conversions are performed
automatically, whenever required in the program. They can also be explicitly required by means of the typecast operator
(refer to the Explicit Typecasting).
The basic rule of automatic (implicit) conversion is that the operand of simpler type is converted (promoted) to the type
of more complex operand. Then, the type of the result is that of more complex operand.
Arithmetic Conversions
When using arithmetic expression, such as a + b, where a and b are of different arithmetic types, the mikroC PRO
for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 performs implicit type conversions before the expression is evaluated. These standard
conversions include promotions of “lower” types to “higher” types in the interests of accuracy and consistency.
Assigning a signed character object (such as a variable) to an integral object results in automatic sign extension.
Objects of type signed char always use sign extension; objects of type unsigned char always has its high byte set to
zero when converted to int.
Converting a longer integral type to a shorter type truncates the higher order bits and leaves low-order bits unchanged.
Converting a shorter integral type to a longer type either sign-extends or zero-fills the extra bits of the new value,
depending on whether the shorter type is signed or unsigned, respectively.
Note: Conversion of floating point data into integral value (in assignments or via explicit typecast) produces correct
results only if the float value does not exceed the scope of destination integral type.
In details:
Here are the steps the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 uses to convert the operands in an arithmetic
expression:
First, any small integral types are converted according to the following rules:
1. bit converts to char

2. char converts to int
3. signed char converts to int, with the same value
4. short converts to int, with the same value, sign-extended
5. unsigned short converts to unsigned int, with the same value, zero-filled
6. enum converts to int, with the same value
After this, any two values associated with an operator are either int (including the long and unsigned modifiers) or
float (equivalent with double and long double in the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24).
1. If either operand is float, the other operand is converted to float.

2. Otherwise, if either operand is unsigned long, the other operand is converted to unsigned long.
3. Otherwise, if either operand is long, then the other operand is converted to long.
4. Otherwise, if either operand is unsigned, then the other operand is converted to unsigned.
5. Otherwise, both operands are int.
The result of the expression is the same type as that of the two operands.
MikroElektronika
223
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Here are several examples of implicit conversion:
2 + 3.1 /* → 2. + 3.1 → 5.1 */

5 / 4 * 3. /* → (5/4)*3. → 1*3. → 1.*3. → 3. */
3. * 5 / 4 /* → (3.*5)/4 → (3.*5.)/4 → 15./4 → 15./4. → 3.75 */
Pointer Conversions
Pointer types can be converted to other pointer types using the typecasting mechanism:
char *str;
int *ip;
str = (char *)ip;
More generally, the cast type* will convert a pointer to type “pointer to type”.
Explicit Types Conversions (Typecasting)

In most situations, compiler will provide an automatic implicit conversion of types where needed, without any user’s
interference. Also, the user can explicitly convert an operand to another type using the prefix unary typecast operator:
(type) object
This will convert object to a specified type. Parentheses are mandatory.
For example:
/* Let’s have two variables of char type: */

char a, b;
/* Following line will coerce a to unsigned int: */

(unsigned int) a;
/* Following line will coerce a to double,

then coerce b to double automatically,
resulting in double type value: */
(double) a + b; // equivalent to ((double) a) + b;
MikroElektronika
224
Declarations
A declaration introduces one or several names to a program – it informs the compiler what the name represents, what
its type is, what operations are allowed with it, etc. This section reviews concepts related to declarations: declarations,
definitions, declaration specifiers, and initialization.
The range of objects that can be declared includes:
- Variables
- Constants
- Functions
- Types
- Structure, union, and enumeration tags
- Structure members
- Union members
- Arrays of other types
- Statement labels
- Preprocessor macros
Declarations and Definitions

Defining declarations, also known as definitions, beside introducing the name of an object, also establish the creation
(where and when) of an object; that is, the allocation of physical memory and its possible initialization. Referencing
declarations, or just declarations, simply make their identifiers and types known to the compiler.
Here is an overview. Declaration is also a definition, except if:
- it declares a function without specifying its body

- it has the extern specifier, and has no initializator or body (in case of func.)
- it is the typedef declaration
There can be many referencing declarations for the same identifier, especially in a multifile program, but only one
defining declaration for that identifier is allowed.
For example:
/* Here is a nondefining declaration of function max; */

/* it merely informs compiler that max is a function */
int max();
/* Here is a definition of function max: */

int max(int x, int y) {
return (x >= y) ? x : y;
}
/* Definition of variable i: */
int i;
/* Following line is an error, i is already defined! */

int i;
MikroElektronika
225
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Declarations and Declarators

The declaration contains specifier(s) followed by one or more identifiers (declarators). The declaration begins with
optional storage class specifiers, type specifiers, and other modifiers. The identifiers are separated by commas and the
list is terminated by a semicolon.
Declarations of variable identifiers have the following pattern:
storage-class [type-qualifier] type var1 [=init1], var2 [=init2], ... ;
where var1, var2,... are any sequence of distinct identifiers with optional initializers. Each of the variables is
declared to be of type; if omitted, type defaults to int. The specifier storage-class can take the values extern,
static, register, or the default auto. Optional type-qualifier can take values const or volatile. For
more details, refer to Storage Classes and Type Qualifiers.
For example:
/* Create 3 integer variables called x, y, and z

and initialize x and y to the values 1 and 2, respectively: */
int x = 1, y = 2, z; // z remains uninitialized
/* Create a floating-point variable q with static modifier,

and initialize it to 0.25: */
static float q = .25;
These are all defining declarations; storage is allocated and any optional initializers are applied.
Linkage
An executable program is usually created by compiling several independent translation units, then linking the resulting
object files with preexisting libraries. A term translation unit refers to a source code file together with any included files,
but without the source lines omitted by conditional preprocessor directives. A problem arises when the same identifier
is declared in different scopes (for example, in different files), or declared more than once in the same scope.
The linkage is a process that allows each instance of an identifier to be associated correctly with one particular object
or function. All identifiers have one of two linkage attributes, closely related to their scope: external linkage or internal
linkage. These attributes are determined by the placement and format of your declarations, together with an explicit (or
implicit by default) use of the storage class specifier static or extern.
Each instance of a particular identifier with external linkage represents the same object or function throughout the entire
set of files and libraries making up the program. Each instance of a particular identifier with internal linkage represents
the same object or function within one file only.
MikroElektronika
226
Linkage Rules
Local names have internal linkage; the same identifier can be used in different files to signify different objects. Global
names have external linkage; identifier signifies the same object throughout all program files.
If the same identifier appears with both internal and external linkage within the same file, the identifier will have internal
linkage.
Internal Linkage Rules

1. names having file scope, explicitly declared as static, have internal linkage
2. names having file scope, explicitly declared as const and not explicitly declared as extern, have
internal linkage
3. typedef names have internal linkage
4. enumeration constants have internal linkage
External Linkage Rules
1. names having file scope, that do not comply to any of previously stated internal linkage rules, have
external linkage
The storage class specifiers auto and register cannot appear in an external declaration. No more than one external
definition can be given for each identifier in a translation unit declared with internal linkage. An external definition is
an external declaration that defines an object or a function and also allocates a storage. If an identifier declared with
external linkage is used in an expression (other than as part of the operand of sizeof), then exactly one external
definition of that identifier must be somewhere in the entire program.
Storage Classes
Associating identifiers with objects requires each identifier to have at least two attributes: storage class and type
(sometimes referred to as data type). The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 compiler deduces these attributes
from implicit or explicit declarations in the source code.
A storage class dictates the location (data segment, register, heap, or stack) of object and its duration or lifetime (the
entire running time of the program, or during execution of some blocks of code). A storage class can be established by
the syntax of a declaration, by its placement in the source code, or by both of these factors:
storage-class type identifier
The storage class specifiers in the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 are:
- auto
- register
- static
- extern
MikroElektronika
227
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Auto
The auto storage-class specifier declares an automatic variable (a variable with a local lifetime). An auto variable is
visible only within the block in which it is declared.
The auto storage-class specifier can only be applied to names of variables declared in a block or tonames of function
parameters.
However, these names have automatic storage by default. Therefore the auto storage class specifier is usually
redundant in a data declaration.
Register
The register storage-class specifier is used to define local variables that should be stored in a register instead of RAM.
At the moment this modifier has no special meaning in mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24.
mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 simply ignores requests for register allocation.
Static
The static storage class specifier lets you define variables or functions with internal linkage, which means that each
instance of a particular identifier represents the same variable or function within one file only.
In addition, variables declared static have static storage duration, which means that memory for these variables is
allocated when the program begins running and is freed when the program terminates.
Static storage duration for a variable is different from file or global scope. A variable can have static duration, but local
scope.
Extern
The extern storage class specifier lets you declare objects that can be used in several source files. An extern declaration
makes a described variable usable by the succeeding part of the current source file.
This declaration does not replace the definition. It is used to describe a variable that is externally defined. An extern
declaration can appear outside a function or at the beginning of a block.
If the declaration describes a function or appears outside a function and describes an object with external linkage, the
keyword extern is optional.
If a declaration for an identifier already exists within the file scope, any extern declaration of the same identifier found
within a block refers to the same object.
If no other declaration for the identifier exists within the file scope, the identifier has external linkage.
See Linkage for more information.
MikroElektronika
228
Type Qualifiers
The type qualifiers const and volatile are optional in declarations and do not actually affect the type of declared
object.
Qualifier const
The const qualifier is used to indicate that variable value cannot be changed. Its value is set at initialization.
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 treats objects declared with the const qualifier the same as literals or
preprocessor constants. If the user tries to change an object declared with the const qualifier compiler will report an
error.
For example:
const double PI = 3.14159;
Qualifier volatile
The volatile qualifier indicates that variable values can be changed both with or without user’s interference in the
program. The compiler should not optimize such variable.
Typedef Specifier
The typedef declaration introduces a name that, within its scope, becomes a synonym for the specified type. You can
use typedef declarations to construct shorter or more meaningful names for types already defined by the language or
declared by the user.
Typedef names allow you to encapsulate implementation details that may change. Unlike the struct, union, and
enum declarations, the typedef declarations do not introduce new types, but new names for existing types.
The specifier typedef stands first in the declaration:
typedef <type_definition> synonym;
The typedef keyword assigns synonym to <type_definition>. The synonym needs to be a valid identifier.
A declaration starting with the typedef specifier does not introduce an object or a function of a given type, but rather
a new name for a given type. In other words, the typedef declaration is identical to a “normal” declaration, but instead
of objects, it declares types. It is a common practice to name custom type identifiers with starting capital letter — this is
not required by the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24.
MikroElektronika
229
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
For example:
/* Let’s declare a synonym for “unsigned long int” */

typedef unsigned long int Distance;
/* Now, synonym “Distance” can be used as type identifier: */

Distance i; // declare variable i of unsigned long int
In the typedef declaration, as in any other declaration, several types can be declared at once. For example:
typedef int *Pti, Array[10];
Here, Pti is a synonym for type “pointer to int”, and Array is a synonym for type “array of 10 int elements”.
asm Declaration
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 allows embedding assembly in the source code by means of the asm
declaration. The declarations _asm and __asm are also allowed in the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 and
have the same meaning. Note that numerals cannnot be used as absolute addresses for SFR or GPR variables in
assembly instructions. Symbolic names may be used instead (listing will display these names as well as addresses).
Assembly instructions can be grouped by the asm keyword (or _asm, or __asm):
asm {
block of assembly instructions
}
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 comments (both single-line and multi-line) are allowed in embedded
assembly code.
The only types whose name remains the same in asm as it is in the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 are
registers, e.g. INTCON, PORTB, WREG, GIE, etc.
Accessing variables
Depending on the place of declaration, accessing a variable can be done in several ways:
- Accessing global variable:

1. If declared as static (visible only in the file where it was declared):
<source_file_name>_<variable_name>.
2. If declared as a non-static global (visible throughout the whole project): _<variable_name>.
3. If accessing registers (declared through register, rx or sfr specifiers, visible throughout the whole
project) : <variable_name>.
- Accessing local variable: <routine_name>_<variable_name>.
- Accessing routine parameter: FARG_<routine_name>_<variable_name>.
MikroElektronika
230
Here is an example of using asm instructions:
unsigned myvar absolute 0x2678;

unsigned long myvar1;
const char msg[] = “Test” absolute 0x3652;
void main() org 0x11234 {

myvar = 5;
myvar1 = 0xABCDEFAB;
asm {
MOV _myvar, w0 ; move myvar to W0
nop
MOV #6, W0 ; move literal 6 to W0
MOV W0, _myvar ; move contents of W0 to myvar
MOV #lo_addr(_myvar), W1 ; retrieve low address word of _myvar and move it to W1
(0x2678 -> W1)
MOV #hi_addr(_myvar), W1 ; retrieve high address word of _myvar and move it to
W1 (0x0000 -> W1)
MOV #lo_addr(___main_Label1), W0 ; retrieve lo address word of Label1 and move it
W0 ( PC(Label1) ) -> W0
MOV #hi_addr(_main), W0 ; retrieve hi address byte of main routine and move it
to W0 (0x0001 -> W1)
MOV #lo_addr(_msg2), W0 ; retrieve low address word of constant msg
and move it to W0 (0x3652 -> W1)
MOV _myvar1+2, W1 ; accessing hi word of myvar1 variable and
move it to W1 (0xABCD -> W1)
}
Label1:
asm MOV #hi_addr(___main_Label1), W0 // retrieve hi address word of Label1 and move
it W0 (PC(Label1)) -> W0
goto Label1;
}
When using asm instructions that expect parameters like lit1, lit4, slit6, slit6, bit4, etc. be sure to preceed
them with the ‘#’ (hash symbol) to ensure proper functioning.
Example:
BSET f, #5 ; set bit #5 in f register

MOV #16000, Wnd ; move number #16000 to destination working register
ADD Ws, #-5, Acc ; add number #-5 to accumulator
Asm code and SSA optimization

If asm code is mixed with the C code, keep in mind that the generated code can substantially differ when SSA optimization
option is enabled or disabled.
This is due to the fact that SSA optimization uses certain working registers to store routine parameters (W10-W13),
rather than storing them onto the function frame.
Because of this, user must be very careful when writing asm code as existing values in the working registers used by
SSA optimization can be overwritten.
To avoid this, it is recommended that user includes desired asm code in a separate routine.
MikroElektronika
231
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Initialization
The initial value of a declared object can be set at the time of declaration (initialization). A part of the declaration which
specifies the initialization is called initializer.
Initializers for globals and static objects must be constants or constant expressions. The initializer for an automatic
object can be any legal expression that evaluates to an assignment-compatible value for the type of the variable
involved.
Scalar types are initialized with a single expression, which can optionally be enclosed in braces. The initial value of an
object is that of the expression; the same constraints for type and conversions as for simple assignments are applied
to initializations too.
For example:
int i = 1;
char *s = “hello”;
struct complex c = {0.1, -0.2};
// where ‘complex’ is a structure (float, float)
For structures or unions with automatic storage duration, the initializer must be one of the following:
- An initializer list.
- A single expression with compatible union or structure type. In this case, the initial value of the object is
that of the expression.
For example:
struct dot {int x; int y; } m = {30, 40};
For more information, refer to Structures and Unions.
Also, you can initialize arrays of character type with a literal string, optionally enclosed in braces. Each character in the
string, including the null terminator, initializes successive elements in the array. For more information, refer to Arrays.
Automatic Initialization
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 does not provide automatic initialization for objects. Uninitialized globals
and objects with static duration will take random values from memory.
MikroElektronika
232
Functions
Functions are central to C programming. Functions are usually defined as subprograms which return a value based
on a number of input parameters. Return value of the function can be used in expressions – technically, function call is
considered to be an expression like any other.
C allows a function to create results other than its return value, referred to as side effects. Often, the function return value
is not used at all, depending on the side effects. These functions are equivalent to procedures of other programming
languages, such as Pascal. C does not distinguish between procedure and function – functions play both roles.
Each program must have a single external function named main marking the entry point of the program. Functions
are usually declared as prototypes in standard or user-supplied header files, or within program files. Functions have
external linkage by default and are normally accessible from any file in the program. This can be restricted by using the
static storage class specifier in function declaration (see Storage Classes and Linkage).
Note: Check the dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 Specifics for more information on functions’ limitations on the dsPIC30/33
and PIC24 MCUs.
Function Declaration
Functions are declared in user’s source files or made available by linking precompiled libraries. The declaration syntax
of the function is:
type function_name(parameter-declarator-list);
The function_name must be a valid identifier. This name is used to call the function; see Function Calls for more
information.
type represents the type of function result, and can be of any standard or user-defined type. For functions that do not
return value the void type should be used. The type can be omitted in global function declarations, and function will
assume the int type by default.
Function type can also be a pointer. For example, float* means that a function result is a pointer to float. The generic
pointer void* is also allowed.
The function cannot return an array or another function.
Within parentheses, parameter-declarator-list is a list of formal arguments that function takes. These
declarators specify the type of each function parameter. The compiler uses this information to check validity of function
calls. If the list is empty, a function does not take any arguments. Also, if the list is void, a function also does not take
any arguments; note that this is the only case when void can be used as an argument’s type.
Unlike variable declaration, each argument in the list needs its own type specifier and possible qualifier const or
volatile.
MikroElektronika
233
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Function Prototypes
A function can be defined only once in the program, but can be declared several times, assuming that the declarations
are compatible. When declaring a function, the formal argument’s identifier does not have to be specified, but its type
does.
This kind of declaration, commonly known as the function prototype, allows better control over argument number, type
checking and type conversions. The name of a parameter in function prototype has its scope limited to the prototype.
This allows one parameter identifier to have different name in different declarations of the same function:
/* Here are two prototypes of the same function: */
int test(const char*) /* declares function test */

int test(const char*p) /* declares the same function test */
Function prototypes are very useful in documenting code. For example, the function Cf_Init takes two parameters:
Control Port and Data Port. The question is, which is which? The function prototype:
void Cf_Init(char *ctrlport, char *dataport);
makes it clear. If a header file contains function prototypes, the user can read that file to get the information needed
for writing programs that call these functions. If a prototype parameter includes an identifier, then the indentifier is only
used for error checking.
Function Definition
Function definition consists of its declaration and function body. The function body is technically a block – a
sequence of local definitions and statements enclosed within braces {}. All variables declared within function body are
local to the function, i.e. they have function scope.
The function itself can be defined only within the file scope, which means that function declarations cannot be nested.
To return the function result, use the return statement. The statement return in functions of the void type cannot have
a parameter – in fact, the return statement can be omitted altogether if it is the last statement in the function body.
Here is a sample function definition:
/* function max returns greater one of its 2 arguments: */
int max(int x, int y) {

return (x>=y) ? x : y;
}
MikroElektronika
234
Here is a sample function which depends on side effects rather than return value:
/* function converts Descartes coordinates (x,y) to polar (r,fi): */

#include <math.h>
void polar(double x, double y, double *r, double *fi) {

*r = sqrt(x * x + y * y);
*fi = (x == 0 && y == 0) ? 0 : atan2(y, x);
return; /* this line can be omitted */
}
Functions reentrancy
Functions reentrancy is allowed. Remember that the dsPIC’s and PIC24 has stack and memory limitations which can
varies greatly between MCUs.
Function Calls and Argument Conversions
Function Calls
A function is called with actual arguments placed in the same sequence as their matching formal parameters. Use the
function-call operator ():
function_name(expression_1, ... , expression_n)
Each expression in the function call is an actual argument. Number and types of actual arguments should match those
of formal function parameters. If types do not match, implicit type conversions rules will be applied. Actual arguments
can be of any complexity, but order of their evaluation is not specified.
Upon function call, all formal parameters are created as local objects initialized by the values of actual arguments. Upon
return from a function, a temporary object is created in the place of the call, and it is initialized by the expression of
the return statement. This means that the function call as an operand in complex expression is treated as a function
result.
If the function has no result (type void) or the result is not needed, then the function call can be written as a self-
contained expression.
In C, scalar arguments are always passed to the function by value. The function can modify the values of its formal
parameters, but this has no effect on the actual arguments in the calling routine. A scalar object can be passed by the
address if a formal parameter is declared as a pointer. The pointed object can be accessed by using the indirection
operator * .
MikroElektronika
235
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
// For example, Soft_UART_Read takes the pointer to error variable,

// so it can change the value of an actual argument:
Soft_UART_Read(&error);
// The following code would be wrong; you would pass the value
// of error variable to the function:
Soft_UART_Read(error);
Argument Conversions
If a function prototype has not been previously declared, the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 converts integral
arguments to a function call according to the integral widening (expansion) rules described in Standard Conversions. If
a function prototype is in scope, the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 converts the passed argument to the type
of the declared parameter according to the same conversion rules as in assignment statements.
If a prototype is present, the number of arguments must match. The types need to be compatible only to the extent that
an assignment can legally convert them. The user can always use an explicit cast to convert an argument to a type that
is acceptable to a function prototype.
Note: If the function prototype does not match the actual function definition, the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and
PIC24 will detect this if and only if that definition is in the same compilation unit as the prototype.
If you create a library of routines with the corresponding header file of prototypes, consider including that
header file when you compile the library, so that any discrepancies between the prototypes and actual
definitions will be detected.
The compiler is also able to force arguments to change their type to a proper one. Consider the following code:
int limit = 32;

char ch = ‘A’;
long res;
// prototype
extern long func(long par1, long par2);
main() {
...
res = func(limit, ch); // function call
}
Since the program has the function prototype for func, it converts limit and ch to long, using the standard rules of
assignment, before it places them on the stack for the call to func.
Without the function prototype, limit and ch would be placed on the stack as an integer and a character, respectively;
in that case, the stack passed to func will not match size or content that func expects, which can cause problems.
MikroElektronika
236
Ellipsis (‘...’) Operator

The ellipsis (‘...’) consists of three successive periods with no whitespace intervening. An ellipsis can be used in
the formal argument lists of function prototypes to indicate a variable number of arguments, or arguments with varying
types. For example:
void func (int n, char ch, ...);
This declaration indicates that func will be defined in such a way that calls must have at least two arguments, int and
char, but can also have any number of additional arguments.
Example:
#include <stdarg.h>
int addvararg(char a1,...){

va_list ap;
char temp;
va_start(ap,a1);
while( temp = va_arg(ap,char))

a1 += temp;
return a1;
}
int res;
void main() {
res = addvararg(1,2,3,4,5,0);
res = addvararg(1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,0);
MikroElektronika
237
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Operators
Operators are tokens that trigger some computation when applied to variables and other objects in an expression.
- Arithmetic Operators
- Assignment Operators
- Bitwise Operators
- Logical Operators
- Reference/Indirect Operators
- Relational Operators
- Structure Member Selectors
- Comma Operator ,
- Conditional Operator ? :
- Array subscript operator []

- Function call operator ()
- sizeof Operator
- Preprocessor Operators # and ##
MikroElektronika
238
Operators Precedence and Associativity

There are 15 precedence categories, some of them contain only one operator. Operators in the same category have
equal precedence.
If duplicates of operators appear in the table, the first occurrence is unary and the second binary. Each category has
an associativity rule: left-to-right (→), or right-to-left (←). In the absence of parentheses, these rules resolve a grouping
of expressions with operators of equal precedence.
Precedence Operands Operators Asociativity

15 2 () [] . -> →
14 1 ! ~ ++ -- + - * & (type) ←
sizeof
13 2 * / % →
12 2 + - →
11 2 << >> →
10 2 < <= > >= →
9 2 == != →
8 2 & →
7 2 ^ →
6 2 | →
5 2 && →
4 2 || →
3 3 ?: ←
2 2 = *= /= %= += -= &= ^= ←
|= <<= >>=
1 2 , →
Note: Operator * is context sensitive and can also represent the pointer reference operator.
MikroElektronika
239
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Binary Arithmetic Operators

Division of two integers returns an integer, while remainder is simply truncated:
/* for example: */
7 / 4; /* equals 1 */
7 * 3 / 4; /* equals 5 */
/* but: */
7. * 3. / 4.; /* equals 5.25 because we are working with floats */
Remainder operand % works only with integers; the sign of result is equal to the sign of the first operand:
/* for example: */
9 % 3; /* equals 0 */
7 % 3; /* equals 1 */
-7 % 3; /* equals -1 */
Arithmetic operators can be used for manipulating characters:
‘A’ + 32; /* equals ‘a’ (ASCII only) */

‘G’ - ‘A’ + ‘a’; /* equals ‘g’ (both ASCII and EBCDIC) */
Unary Arithmetic Operators

Unary operators ++ and -- are the only operators in C which can be either prefix (e.g. ++k, --k) or postfix (e.g. k++,
k--).
When used as prefix, operators ++ and -- (preincrement and predecrement) add or subtract one from the value of the
operand before the evaluation. When used as suffix, operators ++ and -- (postincrement and postdecrement) add or
subtract one from the value of the operand after the evaluation.
For example:
int j = 5;
j = ++k; /* k = k + 1, j = k, which gives us j = 6, k = 6 */
but:
int j = 5;
j = k++; /* j = k, k = k + 1, which gives us j = 5, k = 6 */
MikroElektronika
240
Relational Operators
Use relational operators to test equality or inequality of expressions. If an expression evaluates to be true, it returns 1;
otherwise it returns 0.
All relational operators associate from left to right.
Relational Operators Overview
Operator Operation Precedence

== equal 9
!= not equal 9
> greater than 10
< less than 10
>= greater than or equal 10
<= less than or equal 10
Relational Operators in Expressions

Precedence of arithmetic and relational operators is designated in such a way to allow complex expressions without
parentheses to have expected meaning:
a + 5 >= c - 1.0 / e /* → (a + 5) >= (c - (1.0 / e)) */
Do not forget that relational operators return either 0 or 1. Consider the following examples:
/* ok: */
5 > 7 /* returns 0 */
10 <= 20 /* returns 1 */
/* this can be tricky: */

8 == 13 > 5 /* returns 0, as: 8 == (13 > 5) → 8 == 1 → 0 */
14 > 5 < 3 /* returns 1, as: (14 > 5) < 3 → 1 < 3 → 1 */
a < b < 5 /* returns 1, as: (a < b) < 5 → (0 or 1) < 5 → 1*/
MikroElektronika
241
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Bitwise Operators
Use the bitwise operators to modify individual bits of numerical operands.
Bitwise operators associate from left to right. The only exception is the bitwise complement operator ~ which associates
from right to left.
Bitwise Operators Overview

& bitwise AND; compares pairs of bits and returns 1 if 8
both bits are 1, otherwise returns 0
| bitwise (inclusive) OR; compares pairs of bits and 6
returns 1 if either or both bits are 1, otherwise
returns 0
^ bitwise exclusive OR (XOR); compares pairs of 7
bits and returns 1 if the bits are complementary,
otherwise returns 0
~ bitwise complement (unary); inverts each bit 14
<< bitwise shift left; moves the bits to the left, discards 11
the far left bit and assigns 0 to the far right bit.
>> bitwise shift right; moves the bits to the right, 11
discards the far right bit and if unsigned assigns 0
to the far left bit, otherwise sign extends
Logical Operations on Bit Level
& 0 1 | 0 1 ^ 0 1 ~ 0 1
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0
1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
Bitwise operators &, | and ^ perform logical operations on the appropriate pairs of bits of their operands. Operator ~
complements each bit of its operand. For example:
0x1234 & 0x5678 /* equals 0x1230 */
/* because ..
0x1234 : 0001 0010 0011 0100

0x5678 : 0101 0110 0111 1000
----------------------------
& : 0001 0010 0011 0000
.. that is, 0x1230 */
MikroElektronika
242
/* Similarly: */
0x1234 | 0x5678; /* equals 0x567C */

0x1234 ^ 0x5678; /* equals 0x444C */
~ 0x1234; /* equals 0xEDCB */
Note: Operator & can also be a pointer reference operator. Refer to Pointers for more information.
Bitwise Shift Operators

Binary operators << and >> move the bits of the left operand by a number of positions specified by the right operand,
to the left or right, respectively. Right operand has to be positive.
With shift left (<<), far left bits are discarded and “new” bits on the right are assigned zeroes. Thus, shifting unsigned
operand to the left by n positions is equivalent to multiplying it by 2n if all discarded bits are zero. This is also true for
signed operands if all discarded bits are equal to a sign bit.
000001 << 5; /* equals 000040 */

0x3801 << 4; /* equals 0x8010, overflow! */
With shift right (>>), far right bits are discarded and the “freed” bits on the left are assigned zeroes (in case of unsigned
operand) or the value of a sign bit (in case of signed operand). Shifting operand to the right by n positions is equivalent
to dividing it by 2n.
0xFF56 >> 4; /* equals 0xFFF5 */

0xFF56u >> 4; /* equals 0x0FF5 */
Bitwise vs. Logical

Do not forget of the principle difference between how bitwise and logical operators work. For example:
0222222 & 0555555; /* equals 000000 */

0222222 && 0555555; /* equals 1 */
~ 0x1234; /* equals 0xEDCB */

! 0x1234; /* equals 0 */
MikroElektronika
243
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Logical Operators
Operands of logical operations are considered true or false, that is non-zero or zero. Logical operators always return 1
or 0. Operands in a logical expression must be of scalar type.
Logical operators && and || associate from left to right. Logical negation operator ! associates from right to left.
Logical Operators Overview

&& logical AND 5
|| logical OR 4
! logical negation 14
Logical Operations
&& 0 x || 0 x ! 0 x
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
x 0 1 x 1 1
Precedence of logical, relational, and arithmetic operators was designated in such a way to allow complex expressions
without parentheses to have an expected meaning:
c >= ‘0’ && c <= ‘9’; /* reads as: (c >= ‘0’) && (c <= ‘9’) */
a + 1 == b || ! f(x); /* reads as: ((a + 1) == b) || (! (f(x))) */
Logical AND && returns 1 only if both expressions evaluate to be nonzero, otherwise returns 0. If the first expression
evaluates to false, the second expression will not be evaluated. For example:
a > b && c < d; /* reads as (a > b) && (c < d) */

/* if (a > b) is false (0), (c < d) will not be evaluated */
Logical OR || returns 1 if either of expression evaluates to be nonzero, otherwise returns 0. If the first expression
evaluates to true, the second expression is not evaluated. For example:
a && b || c && d; /* reads as: (a && b) || (c && d) */

/* if (a && b) is true (1), (c && d) will not be evaluated */
Logical Expressions and Side Effects

General rule regarding complex logical expressions is that the evaluation of consecutive logical operands stops at the
very moment the final result is known. For example, if we have an expression a && b && c where a is false (0), then
operands b and c will not be evaluated. This is very important if b and c are expressions, as their possible side effects
will not take place!
MikroElektronika
244
Logical vs. Bitwise

Be aware of the principle difference between how bitwise and logical operators work. For example:
0222222 & 0555555 /* equals 000000 */

0222222 && 0555555 /* equals 1 */
~ 0x1234 /* equals 0xEDCB */

! 0x1234 /* equals 0 */
Conditional Operator ? :
The conditional operator ? : is the only ternary operator in C. Syntax of the conditional operator is:
expression1 ? expression2 : expression3
The expression1 is evaluated first. If its value is true, then expression2 evaluates and expression3 is ignored.
If expression1 evaluates to false, then expression3 evaluates and expression2 is ignored. The result will be a
value of either expression2 or expression3 depending upon which of them evaluates.
Conditional operator associates from right to left.
Note: The fact that only one of these two expressions evaluates is very important if they are expected to produce side effects!
Here are a couple of practical examples:
/* Find max(a, b): */

max = ( a > b ) ? a : b;
/* Convert small letter to capital: */

/* (no parentheses are actually necessary) */
c = ( c >= ‘a’ && c <= ‘z’ ) ? ( c - 32 ) : c;
Conditional Operator Rules

expression1 must be a scalar expression; expression2 and expression3 must obey one of the following rules:
1. Both expressions have to be of arithmetic type. expression2 and expression3 are subject to usual
arithmetic conversions, which determines the resulting type.
2. Both expressions have to be of compatible struct or union types. The resulting type is a structure or
union type of expression2 and expression3.
3. Both expressions have to be of void type. The resulting type is void.
4. Both expressions have to be of type pointer to qualified or unqualified versions of compatible types.
The resulting type is a pointer to a type qualified with all type qualifiers of the types pointed to by both
expressions.
5. One expression is a pointer, and the other is a null pointer constant. The resulting type is a pointer to a
type qualified with all type qualifiers of the types pointed to by both expressions.
6. One expression is a pointer to an object or incomplete type, and the other is a pointer to a qualified or
unqualified version of void. The resulting type is that of the non-pointer-to-void expression.
MikroElektronika
245
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Assignment Operators
Unlike many other programming languages, C treats value assignment as operation (represented by an operator)
rather than instruction.
Simple Assignment Operator

For a common value assignment, a simple assignment operator (=) is used:
expression1 = expression2
The expression1 is an object (memory location) to which the value of expression2 is assigned. Operand expression1
has to be lvalue and expression2 can be any expression. The assignment expression itself is not lvalue.
If expression1 and expression2 are of different types, the result of the expression2 will be converted to the type
of expression1, if necessary. Refer to Type Conversions for more information.
Compound Assignment Operators

C allows more comlex assignments by means of compound assignment operators. The syntax of compound assignment
operators is:
expression1 op= expression2
where op can be one of binary operators +, -, *, /, %, &, |, ^, <<, or >>.
Thus, we have 10 different compound assignment operators: +=, -=, *=, /=, %=, &=, |=, ^=, <<= and >>=. All
of them associate from right to left. Spaces separating compound operators (e.g. + =) will generate error.
Compound assignment has the same effect as
expression1 = expression1 op expression2
except the lvalue expression1 is evaluated only once. For example, expression1 += expression2 is the same
as expression1 = expression1 + expression2.
Assignment Rules
For both simple and compound assignment, the operands expression1 and expression2 must obey one of the
following rules:
1. expression1 is of qualified or unqualified arithmetic type and expression2 is of arithmetic type.

2. expression1 has a qualified or unqualified version of structure or union type compatible with the type of
expression2.
3. expression1 and expression2 are pointers to qualified or unqualified versions of compatible types
and the type pointed to by left has all qualifiers of the type pointed to by right.
MikroElektronika
246
4. Either expression1 or expression2 is a pointer to an object or incomplete type and the other is a
pointer to a qualified or unqualified version of void. The type pointed to by left has all qualifiers of the type
pointed to by right.
5. expression1 is a pointer and expression2 is a null pointer constant.
Unary Operators
Unary operators are operators that take exactly one argument.
Unary Arithmetic Operators

Unary operators ++ and -- are the only operators in C which can be either prefix (e.g. ++k, --k) or postfix (e.g. k++,
k--).
When used as prefix, operators ++ and -- (preincrement and predecrement) add or subtract one from the value of the
operand before the evaluation. When used as suffix, operators ++ and -- (postincrement and postdecrement) add or
subtract one from the value of the operand after the evaluation.

+ unary plus does not affect the operand 14
- unary minus changes the sign of the operand 14
++ increment adds one to the value of the operand. 14
Postincrement adds one to the value of the operand
after it evaluates; while preincrement adds one
before it evaluates
-- decrement subtracts one from the value of the 14
operand. Postdecrement subtracts one from
the value of the operand after it evaluates; while
predecrement subtracts one before it evaluates
For example:
int j = 5;
j = ++k; /* k = k + 1, j = k, which gives us j = 6, k = 6 */
but:
int j = 5;
j = k++; /* j = k, k = k + 1, which gives us j = 5, k = 6 */
MikroElektronika
247
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Unary Logical Operator

The ! (logical negation) operator produces the value 0 if its operand is true (nonzero) and the value 1 if its operand is
false (0).

! logical negation 14
The following two expressions are equivalent:
!right;
right == 0;
Unary Bitwise Operator

The result of the ~ (bitwise negation) operator is the bitwise complement of the operand. In the binary representation of
the result, every bit has the opposite value of the same bit in the binary representation of the operand.

~ bitwise complement (unary); inverts each bit 14
Address and Indirection Operator

In the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24, address of an object in memory can be obtained by means of an unary
operator &. To reach the pointed object, we use an indirection operator (*) on a pointer. See Pointers section for more
details.

* accesses a value indirectly, through a pointer; result 14
is the value at the address to which operand points
& gives the address of its operand 14
Example:
int *p_to_y; // p_to_y is defined as a pointer to an int

int y; // y is defined as an int

p_to_y = &y; // assigns the address of the variable y to the pointer p_to_y
*p_to_y = 3; // causes the variable y to receive the value 3
Note: Besides these, sizeof and casting unary operators are supported also.
MikroElektronika
248
Sizeof Operator
The prefix unary operator sizeof returns an integer constant that represents the size of memory space (in bytes) used
by its operand (determined by its type, with some exceptions).
The operator sizeof can take either a type identifier or an unary expression as an operand. You cannot use sizeof
with expressions of function type, incomplete types, parenthesized names of such types, or with lvalue that designates
a bit field object.
Sizeof Applied to Expression

If applied to expression, the size of an operand is determined without evaluating the expression (and therefore without
side effects). The result of the operation will be the size of the type of the expression’s result.
Sizeof Applied to Type

If applied to a type identifier, sizeof returns the size of the specified type. The unit for type size is sizeof(char) which
is equivalent to one byte. The operation sizeof(char) gives the result 1, whether char is signed or unsigned.
Thus:
sizeof(char) /* returns 1 */
sizeof(int) /* returns 2 */
sizeof(unsigned long) /* returns 4 */
sizeof(float) /* returns 4 */
When the operand is a non-parameter of array type, the result is the total number of bytes in the array (in other words,
an array name is not converted to a pointer type):
int i, j, a[10];
...
j = sizeof(a[1]); /* j = sizeof(int) = 2 */
i = sizeof(a); /* i = 10*sizeof(int) = 20 */
/* To get the number of elements in an array: */

int num_elem = i/j;
If the operand is a parameter declared as array type or function type, sizeof gives the size of the pointer. When
applied to structures and unions, sizeof gives the total number of bytes, including any padding. The operator sizeof
cannot be applied to a function.
MikroElektronika
249
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Expressions
Expression is a sequence of operators, operands, and punctuators that specifies a computation. Formally, expressions
are defined recursively: subexpressions can be nested without formal limit. However, the compiler will report an out-of-
memory error if it can’t compile an expression that is too complex.
In ANSI C, the primary expressions are: constant (also referred to as literal), identifier, and (expression), defined
recursively.
Expressions are evaluated according to a certain conversion, grouping, associativity and precedence rules, which
depends on the operators used, presence of parentheses and data types of the operands. The precedence and
associativity of the operators are summarized in Operator Precedence and Associativity. The way operands and
subexpressions are grouped does not necessarily specify the actual order in which they are evaluated by the mikroC
PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24.
Expressions can produce lvalue, rvalue, or no value. Expressions might cause side effects whether they produce a
value or not.
Comma Expressions
One of the specifics of C is that it allows using of comma as a sequence operator to form so-called comma expressions
or sequences. Comma expression is a comma-delimited list of expressions – it is formally treated as a single expression
so it can be used in places where an expression is expected. The following sequence:
expression_1, expression_2;
results in the left-to-right evaluation of each expression, with the value and type of expression_2 giving the result
of the whole expression. Result of expression_1 is discarded.
Binary operator comma (,) has the lowest precedence and associates from left to right, so that a, b, c is the same
as (a, b), c. This allows writing sequences with any number of expressions:
expression_1, expression_2, ... expression_n;
which results in the left-to-right evaluation of each expression, with the value and type of expression_n giving the
result of the whole expression. Results of other expressions are discarded, but their (possible) side-effect do occur.
For example:
result = ( a = 5, b /= 2, c++ );
/* returns preincremented value of variable c,
but also intializes a, divides b by 2 and increments c */
result = ( x = 10, y = x + 3, x--, z -= x * 3 - --y );

/* returns computed value of variable z,
and also computes x and y */
MikroElektronika
250
Note
Do not confuse comma operator (sequence operator) with comma punctuator which separates elements in a function
argument list and initializator lists. To avoid ambiguity with commas in function argument and initializer lists, use
parentheses. For example,
func(i, (j = 1, j + 4), k);
calls the function func with three arguments (i, 5, k), not four.
Statements
Statements specify a flow of control as the program executes. In the absence of specific jump and selection statements,
statements are executed sequentially in the order of appearance in the source code.
Statements can be roughly divided into:
- Labeled Statements
- Expression Statements
- Selection Statements
- Iteration Statements (Loops)
- Jump Statements
- Compound Statements (Blocks)
Labeled Statements
Each statement in a program can be labeled. A label is an identifier added before the statement like this:
label_identifier: statement;
There is no special declaration of a label – it just “tags” the statement. Label_identifier has a function scope and
the same label cannot be redefined within the same function.
Labels have their own namespace: label identifier can match any other identifier in the program.
A statement can be labeled for two reasons:
1. The label identifier serves as a target for the unconditional goto statement,
2. The label identifier serves as a target for the switch statement. For this purpose, only case and default
labeled statements are used:
case constant-expression : statement

default : statement
MikroElektronika
251
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Expression Statements
Any expression followed by a semicolon forms an expression statement:
expression;
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 executes an expression statement by evaluating the expression. All side
effects from this evaluation are completed before the next statement starts executing. Most of expression statements
are assignment statements or function calls.
A null statement is a special case, consisting of a single semicolon (;). The null statement does nothing, and therefore
is useful in situations where the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 syntax expects a statement but the program
does not need one. For example, a null statement is commonly used in “empty” loops:
for (; *q++ = *p++ ;); /* body of this loop is a null statement */
Selection Statements
Selection or flow-control statements select one of alternative courses of action by testing certain values. There are two
types of selection statements:
- if
- switch
If Statement
The if statement is used to implement a conditional statement. The syntax of the if statement is:
if (expression) statement1 [else statement2]
If expression evaluates to true, statement1 executes. If expression is false, statement2 executes. The
expression must evaluate to an integral value; otherwise, the condition is ill-formed. Parentheses around the
expression are mandatory.
The else keyword is optional, but no statements can come between if and else.
Nested If statements
Nested if statements require additional attention. A general rule is that the nested conditionals are parsed starting from
the innermost conditional, with each else bound to the nearest available if on its left:
if (expression1) statement1
else if (expression2)
if (expression3) statement2
else statement3 /* this belongs to: if (expression3) */
else statement4 /* this belongs to: if (expression2) */
MikroElektronika
252
Note: #if and #else preprocessor statements (directives) look similar to if and else statements, but have
very different effects. They control which source file lines are compiled and which are ignored.
Switch Statement
The switch statement is used to pass control to a specific program branch, based on a certain condition. The syntax
of the switch statement is:
switch (expression) {
case constant-expression_1 : statement_1;
.
.
.
case constant-expression_n : statement_n;
[default : statement;]
}
First, the expression (condition) is evaluated. The switch statement then compares it to all available constant-
expressions following the keyword case. If a match is found, switch passes control to that matching case causing
the statement following the match evaluates. Note that constant-expressions must evaluate to integer. It is not
possible to have two same constant expressions evaluating to the same value.
Parentheses around expression are mandatory.
Upon finding a match, program flow continues normally: the following instructions will be executed in natural order
regardless of the possible case label. If no case satisfies the condition, the default case evaluates (if the label
default is specified).
For example, if a variable i has value between 1 and 3, the following switch would always return it as 4:
switch (i) {
case 1: i++;
case 2: i++;
case 3: i++;
}
To avoid evaluating any other cases and relinquish control from switch, each case should be terminated with break.
Here is a simple example with switch. Suppose we have a variable phase with only 3 different states (0, 1, or 2) and a
corresponding function (event) for each of these states. This is how we could switch the code to the appopriate routine:
switch (phase) {
case 0: Lo(); break;
case 1: Mid(); break;
case 2: Hi(); break;
default: Message(“Invalid state!”);
}
MikroElektronika
253
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Nested switch
Conditional switch statements can be nested – labels case and default are then assigned to the innermost
enclosing switch statement.
Iteration Statements (Loops)

Iteration statements allows to loop a set of statements. There are three forms of iteration statements in the mikroC PRO
for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24:
- while
- do
- for
While Statement
The while keyword is used to conditionally iterate a statement. The syntax of the while statement is:
while (expression) statement
The statement executes repeatedly until the value of expression is false. The test takes place before statement
is executed. Thus, if expression evaluates to false on the first pass, the loop does not execute. Note that parentheses
around expression are mandatory.
Here is an example of calculating scalar product of two vectors, using the while statement:
int s = 0, i = 0;
while (i < n) {
s += a[i] * b[i];
i++;
}
Note that body of the loop can be a null statement. For example:
while (*q++ = *p++);
Do Statement
The do statement executes until the condition becomes false. The syntax of the do statement is:
do statement while (expression);
The statement is executed repeatedly as long as the value of expression remains non-zero. The expression is
evaluated after each iteration, so the loop will execute statement at least once.
Parentheses around expression are mandatory.
MikroElektronika
254
Note that do is the only control structure in C which explicitly ends with semicolon (;). Other control structures end with
statement, which means that they implicitly include a semicolon or closing brace.
Here is an example of calculating scalar product of two vectors, using the do statement:
s = 0; i = 0;
do {
s += a[i] * b[i];
i++;
} while ( i < n );
For Statement
The for statement implements an iterative loop. The syntax of the for statement is:
for ([init-expression]; [condition-expression]; [increment-expression]) statement
Before the first iteration of the loop, init-expression sets the starting variables for the loop. You cannot pass
declarations in init-expression.
condition-expression is checked before the first entry into the block; statement is executed repeatedly until the
value of condition-expression is false. After each iteration of the loop, increment-expression increments a
loop counter. Consequently, i++ is functionally the same as ++i.
All expressions are optional. If condition-expression is left out, it is assumed to be always true. Thus, “empty”
for statement is commonly used to create an endless loop in C:
for ( ; ; ) statement
The only way to break out of this loop is by means of the break statement.
Here is an example of calculating scalar product of two vectors, using the for statement:
for ( s = 0, i = 0; i < n; i++ ) s += a[i] * b[i];
There is another way to do this:
for ( s = 0, i = 0; i < n; s += a[i] * b[i], i++ ); /* valid, but ugly */
but it is considered a bad programming style. Although legal, calculating the sum should not be a part of the incrementing
expression, because it is not in the service of loop routine. Note that null statement (;) is used for the loop body.
MikroElektronika
255
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Jump Statements
The jump statement, when executed, transfers control unconditionally. There are four such statements in the mikroC
PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24:
- break
- continue
- goto
- return
Break and Continue Statements
Break Statement
Sometimes it is necessary to stop the loop within its body. Use the break statement within loops to pass control to the
first statement following the innermost switch, for, while, or do block.
Break is commonly used in the switch statements to stop its execution upon the first positive match. For example:
switch (state) {
case 0: Lo(); break;
case 1: Mid(); break;
case 2: Hi(); break;
default: Message(“Invalid state!”);
}
Continue Statement
The continue statement within loops is used to “skip the cycle”. It passes control to the end of the innermost enclosing
end brace belonging to a looping construct. At that point the loop continuation condition is re-evaluated. This means
that continue demands the next iteration if the loop continuation condition is true.
Specifically, the continue statement within the loop will jump to the marked position as it is shown below:
while (..) { do { for (..;..;..) {

... ... ...
if (val>0) continue; if (val>0) continue; if (val>0) continue;
... ... ...
// continue jumps here // continue jumps here // continue jumps here
} while (..); }
MikroElektronika
256
Goto Statement
The goto statement is used for unconditional jump to a local label — for more information on labels, refer to Labeled
Statements. The syntax of the goto statement is:
goto label_identifier;
This will transfer control to the location of a local label specified by label_identifier. The label_identifier has
to be a name of the label within the same function in which the goto statement is. The goto line can come before or
after the label.
goto is used to break out from any level of nested control structures but it cannot be used to jump into block while
skipping that block’s initializations – for example, jumping into loop’s body, etc.
The use of goto statement is generally discouraged as practically every algorithm can be realized without it, resulting
in legible structured programs. One possible application of the goto statement is breaking out from deeply nested
control structures:
for (...) {
for (...) {
...
if (disaster) goto Error;
...
}
}
.
.
.
Error: /* error handling code */
Return Statement
The return statement is used to exit from the current function back to the calling routine, optionally returning a value.
The syntax is:
return [expression];
This will evaluate expression and return the result. Returned value will be automatically converted to the expected
function type, if needed. The expression is optional; if omitted, the function will return a random value from
memory.
Note: The statement return in functions of the void type cannot have expression – in fact, the return
statement can be omitted altogether if it is the last statement in the function body.
MikroElektronika
257
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Compound Statements (Blocks)

The compound statement, or block, is a list (possibly empty) of statements enclosed in matching braces { }.
Syntactically, the block can be considered to be a single statement, but it also plays a role in the scoping of identifiers.
An identifier declared within the block has a scope starting at the point of declaration and ending at the closing brace.
Blocks can be nested to any depth up to the limits of memory.
For example, the for loop expects one statement in its body, so we can pass it a compound statement:
for (i = 0; i < n; i++ ) {

int temp = a[i];
a[i] = b[i];
b[i] = temp;
}
Note that, unlike other statements, compound statements do not end with semicolon (;), i.e. there is never a semicolon
following the closing brace.
Preprocessor
Preprocessor is an integrated text processor which prepares the source code for compiling. Preprocessor allows:
- inserting text from a specifed file to a certain point in the code (see File Inclusion),
- replacing specific lexical symbols with other symbols (see Macros),
- conditional compiling which conditionally includes or omits parts of the code (see Conditional Compilation).
Note that preprocessor analyzes text at token level, not at individual character level. Preprocessor is controled by
means of preprocessor directives and preprocessor operators.
Preprocessor Directives
Any line in the source code with a leading # is taken as a preprocessing directive (or control line), unless # is within
a string literal, in a character constant, or embedded in a comment. The initial # can be preceded or followed by a
whitespace (excluding new lines).
A null directive consists of a line containing the single character #. This line is always ignored.
Preprocessor directives are usually placed at the beginning of the source code, but they can legally appear at any point
in a program. The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 preprocessor detects preprocessor directives and parses the
tokens embedded in them. A directive is in effect from its declaration to the end of the program file.
Here is one commonly used directive:
#include <math.h>
MikroElektronika
258
For more information on including files with the #include directive, refer to File Inclusion.
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 supports standard preprocessor directives:
# (null directive) #if

#define #ifdef
#elif #ifndef
#else #include
#endif #line
#error #undef
Note: For the time being only funcall pragma is supported.
Line Continuation with Backslash (\)

To break directive into multiple lines end the line with a backslash (\):
#define MACRO This directive continues to \

the following line.
Macros
Macros provide a mechanism for a token replacement, prior to compilation, with or without a set of formal, function-like
parameters.
Defining Macros and Macro Expansions

The #define directive defines a macro:
#define macro_identifier <token_sequence>
Each occurrence of macro_identifier in the source code following this control line will be replaced in the original
position with the possibly empty token_sequence (there are some exceptions, which are discussed later). Such
replacements are known as macro expansions.token_sequence is sometimes called the body of a macro. An empty
token sequence results in the removal of each affected macro identifier from the source code.
No semicolon (;) is needed to terminate a preprocessor directive. Any character found in the token sequence, including
semicolons, will appear in a macro expansion.token_sequence terminates at the first non-backslashed new line
encountered. Any sequence of whitespace, including comments in the token sequence, is replaced with a single-space
character.
After each individual macro expansion, a further scan is made of the newly expanded text. This allows the possibility
of using nested macros: the expanded text can contain macro identifiers that are subject to replacement. However, if
the macro expands into something that looks like a preprocessing directive, such directive will not be recognized by the
preprocessor. Any occurrences of the macro identifier found within literal strings, character constants, or comments in
the source code will not be expanded.
MikroElektronika
259
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
A macro won’t be expanded during its own expansion (so #define MACRO MACRO won’t expand indefinitely).
Here is an example:
/* Here are some simple macros: */

#define ERR_MSG “Out of range!”
#define EVERLOOP for( ; ; )
/* which we could use like this: */
main() {
EVERLOOP {
...
if (error) { Lcd_Out_Cp(ERR_MSG); break; }
...
}
}
Attempting to redefine an already defined macro identifier will result in a warning unless a new definition is exactly the
same token-by-token definition as the existing one. The preferred strategy when definitions might exist in other header
files is as follows:
#ifndef BLOCK_SIZE
#define BLOCK_SIZE 512
#endif
The middle line is bypassed if BLOCK_SIZE is currently defined; if BLOCK_SIZE is not currently defined, the middle
line is invoked to define it.
Macros with Parameters

The following syntax is used to define a macro with parameters:
#define macro_identifier(<arg_list>) <token_sequence>
Note that there can be no whitespace between macro_identifier and “(”. The optional arg_list is a sequence of
identifiers separated by commas, like the argument list of a C function. Each comma-delimited identifier has the role
of a formal argument or placeholder.
Such macros are called by writing
macro_identifier(<actual_arg_list>)
in the subsequent source code. The syntax is identical to that of a function call; indeed, many standard library C
“functions” are implemented as macros. However, there are some important semantic differences.
The optional actual_arg_list must contain the same number of comma-delimited token sequences, known as
actual arguments, as found in the formal arg_list of the #define line – there must be an actual argument for each formal
argument. An error will be reported if the number of arguments in two lists is not the same.
MikroElektronika
260
A macro call results in two sets of replacements. First, the macro identifier and the parenthesis-enclosed arguments
are replaced by the token sequence. Next, any formal arguments occurring in the token sequence are replaced by the
corresponding real arguments appearing in actual_arg_list. Like with simple macro definitions, rescanning occurs
to detect any embedded macro identifiers eligible for expansion.
Here is a simple example:
/* A simple macro which returns greater of its 2 arguments: */

#define _MAX(A, B) ((A) > (B)) ? (A) : (B)
/* Let’s call it: */

x = _MAX(a + b, c + d);
/* Preprocessor will transform the previous line into:

x = ((a + b) > (c + d)) ? (a + b) : (c + d) */
It is highly recommended to put parentheses around each argument in the macro body in order to avoid possible
problems with operator precedence.
Undefining Macros
The #undef directive is used to undefine a macro.
#undef macro_identifier
The directive #undef detaches any previous token sequence from macro_identifier; the macro definition has been
forgotten, and macro_identifier is undefined. No macro expansion occurs within the #undef lines.
The state of being defined or undefined is an important property of an identifier, regardless of the actual definition. The
#ifdef and #ifndef conditional directives, used to test whether any identifier is currently defined or not, offer a
flexible mechanism for controlling many aspects of a compilation.
After a macro identifier has been undefined, it can be redefined with #define, using the same or different token
sequence.
File Inclusion
The preprocessor directive #include pulls in header files (extension .h) into the source code. Do not rely on
preprocessor to include source files (extension .c) — see Add/Remove Files from Project for more information.
The syntax of the #include directive has two formats:
#include <header_name>
#include “header_name”
MikroElektronika
261
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
The preprocessor removes the #include line and replaces it with the entire text of a header file at that point in the
source code. The placement of #include can therefore influence the scope and duration of any identifiers in the
included file.
The difference between these two formats lies in searching algorithm employed in trying to locate the include file.
If the #include directive is used with the <header_name> version, the search is made successively in each of the
following locations, in this particular order:
1. the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 installation folder › “include” folder
2. user’s custom search paths
The “header_name” version specifies a user-supplied include file; the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 will
look for the header file in the following locations, in this particular order:
1. the project folder (folder which contains the project file .mcpds)
2. the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 installation folder › “include” folder
3. user’s custom search paths
Explicit Path
By placing an explicit path in header_name, only that directory will be searched. For example:
#include “C:\my_files\test.h”
Note
There is also a third version of the #include directive, rarely used, which assumes that neither < nor “ appear as the
first non-whitespace character following #include:
#include macro_identifier
It assumes that macro definition that will expand macro identifier into a valid delimited header name with either
<header_name> or “header_name” formats exists.
MikroElektronika
262
Preprocessor Operators
The # (pound sign) is a preprocessor directive when it occurs as the first non-whitespace character on a line. Also, #
and ## perform operator replacement and merging during the preprocessor scanning phase.
Operator #
In C preprocessor, a character sequence enclosed by quotes is considered a token and its content is not analyzed. This
means that macro names within quotes are not expanded.
If you need an actual argument (the exact sequence of characters within quotes) as a result of preprocessing, use the #
operator in macro body. It can be placed in front of a formal macro argument in definition in order to convert the actual
argument to a string after replacement.
For example, let’s have macro LCD_PRINT for printing variable name and value on Lcd:
#define LCD_PRINT(val) Lcd_Out_Cp(#val “: “); \

Lcd_Out_Cp(IntToStr(val));
Now, the following code,
LCD_PRINT(temp)
will be preprocessed to this:
Lcd_Out_Cp(“temp” “: “); Lcd_Out_Cp(IntToStr(temp));
Operator ##
Operator ## is used for token pasting. Two tokens can be pasted(merged) together by placing ## in between them
(plus optional whitespace on either side). The preprocessor removes whitespace and ##, combining the separate
tokens into one new token. This is commonly used for constructing identifiers.
For example, see the definition of macro SPLICE for pasting two tokens into one identifier:
#define SPLICE(x,y) x ## _ ## y
Now, the call SPLICE(cnt, 2) will expand to the identifier cnt_2.
Note: The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 does not support the older nonportable method of token pasting
using (l/**/r).
MikroElektronika
263
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Conditional Compilation
Conditional compilation directives are typically used to make source programs easy to change and easy to compile
in different execution environments. The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 supports conditional compilation by
replacing the appropriate source-code lines with a blank line.
All conditional compilation directives must be completed in the source or include file in which they have begun.
Directives #if, #elif, #else, and #endif

The conditional directives #if, #elif, #else, and #endif work very similar to the common C conditional statements.
If the expression you write after #if has a nonzero value, the line group immediately following the #if directive is
retained in the translation unit.
The syntax is:
#if constant_expression_1
<section_1>
[#elif constant_expression_2
<section_2>]
...
[#elif constant_expression_n
<section_n>]
[#else
<final_section>]
#endif
Each #if directive in a source file must be matched by a closing #endif directive. Any number of #elif directives
can appear between #if and #endif directives, but at most one #else directive is allowed. The #else directive, if
present, must be the last directive before #endif.
sections can be any program text that has meaning to compiler or preprocessor. The preprocessor selects a single
section by evaluating constant_expression following each #if or #elif directive until it finds a true (nonzero)
constant expression. The constant expressions are subject to macro expansion.
If all occurrences of constant-expression are false, or if no #elif directives appear, the preprocessor selects the text
block after the #else clause. If the #else clause is omitted and all instances of constant_expression in the #if
block are false, no section is selected for further processing.
Any processed section can contain further conditional clauses, nested to any depth. Each nested #else, #elif, or
#endif directive belongs to the closest preceding the #if directive.
The net result of the preceding scenario is that only one code section (possibly empty) will be compiled.
MikroElektronika
264
Directives #ifdef and #ifndef

The #ifdef and #ifndef directives can be used anywhere #if can be used and they can test whether an identifier
is currently defined or not. The line
#ifdef identifier
has exactly the same effect as #if 1 if identifier is currently defined, and the same effect as #if 0 if identifier
is currently undefined. The other directive, #ifndef, tests true for the “not-defined” condition, producing the opposite
results.
The syntax thereafter follows that of #if, #elif, #else, and #endif.
An identifier defined as NULL is considered to be defined.
MikroElektronika
265
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
CHAPTER 9
PIC24 Libraries
mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a set of libraries which simplify the initialization and use of dsPIC30/33
and PIC24 and their modules:
Use Library manager to include mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 Libraries in you project.
MikroElektronika
266
Hardware Libraries
- ADC Library
- CAN Library
- CANSPI Library
- Compact Flash Library
- Enhanced CAN Library
- EEPROM Library
- Epson S1D13700 Graphic Lcd Library
- Flash Memory Library
- Graphic Lcd Library
- I²C Library
- Keypad Library
- Lcd Library
- Manchester Code Library
- Multi Media Card Library
- OneWire Library
- Peripheral Pin Select Library
- Port Expander Library
- PS/2 Library
- PWM Library
- PWM Motor Library
- RS-485 Library
- Software I²C Library
- Software SPI Library
- Software UART Library
- Sound Library
- SPI Library
- SPI Ethernet Library
- SPI Ethernet ENC24J600 Library
- SPI Graphic Lcd Library
- SPI Lcd Library
- SPI Lcd8 Library
- SPI T6963C Graphic Lcd Library
- T6963C Graphic Lcd Library
- TFT Display Library
- Touch Panel Library
- Touch Panel TFT Library
- UART Library
- USB Library
Digital Signal Processing Libraries

- FIR Filter Library
- IIR Filter Library
- FFT Library
- Bit Reverse Complex Library
- Vectors Library
- Matrices Library
MikroElektronika
267
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Standard ANSI C Libraries

- ANSI C Ctype Library
- ANSI C Math Library
- ANSI C Stdlib Library
- ANSI C String Library
Miscellaneous Libraries
- Button Library
- Conversions Library
- PrintOut Library
- Setjmp Library
- Sprint Library
- Time Library
- Trigonometry Library
- See also Built-in Routines.
MikroElektronika
268
Hardware Libraries
- ADC Library
- CAN Library
- CANSPI Library
- Compact Flash Library
- DSP Libraries
- Enhanced CAN Library
- EEPROM Library
- Epson S1D13700 Graphic Lcd Library
- Flash Memory Library
- Graphic Lcd Library
- I²C Library
- Keypad Library
- Lcd Library
- Manchester Code Library
- Multi Media Card Library
- OneWire Library
- Peripheral Pin Select Library
- Port Expander Library
- PS/2 Library
- PWM Library
- PWM Motor Library
- RS-485 Library
- Software I²C Library
- Software SPI Library
- Software UART Library
- Sound Library
- SPI Library
- SPI Ethernet Library
- SPI Ethernet ENC24J600 Library
- SPI Graphic Lcd Library
- SPI Lcd Library
- SPI Lcd8 Library
- SPI T6963C Graphic Lcd Library
- T6963C Graphic Lcd Library
- TFT Display Library
- Touch Panel Library
- Touch Panel TFT Library
- UART Library
- USB Library
ADC Library
ADC (Analog to Digital Converter) module is available with a number of dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 MCU modules.
ADC is an electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. ADC Library provides you a
comfortable work with the module.
MikroElektronika
269
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Library Routines
- ADCx_Init
- ADCx_Init_Advanced
- ADCx_Get_Sample
- ADCx_Read
- ADC_Set_Active
ADCx_Init
Prototype void ADCx_Init();

Description This routines configures ADC module to work with default settings.
The internal ADC module is set to:
- single channel conversion

- 10-bit conversion resolution
- unsigned integer data format
- auto-convert
- VRef+ : AVdd, VRef- : AVss
- instruction cycle clock
- conversion clock : 32*Tcy
- auto-sample time : 31TAD
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Requires - MCU with built-in ADC module.
- ADC library routines require you to specify the module you want to use. To select the
desired ADC module, simply change the letter x in the routine prototype for a number
from 1 to 2.
Example ADC1_Init(); // Initialize ADC1 module with default settings
Notes - Number of ADC modules per MCU differs from chip to chip. Please, read the appropriate
datasheet before utilizing this library.
MikroElektronika
270
ADCx_Init_Advanced
Prototype // dsPIC30F and PIC24FJ prototype

void ADC1_Init_Advanced(unsigned Reference);
// dsPIC33FJ and PIC24HJ prototype

void ADCx_Init_Advanced(unsigned ADCMode, unsigned Reference);
Description This routine configures the internal ADC module to work with user defined settings.
Parameters - ADCMode: resolution of the ADC module.
- Reference: voltage reference used in ADC process.
Description Predefined library const

ADC mode:
10-bit resolution _ADC_10bit
12-bit resolution _ADC_12bit
Voltage reference
Internal voltage reference _ADC_INTERNAL_REF
External voltage reference _ADC_EXTERNAL_REF
Returns Nothing.
Requires - MCU with built-in ADC module.
- ADC library routines require you to specify the module you want to use. To select the
desired ADC module, simply change the letter x in the routine prototype for a number
from 1 to 2.
Example ADC1_Init_Advanced(_ADC_10bit, _ADC_INTERNAL_REF); // sets ADC
module in 12-bit resolution mode with internal reference used
Notes - Number of ADC modules per MCU differs from chip to chip. Please, read the appropriate
- Not all MCUs support advanced configuration. Please, read the appropriate datasheet
before utilizing this library.
MikroElektronika
271
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
ADCx_Get_Sample
Prototype unsigned ADCx_Get_Sample(unsigned channel);

Description The function enables ADC module and reads the specified analog channel input.
Parameters - channel represents the channel from which the analog value is to be acquired.
Returns 10-bit or 12-bit (depending on selected mode by ADCx_Init_Advanced or MCU) unsigned value
from the specified channel.
Requires - The MCU with built-in ADC module.
- Prior to using this routine, ADC module needs to be initialized. See ADCx_Init and ADCx_Init_
Advanced.
- ADC library routines require you to specify the module you want to use. To select the desired ADC
module, simply change the letter x in the routine prototype for a number from 1 to 2.
- Before using the function, be sure to configure the appropriate TRISx bits to designate pins as
inputs.
Example unsigned adc_value;
...
adc_value = ADC1_Get_Sample(10); // read analog value from ADC1 module
channel 10
Notes - Number of ADC modules per MCU differs from chip to chip. Please, read the appropriate datasheet
- The function sets the appropriate bit in the ADPCFG registers to enable analog function of the
chosen pin.
- Refer to the appropriate Datasheet for channel-to-pin mapping.
ADCx_Read
Prototype unsigned ADCx_Read(unsigned channel);

Description The function initializes, enables ADC module and reads the specified analog channel input.
Parameters - channel represents the channel from which the analog value is to be acquired.
Returns 10-bit or 12-bit (depending on the MCU) unsigned value from the specified channel.
Requires - The MCU with built-in ADC module.
- ADC library routines require you to specify the module you want to use. To select the desired ADC
- Number of ADC modules per MCU differs from chip to chip. Please, read the appropriate datasheet
- Before using the function, be sure to configure the appropriate TRISx bits to designate pins as
inputs.
Example unsigned adc_value;
...
adc_value = ADC1_Read(10); // read analog value from ADC1 module
channel 10
Notes - This is a standalone routine, so there is no need for a previous initialization of ADC module.
- The function sets the appropriate bit in the ADPCFG registers to enable analog function of the
chosen pin.
- Refer to the appropriate Datasheet for channel-to-pin mapping.
MikroElektronika
272
ADC_Set_Active
Prototype void ADC_Set_Active(unsigned (*adc_gs)(unsigned));

Description Sets active ADC module.
Parameters Parameters:
- adc_gs: ADCx_Get_Sample handler.

Returns Nothing.
Requires Routine is available only for MCUs with multiple ADC modules.
Used ADC module must be initialized before using this routine. See ADCx_Init and ADCx_Init_
Advanced routines.
Example // Activate ADC2 module

ADC_Set_Active(ADC2_Get_Sample);
Notes None.
Library Example
This code snippet reads analog value from the channel 1 and sends readings as a text over UART1.
Copy Code To Clipboard
unsigned adcRes;
char txt[6];
void main() {
PORTB = 0x0000;
TRISB.F1 = 1; // set pin as input - needed for ADC to work
ADC1_Init();
UART1_Init(9600);
while (1) {
adcRes = ADC1_Get_Sample(1);
WordToStr(adcRes, txt);
UART1_Write_Text(txt);
Delay_ms(50);
}
}
MikroElektronika
273
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
ADC HW connection
MikroElektronika
274
CAN Library
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a library (driver) for working with the dsPIC30F CAN module.
The CAN is a very robust protocol that has error detection and signalization, self–checking and fault confinement.
Faulty CAN data and remote frames are re-transmitted automatically, similar to the Ethernet.
Data transfer rates depend on distance. For example, 1 Mbit/s can be achieved at network lengths below 40m while
250 Kbit/s can be achieved at network lengths below 250m. The greater distance the lower maximum bitrate that can
be achieved. The lowest bitrate defined by the standard is 200Kbit/s. Cables used are shielded twisted pairs.
CAN supports two message formats:
- Standard format, with 11 identifier bits and

- Extended format, with 29 identifier bits
Important:
- Consult the CAN standard about CAN bus termination resistance.

- CAN library routines require you to specify the module you want to use. To use the desired CAN module,
simply change the letter x in the routine prototype for a number from 1 to 2.
- Number of CAN modules per MCU differs from chip to chip. Please, read the appropriate datasheet before
utilizing this library.
Library Routines
- CANxSetOperationMode
- CANxGetOperationMode
- CANxInitialize
- CANxSetBaudRate
- CANxSetMask
- CANxSetFilter
- CANxRead
- CANxWrite
MikroElektronika
275
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
CANxSetOperationMode
Prototype void CANxSetOperationMode(unsigned int mode, unsigned int WAIT);

Description Sets the CAN module to requested mode.
Parameters - mode: CAN module operation mode. Valid values: CAN_OP_MODE constants. See CAN_OP_
MODE constants.
- WAIT: CAN mode switching verification request. If WAIT == 0, the call is non-blocking. The
function does not verify if the CAN module is switched to requested mode or not. Caller must
use CANxGetOperationMode to verify correct operation mode before performing mode specific
operation. If WAIT != 0, the call is blocking – the function won’t “return” until the requested mode
is set.
Returns Nothing.
Requires MCU with the CAN module.
MCU must be connected to the CAN transceiver (MCP2551 or similar) which is connected to the
CAN bus.
Example // set the CAN1 module into configuration mode (wait inside
CAN1SetOperationMode until this mode is set)
CAN1SetOperationMode(_CAN_MODE_CONFIG, 0xFF);
Notes - CAN library routine require you to specify the module you want to use. To use the desired CAN
- Number of CAN modules per MCU differs from chip to chip. Please, read the appropriate datasheet
CANxGetOperationMode
Prototype unsigned int CANxGetOperationMode();

Description The function returns current operation mode of the CAN module. See CAN_OP_MODE constants
or device datasheet for operation mode codes.
Parameters None.
Returns Current operation mode.
MCU must be connected to the CAN transceiver (MCP2551 or similar) which is connected to the
CAN bus.
Example // check whether the CAN1 module is in Normal mode and if it is then do
something.
if (CAN1GetOperationMode() == _CAN_MODE_NORMAL) {
...
}
MikroElektronika
276
CANxInitialize
Prototype void CANxInitialize(unsigned int SJW, unsigned int BRP, unsigned int PHSEG1,
unsigned int PHSEG2, unsigned int PROPSEG, unsigned int CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS);
Description Initializes the CAN module.
The internal dsPIC30F CAN module is set to:
- Disable CAN capture

- Continue CAN operation in Idle mode
- Do not abort pending transmissions
- Fcan clock : 4*Tcy (Fosc)
- Baud rate is set according to given parameters
- CAN mode is set to Normal
- Filter and mask registers IDs are set to zero
- Filter and mask message frame type is set according to CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS value
SAM, SEG2PHTS, WAKFIL and DBEN bits are set according to CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS value.
Parameters - SJW as defined in MCU’s datasheet (CAN Module)
- BRP as defined in MCU’s datasheet (CAN Module)
- PHSEG1 as defined in MCU’s datasheet (CAN Module)
- PROPSEG as defined in MCU’s datasheet (CAN Module)
- CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS is formed from predefined constants. See CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS constants.
Returns Nothing.
MCU must be connected to the CAN transceiver (MCP2551 or similar) which is connected to the CAN
bus.
Example // initialize the CAN1 module with appropriate baud rate and message
acceptance flags along with the sampling rules
unsigned int can_config_flags;
...
can_config_flags = _CAN_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE & // Form value to be used
_CAN_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON & // with
CAN1Initialize
_CAN_CONFIG_STD_MSG &
_CAN_CONFIG_DBL_BUFFER_ON &
_CAN_CONFIG_MATCH_MSG_TYPE &
_CAN_CONFIG_LINE_FILTER_OFF;
CAN1Initialize(1,3,3,3,1,can_config_flags); // initialize the CAN1 module

Notes - CAN mode NORMAL will be set on exit.
- CAN library routine require you to specify the module you want to use. To use the desired CAN
MikroElektronika
277
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
CANxSetBaudRate
Prototype void CANxSetBaudRate(unsigned int SJW, unsigned int BRP, unsigned int PHSEG1,
unsigned int PHSEG2, unsigned int PROPSEG, unsigned int CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS);
Description Sets CAN baud rate. Due to complexity of the CAN protocol, you can not simply force a bps value.
Instead, use this function when CAN is in Config mode. Refer to datasheet for details.
SAM, SEG2PHTS and WAKFIL bits are set according to CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS value. Refer to
datasheet for details.
- CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS is formed from predefined constants. See CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS constants.
Returns Nothing.
bus.
CAN must be in Config mode, otherwise the function will be ignored. See CANxSetOperationMode.
Example // set required baud rate and sampling rules
unsigned int can_config_flags;
...
CAN1SetOperationMode(_CAN_MODE_CONFIG,0xFF); // set CONFIGURATION
mode (CAN1 module must be in config mode for baud rate settings)
can_config_flags = _CAN_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE & // Form value to be used

_CAN_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON & // with CAN1SetBaudRate
CAN1SetBaudRate(1,3,3,3,1,can_config_flags);// set the CAN1 module baud rate

MikroElektronika
278
CANxSetMask
Prototype void CANxSetMask(unsigned int CAN_MASK, long val, unsigned int CAN_CONFIG_
FLAGS);
Description Function sets mask for advanced filtering of messages. Given value is bit adjusted to appropriate
buffer mask registers.
Parameters - CAN_MASK: CAN module mask number. Valid values: CAN_MASK constants. See CAN_MASK
constants.
- val: mask register value. This value is bit-adjusted to appropriate buffer mask registers
- CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS: selects type of message to filter. Valid values:
- _CAN_CONFIG_ALL_VALID_MSG,
- _CAN_CONFIG_MATCH_MSG_TYPE & _CAN_CONFIG_STD_MSG,
- _CAN_CONFIG_MATCH_MSG_TYPE & _CAN_CONFIG_XTD_MSG.
See CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS constants.
Returns Nothing.
bus.
Example // set appropriate filter mask and message type value
CAN1SetOperationMode(_CAN_MODE_CONFIG,0xFF); // set CONFIGURATION
mode (CAN1 module must be in config mode for mask settings)
// Set all B1 mask bits to 1 (all filtered bits are relevant):

// Note that -1 is just a cheaper way to write 0xFFFFFFFF.
// Complement will do the trick and fill it up with ones.
CAN1SetMask(_CAN_MASK_B1, -1, _CAN_CONFIG_MATCH_MSG_TYPE & _CAN_CONFIG_XTD_
MSG);
MikroElektronika
279
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
CANxSetFilter
Prototype void CANxSetFilter(unsigned int CAN_FILTER, long val, unsigned int CAN_
CONFIG_FLAGS);
Description Function sets message filter. Given value is bit adjusted to appropriate buffer mask registers.
Parameters - CAN_FILTER: CAN module filter number. Valid values: CAN_FILTER constants. See CAN_FILTER
constants.
- val: filter register value. This value is bit-adjusted to appropriate filter registers
- CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS: selects type of message to filter. Valid values: _CAN_CONFIG_STD_MSG and
_CAN_CONFIG_XTD_MSG. See CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS constants.
Returns Nothing.
bus.
Example // set appropriate filter value and message type
CAN1SetOperationMode(_CAN_MODE_CONFIG,0xFF); // set
CONFIGURATION mode (CAN1 module must be in config mode for filter settings)
// Set id of filter B1_F1 to 3

CAN1SetFilter(_CAN_FILTER_B1_F1, 3, _CAN_CONFIG_XTD_MSG);
MikroElektronika
280
CANxRead
Prototype unsigned int CANxRead(unsigned long *id, char *data_, unsigned int *dataLen,
unsigned int *CAN_RX_MSG_FLAGS);
Description If at least one full Receive Buffer is found, it will be processed in the following way :
- Message ID is retrieved and stored to location pointed by id pointer

- Message data is retrieved and stored to array pointed by data pointer
- Message length is retrieved and stored to location pointed by dataLen pointer
- Message flags are retrieved and stored to location pointed by CAN_RX_MSG_FLAGS pointer
Parameters - id: message identifier address
- data: an array of bytes up to 8 bytes in length
- dataLen: data length address
- CAN_RX_MSG_FLAGS: message flags address. For message receive flags format refer to CAN_RX_
MSG_FLAGS constants. See CAN_RX_MSG_FLAGS constants.
Returns - 0 if nothing is received
- 0xFFFF if one of the Receive Buffers is full (message received)
bus.
Example // check the CAN1 module for received messages. If any was received do
something.
unsigned int msg_rcvd, rx_flags, data_len;
char data[8];
unsigned long msg_id;
...
CAN1SetOperationMode(_CAN_MODE_NORMAL,0xFF); // set NORMAL
mode (CAN1 module must be in mode in which receive is possible)
...
rx_flags = 0; // clear message flags
if (msg_rcvd = CAN1Read(&msg_id, data, &data_len, &rx_flags)) {
...
}
MikroElektronika
281
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
CANxWrite
Prototype unsigned int CANxWrite(long id, char *data_, unsigned int DataLen, unsigned
int CAN_TX_MSG_FLAGS);
Description If at least one empty Transmit Buffer is found, the function sends message in the queue for
transmission.
Parameters - id: CAN message identifier. Valid values: 11 or 29 bit values, depending on message type (standard
or extended)
- data: data to be sent
- dataLen: data length. Valid values: 0..8
- CAN_RX_MSG_FLAGS: message flags. Valid values: CAN_TX_MSG_FLAGS constants. See CAN_TX_
MSG_FLAGS constants.
Returns - 0 if all Transmit Buffers are busy
- 0xFFFF if at least one Transmit Buffer is available
bus.
Example // send message extended CAN message with appropriate ID and data
unsigned int tx_flags;
char data[8];
...
CAN1SetOperationMode(_CAN_MODE_NORMAL,0xFF); // set NORMAL
mode (CAN1 must be in mode in which transmission is possible)
tx_flags = _CAN_TX_PRIORITY_0 &

_CAN_TX_XTD_FRAME &
_CAN_TX_NO_RTR_FRAME; // set message flags
CAN1Write(msg_id, data, 1, tx_flags);
MikroElektronika
282
CAN Constants
There is a number of constants predefined in CAN library. To be able to use the library effectively, you need to be
familiar with these. You might want to check the example at the end of the chapter.
CAN_OP_MODE Constants
CAN_OP_MODE constants define CAN operation mode. Function CANxSetOperationMode expects one of these as its
argument:
const unsigned int

_CAN_MODE_BITS = 0xE0, // Use this to access opmode bits
_CAN_MODE_NORMAL = 0x00,
_CAN_MODE_SLEEP = 0x20,
_CAN_MODE_LOOP = 0x40,
_CAN_MODE_LISTEN = 0x60,
_CAN_MODE_CONFIG = 0x80;
CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS Constants
CAN_CONFIG_FLAGS constants define flags related to CAN module configuration. Functions CANxInitialize and
CANxSetBaudRate expect one of these (or a bitwise combination) as their argument:
const unsigned int

_CAN_CONFIG_DEFAULT = 0xFF, // 11111111
_CAN_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_BIT = 0x01,
_CAN_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON = 0xFF, // XXXXXXX1
_CAN_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_OFF = 0xFE, // XXXXXXX0
_CAN_CONFIG_LINE_FILTER_BIT = 0x02,
_CAN_CONFIG_LINE_FILTER_ON = 0xFF, // XXXXXX1X
_CAN_CONFIG_LINE_FILTER_OFF = 0xFD, // XXXXXX0X
_CAN_CONFIG_SAMPLE_BIT = 0x04,
_CAN_CONFIG_SAMPLE_ONCE = 0xFF, // XXXXX1XX
_CAN_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE = 0xFB, // XXXXX0XX
_CAN_CONFIG_MSG_TYPE_BIT = 0x08,
_CAN_CONFIG_STD_MSG = 0xFF, // XXXX1XXX
_CAN_CONFIG_XTD_MSG = 0xF7, // XXXX0XXX
_CAN_CONFIG_DBL_BUFFER_BIT = 0x10,
_CAN_CONFIG_DBL_BUFFER_ON = 0xFF, // XXX1XXXX
_CAN_CONFIG_DBL_BUFFER_OFF = 0xEF, // XXX0XXXX
MikroElektronika
283
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
_CAN_CONFIG_MSG_BITS = 0x60,
_CAN_CONFIG_ALL_MSG = 0xFF, // X11XXXXX
_CAN_CONFIG_VALID_XTD_MSG = 0xDF, // X10XXXXX
_CAN_CONFIG_VALID_STD_MSG = 0xBF, // X01XXXXX
_CAN_CONFIG_ALL_VALID_MSG = 0x9F; // X00XXXXX
You may use bitwise AND (&) to form config byte out of these values. For example:
init = _CAN_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE &

_CAN_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON &
_CAN_CONFIG_VALID_XTD_MSG &
...
CANInitialize(1, 1, 3, 3, 1, init); // initialize CAN
CAN_TX_MSG_FLAGS Constants
CAN_TX_MSG_FLAGS are flags related to transmission of a CAN message:
const unsigned int

_CAN_TX_PRIORITY_BITS = 0x03,
_CAN_TX_PRIORITY_0 = 0xFC, // XXXXXX00
_CAN_TX_PRIORITY_1 = 0xFD, // XXXXXX01
_CAN_TX_PRIORITY_2 = 0xFE, // XXXXXX10
_CAN_TX_PRIORITY_3 = 0xFF, // XXXXXX11
_CAN_TX_FRAME_BIT = 0x08,
_CAN_TX_STD_FRAME = 0xFF, // XXXXX1XX
_CAN_TX_XTD_FRAME = 0xF7, // XXXXX0XX
_CAN_TX_RTR_BIT = 0x40,
_CAN_TX_NO_RTR_FRAME = 0xFF, // X1XXXXXX
_CAN_TX_RTR_FRAME = 0xBF; // X0XXXXXX
You may use bitwise AND (&) to adjust the appropriate flags. For example:
// form value to be used with CANSendMessage:

send_config = _CAN_TX_PRIORITY_0 &
_CAN_TX_XTD_FRAME &
_CAN_TX_NO_RTR_FRAME;
...
CANSendMessage(id, data, 1, send_config);
MikroElektronika
284
CAN_RX_MSG_FLAGS Constants
CAN_RX_MSG_FLAGS are flags related to reception of CAN message. If a particular bit is set; corresponding meaning
is TRUE or else it will be FALSE.
const unsigned int

_CAN_RX_FILTER_BITS = 0x07, // Use this to access filter bits
_CAN_RX_FILTER_1 = 0x00,
_CAN_RX_OVERFLOW = 0x08, // Set if Overflowed else cleared
_CAN_RX_INVALID_MSG = 0x10, // Set if invalid else cleared
_CAN_RX_XTD_FRAME = 0x20, // Set if XTD message else cleared
_CAN_RX_RTR_FRAME = 0x40, // Set if RTR message else cleared
_CAN_RX_DBL_BUFFERED = 0x80; // Set if this message was hardware double-buffered
if (MsgFlag & _CAN_RX_OVERFLOW != 0) {

...
// Receiver overflow has occurred.
// We have lost our previous message.
}
CAN_MASK Constants
CAN_MASK constants define mask codes. Function CANxSetMask expects one of these as its argument:
const unsigned int

_CAN_MASK_B1 = 0,
_CAN_MASK_B2 = 1;
MikroElektronika
285
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
CAN_FILTER Constants
CAN_FILTER constants define filter codes. Function CANxSetFilter expects one of these as its argument:
const unsigned int

_CAN_FILTER_B1_F1 = 0,
_CAN_FILTER_B2_F4 = 5;
Library Example
The example demonstrates CAN protocol. The 1st node initiates the communication with the 2nd node by sending
some data to its address. The 2nd node responds by sending back the data incremented by 1. The 1st node then does
the same and sends incremented data back to the 2nd node, etc.
Code for the first CAN node:
unsigned int Can_Init_Flags, Can_Send_Flags, Can_Rcv_Flags; // can flags

unsigned int Rx_Data_Len; // received data length in
bytes
char RxTx_Data[8]; // can rx/tx data buffer
char Msg_Rcvd; // reception flag
unsigned long Tx_ID, Rx_ID; // can rx and tx ID
void main() {
ADPCFG = 0xFFFF;
PORTB = 0;
TRISB = 0;
Can_Init_Flags = 0; //
Can_Send_Flags = 0; // clear flags
Can_Rcv_Flags = 0; //
Can_Send_Flags = _CAN_TX_PRIORITY_0 & // Form value to be used

_CAN_TX_XTD_FRAME & // with CAN2Write
Can_Init_Flags = _CAN_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE & // Form value to be used

_CAN_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON & // with CAN2Initialize
_CAN_CONFIG_XTD_MSG &
MikroElektronika
286
RxTx_Data[0] = 9; // set initial data to be sent

CAN2Initialize(1,3,3,3,1,Can_Init_Flags); // initialize CAN2
CAN2SetOperationMode(_CAN_MODE_CONFIG,0xFF); // set CONFIGURATION mode
CAN2SetMask(_CAN_MASK_B1,-1,_CAN_CONFIG_MATCH_MSG_TYPE & _CAN_CONFIG_XTD_MSG); //

set all mask1 bits to ones
CAN2SetFilter(_CAN_FILTER_B2_F3,3,_CAN_CONFIG_XTD_MSG); // set
id of filter B1_F1 to 3
CAN2SetOperationMode(_CAN_MODE_NORMAL,0xFF); // set
NORMAL mode
Tx_ID = 12111; // set

transmit ID
CAN2Write(Tx_ID, RxTx_Data, 1, Can_Send_Flags); // send

initial message
while(1) { //
endless loop
Msg_Rcvd = CAN2Read(&Rx_ID , RxTx_Data , &Rx_Data_Len, &Can_Rcv_Flags); // receive
message
if ((Rx_ID == 3u) && Msg_Rcvd) { // if
message received check id
PORTB = RxTx_Data[0]; // id
correct, output data at PORTB
RxTx_Data[0]++; // increment
received data
Delay_ms(10);
CAN2Write(Tx_ID, RxTx_Data, 1, Can_Send_Flags); // send
incremented data back
}
}
}
MikroElektronika
287
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Code for the second CAN node:

bytes
void main() {
ADPCFG = 0xFFFF;
PORTB = 0;
TRISB = 0;
Can_Send_Flags = _CAN_TX_PRIORITY_0 & // Form value to be used

_CAN_TX_XTD_FRAME & // with CAN2Write
Can_Init_Flags = _CAN_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE & // Form value to be used

_CAN_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON & // with CAN2Initialize
_CAN_CONFIG_XTD_MSG &
CAN2Initialize(1,3,3,3,1,Can_Init_Flags); // initialize CAN2
CAN2SetOperationMode(_CAN_MODE_CONFIG,0xFF); // set CONFIGURATION mode

CAN2SetFilter(_CAN_FILTER_B1_F1,12111,_CAN_CONFIG_XTD_MSG); // set
id of filter B1_F1 to 12111
CAN2SetOperationMode(_CAN_MODE_NORMAL,0xFF); // set NORMAL mode
Tx_ID = 3; // set tx ID
while(1) { // endless loop

Msg_Rcvd = CAN2Read(&Rx_ID , RxTx_Data , &Rx_Data_Len, &Can_Rcv_Flags); // receive
message
if ((Rx_ID == 12111u) && Msg_Rcvd) { // if message received check id
PORTB = RxTx_Data[0]; // id correct, output data at PORTB
RxTx_Data[0]++; // increment received data
CAN2Write(Tx_ID, RxTx_Data, 1, Can_Send_Flags); // send incremented data back
}
}
}
MikroElektronika
288
HW Connection
Example of interfacing CAN transceiver with MCU and CAN bus
MikroElektronika
289
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
CANSPI Library
The SPI module is available with a number of the dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 MCUs. The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33
and PIC24 provides a library (driver) for working with mikroElektronika's CANSPI Add-on boards (with MCP2515 or
MCP2510) via SPI interface.
In the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24, each routine of the CAN library has its own CANSPI counterpart with
identical syntax. For more information on Controller Area Network, consult the CAN Library. Note that an effective
communication speed depends on SPI and certainly is slower than "real" CAN.
Important :
- Consult the CAN standard about CAN bus termination resistance.

- An effective CANSPI communication speed depends on SPI and certainly is slower than “real” CAN.
- The library uses the SPI module for communication. User must initialize appropriate SPI module before using
the CANSPI Library.
- For MCUs with multiple SPI modules it is possible to initialize both of them and then switch by using the
SPI_Set_Active routine.
- Number of SPI modules per MCU differs from chip to chip. Please, read the appropriate datasheet before
utilizing this library.
Library Dependency Tree
External dependencies of CANSPI Library
The following variables must

be defined in all projects using Description : Example :
CANSPI Library:
sbit CanSpi_CS at
extern sfr sbit CanSpi_CS; Chip Select line.
RF0_bit;
extern sfr sbit sbit CanSpi_Rst at
Reset line.
CanSpi_Rst; RF1_bit;
sbit
extern sfr sbit
Direction of the Chip Select pin. CanSpi_CS_Direction
CanSpi_CS_Direction;
at TRISF0_bit;
sbit
extern sfr sbit
Direction of the Reset pin. CanSpi_Rst_Direction
CanSpi_Rst_Direction;
at TRISF1_bit;
MikroElektronika
290
Library Routines
- CANSPISetOperationMode
- CANSPIGetOperationMode
- CANSPIInitialize
- CANSPISetBaudRate
- CANSPISetMask
- CANSPISetFilter
- CANSPIRead
- CANSPIWrite
CANSPISetOperationMode
Prototype void CANSPISetOperationMode(char mode, char WAIT);

Description Sets the CANSPI module to requested mode.
Parameters mode: CANSPI module operation mode. Valid values: CANSPI_OP_MODE constants. See CANSPI_
OP_MODE constants.
WAIT: CANSPI mode switching verification request. If WAIT == 0, the call is non-blocking. The
function does not verify if the CANSPI module is switched to requested mode or not. Caller must
use CANSPIGetOperationMode to verify correct operation mode before performing mode specific
operation. If WAIT != 0, the call is blocking – the function won’t “return” until the requested mode is
set.
Returns Nothing.
Requires The CANSPI routines are supported only by MCUs with the SPI module.
MCU has to be properly connected to mikroElektronika’s CANSPI Extra Board or similar hardware.
See connection example at the bottom of this page.
Example // set the CANSPI module into configuration mode (wait inside
CANSPISetOperationMode until this mode is set)
CANSPISetOperationMode(_CANSPI_MODE_CONFIG, 0xFF);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
291
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
CANSPIGetOperationMode
Prototype char CANSPIGetOperationMode();
Description The function returns current operation mode of the CANSPI module. Check CANSPI_OP_MODE
constants or device datasheet for operation mode codes.
Parameters None.
Requires The CANSPI routines are supported only by MCUs with the SPI module.
Example // check whether the CANSPI module is in Normal mode and if it is do
something.
if (CANSPIGetOperationMode() == _CANSPI_MODE_NORMAL) {
...
}
Notes None.
CANSPIInitialize
Prototype void CANSPIInitialize(char SJW, char BRP, char PHSEG1, char PHSEG2, char
PROPSEG, char CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS);
Description Initializes the CANSPI module.
Stand-Alone CAN controller in the CANSPI module is set to:
- Disable CAN capture

- Continue CAN operation in Idle mode
- Do not abort pending transmissions
- Fcan clock : 4*Tcy (Fosc)
- CAN mode : Normal
- Filter and mask registers IDs are set to zero
- Filter and mask message frame type is set according to CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS value
SAM, SEG2PHTS, WAKFIL and DBEN bits are set according to CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS value.
- CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS is formed from predefined constants. See CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS
constants.
Returns Nothing.
MikroElektronika
292
Requires Global variables :
- CanSpi_CS: Chip Select line

- CanSpi_Rst: Reset line
- CanSpi_CS_Direction: Direction of the Chip Select pin
- CanSpi_Rst_Direction: Direction of the Reset pin
must be defined before using this function.
The CANSPI routines are supported only by MCUs with the SPI module.
The SPI module needs to be initialized. See the SPIx_Init and SPIx_Init_Advanced routines.
Example // CANSPI module connections
sbit CanSpi_CS at RF0_bit;
sbit CanSpi_CS_Direction at TRISF0_bit;
sbit CanSpi_Rst at RF1_bit;
sbit CanSpi_Rst_Direction at TRISF1_bit;
// End CANSPI module connections
// initialize the CANSPI module with the appropriate baud rate and message
char CANSPI_Init_Flags;
...
CANSPI_Init_Flags = _CANSPI_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE & // form value to be
used
_CANSPI_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON & // with
CANSPIInitialize
_CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG &
_CANSPI_CONFIG_DBL_BUFFER_ON &
_CANSPI_CONFIG_VALID_XTD_MSG;
...
SPI1_Init(); // initialize SPI1 module
CANSPIInitialize(1,3,3,3,1,CANSPI_Init_Flags); // initialize external
CANSPI module
Notes - CANSPI mode NORMAL will be set on exit.
MikroElektronika
293
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
CANSPISetBaudRate
Prototype void CANSPISetBaudRate(char SJW, char BRP, char PHSEG1, char PHSEG2, char
PROPSEG, char CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS);
Returns Nothing.
Description Sets the CANSPI module baud rate. Due to complexity of the CAN protocol, you can not simply force
a bps value. Instead, use this function when the CANSPI module is in Config mode.
SAM, SEG2PHTS and WAKFIL bits are set according to CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS value. Refer to
datasheet for details.
- CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS is formed from predefined constants. See CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS
constants.
Returns Nothing.
Requires The CANSPI module must be in Config mode, otherwise the function will be ignored. See
CANSPISetOperationMode.
char CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS;
...
CANSPISetOperationMode(_CANSPI_MODE_CONFIG,0xFF); // set CONFIGURATION
mode (CANSPI module must be in config mode for baud rate settings)
CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS = _CANSPI_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE &
_CANSPI_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON &
_CANSPI_CONFIG_STD_MSG &
_CANSPI_CONFIG_VALID_XTD_MSG &
_CANSPI_CONFIG_LINE_FILTER_OFF;
CANSPISetBaudRate(1, 1, 3, 3, 1, CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
294
CANSPISetMask
Prototype void CANSPISetMask(unsigned short CANSPI_MASK, long value, unsigned short
CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS);
Description Configures mask for advanced filtering of messages. The parameter value is bit-adjusted to the
appropriate mask registers.
Parameters - CANSPI_MASK: CAN module mask number. Valid values: CANSPI_MASK constants. See CANSPI_
MASK constants.
- CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS: selects type of message to filter. Valid values:
- _CANSPI_CONFIG_ALL_VALID_MSG,
- _CANSPI_CONFIG_MATCH_MSG_TYPE & _CANSPI_CONFIG_STD_MSG,
- _CANSPI_CONFIG_MATCH_MSG_TYPE & _CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG.
See CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS constants.
Returns Nothing.
Example // set the appropriate filter mask and message type value
CANSPISetOperationMode(_CANSPI_MODE_CONFIG,0xFF); // set
CONFIGURATION mode (CANSPI module must be in config mode for mask settings)
// Set all B1 mask bits to 1 (all filtered bits are relevant):

CANSPISetMask(_CANSPI_MASK_B1, -1, _CANSPI_CONFIG_MATCH_MSG_TYPE & _CANSPI_
CONFIG_XTD_MSG);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
295
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
CANSPISetFilter
Prototype void CANSPISetFilter(unsigned short CANSPI_FILTER, long value, unsigned
short CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS);
Description Configures message filter. The parameter value is bit-adjusted to the appropriate filter registers.
Parameters - CANSPI_FILTER: CAN module filter number. Valid values: CANSPI_FILTER constants. See
CANSPI_FILTER constants.
- CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS: selects type of message to filter. Valid values: _CANSPI_CONFIG_STD_
MSG and _CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG. See CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS constants.
Returns Nothing.
Example // set the appropriate filter value and message type
CANSPISetOperationMode(_CANSPI_MODE_CONFIG,0xFF); //
set CONFIGURATION mode (CANSPI module must be in config mode for filter
settings)
// Set id of filter B1_F1 to 3 :

CANSPISetFilter(_CANSPI_FILTER_B1_F1, 3, _CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
296
CANSPIRead
Prototype unsigned short CANSPIRead(long *id, unsigned short *data, unsigned short
*datalen, unsigned short *CANSPI_RX_MSG_FLAGS);
Description If at least one full Receive Buffer is found, it will be processed in the following way:
- Message ID is retrieved and stored to location provided by the id parameter

- Message data is retrieved and stored to a buffer provided by the data parameter
- Message length is retrieved and stored to location provided by the dataLen parameter
- Message flags are retrieved and stored to location provided by the CANSPI_RX_MSG_FLAGS
parameter
- CANSPI_RX_MSG_FLAGS: message flags address. For message receive flags format refer to
CANSPI_RX_MSG_FLAGS constants. See CANSPI_RX_MSG_FLAGS constants.
Returns - 0 if nothing is received
- 0xFFFF if one of the Receive Buffers is full (message received)
Requires The CANSPI module must be in a mode in which receiving is possible. See
Example // check the CANSPI module for received messages. If any was received do
something.
unsigned short msg_rcvd, rx_flags, data_len;
char data[8];
...
CANSPISetOperationMode(_CANSPI_MODE_NORMAL,0xFF); // set
NORMAL mode (CANSPI module must be in mode in which receive is possible)
...
rx_flags = 0; // clear message
flags
if (msg_rcvd = CANSPIRead(msg_id, data, data_len, rx_flags)) {
...
}
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
297
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
CANSPIWrite
Prototype unsigned short CANSPIWrite(long id, unsigned short *data, unsigned short
datalen, unsigned short CANSPI_TX_MSG_FLAGS);
transmission.
Parameters - id: CAN message identifier. Valid values: 11 or 29 bit values, depending on message type (standard
or extended)
- Data: data to be sent
- DataLen: data length. Valid values: 0..8
- CANSPI_TX_MSG_FLAGS: message flags. Valid values: CANSPI_TX_MSG_FLAGS constants. See
CANSPI_TX_MSG_FLAGS constants.
- 0xFFFF if at least one Transmit Buffer is available
Requires The CANSPI module must be in mode in which transmission is possible. See
Example // send message extended CAN message with the appropriate ID and data
unsigned short tx_flags;
char data[8];
long msg_id;
...
CANSPISetOperationMode(CANSPI_MODE_NORMAL,0xFF); // set
NORMAL mode (CANSPI must be in mode in which transmission is possible)
tx_flags = _CANSPI_TX_PRIORITY_0 & _CANSPI_TX_XTD_FRAME; // set message

flags
CANSPIWrite(msg_id, data, 2, tx_flags);
Notes None.
CANSPI Constants
There is a number of constants predefined in the CANSPI library. You need to be familiar with them in order to be able
to use the library effectively. Check the example at the end of the chapter.
CANSPI_OP_MODE Constants
The CANSPI_OP_MODE constants define CANSPI operation mode. Function CANSPISetOperationMode expects
one of these as it's argument:
MikroElektronika
298
const unsigned int

_CANSPI_MODE_BITS = 0xE0, // Use this to access opmode bits
_CANSPI_MODE_NORMAL = 0x00,
_CANSPI_MODE_SLEEP = 0x20,
_CANSPI_MODE_LOOP = 0x40,
_CANSPI_MODE_LISTEN = 0x60,
_CANSPI_MODE_CONFIG = 0x80;
CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS Constants
The CANSPI_CONFIG_FLAGS constants define flags related to the CANSPI module configuration. The functions
CANSPIInit, CANSPISetBaudRate, CANSPISetMask and CANSPISetFilter expect one of these (or a bitwise
combination) as their argument:
const unsigned int

_CANSPI_CONFIG_DEFAULT = 0xFF, // 11111111
_CANSPI_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_BIT = 0x01,
_CANSPI_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON = 0xFF, // XXXXXXX1
_CANSPI_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_OFF = 0xFE, // XXXXXXX0
_CANSPI_CONFIG_LINE_FILTER_BIT = 0x02,
_CANSPI_CONFIG_LINE_FILTER_ON = 0xFF, // XXXXXX1X
_CANSPI_CONFIG_LINE_FILTER_OFF = 0xFD, // XXXXXX0X
_CANSPI_CONFIG_SAMPLE_BIT = 0x04,
_CANSPI_CONFIG_SAMPLE_ONCE = 0xFF, // XXXXX1XX
_CANSPI_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE = 0xFB, // XXXXX0XX
_CANSPI_CONFIG_MSG_TYPE_BIT = 0x08,
_CANSPI_CONFIG_STD_MSG = 0xFF, // XXXX1XXX
_CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG = 0xF7, // XXXX0XXX
_CANSPI_CONFIG_DBL_BUFFER_BIT = 0x10,
_CANSPI_CONFIG_DBL_BUFFER_ON = 0xFF, // XXX1XXXX
_CANSPI_CONFIG_DBL_BUFFER_OFF = 0xEF, // XXX0XXXX
_CANSPI_CONFIG_MSG_BITS = 0x60,
_CANSPI_CONFIG_ALL_MSG = 0xFF, // X11XXXXX
_CANSPI_CONFIG_VALID_XTD_MSG = 0xDF, // X10XXXXX
_CANSPI_CONFIG_VALID_STD_MSG = 0xBF, // X01XXXXX
_CANSPI_CONFIG_ALL_VALID_MSG = 0x9F; // X00XXXXX
MikroElektronika
299
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
You may use bitwise AND (&) to form config byte out of these values. For example:
init = _CANSPI_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE &

_CANSPI_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON &
_CANSPI_CONFIG_STD_MSG &
...
CANSPIInit(1, 1, 3, 3, 1, init); // initialize CANSPI
CANSPI_TX_MSG_FLAGS Constants
CANSPI_TX_MSG_FLAGS are flags related to transmission of a CANSPI message:
const unsigned int

_CANSPI_TX_PRIORITY_BITS = 0x03,
_CANSPI_TX_PRIORITY_0 = 0xFC, // XXXXXX00
_CANSPI_TX_PRIORITY_1 = 0xFD, // XXXXXX01
_CANSPI_TX_PRIORITY_2 = 0xFE, // XXXXXX10
_CANSPI_TX_PRIORITY_3 = 0xFF, // XXXXXX11
_CANSPI_TX_FRAME_BIT = 0x08,
_CANSPI_TX_STD_FRAME = 0xFF, // XXXXX1XX
_CANSPI_TX_XTD_FRAME = 0xF7, // XXXXX0XX
_CANSPI_TX_RTR_BIT = 0x40,
_CANSPI_TX_NO_RTR_FRAME = 0xFF, // X1XXXXXX
_CANSPI_TX_RTR_FRAME = 0xBF; // X0XXXXXX
// form value to be used as sending message flag :

send_config = _CANSPI_TX_PRIORITY_0 &
_CANSPI_TX_XTD_FRAME &
_CANSPI_TX_NO_RTR_FRAME;
...
CANSPIWrite(id, data, 1, send_config);
CANSPI_RX_MSG_FLAGS Constants
CANSPI_RX_MSG_FLAGS are flags related to reception of CANSPI message. If a particular bit is set then corresponding
meaning is TRUE or else it will be FALSE.
MikroElektronika
300
const unsigned int

_CANSPI_RX_FILTER_BITS = 0x07, // Use this to access filter bits
_CANSPI_RX_FILTER_1 = 0x00,
_CANSPI_RX_OVERFLOW = 0x08, // Set if Overflowed else cleared

_CANSPI_RX_INVALID_MSG = 0x10, // Set if invalid else cleared
_CANSPI_RX_XTD_FRAME = 0x20, // Set if XTD message else cleared
_CANSPI_RX_RTR_FRAME = 0x40, // Set if RTR message else cleared
_CANSPI_RX_DBL_BUFFERED = 0x80;// Set if this message was hardware double-buffered
if (MsgFlag & _CANSPI_RX_OVERFLOW != 0) {

...
}
CANSPI_MASK Constants
The CANSPI_MASK constants define mask codes. Function CANSPISetMask expects one of these as it’s argument:
const unsigned int

_CANSPI_MASK_B1 = 0,
_CANSPI_MASK_B2 = 1;
CANSPI_FILTER Constants
The CANSPI_FILTER constants define filter codes. Functions CANSPISetFilter expects one of these as it’s
argument:
const unsigned int

_CANSPI_FILTER_B1_F1 = 0,
_CANSPI_FILTER_B2_F4 = 5;
MikroElektronika
301
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Library Example
This is a simple demonstration of CANSPI Library routines usage. First node initiates the communication with the
second node by sending some data to its address. The second node responds by sending back the data incremented
by 1. First node then does the same and sends incremented data back to second node, etc.
Code for the first CANSPI node:
sbit CanSpi_CS at RF0_bit; // Chip select line

sbit CanSpi_Rst at RF1_bit; // Reset line
sbit CanSpi_CS_Direction at TRISF0_bit; // Direction of the Chip Select pin
sbit CanSpi_Rst_Direction at TRISF1_bit; // Direction of the Reset pin
unsigned int Can_Init_Flags, Can_Send_Flags, Can_Rcv_Flags; // Can flags

unsigned int Rx_Data_Len; // Received data length in bytes
char RxTx_Data[8]; // Can rx/tx data buffer
char Msg_Rcvd; // Reception flag
unsigned long Tx_ID, Rx_ID; // Can rx and tx ID
void main() {
ADPCFG = 0xFFFF;
PORTB = 0;
TRISB = 0;
Can_Send_Flags = 0; // Clear flags
Can_Send_Flags = _CANSPI_TX_PRIORITY_0 & // Form value to be used

_CANSPI_TX_XTD_FRAME & // with CANSPI1Write
Can_Init_Flags = _CANSPI_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE & // Form value to be used

_CANSPI_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON & // with CANSPI1Init
_CANSPI_CONFIG_VALID_XTD_MSG;
SPI1_Init(); // Initialize SPI1 module

CANSPIInitialize(1,3,3,3,1,Can_Init_Flags); // Initialize external CANSPI module
CANSPISetOperationMode(_CANSPI_MODE_CONFIG,0xFF); // Set CONFIGURATION mode
CANSPISetMask(_CANSPI_MASK_B1,-1,_CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG); // Set all mask1 bits to

ones
CANSPISetMask(_CANSPI_MASK_B2,-1,_CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG); // Set all mask2 bits to
ones
CANSPISetFilter(_CANSPI_FILTER_B2_F4,3,_CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG); // Set id of filter
B1_F1 to 3
MikroElektronika
302
CANSPISetOperationMode(_CANSPI_MODE_NORMAL,0xFF); // Set NORMAL mode
RxTx_Data[0] = 9; // Set initial data to be sent
Tx_ID = 12111; // Set transmit ID
CANSPIWrite(Tx_ID, RxTx_Data, 1, Can_Send_Flags); // Send initial message
while(1) { // Endless loop

Msg_Rcvd = CANSPIRead(&Rx_ID , RxTx_Data , &Rx_Data_Len, &Can_Rcv_Flags); // Receive
message
if ((Rx_ID == 3u) && Msg_Rcvd) { // If message received check id
PORTB = RxTx_Data[0]; // Id correct, output data at PORTB
RxTx_Data[0]++; // Increment received data
Delay_ms(10);
CANSPIWrite(Tx_ID, RxTx_Data, 1, Can_Send_Flags); // Send incremented data back
}
}
}
Code for the second CANSPI node:
sbit CanSpi_CS at RF0_bit; // Chip select line

sbit CanSpi_Rst at RF1_bit; // Reset line
sbit CanSpi_CS_Direction at TRISF0_bit; // Direction of the Chip Select pin
sbit CanSpi_Rst_Direction at TRISF1_bit; // Direction of the Reset pin
unsigned int Can_Init_Flags, Can_Send_Flags, Can_Rcv_Flags; // Can flags

unsigned int Rx_Data_Len; // Received data length in
bytes
char RxTx_Data[8]; // Can rx/tx data buffer
char Msg_Rcvd; // Reception flag
unsigned long Tx_ID, Rx_ID; // Can rx and tx ID
void main() {
ADPCFG = 0xFFFF;
PORTB = 0;
TRISB = 0;
Can_Send_Flags = 0; // Clear flags
Can_Send_Flags = _CANSPI_TX_PRIORITY_0 & // Form value to be used

_CANSPI_TX_XTD_FRAME & // with CANSPI1Write
Can_Init_Flags = _CANSPI_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE & // Form value to be used

_CANSPI_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON & // with CANSPI1Init
MikroElektronika
303
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI1_Init(); // Initialize SPI1 module

CANSPIInitialize(1,3,3,3,1,Can_Init_Flags); // Initialize CANSPI module
CANSPISetOperationMode(_CANSPI_MODE_CONFIG,0xFF); // Set CONFIGURATION mode
CANSPISetMask(_CANSPI_MASK_B1,-1,_CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG); // Set all mask1

bits to ones
CANSPISetMask(_CANSPI_MASK_B2,-1,_CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG); // Set all mask2
bits to ones
CANSPISetFilter(_CANSPI_FILTER_B2_F3,12111,_CANSPI_CONFIG_XTD_MSG); // Set id of
filter B1_F1 to 3
CANSPISetOperationMode(_CANSPI_MODE_NORMAL,0xFF); // Set NORMAL mode
Tx_ID = 3; // Set tx ID
while (1) { // Endless loop

Msg_Rcvd = CANSPIRead(&Rx_ID , RxTx_Data , &Rx_Data_Len, &Can_Rcv_Flags); //
Receive message
if ((Rx_ID == 12111u) && Msg_Rcvd) { // If message received check id
PORTB = RxTx_Data[0]; // Id correct, output data at PORTB
RxTx_Data[0]++; // Increment received data
CANSPIWrite(Tx_ID, RxTx_Data, 1, Can_Send_Flags); // Send incremented data back
}
}
}
MikroElektronika
304
HW Connection
Example of interfacing CAN transceiver MCP2510 with MCU via SPI interface
MikroElektronika
305
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Compact Flash Library

The Compact Flash Library provides routines for accessing data on Compact Flash card (abbr. CF further in text). CF
cards are widely used memory elements, commonly used with digital cameras. Great capacity and excellent access
time of only a few microseconds make them very attractive for microcontroller applications.
In CF card, data is divided into sectors. One sector usually comprises 512 bytes. Routines for file handling, the Cf_Fat
routines, are not performed directly but successively through 512B buffer.
Important :
- Routines for file handling can be used only with FAT16 file system.
- Library functions create and read files from the root directory only.
- Library functions populate both FAT1 and FAT2 tables when writing to files, but the file data is being read from the
FAT1 table only; i.e. there is no recovery if the FAT1 table gets corrupted.
- If MMC/SD card has Master Boot Record (MBR), the library will work with the first available primary (logical) partition
that has non-zero size. If MMC/SD card has Volume Boot Record (i.e. there is only one logical partition and no
MBRs), the library works with entire card as a single partition. For more information on MBR, physical and logical
drives, primary/secondary partitions and partition tables, please consult other resources, e.g. Wikipedia and similar.
- Before writing operation, make sure not to overwrite boot or FAT sector as it could make your card on PC or digital
camera unreadable. Drive mapping tools, such as Winhex, can be of great assistance.
MikroElektronika
306
External dependencies of Compact Flash Library

Compact Flash Library:
extern sfr unsigned int CF_
Compact Flash Data Port. char CF_Data_Port at PORTF;
Data_Port;
extern sfr sbit CF_RDY; Ready signal line. sbit CF_RDY at RD7_bit;
extern sfr sbit CF_WE; Write Enable signal line. sbit CF_WE at RD6_bit;
extern sfr sbit CF_OE; Output Enable signal line. sbit CF_OE at RD5_bit;
extern sfr sbit CF_CD1; Chip Detect signal line. sbit CF_CD1 at RD4_bit;
extern sfr sbit CF_CE1; Chip Enable signal line. sbit CF_CE1 at RD3_bit;
extern sfr sbit CF_A2; Address pin 2. sbit CF_A2 at RD2_bit;
extern sfr sbit CF_RDY_ sbit CF_RDY_direction at
Direction of the Ready pin.
direction; TRISD7_bit;
extern sfr sbit CF_WE_ sbit CF_WE_direction at
Direction of the Write Enable pin.
direction; TRISDB6_bit;
extern sfr sbit CF_OE_ sbit CF_OE_direction at
Direction of the Output Enable pin.
extern sfr sbit CF_CD1_ sbit CF_CD1_direction at
Direction of the Chip Detect pin.
extern sfr sbit CF_CE1_ sbit CF_CE1_direction at
Direction of the Chip Enable pin.
extern sfr sbit CF_A2_ sbit CF_A2_direction at
Direction of the Address 2 pin.
MikroElektronika
307
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Library Routines
- Cf_Init
- Cf_Detect
- Cf_Enable
- Cf_Disable
- Cf_Read_Init
- Cf_Read_Byte
- Cf_Write_Init
- Cf_Write_Byte
- Cf_Read_Sector
- Cf_Write_Sector
Routines for file handling:
- Cf_Fat_Init
- Cf_Fat_QuickFormat
- Cf_Fat_Assign
- Cf_Fat_Reset
- Cf_Fat_Read
- Cf_Fat_Rewrite
- Cf_Fat_Append
- Cf_Fat_Delete
- Cf_Fat_Write
- Cf_Fat_Set_File_Date
- Cf_Fat_Get_File_Date
- Cf_Fat_Get_File_Date_Modified
- Cf_Fat_Get_File_Size
- Cf_Fat_Get_Swap_File
The following routine is for the internal use by compiler only:
- Cf_Issue_ID_Command
MikroElektronika
308
Cf_Init
Prototype void Cf_Init();
Description Initializes ports appropriately for communication with CF card.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
- CF_Data_Port : Compact Flash data port

- CF_RDY : Ready signal line
- CF_WE : Write enable signal line
- CF_OE : Output enable signal line
- CF_CD1 : Chip detect signal line
- CF_CE1 : Enable signal line
- CF_A2 : Address pin 2
- CF_RDY_direction : Direction of the Ready pin
- CF_WE_direction : Direction of the Write enable pin
- CF_OE_direction : Direction of the Output enable pin
- CF_CD1_direction : Direction of the Chip detect pin
- CF_CE1_direction : Direction of the Chip enable pin
- CF_A2_direction : Direction of the Address 2 pin

Example // set compact flash pinout
char Cf_Data_Port at PORTF;
sbit CF_RDY at RD7_bit;

sbit CF_WE at RD6_bit;
sbit CF_OE at RD5_bit;
sbit CF_CD1 at RD4_bit;
sbit CF_CE1 at RD3_bit;
sbit CF_A2 at RD2_bit;
sbit CF_RDY_direction at TRISD7_bit;

sbit CF_WE_direction at TRISD6_bit;
sbit CF_OE_direction at TRISD5_bit;
sbit CF_CD1_direction at TRISD4_bit;
sbit CF_CE1_direction at TRISD3_bit;
sbit CF_A2_direction at TRISD2_bit;
// end of compact flash pinout
...
Cf_Init(); // initialize CF
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
309
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Cf_Detect
Prototype unsigned int Cf_Detect();
Description Checks for presence of CF card by reading the chip detect pin.
Parameters None.
Returns - 1 - if CF card was detected
- 0 - otherwise
Requires The corresponding MCU ports must be appropriately initialized for CF card. See Cf_Init.
Example // Wait until CF card is inserted:
do
asm nop;
while (!Cf_Detect());
Notes dsPIC30 family MCU and CF card voltage levels are different. The user must ensure that MCU’s pin
connected to CD line can read CF card Logical One correctly.
Cf_Enable
Prototype void Cf_Enable();
Description Enables the device. Routine needs to be called only if you have disabled the device by means of
the Cf_Disable routine. These two routines in conjunction allow you to free/occupy data line when
working with multiple devices.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Example // enable compact flash
Cf_Enable();
Notes None.
Cf_Disable
Prototype void Cf_Disable();
Description Routine disables the device and frees the data lines for other devices. To enable the device again, call
Cf_Enable. These two routines in conjunction allow you to free/occupy data line when working with
multiple devices.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Example // disable compact flash
Cf_Disable();
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
310
Cf_Read_Init
Prototype void Cf_Read_Init(unsigned long address, unsigned short sector_count);
Description Initializes CF card for reading.
Parameters - address: the first sector to be prepared for reading operation.
- sector_count: number of sectors to be prepared for reading operation.
Returns Nothing.
Example // initialize compact flash for reading from sector 590
Cf_Read_Init(590, 1);
Notes None.
Cf_Read_Byte
Prototype unsigned char Cf_Read_Byte();
Description Reads one byte from Compact Flash sector buffer location currently pointed to by internal read
pointers. These pointers will be autoicremented upon reading.
Parameters None.
Returns Returns a byte read from Compact Flash sector buffer.
CF card must be initialized for reading operation. See Cf_Read_Init.

Example // Read a byte from compact flash:
unsigned char data_;
...
data_ = Cf_Read_Byte();
Notes Higher byte of the unsigned return value is cleared.
Cf_Write_Init
Prototype void Cf_Write_Init(unsigned long address, unsigned short sectcnt);
Description Initializes CF card for writing.
Parameters - address: the first sector to be prepared for writing operation.
- sectcnt: number of sectors to be prepared for writing operation.
Returns Nothing.
Example // initialize compact flash for writing to sector 590
Cf_Write_Init(590, 1);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
311
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Cf_Write_Byte
Prototype void Cf_Write_Byte(unsigned short data_);
Description Writes a byte to Compact Flash sector buffer location currently pointed to by writing pointers. These
pointers will be autoicremented upon reading. When sector buffer is full, its contents will be transfered
to appropriate flash memory sector.
Parameters - data_: byte to be written.
Returns Nothing.
CF card must be initialized for writing operation. See Cf_Write_Init.

Example char data_ = 0xAA;
...
Cf_Write_Byte(data_);
Notes None.
Cf_Read_Sector
Prototype void Cf_Read_Sector(unsigned long sector_number, unsigned short *buffer);
Description Reads one sector (512 bytes). Read data is stored into buffer provided by the buffer parameter.
Parameters - sector_number: sector to be read.
- buffer: data buffer of at least 512 bytes in length.
Returns Nothing.
Example // read sector 22
unsigned short data[512];
...
Cf_Read_Sector(22, data);
Notes None.
Cf_Write_Sector
Prototype void Cf_Write_Sector(unsigned long sector_number, unsigned short *buffer);
Description Writes 512 bytes of data provided by the buffer parameter to one CF sector.
Parameters - sector_number: sector to be written to.
- buffer: data buffer of 512 bytes in length.
Returns Nothing.
Example // write to sector 22
unsigned short data[512];
...
Cf_Write_Sector(22, data);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
312
Cf_Fat_Init
Prototype unsigned int Cf_Fat_Init();
Description Initializes CF card, reads CF FAT16 boot sector and extracts necessary data needed by the library.
Parameters None.
Returns - 0 - if CF card was detected and successfully initialized
- 1 - if FAT16 boot sector was not found
- 255 - if card was not detected
Requires Nothing.
Example // Init the FAT library
if (!Cf_Fat_Init()) { // Init the FAT library
...
}
Notes None.
Cf_Fat_QuickFormat
Prototype unsigned int Cf_Fat_QuickFormat(char *cf_fat_label);
Description Formats to FAT16 and initializes CF card.
Parameters - cf_fat_label: volume label (11 characters in length). If less than 11 characters are provided, the
label will be padded with spaces. If null string is passed, the volume will not be labeled.
Returns - 0 - if CF card was detected, successfully formated and initialized
- 1 - if FAT16 format was unsuccessful
- 255 - if card was not detected
Requires Nothing.
Example // format and initialize the FAT library -
if (!Cf_Fat_QuickFormat(&cf_fat_label)) {
...
}
Notes - This routine can be used instead or in conjunction with Cf_Fat_Init routine.
- If CF card already contains a valid boot sector, it will remain unchanged (except volume label field)
and only FAT and ROOT tables will be erased. Also, the new volume label will be set.
MikroElektronika
313
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Cf_Fat_Assign
Prototype unsigned int Cf_Fat_Assign(char *filename, char file_cre_attr);
Description Assigns file for file operations (read, write, delete...). All subsequent file operations will be applied over
the assigned file.
Parameters - filename: name of the file that should be assigned for file operations. The file name should be in
DOS 8.3 (file_name.extension) format. The file name and extension will be automatically padded with
spaces by the library if they have less than length required (i.e. “mikro.tx” -> “mikro .tx “), so the user
does not have to take care of that. The file name and extension are case insensitive. The library will
convert them to proper case automatically, so the user does not have to take care of that.
Also, in order to keep backward compatibility with the first version of this library, file names can be
entered as UPPERCASE string of 11 bytes in length with no dot character between the file name and
extension (i.e. “MIKROELETXT” -> MIKROELE.TXT). In this case the last 3 characters of the string
are considered to be file extension.
- file_cre_attr: file creation and attributes flags. Each bit corresponds to the appropriate file
attribute:
Bit Mask Description

0 0x01 Read Only
1 0x02 Hidden
2 0x04 System
3 0x08 Volume Label
4 0x10 Subdirectory
5 0x20 Archive
6 0x40 Device (internal use only, never found on disk)
File creation flag. If the file does not exist and this
7 0x80 flag is set, a new file with specified name will be
created.
Returns - 0 if file does not exist and no new file is created.

- 1 if file already exists or file does not exist but a new file is created.
Requires CF card and CF library must be initialized for file operations. See Cf_Fat_Init.
Example // create file with archive attributes if it does not already exist
Cf_Fat_Assign(“MIKRO007.TXT”,0xA0);
Notes Long File Names (LFN) are not supported.
MikroElektronika
314
Cf_Fat_Reset
Prototype void Cf_Fat_Reset(unsigned long *size);
Description Opens currently assigned file for reading.
Parameters - size: buffer to store file size to. After file has been open for reading its size is returned through this
parameter.
Returns Nothing.
File must be previously assigned. See Cf_Fat_Assign.

Example unsigned long size;
...
Cf_Fat_Reset(size);
Notes None.
Cf_Fat_Read
Prototype void Cf_Fat_Read(unsigned short *bdata);
Description Reads a byte from currently assigned file opened for reading. Upon function execution file pointers will
be set to the next character in the file.
Parameters - bdata: buffer to store read byte to. Upon this function execution read byte is returned through this
parameter.
Returns Nothing.
File must be open for reading. See Cf_Fat_Reset.
Example char character;

...
Cf_Fat_Read(&character);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
315
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Cf_Fat_Rewrite
Prototype void Cf_Fat_Rewrite();
Description Opens currently assigned file for writing. If the file is not empty its content will be erased.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
The file must be previously assigned. See Cf_Fat_Assign.

Example // open file for writing
Cf_Fat_Rewrite();
Notes None.
Cf_Fat_Append
Prototype void Cf_Fat_Append();
Description Opens currently assigned file for appending. Upon this function execution file pointers will be positioned
after the last byte in the file, so any subsequent file writing operation will start from there.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.

Example // open file for appending
Cf_Fat_Append();
Notes None.
Cf_Fat_Delete
Prototype void Cf_Fat_Delete();
Description Deletes currently assigned file from CF card.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.

Example // delete current file
Cf_Fat_Delete();
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
316
Cf_Fat_Write
Prototype void Cf_Fat_Write(char *fdata, unsigned data_len);
Description Writes requested number of bytes to currently assigned file opened for writing.
Parameters - fdata: data to be written.
- data_len: number of bytes to be written.
Returns Nothing.
File must be open for writing. See Cf_Fat_Rewrite or Cf_Fat_Append.

Example char file_contents[42];
...
Cf_Fat_Write(file_contents, 42); // write data to the assigned file
Notes None.
Cf_Fat_Set_File_Date
Prototype void Cf_Fat_Set_File_Date(unsigned int year, unsigned short month, unsigned
short day, unsigned short hours, unsigned short mins, unsigned short
seconds);
Description Sets the date/time stamp. Any subsequent file writing operation will write this stamp to currently
assigned file’s time/date attributes.
Parameters - year: year attribute. Valid values: 1980-2107
- month: month attribute. Valid values: 1-12
- day: day attribute. Valid values: 1-31
- hours: hours attribute. Valid values: 0-23
- mins: minutes attribute. Valid values: 0-59
- seconds: seconds attribute. Valid values: 0-59
Returns Nothing.
File must be open for writing. See Cf_Fat_Rewrite or Cf_Fat_Append.

Example Cf_Fat_Set_File_Date(2005,9,30,17,41,0);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
317
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Cf_Fat_Get_File_Date
Prototype void Cf_Fat_Get_File_Date(unsigned int *year, unsigned short *month, unsigned
short *day, unsigned short *hours, unsigned short *mins);
Description Reads time/date attributes of currently assigned file.
Parameters - year: buffer to store year attribute to. Upon function execution year attribute is returned through this
parameter.
- month: buffer to store month attribute to. Upon function execution month attribute is returned through
this parameter.
- day: buffer to store day attribute to. Upon function execution day attribute is returned through this
parameter.
- hours: buffer to store hours attribute to. Upon function execution hours attribute is returned through
this parameter.
- mins: buffer to store minutes attribute to. Upon function execution minutes attribute is returned
through this parameter.
Returns Nothing.

Example unsigned year;
char month, day, hours, mins;
...
Cf_Fat_Get_File_Date(&year, &month, &day, &hours, &mins);
Notes None.
Cf_Fat_Get_File_Date_Modified
Prototype void Cf_Fat_Get_File_Date_Modified(unsigned int *year, unsigned short *month,
unsigned short *day, unsigned short *hours, unsigned short *mins);
Description Retrieves the last modification date/time of the currently assigned file.
Parameters - year: buffer to store year of modification attribute to. Upon function execution year of modification
attribute is returned through this parameter.
- month: buffer to store month of modification attribute to. Upon function execution month of modification
- day: buffer to store day of modification attribute to. Upon function execution day of modification
- hours: buffer to store hours of modification attribute to. Upon function execution hours of modification
- mins: buffer to store minutes of modification attribute to. Upon function execution minutes of
modification attribute is returned through this parameter.
Returns Nothing.

Example unsigned year;
char month, day, hours, mins;
...
Cf_Fat_Get_File_Date_Modified(&year, &month, &day, &hours, &mins);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
318
Cf_Fat_Get_File_Size
Prototype unsigned long Cf_Fat_Get_File_Size();
Description This function reads size of currently assigned file in bytes.
Parameters None.
Returns Size of the currently assigned file in bytes.

Example unsigned long my_file_size;
...
my_file_size = Cf_Fat_Get_File_Size();
Notes None.
Cf_Fat_Get_Swap_File
Prototype unsigned long Cf_Fat_Get_Swap_File(unsigned long sectors_cnt, char *filename,
char file_attr);
Description This function is used to create a swap file of predefined name and size on the CF media. If a file
with specified name already exists on the media, search for consecutive sectors will ignore sectors
occupied by this file. Therefore, it is recommended to erase such file if it exists before calling this
function. If it is not erased and there is still enough space for a new swap file, this function will delete
it after allocating new memory space for a new swap file.
The purpose of the swap file is to make reading and writing to CF media as fast as possible, by using
the Cf_Read_Sector() and Cf_Write_Sector() functions directly, without potentially damaging
the FAT system. Swap file can be considered as a “window” on the media where the user can freely
write/read data. It’s main purpose in the this library is to be used for fast data acquisition; when the
time-critical acquisition has finished, the data can be re-written into a “normal” file, and formatted in
the most suitable way.
Parameters - sectors_cnt: number of consecutive sectors that user wants the swap file to have.
- filename: name of the file that should be assigned for file operations. The file name should be in
DOS 8.3 (file_name.extension) format. The file name and extension will be automatically padded with
spaces by the library if they have less than length required (i.e. “mikro.tx” -> “mikro .tx “), so the user
does not have to take care of that. The file name and extension are case insensitive. The library will
convert them to proper case automatically, so the user does not have to take care of that.
entered as UPPERCASE string of 11 bytes in length with no dot character between the file name and
extension (i.e. “MIKROELETXT” -> MIKROELE.TXT). In this case the last 3 characters of the string
are considered to be file extension.
- file_attr: file creation and attributes flags. Each bit corresponds to the appropriate file attribute:
MikroElektronika
319
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Parameters
0 0x01 Read Only
1 0x02 Hidden
2 0x04 System
3 0x08 Volume Label
4 0x10 Subdirectory
5 0x20 Archive
7 0x80 Not used
Returns - Number of the start sector for the newly created swap file, if there was enough free space on CF
card to create file of required size.
- 0 - otherwise.
Example //-------------- Try to create a swap file with archive atribute, whose size
will be at least 1000 sectors.
// If it succeeds, it sends the No. of start sector over
UART
unsigned long size;
...
size = Cf_Fat_Get_Swap_File(1000, “mikroE.txt”, 0x20);
if (size) {
UART1_Write(0xAA);
UART1_Write(Lo(size));
UART1_Write(Hi(size));
UART1_Write(Higher(size));
UART1_Write(Highest(size));
UART1_Write(0xAA);
}
MikroElektronika
320
Library Example
The following example writes 512 bytes at sector no.620, and then reads the data and sends it over UART1 for a visual
check. Hardware configurations in this example are made for the dsPICPRO2 board and dsPIC30F6014A.
// set compact flash pinout

char Cf_Data_Port at PORTF;
sbit CF_RDY at RD7_bit;

sbit CF_WE at RD6_bit;
sbit CF_OE at RD5_bit;
sbit CF_CD1 at RD4_bit;
sbit CF_CE1 at RD3_bit;
sbit CF_RDY_direction at TRISD7_bit;

sbit CF_WE_direction at TRISD6_bit;
sbit CF_OE_direction at TRISD5_bit;
sbit CF_CD1_direction at TRISD4_bit;
sbit CF_CE1_direction at TRISD3_bit;
// end of cf pinout
char SignalPort at PORTB;

char SignalPort_direction at TRISB;
void InitCF() {
CF_CD1_direction = 1;
while (Cf_Detect() == 0) // wait until CF card is inserted
;
Cf_Init(); // initialize CF
while (!CF_RDY)
;
Delay_ms(2000); // wait for a while until the card is stabilized
} // period depends on used CF card
void TestBytes() {
unsigned int i;
///// Write numbers 0..511 to sector 590

Cf_Write_Init(590,1); // Initialize write at sector address 590
// for 1 sector
SignalPort = 0x03; // Notify that write has started
Delay_ms(1000);
for (i=0; i<=511; i++) // Write 512 bytes to sector 590
Cf_Write_Byte(i);
MikroElektronika
321
mikoC PRO for dsPIC

Delay_ms(1000);
Cf_Write_Byte(i);
SignalPort = 0x07; // Notify that write end and read start

Delay_ms(1000);
Cf_Read_Init(590,1); // Initialize read from sector address 590

// for 1 sector
for (i=0; i<=511; i++) { // Read 512 bytes from sector address 590
SignalPort = Cf_Read_Byte(); // Read one byte at time and display
// readings on signal port
Delay_ms(5); // Wait for a while to see results
}
Delay_ms(1000);
///// Write numbers 511..0 to sector 590

Cf_Write_Init(590,1); // Initialize write at sector address 590
// for 1 sector
Delay_ms(1000);
Cf_Write_Byte(511-i);
SignalPort = 0x07; // Notify that write end and read start

Delay_ms(1000);
Cf_Read_Init(590,1); // Initialize read from sector address 590

// for 1 sector
for (i=0; i<=511; i++) { // Read 512 bytes from sector address 590
SignalPort = Cf_Read_Byte(); // Read one byte at time and display
// readings on signal port
Delay_ms(5); // Wait for a while to see results
}
Delay_ms(1000);
}
// Main program
void main() {
ADPCFG = 0xFFFF; // disable A/D inputs
SignalPort_direction = 0; // designate PORTC as output

SignalPort = 0x01; // Notify test start
InitCF();
TestBytes();
SignalPort = 0x0F; // Notify test end
}
MikroElektronika
322
HW Connection
Pin diagram of CF memory card
MikroElektronika
323
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
ECAN Library
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a library (driver) for working with the dsPIC33FJ and pic24HJ
ECAN module.
ECAN is a very robust protocol that has error detection and signalling, self–checking and fault confinement. Faulty
ECAN data and remote frames are re-transmitted automatically, similar to the Ethernet.
Data transfer rates depend on distance. For example, 1 Mbit/s can be achieved at network lengths below 40m while
250 Kbit/s can be achieved at network lengths below 250m. The greater distance the lower maximum bitrate that can
be achieved . The lowest bitrate defined by the standard is 200Kbit/s. Cables used are shielded twisted pairs.
ECAN supports two message formats:
- Standard format, with 11 identifier bits, and

- Extended format, with 29 identifier bits
ECAN message format and DMA RAM buffer definiton can be found in the ECan_Defs.h header file located in the
ECAN project folder. Read this file carefully and make appropriate adjustments for mcu in use. Also, if a new project
is to be created this file has to be copied, adjusted and included into the project via include pragma directive with
corresponding Search Path updating.
Important :
ECAN buffers are located in DMA RAM, so two DMA channels are used for message transfer, one for each direction
(ECAN->DMA RAM, DMA RAM->ECAN). See the ECANxDmaChannelInit routine.
Consult CAN standard about CAN bus termination resistance.
CAN library routines require you to specify the module you want to use. To select the desired CAN module, simply
change the letter x in the routine prototype for a number from 1 to 2.
Number of CAN modules per MCU differs from chip to chip. Please, read the appropriate datasheet before utilizing this
library.
Library Routines
- ECANxDmaChannelInit
- ECANxSetOperationMode
- ECANxGetOperationMode
- ECANxInitialize
- ECANxSelectTxBuffers
- ECANxFilterDisable
- ECANxFilterEnable
- ECANxSetBufferSize
- ECANxSetBaudRate
- ECANxSetMask
- ECANxSetFilter
- ECANxRead
- ECANxWrite
MikroElektronika
324
ECANxDmaChannelInit
Prototype unsigned ECANxDmaChannelInit(unsigned DmaChannel, unsigned ChannelDir, void
*DmaRamBuffAdd);
Description The function preforms initialization of the DMA module for ECAN.
Parameters - DmaChannel: DMA Channel number. Valid values: 0..7.
- ChannelDir: transfer direction. Valid values: 1 (DMA RAM to peripheral) and 0 (peripheral to DMA
RAM).
- DmaRamBuffAdd: DMA RAM buffer address. DMA RAM location is MCU dependent, refer to
datasheet for valid address range.
Returns - 0 - if DMA channel parameter is valid
- 0x0001 - if DMA channel is already in use (busy)
- 0xFFFF - if DMA channel parameter is invalid
Requires The ECAN routines are supported only by MCUs with the ECAN module.
Microcontroller must be connected to ECAN transceiver which is connected to the ECAN bus.
Example // channel 0 will transfer 8 words from DMA RAM at 0x4000 to ECAN1
ECAN1DmaChannelInit(0, 1, 0x4000);
Notes - ECAN library routine require you to specify the module you want to use. To select the desired
ECAN module, simply change the letter x in the routine prototype for a number from 1 to 2.
- Number of ECAN modules per MCU differs from chip to chip. Please, read the appropriate
ECANxSetOperationMode
Prototype void ECANxSetOperationMode(unsigned int mode, unsigned int WAIT);
Description Sets the ECAN module to requested mode.
Parameters - mode: ECAN module operation mode. Valid values: ECAN_OP_MODE constants. See ECAN_OP_MODE
constants.
- WAIT: ECAN mode switching verification request. If WAIT == 0, the call is non-blocking. The
function does not verify if the ECAN module is switched to requested mode or not. Caller must use
ECANxGetOperationMode to verify correct operation mode before performing mode specific operation.
If WAIT != 0, the call is blocking – the function won’t “return” until the requested mode is set and no
additional verification is necessary.
Returns Nothing.
Example // set the ECAN1 module into configuration mode (wait inside ECAN1SetOperationMode
until this mode is set)
ECAN1SetOperationMode(_ECAN_MODE_CONFIG, 0xFF);
Notes - ECAN library routine require you to specify the module you want to use. To select the desired ECAN
- Number of ECAN modules per MCU differs from chip to chip. Please, read the appropriate datasheet
MikroElektronika
325
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
ECANxGetOperationMode
Prototype unsigned int ECANxGetOperationMode();
Description The function returns current operation mode of the ECAN module. See ECAN_OP_MODE constants or
device datasheet for operation mode codes.
Parameters None.
Example // check whether the ECAN1 module is in Normal mode and if it is do
something.
if (ECAN1GetOperationMode() == _ECAN_MODE_NORMAL)
{
...
}
MikroElektronika
326
ECANxInitialize
Prototype void ECANxInitialize(unsigned int SJW, unsigned int BRP, unsigned int
PHSEG1, unsigned int PHSEG2, unsigned int PROPSEG, unsigned int ECAN_CONFIG_
FLAGS);
Description Initializes the ECAN module.
The internal ECAN module is set to:
- Disable ECAN capture

- Continue ECAN operation in Idle mode
- Abort all pending transmissions
- Clear all transmit control registers
- Fcan clock : Fcy (Fosc/2)
- ECAN mode is set to Normal
- Filter and mask registers remain unchanged
SAM, SEG2PHTS, WAKFIL and DBEN bits are set according to the ECAN_CONFIG_FLAGS value.
Parameters - SJW as defined in MCU’s datasheet (ECAN Module)
- BRP as defined in MCU’s datasheet (ECAN Module)
- PHSEG1 as defined in MCU’s datasheet (ECAN Module)
- PROPSEG as defined in MCU’s datasheet (ECAN Module)
- ECAN_CONFIG_FLAGS ECAN module configuration flags. Each bit corresponds to the appropriate
ECAN module parameter. Should be formed out of predefined ECAN flag constants. See ECAN_
CONFIG_FLAGS constants.
Returns Nothing.
Example // initialize the ECAN1 module with appropriate baud rate and message
unsigned int ecan_config_flags;
...
ecan_config_flags = _ECAN_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE & // Form value to be
used
_ECAN_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON & // with
ECANInitialize
_ECAN_CONFIG_XTD_MSG &
_ECAN_CONFIG_MATCH_MSG_TYPE &
_ECAN_CONFIG_LINE_FILTER_OFF;
ECAN1Initialize(1, 3, 3, 3, 1, ecan_config_flags); // initialize the ECAN1

module
Notes - ECAN mode NORMAL will be set on exit.
- ECAN library routine require you to specify the module you want to use. To select the desired ECAN
MikroElektronika
327
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
ECANxSelectTxBuffers
Prototype unsigned ECANxSelectTxBuffers(unsigned txselect);
Description The function designates the ECAN module’s transmit buffers.
Parameters - txselect: transmit buffer select. By setting bits in the txselect lower byte corresponding buffers are
enabled for transmition. The ECAN module supports up to 8 transmit buffers. Also, by clearing bits in
the txselect lower byte corresponding buffers are enabled for reception.
Returns - 0 - if input parameter is valid
- 0xFFFF - if input parameter is invalid
The ECAN module must be initialized. See the ECANxInitialize routine.

Example // Buffers 0 and 2 are enabled for transmition:
ECAN1SelectTxBuffers(0x0005);
ECANxFilterDisable
Prototype void ECANxFilterDisable(unsigned fltdis);
Description The function disables receive filters.
Parameters - fltdis: filter disable selection parameter. Each bit corresponds to appropriate filter. By settung bit the
corresponding filter is to be disabled.
Returns Nothing.

Example // Buffers 0 and 2 are enabled for transmition:
ECAN1SelectTxBuffers(0x0005);
MikroElektronika
328
ECANxFilterEnable
Prototype void ECANxFilterEnable(unsigned flten);
Description The function enables receive filters.
Parameters - flten: filter enable selection parameter. Each bit corresponds to appropriate filter. By setting bit the
corresponding filter will be enabled.
Returns Nothing.

Example // Filters 0, 4, 8, 12 are to be enabled:
ECAN1FilterEnable(0x1111);
ECANxSetBufferSize
Prototype unsigned ECANxSetBufferSize(unsigned Ecan1BuffSize);
Description The function configures the total number of receive and transmit buffers in DMA RAM.
Parameters - Ecan1BuffSize: Number of ECAN DMA RAM receive and transmit buffers. Valid values: 4, 6, 8,
12, 16, 24, 32. Each buffer is 16 bytes long.
Returns - 0 - if input parameter is valid
- 0xFFFF - if input parameter is invalid

Example // DMA RAM will have 16 rx+tx buffers
ECAN1SetBufferSize(16);
Notes - The same value should be used for DMA RAM buffer definition in the ECan_Defs.h header file
located in the ECAN project folder.
- ECAN library routine require you to specify the module you want to use. To select the desired ECAN
MikroElektronika
329
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
ECANxSetBaudRate
Prototype void ECANxSetBaudRate(unsigned int SJW, unsigned int BRP, unsigned int
PHSEG1, unsigned int PHSEG2, unsigned int PROPSEG, unsigned int ECAN_CONFIG_
FLAGS);
Description Sets ECAN module baud rate. Due to complexity of the ECAN protocol, you can not simply force the
bps value. Instead, use this function when ECAN is in Config mode. Refer to datasheet for details.
SAM, SEG2PHTS and WAKFIL bits are set according to the ECAN_CONFIG_FLAGS value.
Parameters - SJW as defined in MCU’s datasheet (ECAN Module)
- BRP as defined in MCU’s datasheet (ECAN Module)
- PROPSEG as defined in MCU’s datasheet (ECAN Module)
- ECAN_CONFIG_FLAGS ECAN module configuration flags. Each bit corresponds to the appropriate
ECAN module parameter. Should be formed out of predefined ECAN flag constants. See ECAN_
CONFIG_FLAGS constants
Returns Nothing.
The ECAN module must be in Config mode, otherwise the function will be ignored. See
ECANxSetOperationMode.
unsigned int ecan_config_flags;
...
ECAN1SetOperationMode(_ECAN_MODE_CONFIG,0xFF); // set CONFIGURATION
mode (ECAN1 module mast be in config mode for baud rate settings)
ecan_config_flags = _ECAN_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE & // Form value to

be used
_ECAN_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON & // with
ECAN1SetBaudRate

ECAN1SetBaudRate(1, 3, 3, 3, 1, ecan_config_flags); // set ECAN1 module
baud rate
MikroElektronika
330
ECANxSetMask
Prototype void ECANxSetMask(unsigned int ECAN_MASK, long val, unsigned int ECAN_
CONFIG_FLAGS);
Description The function configures appropriate mask for advanced message filtering.
Parameters - ECAN_MASK: ECAN module mask number. Valid values: ECAN_MASK constants. See ECAN_MASK
constants.
- ECAN_CONFIG_FLAGS: selects type of messages to filter. Valid values:
- _ECAN_CONFIG_ALL_VALID_MSG,
- _ECAN_CONFIG_MATCH_MSG_TYPE & _ECAN_CONFIG_STD_MSG,
- _ECAN_CONFIG_MATCH_MSG_TYPE & _ECAN_CONFIG_XTD_MSG.
See ECAN_CONFIG_FLAGS constants.

Returns Nothing.
Example // set appropriate filter mask and message type value
ECAN1SetOperationMode(_ECAN_MODE_CONFIG,0xFF); // set
CONFIGURATION mode (ECAN1 module must be in config mode for mask settings)
// Set all mask0 bits to 1 (all filtered bits are relevant):

ECAN1SetMask(_ECAN_MASK_0, -1, _ECAN_CONFIG_MATCH_MSG_TYPE & _ECAN_CONFIG_
XTD_MSG);
MikroElektronika
331
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
ECANxSetFilter
Prototype void ECANxSetFilter(unsigned int ECAN_FILTER, long val, unsigned int ECAN_
FILTER_MASK, unsigned int ECAN_FILTER_RXBUFF, unsigned int ECAN_CONFIG_
FLAGS);
Description The function configures and enables appropriate message filter.
Parameters - ECAN_FILTER: ECAN module filter number. Valid values: ECAN_FILTER constants. See ECAN_
FILTER constants.
- ECAN_FILTER_MASK: mask register corresponding to filter. Valid values: ECAN_MASK constants.
See ECAN_MASK constants.
- ECAN_FILTER_RXBUFF: receive buffer corresponding to filter. Valid values: ECAN_RX_BUFFER
constants. See ECAN_RX_BUFFER constants.
- ECAN_CONFIG_FLAGS: selects type of messages to filter. Valid values: _ECAN_CONFIG_XTD_MSG
and _ECAN_CONFIG_STD_MSG. See ECAN_CONFIG_FLAGS constants.
Returns Nothing.
Example // set appropriate filter value and message type
ECAN1SetOperationMode(_ECAN_MODE_CONFIG,0xFF); // set
CONFIGURATION mode (ECAN1 module must be in config mode for filter settings)
// Set id of filter 10 to 3, mask2, receive buffer 7, extended messages:

ECAN1SetFilter(_ECAN_FILTER_10, 3, _ECAN_MASK_2, _ECAN_RX_BUFFER_7, _ECAN_
CONFIG_XTD_MSG);
Notes ECAN library routine require you to specify the module you want to use. To select the desired ECAN
Number of ECAN modules per MCU differs from chip to chip. Please, read the appropriate datasheet
MikroElektronika
332
ECANxRead
Prototype unsigned int ECANxRead(unsigned long *id, char *data, unsigned int *dataLen,
unsigned int *ECAN_RX_MSG_FLAGS);
Description If at least one full Receive Buffer is found, it will be processed in the following way:
- Message ID is retrieved and stored to location pointed by the id pointer

- Message data is retrieved and stored to array pointed by the data pointer
- Message length is retrieved and stored to location pointed by the dataLen pointer
- Message flags are retrieved and stored to location pointed by the ECAN_RX_MSG_FLAGS pointer
- ECAN_RX_MSG_FLAGS: message flags address. For message receive flags format refer to the
ECAN_RX_MSG_FLAGS constants. See ECAN_RX_MSG_FLAGS constants.
Returns - 0 if none of Receive Buffers is full
- 0xFFFF if at least one of Receive Buffers is full (message received)
The ECAN module must be in a mode in which receiving is possible. See ECANxSetOperationMode.
Example // check the ECAN1 module for received messages. If any was received do
something.
unsigned int msg_rcvd, rx_flags, data_len;
char data[8];
...
ECAN1SetOperationMode(_ECAN_MODE_NORMAL,0xFF); // set NORMAL
mode (ECAN1 module must be in a mode in which receiving is possible)
...
rx_flags = 0; // clear
message flags
if (msg_rcvd = ECAN1Read(&msg_id, data, &data_len, &rx_flags)) {
...
}
MikroElektronika
333
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
ECANxWrite
Prototype unsigned int ECANxWrite(long id, char *Data, unsigned int DataLen, unsigned
int ECAN_TX_MSG_FLAGS);
transmission.
Parameters - id: ECAN message identifier. Valid values: all 11 or 29 bit values, depending on message type
(standard or extended)
- Data: data to be sent
- DataLen: data length. Valid values: 0..8
- ECAN_TX_MSG_FLAGS: message flags. Valid values: ECAN_TX_MSG_FLAGS constants. See ECAN_
TX_MSG_FLAGS constants.
- 0xFFFF if at least one Transmit Buffer is empty and available for transmition
The ECAN module must be in a mode in which transmission is possible. See

Example // send message extended ECAN message with appropriate ID and data
unsigned int tx_flags;
char data[8];
...
ECAN1SetOperationMode(_ECAN_MODE_NORMAL,0xFF); // set NORMAL mode
(ECAN1 must be in a mode in which transmission is possible)
tx_flags = _ECAN_TX_PRIORITY_0 &

_ECAN_TX_XTD_FRAME &
_ECAN_TX_NO_RTR_FRAME; // set message flags
ECAN1Write(msg_id, data, 1, tx_flags);
MikroElektronika
334
ECAN Constants
There is a number of constants predefined in the ECAN library. You need to be familiar with them in order to be able to
use the library effectively. Check the example at the end of the chapter.
ECAN_OP_MODE Constants
The ECAN_OP_MODE constants define ECAN operation mode. The routine ECANxSetOperationMode expect one of
these as their argument:
const unsigned int

_ECAN_MODE_BITS = 0x00E0, // Use this to access opmode bits
_ECAN_MODE_NORMAL = 0x00,
_ECAN_MODE_DISABLE = 0x01,
_ECAN_MODE_LOOP = 0x02,
_ECAN_MODE_LISTEN = 0x03,
_ECAN_MODE_CONFIG = 0x04,
_ECAN_MODE_LISTEN_ALL = 0x07;
ECAN_CONFIG_FLAGS Constants
The ECAN_CONFIG_FLAGS constants define flags related to the ECAN module configuration. The routines
ECANxInitialize and ECANxSetBaudRate expect one of these (or a bitwise combination) as their argument:
const unsigned int

_ECAN_CONFIG_DEFAULT = 0xFF, // 11111111
_ECAN_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_BIT = 0x01,
_ECAN_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON = 0xFF, // XXXXXXX1
_ECAN_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_OFF = 0xFE, // XXXXXXX0
_ECAN_CONFIG_LINE_FILTER_BIT = 0x02,
_ECAN_CONFIG_LINE_FILTER_ON = 0xFF, // XXXXXX1X
_ECAN_CONFIG_LINE_FILTER_OFF = 0xFD, // XXXXXX0X
_ECAN_CONFIG_SAMPLE_BIT = 0x04,
_ECAN_CONFIG_SAMPLE_ONCE = 0xFF, // XXXXX1XX
_ECAN_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE = 0xFB, // XXXXX0XX
_ECAN_CONFIG_MSG_TYPE_BIT = 0x08,
_ECAN_CONFIG_STD_MSG = 0xFF, // XXXX1XXX
_ECAN_CONFIG_XTD_MSG = 0xF7, // XXXX0XXX
_ECAN_CONFIG_MATCH_TYPE_BIT = 0x20,
_ECAN_CONFIG_ALL_VALID_MSG = 0xDF, // XX0XXXXX
_ECAN_CONFIG_MATCH_MSG_TYPE = 0xFF; // XX1XXXXX
MikroElektronika
335
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
You may use bitwise AND (&) to form config word out of these values. For example:
init = _ECAN_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE &

_ECAN_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON &
_ECAN_CONFIG_STD_MSG &
...
ECAN1Initialize(1, 1, 3, 3, 1, init); // initialize ECAN1
ECAN_TX_MSG_FLAGS Constants
ECAN_TX_MSG_FLAGS are flags related to transmission of ECAN message. The routine ECANxWrite expect one of
these (or a bitwise combination) as their argument:
const unsigned int

_ECAN_TX_PRIORITY_BITS = 0x03,
_ECAN_TX_PRIORITY_0 = 0xFC, // XXXXXX00
_ECAN_TX_PRIORITY_1 = 0xFD, // XXXXXX01
_ECAN_TX_PRIORITY_2 = 0xFE, // XXXXXX10
_ECAN_TX_PRIORITY_3 = 0xFF, // XXXXXX11
_ECAN_TX_FRAME_BIT = 0x08,
_ECAN_TX_STD_FRAME = 0xFF, // XXXXX1XX
_ECAN_TX_XTD_FRAME = 0xF7, // XXXXX0XX
_ECAN_TX_RTR_BIT = 0x40,
_ECAN_TX_NO_RTR_FRAME = 0xFF, // X1XXXXXX
_ECAN_TX_RTR_FRAME = 0xBF; // X0XXXXXX
// form value to be used with CANSendMessage:

send_config = _ECAN_TX_PRIORITY_0 &
_ECAN_TX_XTD_FRAME &
_ECAN_TX_NO_RTR_FRAME;
...
ECAN1SendMessage(id, data, 1, send_config);
ECAN_RX_MSG_FLAGS Constants
ECAN_RX_MSG_FLAGS are flags related to reception of ECAN message. If a particular bit is set then corresponding
meaning is TRUE or else it will be FALSE.
MikroElektronika
336
const unsigned int

_ECAN_RX_FILTER_BITS = 0x000F, // Use this to access filter bits
_ECAN_RX_FILTER_0 = 0x00, // filter0 match
_ECAN_RX_FILTER_1 = 0x01, // filter1 match
_ECAN_RX_FILTER_2 = 0x02, // ...
_ECAN_RX_FILTER_3 = 0x03,
_ECAN_RX_FILTER_10 = 0x0A,
_ECAN_RX_FILTER_11 = 0x0B,
_ECAN_RX_FILTER_12 = 0x0C,
_ECAN_RX_FILTER_13 = 0x0D,
_ECAN_RX_FILTER_14 = 0x0E, // ...
_ECAN_RX_FILTER_15 = 0x0F, // filter15 match
_ECAN_RX_OVERFLOW = 0x10, // Set if Overflowed else cleared

_ECAN_RX_INVALID_MSG = 0x20, // Set if invalid else cleared
_ECAN_RX_XTD_FRAME = 0x40, // Set if XTD message else cleared
_ECAN_RX_RTR_FRAME = 0x80; // Set if RTR message else cleared
You may use bitwise AND (&) to extract received message status. For example:
if (MsgFlag & _ECAN_RX_OVERFLOW != 0) {

...
}
ECAN_MASK Constants
The ECAN_MASK constants define mask codes. The routine ECANxSetMask expect one of these as their argument:
const unsigned int

_ECAN_MASK_0 = 0,
_ECAN_MASK_1 = 1,
_ECAN_MASK_2 = 2;
ECAN_FILTER Constants
The ECAN_FILTER constants define filter codes. The routine ECANxSetFilter expect one of these as their argument:
MikroElektronika
337
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
const unsigned int

_ECAN_FILTER_0 = 0,
_ECAN_FILTER_1 = 1,
_ECAN_FILTER_2 = 2,
_ECAN_FILTER_3 = 3,
_ECAN_FILTER_4 = 4,
_ECAN_FILTER_5 = 5,
_ECAN_FILTER_6 = 6,
_ECAN_FILTER_7 = 7,
_ECAN_FILTER_8 = 8,
_ECAN_FILTER_9 = 9,
_ECAN_FILTER_10 = 10,
_ECAN_FILTER_15 = 15;
ECAN_RX_BUFFER Constants
The ECAN_RX_BUFFER constants define RX bufer codes codes. The routine ECANxSetFilter expect one of these as
their argument:
const unsigned int

_ECAN_RX_BUFFER_0 = 0,
_ECAN_RX_BUFFER_15 = 15;
MikroElektronika
338
Library Example
The example demonstrates ECAN protocol. The 1st node initiates the communication with the 2nd node by sending
some data to its address. The 2nd node responds by sending back the data incremented by 1. The 1st node then does
the same and sends incremented data back to the 2nd node, etc.
Code for the first ECAN node:
#include “ECAN_Defs.h”

unsigned int Rx_Data_Len; // received data length in bytes
void C1Interrupt(void) org 0x005A { // ECAN event iterrupt

IFS2bits.C1IF = 0; // clear ECAN interrupt flag
if(C1INTFbits.TBIF) { // was it tx interrupt?
C1INTFbits.TBIF = 0; // if yes clear tx interrupt flag
}
if(C1INTFbits.RBIF) { // was it rx interrupt?

C1INTFbits.RBIF = 0; // if yes clear rx interrupt flag
}
}
void main() {
// Set PLL : Fosc = ((Fin/PLLPRE)*PLLDIV)/PLLPOST ; (((10MHz/2)*32)/4) = 20MHz

// refer the pic24 family datasheet for more details
CLKDIV &= 0xFFE0; //CLKDIVbits.PLLPRE = 0;
PLLFBD = 0x1E; //PLLFBDbits.PLLDIV = 0x1E;
CLKDIV &= 0xFF3F; //CLKDIVbits.PLLPOST = 1;
CLKDIV |= 0x00C0;
AD1PCFGH = 0xFFFF; //
AD1PCFGL = 0xFFFF; // all ports digital I/O
AD2PCFGL = 0xFFFF; //
/* Clear Interrupt Flags */
IFS0=0;
IFS1=0;
IFS2=0;
IFS3=0;
IFS4=0;
/* Enable ECAN1 Interrupt */
MikroElektronika
339
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
IEC2bits.C1IE = 1; // enable ECAN1 interrupts

C1INTEbits.TBIE = 1; // enable ECAN1 tx interrupt
C1INTEbits.RBIE = 1; // enable ECAN1 rx interrupt
PORTB = 0; // clear PORTB

TRISB = 0; // set PORTB as output,
// for received message data
displaying
Can_Send_Flags = _ECAN_TX_PRIORITY_0 & // Form value to be used

_ECAN_TX_XTD_FRAME & // with CANSendMessage
Can_Init_Flags = _ECAN_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE & // Form value to be used

_ECAN_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON & // with CANInitialize
RxTx_Data[0] = 9; // set initial data to be sent

ECAN1DmaChannelInit(0, 1, &ECAN1RxTxRAMBuffer); // init dma channel 0 for
// dma to ECAN peripheral transfer
// ECAN peripheral to dma transfer
ECAN1Initialize(1, 3, 3, 3, 1, Can_Init_Flags); // initialize ECAN
ECAN1SetBufferSize(ECAN1RAMBUFFERSIZE); // set number of rx+tx buffers in
DMA RAM
ECAN1SelectTxBuffers(0x000F); // select transmit buffers

// 0x000F = buffers 0:3 are transmit buffers
ECAN1SetOperationMode(_ECAN_MODE_CONFIG,0xFF); // set CONFIGURATION mode
ECAN1SetMask(_ECAN_MASK_0, -1, _ECAN_CONFIG_MATCH_MSG_TYPE & _ECAN_CONFIG_XTD_MSG);

// set all mask1 bits to ones
ECAN1SetFilter(_ECAN_FILTER_10, 3, _ECAN_MASK_2, _ECAN_RX_BUFFER_7, _ECAN_CONFIG_XTD_
MSG); // set id of filter10 to 3,
//
assign mask2 to filter10
//
assign buffer7 to filter10
ECAN1SetOperationMode(_ECAN_MODE_NORMAL, 0xFF); // set NORMAL mode
Tx_ID = 12111; // set transmit ID
MikroElektronika
340
ECAN1Write(Tx_ID, RxTx_Data, 1, Can_Send_Flags); // send initial message
while (1) { // endless loop

Msg_Rcvd = ECAN1Read(&Rx_ID , RxTx_Data , &Rx_Data_Len, &Can_Rcv_Flags); // receive
message
RxTx_Data[0]++ ; // increment received data
Delay_ms(10);
ECAN1Write(Tx_ID, RxTx_Data, 1, Can_Send_Flags); // send incremented data back
}
}
}
Code for the second ECAN node:
#include "__Lib_ECAN1_Defs.h"

bytes
void C1Interrupt(void) org 0x005A { // ECAN event iterrupt

IFS2bits.C1IF = 0; // clear ECAN interrupt flag
if(C1INTFbits.TBIF) { // was it tx interrupt?
C1INTFbits.TBIF = 0; // if yes clear tx interrupt flag
}
if(C1INTFbits.RBIF) { // was it rx interrupt?

C1INTFbits.RBIF = 0; // if yes clear rx interrupt flag
}
}
void main() {
// Set PLL : Fosc = ((Fin/PLLPRE)*PLLDIV)/PLLPOST ; (((10MHz/2)*32)/4) = 20MHz

// refer the pic24 family datasheet for more details
CLKDIV &= 0xFFE0; //CLKDIVbits.PLLPRE = 0;
PLLFBD = 0x1E; //PLLFBDbits.PLLDIV = 0x1E;
CLKDIV &= 0xFF3F; //CLKDIVbits.PLLPOST = 1;
CLKDIV |= 0x00C0;
AD1PCFGH = 0xFFFF; //
AD1PCFGL = 0xFFFF; // all ports digital I/O
AD2PCFGL = 0xFFFF; //
MikroElektronika
341
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
/* Enable ECAN1 Interrupt */

IEC2bits.C1IE = 1; // enable ECAN1 interrupt
C1INTEbits.TBIE = 1; // enable ECAN1 tx interrupt
C1INTEbits.RBIE = 1; // enable ECAN1 rx interrupt
PORTB = 0; // clear PORTB

TRISB = 0; // set PORTB as output,
// for received message data displaying
Can_Send_Flags = _ECAN_TX_PRIORITY_0 & // Form value to be used

_ECAN_TX_XTD_FRAME & // with CANSendMessage
Can_Init_Flags = _ECAN_CONFIG_SAMPLE_THRICE & // Form value to be used

_ECAN_CONFIG_PHSEG2_PRG_ON & // with CANInitialize

// dma to ECAN peripheral transfer
// ECAN peripheral to dma transfer
ECAN1Initialize(1, 3, 3, 3, 1, Can_Init_Flags); // initialize ECAN
ECAN1SetBufferSize(ECAN1RAMBUFFERSIZE); // set number of rx+tx buffers in DMA RAM
ECAN1SelectTxBuffers(0x000F); // select transmit buffers

// 0x000F = buffers 0:3 are transmit buffers
ECAN1SetOperationMode(_ECAN_MODE_CONFIG,0xFF); // set CONFIGURATION mode

ECAN1SetFilter(_ECAN_FILTER_10, 12111, _ECAN_MASK_2, _ECAN_RX_BUFFER_7, _ECAN_CONFIG_
XTD_MSG); // set id of filter10 to 12111,
// assign mask2 to filter10
// assign buffer7 to filter10
ECAN1SetOperationMode(_ECAN_MODE_NORMAL,0xFF); // set NORMAL mode
Tx_ID = 3; // set tx ID
while (1) {
Msg_Rcvd = ECAN1Read(&Rx_ID , RxTx_Data , &Rx_Data_Len, &Can_Rcv_Flags); // receive
message
RxTx_Data[0]++ ; // increment received data
ECAN1Write(Tx_ID, RxTx_Data, 1, Can_Send_Flags); // send incremented data back
}
}
}
MikroElektronika
342
HW Connection
Example of interfacing ECAN transceiver with MCU and bus
EEPROM Library
EEPROM data memory is available with a number of dsPIC30 family and some PIC24 family MCU's. The mikroC PRO
for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 includes a library for comfortable work with MCU's internal EEPROM.
Important : Only PIC24F08KA102 and PIC24F16KA102 of PIC24 family of MCUs have EEPROM memory.
Library Routines
- EEPROM_Erase
- EEPROM_Erase_Block
- EEPROM_Read
- EEPROM_Write
- EEPROM_Write_Block
MikroElektronika
343
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
EEPROM_Erase
Prototype void EEPROM_Erase(unsigned long address);
Description Erases a single (16-bit) location from EEPROM memory.
Parameters - address: address of the EEPROM memory location to be erased.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example unsigned long eeAddr = 0x7FFC80;
...
EEPROM_Erase(eeAddr);
Notes CPU is not halted for the Data Erase cycle. The user can poll WR bit, use NVMIF or Timer IRQ to
detect the end of erase sequence.
EEPROM_Erase_Block
Prototype void EEPROM_Erase_Block(unsigned long address);
Description Erases one EEPROM row from EEPROM memory; For dsPIC30 family it is 16 words long, for
24F04KA201 and 24F16KA102 family it is 8 words long.
Parameters - address: starting address of the EEPROM memory block to be erased.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
...
EEPROM_Erase_Block(eeAddr);
Notes CPU is not halted for the Data Erase cycle. The user can poll WR bit, use NVMIF or Timer IRQ to
detect the end of erase sequence.
EEPROM_Read
Prototype unsigned int EEPROM_Read(unsigned long address);
Description Reads data from specified address.
Parameters - address: address of the EEPROM memory location to be read.
Returns Word from the specified address.
Requires It is the user’s responsibility to obtain proper address parity (in this case, even).
unsigned int temp;
...
temp = EEPROM_Read(eeAddr);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
344
EEPROM_Write
Prototype void EEPROM_Write(unsigned long address, unsigned int data_);
Description Writes data to specified address.
Parameters - address: address of the EEPROM memory location to be written.
- data: data to be written.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example unsigned int eeWrite = 0xAAAA;
unsigned long wrAddr = 0x7FFC30;
...
EEPROM_Write(wrAddr, eeWrite);
Notes Specified memory location will be erased before writing starts.
EEPROM_Write_Block
Prototype void EEPROM_Write_Block(unsigned long address, unsigned int *data);
Description Writes one EEPROM row (16 words block) of data.
Parameters - address: starting address of the EEPROM memory block to be written.
- data: data block to be written.
Returns Nothing.
Requires It is the user’s responsibility to maintain proper address alignment. In this case, address has to be a
multiply of 32, which is the size (in bytes) of one row of MCU’s EEPROM memory.
Example unsigned int eeWrite = 0xAAAA;
unsigned long wrAddr = 0x7FFC30;
...
EEPROM_Write(wrAddr, eeWrite);
Notes Specified memory block will be erased before writing starts.
This routine is not applicable to the 24F04KA201 and 24F16KA102 family of MCUs, due to the
architecture specifics.
Library Example
This project demonstrates usage of EEPROM library functions for dsPIC30F4013. Each EEPROM (16-bit) location can
be written to individually, or in 16-word blocks, which is somewhat faster than the former. If Writing in blocks, EEPROM
data start address must be a multiply of 16. Please read Help for more details on the library functions!
unsigned int eeData;

unsigned long eeAddr;
unsigned int dArr[16];
void main() {
unsigned i;
MikroElektronika
345
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
ADPCFG = 0xFFFF; // Disable analog inputs
TRISB = 0; // PORTB as output

LATB = 0xFFFF;
eeAddr = 0x7FFC00; // Start address of EEPROM
eeData = 0; // Data to be written
while (eeData <= 0x00FF) {

EEPROM_Write(eeAddr, eeData++); // Write data into EEPROM
while(WR_bit); // Wait for write to finish,
LATB = EEPROM_Read(eeAddr); // then, read the just-written
// data.
eeAddr += 2; // Next address of EEPROM memory location
Delay_ms(30);
}
Delay_ms(1000); // Wait 1 second.
eeData = 0xAAAA;
for (i=0; i<16; i++){ // Initializing array of 16 integers with data
dArr[i] = eeData;
eeData = ~eeData;
}
EEPROM_Write_Block(0x7FFC20, dArr); // Write entire row of EEPROM data

while(WR_bit)
; // Wait for write to finish
eeAddr = 0x7FFC20; // Address of EEPROM where reading should start

for (i=0; i<16; i++){ // Read the data back
LATB = EEPROM_Read(eeAddr); // and show it on PORTB
eeAddr += 2; // Next address of EEPROM memory location
Delay_ms(500);
}
}
MikroElektronika
346
Epson S1D13700 Graphic Lcd Library

The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a library for working with Glcds based on Epson S1D13700
controller.
The S1D13700 Glcd is capable of displaying both text and graphics on an LCD panel. The S1D13700 Glcd allows
layered text and graphics, scrolling of the display in any direction, and partitioning of the display into multiple screens.
It includes 32K bytes of embedded SRAM display memory which is used to store text, character codes, and bit-mapped
graphics.
The S1D13700 Glcd handles display controller functions including :
- Transferring data from the controlling microprocessor to the buffer memory

- Reading memory data, converting data to display pixels
- Generating timing signals for the LCD panel
The S1D13700 Glcd is designed with an internal character generator which supports 160, 5x7 pixel characters in
internal mask ROM (CGROM) and 64, 8x8 pixel characters incharacter generator RAM (CGRAM).
When the CGROM is not used, up to 256, 8x16 pixel characters are supported in CGRAM.
External dependencies of the Epson S1D13700 Graphic Lcd Library

S1D13700 Graphic Lcd library:
extern sfr char S1D13700_
System data bus. char S1D13700_DATA at PORTD;
DATA;
extern sfr sbit S1D13700_WR; Write signal. sbit S1D13700_WR at LATC2_bit;
extern sfr sbit S1D13700_RD; Read signal. sbit S1D13700_RD at LATC1_bit;
extern sfr sbit S1D13700_A0; System Address pin. sbit S1D13700_A0 at LATC0_bit;
extern sfr sbit S1D13700_
Reset signal. sbit S1D13700_RES at LATC4_bit;
RES;
extern sfr sbit S1D13700_CS; Chip select. sbit S1D13700_CS at LATC4_bit;
extern sfr sbit S1D13700_ Direction of the system data sbit S1D13700_DATA_Direction at
DATA_Direction; bus pins. TRISD;
extern sfr sbit S1D13700_WR_ sbit S1D13700_WR_Direction at
Direction of the Write pin.
Direction; TRISC2_bit;
extern sfr sbit S1D13700_RD_ sbit S1D13700_RD_Direction at
Direction of the Read pin.
Direction; TRISC1_bit;
extern sfr sbit S1D13700_A0_ Direction of the System sbit S1D13700_A0_Direction at
Direction; Address pin. TRISC2_bit;
extern sfr sbit S1D13700_ sbit S1D13700_RES_Direction at
Direction of the Reset pin.
RES_Direction; TRISC0_bit;
extern sfr sbit S1D13700_CS_ Direction of the Chip select sbit S1D13700_CS_Direction at
Direction; pin. TRISC4_bit;
MikroElektronika
347
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Library Routines
- S1D13700_Init
- S1D13700_Write_Command
- S1D13700_Write_Parameter
- S1D13700_Read_Parameter
- S1D13700_Fill
- S1D13700_GrFill
- S1D13700_TxtFill
- S1D13700_Display_GrLayer
- S1D13700_Display_TxtLayer
- S1D13700_Set_Cursor
- S1D13700_Display_Cursor
- S1D13700_Write_Char
- S1D13700_Write_Text
- S1D13700_Dot
- S1D13700_Line
- S1D13700_H_Line
- S1D13700_V_Line
- S1D13700_Rectangle
- S1D13700_Box
- S1D13700_Rectangle_Round_Edges
- S1D13700_Rectangle_Round_Edges_Fill
- S1D13700_Circle
- S1D13700_Circle_Fill
- S1D13700_Image
- S1D13700_PartialImage
MikroElektronika
348
S1D13700_Init
Prototype void S1D13700_Init(unsigned int width, unsigned char height);
Returns Nothing.
Description Initializes S1D13700 Graphic Lcd controller.
Parameters :
- width: width of the Glcd panel.

- height: height of the Glcd panel.
- S1D13700_Data_Port: Data Bus Port.

- S1D13700_WR: Write signal pin.
- S1D13700_RD: Read signal pin.
- S1D13700_A0: Command/Data signal pin.
- S1D13700_RES: Reset signal pin.
- S1D13700_CS: Chip Select signal pin.
- S1D13700_Data_Port_Direction: Data Bus Port Direction.

- S1D13700_WR_Direction: Direction of Write signal pin.
- S1D13700_RD_Direction: Direction of Read signal pin.
- S1D13700_A0_Direction: Direction of Command/Data signal pin.
- S1D13700_RES_Direction: Direction of Reset signal pin.
- S1D13700_CS_Direction: Direction of Chip Select signal pin.

Example // S1D13700 module connections
char S1D13700_Data_Port at PORTD;
sbit S1D13700_WR at LATC2_bit;
sbit S1D13700_RD at LATC1_bit;
sbit S1D13700_A0 at LATC0_bit;
sbit S1D13700_RES at LATC4_bit;
sbit S1D13700_CS at LATC5_bit;
char S1D13700_Data_Port_Direction at TRISD;

sbit S1D13700_WR_Direction at TRISC2_bit;
sbit S1D13700_RD_Direction at TRISC1_bit;
sbit S1D13700_A0_Direction at TRISC0_bit;
sbit S1D13700_RES_Direction at TRISC4_bit;
sbit S1D13700_CS_Direction at TRISC5_bit;
// End of S1D13700 module connections
...
// init display for 320 pixel width, 240 pixel height
S1D13700_Init(320, 240);
MikroElektronika
349
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
S1D13700_Write_Command
Prototype void S1D13700_Write_Command(char command);
Returns Nothing.
Description Writes a command to S1D13700 controller.
Parameters :
- command: command to be issued :
Value Description
S1D13700_SYSTEM_SET General system settings.
S1D13700_POWER_SAVE Enter into power saving mode.
S1D13700_DISP_ON Turn the display on.
S1D13700_DISP_OFF Turn the display off.
Setup text and graphics address
S1D13700_SCROLL
regions.
Cursor moves right after write to display
S1D13700_CS_RIGHT
memory.
Cursor moves left after write to display
S1D13700_CS_LEFT
memory.
Cursor moves up after write to display
S1D13700_CS_UP
memory.
Cursor moves down after write to
S1D13700_CS_DOWN
display memory.
S1D13700_OVLAY Configure how layers overlay.
Configure character generator RAM
S1D13700_CGRAM_ADR
address.
S1D13700_HDOT_SCR Set horizontal scroll rate.
S1D13700_CSRW Set the cursor address.
S1D13700_CSRR Read the cursor address.
Selects the gray scale depth, in bits-per-
S1D13700_GRAYSCALE
pixel (bpp).
S1D13700_MEMWRITE Write to display memory.
S1D13700_MEMREAD Read from display memory.
Requires Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the S1D13700_Init routine.

Example // Turn the display on
S1D13700_Write_Command(S1D13700_DISP_ON);
MikroElektronika
350
S1D13700_Write_Parameter
Prototype void S1D13700_Write_Parameter(char parameter);
Returns Nothing.
Description Writes a parameter to S1D13700 controller.
Parameters :
- parameter: parameter to be written.

Previously, a command must be sent through S1D13700_Write_Command routine.

Example S1D13700_Write_Command(S1D13700_CSRW); // set cursor address
S1D13700_Write_Parameter(Lo(start)); // send lower byte of cursor address
S1D13700_Write_Parameter(Hi(start)); // send higher byte cursor address
S1D13700_Read_Parameter
Prototype char S1D13700_Read_Parameter();
Returns Nothing.
Description Reads a parameter from GLCD port.
Example parameter = S1D13700_Read_Parameter();
S1D13700_Fill
Prototype void S1D13700_Fill(char d, unsigned int start, unsigned int len);
Returns Nothing.
Description Fills Glcd memory block with given byte.
Parameters :
- d: byte to be written.
- start: starting address of the memory block.
- len: length of the memory block in bytes.
Example // from the starting address of 0x3000, fill the memory block size of 0x7FFF
with 0x20
S1D13700_Fill(0x20, 0x3000, 0x7FFF);
MikroElektronika
351
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
S1D13700_GrFill
Prototype void S1D13700_GrFill(char d);
Returns Nothing.
Description Fill graphic layer with appropriate value (0 to clear).
Parameters :
- d: value to fill graphic layer with.

Example // clear current graphic panel
S1D13700_GrFill(0);
S1D13700_TxtFill
Prototype void S1D13700_TxtFill(char d);
Returns Nothing.
Description Fill current text panel with appropriate value (0 to clear).
Parameters :
- d: this value will be used to fill text panel.

Example // clear current text panel
S1D13700_TxtFill(0);
S1D13700_Display_GrLayer
Prototype void S1D13700_Display_GrLayer(char mode);
Returns Nothing.
Description Display selected graphic layer.
Parameters :
- mode: graphic layer mode. Valid values :
Value Description
S1D13700_LAYER_OFF Turn off graphic layer.
S1D13700_LAYER_ON Turn on graphic layer.
S1D13700_LAYER_FLASH_2Hz Turn on graphic layer and flash it at the rate of 2 Hz.

Example // Turn on graphic layer
S1D13700_Display_GrLayer(S1D13700_LAYER_ON);
MikroElektronika
352
S1D13700_Display_TxtLayer
Prototype void S1D13700_Display_TxtLayer(char mode);
Returns Nothing.
Description Display selected text layer.
Parameters :
- mode: text layer mode. Valid values :
Value Description
S1D13700_LAYER_OFF Turn off graphic layer.
S1D13700_LAYER_ON Turn on graphic layer.

Example // Display on text layer
S1D13700_Display_TxtLayer(S1D13700_LAYER_ON);
S1D13700_Set_Cursor
Prototype void S1D13700_Set_Cursor(char width, char height, char mode);
Returns Nothing.
Description Sets cursor properties.
Parameters :
- width: in pixels-1 (must be less than or equal to the horizontal char size).
- height: in lines-1 (must be less than or equal to the vertical char size).
- mode: cursor mode. Valid values :
Value Description
S1D13700_CURSOR_UNDERSCORE Set cursor shape - underscore.
S1D13700_CURSOR_BLOCK Set cursor shape - block.

Example // set cursor with the following properties : width 5px, height 10px, cursor
shape - block
S1D13700_Set_Cursor(5, 10, S1D13700_CURSOR_BLOCK);
MikroElektronika
353
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
S1D13700_Display_Cursor
Prototype void S1D13700_Display_Cursor(char mode);
Returns Nothing.
Description Displays cursor.
Parameters :
- mode: mode parameter. Valid values:
Value Description
S1D13700_CURSOR_OFF Turn off graphic layer.
S1D13700_CURSOR_ON Turn on graphic layer.
S1D13700_CURSOR_FLASH_2Hz Turn on graphic layer and flash it at the rate of 2 Hz.
S1D13700_CURSOR_FLASH_16Hz Turn on graphic layer and flash it at the rate of 16 Hz.

Example // set cursor on
S1D13700_Display_Cursor(S1D13700_CURSOR_ON);
S1D13700_Write_Char
Prototype void S1D13700_Write_Char(unsigned char c, unsigned int x, unsigned int y,
unsigned char mode);
Returns Nothing.
Description Writes a char in the current text layer of Glcd at coordinates (x, y).
Parameters :
- c: char to be written.
- x: char position on x-axis (column).
- y: char position on y-axis (row).
- mode: mode parameter. Valid values :
Value Description
In the OR-Mode, text and graphics can be displayed and the
data is logically “OR-ed”.
S1D13700_OVERLAY_OR
This is the most common way of combining text and graphics, for
example labels on buttons.
In this mode, the text and graphics data are combined via the
S1D13700_OVERLAY_XOR
logical “exclusive OR”.
The text and graphic data shown on display are combined via the
S1D13700_OVERLAY_AND
logical “AND function”.

Example S1D13700_Write_Char(‘A’,22,23,S1D13700_OVERLAY_OR);
MikroElektronika
354
S1D13700_Write_Text
Prototype void S1D13700_Write_Text(unsigned char *str, unsigned char x, unsigned char
y, char mode);
Returns Nothing.
Description Writes text in the current text panel of Glcd at coordinates (x, y).
Parameters :
- str: text to be written.

- x: text position on x-axis (column).
- y: text position on y-axis (row).
- mode: mode parameter. Valid values :
Value Description
In the OR-Mode, text and graphics can be displayed and the
data is logically “OR-ed”.
S1D13700_OVERLAY_OR
This is the most common way of combining text and graphics, for
example labels on buttons.
In this mode, the text and graphics data are combined via the
S1D13700_OVERLAY_XOR
logical “exclusive OR”.
The text and graphic data shown on display are combined via the
S1D13700_OVERLAY_AND
logical “AND function”.

Example S1D13700_Write_Text(“EPSON LIBRARY DEMO, WELCOME !”, 0, 0, S1D13700_OVERLAY_
OR);
S1D13700_Dot
Prototype void S1D13700_Dot(unsigned int x, unsigned int y, unsigned short color);
Returns Nothing.
Description Draws a dot in the current graphic panel of Glcd at coordinates (x, y).
Parameters :
- x: dot position on x-axis.

- y: dot position on y-axis.
- color: color parameter. Valid values :
Value Description
S1D13700_BLACK Black color.
S1D13700_WHITE White color.

Example S1D13700_Dot(50, 50, S1D13700_WHITE);
MikroElektronika
355
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
S1D13700_Line
Prototype void S1D13700_Line(unsigned int x0, unsigned int y0, unsigned int x1,
unsigned int y1, unsigned char pcolor);
Returns Nothing.
Description Draws a line from (x0, y0) to (x1, y1).
Parameters :
- x0: x coordinate of the line start.

- y0: y coordinate of the line end.
- pcolor: color parameter. Valid values :
Value Description

Example S1D13700_Line(0, 0, 239, 127, S1D13700_WHITE);
S1D13700_H_Line
Prototype void S1D13700_H_Line(unsigned int x_start, unsigned int x_end, unsigned int
y_pos, unsigned short color);
Returns Nothing.
Description Draws a horizontal line.
Parameters :
- x_start: x coordinate of the line start.

- x_end: x coordinate of the line end.
- y_pos: line position on the y axis.
Value Description

MikroElektronika
356
S1D13700_V_Line
Prototype void S1D13700_V_Line(unsigned int y_start, unsigned int y_end, unsigned int
x_pos, unsigned short color);
Returns Nothing.
Description Draws a horizontal line.
Parameters :
- y_start: y coordinate of the line start.

- y_end: y coordinate of the line end.
- x_pos: line position on the x axis.
Value Description

S1D13700_Rectangle
Prototype void S1D13700_Rectangle(unsigned int x0, unsigned int y0, unsigned int x1,
Returns Nothing.
Description Draws a rectangle on Glcd.
Parameters :
- x0: x coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner.

- y0: y coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner.
- x1: x coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner.
- y1: y coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner.
Value Description

Example S1D13700_rectangle(20, 20, 219, 107, S1D13700_WHITE);
MikroElektronika
357
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
S1D13700_Box
Prototype void S1D13700_Rectangle(unsigned int x0, unsigned int y0, unsigned int x1,
Returns Nothing.
Parameters :
- x0: x coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner.

- y0: y coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner.
- x1: x coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner.
- y1: y coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner.
Value Description

Example S1D13700_Box(0, 119, 239, 127, S1D13700_WHITE);
S1D13700_Rectangle_Round_Edges
Prototype void S1D13700_Rectangle_Round_Edges(unsigned int x_upper_left, unsigned int
y_upper_left, unsigned int x_bottom_right, unsigned int y_bottom_right,
unsigned short round_radius, unsigned short color);
Returns Nothing.
Description Draws a rounded edge rectangle on Glcd.
Parameters :
- x_upper_left: x coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner.

- y_upper_left: y coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner.
- x_bottom_right: x coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner.
- y_bottom_right: y coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner.
- round_radius: radius of the rounded edge.
Value Description

Example S1D13700_Rectangle_Round_Edges(20, 20, 219, 107, 12, S1D13700_WHITE);
MikroElektronika
358
S1D13700_Rectangle_Round_Edges_Fill
Prototype void S1D13700_Rectangle_Round_Edges_Fill(unsigned int x0, unsigned int y0,
unsigned int x1, unsigned int y1, unsigned short round_radius, unsigned
short color);
Returns Nothing.
Description Draws a filled rounded edge rectangle on Glcd.
Parameters :

Value Description

Example S1D13700_Rectangle_Round_Edges_Fill(20, 20, 219, 107, 12, S1D13700_WHITE);
S1D13700_Circle
Prototype void S1D13700_Circle(unsigned int x_center, unsigned int y_center, unsigned
int radius, unsigned short color);
Returns Nothing.
Description Draws a circle on Glcd.
Parameters :
- x_center: x coordinate of the circle center.

- y_center: y coordinate of the circle center.
- radius: radius size.
Value Description

Example S1D13700_Circle(120, 64, 110, S1D13700_WHITE);
MikroElektronika
359
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
S1D13700_Circle_Fill
Prototype void S1D13700_Circle_Fill(unsigned int x_center, unsigned int y_center,
unsigned int radius, unsigned short color);
Returns Nothing.
Description Draws a filled circle on Glcd.
Parameters :
- x_center: x coordinate of the circle center.

- y_center: y coordinate of the circle center.
- radius: radius size.
Value Description

Example S1D13700_Circle_Fill(120, 64, 110, S1D13700_WHITE);
S1D13700_Image
Prototype void S1D13700_Image(const code char *pic);
Returns Nothing.
Description Displays bitmap on Glcd.
Parameters :
- image: image to be displayed. Bitmap array is located in code memory.
Note : Image dimension must match the display dimension.

Example S1D13700_Image(image);
MikroElektronika
360
S1D13700_PartialImage
Prototype void S1D13700_PartialImage(unsigned int x_left, unsigned int y_top, unsigned
int width, unsigned int height, unsigned int picture_width, unsigned int
picture_height, code const unsigned short * image);
Returns Nothing.
Description Displays a partial area of the image on a desired location.
Parameters :
- x_left: x coordinate of the desired location (upper left coordinate).

- y_top: y coordinate of the desired location (upper left coordinate).
- width: desired image width.
- height: desired image height.
- picture_width: width of the original image.
- picture_height: height of the original image.
Note : Image dimension must match the display dimension.

Example // Draws a 10x15 part of the image starting from the upper left corner on
the coordinate (10,12). Original image size is 16x32.
S1D13700_PartialImage(10, 12, 10, 15, 16, 32, image);
MikroElektronika
361
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Flash Memory Library

This library provides routines for accessing microcontroller's (internal) Flash memory.
On the dsPIC30/33 and PIC24, Flash memory is mapped to address space 3:2, which means that every 3 consecutive
bytes of Flash have 2 consecutive address locations available. That is why mikroE's library allows data to be written to
flash in two ways: "regular" and "compact". In the "regular" mode, which is used for word(16-bit) variables, the 3rd (un-
addressable) flash memory byte remains unused. In the "compact" mode, which can be used for 1 byte-sized variables/
arrays, all flash bytes are being used.
All dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 MCUs use the RTSP module to perform Read/Erase/Write operations on Flash memory.
This, together with the internal structure of the Flash, imposes certain rules to be followed when working with Flash
memory:
dsPIC30:
- Erasing can be done only in 32-instructions (64 addresses, 96 bytes) memory blocks. This means that the
block start address should be a multiply of 64 (i.e. have 6 lower bits set to zero).
- Data is read and written in 4-instructions (8 addresses, 12 bytes) blocks.This means that the block start
address should be a multiply of 8 (i.e. have 3 lower bits set to zero).
- On the dsPIC30s, 2 address locations are assigned on every 3 bytes of (flash) program memory. Due to
this specific and non-one-to-one address mapping, the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 offers two
sets of Flash handling functions: "regular" and "compact".
Using the "regular" set, the user can write one byte of data to a single address, which means that each
byte of written data has its own address, but on every 2 written bytes one byte of Flash memory remains
empty.
Using the "compact" set, every byte of Flash memory, including those non-addressable, is filled with data;
this method can only be used for data organized in bytes.
The "compact" functions have _Compact as name suffix.
- For run-time FLASH read/write, the dsPIC30's RTSP module is being used. It organizes data into rows
and panels. Each row contains write latches that can hold 4 instructions (12 bytes). The number of panels
varies from one dsPIC30 MCU model to another. Because of that, the flash write sequence has been split
into several operations (_Write_Init(), _Write_LoadLatch4(), _Write_DoWrite()), in order
to be usable on all dsPICs.
PIC24 and dsPIC33:

- Erasing can be done only in 512-instructions (1024 addresses, 1536 bytes) memory blocks, which means
that the block start address should be a multiply of 1024 (i.e. have 10 lower bits set to zero).
- Data is read and written in 64-instructions (128 addresses, 192 bytes) blocks.This means that the block
start address should be a multiply of 128 (i.e. have 7 lower bits set to zero).
- On the dsPIC33 and PIC24s, 2 address locations are assigned on every 3 bytes of (flash) program
memory. Due to this specific and non-one-to-one address mapping, the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and
PIC24 offers two sets of Flash handling functions: "regular" and "compact".
Using the "regular" set, the user can write one byte of data to a single address, which means that each
byte of written data has its own address, but on every 2 written bytes one byte of Flash memory
remains empty.
Using the "compact" set, every byte of Flash memory, including those non-addressable, is filled with data;
this method can only be used for data organized in bytes.
The "compact" functions have _Compact as name suffix.
MikroElektronika
362
24F04KA201 and 24F16KA102 Family Specifics :

These MCU's have their Flash memory organized into memory blocks of 32 instructions (96 bytes), unlike other PIC24
devices.
Erasing can be done only in 32-instructions (64 addresses, 96 bytes) memory blocks, which means that the block start
address should be a multiply of 64 (i.e. have 6 lower bits set to zero).
Data is read and written in 32-instructions (64 addresses, 96 bytes) blocks. This means that the block start address
should be a multiply of 64 (i.e. have 6 lower bits set to zero).
Unlike other PIC24 devices, writing or erasing one block of data (32 instructions), is followed by erasing the memory
block of the same size (32 instructions).
Library Routines
dsPIC30 Functions
- FLASH_Erase32
- FLASH_Write_Block
- FLASH_Write_Compact
- FLASH_Write_Init
- FLASH_Write_Loadlatch4
- FLASH_Write_Loadlatch4_Compact
- FLASH_Write_DoWrite
- FLASH_Read4
- FLASH_Read4_Compact
PIC24 and dsPIC33 Functions

- FLASH_Erase
- FLASH_Write
- FLASH_Write_Compact
- FLASH_Read
- FLASH_Read_Compact
dsPIC30 Functions
MikroElektronika
363
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
FLASH_Erase32
Prototype void FLASH_Erase32(unsigned long address);
Description Erases one block (32 instructions, 64 addresses, 96 bytes)from the program FLASH memory.
Parameters - address: starting address of the FLASH memory block
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example //--- erase the 32-instruction block, starting from address 0x006000
FLASH_Erase32(0x006000);
Notes The user should take care about the address alignment (see the explanation at the beginning of this
page).
FLASH_Write_Block
Prototype void FLASH_Write_Block(unsigned long address, unsigned int *data_);
Description Fills one writeable block of Flash memory (4 instructions, 8 addresses, 12 bytes) in the “regular” mode.
Addresses and data are being mapped 1-on-1. This also means that 3rd byte of each program location
remains unused.
- data_: data to be written
Returns Nothing.
Requires The block to be written to must be erased first, either from the user code (through the RTSP), or during
the programming of MCU. Please note that block size that is to be erased is different from the one that
can be written with this function!
Example unsigned long flash_address = 0x006000;
unsigned int Buffer[4] = {‘A’, ‘B’, ‘C’, ‘D’};
...
FLASH_Write_Block(flash_address, Buffer);
page).
MikroElektronika
364
FLASH_Write_Compact
Prototype void FLASH_Write_Compact(unsigned long address, void *data_, unsigned
bytes);
Description Fills a portion of Flash memory using the dsPIC30 RTSP module, in the “compact” manner. In this way,
several blocks of RTSP’s latch can be written in one pass. One latch block contains 4 instructions (8
addresses, 12 bytes). Up to 8 latch blocks can be written in one round, resulting in a total of 8*12 = 96
bytes. This method uses all available bytes of the program FLASH memory, including those that are
not mapped to address space (every 3rd byte).
- bytes: number of bytes to be written. The amount of bytes to be written must be a multiply of 12,
since this is the size of the RTSP’s write latch(es).
Returns Nothing.
Requires The block to be written to must be erased first, either from the user code FLASH_Erase32, or during
Example unsigned long flash_address = 0x006000;
char Buffer[] = “supercalifragillisticexpialidotious”;
...
FLASH_Write_Compact(flash_address, Buffer, 36);
page).
FLASH_Write_Init
Prototype void FLASH_Write_Init(unsigned long address, void *data_);
Description Initializes RTSP for write-to-FLASH operation.
Returns Nothing.
Example //--- Initializes the Flash to be written, starting from address 0x006100,
the data is located at *pv1
void *pv1;
...
FLASH_Write_Init(0x006100, pv1);
page).
MikroElektronika
365
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
FLASH_Write_Loadlatch4
Prototype void FLASH_Write_Loadlatch4();
Description Loads the current RTSP write latch with data (4 instructions, 8 addresses, 12 bytes). The data is filled
in the “regular” mode.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
This function is used as a part of the Flash write sequence, therefore the FLASH_Write_Init function
must be called before this one.
This function can be called several times before commiting the actual write-to-Flash operation FLASH_
Write_DoWrite. This depends on the organization of the RTSP module for the certain dsPIC30. Please
consult the Datasheet for particular dsPIC30 on this subject.
Example //--- writes data from an array, in “regular” manner
unsigned int iArr[16] = {‘m’, ‘i’, ‘k’, ‘r’, ‘o’, ‘E’, ‘l’, ‘e’, ‘k’};
void * pv1;
...
pv1 = iArr;
FLASH_Write_Loadlatch4();
FLASH_Write_DoWrite();
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
366
FLASH_Write_Loadlatch4_Compact
Prototype void FLASH_Write_Loadlatch4_Compact();
Description Loads the current RTSP write latch with data (4 instructions, 8 addresses, 12 bytes). The data is filled
in the “compact” mode.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
This function is used as a part of the Flash write sequence, therefore the FLASH_Write_Init function
must be called before this one.
This function can be called several times before committing actual write-to-Flash operation FLASH_
Write_DoWrite. This depends on the organization of the RTSP module for the certain dsPIC30. Please
consult the Datasheet for particular dsPIC30 on this subject.
Example //--- writes data from an array of char, in “compact” manner
char cArr[] = “supercalifragillisticexpialidotious”; //35+1 bytes
void * pv1;
...
pv1 = cArr;
FLASH_Write_Init(0x006000, pv1); //init
FLASH_Write_Loadlatch4_Compact(); //12 bytes
FLASH_Write_DoWrite(); //commit write
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
367
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
FLASH_Write_DoWrite
Prototype void FLASH_Write_DoWrite();
Description Commits the FLASH write operation.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
This function is used as a part of the Flash write sequence, therefore FLASH_Write_Init and certain
number of FLASH_Write_Loadlatch4 or FLASH_Write_Loadlatch4_Compact function calls must be
made before this one.
This function is to be called once, at the and of the FLASH write sequence.
Example //--- writes data from an array, in “regular” manner
unsigned int iArr[16] = {‘m’, ‘i’, ‘k’, ‘r’, ‘o’, ‘E’, ‘l’, ‘e’, ‘k’};
void * pv1;
...
pv1 = iArr;
Notes None.
FLASH_Read4
Prototype unsigned int* FLASH_Read4(unsigned long address, unsigned int *write_to);
Description Reads one latch row (4 instructions, 8 addresses) in the “regular” mode.
Parameters - address: starting address of the FLASH memory block to be read
- write_to: starting address of RAM buffer for storing read data
Returns Starting address of RAM buffer for storing read data.
Requires Nothing.
Example //--- reads 8 bytes (4 words) from location 0x006000 and stores it to
*pv1;
unsigned int *pv1;
...
FLASH_Read4(0x006000, pv1);
Notes The user should take care of the address alignment (see the explanation at the beginning of this
page).
MikroElektronika
368
FLASH_Read4_Compact
Prototype void* FLASH_Read4_Compact(unsigned long address, void *write_to);
Description Reads one latch row (4 instructions, 8 addresses) in the “compact” mode.
Returns Starting address of RAM buffer for storing read data.
Requires Nothing.
Example //--- reads 12 bytes (4 words) from location 0x006000 and stores it to
*pv1;
unsigned int *pv1;
...
FLASH_Read4_Compact(0x006000, pv1);
page).
PIC24 and dsPIC33 Functions
FLASH_Erase
Prototype void FLASH_Erase(unsigned long address);
Description Erases one block (512 instructions, 1024 addresses, 1536 bytes) from the program FLASH memory.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example //--- erase the flash memory block, starting from address 0x006400
unsigned long flash_address = 0x006400;
...
FLASH_Erase(flash_address);
page).
MikroElektronika
369
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
FLASH_Write
Prototype void FLASH_Write(unsigned long address, unsigned int *data_);
Description Fills one writeable block of Flash memory (64 instructions, 128 addresses, 192 bytes) in the “regular”
mode. Addresses and data are being mapped 1-on-1. This also means that 3rd byte of each program
location remains unused.
Returns Nothing.
Requires The block to be written to must be erased first, either from the user code (through the RTSP), or during
Example unsigned int iArr[64] = {‘m’, ‘i’, ‘k’, ‘r’, ‘o’, ‘E’, ‘l’, ‘e’, ‘k’, ‘t’,
‘r’, ‘o’, ‘n’, ‘i’, ‘k’, ‘a’};
void * pv1;
...
pv1 = iArr;
FLASH_Write(0x006500, pv1);
page).
FLASH_Write_Compact
Prototype void FLASH_Write_Compact(unsigned long address, char *data_);
Description Fills a portion of Flash memory (64 instructions, 128 addresses, 192 bytes) using the dsPIC33 and
PIC24s RTSP (Run Time Self Programming) module, in the “compact” manner. This method uses all
available bytes of the program FLASH memory, including those that are not mapped to address space
(every 3rd byte).
Returns Nothing.
Requires The block to be written to must be erased first, either from the user code (FLASH_Erase), or during
Example char cArr[] =
“supercalifragillisticexpialidotiousABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPRSTUVWXYZ1234”;
void * pv1;
...
pv1 = cArr;
FLASH_Write_Compact(0x006400, pv1);
page).
MikroElektronika
370
FLASH_Read
Prototype unsigned int* FLASH_Read(unsigned long address, unsigned int *write_to,
unsigned NoWords);
Description Reads required number of words from the flash memory in the “regular” mode.
- NoWords: number of words to be read
Returns Address of RAM buffer for storing read data.
Requires
Example unsigned Buffer[64];
unsigned long start_address = 0x6500;
...
FLASH_Read(start_address, Buffer, 10);
page).
FLASH_Read_Compact
Prototype void *FLASH_Read_Compact(unsigned long address, void *write_to, unsigned
NoBytes);
Description Reads required number of bytes from the flash memory in the “compact” mode.
- NoBytes: number of bytes to be read
Returns Address of RAM buffer for storing read data.
Requires
Example char Buffer[64];
unsigned long start_address = 0x6500;
...
FLASH_Read_Compact(start_address, Buffer, 10);
page).
MikroElektronika
371
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Library Example
In this example written for dsPIC30F4013, various read/write tecniques to/from the on-chip FLASH memory are shown.
Flash memory is mapped to address space 3:2, meaning every 3 consecutive bytes of Flash have 2 consecutive
address locations available.
That is why mikroE's library allows data to be written to Flash in two ways: 'regular' and 'compact'. In 'regular' mode,
which is used for variables that are size of 2 bytes and more, the 3rd (un-addressable) byte remains unused.
In 'compact' mode, which can be used for 1 byte-sized variables/arrays, all bytes of flash are being used.
unsigned int iArr[8] = {‘m’, ‘i’, ‘k’, ‘r’, ‘o’, ‘E’, ‘l’, ‘e’};
char cArr[] = “mikroElektronika Flash example”;
char cArr2[40];
void * pv1;
unsigned bb;
void main() {
unsigned i;
pv1 = cArr;
/*
This is what FLASH_Write_Compact() does ‘beneath the hood’
*
FLASH_Write_Loadlatch4_Compact();
*/
//--- erase the block first

//--- write compact format to flash

FLASH_Write_Compact(0x006000, pv1, 36);
//--- read compact format

pv1 = cArr2;
pv1 += 12;
pv1 += 12;
pv1 += 12;
*pv1 = 0; //termination
//--- show what has been written

i = 0;
MikroElektronika
372
UART1_Init(9600);
// UART1_Write_Text("Start");
UART1_Write(10);
UART1_Write(13);
while(cArr2[i]) {
bb = cArr2[i++];
UART1_Write(bb);
}
//--- now for some non-compact flash-write

pv1 = iArr;
//--- erase the block first
}
Graphic Lcd Library

The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a library for operating Graphic Lcd 128x64 (with commonly used
Samsung KS108/KS107 controller).
For creating a custom set of Glcd images use Glcd Bitmap Editor Tool.
MikroElektronika
373
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
External dependencies of Graphic Lcd Library

The following variables must be
defined in all projects using Graphic Description : Example :
Lcd Library:
extern sfr sbit GLCD_D0; Data 0 line. sbit GLCD_D0 at LATB0_bit;
extern sfr sbit GLCD_D1; Data 1 line. sbit GLCD_D1 at LATB1_bit;
extern sfr sbit GLCD_D2; Data 2 line. sbit GLCD_D2 at LATF2_bit;
extern sfr sbit GLCD_D3; Data 3 line. sbit GLCD_D3 at LATF3_bit;
extern sfr sbit GLCD_D4; Data 4 line. sbit GLCD_D4 at LATD0_bit;
extern sfr sbit GLCD_CS1; Chip Select 1 line. sbit GLCD_CS1 at LATB4_bit;
extern sfr sbit GLCD_CS2; Chip Select 2 line. sbit GLCD_CS2 at LATB5_bit;
extern sfr sbit GLCD_RS; Register select line. sbit GLCD_RS at LATF0_bit;
extern sfr sbit GLCD_RW; Read/Write line. sbit GLCD_RW at LATF1_bit;
extern sfr sbit GLCD_EN; Enable line. sbit GLCD_RST at LATF5_bit;
extern sfr sbit GLCD_RST; Reset line. sbit GLCD_RST at LATF5_bit;
extern sfr sbit GLCD_D0_ sbit GLCD_D0_Direction at TRISB0_
Direction of the Data 0 pin.
Direction; bit;
Direction; bit;
Direction; bit;
extern sfr sbit GLCD_D4_ sbit GLCD_D4_Direction at TRISD0_
Direction; bit;
Direction; bit;
Direction; bit;
Direction; bit;
extern sfr sbit GLCD_CS1_ Direction of the Chip Select 1 sbit GLCD_CS1_Direction at
Direction; pin. TRISB4_bit;
extern sfr sbit GLCD_CS2_ Direction of the Chip Select 2 sbit GLCD_CS2_Direction at
extern sfr sbit GLCD_RS_ Direction of the Register select sbit GLCD_RS_Direction at TRISF0_
Direction; pin. bit;
extern sfr sbit GLCD_RW_ Direction of the Read/Write sbit GLCD_RW_Direction at TRISF1_
Direction; pin. bit;
extern sfr sbit GLCD_EN_ sbit GLCD_EN_Direction at TRISF4_
Direction of the Enable pin.
Direction; bit;
extern sfr sbit GLCD_RST_ sbit GLCD_RST_Direction at
Direction; TRISF5_bit;
MikroElektronika
374
Library Routines
Basic routines:
- Glcd_Init
- Glcd_Set_Side
- Glcd_Set_X
- Glcd_Set_Page
- Glcd_Read_Data
- Glcd_Write_Data
Advanced routines:
- Glcd_Fill
- Glcd_Dot
- Glcd_Line
- Glcd_V_Line
- Glcd_H_Line
- Glcd_Rectangle
- Glcd_Rectangle_Round_Edges
- Glcd_Rectangle_Round_Edges_Fill
- Glcd_Box
- Glcd_Circle
- Glcd_Circle_Fill
- Glcd_Set_Font
- Glcd_Write_Char
- Glcd_Write_Text
- Glcd_Image
- Glcd_PartialImage
Glcd_Init
Prototype void Glcd_Init();
Description Initializes the Glcd module. Each of the control lines are both port and pin configurable, while data
lines must be on a single port (pins <0:7>).
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
- GLCD_D0 : Data pin 0

- GLCD_CS1 : Chip select 1 signal pin
- GLCD_CS2 : Chip select 2 signal pin
- GLCD_RS : Register select signal pin
- GLCD_RW : Read/Write Signal pin
MikroElektronika
375
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Requires - GLCD_EN : Enable signal pin

- GLCD_RST : Reset signal pin
- GLCD_D0_Direction : Direction of the Data pin 0
- GLCD_CS1_Direction : Direction of the Chip select 1 pin
- GLCD_CS2_Direction : Direction of the Chip select 2 pin
- GLCD_RS_Direction : Direction of the Register select signal pin
- GLCD_RW_Direction : Direction of the Read/Write signal pin
- GLCD_EN_Direction : Direction of the Enable signal pin
- GLCD_RST_Direction : Direction of the Reset signal pin

Example // Glcd pinout settings
sbit GLCD_D0 at RB0_bit;
sbit GLCD_D4 at RD0_bit;
sbit GLCD_CS1 at RB0_bit;
sbit GLCD_CS2 at RB1_bit;
sbit GLCD_RS at RB2_bit;
sbit GLCD_RW at RB3_bit;
sbit GLCD_EN at RB4_bit;
sbit GLCD_RST at RB5_bit;
sbit GLCD_D0_Direction at TRISB0_bit;

sbit GLCD_D4_Direction at TRISD0_bit;
sbit GLCD_CS1_Direction at TRISB0_bit;
sbit GLCD_RS_Direction at TRISB2_bit;
sbit GLCD_RW_Direction at TRISB3_bit;
sbit GLCD_EN_Direction at TRISB4_bit;
sbit GLCD_RST_Direction at TRISB5_bit;
...
Glcd_Init();
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
376
Glcd_Set_Side
Prototype void Glcd_Set_Side(unsigned short x_pos);
Description Selects Glcd side. Refer to the Glcd datasheet for detailed explanation.
Parameters - x_pos: Specifies position on x-axis of the Glcd. Valid values: 0..127. Values from 0 to 63 specify the
left side, values from 64 to 127 specify the right side of the Glcd.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Glcd needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine.
Example The following two lines are equivalent, and both of them select the left side of Glcd:
Glcd_Select_Side(0);
Glcd_Select_Side(10);
Notes For side, x axis and page layout explanation see schematic at the bottom of this page.
Glcd_Set_X
Prototype void Glcd_Set_X(unsigned short x_pos);
Description Sets x-axis position to x_pos dots from the left border of Glcd within the selected side.
Parameters - x_pos: position on x-axis. Valid values: 0..63
Returns Nothing.
Example Glcd_Set_X(25);
Glcd_Set_Page
Prototype void Glcd_Set_Page(unsigned short page);
Description Selects page of the Glcd.
Parameters - page: page number. Valid values: 0..7
Returns Nothing.
Example Glcd_Set_Page(5);
MikroElektronika
377
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Glcd_Read_Data
Prototype unsigned short Glcd_Read_Data();
Description Reads data from from the current location of Glcd memory and moves to the next location.
Parameters None.
Returns One byte from Glcd memory, formatted as a word (16-bit).
Glcd side, x-axis position and page should be set first. See functions Glcd_Set_Side, Glcd_Set_X,
and Glcd_Set_Page.
Example unsigned int data_;
...
Glcd_Read_Data();
data_ = Glcd_Read_Data();
Notes This routine needs to be called twice; After the first call, data is placed in the buffer register. After the
second call, data is passed from the buffer register to data lines.
Glcd_Write_Data
Prototype void Glcd_Write_Data(unsigned short data_);
Returns Nothing.
Description Writes one byte to the current location in Glcd memory and moves to the next location.
Parameters :

Glcd side, x-axis position and page should be set first. See functions Glcd_Set_Side, Glcd_Set_X,
and Glcd_Set_Page.
Example unsigned short data_;
...
Glcd_Write_Data(data_);
MikroElektronika
378
Glcd_Fill
Prototype void Glcd_Fill(unsigned short pattern);
Description Fills Glcd memory with the byte pattern.
To clear the Glcd screen, use Glcd_Fill(0).
To fill the screen completely, use Glcd_Fill(0xFF).

Parameters - pattern: byte to fill Glcd memory with.
Returns Nothing.
Example // Clear screen
Glcd_Fill(0);
Notes None.
Glcd_Dot
Prototype void Glcd_Dot(unsigned short x_pos, unsigned short y_pos, unsigned short
color);
Description Draws a dot on Glcd at coordinates (x_pos, y_pos).
Parameters - x_pos: x position. Valid values: 0..127
- y_pos: y position. Valid values: 0..63
- color: color parameter. Valid values: 0..2
The parameter color determines a dot state: 0 clears dot, 1 puts a dot, and 2 inverts dot state.
Returns Nothing.
Example // Invert the dot in the upper left corner
Glcd_Dot(0, 0, 2);
Notes For x and y axis layout explanation see schematic at the bottom of this page.
Glcd_Line
Prototype void Glcd_Line(int x_start, int y_start, int x_end, int y_end, unsigned
short color);
Description Draws a line on Glcd.
Parameters - x_start: x coordinate of the line start. Valid values: 0..127
- y_start: y coordinate of the line start. Valid values: 0..63
- x_end: x coordinate of the line end. Valid values: 0..127
- y_end: y coordinate of the line end. Valid values: 0..63
The parameter color determines the line color: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts each dot.
Returns Nothing.
Example // Draw a line between dots (0,0) and (20,30)
Glcd_Line(0, 0, 20, 30, 1);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
379
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Glcd_V_Line
Prototype void Glcd_V_Line(unsigned short y_start, unsigned short y_end, unsigned
short x_pos, unsigned short color);
Description Draws a vertical line on Glcd.
Parameters - y_start: y coordinate of the line start. Valid values: 0..63
- x_pos: x coordinate of vertical line. Valid values: 0..127
Returns Nothing.
Example // Draw a vertical line between dots (10,5) and (10,25)
Glcd_V_Line(5, 25, 10, 1);
Notes None.
Glcd_H_Line
Prototype void Glcd_H_Line(unsigned short x_start, unsigned short x_end, unsigned
short y_pos, unsigned short color);
Description Draws a horizontal line on Glcd.
- y_pos: y coordinate of horizontal line. Valid values: 0..63
Returns Nothing.
Example // Draw a horizontal line between dots (10,20) and (50,20)
Glcd_H_Line(10, 50, 20, 1);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
380
Glcd_Rectangle
Prototype void Glcd_Rectangle(unsigned short x_upper_left, unsigned short y_upper_
left, unsigned short x_bottom_right, unsigned short y_bottom_right, unsigned
short color);
Parameters - x_upper_left: x coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner. Valid values: 0..127
- y_upper_left: y coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner. Valid values: 0..63
- x_bottom_right: x coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner. Valid values: 0..127
- y_bottom_right: y coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner. Valid values: 0..63
The parameter color determines the color of the rectangle border: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts each
dot.
Returns Nothing.
Example // Draw a rectangle between dots (5,5) and (40,40)
Glcd_Rectangle(5, 5, 40, 40, 1);
Notes None.
Glcd_Rectangle_Round_Edges
Prototype void Glcd_Rectangle_Round_Edges(unsigned short x_upper_left, unsigned short
y_upper_left, unsigned short x_bottom_right, unsigned short y_bottom_right,
unsigned short round_radius, unsigned short color);
The parameter color determines the color of the rectangle border: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts
each dot.
Returns Nothing.
Example // Draw a rounded edge rectangle between dots (5,5) and (40,40) with the
radius of 12
Glcd_Rectangle_Round_Edges(5, 5, 40, 40, 12, 1);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
381
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Glcd_Rectangle_Round_Edges_Fill
Prototype void Glcd_Rectangle_Round_Edges_Fill(unsigned short x_upper_left, unsigned
short y_upper_left, unsigned short x_bottom_right, unsigned short y_bottom_
right, unsigned short round_radius, unsigned short color);
Description Draws a filled rounded edge rectangle on Glcd with color.
- round_radius: radius of the rounded edge
each dot.
Returns Nothing.
Example // Draws a filled rounded edge rectangle between dots (5,5) and (40,40) with
the radius of 12
Glcd_Rectangle_Round_Edges_Fill(5, 5, 40, 40, 12, 1);
Notes None.
Glcd_Box
Prototype void Glcd_Box(unsigned short x_upper_left, unsigned short y_upper_left,
unsigned short x_bottom_right, unsigned short y_bottom_right, unsigned
short color);
Description Draws a box on Glcd.
Parameters :
Parameters - x_upper_left: x coordinate of the upper left box corner. Valid values: 0..127
- y_upper_left: y coordinate of the upper left box corner. Valid values: 0..63
- x_bottom_right: x coordinate of the lower right box corner. Valid values: 0..127
- y_bottom_right: y coordinate of the lower right box corner. Valid values: 0..63
The parameter color determines the color of the box fill: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts each dot.
Returns Nothing.
Example // Draw a box between dots (5,15) and (20,40)
Glcd_Box(5, 15, 20, 40, 1);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
382
Glcd_Circle
Prototype void Glcd_Circle(int x_center, int y_center, int radius, unsigned short
color);
Description Draws a circle on Glcd.1
Parameters - x_center: x coordinate of the circle center. Valid values: 0..127
- y_center: y coordinate of the circle center. Valid values: 0..63
- radius: radius size
The parameter color determines the color of the circle line: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts each dot.
Returns Nothing.
Example // Draw a circle with center in (50,50) and radius=10
Glcd_Circle(50, 50, 10, 1);
Notes None.
Glcd_Circle_Fill
Prototype void Glcd_Circle_Fill(int x_center, int y_center, int radius, unsigned short
color);
Returns Nothing.
Example // Draws a filled circle with center in (50,50) and radius=10
Glcd_Circle_Fill(50, 50, 10, 1);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
383
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Glcd_Set_Font
Prototype void Glcd_Set_Font(const char *activeFont, unsigned short aFontWidth,
unsigned short aFontHeight, unsigned int aFontOffs);
Description Sets font that will be used with Glcd_Write_Char and Glcd_Write_Text routines.
Parameters - activeFont: font to be set. Needs to be formatted as an array of char
- aFontWidth: width of the font characters in dots.
- aFontHeight: height of the font characters in dots.
- aFontOffs: number that represents difference between the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24
character set and regular ASCII set (eg. if ‘A’ is 65 in ASCII character, and ‘A’ is 45 in the mikroC PRO
for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 character set, aFontOffs is 20). Demo fonts supplied with the library have
an offset of 32, which means that they start with space.
The user can use fonts given in the file “__Lib_GLCDFonts” file located in the Uses folder or create
his own fonts.
List of supported fonts:
- Font_Glcd_System3x5
- Font_Glcd_5x7
- Font_Glcd_Character8x7
For the sake of the backward compatibility, these fonts are supported also:
- System3x5 (equivalent to Font_Glcd_System3x5)

- FontSystem5x7_v2 (equivalent to Font_Glcd_System5x7)
- font5x7 (equivalent to Font_Glcd_5x7)
- Character8x7 (equivalent to Font_Glcd_Character8x7)
Returns Nothing.
Example // Use the custom 5x7 font “myfont” which starts with space (32):
Glcd_Set_Font(&myfont, 5, 7, 32);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
384
Glcd_Write_Char
Prototype void Glcd_Write_Char(unsigned short character, unsigned short x_pos, unsigned
short page_num, unsigned short color);
Description Prints character on the Glcd.
Parameters - character: character to be written
- x_pos: character starting position on x-axis. Valid values: 0..(127-FontWidth)
- page_num: the number of the page on which character will be written. Valid values: 0..7
The parameter color determines the color of the character: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts each dot.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Glcd needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine. Use Glcd_Set_Font to specify the font for display; if
no font is specified, then default Font_Glcd_System5x7 font supplied with the library will be used.
Example // Write character ‘C’ on the position 10 inside the page 2:
Glcd_Write_Char(‘C’, 10, 2, 1);
Notes For x axis and page layout explanation see schematic at the bottom of this page.
Glcd_Write_Text
Prototype void Glcd_Write_Text(char *text, unsigned short x_pos, unsigned short page_
num, unsigned short color);
Description Prints text on Glcd.
Parameters - text: text to be written
- x_pos: text starting position on x-axis.
- page_num: the number of the page on which text will be written. Valid values: 0..7
The parameter color determines the color of the text: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts each dot.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Glcd needs to be initialized, see Glcd_Init routine. Use Glcd_Set_Font to specify the font for display; if
no font is specified, then default Font_Glcd_System5x7 font supplied with the library will be used.
Example // Write text “Hello world!” on the position 10 inside the page 2:
Glcd_Write_Text(“Hello world!”, 10, 2, 1);
MikroElektronika
385
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Glcd_Image
Prototype void Glcd_Image(code const unsigned short *image);
Parameters - image: image to be displayed. Bitmap array can be located in both code and RAM memory (due to
the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 pointer to const and pointer to RAM equivalency).
Returns Nothing.
Example // Draw image my_image on Glcd
Glcd_Image(my_image);
Notes Use the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 integrated Glcd Bitmap Editor, Tools > Glcd Bitmap
Editor, to convert image to a constant array suitable for displaying on Glcd.
Glcd_PartialImage
Prototype void Glcd_PartialImage(unsigned int x_left, unsigned int y_top, unsigned
Parameters - x_left: x coordinate of the desired location (upper left coordinate).
- image: image to be displayed. Bitmap array can be located in both code and RAM memory (due to
the mikroC PRO for PIC pointer to const and pointer to RAM equivalency).
Returns Nothing.
Glcd_PartialImage(10, 12, 10, 15, 16, 32, image);
MikroElektronika
386
Library Example
The following drawing demo tests advanced routines of the Glcd library.
//Declarations------------------------------------------------------------------
const code char truck_bmp[1024];
//--------------------------------------------------------------end-declarations
// Glcd module connections

sbit GLCD_CS1 at LATB4_bit;

sbit GLCD_RS at LATF0_bit;
sbit GLCD_RW at LATF1_bit;
sbit GLCD_EN at LATF4_bit;
sbit GLCD_RST at LATF5_bit;
sbit GLCD_RS_Direction at TRISF0_bit;
sbit GLCD_RW_Direction at TRISF1_bit;
sbit GLCD_EN_Direction at TRISF4_bit;
sbit GLCD_RST_Direction at TRISF5_bit;
// End Glcd module connections
void delay2S(){ // 2 seconds delay function

Delay_ms(2000);
}
void main() {
unsigned short ii;
char *someText;
#define COMPLETE_EXAMPLE // Comment this line to make simpler/smaller example

ADPCFG = 0xFFFF; // Configure AN pins as digital
MikroElektronika
387
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Glcd_Init(); // Initialize GLCD

Glcd_Fill(0x00); // Clear GLCD
while(1) {
#ifdef COMPLETE_EXAMPLE
Glcd_Image(truck_bmp); // Draw image
delay2S(); delay2S();
#endif
Glcd_Box(62,40,124,56,1); // Draw box

Glcd_Rectangle(5,5,84,35,1); // Draw rectangle
Glcd_Line(0, 0, 127, 63, 1); // Draw line
delay2S();
for(ii = 5; ii < 60; ii+=5 ){ // Draw horizontal and vertical lines

Delay_ms(250);
Glcd_V_Line(2, 54, ii, 1);
Glcd_H_Line(2, 120, ii, 1);
}
delay2S();

Glcd_Set_Font(Character8x7, 8, 7, 32); // Choose font, see __Lib_GLCDFonts.c
in Uses folder
#endif
Glcd_Write_Text("mikroE", 1, 7, 2); // Write string
for (ii = 1; ii <= 10; ii++) // Draw circles

Glcd_Circle(63,32, 3*ii, 1);
delay2S();
Glcd_Box(12,20, 70,57, 2); // Draw box

delay2S();
Glcd_Fill(0xFF); // Fill GLCD
Glcd_Set_Font(Character8x7, 8, 7, 32); // Change font

someText = “8x7 Font”;
Glcd_Write_Text(someText, 5, 0, 2); // Write string
delay2S();
Glcd_Set_Font(System3x5, 3, 5, 32); // Change font

someText = “3X5 CAPITALS ONLY”;
delay2S();
MikroElektronika
388
Glcd_Set_Font(font5x7, 5, 7, 32); // Change font

someText = "5x7 Font";
delay2S();
Glcd_Set_Font(FontSystem5x7_v2, 5, 7, 32); // Change font

someText = "5x7 Font (v2)";
delay2S();
#endif
}
}
HW Connection
Glcd HW connection
MikroElektronika
389
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
I²C Library
The I²C full master I²C module is available with a number of the dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 MCU models. The mikroC PRO
for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a library which supports the master I²C mode.
Important :
- I²C library routines require you to specify the module you want to use. To select the desired I²C module, simply
- Number of I²C modules per MCU differs from chip to chip. Please, read the appropriate datasheet before utilizing
this library.
Library Routines
- I2Cx_Init
- I2Cx_Start
- I2Cx_Restart
- I2Cx_Is_Idle
- I2Cx_Read
- I2Cx_Write
- I2Cx_Stop
I2Cx_Init
Prototype void I2Cx_Init(unsigned long scl);
Description Configures and initializes the desired I²C module with default settings.
This function enables the I²C module by setting the I2CEN bit. The rest of the bits in I²C control register
remains unchanged. Default initialization (after reset) of I²C module is:
- continue operation in IDLE mode

- IPMI mode disabled
- 7-bit slave address
- slew rate control enabled
- general call address disabled
- software or receive clock stretching disabled
Parameters - scl: requested serial clock rate.
Returns Nothing.
Requires MCU with the I²C module.
Example // Initialize the I2C1 module with clock_rate of 100000
I2C1_Init(100000);
Notes Refer to the MCU’s datasheet for correct values of the scl in respect with Fosc.
I²C library routines require you to specify the module you want to use. To select the desired I²C
Number of I²C modules per MCU differs from chip to chip. Please, read the appropriate datasheet
MikroElektronika
390
I2Cx_Start
Prototype void I2Cx_Start();
Description Determines if the I²C bus is free and issues START signal.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Requires MCU with at least one I²C module.
Used I²C module must be initialized before using this function. See I2Cx_Init routine.
Example // Issue START signal
I2C1_Start();
Notes I²C library routines require you to specify the module you want to use. To select the desired I²C
I2Cx_Restart
Prototype void I2Cx_Restart();
Description Issues repeated START signal.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Example // Issue RESTART signal
I2C1_Restart();
MikroElektronika
391
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
I2Cx_Is_Idle
Prototype unsigned I2Cx_Is_Idle();
Description Waits for the I²C bus to become free. This is a blocking function.
Parameters None.
Returns - 0 if I²C bus is free.
- 1 if I²C bus is not free.
Example unsigned char data_;
...
if !(I2C1_Is_Idle)
I2C1_Write(data_);
...
I2Cx_Read
Prototype unsigned char I2Cx_Read(unsigned ack);
Description Reads a byte from the I²C bus.
Parameters - ack: acknowledge signal parameter. If the ack = 0, acknowledge signal will be sent after reading,
otherwise the not acknowledge signal will be sent.
Returns Received data.
Also, START signal needs to be issued in order to use this function. See I2Cx_Start.
Example unsigned char take;
...
// Read data and send the not_acknowledge signal
take = I2C1_Read(1);
MikroElektronika
392
I2Cx_Write
Prototype unsigned I2Cx_Write(unsigned char data_);
Description Sends data byte via the I²C bus.
Parameters - data_: data to be sent
Returns - 0 if there were no errors.
- 1 if write collision was detected on the I²C bus.
Also, START signal needs to be issued in order to use this function. See I2Cx_Start.
Example unsigned char data_;
unsigned error;
...
error = I2C1_Write(data_);
error = I2C1_Write(0xA3);
I2Cx_Stop
Prototype void I2Cx_Stop();
Description Issues STOP signal.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Example // Issue STOP signal
I2C1_Stop();
MikroElektronika
393
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Library Example
This code demonstrates working with the I²C library. Program sends data to EEPROM (data is written at the address
2). After that, program reads data from the same EEPROM address and displays it on PORTB for visual check. See the
figure below how to interface the 24C02 to dsPIC30/33 and PIC24.
void main(){
ADPCFG = 0xFFFF; // initialize AN pins as digital
LATB = 0;
TRISB = 0; // Configure PORTB as output
I2C1_Init(100000); // initialize I2C communication

I2C1_Start(); // issue I2C start signal
I2C1_Write(0xA2); // send byte via I2C (device address + W)
I2C1_Write(2); // send byte (address of EEPROM location)
I2C1_Write(0xF0); // send data (data to be written)
I2C1_Stop(); // issue I2C stop signal
Delay_100ms();
I2C1_Start(); // issue I2C start signal

I2C1_Write(0xA2); // send byte via I2C (device address + W)
I2C1_Write(2); // send byte (data address)
I2C1_Restart(); // issue I2C signal repeated start
I2C1_Write(0xA3); // send byte (device address + R)
LATB = I2C1_Read(0u); // Read the data (NO acknowledge)
I2C1_Stop(); // issue I2C stop signal
}
HW Connection
Interfacing 24c02 to dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 via I²C
MikroElektronika
394
Keypad Library
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a library for working with 4x4 keypad. The library routines can
also be used with 4x1, 4x2, or 4x3 keypad. For connections explanation see schematic at the bottom of this page.
External dependencies of Keypad Library
The following variable must be

defined in all projects using Keypad Description : Example :
Library:
extern sfr unsigned int
Keypad Port. unsigned keypadPort at PORTB;
keypadPort;
Library Routines
- Keypad_Init
- Keypad_Key_Press
- Keypad_Key_Click
Keypad_Init
Prototype void Keypad_Init();
Description Initializes given port for working with keypad.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Global variable :
- keypadPort - Keypad port

Example // Keypad module connections
char unsigned at PORTB;
// End of keypad module connections
...
Keypad_Init();
Notes The Keypad library uses lower byte (bits <7..0>) of keypadPort.
MikroElektronika
395
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Keypad_Key_Press
Prototype unsigned Keypad_Key_Press();
Description Reads the key from keypad when key gets pressed.
Parameters None.
Returns The code of a pressed key (1..16).
If no key is pressed, returns 0.

Requires Port needs to be initialized for working with the Keypad library, see Keypad_Init.
Example unsigned kp;
...
kp = Keypad_Key_Press();
Notes None
Keypad_Key_Click
Prototype unsigned Keypad_Key_Click();
Description Call to Keypad_Key_Click is a blocking call: the function waits until some key is pressed and
released. When released, the function returns 1 to 16, depending on the key. If more than one key is
pressed simultaneously the function will wait until all pressed keys are released. After that the function
will return the code of the first pressed key.
Parameters None.
Returns The code of a clicked key (1..16).
If no key is clicked, returns 0.

Requires Port needs to be initialized for working with the Keypad library, see Keypad_Init.
Example kp = Keypad_Key_Click();
Notes None
MikroElektronika
396
Library Example
The following code can be used for testing the keypad. It is written for keypad_4x3 or _4x4. The code returned by the
keypad functions (1..16) is transformed into ASCII codes [0..9,A..F], and then sent via UART1.
unsigned short kp, oldstate = 0;

char txt[6];
// Keypad module connections

unsigned keypadPort at PORTB;
unsigned keypadPort_Direction at TRISB;
// End Keypad module connections
void main() {
ADPCFG = 0xFFFF;
UART1_Init(9600);
Delay_ms(100);
Keypad_Init(); // Initialize Keypad
do {
kp = 0; // Reset key code variable
// Wait for key to be pressed and released

do
// kp = Keypad_Key_Press(); // Store key code in kp variable
kp = Keypad_Key_Click(); // Store key code in kp variable
while (!kp);
// Prepare value for output, transform key to it’s ASCII value
switch (kp) {
//case 10: kp = 42; break; // ‘*’ // Uncomment this block for keypad4x3
//case 11: kp = 48; break; // ‘0’
//case 12: kp = 35; break; // ‘#’
//default: kp += 48;
case 1: kp = 49; break; // 1 // Uncomment this block for keypad4x4

case 2: kp = 50; break; // 2
case 3: kp = 51; break; // 3
case 4: kp = 65; break; // A
case 5: kp = 52; break; // 4
case 6: kp = 53; break; // 5
case 7: kp = 54; break; // 6
case 8: kp = 66; break; // B
case 9: kp = 55; break; // 7
case 10: kp = 56; break; // 8
case 11: kp = 57; break; // 9
case 12: kp = 67; break; // C
case 13: kp = 42; break; // *
case 14: kp = 48; break; // 0
case 15: kp = 35; break; // #
case 16: kp = 68; break; // D
}
UART1_Write(kp); // Send value of pressed button to UART
} while (1);
}
MikroElektronika
397
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
HW Connection
4x4 Keypad connection scheme
MikroElektronika
398
Lcd Library
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a library for communication with Lcds (with HD44780 compliant
controllers) through the 4-bit interface. An example of Lcd connections is given on the schematic at the bottom of this
page.
For creating a set of custom Lcd characters use Lcd Custom Character Tool.
Keypad_Key_Click
defined in all projects using Lcd Description : Example :
Library :
extern sfr sbit LCD_RS: Register Select line. sbit LCD_RS at LATD0_bit;
extern sfr sbit LCD_EN: Enable line. sbit LCD_EN at LATD1_bit;
extern sfr sbit LCD_D4; Data 4 line. sbit LCD_D4 at LATB0_bit;
extern sfr sbit LCD_D7; Data 7 line. sbit LCD_D7 at LATB3_bit
extern sfr sbit LCD_RS_ sbit LCD_RS_Direction at TRISD0_
Register Select direction pin.
Direction; bit;
extern sfr sbit LCD_EN_ sbit LCD_EN_Direction at TRISD1_
Enable direction pin.
Direction; bit;
extern sfr sbit LCD_D4_ sbit LCD_D4_Direction at TRISB0_
Data 4 direction pin.
Direction; bit;
Direction; bit;
Direction; bit;
Direction; bit;
Library Routines
- Lcd_Init
- Lcd_Out
- Lcd_Out_Cp
- Lcd_Chr
- Lcd_Chr_Cp
- Lcd_Cmd
MikroElektronika
399
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Lcd_Init
Prototype void Lcd_Init();
Description Initializes Lcd module.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Global variables:
- LCD_RS: Register Select (data/instruction) signal pin

- LCD_EN: Enable signal pin
- LCD_D4: Data bit 4
- LCD_RS_Direction: Direction of the Register Select pin

- LCD_EN_Direction: Direction of the Enable signal pin
- LCD_D4_Direction: Direction of the Data 4 pin

Example // Lcd module connections

// End Lcd module connections
...
Lcd_Init();
Notes None
MikroElektronika
400
Lcd_Out
Prototype void Lcd_Out(unsigned int row, unsigned int column, char *text);
Description Prints text on Lcd starting from specified position. Both string variables and literals can be passed as
a text.
Parameters - row: starting position row number
- column: starting position column number
- text: text to be written
Returns Nothing.
Requires The Lcd module needs to be initialized. See Lcd_Init routine.
Example // Write text “Hello!” on Lcd starting from row 1, column 3:
Lcd_Out(1, 3, “Hello!”);
Notes None
Lcd_Out_Cp
Prototype void Lcd_Out_Cp(char *text);
Returns Nothing.
Description Prints text on Lcd at current cursor position. Both string variables and literals can be passed as a
text.
Example // Write text “Here!” at current cursor position:
Lcd_Out_Cp(“Here!”);
Notes None
Lcd_Chr
Prototype void Lcd_Chr(unsigned int row, unsigned int column, char out_char);
Description Prints character on Lcd at specified position. Both variables and literals can be passed as a
character.
Parameters - row: writing position row number
- column: writing position column number
- out_char: character to be written
Returns Nothing.
Example // Write character “i” at row 2, column 3:
Lcd_Chr(2, 3, ‘i’);
Notes None
MikroElektronika
401
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Lcd_Chr_Cp
Prototype void Lcd_Chr_Cp(char out_char);
Description Prints character on Lcd at current cursor position. Both variables and literals can be passed as a
character.
Parameters - out_char: character to be written
Returns Nothing.
Example // Write character “e” at current cursor position:
Lcd_Chr_Cp(‘e’);
Notes None
Lcd_Cmd
Prototype void Lcd_Cmd(char out_char);
Description Sends command to Lcd.
Parameters - out_char: command to be sent
Returns Nothing.
Requires The Lcd module needs to be initialized. See Lcd_Init table.
Example // Clear Lcd display:
Lcd_Cmd(_LCD_CLEAR);
Notes Predefined constants can be passed to the function, see Available Lcd Commands.
Available Lcd Commands

Lcd Command Purpose
_LCD_FIRST_ROW Move cursor to the 1st row
_LCD_SECOND_ROW Move cursor to the 2nd row
_LCD_THIRD_ROW Move cursor to the 3rd row
_LCD_FOURTH_ROW Move cursor to the 4th row
_LCD_CLEAR Clear display
Return cursor to home position, returns a shifted display
_LCD_RETURN_HOME
to its original position. Display data RAM is unaffected.
_LCD_CURSOR_OFF Turn off cursor
_LCD_UNDERLINE_ON Underline cursor on
_LCD_BLINK_CURSOR_ON Blink cursor on
_LCD_MOVE_CURSOR_LEFT Move cursor left without changing display data RAM
_LCD_MOVE_CURSOR_RIGHT Move cursor right without changing display data RAM
_LCD_TURN_ON Turn Lcd display on
_LCD_TURN_OFF Turn Lcd display off
_LCD_SHIFT_LEFT Shift display left without changing display data RAM
_LCD_SHIFT_RIGHT Shift display right without changing display data RAM
MikroElektronika
402
Library Example
The following code demonstrates usage of the Lcd Library routines:
// LCD module connections


// End LCD module connections
char txt1[] = "mikroElektronika";

char txt2[] = "EasydsPIC4A";
char txt3[] = "Lcd4bit";
char txt4[] = "example";
char i; // Loop variable
void Move_Delay() { // Function used for text moving

Delay_ms(500); // You can change the moving speed here
}
void main(){
ADPCFG = 0xFFFF; // Configure AN pins as digital I/O
Lcd_Init(); // Initialize LCD
Lcd_Cmd(_LCD_CLEAR); // Clear display

Lcd_Cmd(_LCD_CURSOR_OFF); // Cursor off
Lcd_Out(1,6,txt3); // Write text in first row
Lcd_Out(2,6,txt4); // Write text in second row

Delay_ms(2000);
Lcd_Cmd(_LCD_CLEAR); // Clear display
Lcd_Out(1,1,txt1); // Write text in first row

Lcd_Out(2,5,txt2); // Write text in second row
Delay_ms(2000);
MikroElektronika
403
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
// Moving text
for(i=0; i<4; i++) { // Move text to the right 4 times
Lcd_Cmd(_LCD_SHIFT_RIGHT);
Move_Delay();
}

for(i=0; i<8; i++) { // Move text to the left 7 times
Lcd_Cmd(_LCD_SHIFT_LEFT);
Move_Delay();
}

Lcd_Cmd(_LCD_SHIFT_RIGHT);
Move_Delay();
}
}
}
Lcd HW connection
MikroElektronika
404
Manchester Code Library

The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a library for handling Manchester coded signals. The Manchester
code is a code in which data and clock signals are combined to form a single self-synchronizing data stream; each
encoded bit contains a transition at the midpoint of a bit period, the direction of transition determines whether the bit
is 0 or 1; the second half is the true bit value and the first half is the complement of the true bit value (as shown in the
figure below).
Important :
- The Manchester receive routines are blocking calls (Man_Receive_Init and Man_Synchro). This means that
MCU will wait until the task has been performed (e.g. byte is received, synchronization achieved, etc).
- Manchester code library implements time-based activities, so interrupts need to be disabled when using it.
Keypad_Key_Click
Manchester Code Library:
extern sfr sbit MANRXPIN; Receive line. sbit MANRXPIN at RF0_bit;
extern sfr sbit MANTXPIN; Transmit line. sbit MANTXPIN at LATF1_bit;
extern sfr sbit MANRXPIN_ sbit MANRXPIN_Direction at
Direction of the Receive pin.
extern sfr sbit MANTXPIN_ sbit MANTXPIN_Direction at
Direction of the Transmit pin.
MikroElektronika
405
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Library Routines
- Man_Receive_Init
- Man_Receive
- Man_Send_Init
- Man_Send
- Man_Synchro
- Man_Break
The following routines are for the internal use by compiler only:
- Manchester_0
- Manchester_1
- Manchester_Out
Man_Receive_Init
Prototype unsigned int Man_Receive_Init();
Description The function configures Receiver pin. After that, the function performs synchronization procedure in
order to retrieve baud rate out of the incoming signal.
Parameters None.
Returns - 0 - if initialization and synchronization were successful.
- 1 - upon unsuccessful synchronization.
- 255 - upon user abort.
- MANRXPIN : Receive line

- MANRXPIN_Direction : Direction of the receive pin

Example ‘ Initialize Receiver
sbit MANRXPIN at RF0_bit;
sbit MANRXPIN_Direction at TRISF0s_bit;
...
if (Man_Receive_Init() == 0) {
...
}
Notes In case of multiple persistent errors on reception, the user should call this routine once again or
Man_Synchro routine to enable synchronization.
MikroElektronika
406
Man_Receive
Prototype unsigned char Man_Receive(unsigned int *error);
Description The function extracts one byte from incoming signal.
Parameters - error: error flag. If signal format does not match the expected, the error flag will be set
to non-zero.
Returns A byte read from the incoming signal.
Requires To use this function, the user must prepare the MCU for receiving. See Man_Receive_Init routines.
Example unsigned int data = 0, error = 0;
...
data = Man_Receive(&error);
if (error)
{ /* error handling */ }
Notes None.
Man_Send_Init
Prototype void Man_Send_Init();
Description The function configures Transmitter pin.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
- MANTXPIN : Transmit line

- MANTXPIN_Direction : Direction of the transmit pin

Example // Initialize Transmitter:
sbit MANTXPIN at LATF1_bit;
sbit MANTXPIN_Direction at TRISF1_bit;
...
Man_Send_Init();
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
407
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Man_Send
Prototype void Man_Send(unsigned char tr_data);
Description Sends one byte.
Parameters - tr_data: data to be sent
Returns Nothing.
Requires To use this function, the user must prepare the MCU for sending. See Man_Send_Init routine.
Example unsigned int msg;
...
Man_Send(msg);
Notes Baud rate used is 500 bps.
Man_Synchro
Prototype unsigned int Man_Synchro();
Description Measures half of the manchester bit length with 10us resolution.
Parameters None.
Returns 0 - if synchronization was not successful.
Half of the manchester bit length, given in multiples of 10us - upon successful synchronization.
Requires To use this function, you must first prepare the MCU for receiving. See Man_Receive_Init.
Example unsigned int man__half_bit_len;
...
man__half_bit_len = Man_Synchro();
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
408
Man_Break
Prototype void Man_Break();
Description Man_Receive is blocking routine and it can block the program flow. Call this routine from interrupt to
unblock the program execution. This mechanism is similar to WDT.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example char data1, error, counter = 0;
void Timer1Int() org IVT_ADDR_T1INTERRUPT {
if (counter >= 20) {

Man_Break();
counter = 0; // reset counter
}
else
counter++; // increment counter
T1IF_bit = 0; // Clear Timer1 overflow interrupt flag

}
void main() {
...
if (Man_Receive_Init() == 0) {
...
}
...
// try Man_Receive with blocking prevention mechanism

IPC0 = IPC0 | 0x1000; // Interrupt priority level = 1
T1IE_bit= 1; // Enable Timer1 interrupts
T1CON = 0x8030; // Timer1 ON, internal clock FCY, prescaler
1:256
data1 = Man_Receive(&error);
T1IE_bit= 0; // Disable Timer1 interrupts
}
Notes Interrupts should be disabled before using Manchester routines again (see note at the top of this
page).
MikroElektronika
409
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Library Example
The following code is code for the Manchester receiver, it shows how to use the Manchester Library for receiving data:


// Manchester module connections

sbit MANRXPIN_Direction at TRISF0_bit;
// End Manchester module connections
char error, ErrorCount, temp;
void main() {
ErrorCount = 0;
TRISB = 0;
LATB = 0;

Lcd_Cmd(_LCD_CLEAR); // Clear LCD display
Man_Receive_Init(); // Initialize Receiver
Lcd_Cmd(_LCD_FIRST_ROW); // Move cursor to the 1st row
while (1) { // Wait for the “start” byte

temp = Man_Receive(&error); // Attempt byte receive
if (temp == 0x0B) // “Start” byte, see Transmitter example
break; // We got the starting sequence
if (error) // Exit so we do not loop forever
break;
}
MikroElektronika
410
do
{
temp = Man_Receive(&error); // Attempt byte receive
if (error) { // If error occured
Lcd_Chr_CP('?'); // Write question mark on LCD
ErrorCount++; // Update error counter
if (ErrorCount > 20) { // In case of multiple errors
temp = Man_Synchro(); // Try to synchronize again
//Man_Receive_Init(); // Alternative, try to Initialize Receiver again
ErrorCount = 0; // Reset error counter
}
}
else { // No error occured
if (temp != 0x0E) // If "End" byte was received(see Transmitter example)
Lcd_Chr_CP(temp); // do not write received byte on LCD
}
Delay_ms(25);
}
while (temp != 0x0E); // If "End" byte was received exit do loop
}
}
The following code is code for the Manchester receiver, it shows how to use the Manchester Library for receiving
data:
// Manchester module connections

sbit MANRXPIN_Direction at TRISF0_bit;
// End Manchester module connections
char index, character;

char s1[] = "mikroElektronika";
void main() {

TRISB = 0;
LATB = 0;
Man_Send_Init(); // Initialize transmitter

Man_Send(0x0B); // Send "start" byte
Delay_ms(100); // Wait for a while
character = s1[0]; // Take first char from string

index = 0; // Initialize index variable
MikroElektronika
411
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
while (character) { // String ends with zero

Man_Send(character); // Send character
Delay_ms(90); // Wait for a while
index++; // Increment index variable
character = s1[index]; // Take next char from string
}
Man_Send(0x0E); // Send "end" byte
Delay_ms(1000);
}
}
Connection Example
Simple Transmitter connection
Simple Receiver connection
MikroElektronika
412
Multi Media Card Library

The Multi Media Card (MMC) is a Flash memory card standard. MMC cards are currently available in sizes up to and
including 32 GB and are used in cellular phones, digital audio players, digital cameras and PDA’s.
mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a library for accessing data on Multi Media Card via SPI communication.
This library also supports SD (Secure Digital) and high capacity SDHC (Secure Digital High Capacity) memory cards .
Secure Digital Card

Secure Digital (SD) is a Flash memory card standard, based on the older Multi Media Card (MMC) format.
SD cards are currently available in sizes of up to and including 2 GB, and are used in digital cameras, digital camcorders,
handheld computers, media players, mobile phones, GPS receivers, video games and PDAs.
Secure Digital High Capacity Card

SDHC (Secure Digital High Capacity, SD 2.0) is an extension of the SD standard which increases card's storage
capacity up to 32 GB by using sector addressing instead of byte addressing in the previous SD standard.
SDHC cards share the same physical and electrical form factor as older (SD 1.x) cards, allowing SDHC-devices to
support both newer SDHC cards and older SD-cards. The current standard limits the maximum capacity of an SDHC
card to 32 GB.
Important :
- Routines for file handling can be used only with FAT16 file system.
- Library functions create and read files from the root directory only.
- Library functions populate both FAT1 and FAT2 tables when writing to files, but the file data is being read from the
FAT1 table only; i.e. there is no recovery if the FAT1 table gets corrupted.
- If MMC/SD card has Master Boot Record (MBR), the library will work with the first available primary (logical) partition
that has non-zero size. If MMC/SD card has Volume Boot Record (i.e. there is only one logical partition and no
MBRs), the library works with entire card as a single partition. For more information on MBR, physical and logical
drives, primary/secondary partitions and partition tables, please consult other resources, e.g. Wikipedia and similar.
- Before write operation, make sure you don’t overwrite boot or FAT sector as it could make your card on PC or digital
camera unreadable. Drive mapping tools, such as Winhex, can be of a great assistance.
- Library uses SPI module for communication. The user must initialize the appropriate SPI module before using the
MMC Library.
- For MCUs with multiple SPI modules it is possible to initialize all of them and then switch by using the
SPI_Set_Active() function. See the SPI Library functions.
The SPI module has to be initialized through SPIx_Init_Advanced routine with the following parameters:
- SPI Master
- 8bit mode
- secondary prescaler 1
- primary prescaler 64
- Slave Select disabled
- data sampled in the middle of data output time
- clock idle high
- Serial output data changes on transition from active clock state to idle clock state
Tip : Once the MMC/SD card is initialized, SPI module can be reinitialized at higher a speed. See the Mmc_Init and
Mmc_Fat_Init routines.
MikroElektronika
413
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
External dependencies of MMC Library

defined in all projects using MMC Description : Example :
library:
extern sfr sbit Mmc_Chip_ sbit Mmc_Chip_Select at LATF0_
Chip select pin.
Select; bit;
extern sfr sbit Mmc_Chip_ Direction of the chip select sbit Mmc_Chip_Select_Direction
Select_Direction; pin. at TRISF0_bit;
Library Routines
- Mmc_Init
- Mmc_Read_Sector
- Mmc_Write_Sector
- Mmc_Read_Cid
- Mmc_Read_Csd
Routines for file handling:
- Mmc_Fat_Init
- Mmc_Fat_QuickFormat
- Mmc_Fat_Assign
- Mmc_Fat_Reset
- Mmc_Fat_Read
- Mmc_Fat_Rewrite
- Mmc_Fat_Append
- Mmc_Fat_Delete
- Mmc_Fat_Write
- Mmc_Fat_Set_File_Date
- Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Date
- Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Date_Modified
- Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Size
- Mmc_Fat_Get_Swap_File
MikroElektronika
414
Mmc_Init
Prototype unsigned int Mmc_Init();
Description Initializes MMC through hardware SPI interface.
Mmc_Init needs to be called before using other functions of this library.

Parameters None.
Returns - 0 - if MMC/SD card was detected and successfully initialized
- 1 - otherwise
Requires The appropriate hardware SPI module must be previously initialized.
Global variables :
- Mmc_Chip_Select: Chip Select line

- Mmc_Chip_Select_Direction: Direction of the Chip Select pin

Example // MMC module connections
sbit Mmc_Chip_Select at LATF0_bit;
sbit Mmc_Chip_Select_Direction at TRISF0_bit;
// MMC module connections
...
// Initialize the SPI module
SPI1_Init_Advanced(_SPI_MASTER, _SPI_8_BIT, _SPI_PRESCALE_SEC_1, _SPI_
PRESCALE_PRI_64,_SPI_SS_DISABLE,
_SPI_DATA_SAMPLE_MIDDLE, _SPI_CLK_IDLE_HIGH, _SPI_ACTIVE_2_
IDLE);
// Loop until MMC is initialized
while (Mmc_Init())
;
// Reinitialize the SPI module at higher speed (change primary prescaler).
IDLE);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
415
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Mmc_Read_Sector
Prototype unsigned int Mmc_Read_Sector(unsigned long sector, char *dbuff);
Description The function reads one sector (512 bytes) from MMC card.
Parameters - sector: MMC/SD card sector to be read.
- dbuff: buffer of minimum 512 bytes in length for data storage.
Returns - 0 - if reading was successful
- 1 - if an error occurred
Requires MMC/SD card must be initialized. See Mmc_Init.
Example // read sector 510 of the MMC/SD card
unsigned int error;
unsigned long sectorNo = 510;
char dataBuffer[512];
...
error = Mmc_Read_Sector(sectorNo, dataBuffer);
Notes None.
Mmc_Write_Sector
Prototype unsigned int Mmc_Write_Sector(unsigned long sector, char *dbuff);
Description The function writes 512 bytes of data to one MMC card sector.
Parameters - sector: MMC/SD card sector to be written to.
- dbuff: data to be written (buffer of minimum 512 bytes in length).
Returns - 0 - if writing was successful
- 1 - if there was an error in sending write command
- 2 - if there was an error in writing (data rejected)
Example // write to sector 510 of the MMC/SD card
unsigned int error;
unsigned long sectorNo = 510;
...
error = Mmc_Write_Sector(sectorNo, dataBuffer);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
416
Mmc_Read_Cid
Prototype unsigned int Mmc_Read_Cid(char *data_cid);
Description The function reads 16-byte CID register.
Parameters - data_cid: buffer of minimum 16 bytes in length for storing CID register content.
Returns - 0 - if CID register was read successfully
- 1 - if there was an error while reading
Example unsigned int error;
...
error = Mmc_Read_Cid(dataBuffer);
Notes None.
Mmc_Read_Csd
Prototype unsigned int Mmc_Read_Csd(char *data_csd);
Description The function reads 16-byte CSD register.
Parameters - data_csd: buffer of minimum 16 bytes in length for storing CSD register content.
Returns - 0 - if CSD register was read successfully
- 1 - if there was an error while reading
Example unsigned int error;
...
error = Mmc_Read_Csd(dataBuffer);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
417
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Mmc_Fat_Init
Prototype unsigned int Mmc_Fat_Init();
Description Initializes MMC/SD card, reads MMC/SD FAT16 boot sector and extracts necessary data needed by
the library.
Parameters None.
Returns - 0 - if MMC/SD card was detected and successfully initialized
- 1 - if FAT16 boot sector was not found
- 255 - if MMC/SD card was not detected
- Mmc_Chip_Select: Chip Select line

- Mmc_Chip_Select_Direction: Direction of the Chip Select pin
The appropriate hardware SPI module must be previously initialized. See the SPIx_Init, SPIx_Init_
Advanced routines.
Example // MMC module connections
sbit Mmc_Chip_Select at LATF0_bit;
#include <spi_const.h>
...
// Initialize the SPI module
IDLE);
// Initialize MMC/SD card and MMC_FAT16 library globals
Mmc_Fat_Init();
IDLE);
Notes MMC/SD card has to be formatted to FAT16 file system.
MikroElektronika
418
Mmc_Fat_QuickFormat
Prototype unsigned int Mmc_Fat_QuickFormat(char *mmc_fat_label);
Description Formats to FAT16 and initializes MMC/SD card.
Parameters - mmc_fat_label: volume label (11 characters in length). If less than 11 characters are provided, the
label will be padded with spaces. If null string is passed volume will not be labeled
Returns - 0 - if MMC/SD card was detected, successfully formated and initialized
- 1 - if FAT16 format was unseccessful
- 255 - if MMC/SD card was not detected
Requires The appropriate hardware SPI module must be previously initialized.
Example // Initialize the SPI module
PRESCALE_PRI_64, _SPI_SS_DISABLE, _SPI_DATA_SAMPLE_MIDDLE, _SPI_CLK_IDLE_
HIGH, _SPI_ACTIVE_2_IDLE);
// Format and initialize MMC/SD card and MMC_FAT16 library globals
Mmc_Fat_QuickFormat(“mikroE”);
PRESCALE_PRI_4,_SPI_SS_DISABLE, _SPI_DATA_SAMPLE_MIDDLE, _SPI_CLK_IDLE_
Notes This routine can be used instead or in conjunction with Mmc_Fat_Init routine.
If MMC/SD card already contains a valid boot sector, it will remain unchanged (except volume label
field) and only FAT and ROOT tables will be erased. Also, the new volume label will be set.
MikroElektronika
419
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Mmc_Fat_Assign
Prototype unsigned int Mmc_Fat_Assign(char *filename, char file_cre_attr);
Description Assigns file for file operations (read, write, delete...). All subsequent file operations will be applied on
an assigned file.
Parameters - filename: name of the file that should be assigned for file operations. File name should be in DOS 8.3
(file_name.extension) format. The file name and extension will be automatically padded with spaces
by the library if they have less than length required (i.e. “mikro.tx” -> “mikro .tx “), so the user does no
have to take care of that. The file name and extension are case insensitive. The library will convert
them to proper case automatically, so the user does not have to take care of that.
entered as UPPERCASE string of 11 bytes in length with no dot character between file name and
extension (i.e. “MIKROELETXT” -> MIKROELE.TXT). In this case last 3 characters of the string are
considered to be file extension.
- file_cre_attr: file creation and attributes flags. Each bit corresponds to the appropriate file
attribute:

0 0x01 Read Only
1 0x02 Hidden
2 0x04 System
3 0x08 Volume Label
4 0x10 Subdirectory
5 0x20 Archive
File creation flag. If file does not exist and this flag is
7 0x80
set, a new file with specified name will be created.
Returns - 1 - if file already exists or file does not exist but a new file is created.
- 0 - if file does not exist and no new file is created.
Requires MMC/SD card and MMC library must be initialized for file operations. See Mmc_Fat_Init.
Example // create file with archive attribute if it does not already exist
Mmc_Fat_Assign(“MIKRO007.TXT”,0xA0);
MikroElektronika
420
Mmc_Fat_Reset
Prototype void Mmc_Fat_Reset(unsigned long *size);
Description Procedure resets the file pointer (moves it to the start of the file) of the assigned file, so that the file
can be read.
Parameters - size: buffer to store file size to. After file has been opened for reading, its size is returned through
this parameter.
Returns Nothing.
The file must be previously assigned. See Mmc_Fat_Assign.

Example unsigned long size;
...
Mmc_Fat_Reset(size);
Notes None.
Mmc_Fat_Read
Prototype void Mmc_Fat_Read(unsigned short *bdata);
Description Reads a byte from the currently assigned file opened for reading. Upon function execution file pointers
will be set to the next character in the file.
Parameters - bdata: buffer to store read byte to. Upon this function execution read byte is returned through this
parameter.
Returns Nothing.
The file must be opened for reading. See Mmc_Fat_Reset.

Example char character;
...
Mmc_Fat_Read(&character);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
421
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Mmc_Fat_Rewrite
Prototype void Mmc_Fat_Rewrite();
Description Opens the currently assigned file for writing. If the file is not empty its content will be erased.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.

Example // open file for writing
Mmc_Fat_Rewrite();
Notes None.
Mmc_Fat_Append
Prototype void Mmc_Fat_Append();
Description Opens the currently assigned file for appending. Upon this function execution file pointers will be
positioned after the last byte in the file, so any subsequent file write operation will start from there.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.

Example // open file for appending
Mmc_Fat_Append();
Notes None.
Mmc_Fat_Delete
Prototype void Mmc_Fat_Delete();
Description Deletes currently assigned file from MMC/SD card.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.

Example // delete current file
Mmc_Fat_Delete();
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
422
Mmc_Fat_Write
Prototype void Mmc_Fat_Write(char *fdata, unsigned data_len);
Description Writes requested number of bytes to the currently assigned file opened for writing.
Parameters - fdata: data to be written.
- data_len: number of bytes to be written.
Returns Nothing.
The file must be opened for writing. See Mmc_Fat_Rewrite or Mmc_Fat_Append.

Example char file_contents[42];
...
Mmc_Fat_Write(file_contents, 42); // write data to the assigned file
Notes None.
Mmc_Fat_Set_File_Date
Prototype void Mmc_Fat_Set_File_Date(unsigned int year, unsigned short day,unsigned
short hours, unsigned short mins, unsigned short seconds);
Description Sets the date/time stamp. Any subsequent file write operation will write this stamp to the currently
assigned file’s time/date attributes.
Parameters - year: year attribute. Valid values: 1980-2107
- month: month attribute. Valid values: 1-12
- day: day attribute. Valid values: 1-31
- hours: hours attribute. Valid values: 0-23
- mins: minutes attribute. Valid values: 0-59
- seconds: seconds attribute. Valid values: 0-59
Returns Nothing.
The file must be opened for writing. See Mmc_Fat_Rewrite or Mmc_Fat_Append.

Example // April 1st 2005, 18:07:00
Mmc_Fat_Set_File_Date(2005, 4, 1, 18, 7, 0);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
423
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Date
Prototype void Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Date(unsigned int *year, unsigned short *month,
unsigned short *day, unsigned short *hours, unsigned short *mins);
Description Reads time/date attributes of the currently assigned file.
parameter.
this parameter.
parameter.
this parameter.
Returns Nothing.

Example // get Date/time of file
unsigned yr;
char mnth, dat, hrs, mins;
...
file_Name = “MYFILEABTXT”;
Mmc_Fat_Assign(file_Name);
Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Date(&yr, &mnth, &day, &hrs, &mins);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
424
Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Date_Modified
Prototype void Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Date_Modified(unsigned int *year, unsigned short
*month, unsigned short *day, unsigned short *hours, unsigned short *mins);
Description Retrieves the last modification date/time for the currently selected file. Seconds are not being retrieved
since they are written in 2-sec increments.
parameter.
this parameter.
parameter.
this parameter.
Returns Nothing.
Requires The file must be assigned, see Mmc_Fat_Assign.
Example // get modification Date/time of file
unsigned yr;
char mnth, dat, hrs, mins;
...
file_Name = “MYFILEABTXT”;
Mmc_Fat_Assign(file_Name);
Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Date_Modified(&yr, &mnth, &day, &hrs, &mins);
Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Size
Prototype unsigned long Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Size();
Description This function reads size of the currently assigned file in bytes.
Parameters None.
Returns This function returns size of active file (in bytes).

Example unsigned long my_file_size;
...
my_file_size = Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Size();
Notes None
MikroElektronika
425
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Mmc_Fat_Get_Swap_File
Prototype unsigned long Mmc_Fat_Get_Swap_File(unsigned long sectors_cnt, char*
filename, char file_attr);
Description This function is used to create a swap file of predefined name and size on the MMC/SD media. If a
file with specified name already exists on the media, search for consecutive sectors will ignore sectors
occupied by this file. Therefore, it is recommended to erase such file if it already exists before calling
this function. If it is not erased and there is still enough space for a new swap file, this function will
delete it after allocating new memory space for a new swap file.
The purpose of the swap file is to make reading and writing to MMC/SD media as fast as possible,
by using the Mmc_Read_Sector() and Mmc_Write_Sector() functions directly, without potentially
damaging the FAT system. The swap file can be considered as a “window” on the media where the
user can freely write/read data. It’s main purpose in this library is to be used for fast data acquisition;
when the time-critical acquisition has finished, the data can be re-written into a “normal” file, and
formatted in the most suitable way.
Parameters - sectors_cnt: number of consecutive sectors that user wants the swap file to have.
- filename: name of the file that should be assigned for file operations. File name should be in DOS 8.3
(file_name.extension) format. The file name and extension will be automatically padded with spaces
by the library if they have less than length required (i.e. “mikro.tx” -> “mikro .tx “), so the user does no
have to take care of that. The file name and extension are case insensitive. The library will convert
them to proper case automatically, so the user does not have to take care of that.
entered as UPPERCASE string of 11 bytes in length with no dot character between file name and
extension (i.e. “MIKROELETXT” -> MIKROELE.TXT). In this case last 3 characters of the string are
considered to be file extension.
- file_attr: file creation and attributes flags. Each bit corresponds to the appropriate file attribute:

0 0x01 Read Only
1 0x02 Hidden
2 0x04 System
3 0x08 Volume Label
4 0x10 Subdirectory
5 0x20 Archive
7 0x80 Not used
Returns Number of the start sector for the newly created swap file, if there was enough free space on the MMC/
SD card to create file of required size.
0 - otherwise.
MikroElektronika
426
Example //-------------- Tries to create a swap file, whose size will be at least
100 sectors.
//If it succeeds, it sends the No. of start sector over UART
void M_Create_Swap_File(){
size = Mmc_Fat_Get_Swap_File(100);
if (size <> 0) {
UART1_Write(0xAA);
UART1_Write(Lo(size));
UART1_Write(Hi(size));
UART1_Write(Higher(size));
UART1_Write(Highest(size));
UART1_Write(0xAA);
}
}
Library Example
The following example demonstrates usage of the MMC and MMC_FAT routines.

sbit Mmc_Chip_Select at LATF0_bit; // for writing to output pin always use latch
// eof MMC module connections
const LINE_LEN = 43;

char err_txt[20] = “FAT16 not found”;
char file_contents[LINE_LEN] = “XX MMC/SD FAT16 library by Anton Rieckertn”;
char filename[14] = “MIKRO00x.TXT”; // File names
unsigned short loop, loop2;
unsigned long i, size;
char Buffer[512];
// UART1 write text and new line (carriage return + line feed)
void UART1_Write_Line(char *uart_text) {
UART1_Write_Text(uart_text);
UART1_Write(13);
UART1_Write(10); for(loop = 1; loop <= 99; loop++) {
UART1_Write(‘.’);
file_contents[0] = loop / 10 + 48;
file_contents[1] = loop % 10 + 48;
Mmc_Fat_Write(file_contents, LINE_LEN-1); // write data to the assigned file
}
}
MikroElektronika
427
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
// Creates many new files and writes data to them

void M_Create_Multiple_Files() {
for(loop2 = 'B'; loop2 <= 'Z'; loop2++) {
UART1_Write(loop2); // signal the progress
filename[7] = loop2; // set filename
Mmc_Fat_Set_File_Date(2005,6,21,10,35,0); // Set file date & time info
Mmc_Fat_Assign(&filename, 0xA0); // find existing file or create a new one
Mmc_Fat_Rewrite(); // To clear file and start with new data
for(loop = 1; loop <= 44; loop++) {
}
}
}
// Opens an existing file and rewrites it

void M_Open_File_Rewrite() {
filename[7] = 'C';
Mmc_Fat_Assign(&filename, 0);
Mmc_Fat_Rewrite();
for(loop = 1; loop <= 55; loop++) {
}
}
// Opens an existing file and appends data to it

// (and alters the date/time stamp)
void M_Open_File_Append() {
filename[7] = 'B';
Mmc_Fat_Set_File_Date(2009, 1, 23, 17, 22, 0);
Mmc_Fat_Append(); // Prepare file for append
Mmc_Fat_Write(" for mikroElektronika 2005n", 27); // Write data to assigned file
}
// Opens an existing file, reads data from it and puts it to UART

void M_Open_File_Read() {
char character;
filename[7] = ‘B’;
Mmc_Fat_Reset(&size); // To read file, procedure returns size of file
for (i = 1; i <= size; i++) {
Mmc_Fat_Read(&character);
UART1_Write(character); // Write data to UART
}
}
MikroElektronika
428
// Deletes a file. If file doesn't exist, it will first be created

// and then deleted.
void M_Delete_File() {
filename[7] = 'F';
Mmc_Fat_Assign(filename, 0);
Mmc_Fat_Delete();
}
// Tests whether file exists, and if so sends its creation date

// and file size via UART
void M_Test_File_Exist() {
unsigned long fsize;
unsigned int year;
unsigned short month, day, hour, minute;
unsigned char outstr[12];
filename[7] = 'B'; //uncomment this line to search for file that DOES exists
// filename[7] = 'F'; //uncomment this line to search for file that DOES NOT
exist
if (Mmc_Fat_Assign(filename, 0)) {
//--- file has been found - get its create date
Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Date(&year, &month, &day, &hour, &minute);
UART1_Write_Text(" created: ");
WordToStr(year, outstr);
UART1_Write_Text(outstr);
ByteToStr(month, outstr);
WordToStr(day, outstr);
WordToStr(hour, outstr);
WordToStr(minute, outstr);
//--- file has been found - get its modified date

Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Date_Modified(&year, &month, &day, &hour, &minute);
UART1_Write_Text(“ modified: “);
WordToStr(year, outstr);
ByteToStr(month, outstr);
WordToStr(day, outstr);
WordToStr(hour, outstr);
WordToStr(minute, outstr);
//--- get file size

fsize = Mmc_Fat_Get_File_Size();
LongToStr((signed long)fsize, outstr);
UART1_Write_Line(outstr);
}
MikroElektronika
429
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
else {
//--- file was not found - signal it
UART1_Write(0x55);
Delay_ms(1000);
UART1_Write(0x55);
}
}
// Tries to create a swap file, whose size will be at least 100

// sectors (see Help for details)
void M_Create_Swap_File() {
unsigned int i;
for(i=0; i<512; i++)

Buffer[i] = i;
size = Mmc_Fat_Get_Swap_File(5000, "mikroE.txt", 0x20); // see help on this function

for details
if (size) {
LongToStr((signed long)size, err_txt);
UART1_Write_Line(err_txt);
for(i=0; i<5000; i++) {

Mmc_Write_Sector(size++, Buffer);
UART1_Write('.');
}
}
}
//-------------- Main. Uncomment the function(s) to test the desired operation(s)

void main() {
#define COMPLETE_EXAMPLE // comment this line to make simpler/smaller example
PORTD = 0;
TRISD = 0;
PORTF = 0;
TRISF = 0;
//--- set up USART for the file read
SPI1_Init_Advanced(_SPI_MASTER, _SPI_8_BIT, _SPI_PRESCALE_SEC_1, _SPI_PRESCALE_
PRI_64,
_SPI_SS_DISABLE, _SPI_DATA_SAMPLE_MIDDLE, _SPI_CLK_IDLE_HIGH, _SPI_
ACTIVE_2_IDLE);
UART1_Init(19200); // Initialize UART module at 9600 bps

Delay_ms(100); // Wait for UART module to stabilize
MikroElektronika
430
U1MODEbits.ALTIO = 1; // Switch Rx and Tx pins on their alternate locations.

// This is used to free the pins for other module, namely the SPI.
//--- init the FAT library
if (!Mmc_Fat_Init()) {
// reinitialize spi at higher speed
PRI_4,
_SPI_SS_DISABLE, _SPI_DATA_SAMPLE_MIDDLE, _SPI_CLK_IDLE_HIGH,
_SPI_ACTIVE_2_IDLE);
//--- Test start
UART1_Write_Line("Test Start.");
//--- Test routines. Uncomment them one-by-one to test certain features
M_Create_New_File();
M_Create_Multiple_Files();
M_Open_File_Rewrite();
M_Open_File_Append();
M_Open_File_Read();
M_Delete_File();
M_Test_File_Exist();
M_Create_Swap_File();
#endif
UART1_Write_Line("Test End.");
}
else {
UART1_Write_Line(err_txt); // Note: Mmc_Fat_Init tries to initialize a card more
than once.
// If card is not present, initialization may last
longer (depending on clock speed)
}
HW Connection
Pin diagram of MMC memory card
MikroElektronika
431
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
OneWire Library
The OneWire library provides routines for communication via the Dallas OneWire protocol, e.g. with DS18x20 digital
thermometer. OneWire is a Master/Slave protocol, and all communication cabling required is a single wire. OneWire
enabled devices should have open collector drivers (with single pull-up resistor) on the shared data line.
Slave devices on the OneWire bus can even get their power supply from data line. For detailed schematic see device
datasheet.
Some basic characteristics of this protocol are:
- single master system,

- low cost,
- low transfer rates (up to 16 kbps),
- fairly long distances (up to 300 meters),
- small data transfer packages.
Each OneWire device also has a unique 64-bit registration number (8-bit device type, 48-bit serial number and 8-bit
CRC), so multiple slaves can co-exist on the same bus.
Important :
- Oscillator frequency Fosc needs to be at least 4MHz in order to use the routines with Dallas digital thermometers.
- This library implements time-based activities, so interrupts need to be disabled when using OneWire library.
Library Routines
- Ow_Reset
- Ow_Read
- Ow_Write
Ow_Reset
Prototype unsigned int Ow_Reset(unsigned int *port, unsigned int pin);
Description Issues OneWire reset signal for DS18x20.
Parameters - port: OneWire bus port
- pin: OneWire bus pin
Returns - 0 if the device is present
- 1 if the device is not present
Requires Devices compliant with the Dallas OneWire protocol.
Example // Issue Reset signal on One-Wire Bus connected to pin RF6
Ow_Reset(&PORTF,6);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
432
Ow_Read
Prototype unsigned short Ow_Read(unsigned int *port, unsigned int pin);
Description Reads one byte of data via the OneWire bus.
Returns Data read from an external device over the OneWire bus.
Example // Read a byte from the One-Wire Bus connected to pin RF6
unsigned short read_data;
...
read_data = Ow_Read(&PORTF, 6);
Notes None.
Ow_Write
Prototype void Ow_Write(unsigned int *port, unsigned int pin, unsigned short data_);
Description Writes one byte of data via the OneWire bus.
Returns Nothing.
Example // Send a byte to the One-Wire Bus connected to pin RF6
Ow_Write(&PORTF, 6, 0xCC);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
433
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Library Example
This example reads the temperature using DS18x20 connected to pin RF6. After reset, MCU obtains temperature from
the sensor and prints it on the Lcd. Be sure to set Fosc appropriately in your project, to pull-up RF6 line and to turn off
the PORTF leds.

sbit LCD_RS at LATB4_bit;
sbit LCD_EN at LATB6_bit;
sbit LCD_D4 at LATD4_bit;
sbit LCD_RS_Direction at TRISB4_bit;

sbit LCD_EN_Direction at TRISB6_bit;
sbit LCD_D4_Direction at TRISD4_bit;
// Set TEMP_RESOLUTION to the corresponding resolution of used DS18x20 sensor:

// 18S20: 9 (default setting; can be 9,10,11,or 12)
// 18B20: 12
const unsigned short TEMP_RESOLUTION = 9;
char *text = “000.0000”;

unsigned temp;
void Display_Temperature(unsigned int temp2write) {

const unsigned short RES_SHIFT = TEMP_RESOLUTION - 8;
char temp_whole;
unsigned int temp_fraction;
// check if temperature is negative

if (temp2write & 0x8000) {
text[0] = ‘-’;
temp2write = ~temp2write + 1;
}
// extract temp_whole
temp_whole = temp2write >> RES_SHIFT ;
// convert temp_whole to characters

if (temp_whole/100)
text[0] = temp_whole/100 + 48;
else
text[0] = ‘0’;
MikroElektronika
434
text[1] = (temp_whole/10)%10 + 48; // Extract tens digit

text[2] = temp_whole%10 + 48; // Extract ones digit
// extract temp_fraction and convert it to unsigned int

temp_fraction = temp2write << (4-RES_SHIFT);
temp_fraction &= 0x000F;
temp_fraction *= 625;
// convert temp_fraction to characters

text[4] = temp_fraction/1000 + 48; // Extract thousands digit
text[5] = (temp_fraction/100)%10 + 48; // Extract hundreds digit
text[6] = (temp_fraction/10)%10 + 48; // Extract tens digit
text[7] = temp_fraction%10 + 48; // Extract ones digit
// print temperature on LCD

Lcd_Out(2, 5, text);
}
void main() {

Lcd_Cmd(_LCD_CLEAR); // Clear LCD
Lcd_Cmd(_LCD_CURSOR_OFF); // Turn cursor off
Lcd_Out(1, 1, " Temperature: ");
// Print degree character, 'C' for Centigrades
Lcd_Chr(2,13,223); // different LCD displays have different char code for degree
// if you see greek alpha letter try typing 178 instead of 223
Lcd_Chr(2,14,'C');
//--- main loop

do {
//--- perform temperature reading
Ow_Reset(&PORTF, 6); // Onewire reset signal
Ow_Write(&PORTF, 6, 0xCC); // Issue command SKIP_ROM
Ow_Write(&PORTF, 6, 0x44); // Issue command CONVERT_T
Delay_us(120);
Ow_Reset(&PORTF, 6);
Ow_Write(&PORTF, 6, 0xCC); // Issue command SKIP_ROM
Ow_Write(&PORTF, 6, 0xBE); // Issue command READ_SCRATCHPAD
Delay_ms(400);
temp = Ow_Read(&PORTF, 6);

temp = (Ow_Read(&PORTF, 6) << 8) + temp;
//--- Format and display result on Lcd

Display_Temperature(temp);
Delay_ms(500);
} while (1);
}
MikroElektronika
435
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
HW Connection
Example of DS1820 connection
MikroElektronika
436
Peripheral Pin Select Library

The Peripheral Pin Select library enables user to have more than one digital peripheral multiplexed on a single pin.
Users may independently map the input and/or output of any one of many digital peripherals to any one of these I/O
pins.
The peripherals managed by the Peripheral Pin Select library are all digital only peripherals.
A key difference between pin select and non pin select peripherals is that pin select peripherals are not associated with
a default I/O pin. The peripheral must always be assigned to a specific I/O pin before it can be used.
In contrast, non pin select peripherals are always available on a default pin, assuming that the peripheral is active and
not conflicting with another peripheral.
When a pin selectable peripheral is active on a given I/O pin, it takes priority over all other digital I/O and digital
communication peripherals associated with the pin.
Important : Before using any of the digital peripherals or its library routines, user must set the desired pins as input/
output and assign the desired peripheral to these pins.
Library Routines
- Unlock_IOLOCK
- Lock_IOLOCK
- PPS_Mapping
Unlock_IOLOCK
Prototype void Unlock_IOLOCK();
Description Unlocks I/O pins for Peripheral Pin Mapping.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example Unlock_IOLOCK();
Notes None.
Lock_IOLOCK
Prototype void Lock_IOLOCK();
Description Locks I/O pins for Peripheral Pin Mapping.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example Lock_IOLOCK();
MikroElektronika
437
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
PPS_Mapping
Prototype unsigned PPS_Mapping(unsigned short rp_num, unsigned short direction,
unsigned short funct_name);
Description Sets desired internal MCU module to be mapped on the requested pins.
Parameters - rp_num: Remappable pin number. Consult the appropriate datasheet for adequate values.
- direction: Sets requested pin to be used as an input or output. See Direction Parameters for
adequate values.
- funct_name: Selects internal MCU module function for usage. See Input Functions or Output
Functions for adequate values.
Returns - 0 - if non-existing peripheral pin is selected.
- 1 - if desired function is not implemented for the chosen MCU.
- 2 - if any of the other RPOUT registers is configured to output the SCK1OUT function while SCK1CM
is set (only for P24FJ256GA110 Family).
- 255 - if peripheral pin mapping was successful.
Requires Nothing.
Example PPS_Mapping(15, _INPUT, _RX2_DT2) // Sets pin 15 to be Input, and maps
RX2/DT2 Input to it
PPS_Mapping(5, _OUTPUT, _TX2_CK2); // Sets pin 5 to be Output, and maps
EUSART2 Asynchronous Transmit/Synchronous Clock Output to it
Notes None.
Direction Parameters
Direction Parameter Description
_INPUT Sets selected pin as input
_OUTPUT Sets selected pin as output
Input Functions
Function Name Description _IC2 Input Capture 2
_CIRX ECAN1 Receive _IC3 Input Capture 3
_COFSI DCI Frame Sync Input _IC4 Input Capture 4
_CSCKI DCI Serial Clock Input _IC5 Input Capture 5
_CSDI DCI Serial Data Input _IC6 Input Capture 6
_FLTA1 PWM1 Fault _IC7 Input Capture 7
_FLTA4 PWM4 Fault _INDX1 QEI1 Index
_FLTA5 PWM5 Fault _INDX2 QEI2 Index
_FLTA6 PWM6 Fault _INT1 External Interrupt 1
_IC1 Input Capture 1 _INT4 External Interrupt 4
MikroElektronika
438
_QEA1 QEI1 Phase A _T1CK Timer1 External Clock

_QEA2 QEI2 Phase A _T2CK Timer2 External Clock
_QEB1 QEI1 Phase B _T3CK Timer3 External Clock
_QEB2 QEI2 Phase B _T4CK Timer4 External Clock
_SCK1IN SPI1 Clock Input _T5CK Timer5 External Clock
_SCK2IN SPI2 Clock Input _U1CTS UART1 Clear To Send
_SCK3IN SPI3 Clock Input _U2CTS UART2 Clear To Send
_SDI1 SPI1 Data Input _U3CTS UART3 Clear To Send
_SDI2 SPI2 Data Input _U4CTS UART4 Clear To Send
_SDI3 SPI3 Data Input _U1RX UART1 Receive
_SS1IN SPI1 Slave Select Input _U2RX UART2 Receive
Output Functions
Function Name Description

_NULL The NULL function is assigned to all RPn outputs at device Reset and disables the RPn
output function.
_ACMP1 RPn tied to Analog Comparator Output 1
_C1OUT Comparator 1 Output
_COFSOS DCI Frame Sync Output
_CSCKO DCI Serial Clock Output
_CSDO DCI Serial Data Output
_CTPLS CTMU Output Pulse
_C1TX ECAN1 Transmit
_OC1 Output Compare 1
MikroElektronika
439
mikoC PRO for dsPIC

_OCFA Output Compare Fault A
_OCFB Output Compare Fault B
_PWM4H RPn tied to PWM output pins associated with PWM Generator 4
_PWM4L RPn tied to PWM output pins associated with PWM Generator 4
_REFCLKO REFCLK output signal
_SCK1OUT SPI1 Clock Output
_SDO1 SPI1 Data Output
_SS1OUT SPI1 Slave Select Output
_SYNCI1 External Synchronization signal to PWM Master Time Base
_SYNCI2 External Synchronization signal to PWM Master Time Base
_SYNCO1 RPn tied to external device synchronization signal via PWM master time base
_U1RTS UART1 Request To Send
_U1TX UART1 Transmit
_UPDN QEI direction (UPDN) status
_UPDN1 QEI1 direction (UPDN) status
_UPDN2 QEI2 direction (UPDN) status
MikroElektronika
440
Port Expander Library

The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a library for communication with the Microchip’s Port Expander
MCP23S17 via SPI interface. Connections of the dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 MCU and MCP23S17 is given on the schematic
at the bottom of this page.
Important :
- The library uses the SPI module for communication. User must initialize the appropriate SPI module before using
the Port Expander Library.
- For MCUs with multiple SPI modules it is possible to initialize all of them and then switch by using the SPI_Set_
Active() function. See the SPI Library functions.
- Library does not use Port Expander interrupts.
External dependencies of Port Expander Library

defined in all projects using Port Description : Example :
Expander Library:
extern sfr sbit
Reset line. sbit SPExpanderRST at RF0_bit;
SPExpanderRST;
extern sfr sbit
Chip Select line. sbit SPExpanderCS at RF1_bit;
SPExpanderCS;
extern sfr sbit sbit SPExpanderRST_Direction at
SPExpanderRST_Direction; TRISF0_bit;
extern sfr sbit Direction of the Chip Select sbit SPExpanderCS_Direction at
SPExpanderCS_Direction; pin. TRISF1_bit;
Library Routines
- Expander_Init
- Expander_Init_Advanced
- Expander_Read_Byte
- Expander_Write_Byte
- Expander_Read_PortA
- Expander_Read_PortB
- Expander_Read_PortAB
- Expander_Write_PortA
- Expander_Write_PortB
- Expander_Write_PortAB
- Expander_Set_DirectionPortA
- Expander_Set_DirectionPortB
- Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB
- Expander_Set_PullUpsPortA
- Expander_Set_PullUpsPortB
- Expander_Set_PullUpsPortAB
MikroElektronika
441
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Expander_Init
Prototype void Expander_Init(char ModuleAddress);
Description Initializes Port Expander using SPI communication.
Port Expander module settings :
- hardware addressing enabled

- automatic address pointer incrementing disabled (byte mode)
- BANK_0 register adressing
- slew rate enabled
Parameters - ModuleAddress: Port Expander hardware address, see schematic at the bottom of this page
Returns Nothing.
- SPExpanderCS: Chip Select line

- SPExpanderRST: Reset line
- SPExpanderCS_Direction: Direction of the Chip Select pin
- SPExpanderRST_Direction: Direction of the Reset pin
SPI module needs to be initialized. See SPIx_Init and SPIx_Init_Advanced routines.

Example // Port Expander module connections
sbit SPExpanderRST at RF0_bit;
sbit SPExpanderCS at RF1_bit;
sbit SPExpanderRST_Direction at TRISF0_bit;
sbit SPExpanderCS_Direction at TRISF1_bit;
// End Port Expander module connections
...
// If Port Expander Library uses SPI module

SPI1_Init(); // Initialize SPI module used with PortExpander
Expander_Init(0); // Initialize Port Expander
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
442
Expander_Init_Advanced
Prototype void Expander_Init_Advanced(char *rstPort, char rstPin, char haen);
Description Initializes Port Expander using SPI communication.
Parameters - rstPort: Port Expander’s reset port
- rstPin: Port Expander’s reset pin
- haen: Port Expander’s hardware address
Returns Nothing.
Requires - SPExpanderCS: Chip Select line
SPI module needs to be initialized. See SPIx_Init and SPIx_Init_Advanced routines.

...
// If Port Expander Library uses SPI module

SPI1_Init(); // Initialize SPI1 module used with PortExpander
Expander_Init_Advanced(&PORTB, 0, 0); // Initialize Port Expander
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
443
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Expander_Read_Byte
Prototype char Expander_Read_Byte(char ModuleAddress, char RegAddress);
Description The function reads byte from Port Expander.
- RegAddress: Port Expander’s internal register address
Returns Byte read.
Requires Port Expander must be initialized. See Expander_Init.
Example // Read a byte from Port Expander’s register
char read_data;
...
read_data = Expander_Read_Byte(0,1);
Notes None.
Expander_Write_Byte
Prototype void Expander_Write_Byte(char ModuleAddress, char RegAddress, char data_);
Description Routine writes a byte to Port Expander.
- RegAddress: Port Expander’s internal register address
- Data: data to be written
Returns Byte read.
Example // Write a byte to the Port Expander’s register
Expander_Write_Byte(0,1,0xFF);
Notes None.
Expander_Read_PortA
Prototype char Expander_Read_PortA(char ModuleAddress);
Description The function reads byte from Port Expander’s PortA.
Returns Byte read.
Port Expander’s PortA should be configured as input. See Expander_Set_DirectionPortA and

Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB routines.
Example // Read a byte from Port Expander’s PORTA
char read_data;
...
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA(0,0xFF); // set expander’s porta to be
input
...
read_data = Expander_Read_PortA(0);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
444
Expander_Read_PortB
Prototype char Expander_Read_PortB(char ModuleAddress);
Description The function reads byte from Port Expander’s PortB.
Returns Byte read.
Port Expander’s PortB should be configured as input. See Expander_Set_DirectionPortB and

Example // Read a byte from Port Expander’s PORTB
char read_data;
...
Expander_Set_DirectionPortB(0,0xFF); // set expander’s portb to be
input
...
read_data = Expander_Read_PortB(0);
Notes None.
Expander_Read_PortAB
Prototype unsigned int Expander_Read_PortAB(char ModuleAddress);
Description The function reads word from Port Expander’s ports. PortA readings are in the higher byte of the result.
PortB readings are in the lower byte of the result.
Returns Word read.
Port Expander’s PortA and PortB should be configured as inputs. See Expander_Set_DirectionPortA,
Expander_Set_DirectionPortB and Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB routines.
Example // Read a byte from Port Expander’s PORTA and PORTB
unsigned int read_data;
...
Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB(0,0xFFFF); // set expander’s porta and
portb to be input
...
read_data = Expander_Read_PortAB(0);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
445
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Expander_Write_PortA
Prototype void Expander_Write_PortA(char ModuleAddress, char Data_);
Description The function writes byte to Port Expander’s PortA.
Returns Nothing.
Port Expander’s PortA should be configured as output. See Expander_Set_DirectionPortA and

Example // Write a byte to Port Expander’s PORTA
...
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA(0,0x00); // set expander’s porta to be output
...
Expander_Write_PortA(0, 0xAA);
Notes None.
Expander_Write_PortB
Prototype void Expander_Write_PortB(char ModuleAddress, char Data_);
Description The function writes byte to Port Expander’s PortB.
Returns Nothing.
Port Expander’s PortB should be configured as output. See Expander_Set_DirectionPortB and

Example // Write a byte to Port Expander’s PORTB
...
Expander_Set_DirectionPortB(0,0x00); // set expander’s portb to be output
...
Expander_Write_PortB(0, 0x55);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
446
Expander_Write_PortAB
Prototype void Expander_Write_PortAB(char ModuleAddress, unsigned int Data_);
Description The function writes word to Port Expander’s ports.
- Data: data to be written. Data to be written to PortA are passed in Data’s higher byte. Data to be
written to PortB are passed in Data’s lower byte
Returns Nothing.
Port Expander’s PortA and PortB should be configured as outputs. See Expander_Set_DirectionPortA,
Expander_Set_DirectionPortB and Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB routines.
Example // Write a byte to Port Expander’s PORTA and PORTB
...
Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB(0,0x0000); // set expander’s porta and
portb to be output
...
Expander_Write_PortAB(0, 0xAA55);
Notes None.
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA
Prototype void Expander_Set_DirectionPortA(char ModuleAddress, char Data_);
Description The function sets Port Expander’s PortA direction.
- Data: data to be written to the PortA direction register. Each bit corresponds to the appropriate pin of
the PortA register. Set bit designates corresponding pin as input. Cleared bit designates corresponding
pin as output.
Returns Nothing.
Example // Set Port Expander’s PORTA to be output
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA(0,0x00);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
447
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Expander_Set_DirectionPortB
Prototype void Expander_Set_DirectionPortB(char ModuleAddress, char Data_);
Description The function sets Port Expander’s PortB direction.
- Data: data to be written to the PortB direction register. Each bit corresponds to the appropriate pin of
the PortB register. Set bit designates corresponding pin as input. Cleared bit designates corresponding
pin as output.
Returns Nothing.
Example // Set Port Expander’s PORTB to be input
Expander_Set_DirectionPortB(0,0xFF);
Notes None.
Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB
Prototype void Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB(char ModuleAddress, unsigned int
Direction);
Description The function sets Port Expander’s PortA and PortB direction.
- Direction: data to be written to direction registers. Data to be written to the PortA direction register
are passed in Direction’s higher byte. Data to be written to the PortB direction register are passed
in Direction’s lower byte. Each bit corresponds to the appropriate pin of the PortA/PortB register.
Set bit designates corresponding pin as input. Cleared bit designates corresponding pin as output.
Returns Nothing.
Example // Set Port Expander’s PORTA to be output and PORTB to be input
Expander_Set_DirectionPortAB(0,0x00FF);
Notes None.
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortA
Prototype void Expander_Set_PullUpsPortA(char ModuleAddress, char Data_);
Description The function sets Port Expander’s PortA pull up/down resistors.
- Data: data for choosing pull up/down resistors configuration. Each bit corresponds to the appropriate
pin of the PortA register. Set bit enables pull-up for corresponding pin.
Returns Nothing.
Example // Set Port Expander’s PORTA pull-up resistors
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortA(0, 0xFF);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
448
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortB
Prototype void Expander_Set_PullUpsPortB(char ModuleAddress, char Data_);
Description The function sets Port Expander’s PortB pull up/down resistors.
- Data: data for choosing pull up/down resistors configuration. Each bit corresponds to the appropriate
pin of the PortB register. Set bit enables pull-up for corresponding pin.
Returns Nothing.
Example // Set Port Expander’s PORTB pull-up resistors
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortB(0, 0xFF);
Notes None.
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortAB
Prototype void Expander_Set_PullUpsPortAB(char ModuleAddress, unsigned int PullUps);
Description The function sets Port Expander’s PortA and PortB pull up/down resistors.
- PullUps: data for choosing pull up/down resistors configuration. PortA pull up/down resistors
configuration is passed in PullUps’s higher byte. PortB pull up/down resistors configuration is
passed in PullUps’s lower byte. Each bit corresponds to the appropriate pin of the PortA/PortB
register. Set bit enables pull-up for corresponding pin.
Returns Nothing.
Example // Set Port Expander’s PORTA and PORTB pull-up resistors
Expander_Set_PullUpsPortAB(0, 0xFFFF);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
449
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Library Example
The example demonstrates how to communicate with Port Expander MCP23S17. Note that Port Expander pins A2 A1
A0 are connected to GND so Port Expander Hardware Address is 0.
// Port Expander module connections

unsigned int i = 0;
void main() {
TRISB = 0x00;
LATB = 0xFF;
// If Port Expander Library uses SPI1 module

SPI1_Init(); // Initialize SPI module used with
PortExpander
Expander_Init(0); // Initialize Port Expander
Expander_Set_DirectionPortA(0, 0x00); // Set Expander's PORTA to be output
Expander_Set_DirectionPortB(0,0xFF); // Set Expander's PORTB to be input

Expander_Set_PullUpsPortB(0,0xFF); // Set pull-ups to all of the Expander's PORTB
pins

Expander_Write_PortA(0, i++); // Write i to expander's PORTA
PORTB = Expander_Read_PortB(0); // Read expander's PORTB and write it to LEDs
Delay_ms(100);
}
MikroElektronika
450
HW Connection
Port Expander HW connection
MikroElektronika
451
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
PS/2 Library
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a library for communication with the common PS/2 keyboard.
Important :
- The library does not utilize interrupts for data retrieval, and requires the oscillator clock to be at least 6MHz.
- The pins to which a PS/2 keyboard is attached should be connected to the pull-up resistors.
- Although PS/2 is a two-way communication bus, this library does not provide MCU-to-keyboard communication; e.g.
pressing the Caps Lock key will not turn on the Caps Lock LED.
External dependencies of PS/2 Library

defined in all projects using PS/2 Description : Example :
Library:
extern sfr sbit PS2_Data; PS/2 Data line. sbit PS2_Data at RB0_bit;
extern sfr sbit PS2_Clock; PS/2 Clock line. sbit PS2_Clock at RB1_bit;
extern sfr sbit PS2_Data_ Direction of the PS/2 Data sbit PS2_Data_Direction at
extern sfr sbit PS2_Clock_ Direction of the PS/2 Clock sbit PS2_Clock_Direction at
Library Routines
- Ps2_Config
- Ps2_Key_Read
MikroElektronika
452
Ps2_Config
Prototype void Ps2_Config();
Description Initializes the MCU for work with the PS/2 keyboard.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
- PS2_Data: Data signal line

- PS2_Clock: Clock signal line
- PS2_Data_Direction: Direction of the Data pin
- PS2_Clock_Direction: Direction of the Clock pin

Example // PS2 pinout definition
sbit PS2_Data at RB0_bit;
sbit PS2_Clock at RB1_bit;
sbit PS2_Data_Direction at TRISB0_bit;
sbit PS2_Clock_Direction at TRISB1_bit;
// End of PS2 pinout definition
...
Ps2_Config(); // Init PS/2 Keyboard
Notes None.
Ps2_Key_Read
Prototype unsigned int Ps2_Key_Read(unsigned short *value, unsigned short *special,
unsigned short *pressed);
Description The function retrieves information on key pressed.
Parameters - value: holds the value of the key pressed. For characters, numerals, punctuation marks, and space
value will store the appropriate ASCII code. Routine “recognizes” the function of Shift and Caps Lock,
and behaves appropriately. For special function keys see Special Function Keys Table.
- special: is a flag for special function keys (F1, Enter, Esc, etc). If key pressed is one of these,
special will be set to 1, otherwise 0.
- pressed: is set to 1 if the key is pressed, and 0 if it is released.
Returns - 1 if reading of a key from the keyboard was successful
- 0 if no key was pressed
Requires PS/2 keyboard needs to be initialized. See Ps2_Config routine.
Example unsigned short keydata = 0, special = 0, down = 0;
...
// Press Enter to continue:
do {
if (Ps2_Key_Read(&keydata, &special, &down)) {
if (down && (keydata == 16)) break;
}
} while (1);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
453
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Special Function Keys

Key Value returned
F1 1
F2 2
F3 3
F4 4
F5 5
F6 6
F7 7
F8 8
F9 9
F10 10
F11 11
F12 12
Enter 13
Page Up 14
Page Down 15
Backspace 16
Insert 17
Delete 18
Windows 19
Ctrl 20
Shift 21
Alt 22
Print Screen 23
Pause 24
Caps Lock 25
End 26
Home 27
Scroll Lock 28
Num Lock 29
Left Arrow 30
Right Arrow 31
Up Arrow 32
Down Arrow 33
Escape 34
Tab 35
MikroElektronika
454
Library Example
This simple example reads values of the pressed keys on the PS/2 keyboard and sends them via UART.
sbit PS2_Data at RB0_bit;

sbit PS2_Clock at RB1_bit;
sbit PS2_Data_Direction at TRISB0_bit;
sbit PS2_Clock_Direction at TRISB1_bit;
unsigned short keydata = 0, special = 0, down = 0;
void main() {

Ps2_Config(); // Init PS/2 Keyboard
Delay_ms(100); // Wait for keyboard to finish
UART1_Write_Text("Ready");
UART1_Write(10); // Line Feed
UART1_Write(13); // Carriage return
do {
if (Ps2_Key_Read(&keydata, &special, &down)) {
if (down && (keydata == 16)) { // Backspace
UART1_Write(0x08);
}
else if (down && (keydata == 13)) { // Enter
UART1_Write('r'); // send carriage return to usart
terminal
//Usart_Write('n'); // uncomment this line if usart
terminal also expects line feed
// for new line transition
}
else if (down && !special && keydata) {
UART1_Write(keydata);
}
}
Delay_ms(1); // debounce
} while (1);
}
MikroElektronika
455
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
HW Connection
Example of PS2 keyboard connection
PWM Library
The CCP module is available with a number of dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 MCUs. mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24
provides a library which simplifies using of the PWM HW Module.
Important : PWM module uses either Timer2 or Timer3 module.
Library Routines
- PWM_Init
- PWM_Set_Duty
- PWM_Start
- PWM_Stop
MikroElektronika
456
PWM_Init
Prototype unsigned int PWM_Init(unsigned long freq_hz, unsigned int enable_channel_x,
unsigned int timer_prescale, unsigned int use_timer_x);
// 30F1010 and dsPIC33FJ06GS101/102/202 prototype

unsigned int PWM_Init(unsigned long freq_hz, unsigned int enable_channel_x,
unsigned int timer_prescale);
Description Initializes the PWM module with duty ratio 0.
Parameters - freq_hz: PWM frequency in Hz (refer to device datasheet for correct values in respect with Fosc)
- enable_channel_x: number of PWM channel to be initialized. Refer to MCU’s datasheet for
available PWM channels
- timer_prescale: timer prescaler parameter. Valid values: 1, 8, 64, and 256
- use_timer_x: timer to be used with the PWM module. Valid values: 2 (Timer2) and 3 (Timer3)
Returns - 0xFFFF - if timer settings are not valid
- otherwise returns calculated timer period
Requires MCU must have the HW PWM Module.
Example // Initializes the PWM module at 5KHz, channel 1, no clock prescale, timer2
:
unsigned int pwm_period1;
...
pwm_period1 = PWM_Init(5000, 1, 0, 2);
Notes Number of available PWM channels depends on MCU. Refer to MCU datasheet for details.
PWM_Set_Duty
Prototype void PWM_Set_Duty(unsigned duty, unsigned channel);
Description The function changes PWM duty ratio.
Parameters - duty: PWM duty ratio. Valid values: 0 to timer period returned by the PWM_Init function.
- channel: number of PWM channel to change duty to.
Returns Nothing.
PWM channel must be properly initialized. See PWM_Init routine.

Example // Set channel 1 duty ratio to 50%:
unsigned int pwm_period1;
...
PWM_Set_Duty(pwm_period1/2, 1);
MikroElektronika
457
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
PWM_Start
Prototype void PWM_Start(char enable_channel_x);
Description Starts PWM at requested channel.
Parameters - enable_channel_x: number of PWM channel
Returns Nothing.
PWM channel must be properly configured. See the PWM_Init and PWM_Set_Duty routines.
Example // start PWM at channel 1
PWM_Start(1);
PWM_Stop
Prototype void PWM_Stop(char disable_channel_x);
Description Stops PWM at requested channel.
Parameters - disable_channel_x: number of PWM channel
Returns Nothing.
Example // stop PWM at channel 1
PWM_Stop(1);
Library Example
The example changes PWM duty ratio on channels 1 and 2 continuously. If LEDs are connected to channels 1 and 2,
a gradual change of emitted light will be noticeable.
unsigned int current_duty, old_duty, current_duty1, old_duty1;

unsigned int pwm_period1, pwm_period2;
void InitMain() {
TRISB = 0xFFFF; // configure PORTB pins as input
PORTD = 0; // set PORTD to 0
TRISD = 0; // designate PORTD pins as output
}
void main() {
InitMain();
current_duty = 16; // initial value for current_duty
current_duty1 = 16; // initial value for current_duty1
MikroElektronika
458
pwm_period1 = PWM_Init(5000 , 1, 1, 2);

pwm_period2 = PWM_Init(10000, 2, 1, 3);
PWM_Start(1);
PWM_Start(2);
PWM_Set_Duty(current_duty, 1); // Set current duty for PWM1

PWM_Set_Duty(current_duty1, 2); // Set current duty for PWM2
while (1) { // endless loop

if (RB0_bit) { // button on RB0 pressed
Delay_ms(20);
current_duty++; // increment current_duty
if (current_duty > pwm_period1) { // if we increase current_duty greater then
possible pwm_period1 value
current_duty = 0; // reset current_duty value to zero
}
PWM_Set_Duty(current_duty, 1); // set newly acquired duty ratio
}

Delay_ms(20);
current_duty--; // decrement current_duty
if (current_duty > pwm_period1) { // if we decrease current_duty greater then
possible pwm_period1 value (overflow)
current_duty = pwm_period1; // set current_duty to max possible value
}
PWM_Set_Duty(current_duty, 1); // set newly acquired duty ratio
}

Delay_ms(20);
current_duty1++; // increment current_duty1
if (current_duty1 > pwm_period2) { // if we increase current_duty1 greater
then possible pwm_period2 value
current_duty1 = 0; // reset current_duty1 value to zero
}
PWM_Set_Duty(current_duty1, 2); // set newly acquired duty ratio
}

Delay_ms(20);
current_duty1--; // decrement current_duty1
if (current_duty1 > pwm_period2) { // if we decrease current_duty1 greater then
possible pwm_period1 value (overflow)
current_duty1 = pwm_period2; // set current_duty to max possible value
}
PWM_Set_Duty(current_duty1, 2);
}
Delay_ms(5); // slow down change pace a little

}
}
MikroElektronika
459
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
HW Connection
PWM demonstration
PWM Motor Control Library

The PWM Motor Control module is available with a number of dsPIC30/33 MCUs. The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and
PIC24 provides a library which simplifies using the PWM Motor Control module.
Important :
- Number of PWM modules per MCU differs from chip to chip. Please, read the appropriate datasheet before utilizing
this library.
- PWM library routines require you to specify the module you want to use. To use the desired PWM module, simply
Library Routines
- PWMx_Mc_Init
- PWMx_Mc_Set_Duty
- PWMx_Mc_Start
- PWMx_Mc_Stop
MikroElektronika
460
PWMx_Mc_Init
Prototype unsigned int PWMx_Mc_Init(unsigned int freq_hz, unsigned int pair_output_
mode, unsigned int enable_output_x, unsigned int clock_prescale_output_
postscale);
Description Initializes the Motor Control PWM module with duty ratio 0. The function calculates timer period, writes
it to the MCU’s PTPER register and returns it as the function result.
Parameters - freq_hz: PWM frequency in Hz (refer to device datasheet for correct values in respect with Fosc)
- pair_output_mode: output mode for output pin pairs: 1 = independent, 0 = complementary.
If pair_output_mode.B0 is equal to 1 then PWM channels PWM1L and PWM1H will be
independent,
If pair_output_mode.B1 is equal to 0 then PWM channels PWM2L and PWM2H will be
complementary, ...
If pair_output_mode.Bn is equal to 1 then PWM channels PWM(n+1)L and PWM(n+1)H will be
independent,
If pair_output_mode.Bn is equal to 0 then PWM channels PWM(n+1)L and PWM(n+1)H will be
complementary.
- enable_output_x: bits <7..0> are enabling corresponding PWM channels <PWM4H, PWM3H,
PWM2H, PWM1H, PWM4L, PWM3L, PWM2L, PWM1L>.
If bit value is equal to 0 then corresponding PWM channel is disabled (pin is standard I/O).
If bit value is equal to 1 then corresponding PWM channel is enabled (pin is PWM output).
For detalied explanation consult the “Motor Control PWM Module” section in device datasheet
- clock_prescale_output_postscale: PWM clock prescaler/postscaler settings. Values <0..3>
and <0..15> correspond to prescaler/postscaler <1:1, 1:4, 1:16, 1:64> and <1:1, 1:2,
..., 1:16>
Returns Calculated timer period.
Requires The dsPIC30/33 MCU must have the Motor Control PWM module.
Example // Initializes the PWM1 module at 5KHz, complementary pin-pair output,
output enabled on pins 4l..1l, no clock prescale and no clock postscale:
unsigned int duty_50;
...
duty_50 = PWM1_Mc_Init(5000, 1, 0x0F, 0);
Notes - Number of PWM modules per MCU differs from chip to chip. Please, read the appropriate datasheet
- PWM library routines require you to specify the module you want to use. To use the desired PWM
MikroElektronika
461
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
PWMx_Mc_Set_Duty
Prototype void PWM1_Mc_Set_Duty(unsigned duty, unsigned channel);
// For dsPIC 33FJ MCUs that have PWM2 module :

void PWM2_Mc_Set_Duty(unsigned duty);
Description The function changes PWM duty ratio.
Parameters - duty: PWM duty ratio. Valid values: 0 to timer period returned by the PWMx_Mc_Init function.
- channel: number of PWM channel to change duty to.
Returns Nothing.
The PWM module needs to be initalized. See the PWMx_Mc_Init function.

Example // Set duty ratio to 50% at channel 1:
PWM1_Mc_Init(5000,1,0xF,0);
...
PWM1_Mc_Set_Duty(32767, 1);
PWMx_Mc_Start
Prototype void PWMx_Mc_Start();
Description Starts the Motor Control PWM module (channels initialized in the PWMx_Mc_Init function).
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
The PWM module needs to be initalized. See the PWMx_Mc_Init function.

Example // start the Motor Control PWM1 module
PWM1_Mc_Start();
MikroElektronika
462
PWMx_Mc_Stop
Prototype void PWMx_Mc_Stop();
Description Stops the Motor Control PWM module.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Example // stop the Motor Control PWM1 module
PWM1_Mc_Stop();
Library Example
The example changes PWM duty ratio on channel 1 continually. If LED is connected to the channel 1, a gradual change
of emitted light will be noticeable.
unsigned int i;
unsigned int duty_50;
void main(){

PORTB = 0xAAAA;
TRISB = 0; // initialize portb as output
Delay_ms(1000);
duty_50 = PWM1_MC_Init(5000, 0, 0x01, 0); // Pwm_Mc_Init returns 50% of the

duty
PWM1_MC_Set_Duty(i = duty_50, 1);
PWM1_MC_Start();
do
{
i--;
PWM1_MC_Set_Duty(i, 1);
Delay_ms(10);
if (i == 0)
i = duty_50 * 2 - 1; // Let us not allow the overflow
PORTB = i;
}
while(1);
MikroElektronika
463
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
HW Connection
PWM Motor Control demonstration
RS-485 Library
RS-485 is a multipoint communication which allows multiple devices to be connected to a single bus. The mikroC PRO
for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a set of library routines for comfortable work with RS485 system using Master/
Slave architecture. Master and Slave devices interchange packets of information. Each of these packets contains
synchronization bytes, CRC byte, address byte and the data. Each Slave has unique address and receives only
packets addressed to it. The Slave can never initiate communication.
It is the user’s responsibility to ensure that only one device transmits via 485 bus at a time.
The RS-485 routines require the UART module. Pins of UART need to be attached to RS-485 interface transceiver,
such as LTC485 or similar (see schematic at the bottom of this page).
Library constants:
- START byte value = 150

- STOP byte value = 169
- Address 50 is the broadcast address for all Slaves (packets containing address 50 will be received by all Slaves
except the Slaves with addresses 150 and 169).
Important :
- The library uses the UART module for communication. The user must initialize the appropriate UART module before
using the RS-485 Library.
- For MCUs with multiple UART modules it is possible to initialize them and then switch by using the UART_Set_Active
routine.
MikroElektronika
464
External dependencies of RS-485 Library

defined in all projects using RS-485 Description : Example :
Library:
extern sfr sbit RS485_rxtx_ Control RS-485 Transmit/
sbit RS485_rxtx_pin at RF2_bit;
pin; Receive operation mode
extern sfr sbit RS485_rxtx_ Direction of the RS-485 sbit RS485_rxtx_pin_direction at
pin_direction; Transmit/Receive pin TRISF2_bit;
Library Routines
- RS485Master_Init
- RS485Master_Receive
- RS485Master_Send
- RS485Slave_Init
- RS485Slave_Receive
- RS485Slave_Send
RS485Master_Init
Prototype void RS485Master_Init();
Description Initializes MCU as a Master for RS-485 communication.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
- RS485_rxtx_pin - this pin is connected to RE/DE input of RS-485 transceiver(see schematic at the
bottom of this page). RE/DE signal controls RS-485 transceiver operation mode.
- RS485_rxtx_pin_direction - direction of the RS-485 Transmit/Receive pin.
must be defined before using this routine.
UART HW module needs to be initialized. See UARTx_Init.

Example // RS485 module pinout
sbit RS485_rxtx_pin_direction at RF2_bit; // transmit/receive control set
to PORTC.B2
sbit RS485_rxtx_pin_direction at TRISF2_bit; // RxTx pin direction set as
output
// end RS485 module pinout
...
UART1_Init(9600); // initialize UART1 module
RS485Master_Init(); // intialize MCU as a Master
for RS-485 communication
Notes None
MikroElektronika
465
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
RS485Master_Receive
Prototype void RS485Master_Receive(char *data_buffer);
Description Receives messages from Slaves. Messages are multi-byte, so this routine must be called for each
byte received.
Parameters - data_buffer: 7 byte buffer for storing received data. Data will be stored in the following manner:
- data_buffer[0..2]: message content

- data_buffer[3]: number of message bytes received, 1–3
- data_buffer[4]: is set to 255 when message is received
- data_buffer[5]: is set to 255 if error has occurred
- data_buffer[6]: address of the Slave which sent the message
The routine automatically adjusts data[4] and data[5] upon every received message. These flags
need to be cleared by software.
Returns Nothing.
Requires MCU must be initialized as a Master for RS-485 communication. See RS485Master_Init.
Example char msg[8];
...
RS485Master_Receive(msg);
Notes None
RS485Master_Send
Prototype void RS485Master_Send(char *data_buffer, char datalen, char slave_
address);
Description Sends message to Slave(s). Message format can be found at the bottom of this page.
Parameters - data_buffer: data to be sent
- datalen: number of bytes for transmition. Valid values: 0...3.
- slave_address: Slave(s) address
Returns Nothing.
Requires MCU must be initialized as a Master for RS-485 communication. See RS485Master_Init.
It is the user’s responsibility to ensure (by protocol) that only one device sends data via 485 bus at a
time.
...
// send 3 bytes of data to Slave with address 0x12
RS485Master_Send(msg, 3, 0x12);
Notes None
MikroElektronika
466
RS485Slave_Init
Prototype void RS485Slave_Init(char Slave_address);
Description Initializes MCU as a Slave for RS-485 communication.
Parameters - Slave_address: Slave address
Returns Nothing.
- RS485_rxtx_pin - this pin is connected to RE/DE input of RS-485 transceiver(see schematic at

the bottom of this page). RE/DE signal controls RS-485 transceiver operation mode. Valid values: 1
(for transmitting) and 0 (for receiving
- RS485_rxtx_pin_direction - direction of the RS-485 Transmit/Receive pin.
must be defined before using this routine.
UART HW module needs to be initialized. See UARTx_Init.

Example Initialize MCU as a Slave with address 160:
// RS485 module pinout

sbit RS485_rxtx_pin at RC2_bit; // transmit/receive control set to
PORTC.B2
sbit RS485_rxtx_pin_direction at TRISC2_bit; // RxTx pin direction set as
output
// End of RS485 module pinout
...
RS485Slave_Init(160); // intialize MCU as a Slave for RS-485
communication with address 160
Notes None
MikroElektronika
467
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
RS485Slave_Receive
Prototype void RS485Slave_Receive(char *data_buffer);
Description Receives messages from Master. If Slave address and Message address field don’t match then the
message will be discarded. Messages are multi-byte, so this routine must be called for each byte
received.
Parameters - data_buffer: 6 byte buffer for storing received data, in the following manner:
- data_buffer[0..2]: message content

- data_buffer[3]: number of message bytes received, 1–3
- data_buffer[4]: is set to 255 when message is received
- data_buffer[5]: is set to 255 if error has occurred
The routine automatically adjusts data[4] and data[5] upon every received message. These flags
need to be cleared by software.
Returns Nothing.
Requires MCU must be initialized as a Slave for RS-485 communication. See RS485Slave_Init.
...
RS485Slave_Read(msg);
Notes None
RS485Slave_Send
Prototype void RS485Slave_Send(char *data_buffer, char datalen);
Description Sends message to Master. Message format can be found at the bottom of this page.
Parameters - data_buffer: data to be sent
- datalen: number of bytes for transmition. Valid values: 0...3.
Returns Nothing.
Requires MCU must be initialized as a Slave for RS-485 communication. See RS485Slave_Init. It is the user’s
responsibility to ensure (by protocol) that only one device sends data via 485 bus at a time.
...
// send 2 bytes of data to the Master
RS485Slave_Send(msg, 2);
Notes None
MikroElektronika
468
Library Example
This is a simple demonstration of RS485 Library routines usage.
Master sends message to Slave with address 160 and waits for a response. The Slave accepts data, increments it and
sends it back to the Master. Master then does the same and sends incremented data back to Slave, etc.
Master displays received data on PORTB, while error on receive (0xAA) and number of consecutive unsuccessful
retries are displayed on PORTD. Slave displays received data on PORTB, while error on receive (0xAA) is displayed
on PORTD. Hardware configurations in this example are made for the EasydsPIC4A board and 30f4013.
RS485 Master code:
sbit rs485_rxtx_pin at RF2_bit; // set transcieve pin

sbit rs485_rxtx_pin_direction at TRISF2_bit; // set transcieve pin direction
char dat[10]; // buffer for receving/sending messages

char i,j;
void interrupt() org IVT_ADDR_U2RXINTERRUPT {
RS485Master_Receive(dat);
U2RXIF_bit = 0; // ensure interrupt not pending
}
void main(){
long cnt = 0;
ADPCFG = 0xFFFF;
PORTB = 0;
PORTD = 0;
TRISB = 0;
TRISD = 0;

Delay_ms(100);
RS485Master_Init(); // initialize MCU as Master
dat[0] = 0xAA;
dat[1] = 0xF0;
dat[2] = 0x0F;
dat[4] = 0; // ensure that message received flag is 0
dat[5] = 0; // ensure that error flag is 0
dat[6] = 0;
RS485Master_Send(dat,1,160);
MikroElektronika
469
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
URXISEL1_U2STA_bit = 0;
NSTDIS_bit = 1; // no nesting of interrupts
U2RXIE_bit = 1; // enable intterupt
while (1){
// upon completed valid message receiving
// data[4] is set to 255
cnt++;
if (dat[5]) { // if an error detected, signal it
PORTD = 0xAA; // by setting portd to 0xAA
}
if (dat[4]) { // if message received successfully
cnt = 0;
dat[4] = 0; // clear message received flag
j = dat[3];
for (i = 1; i <= dat[3]; i++) { // show data on PORTB
PORTB = dat[i-1];
} // increment received dat[0]
dat[0] = dat[0]+1; // send back to master
Delay_ms(1);
}
if (cnt > 100000) {
PORTD ++;
cnt = 0;
if (PORTD > 10) // if sending failed 10 times
RS485Master_Send(dat,1,50); // send message on broadcast address
}
}
// function to be properly linked.
}
RS485 Slave code:
sbit rs485_rxtx_pin at RF2_bit; // set transcieve pin

sbit rs485_rxtx_pin_direction at TRISF2_bit; // set transcieve pin direction
char dat[9]; // buffer for receving/sending messages

char i,j;
void interrupt() org IVT_ADDR_U2RXINTERRUPT{
RS485Slave_Receive(dat);
}
MikroElektronika
470
void main() {
ADPCFG = 0xFFFF;
PORTB = 0;
PORTD = 0;
TRISB = 0;
TRISD = 0;

Delay_ms(100);
RS485Slave_Init(160); // Intialize MCU as slave, address 160
dat[0] = 0xAA;
dat[1] = 0xF0;
dat[2] = 0x0F;
dat[4] = 0; // ensure that message received flag is 0
dat[5] = 0; // ensure that error flag is 0
dat[6] = 0;
NSTDIS_bit = 1; // no nesting of interrupts
U2RXIE_bit = 1; // enable intterupt
while (1) {
if (dat[5]) { // if an error detected, signal it by
PORTD = 0xAA; // setting portd to 0xAA
dat[5] = 0;
}
if (dat[4]) { // upon completed valid message receive
dat[4] = 0; // data[4] is set to 0xFF
j = dat[3];
for (i = 1; i <= dat[3];i++){
PORTB = dat[i-1];
}
dat[0] = dat[0]+1; // increment received dat[0]
Delay_ms(1);
RS485Slave_Send(dat,1); // and send it back to master
}
}
}
MikroElektronika
471
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
HW Connection
Example of interfacing PC to dsPIC MCU via RS485 bus with LTC485 as RS-485 transceiver
MikroElektronika
472
Message format and CRC calculations

Q: How is CRC checksum calculated on RS485 master side?
START_BYTE = 0x96; // 10010110

STOP_BYTE = 0xA9; // 10101001
PACKAGE:
--------
START_BYTE 0x96
ADDRESS
DATALEN
[DATA1] // if exists
CRC
STOP_BYTE 0xA9
DATALEN bits
------------
bit7 = 1 MASTER SENDS
0 SLAVE SENDS
bit6 = 1 ADDRESS WAS XORed with 1, IT WAS EQUAL TO START_BYTE or STOP_BYTE
0 ADDRESS UNCHANGED
bit5 = 0 FIXED
bit4 = 1 DATA3 (if exists) WAS XORed with 1, IT WAS EQUAL TO START_BYTE or STOP_BYTE
0 DATA3 (if exists) UNCHANGED
bit1bit0 = 0 to 3 NUMBER OF DATA BYTES SEND
CRC generation :
----------------
crc_send = datalen ^ address;
crc_send ^= data[0]; // if exists
crc_send = ~crc_send;
if ((crc_send == START_BYTE) || (crc_send == STOP_BYTE))
crc_send++;
NOTE: DATALEN<4..0> can not take the START_BYTE<4..0> or STOP_BYTE<4..0> values.
MikroElektronika
473
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Software I²C Library

The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides routines for implementing Software I²C communication. These
routines are hardware independent and can be used with any MCU. The Software I²C library enables you to use MCU
as Master in I²C communication. Multi-master mode is not supported.
Important :
- This library implements time-based activities, so interrupts need to be disabled when using Software I²C.
- All I²C Library functions are blocking-call functions (they are waiting for I²C clock line to become logical one).
- The pins used for the Software I²C communication should be connected to the pull-up resistors. Turning off the LEDs
connected to these pins may also be required.
- Every Software I²C library routine has its own counterpart in Hardware I²C library, except I2C_Repeated_Start.
Soft_I2C_Start is used instead of I2C_Repeated_Start.
- Working clock frequency of the Software I²C is 20kHz.
External dependencies of Software I²C Library

defined in all projects using RS-485 Description : Example :
Library:
extern sbit Soft_I2C_Scl; Soft I²C Clock line. sbit Soft_I2C_Scl at RB11_bit;
extern sbit Soft_I2C_Sda; Soft I²C Data line. sbit Soft_I2C_Sda at RB12_bit;
extern sbit Soft_I2C_Scl_ Direction of the Soft I²C Clock sbit Soft_I2C_Scl_Direction at
extern sbit Soft_I2C_Sda_ Direction of the Soft I²C Data sbit Soft_I2C_Sda_Direction at
Library Routines
- Soft_I2C_Init
- Soft_I2C_Start
- Soft_I2C_Read
- Soft_I2C_Write
- Soft_I2C_Stop
- Soft_I2C_Break
MikroElektronika
474
Soft_I2C_Init
Prototype void Soft_I2C_Init();
Description Configures the software I²C module.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
- Soft_I2C_Scl: Soft I²C clock line

- Soft_I2C_Sda: Soft I²C data line
- Soft_I2C_Scl_Pin_Direction: Direction of the Soft I²C clock pin
- Soft_I2C_Sda_Pin_Direction: Direction of the Soft I²C data pin

Example // Software I2C connections
sbit Soft_I2C_Scl at RB11_bit;
sbit Soft_I2C_Sda at RB12_bit;
sbit Soft_I2C_Scl_Direction at TRISB11_bit;
sbit Soft_I2C_Sda_Direction at TRISB12_bit;
// End Software I2C connections
...
Soft_I2C_Init();
Notes None
Soft_I2C_Start
Prototype void Soft_I2C_Start();
Description Determines if the I²C bus is free and issues START signal.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Software I²C must be configured before using this function. See Soft_I2C_Init routine.
Example // Issue START signal
Soft_I2C_Start();
Notes None
MikroElektronika
475
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Soft_I2C_Read
Prototype unsigned short Soft_I2C_Read(unsigned int ack);
Description Reads one byte from the slave.
Parameters - ack: acknowledge signal parameter. If the ack==0 not acknowledge signal will be sent after reading,
otherwise the acknowledge signal will be sent.
Returns One byte from the Slave.
Requires Soft I²C must be configured before using this function. See Soft_I2C_Init routine.
Also, START signal needs to be issued in order to use this function. See Soft_I2C_Start routine.
Example unsigned short take;
...
// Read data and send the not_acknowledge signal
take = Soft_I2C_Read(0);
Notes None
Soft_I2C_Write
Prototype unsigned short Soft_I2C_Write(unsigned short data_);
Description Sends data byte via the I²C bus.
Parameters - data_: data to be sent
Returns - 0 if there were no errors.
- 1 if write collision was detected on the I²C bus.
Also, START signal needs to be issued in order to use this function. See Soft_I2C_Start routine.
Example unsigned short data_, error;
...
error = Soft_I2C_Write(data_);
error = Soft_I2C_Write(0xA3);
Notes None
MikroElektronika
476
Soft_I2C_Stop
Prototype void Soft_I2C_Stop();
Description Issues STOP signal.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Example // Issue STOP signal
Soft_I2C_Stop();
Notes None
MikroElektronika
477
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Soft_I2C_Break
Prototype void Soft_I2C_Break();
Description All Software I²C Library functions can block the program flow (see note at the top of this page). Calling
this routine from interrupt will unblock the program execution. This mechanism is similar to WDT.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example // Software I2C connections
sbit Soft_I2C_Scl at RC0_bit;
sbit Soft_I2C_Sda at RC1_bit;
sbit Soft_I2C_Scl_Direction at TRISC0_bit;
sbit Soft_I2C_Sda_Direction at TRISC1_bit;
char counter = 0;

Soft_I2C_Break();
}
else

}
void main() {
...
// try Soft_I2C_Init with blocking prevention mechanism

T1CON = 0x8030; // Timer1 ON, internal clock FCY, prescaler
1:256
Soft_I2C_Init();
}
Notes Interrupts should be disabled before using Software I²C routines again (see note at the top of this
page).
MikroElektronika
478
Library Example
The example demonstrates use of the Software I²C Library. The dsPIC30/33 or PIC24 MCU is connected (SCL, SDA
pins) to PCF8583 RTC (real-time clock). Program sends date/time to RTC.
char seconds, minutes, hours, day, month, year; // Global date/time variables
// Software I2C connections

sbit Soft_I2C_Scl at RB11_bit;
sbit Soft_I2C_Sda at RB12_bit;
sbit Soft_I2C_Scl_Direction at TRISB11_bit;
sbit Soft_I2C_Sda_Direction at TRISB12_bit;


//--------------------- Reads time and date information from RTC (PCF8583)

void Read_Time() {
Soft_I2C_Start(); // Issue start signal

Soft_I2C_Write(0xA0); // Address PCF8583, see PCF8583 datasheet
Soft_I2C_Write(2); // Start from address 2
Soft_I2C_Start(); // Issue repeated start signal
Soft_I2C_Write(0xA1); // Address PCF8583 for reading R/W=1
seconds = Soft_I2C_Read(1); // Read seconds byte

minutes = Soft_I2C_Read(1); // Read minutes byte
hours = Soft_I2C_Read(1); // Read hours byte
day = Soft_I2C_Read(1); // Read year/day byte
month = Soft_I2C_Read(0); // Read weekday/month byte
Soft_I2C_Stop(); // Issue stop signal
MikroElektronika
479
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
//-------------------- Formats date and time

void Transform_Time() {
seconds = ((seconds & 0xF0) >> 4)*10 + (seconds & 0x0F); // Transform seconds
minutes = ((minutes & 0xF0) >> 4)*10 + (minutes & 0x0F); // Transform months
hours = ((hours & 0xF0) >> 4)*10 + (hours & 0x0F); // Transform hours
year = (day & 0xC0) >> 6; // Transform year
day = ((day & 0x30) >> 4)*10 + (day & 0x0F); // Transform day
month = ((month & 0x10) >> 4)*10 + (month & 0x0F); // Transform month
}
//-------------------- Output values to LCD

void Display_Time() {
Lcd_Chr(1, 6, (day / 10) + 48); // Print tens digit of day variable

Lcd_Chr(1, 7, (day % 10) + 48); // Print oness digit of day variable
Lcd_Chr(1, 9, (month / 10) + 48);
Lcd_Chr(1,10, (month % 10) + 48);
Lcd_Chr(1,15, year + 56); // Print year vaiable + 8 (start from year 2008)
Lcd_Chr(2, 6, (hours / 10) + 48);

Lcd_Chr(2, 7, (hours % 10) + 48);
Lcd_Chr(2, 9, (minutes / 10) + 48);
Lcd_Chr(2,10, (minutes % 10) + 48);
Lcd_Chr(2,12, (seconds / 10) + 48);
Lcd_Chr(2,13, (seconds % 10) + 48);
}
//------------------ Performs project-wide init

void Init_Main() {
Soft_I2C_Init(); // Initialize Soft I2C communication

Lcd_Cmd(_LCD_CLEAR); // Clear LCD display
Lcd_Cmd(_LCD_CURSOR_OFF); // Turn cursor off
Lcd_Out(1,1,"Date:"); // Prepare and output static text on LCD

Lcd_Chr(1,8,':');
Lcd_Chr(1,11,':');
Lcd_Out(2,1,"Time:");
Lcd_Chr(2,8,':');
Lcd_Chr(2,11,':');
Lcd_Out(1,12,"200");
}
//----------------- Main procedure

void main() {
Delay_ms(2000);
Init_Main(); // Perform initialization

Read_Time(); // Read time from RTC(PCF8583)
Transform_Time(); // Format date and time
Display_Time(); // Prepare and display on LCD
Delay_ms(1000); // Wait 1 second

}
}
MikroElektronika
480
Software SPI Library

The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides routines for implementing Software SPI communication.
These routines are hardware independent and can be used with any MCU. The Software SPI Library provides easy
communication with other devices via SPI: A/D converters, D/A converters, MAX7219, LTC1290, etc.
Library configuration:
- SPI to Master mode

- Clock value = 20 kHz.
- Data sampled at the middle of interval.
- Clock idle state low.
- Data sampled at the middle of interval.
- Data transmitted at low to high edge.
The library configures SPI to the master mode, clock = 20kHz, data sampled at the middle of interval, clock idle state
low and data transmitted at low to high edge.
Important : The Software SPI library implements time-based activities, so interrupts need to be disabled when using it.
External dependencies of Software SPI Library

Software SPI Library:
extern sfr sbit SoftSpi_SDI; Data In line. sbit SoftSpi_SDI at RF4_bit;
extern sfr sbit SoftSpi_SDO; Data Out line. sbit SoftSpi_SDO at LATF3_bit;
extern sfr sbit SoftSpi_CLK; Clock line. sbit SoftSpi_CLK at LATF6_bit;
extern sfr sbit SoftSpi_SDI_ sbit SoftSpi_SDI_Direction at
Direction of the Data In pin.
extern sfr sbit SoftSpi_SDO_ sbit SoftSpi_SDO_Direction at
Direction of the Data Out pin
extern sfr sbit SoftSpi_CLK_ sbit SoftSpi_CLK_Direction at
Direction of the Clock pin.
Library Routines
- Soft_SPI_Init
- Soft_SPI_Read
- Soft_SPI_Write
MikroElektronika
481
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Soft_SPI_Init
Prototype void Soft_SPI_Init();
Description Routine initializes the software SPI module.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
- SoftSpi_SDI: Data in line

- SoftSpi_SDO: Data out line
- SoftSpi_CLK: Data clock line
- SoftSpi_SDI_Direction: Direction of the Data in pin
- SoftSpi_SDO_Direction: Direction of the Data out pin
- SoftSpi_CLK_Direction: Direction of the Data clock pin

Example // Software SPI module connections
sbit SoftSpi_SDI at RF4_bit;
sbit SoftSpi_SDO at LATF3_bit;
sbit SoftSpi_CLK at LATF6_bit;
sbit SoftSpi_SDI_Direction at TRISF4_bit;

sbit SoftSpi_SDO_Direction at TRISF3_bit;
sbit SoftSpi_CLK_Direction at TRISF6_bit;
// End Software SPI module connections
...
Soft_SPI_Init(); // Init Soft_SPI
Notes None
MikroElektronika
482
Soft_SPI_Read
Prototype unsigned short Soft_SPI_Read(char sdata);
Description This routine performs 3 operations simultaneously. It provides clock for the Software SPI bus, reads
a byte and sends a byte.
Parameters - sdata: data to be sent.
Returns Byte received via the SPI bus.
Requires Soft SPI must be initialized before using this function. See Soft_SPI_Init routine.
Example unsigned short data_read;
char data_send;
...
// Read a byte and assign it to data_read variable
// (data_send byte will be sent via SPI during the Read operation)
data_read = Soft_SPI_Read(data_send);
Notes None
Soft_SPI_Write
Prototype void Soft_SPI_Write(char sdata);
Description This routine sends one byte via the Software SPI bus.
Parameters - sdata: data to be sent.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Soft SPI must be initialized before using this function. See Soft_SPI_Init.
Example // Write a byte to the Soft SPI bus
Soft_SPI_Write(0xAA);
Notes None
Library Example
This code demonstrates using library routines for Soft_SPI communication. Also, this example demonstrates working
with max7219. Eight 7 segment displays are connected to MAX7219. MAX7219 is connected to SDO, SDI, SCK pins
are connected accordingly.
// DAC module connections

sbit Chip_Select at LATF0_bit;
sbit SoftSpi_CLK at LATF6_bit;
sbit SoftSpi_SDI at RF4_bit;
sbit SoftSpi_SDO at LATF3_bit;
sbit Chip_Select_Direction at TRISF0_bit;

sbit SoftSpi_CLK_Direction at TRISF6_bit;
sbit SoftSpi_SDI_Direction at TRISF4_bit;
sbit SoftSpi_SDO_Direction at TRISF3_bit;
// End DAC module connections
MikroElektronika
483
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
unsigned int value;
void InitMain() {
TRISB0_bit = 1; // Set RB0 pin as input
Chip_Select = 1; // Deselect DAC
Chip_Select_Direction = 0; // Set CS# pin as Output
Soft_SPI_Init(); // Initialize Soft_SPI
}
// DAC increments (0..4095) --> output voltage (0..Vref)

void DAC_Output(unsigned int valueDAC) {
char temp;
Chip_Select = 0; // Select DAC chip
// Send High Byte

temp = (valueDAC >> 8) & 0x0F; // Store valueDAC[11..8] to temp[3..0]
temp |= 0x30; // Define DAC setting, see MCP4921 datasheet
Soft_SPI_Write(temp); // Send high byte via Soft SPI
// Send Low Byte

temp = valueDAC; // Store valueDAC[7..0] to temp[7..0]
Soft_SPI_Write(temp); // Send low byte via Soft SPI
Chip_Select = 1; // Deselect DAC chip

}
void main() {
InitMain(); // Perform main initialization
value = 2048; // When program starts, DAC gives

// the output in the mid-range
if ((RB0_bit) && (value < 4095)) { // If RB0 button is pressed

value++; // increment value
}
else {
if ((RB1_bit) && (value > 0)) { // If RB1 button is pressed
value--; // decrement value
}
}
DAC_Output(value); // Send value to DAC chip

Delay_ms(1); // Slow down key repeat pace
}
}
MikroElektronika
484
Software UART Library

The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides routines for implementing Software UART communication. These
routines are hardware independent and can be used with any MCU.
The Software UART Library provides easy communication with other devices via the RS232 protocol.
Important : The Software UART library implements time-based activities, so interrupts need to be disabled when using it.
Library Routines
- Soft_UART_Init
- Soft_UART_Read
- Soft_UART_Write
- Soft_UART_Break
Soft_UART_Init
Prototype char Soft_UART_Init(unsigned int *port, unsigned int rx, unsigned int tx,
unsigned long baud_rate, unsigned int inverted);
Description Configures and initializes the software UART module.
Software UART routines use Delay_Cyc routine. If requested baud rate is too low then calculated
parameter for calling Delay_Cyc exceeds Delay_Cyc argument range.
If requested baud rate is too high then rounding error of Delay_Cyc argument corrupts Software UART
timings.
Parameters - port: software UART port address
- rx: receiver pin
- tx: transmiter pin
- baud_rate: requested baudrate. Maximum baud rate depends on the MCU’s clock and working
conditions
- inverted: if set to non-zero value, indicates inverted logic on output
Returns - 2 - error, requested baud rate is too low
- 1 - error, requested baud rate is too high
- 0 - successful initialization
Requires Nothing.
Example This will initialize software UART and establish the communication at 9600 bps:
char error;
...
error = Soft_UART_Init(&PORTF, 4, 5, 14400, 0); // Initialize Soft UART
at 14400 bps
Notes The Software UART library implements time-based activities, so interrupts need to be disabled when
using it.
MikroElektronika
485
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Soft_UART_Read
Prototype char Soft_UART_Read(char *error);
Description The function receives a byte via software UART.
This is a blocking function call (waits for start bit). Programmer can unblock it by calling Soft_UART_
Break routine.
Parameters - error: Error flag. Error code is returned through this variable. Values :
- 0 - no error
- 1 - stop bit error
- 255 - user abort, Soft_UART_Break called
Returns Byte received via UART.
Requires Software UART must be initialized before using this function. See the Soft_UART_Init routine.
Example char data_;
char error;
...
// wait until data is received
do
data = Soft_UART_Read(&error);
while (error);
// Now we can work with data:

if (data_) {...}
using it.
Soft_UART_Write
Prototype void Soft_UART_Write(char udata);
Description This routine sends one byte via the Software UART bus.
Parameters - udata: data to be sent.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Software UART must be initialized before using this function. See the Soft_UART_Init routine.
Be aware that during transmission, software UART is incapable of receiving data – data transfer
protocol must be set in such a way to prevent loss of information.
Example char some_byte = 0x0A;
...
// Write a byte via Soft UART
Soft_UART_Write(some_byte);
using it.
MikroElektronika
486
Soft_UART_Break
Prototype void Soft_UART_Break();
Description Soft_UART_Read is blocking routine and it can block the program flow. Calling Soft_UART_Break
routine from the interrupt will unblock the program execution. This mechanism is similar to WDT.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example char data1, error, counter = 0;

Soft_UART_Break();
}
else

}
void main() {
...
if (Soft_UART_Init(&PORTF, 4, 5, 14400, 0) = 0)
Soft_UART_Write(0x55);
...
// try Soft_UART_Read with blocking prevention mechanism

T1CON = 0x8030; // Timer1 ON, internal clock FCY, prescaler 1:256
data1 = Soft_UART_Read(&error);
}
using it.
MikroElektronika
487
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Library Example
This example demonstrates simple data exchange via software UART. If MCU is connected to the PC, you can test the
example from the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 USART communication terminal, launch it from the drop-
down menu Tools › USART Terminal or simply click the USART Terminal Icon .
char i, error, byte_read; // Auxiliary variables
void main(){
ADPCFG = 0xFFFF;
TRISB = 0; // Set PORTB as output (error signalization)

LATB = 0;
error = Soft_UART_Init(&PORTF, 4, 5, 14400, 0); // Initialize Soft UART at 14400 bps

if (error > 0) {
LATB = error; // Signalize Init error
while(1); // Stop program
}
Delay_ms(100);
for (i = 'z'; i >= 'A'; i--) { // Send bytes from 'z' downto 'A'
Soft_UART_Write(i);
Delay_ms(100);
}

byte_read = Soft_UART_Read(&error); // Read byte, then test error flag
if (error) // If error was detected
LATB = error; // signal it on PORTB
else
Soft_UART_Write(byte_read); // If error was not detected, return
byte read
}
}
MikroElektronika
488
Sound Library
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a Sound Library to supply users with routines necessary for sound
signalization in their applications. Sound generation needs additional hardware, such as piezo-speaker (example of
piezo-speaker interface is given on the schematic at the bottom of this page).
Library Routines
- Sound_Init
- Sound_Play
Sound_Init
Prototype void Sound_Init(unsigned int *snd_port, unsigned< int/b> snd_pin);
Description Configures the appropriate MCU pin for sound generation.
Parameters - snd_port: sound output port address
- snd_pin: sound output pin
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example // Initialize the pin RC3 for playing sound
Sound_Init(&PORTD, 3);
Notes None.
Sound_Play
Prototype void Sound_Play(unsigned int freq_in_hz, unsigned< int/b> duration_ms);
Description Generates the square wave signal on the appropriate pin.
Parameters - freq_in_hz: signal frequency in Hertz (Hz)
- duration_ms: signal duration in miliseconds (ms)
Returns Nothing.
Requires In order to hear the sound, you need a piezo speaker (or other hardware) on designated port. Also, you
must call Sound_Init to prepare hardware for output before using this function.
Example // Play sound of 1KHz in duration of 100ms
Sound_Play(1000, 100);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
489
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Library Example
The example is a simple demonstration of how to use the Sound Library for playing tones on a piezo speaker.
void Tone1() {
Sound_Play(659, 250); // Frequency = 659Hz, duration = 250ms
}
void Tone2() {
}
void Tone3() {
}
void Melody() { // Plays the melody "Yellow house"

Tone1(); Tone2(); Tone3(); Tone3();
Tone1(); Tone2(); Tone3();
Tone1(); Tone2(); Tone3();
Tone3(); Tone3(); Tone2(); Tone2(); Tone1();
}
void ToneA() {
Sound_Play( 880, 50);
}
void ToneC() {
}
void ToneE() {
}
void Melody2() {
unsigned short i;
for (i = 9; i > 0; i--) {
ToneA(); ToneC(); ToneE();
}
}
void main() {

TRISB = 0xF8; // Configure RB7..RB3 as input
LATB = 0;
Sound_Init(&PORTD, 3);
Sound_Play(880, 1000); // Play sound at 880Hz for 1 second
MikroElektronika
490
while (1) {
if (Button(&PORTB,7,1,1)) // RB7 plays Tone1
Tone1();
while (RB7_bit); // Wait for button to be released

Tone2();

Tone3();
if (Button(&PORTB,4,1,1)) // RB4 plays Melody2

Melody2();
if (Button(&PORTB,3,1,1)) // RB3 plays Melody

Melody();
}
}
HW Connection
Example of Sound Library
MikroElektronika
491
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI Library
The SPI module is available with all dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 MCUs. mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a
library for initializing the Slave mode and initializing and comfortable work with the Master mode. The dsPIC30/33 and
PIC24 can easily communicate with other devices via SPI: A/D converters, D/A converters, MAX7219, LTC1290, etc.
Important :
SPI library routines require you to specify the module you want to use. To select the desired SPI module, simply change
the letter x in the routine prototype for a number from 1 to 3.
Number of SPI modules per MCU differs from chip to chip. Please, read the appropriate datasheet before utilizing this
library.
Switching between the SPI modules in the SPI library is done by the SPI_Set_Active function (both SPI modules have
to be previously initialized).
Library Routines
- SPIx_Init
- SPIx_Init_Advanced
- SPIx_Read
- SPIx_Write
- SPI_Set_Active
MikroElektronika
492
SPIx_Init
Prototype void SPIx_Init();
Description Configures and initializes the SPI module with default settings.
Default settings:
- Master mode
- 8-bit data mode
- secondary prescaler 1:1
- primary prescaler 64:1
- Slave Select disabled
- input data sampled in the middle of interval
- clock idle state low
- Serial output data changes on transition from active clock state to idle clock state
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Requires MCU must have the SPI1 module.
Example // Initialize the SPI1 module with default settings
SPI1_Init();
Notes SPI library routines require you to specify the module you want to use. To select the desired SPI
Number of SPI modules per MCU differs from chip to chip. Please, read the appropriate datasheet
Switching between the SPI modules in the SPI library is done by the SPI_Set_Active function (both
SPI modules have to be previously initialized).
MikroElektronika
493
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPIx_Init_Advanced
Prototype void SPIx_Init_Advanced(unsigned master_mode, unsigned mode16, unsigned
sec_prescaler, unsigned pri_prescaler, unsigned slave_select, unsigned
data_sample, unsigned clock_idle, unsigned edge);
Description Configures and initializes the SPI module with user defined settings.
Parameters Parameters master_mode, mode16, sec_prescaler, pri_prescaler, slave_select, data_
sample, clock_idle and determine the working mode for SPI.
The master_mode parameter determines the working mode for SPI module.
Master/Slave mode
Master mode _SPI_MASTER
Slave mode _SPI_SLAVE
The parameter mode16 determines the data length mode, which can be 8-bits (per transmitions cycle)
or 16-bits.
Data Length Mode

16-bit mode _SPI_16_BIT
8-bit mode _SPI_8_BIT
The parameter sec_prescaler determines the value of the secondary SPI clock prescaler. Used
only in the Master Mode.
Secondary SPI Clock Prescaler Value

Secondary Prescaler 1:1 _SPI_PRESCALE_SEC_1
The parameter pri_prescaler determines the value of the primary SPI clock prescaler. Used only
in the Master Mode.
Primary SPI Clock Prescaler Value

Primary Prescaler 1:1 _SPI_PRESCALE_PRI_1
MikroElektronika
494
Parameters The parameter slave_select determines whether the Slave Select (SS) pin is used in communication.
Valid in the Slave Mode only.
Slave Select Enable/Disable

SS used for the Slave mode _SPI_SS_ENABLE
SS not used for the Slave mode _SPI_SS_DISABLE
The parameter data_sample determines the sample moment (phase) of input data.
Data Sampling Moment

Data sampled in the middle of data output time _SPI_DATA_SAMPLE_MIDDLE
Data sampled at end of data output time _SPI_DATA_SAMPLE_END
The parameter clock_idle determines the behaviour of the SPI clock (CLK) line in IDLE phase.
Clock Polarity
IDLE state is Lo, ACTIVE state is Hi _SPI_CLK_IDLE_LOW
IDLE state is Hi, ACTIVE state is Lo _SPI_CLK_IDLE_HIGH
The parameter edge determines on which clock edge data is considered to be valid.
Clock Edge
Data is valid on ACTIVE-to-IDLE transition _SPI_ACTIVE_2_IDLE
Data is valid on IDLE-to-ACTIVE transition _SPI_IDLE_2_ACTIVE
Returns Nothing.
Requires MCU must have the SPI module.
Example // Set SPI1 to the Master Mode, data length is 16-bit, clock = Fcy (no clock
scaling), data sampled in the middle of interval, clock IDLE state high and
data transmitted at low to high clock edge:
PRESCALE_PRI_1, _SPI_SS_DISABLE, _SPI_DATA_SAMPLE_MIDDLE, _SPI_CLK_IDLE_
MikroElektronika
495
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPIx_Read
Prototype unsigned SPIx_Read(unsigned buffer);
Description Reads one word or byte (depending on mode set by init routines) from the SPI bus.
Parameters - data_out: dummy data for clock generation (see device Datasheet for SPI modules implementation
details)
Requires Routine requires at least one SPI module.
Used SPI module must be initialized before using this function. See the SPIx_Init and SPIx_Init_
Advanced routines.
Example // read a byte from the SPI bus
char take, buffer;
...
take = SPI1_Read(buffer);
SPIx_Write
Prototype void SPIx_Write(unsigned data_out);
Description Writes one word or byte (depending on mode set by init routines) via the SPI bus.
Parameters - data_out: data to be sent
Requires Routine requires at least one SPI module.
Advanced routines.
Example // write a byte to the SPI bus
char buffer;
...
SPI1_Write(buffer);
MikroElektronika
496
SPI_Set_Active
Prototype void SPI_Set_Active(unsigned (*read_ptr)(unsigned), void(*write_ptr)
(unsigned));
Description Sets the active SPI module which will be used by the SPIx_Read and SPIx_Write routines.
Parameters Parameters :
- read_ptr: SPI1_Read handler

- write_ptr: SPI1_Write handler
Returns Nothing.
Requires Routine is available only for MCUs with multiple SPI modules.
Advanced routines.
Example SPI_Set_Active(SPI1_Read, SPI1_Write); // Sets the SPI1 module active
Notes Number of SPI modules per MCU differs from chip to chip. Please, read the appropriate datasheet
Library Example
The code demonstrates how to use SPI library functions for communication between SPI2 module of the MCU and
MCP4921 DAC chip.
// DAC module connections

sbit Chip_Select at LATF0_bit;
sbit Chip_Select_Direction at TRISF0_bit;
// End DAC module connections
unsigned int value;
void InitMain() {
Chip_Select = 1; // Deselect DAC
Chip_Select_Direction = 0; // Set CS# pin as Output
SPI1_Init(); // Initialize SPI module
}
// DAC increments (0..4095) --> output voltage (0..Vref)

void DAC_Output(unsigned int valueDAC) {
char temp;
Chip_Select = 0; // Select DAC chip
// Send High Byte

temp = (valueDAC >> 8) & 0x0F; // Store valueDAC[11..8] to temp[3..0]
temp |= 0x30; // Define DAC setting, see MCP4921 datasheet
SPI1_Write(temp); // Send high byte via SPI
MikroElektronika
497
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
// Send Low Byte

temp = valueDAC; // Store valueDAC[7..0] to temp[7..0]
SPI1_Write(temp); // Send low byte via SPI
Chip_Select = 1; // Deselect DAC chip

}
void main() {
InitMain(); // Perform main initialization
value = 2048; // When program starts, DAC gives

// the output in the mid-range
if ((RB0_bit) && (value < 4095)) { // If RB0 button is pressed

value++; // increment value
}
else {
if ((RB1_bit) && (value > 0)) { // If RB1 button is pressed
value--; // decrement value
}
}
DAC_Output(value); // Send value to DAC chip
Delay_ms(1); // Slow down key repeat pace
}
}
HW Connection
SPI HW connection
MikroElektronika
498
SPI Ethernet Library

The ENC28J60 is a stand-alone Ethernet controller with an industry standard Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI). It is
designed to serve as an Ethernet network interface for any controller equipped with SPI.
The ENC28J60 meets all of the IEEE 802.3 specifications. It incorporates a number of packet filtering schemes to limit
incoming packets. It also provides an internal DMA module for fast data throughput and hardware assisted IP checksum
calculations. Communication with the host controller is implemented via two interrupt pins and the SPI, with data rates
of up to 10 Mb/s. Two dedicated pins are used for LED link and network activity indication.
This library is designed to simplify handling of the underlying hardware (ENC28J60). It works with any dsPIC30/33
and PIC24 with integrated SPI and more than 4 Kb ROM memory. 38 to 40 MHz clock is recommended to get from 8
to 10 Mhz SPI clock, otherwise dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 should be clocked by ENC28J60 clock output due to its silicon
bug in SPI hardware. If you try lower dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 clock speed, there might be board hang or miss some
requests.
SPI Ethernet library supports:
- IPv4 protocol.
- ARP requests.
- ICMP echo requests.
- UDP requests.
- TCP requests (no stack, no packet reconstruction).
- ARP client with cache.
- DNS client.
- UDP client.
- DHCP client.
- packet fragmentation is NOT supported.
Important :
- Global library variable SPI_Ethernet_userTimerSec is used to keep track of time for all client implementations
(ARP, DNS, UDP and DHCP). It is user responsibility to increment this variable each second in it's code if any of the
clients is used.
- For advanced users there are header files ("eth_enc28j60LibDef.h" and "eth_enc28j60LibPrivate.h") in
Uses folder of the compiler with description of all routines and global variables, relevant to the user, implemented in the
SPI Ethernet Library.
- The appropriate hardware SPI module must be initialized before using any of the SPI Ethernet library routines. Refer
to SPI Library.
- For MCUs with multiple SPI modules it is possible to initialize them and then switch by using the SPI_Set_Active()
routine.
MikroElektronika
499
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
External dependencies of SPI Ethernet Library

defined in all projects using SPI Description : Example :
Ethernet Library:
extern sfr sbit SPI_Ethernet_ sbit SPI_Ethernet_CS at LATF1_
ENC28J60 chip select pin.
CS; bit;
extern sfr sbit SPI_Ethernet_ sbit SPI_Ethernet_Rst at LATF0_
ENC28J60 reset pin.
RST; bit;
extern sfr sbit SPI_Ethernet_ Direction of the ENC28J60 sbit SPI_Ethernet_CS_Direction
CS_Direction; chip select pin. at TRISF1_bit;
extern sfr sbit SPI_Ethernet_ Direction of the ENC28J60 sbit SPI_Ethernet_Rst_Direction
RST_Direction; reset pin. at TRISF0_bit;
The following routines must be
defined in all project using SPI Description: Examples :
Ethernet Library:
unsigned int SPI_Ethernet_
UserTCP(unsigned char
*remoteHost, unsigned int
Refer to the library example at the bottom of
remotePort, unsigned int TCP request handler.
this page for code implementation.
localPort, unsigned int
reqLength, TEthPktFlags
*flags);
unsigned int SPI_Ethernet_
UserUDP(unsigned char
*remoteHost, unsigned int
Refer to the library example at the bottom of
remotePort, unsigned int UDP request handler.
this page for code implementation.
reqLength, TEthPktFlags
*flags);
MikroElektronika
500
Library Routines
- SPI_Ethernet_Init
- SPI_Ethernet_Enable
- SPI_Ethernet_Disable
- SPI_Ethernet_doPacket
- SPI_Ethernet_putByte
- SPI_Ethernet_putBytes
- SPI_Ethernet_putString
- SPI_Ethernet_putConstString
- SPI_Ethernet_putConstBytes
- SPI_Ethernet_getByte
- SPI_Ethernet_getBytes
- SPI_Ethernet_UserTCP
- SPI_Ethernet_UserUDP
- SPI_Ethernet_getIpAddress
- SPI_Ethernet_getGwIpAddress
- SPI_Ethernet_getDnsIpAddress
- SPI_Ethernet_getIpMask
- SPI_Ethernet_confNetwork
- SPI_Ethernet_arpResolve
- SPI_Ethernet_sendUDP
- SPI_Ethernet_dnsResolve
- SPI_Ethernet_initDHCP
- SPI_Ethernet_doDHCPLeaseTime
- SPI_Ethernet_renewDHCP
SPIx_Write
Prototype void SPI_Ethernet_Init(unsigned char *mac, unsigned char *ip, unsigned char
fullDuplex);
Description This is MAC module routine. It initializes ENC28J60 controller. This function is internaly splited into 2
parts to help linker when coming short of memory.
ENC28J60 controller settings (parameters not mentioned here are set to default):
- receive buffer start address : 0x0000.

- receive buffer end address : 0x19AD.
- transmit buffer start address: 0x19AE.
- transmit buffer end address : 0x1FFF.
- RAM buffer read/write pointers in auto-increment mode.
- receive filters set to default: CRC + MAC Unicast + MAC Broadcast in OR mode.
- flow control with TX and RX pause frames in full duplex mode.
- frames are padded to 60 bytes + CRC.
- maximum packet size is set to 1518.
- Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap: 0x15 in full duplex mode; 0x12 in half duplex mode.
- Non-Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap: 0x0012 in full duplex mode; 0x0C12 in half duplex mode.
- Collision window is set to 63 in half duplex mode to accomodate some ENC28J60 revisions silicon bugs.
- CLKOUT output is disabled to reduce EMI generation.
- half duplex loopback disabled.
- LED configuration: default (LEDA-link status, LEDB-link activity).
MikroElektronika
501
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPIx_Write
Parameters - mac: RAM buffer containing valid MAC address.
- ip: RAM buffer containing valid IP address.
- fullDuplex: ethernet duplex mode switch. Valid values: 0 (half duplex mode) and 1 (full duplex
mode).
- SPI_Ethernet_CS: Chip Select line

- SPI_Ethernet_CS_Direction: Direction of the Chip Select pin
- SPI_Ethernet_RST: Reset line
- SPI_Ethernet_RST_Direction: Direction of the Reset pin
Example #define SPI_Ethernet_HALFDUPLEX 0
#define SPI_Ethernet_FULLDUPLEX 1
// mE ethernet NIC pinout

sfr sbit SPI_Ethernet_Rst at RF0_bit;
sfr sbit SPI_Ethernet_CS at RF1_bit;
sfr sbit SPI_Ethernet_Rst_Direction at TRISF0_bit;
sfr sbit SPI_Ethernet_CS_Direction at TRISF1_bit;
// end ethernet NIC definitions
unsigned char myMacAddr[6] = {0x00, 0x14, 0xA5, 0x76, 0x19, 0x3f}; // my MAC
address
unsigned char myIpAddr = {192, 168, 1, 60 }; // my IP addr
SPI1_Init();
SPI_Ethernet_Init(myMacAddr, myIpAddr, SPI_Ethernet_FULLDUPLEX);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
502
SPI_Ethernet_Enable
Prototype void SPI_Ethernet_Enable(unsigned char enFlt);
Description This is MAC module routine. This routine enables appropriate network traffic on the ENC28J60 module
by the means of it’s receive filters (unicast, multicast, broadcast, crc). Specific type of network traffic
will be enabled if a corresponding bit of this routine’s input parameter is set. Therefore, more than one
type of network traffic can be enabled at the same time. For this purpose, predefined library constants
(see the table below) can be ORed to form appropriate input value.
Advanced filtering available in the ENC28J60 module such as Pattern Match, Magic Packet and
Hash Table can not be enabled by this routine. Additionaly, all filters, except CRC, enabled with this
routine will work in OR mode, which means that packet will be received if any of the enabled filters
accepts it.
This routine will change receive filter configuration on-the-fly. It will not, in any way, mess with enabling/
disabling receive/transmit logic or any other part of the ENC28J60 module. The ENC28J60 module
should be properly cofigured by the means of SPI_Ethernet_Init routine.
Parameters - enFlt: network traffic/receive filter flags. Each bit corresponds to the appropriate network traffic/
receive filter:
Bit Mask Description Predefined library const

MAC Broadcast traffic/receive filter flag. When set, _SPI_Ethernet_
0 0x01
MAC broadcast traffic will be enabled. BROADCAST
MAC Multicast traffic/receive filter flag. When set, _SPI_Ethernet_
1 0x02
MAC multicast traffic will be enabled. MULTICAST
2 0x04 not used none
CRC check flag. When set, packets with invalid
5 0x20 _SPI_Ethernet_CRC
CRC field will be discarded.
MAC Unicast traffic/receive filter flag. When set,
7 0x80 _SPI_Ethernet_UNICAST
MAC unicast traffic will be enabled.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Ethernet module has to be initialized. See SPI_Ethernet_Init.
Example SPI_Ethernet_Enable(_SPI_Ethernet_CRC | _SPI_Ethernet_UNICAST); // enable
CRC checking and Unicast traffic
Notes Advanced filtering available in the ENC28J60 module such as Pattern Match, Magic Packet
and Hash Table can not be enabled by this routine. Additionaly, all filters, except CRC, enabled with
this routine will work in OR mode, which means that packet will be received if any of the enabled filters
accepts it.
MikroElektronika
503
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Ethernet_Disable
Prototype void SPI_Ethernet_Disable(unsigned char disFlt);
Description This is MAC module routine. This routine disables appropriate network traffic on the ENC28J60 module
by the means of it’s receive filters (unicast, multicast, broadcast, crc). Specific type of network traffic
will be disabled if a corresponding bit of this routine’s input parameter is set. Therefore, more than one
type of network traffic can be disabled at the same time. For this purpose, predefined library constants
(see the table below) can be ORed to form appropriate input value.
Parameters - disFlt: network traffic/receive filter flags. Each bit corresponds to the appropriate network traffic/
receive filter:

MAC Broadcast traffic/receive filter flag. When set, _SPI_Ethernet_
0 0x01
MAC broadcast traffic will be disabled. BROADCAST
MAC Multicast traffic/receive filter flag. When set, MAC _SPI_Ethernet_
1 0x02
multicast traffic will be disabled. MULTICAST
CRC check flag. When set, CRC check will be disabled
5 0x20 _SPI_Ethernet_CRC
and packets with invalid CRC field will be accepted.
MAC Unicast traffic/receive filter flag. When set, MAC _SPI_Ethernet_
7 0x80
unicast traffic will be disabled. UNICAST
Returns Nothing.
Example SPI_Ethernet_Disable(_SPI_Ethernet_CRC | _SPI_Ethernet_UNICAST); // disable
CRC checking and Unicast traffic
and Hash Table can not be disabled by this routine.
MikroElektronika
504
SPI_Ethernet_doPacket
Prototype unsigned int SPI_Ethernet_doPacket();
Description This is MAC module routine. It processes next received packet if such exists. Packets are processed
in the following manner:
- ARP & ICMP requests are replied automatically.

- upon TCP request the SPI_Ethernet_UserTCP function is called for further processing.
- upon UDP request the SPI_Ethernet_UserUDP function is called for further processing.
Parameters None.
Returns - 0 - upon successful packet processing (zero packets received or received packet processed
successfully).
- 1 - upon reception error or receive buffer corruption. ENC28J60 controller needs to be restarted.
- 2 - received packet was not sent to us (not our IP, nor IP broadcast address).
- 3 - received IP packet was not IPv4.
- 4 - received packet was of type unknown to the library.
Example if (SPI_Ethernet_doPacket() == 0)(1) { // process received packets
...
}
Notes SPI_Ethernet_doPacket must be called as often as possible in user’s code.
SPI_Ethernet_putByte
Prototype void SPI_Ethernet_putByte(unsigned char v);
Description This is MAC module routine. It stores one byte to address pointed by the current ENC28J60 write
pointer (EWRPT).
Parameters - v: value to store
Returns Nothing.
Example char data_;
...
SPI_Ethernet_putByte(data); // put an byte into ENC28J60 buffer
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
505
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Ethernet_putBytes
Prototype void SPI_Ethernet_putBytes(unsigned char *ptr, unsigned int n);
Description This is MAC module routine. It stores requested number of bytes into ENC28J60 RAM starting from
current ENC28J60 write pointer (EWRPT) location.
Parameters - ptr: RAM buffer containing bytes to be written into ENC28J60 RAM.
- n: number of bytes to be written.
Returns Nothing.
Example char *buffer = “mikroElektronika”;
...
SPI_Ethernet_putBytes(buffer, 16); // put an RAM array into ENC28J60
buffer
Notes None.
SPI_Ethernet_putConstBytes
Prototype void SPI_Ethernet_putConstBytes(const unsigned char *ptr, unsigned int n);
Description This is MAC module routine. It stores requested number of const bytes into ENC28J60 RAM starting
from current ENC28J60 write pointer (EWRPT) location.
Parameters - ptr: const buffer containing bytes to be written into ENC28J60 RAM.
Returns Nothing.
Example const char *buffer = “mikroElektronika”;
...
SPI_Ethernet_putConstBytes(buffer, 16); // put a const array into ENC28J60
buffer
Notes None.
SPI_Ethernet_putString
Prototype unsigned int SPI_Ethernet_putString(unsigned char *ptr);
Description This is MAC module routine. It stores whole string (excluding null termination) into ENC28J60 RAM
starting from current ENC28J60 write pointer (EWRPT) location.
Parameters - ptr: string to be written into ENC28J60 RAM.
Returns Number of bytes written into ENC28J60 RAM.
...
SPI_Ethernet_putString(buffer); // put a RAM string into ENC28J60 buffer
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
506
SPI_Ethernet_putConstString
Prototype unsigned int SPI_Ethernet_putConstString(const unsigned char *ptr);
Description This is MAC module routine. It stores whole const string (excluding null termination) into ENC28J60
RAM starting from current ENC28J60 write pointer (EWRPT) location.
Parameters - ptr: const string to be written into ENC28J60 RAM.
...
SPI_Ethernet_putConstString(buffer); // put a const string into ENC28J60
buffer
Notes None.
SPI_Ethernet_getByte
Prototype unsigned char SPI_Ethernet_getByte();
Description This is MAC module routine. It fetches a byte from address pointed to by current ENC28J60 read
pointer (ERDPT).
Parameters None.
Returns Byte read from ENC28J60 RAM.
Example char buffer;
...
buffer = SPI_Ethernet_getByte(); // read a byte from ENC28J60 buffer
Notes None.
SPI_Ethernet_getBytes
Prototype void SPI_Ethernet_getBytes(unsigned char *ptr, unsigned int addr, unsigned
int n);
Description This is MAC module routine. It fetches equested number of bytes from ENC28J60 RAM starting from
given address. If value of 0xFFFF is passed as the address parameter, the reading will start from
current ENC28J60 read pointer (ERDPT) location.
Parameters - ptr: buffer for storing bytes read from ENC28J60 RAM.
- addr: ENC28J60 RAM start address. Valid values: 0..8192.
- n: number of bytes to be read.
Returns Nothing.
Example char buffer[16];
...
SPI_Ethernet_getBytes(buffer, 0x100, 16); // read 16 bytes, starting from
address 0x100
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
507
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Ethernet_UserTCP
Prototype unsigned int SPI_Ethernet_UserTCP(unsigned char *remoteHost, unsigned int
remotePort, unsigned int localPort, unsigned int reqLength, TEthPktFlags
*flags);
Description This is TCP module routine. It is internally called by the library. The user accesses to the TCP request
by using some of the SPI_Ethernet_get routines. The user puts data in the transmit buffer by using
some of the SPI_Ethernet_put routines. The function must return the length in bytes of the TCP reply,
or 0 if there is nothing to transmit. If there is no need to reply to the TCP requests, just define this
function with return(0) as a single statement.
Parameters - remoteHost: client’s IP address.
- remotePort: client’s TCP port.
- localPort: port to which the request is sent.
- reqLength: TCP request data field length.
- flags: structure consisted of two bit fields :
typedef struct {
unsigned canCloseTCP: 1; // flag which closes socket
unsigned isBroadcast: 1; // flag which denotes that the IP package has
been received via subnet broadcast address
} TEthPktFlags;
Returns - 0 - there should not be a reply to the request.
- Length of TCP reply data field - otherwise.
Example This function is internally called by the library and should not be called by the user’s code.
Notes The function source code is provided with appropriate example projects. The code should be adjusted
by the user to achieve desired reply.
MikroElektronika
508
SPI_Ethernet_UserUDP
Prototype unsigned int SPI_Ethernet_UserUDP(unsigned char *remoteHost, unsigned int
remotePort, unsigned int localPort, unsigned int reqLength, TEthPktFlags
*flags);
Description This is UDP module routine. It is internally called by the library. The user accesses to the UDP request
by using some of the SPI_Ethernet_get routines. The user puts data in the transmit buffer by using
some of the SPI_Ethernet_put routines. The function must return the length in bytes of the UDP reply,
or 0 if nothing to transmit. If you don’t need to reply to the UDP requests, just define this function with
a return(0) as single statement.
- remotePort: client’s port.
- reqLength: UDP request data field length.
typedef struct {
unsigned canCloseTCP: 1; // flag which closes TCP socket (not relevant
to UDP)
} TEthPktFlags;
- Length of UDP reply data field - otherwise.
MikroElektronika
509
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Ethernet_getIpAddress
Prototype unsigned char * SPI_Ethernet_getIpAddress();
Description This routine should be used when DHCP server is present on the network to fetch assigned IP
address.
Parameters None.
Returns Pointer to the global variable holding IP address.
Example unsigned char ipAddr[4]; // user IP address buffer
...
memcpy(ipAddr, SPI_Ethernet_getIpAddress(), 4); // fetch IP address
Notes User should always copy the IP address from the RAM location returned by this routine into it’s own IP
address buffer. These locations should not be altered by the user in any case!
SPI_Ethernet_getDnsIpAddress
Prototype unsigned char * SPI_Ethernet_getDnsIpAddress();
Description This routine should be used when DHCP server is present on the network to fetch assigned DNS IP
address.
Parameters None.
Returns Pointer to the global variable holding DNS IP address.
Example unsigned char dnsIpAddr[4]; // user DNS IP address buffer
...
memcpy(dnsIpAddr, SPI_Ethernet_getDnsIpAddress(), 4); // fetch DNS server
address
Notes User should always copy the IP address from the RAM location returned by this routine into it’s own
DNS IP address buffer. These locations should not be altered by the user in any case!
SPI_Ethernet_getIpMask
Prototype unsigned char * SPI_Ethernet_getIpMask();
Description This routine should be used when DHCP server is present on the network to fetch assigned IP subnet
mask.
Parameters None.
Returns Pointer to the global variable holding IP subnet mask.
Example unsigned char IpMask[4]; // user IP subnet mask buffer
...
memcpy(IpMask, SPI_Ethernet_getIpMask(), 4); // fetch IP subnet mask
subnet mask buffer. These locations should not be altered by the user in any case!
MikroElektronika
510
SPI_Ethernet_confNetwork
Prototype void SPI_Ethernet_confNetwork(char *ipMask, char *gwIpAddr, char
*dnsIpAddr);
Description Configures network parameters (IP subnet mask, gateway IP address, DNS IP address) when DHCP
is not used.
Parameters - ipMask: IP subnet mask.
- gwIpAddr gateway IP address.
- dnsIpAddr: DNS IP address.
Returns Nothing.
Example char ipMask[4] = {255, 255, 255, 0 }; // network mask (for example :
255.255.255.0)
char gwIpAddr[4] = {192, 168, 1, 1 }; // gateway (router) IP address
char dnsIpAddr[4] = {192, 168, 1, 1 }; // DNS server IP address
...
SPI_Ethernet_confNetwork(ipMask, gwIpAddr, dnsIpAddr); // set network
configuration parameters
Notes The above mentioned network parameters should be set by this routine only if DHCP module is not
used. Otherwise DHCP will override these settings.
SPI_Ethernet_arpResolve
Prototype unsigned char *SPI_Ethernet_arpResolve(unsigned char *ip, unsigned char
tmax);
Description This is ARP module routine. It sends an ARP request for given IP address and waits for ARP reply. If
the requested IP address was resolved, an ARP cash entry is used for storing the configuration. ARP
cash can store up to 3 entries. For ARP cash structure refer to “eth_enc28j60LibDef.h” header
file in the compiler’s Uses folder.
Parameters - ip: IP address to be resolved.
- tmax: time in seconds to wait for an reply.
Returns - MAC address behind the IP address - the requested IP address was resolved.
- 0 - otherwise.
Example unsigned char IpAddr[4] = {192, 168, 1, 1 }; // IP address
...
SPI_Ethernet_arpResolve(IpAddr, 5); // get MAC address behind the above IP
address, wait 5 secs for the response
Notes The Ethernet services are not stopped while this routine waits for ARP reply. The incoming packets will
be processed normaly during this time.
MikroElektronika
511
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Ethernet_sendUDP
Prototype unsigned int SPI_Ethernet_sendUDP(unsigned char *destIP, unsigned int
sourcePort, unsigned int destPort, unsigned char *pkt, unsigned int
pktLen);
Description This is UDP module routine. It sends an UDP packet on the network.
Parameters - destIP: remote host IP address.
- sourcePort: local UDP source port number.
- destPort: destination UDP port number.
- pkt: packet to transmit.
- pktLen: length in bytes of packet to transmit.
Returns - 1 - UDP packet was sent successfully.
- 0 - otherwise.
Example unsigned char IpAddr[4] = {192, 168, 1, 1 }; // remote IP address
...
SPI_Ethernet_sendUDP(IpAddr, 10001, 10001, “Hello”, 5); // send Hello message
to the above IP address, from UDP port 10001 to UDP port 10001
Notes None.
SPI_Ethernet_dnsResolve
Prototype unsigned char * SPI_Ethernet_dnsResolve(unsigned char *host, unsigned char
tmax);
Description This is DNS module routine. It sends an DNS request for given host name and waits for DNS reply. If
the requested host name was resolved, it’s IP address is stored in library global variable and a pointer
containing this address is returned by the routine. UDP port 53 is used as DNS port.
Parameters - host: host name to be resolved.
Returns - pointer to the location holding the IP address - the requested host name was resolved.
- 0 - otherwise.
Example unsigned char * remoteHostIpAddr[4]; // user host IP address buffer
...
// SNTP server:
// Zurich, Switzerland: Integrated Systems Lab, Swiss Fed. Inst. of
Technology
// 129.132.2.21: swisstime.ethz.ch
// Service Area: Switzerland and Europe
memcpy(remoteHostIpAddr, SPI_Ethernet_dnsResolve(“swisstime.ethz.ch”, 5),
4);
Notes The Ethernet services are not stopped while this routine waits for DNS reply. The incoming packets will
User should always copy the IP address from the RAM location returned by this routine into it’s own
resolved host IP address buffer. These locations should not be altered by the user in any case!
MikroElektronika
512
SPI_Ethernet_initDHCP
Prototype unsigned int SPI_Ethernet_initDHCP(unsigned char tmax);
Description This is DHCP module routine. It sends an DHCP request for network parameters (IP, gateway, DNS
addresses and IP subnet mask) and waits for DHCP reply. If the requested parameters were obtained
successfully, their values are stored into the library global variables.
These parameters can be fetched by using appropriate library IP get routines:
- SPI_Ethernet_getIpAddress - fetch IP address.

- SPI_Ethernet_getGwIpAddress - fetch gateway IP address.
- SPI_Ethernet_getDnsIpAddress - fetch DNS IP address.
- SPI_Ethernet_getIpMask - fetch IP subnet mask.
UDP port 68 is used as DHCP client port and UDP port 67 is used as DHCP server port.
Parameters - tmax: time in seconds to wait for an reply.
Returns - 1 - network parameters were obtained successfully.
- 0 - otherwise.
Example ...
SPI_Ethernet_initDHCP(5); // get network configuration from DHCP server,
wait 5 sec for the response
...
When DHCP module is used, global library variable SPI_Ethernet_userTimerSec is used to keep
track of time. It is user responsibility to increment this variable each second in it’s code.
MikroElektronika
513
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Ethernet_doDHCPLeaseTime
Prototype unsigned int SPI_Ethernet_doDHCPLeaseTime();
Description This is DHCP module routine. It takes care of IP address lease time by decrementing the global lease
time library counter. When this time expires, it’s time to contact DHCP server and renew the lease.
Parameters None.
Returns - 0 - lease time has not expired yet.
- 1 - lease time has expired, it’s time to renew it.
Example while(1) {
...
if (SPI_Ethernet_doDHCPLeaseTime())
... // it’s time to renew the IP address lease
}
Notes None.
SPI_Ethernet_renewDHCP
Prototype unsigned int SPI_Ethernet_renewDHCP(unsigned char tmax);
Description This is DHCP module routine. It sends IP address lease time renewal request to DHCP server.
Returns - 1 - upon success (lease time was renewed).
- 0 - otherwise (renewal request timed out).
Example while(1) {
...
if (SPI_Ethernet_doDHCPLeaseTime())
SPI_Ethernet_renewDHCP(5); // it’s time to renew the IP address lease,
with 5 secs for a reply
...
}
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
514
Library Example
This code shows how to use the Ethernet mini library :
- the board will reply to ARP & ICMP echo requests

- the board will reply to UDP requests on any port :
- returns the request in upper char with a header made of remote host IP & port number
- the board will reply to HTTP requests on port 80, GET method with pathnames :
- / will return the HTML main page
- /s will return board status as text string
- /t0 ... /t7 will toggle RD0 to RD7 bit and return HTML main page
- all other requests return also HTML main page.
#include “__EthEnc28j60.h”
// duplex config flags

#define Spi_Ethernet_HALFDUPLEX 0x00 // half duplex
#define Spi_Ethernet_FULLDUPLEX 0x01 // full duplex
// mE ehternet NIC pinout

sfr sbit SPI_Ethernet_Rst at LATF0_bit; // for writing to output pin always use latch
sfr sbit SPI_Ethernet_CS at LATF1_bit; // for writing to output pin always use latch
sfr sbit SPI_Ethernet_Rst_Direction at TRISF0_bit;
sfr sbit SPI_Ethernet_CS_Direction at TRISF1_bit;
/************************************************************
* ROM constant strings
*/
const code unsigned char httpHeader[] = “HTTP/1.1 200 OKnContent-type: “; // HTTP
header
const code unsigned char httpMimeTypeHTML[] = “text/htmlnn”; // HTML MIME
type
const code unsigned char httpMimeTypeScript[] = “text/plainnn”; // TEXT MIME
type
unsigned char httpMethod[] = “GET /”;
/*
* web page, splited into 2 parts :
* when coming short of ROM, fragmented data is handled more efficiently by linker
*
* this HTML page calls the boards to get its status, and builds itself with
javascript
*/
const code char *indexPage = // Change the IP address of the page
to be refreshed
“<meta http-equiv=”refresh” content=”3;url=http://192.168.20.60”>
<HTML><HEAD></HEAD><BODY>
<h1>dsPIC + ENC28J60 Mini Web Server</h1>
MikroElektronika
515
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
<a href=/>Reload</a>
<script src=/s></script>
<table><tr><td valign=top><table border=1 style="font-size:20px ;font-family: terminal
;">
<tr><th colspan=2>ADC</th></tr>
<tr><td>AN0</td><td><script>document.write(AN0)</script></td></tr>
<tr><td>AN1</td><td><script>document.write(AN1)</script></td></tr>
</table></td><td><table border=1 style="font-size:20px ;font-family: terminal ;">
<tr><th colspan=2>PORTB</th></tr>
<script>
var str,i;
str="";
for(i=2;i<10;i++)
{str+="<tr><td bgcolor=pink>BUTTON #"+i+"</td>";
if(PORTB&(1<<i)){str+="<td bgcolor=red>ON";}
else {str+="<td bgcolor=#cccccc>OFF";}
str+="</td></tr>";}
document.write(str) ;
</script>
" ;
const code char *indexPage2 = "</table></td><td>

<table border=1 style="font-size:20px ;font-family: terminal ;">
<tr><th colspan=3>PORTD</th></tr>
<script>
var str,i;
str="";
for(i=0;i<4;i++)
{str+="<tr><td bgcolor=yellow>LED #"+i+"</td>";
if(PORTD&(1<<i)){str+="<td bgcolor=red>ON";}
else {str+="<td bgcolor=#cccccc>OFF";}
str+="</td><td><a href=/t"+i+">Toggle</a></td></tr>";}
document.write(str) ;
</script>
</table></td></tr></table>
This is HTTP request #<script>document.write(REQ)</script></BODY></HTML>
" ;
/***********************************
* RAM variables
*/
address
unsigned char myIpAddr[4] = {192, 168, 20, 60 }; // my IP address
unsigned char gwIpAddr[4] = {192, 168, 20, 6 }; // gateway (router) IP address
unsigned char ipMask[4] = {255, 255, 255, 0 }; // network mask
(for example : 255.255.255.0)
unsigned char dnsIpAddr[4] = {192, 168, 20, 1 }; // DNS server IP address
unsigned char getRequest[15]; // HTTP request buffer

unsigned char dyna[31] ; // buffer for dynamic response
unsigned long httpCounter = 0; // counter of HTTP requests
MikroElektronika
516
/*******************************************
* functions
*/
/*
* put the constant string pointed to by s to the ENC transmit buffer.
*/
/*unsigned int putConstString(const code char *s)
{
unsigned int ctr = 0;
while(*s)
{
Spi_Ethernet_putByte(*s++);
ctr++;
}
return(ctr);
}*/
/*
* it will be much faster to use library Spi_Ethernet_putConstString routine
* instead of putConstString routine above. However, the code will be a little
* bit bigger. User should choose between size and speed and pick the implementation
that
* suites him best. If you choose to go with the putConstString definition above
* the #define line below should be commented out.
*
*/
#define putConstString SPI_Ethernet_putConstString
/*
* put the string pointed to by s to the ENC transmit buffer
*/
/*unsigned int putString(char *s)
{
unsigned int ctr = 0;
while(*s)
{
Spi_Ethernet_putByte(*s++);
ctr++;
}
return(ctr);
}*/
/*
* it will be much faster to use library Spi_Ethernet_putString routine
* instead of putString routine above. However, the code will be a little
* bit bigger. User should choose between size and speed and pick the implementation
that
* suites him best. If you choose to go with the putString definition above
* the #define line below should be commented out.
*
*/
MikroElektronika
517
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
#define putString SPI_Ethernet_putString
/*
* this function is called by the library
* the user accesses to the HTTP request by successive calls to Spi_Ethernet_getByte()
* the user puts data in the transmit buffer by successive calls to Spi_Ethernet_
putByte()
* the function must return the length in bytes of the HTTP reply, or 0 if nothing to
transmit
*
* if you don't need to reply to HTTP requests,
* just define this function with a return(0) as single statement
*
*/
unsigned int SPI_Ethernet_UserTCP(unsigned char *remoteHost, unsigned int remotePort,
unsigned int localPort, unsigned int reqLength, TEthPktFlags *flags)
{
unsigned int len; // my reply length
// should we close tcp socket after response is sent?

// library closes tcp socket by default if canCloseTCP flag is not reset here
// flags->canCloseTCP = 0; // 0 - do not close socket
// otherwise - close socket
if(localPort != 80) // I listen only to web request on port 80

{
return(0);
}
// get 10 first bytes only of the request, the rest does not matter here
for(len = 0; len < 10; len++)
{
getRequest[len] = SPI_Ethernet_getByte();
}
getRequest[len] = 0;
len = 0;
if(memcmp(getRequest, httpMethod, 5)) // only GET method is supported here

{
return(0);
}
httpCounter++; // one more request done
if(getRequest[5] == ‘s’) // if request path name starts with s, store

dynamic data in transmit buffer
{
// the text string replied by this request can be interpreted as javascript
statements
// by browsers
len = putConstString(httpHeader); // HTTP header

len += putConstString(httpMimeTypeScript); // with text MIME type
MikroElektronika
518
// add AN0 value to reply

WordToStr(ADC1_Get_Sample(0), dyna) ;
len += putConstString("var AN0=") ;
len += putString(dyna) ;
len += putConstString(";") ;
// add AN1 value to reply

WordToStr(ADC1_Get_Sample(1), dyna) ;
len += putConstString("var AN1=") ;
len += putString(dyna);
len += putConstString(";");
// add PORTB value (buttons) to reply

len += putConstString("var PORTB=");
WordToStr(PORTB, dyna);
// add PORTD value (LEDs) to reply

len += putConstString("var PORTD=");
WordToStr(PORTD, dyna);
// add HTTP requests counter to reply

WordToStr(httpCounter, dyna);
len += putConstString("var REQ=");
}
else if(getRequest[5] == 't') // if request path name
starts with t, toggle PORTD (LED) bit number that comes after
{
unsigned char bitMask = 0; // for bit mask
if(isdigit(getRequest[6])) // if 0 <= bit number <=

9, bits 8 & 9 does not exist but does not matter
{
bitMask = getRequest[6] - '0'; // convert ASCII to integer
bitMask = 1 << bitMask; // create bit mask
PORTD ^= bitMask; // toggle PORTD with xor operator
}
}
if(len == 0) // what do to by default

{
len = putConstString(httpHeader); // HTTP header
len += putConstString(httpMimeTypeHTML); // with HTML MIME type
len += putConstString(indexPage); // HTML page first part
len += putConstString(indexPage2); // HTML page second part
}
return(len); // return to the library

with the number of bytes to transmit
}
MikroElektronika
519
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
/*
* this function is called by the library
* the user accesses to the UDP request by successive calls to Spi_Ethernet_getByte()
* the user puts data in the transmit buffer by successive calls to Spi_Ethernet_
putByte()
* the function must return the length in bytes of the UDP reply, or 0 if nothing to
transmit
*
* if you don't need to reply to UDP requests,
* just define this function with a return(0) as single statement
*
*/
unsigned int SPI_Ethernet_UserUDP(unsigned char *remoteHost, unsigned int remotePort,
unsigned int destPort, unsigned int reqLength, TEthPktFlags *flags)
{
unsigned int len; // my reply length
// reply is made of the remote host IP address in human readable format

ByteToStr(remoteHost[0], dyna); // first IP address byte
dyna[3] = '.';
ByteToStr(remoteHost[1], dyna + 4); // second
dyna[7] = '.';
ByteToStr(remoteHost[2], dyna + 8); // third
dyna[11] = '.';
ByteToStr(remoteHost[3], dyna + 12); // fourth
dyna[15] = ':'; // add separator
// then remote host port number

WordToStr(remotePort, dyna + 16);
dyna[21] = '[';
WordToStr(destPort, dyna + 22);
dyna[27] = ']';
dyna[28] = 0;
// the total length of the request is the length of the dynamic string plus the
text of the request
len = 28 + reqLength;
// puts the dynamic string into the transmit buffer

SPI_Ethernet_putBytes(dyna, 28);
// then puts the request string converted into upper char into the transmit
buffer
while(reqLength--)
{
SPI_Ethernet_putByte(toupper(SPI_Ethernet_getByte()));
}
return(len); // back to the library with the length of the UDP reply
}
MikroElektronika
520
/*
* main entry
*/
void main()
{
ADPCFG |= 0xFFFC; // all digital but rb0(AN0) and rb1(AN1)
PORTB = 0;
TRISB = 0xFFFF; // set PORTB as input for buttons and adc
PORTD = 0;
TRISD = 0; // set PORTD as output,
ADC1_Init(); // Enable ADC module

/*
* starts ENC28J60 with :
* reset bit on RC0
* CS bit on RC1
* my MAC & IP address
* full duplex
*/
// SPI1_Init(); // init SPI communication with ethernet board

PRI_4,
_SPI_SS_DISABLE, _SPI_DATA_SAMPLE_MIDDLE, _SPI_CLK_IDLE_LOW,
_SPI_IDLE_2_ACTIVE);
SPI_Ethernet_Init(myMacAddr, myIpAddr, 1); // init ethernet board
// dhcp will not be used here, so use preconfigured addresses

SPI_Ethernet_confNetwork(ipMask, gwIpAddr, dnsIpAddr);
while(1) // do forever
{
/*
* if necessary, test the return value to get error code
*/
SPI_Ethernet_doPacket(); // process incoming Ethernet packets
/*
* add your stuff here if needed
* Spi_Ethernet_doPacket() must be called as often as possible
* otherwise packets could be lost
*/
}
}
MikroElektronika
521
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
HW Connection
MikroElektronika
522
SPI Ethernet ENC24J600 Library

The ENC24J600 is a stand-alone Ethernet controller with an industry standard Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI). It is
designed to serve as an Ethernet network interface for any controller equipped with SPI.
The ENC24J600 meets all of the IEEE 802.3 specifications applicable to 10Base-T and 100Base-TX Ethernet. It
incorporates a number of packet filtering schemes to limit incoming packets. It also provides an internal, 16-bit wide
DMA module for fast data throughput and hardware assisted IP checksum calculations. Communication with the host
controller is implemented via two interrupt pins and the SPI, with data rates of 10/100 Mb/s. Two dedicated pins are
used for LED link and network activity indication.
This library is designed to simplify handling of the underlying hardware (ENC24J600). It works with any dsPIC30/33
and PIC24 with integrated SPI and more than 4 Kb ROM memory. 38 to 40 MHz clock is recommended to get from 8
to 10 Mhz SPI clock, otherwise dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 should be clocked by ENC24J600 clock output due to its silicon
bug in SPI hardware. If you try lower dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 clock speed, there might be board hang or miss some
requests.
SPI Ethernet ENC24J600 library supports:
- IPv4 protocol.
- ARP requests.
- ICMP echo requests.
- UDP requests.
- TCP requests (no stack, no packet reconstruction).
- ARP client with cache.
- DNS client.
- UDP client.
- DHCP client.
- packet fragmentation is NOT supported.
Important :
- Global library variable SPI_Ethernet_24j600_userTimerSec is used to keep track of time for all client
implementations (ARP, DNS, UDP and DHCP). It is user responsibility to increment this variable each second in it's
code if any of the clients is used.
- For advanced users there are header files ("__EthEnc24j600.h" and "__EthEnc24j600Private.h") in Uses
folder of the compiler with description of all routines and global variables, relevant to the user, implemented in the SPI
Ethernet ENC24J600 Library.
- The appropriate hardware SPI module must be initialized before using any of the SPI Ethernet ENC24J600 library
routines. Refer to SPI Library.
- For MCUs with multiple SPI modules it is possible to initialize them and then switch by using the SPI_Set_Active()
routine.
MikroElektronika
523
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
External dependencies of SPI Ethernet ENC24J600 Library

defined in all projects using SPI Description : Example :
Ethernet ENC24J600 Library:
extern sfr sbit SPI_ sbit SPI_Ethernet_24j600_CS at
ENC24J600 chip select pin.
Ethernet_24j600_CS; LATF1_bit;
extern sfr sbit SPI_
Direction of the ENC24J600 sbit SPI_Ethernet_24j600_CS_
Ethernet_24j600_CS_
chip select pin. Direction at TRISF1_bit;
Direction;
The following routines must be

defined in all project using SPI Description : Example :
Ethernet ENC24J600 Library:
unsigned int SPI_
E t h e r n e t _ 2 4 j 6 0 0 _
UserTCP(unsigned char
*remoteHost, unsigned int Refer to the library example at the bottom of
TCP request handler.
remotePort, unsigned int this page for code implementation.
reqLength, TEthj600PktFlags
*flags);
unsigned int SPI_
E t h e r n e t _ 2 4 j 6 0 0 _
UserUDP(unsigned char
*remoteHost, unsigned int Refer to the library example at the bottom of
UDP request handler.
remotePort, unsigned int this page for code implementation.
reqLength, TEthj600PktFlags
*flags);
MikroElektronika
524
Library Routines
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_Init
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_Enable
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_Disable
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_doPacket
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_putByte
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_putBytes
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_putString
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_putConstString
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_putConstBytes
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getByte
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getBytes
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_UserTCP
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_UserUDP
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getIpAddress
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getGwIpAddress
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getDnsIpAddress
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getIpMask
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_confNetwork
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_arpResolve
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_sendUDP
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_dnsResolve
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_initDHCP
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_doDHCPLeaseTime
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_renewDHCP
MikroElektronika
525
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_Init
Prototype void SPI_Ethernet_24j600_Init(unsigned char *mac, unsigned char *ip, unsigned
char fullDuplex);
Description This is MAC module routine. It initializes ENC24J600 controller. This function is internaly splited into 2
parts to help linker when coming short of memory.
ENC24J600 controller settings (parameters not mentioned here are set to default):
- receive buffer start address : 0x0000.

- receive buffer end address : 0x19AD.
- transmit buffer start address: 0x19AE.
- transmit buffer end address : 0x1FFF.
- RAM buffer read/write pointers in auto-increment mode.
- receive filters set to default: CRC + MAC Unicast + MAC Broadcast in OR mode.
- flow control with TX and RX pause frames in full duplex mode.
- frames are padded to 60 bytes + CRC.
- maximum packet size is set to 1518.
- Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap: 0x15 in full duplex mode; 0x12 in half duplex mode.
- Non-Back-to-Back Inter-Packet Gap: 0x0012 in full duplex mode; 0x0C12 in half duplex mode.
- Collision window is set to 63 in half duplex mode to accomodate some ENC24J600 revisions silicon bugs.
- CLKOUT output is disabled to reduce EMI generation.
- half duplex loopback disabled.
- LED configuration: default (LEDA-link status, LEDB-link activity).
Parameters - mac: RAM buffer containing valid MAC address.
- ip: RAM buffer containing valid IP address.
- configuration: ethernet negotiation, duplex and speed mode settings. For this purpose, predefined
library constants (see the list below) can be combined using logical AND to form appropriate value :
Description : Predefined library const

Set Auto-negotiation SPI_Ethernet_24j600_AUTO_NEGOTIATION
Set manual negotiation. SPI_Ethernet_24j600_MANUAL_NEGOTIATION
Set Half duplex Mode SPI_Ethernet_24j600_HALFDUPLEX
Set Full duplex Mode SPI_Ethernet_24j600_FULLDUPLEX
Set transmission speed of 10Mbps SPI_Ethernet_24j600_SPD10
Set transmission speed of
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_SPD100
100Mbps
Note :
- It is advisable to use only the Auto-negotiation setting. If manual negotiation is used, then duplex and
speed mode setting must be set also.
- Duplex and speed mode may be set only when using manual negotiation.
MikroElektronika
526
Returns Nothing.
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_CS: Chip Select line

- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_CS_Direction: Direction of the Chip Select pin
Example #include “__EthEnc24J600.h”
// mE ethernet NIC pinout

sfr sbit SPI_Ethernet_24j600_CS at RF1_bit;
sfr sbit SPI_Ethernet_24j600_CS_Direction at TRISF1_bit;
address
unsigned char myIpAddr = {192, 168, 1, 60 }; // my IP addr
SPI1_Init();
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_Init(myMacAddr, myIpAddr, SPI_Ethernet_24j600_MANUAL_
NEGOTIATION & SPI_Ethernet_24j600_FULLDUPLEX & SPI_Ethernet_24j600_
SPD100);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
527
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_Enable
Prototype void SPI_Ethernet_24j600_Enable(unsigned int enFlt);
Description This is MAC module routine. This routine enables appropriate network traffic on the ENC24J600
module by the means of it’s receive filters (unicast, multicast, broadcast, crc). Specific type of network
traffic will be enabled if a corresponding bit of this routine’s input parameter is set. Therefore, more
than one type of network traffic can be enabled at the same time. For this purpose, predefined library
constants (see the table below) can be ORed to form appropriate input value.
Advanced filtering available in the ENC24J600 module such as Pattern Match, Magic Packet and
Hash Table can not be enabled by this routine. Additionaly, all filters, except CRC, enabled with this
routine will work in OR mode, which means that packet will be received if any of the enabled filters
accepts it.
should be properly cofigured by the means of SPI_Ethernet_24j600_Init routine.
Parameters - enFlt: network traffic/receive filter flags. Each bit corresponds to the appropriate network traffic/
receive filter:
MAC Broadcast traffic/receive filter flag. When set, _SPI_Ethernet_24j600_
0 0x01
MAC broadcast traffic will be enabled. BROADCAST
MAC Multicast traffic/receive filter flag. When set, _SPI_Ethernet_24j600_
1 0x02
MAC multicast traffic will be enabled. MULTICAST
CRC check flag. When set, packets with invalid _SPI_Ethernet_24j600_
5 0x20
CRC field will be discarded. CRC
MAC Unicast traffic/receive filter flag. When set, _SPI_Ethernet_24j600_
7 0x80
MAC unicast traffic will be enabled. UNICAST
Returns Nothing.
Requires Ethernet module has to be initialized. See SPI_Ethernet_24j600_Init.
Example SPI_Ethernet_24j600_Enable(_SPI_Ethernet_24j600_CRC | _SPI_Ethernet_24j600_
UNICAST); // enable CRC checking and Unicast traffic
and Hash Table can not be enabled by this routine. Additionaly, all filters, except CRC, enabled with
this routine will work in OR mode, which means that packet will be received if any of the enabled filters
accepts it.
should be properly cofigured by the means of SPI_Ethernet_24j600_Init routine.
MikroElektronika
528
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_Disable
Prototype void SPI_Ethernet_24j600_Disable(unsigned int disFlt);
Description This is MAC module routine. This routine disables appropriate network traffic on the ENC24J600
module by the means of it’s receive filters (unicast, multicast, broadcast, crc). Specific type of network
traffic will be disabled if a corresponding bit of this routine’s input parameter is set. Therefore, more
than one type of network traffic can be disabled at the same time. For this purpose, predefined library
constants (see the table below) can be ORed to form appropriate input value.
Parameters - disFlt: network traffic/receive filter flags. Each bit corresponds to the appropriate network traffic/
receive filter:

MAC Broadcast traffic/receive filter flag. When set, _SPI_Ethernet_24j600_
0 0x01
MAC broadcast traffic will be disabled. BROADCAST
MAC Multicast traffic/receive filter flag. When set, _SPI_Ethernet_24j600_
1 0x02
MAC multicast traffic will be disabled. MULTICAST
CRC check flag. When set, CRC check will be
_SPI_Ethernet_24j600_
5 0x20 disabled and packets with invalid CRC field will be
CRC
accepted.
MAC Unicast traffic/receive filter flag. When set, _SPI_Ethernet_24j600_
7 0x80
MAC unicast traffic will be disabled. UNICAST
Returns Nothing.
Example SPI_Ethernet_24j600_Disable(_SPI_Ethernet_24j600_CRC | _SPI_Ethernet_24j600_
UNICAST); // disable CRC checking and Unicast traffic
Notes - Advanced filtering available in the ENC24J600 module such as Pattern Match, Magic Packet
and Hash Table can not be disabled by this routine.
- This routine will change receive filter configuration on-the-fly. It will not, in any way, mess with
enabling/disabling receive/transmit logic or any other part of the ENC24J600 module.
- The ENC24J600 module should be properly cofigured by the means of SPI_Ethernet_24j600_Init
routine.
MikroElektronika
529
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_doPacket
Prototype unsigned int SPI_Ethernet_24j600_doPacket();
Description This is MAC module routine. It processes next received packet if such exists. Packets are processed
in the following manner:
- ARP & ICMP requests are replied automatically.

- upon TCP request the SPI_Ethernet_24j600_UserTCP function is called for further processing.
- upon UDP request the SPI_Ethernet_24j600_UserUDP function is called for further processing.
Parameters None.
Returns - 0 - upon successful packet processing (zero packets received or received packet processed
successfully).
- 1 - upon reception error or receive buffer corruption. ENC24J600 controller needs to be restarted.
- 2 - received packet was not sent to us (not our IP, nor IP broadcast address).
- 3 - received IP packet was not IPv4.
- 4 - received packet was of type unknown to the library.
Example if (SPI_Ethernet_24j600_doPacket() == 0)(1) { // process received packets
...
}
Notes SPI_Ethernet_24j600_doPacket must be called as often as possible in user’s code.
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_putByte
Prototype void SPI_Ethernet_24j600_putByte(unsigned char v);
Description This is MAC module routine. It stores one byte to address pointed by the current ENC24J600 write
pointer (EWRPT).
Parameters - v: value to store
Returns Nothing.
Example char data_;
...
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_putByte(data); // put an byte into ENC24J600 buffer
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
530
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_putBytes
Prototype void SPI_Ethernet_24j600_putBytes(unsigned char *ptr, unsigned int n);
Description This is MAC module routine. It stores requested number of bytes into ENC24J600 RAM starting from
current ENC24J600 write pointer (EWRPT) location.
Parameters - ptr: RAM buffer containing bytes to be written into ENC24J600 RAM.
Returns Nothing.
...
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_putBytes(buffer, 16); // put an RAM array into ENC24J600
buffer
Notes None.
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_putConstBytes
Prototype void SPI_Ethernet_24j600_putConstBytes(const unsigned char *ptr, unsigned
int n);
Description This is MAC module routine. It stores requested number of const bytes into ENC24J600 RAM starting
from current ENC24J600 write pointer (EWRPT) location.
Parameters - ptr: const buffer containing bytes to be written into ENC24J600 RAM.
Returns Nothing.
...
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_putConstBytes(buffer, 16); // put a const array into
ENC24J600 buffer
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
531
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_putString
Prototype unsigned int SPI_Ethernet_24j600_putString(unsigned char *ptr);
Description This is MAC module routine. It stores whole string (excluding null termination) into ENC24J600 RAM
starting from current ENC24J600 write pointer (EWRPT) location.
Parameters - ptr: string to be written into ENC24J600 RAM.
...
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_putString(buffer); // put a RAM string into ENC24J600
buffer
Notes None.
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_putConstString
Prototype unsigned int SPI_Ethernet_24j600_putConstString(const unsigned char *ptr);
Description This is MAC module routine. It stores whole const string (excluding null termination) into ENC24J600
RAM starting from current ENC24J600 write pointer (EWRPT) location.
Parameters - ptr: const string to be written into ENC24J600 RAM.
...
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_putConstString(buffer); // put a const string into
ENC24J600 buffer
Notes None.
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getByte
Prototype unsigned char SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getByte();
Description This is MAC module routine. It fetches a byte from address pointed to by current ENC24J600 read
pointer (ERDPT).
Parameters None.
Returns Byte read from ENC24J600 RAM.
Example char buffer;
...
buffer = SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getByte(); // read a byte from ENC24J600
buffer
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
532
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getBytes
Prototype void SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getBytes(unsigned char *ptr, unsigned int addr,
unsigned int n);
Description This is MAC module routine. It fetches equested number of bytes from ENC24J600 RAM starting from
given address. If value of 0xFFFF is passed as the address parameter, the reading will start from
current ENC24J600 read pointer (ERDPT) location.
Parameters - ptr: buffer for storing bytes read from ENC24J600 RAM.
- addr: ENC24J600 RAM start address. Valid values: 0..8192.
- n: number of bytes to be read.
Returns Nothing.
Example char buffer[16];
...
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getBytes(buffer, 0x100, 16); // read 16 bytes, starting
from address 0x100
Notes None.
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_UserTCP
Prototype unsigned int SPI_Ethernet_24j600_UserTCP(unsigned char *remoteHost,
unsigned int remotePort, unsigned int localPort, unsigned int reqLength,
TEthj600PktFlags *flags);
Description This is TCP module routine. It is internally called by the library. The user accesses to the TCP request
by using some of the SPI_Ethernet_24j600_get routines. The user puts data in the transmit buffer by
using some of the SPI_Ethernet_24j600_put routines. The function must return the length in bytes of
the TCP reply, or 0 if there is nothing to transmit. If there is no need to reply to the TCP requests, just
define this function with return(0) as a single statement.
- remotePort: client’s TCP port.
- reqLength: TCP request data field length.
typedef struct {
unsigned canCloseTCP: 1; // flag which closes socket
} TEthj600PktFlags;
- Length of TCP reply data field - otherwise.
MikroElektronika
533
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_UserUDP
Prototype unsigned int SPI_Ethernet_24j600_UserUDP(unsigned char *remoteHost,
unsigned int remotePort, unsigned int destPort, unsigned int reqLength,
TEthj600PktFlags *flags);
Description This is UDP module routine. It is internally called by the library. The user accesses to the UDP request
by using some of the SPI_Ethernet_24j600_get routines. The user puts data in the transmit buffer by
using some of the SPI_Ethernet_24j600_put routines. The function must return the length in bytes of
the UDP reply, or 0 if nothing to transmit. If you don’t need to reply to the UDP requests, just define this
function with a return(0) as single statement.
- remotePort: client’s port.
- reqLength: UDP request data field length.
typedef struct {
unsigned canCloseTCP: 1; // flag which closes TCP socket (not relevant
to UDP)
} TEthj600PktFlags;
- Length of UDP reply data field - otherwise.
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getIpAddress
Prototype unsigned char * SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getIpAddress();
Description This routine should be used when DHCP server is present on the network to fetch assigned IP
address.
Parameters None.
Returns Pointer to the global variable holding IP address.
Example unsigned char ipAddr[4]; // user IP address buffer
...
memcpy(ipAddr, SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getIpAddress(), 4); // fetch IP address
address buffer. These locations should not be altered by the user in any case!
MikroElektronika
534
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getGwIpAddress
Prototype unsigned char * SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getGwIpAddress();
Description This routine should be used when DHCP server is present on the network to fetch assigned gateway
IP address.
Parameters None.
Returns Pointer to the global variable holding gateway IP address.
Example unsigned char gwIpAddr[4]; // user gateway IP address buffer
...
memcpy(gwIpAddr, SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getGwIpAddress(), 4); // fetch gateway
IP address
gateway IP address buffer. These locations should not be altered by the user in any case!
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getDnsIpAddress
Prototype unsigned char * SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getDnsIpAddress();
address.
Parameters None.
...
memcpy(dnsIpAddr, SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getDnsIpAddress(), 4); // fetch DNS
server address
MikroElektronika
535
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getIpMask
Prototype unsigned char * SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getDnsIpAddress();
address.
Parameters None.
...
memcpy(dnsIpAddr, SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getDnsIpAddress(), 4); // fetch DNS
server address
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_confNetwork
Prototype void SPI_Ethernet_24j600_confNetwork(char *ipMask, char *gwIpAddr, char
*dnsIpAddr);
Description Configures network parameters (IP subnet mask, gateway IP address, DNS IP address) when DHCP
is not used.
Parameters - ipMask: IP subnet mask.
- gwIpAddr gateway IP address.
- dnsIpAddr: DNS IP address.
Returns Nothing.
Example char ipMask[4] = {255, 255, 255, 0 }; // network mask (for example :
255.255.255.0)
char gwIpAddr[4] = {192, 168, 1, 1 }; // gateway (router) IP address
char dnsIpAddr[4] = {192, 168, 1, 1 }; // DNS server IP address
...
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_confNetwork(ipMask, gwIpAddr, dnsIpAddr); // set network
configuration parameters
Notes The above mentioned network parameters should be set by this routine only if DHCP module is not
used. Otherwise DHCP will override these settings.
MikroElektronika
536
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_arpResolve
Prototype unsigned char *SPI_Ethernet_24j600_arpResolve(unsigned char *ip, unsigned
char tmax);
Description This is ARP module routine. It sends an ARP request for given IP address and waits for ARP reply. If
the requested IP address was resolved, an ARP cash entry is used for storing the configuration. ARP
cash can store up to 3 entries. For ARP cash structure refer to “__EthEnc24j600.h” header file in
the compiler’s Uses folder.
Parameters - ip: IP address to be resolved.
Returns - MAC address behind the IP address - the requested IP address was resolved.
- 0 - otherwise.
Example unsigned char IpAddr[4] = {192, 168, 1, 1 }; // IP address
...
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_arpResolve(IpAddr, 5); // get MAC address behind the
above IP address, wait 5 secs for the response
Notes The Ethernet services are not stopped while this routine waits for ARP reply. The incoming packets will
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_sendUDP
Prototype unsigned int SPI_Ethernet_24j600_sendUDP(unsigned char *destIP, unsigned
int sourcePort, unsigned int destPort, unsigned char *pkt, unsigned int
pktLen);
Description This is UDP module routine. It sends an UDP packet on the network.
Parameters - destIP: remote host IP address.
- sourcePort: local UDP source port number.
- destPort: destination UDP port number.
- pkt: packet to transmit.
- pktLen: length in bytes of packet to transmit.
Returns - 1 - UDP packet was sent successfully.
- 0 - otherwise.
Example unsigned char IpAddr[4] = {192, 168, 1, 1 }; // remote IP address
...
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_sendUDP(IpAddr, 10001, 10001, “Hello”, 5); // send Hello
message to the above IP address, from UDP port 10001 to UDP port 10001
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
537
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_dnsResolve
Prototype unsigned char * SPI_Ethernet_24j600_dnsResolve(unsigned char *host, unsigned
char tmax);
Description This is DNS module routine. It sends an DNS request for given host name and waits for DNS reply. If
the requested host name was resolved, it’s IP address is stored in library global variable and a pointer
containing this address is returned by the routine. UDP port 53 is used as DNS port.
Parameters - host: host name to be resolved.
Returns - pointer to the location holding the IP address - the requested host name was resolved.
- 0 - otherwise.
Example unsigned char * remoteHostIpAddr[4]; // user host IP address buffer
...
// SNTP server:
// Zurich, Switzerland: Integrated Systems Lab, Swiss Fed. Inst. of
Technology
// 129.132.2.21: swisstime.ethz.ch
// Service Area: Switzerland and Europe
memcpy(remoteHostIpAddr, SPI_Ethernet_24j600_dnsResolve(“swisstime.ethz.
ch”, 5), 4);
User should always copy the IP address from the RAM location returned by this routine into it’s own
resolved host IP address buffer. These locations should not be altered by the user in any case!
MikroElektronika
538
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_initDHCP
Prototype unsigned int SPI_Ethernet_24j600_initDHCP(unsigned char tmax);
Description This is DHCP module routine. It sends an DHCP request for network parameters (IP, gateway, DNS
addresses and IP subnet mask) and waits for DHCP reply. If the requested parameters were obtained
successfully, their values are stored into the library global variables.
These parameters can be fetched by using appropriate library IP get routines:
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getIpAddress - fetch IP address.

- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getGwIpAddress - fetch gateway IP address.
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getDnsIpAddress - fetch DNS IP address.
- SPI_Ethernet_24j600_getIpMask - fetch IP subnet mask.
UDP port 68 is used as DHCP client port and UDP port 67 is used as DHCP server port.
Returns - 1 - network parameters were obtained successfully.
- 0 - otherwise.
Example ...
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_initDHCP(5); // get network configuration from DHCP
server, wait 5 sec for the response
...
When DHCP module is used, global library variable SPI_Ethernet_24j600_userTimerSec is

used to keep track of time. It is user responsibility to increment this variable each second in it’s code.
MikroElektronika
539
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_doDHCPLeaseTime
Prototype unsigned int SPI_Ethernet_24j600_doDHCPLeaseTime();
Description This is DHCP module routine. It takes care of IP address lease time by decrementing the global lease
time library counter. When this time expires, it’s time to contact DHCP server and renew the lease.
Parameters None.
Returns - 0 - lease time has not expired yet.
- 1 - lease time has expired, it’s time to renew it.
Example while(1) {
...
if (SPI_Ethernet_24j600_doDHCPLeaseTime())
... // it’s time to renew the IP address lease
}
Notes None.
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_renewDHCP
Prototype unsigned int SPI_Ethernet_24j600_renewDHCP(unsigned char tmax);
Description This is DHCP module routine. It sends IP address lease time renewal request to DHCP server.
Returns - 1 - upon success (lease time was renewed).
- 0 - otherwise (renewal request timed out).
Example while(1) {
...
if (SPI_Ethernet_24j600_doDHCPLeaseTime())
SPI_Ethernet_24j600_renewDHCP(5); // it’s time to renew the IP address
lease, with 5 secs for a reply
...
}
Notes None.
Library Example
This code shows how to use the Ethernet mini library :
-the board will reply to ARP & ICMP echo requests

-the board will reply to UDP requests on any port :
- returns the request in upper char with a header made of remote host IP & port number
-the board will reply to HTTP requests on port 80, GET method with pathnames :
- / will return the HTML main page
- /s will return board status as text string
- /t0 ... /t7 will toggle RD0 to RD7 bit and return HTML main page
- all other requests return also HTML main page.

MikroElektronika
540
SPI Graphic Lcd Library

mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a library for operating Graphic Lcd 128x64 (with commonly used
Samsung KS108/KS107 controller) via SPI interface.
Important :
- When using this library with dsPIC33 and PIC24 family MCUs be aware of their voltage incompatibility with certain
number of Samsung KS0108 based Glcd modules.
So, additional external power supply for these modules may be required.
- Library uses the SPI module for communication. The user must initialize the appropriate SPI module before using the
SPI Glcd Library.
- For MCUs with multiple SPI modules it is possible to initialize all of them and then switch by using the SPI_Set_Active()
routine. See the SPI Library functions.
- This Library is designed to work with the mikroElektronika's Serial Lcd/Glcd Adapter Board pinout, see schematic at
the bottom of this page for details.
External dependencies of SPI Lcd Library

The implementation of SPI Lcd Library routines is based on Port Expander Library routines.
External dependencies are the same as Port Expander Library external dependencies.
Library Routines
Basic routines:
- SPI_Glcd_Init
- SPI_Glcd_Set_Side
- SPI_Glcd_Set_Page
- SPI_Glcd_Set_X
- SPI_Glcd_Read_Data
- SPI_Glcd_Write_Data
Advanced routines:
- SPI_Glcd_Fill
- SPI_Glcd_Dot
- SPI_Glcd_Line
- SPI_Glcd_V_Line
- SPI_Glcd_H_Line
MikroElektronika
541
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
- SPI_Glcd_Rectangle
- SPI_Glcd_Rectangle_Round_Edges
- SPI_Glcd_Rectangle_Round_Edges_Fill
- SPI_Glcd_Box
- SPI_Glcd_Circle
- SPI_Glcd_Circle_Fill
- SPI_Glcd_Set_Font
- SPI_Glcd_Write_Char
- SPI_Glcd_Write_Text
- SPI_Glcd_Image
- SPI_Glcd_PartialImage
SPI_Glcd_Init
Prototype void SPI_Glcd_Init(char DeviceAddress);
Description Initializes the Glcd module via SPI interface.
Parameters - DeviceAddress: SPI expander hardware address, see schematic at the bottom of this page
Returns Nothing.

The SPI module needs to be initialized. See SPIx_Init and SPIx_Init_Advanced routines.
sbit SPExpanderRST at LATF0_bit;
sbit SPExpanderCS at LATF1_bit;
...
// If Port Expander Library uses SPI module :

SPI_Glcd_Init(0);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
542
SPI_Glcd_Set_Side
Prototype void SPI_Glcd_Set_Side(char x_pos);
Description Selects Glcd side. Refer to the Glcd datasheet for detail explanation.
The parameter x_pos specifies the Glcd side: values from 0 to 63 specify the left side, values from 64
to 127 specify the right side.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Glcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Glcd_Init routine.
Example The following two lines are equivalent, and both of them select the left side of Glcd:
SPI_Glcd_Set_Side(0);
SPI_Glcd_Set_Side(10);
SPI_Glcd_Set_Page
Prototype void SPI_Glcd_Set_Page(char page);
Description Selects page of Glcd.
Returns - page: page number. Valid values: 0..7
Example SPI_Glcd_Set_Page(5);
SPI_Glcd_Set_X
Prototype void SPI_Glcd_Set_X(char x_pos);
Description Sets x-axis position to x_pos dots from the left border of Glcd within the selected side.
Returns Nothing.
Example SPI_Glcd_Set_X(25);
MikroElektronika
543
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Glcd_Read_Data
Prototype char SPI_Glcd_Read_Data();
Description Reads data from the current location of Glcd memory and moves to the next location.
Returns One byte from Glcd memory.
Glcd side, x-axis position and page should be set first. See the functions SPI_Glcd_Set_Side, SPI_
Glcd_Set_X, and SPI_Glcd_Set_Page.
Parameters None.
Example char data_;
...
data_ = SPI_Glcd_Read_Data();
Notes None.
SPI_Glcd_Write_Data
Prototype void SPI_Glcd_Write_Data(char data_);
Parameters - data_: data to be written
Returns Nothing.
Example char data_;
...
SPI_Glcd_Write_Data(data_);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
544
SPI_Glcd_Fill
Prototype void SPI_Glcd_Write_Data(char data_);
Returns Nothing.
Example char data_;
...
SPI_Glcd_Write_Data(data_);
Notes None.
SPI_Glcd_Dot
Prototype void SPI_Glcd_Dot(char x_pos, char y_pos, char color);
Description Draws a dot on Glcd at coordinates (x_pos, y_pos).
Parameters - x_pos: x position. Valid values: 0..127
- y_pos: y position. Valid values: 0..63
The parameter color determines the dot state: 0 clears dot, 1 puts a dot, and 2 inverts dot state.
Returns Nothing.
Example // Invert the dot in the upper left corner
SPI_Glcd_Dot(0, 0, 2);
Notes For x and y axis layout explanation see schematic at the bottom of this page..
MikroElektronika
545
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Glcd_Line
Prototype void SPI_Glcd_Line(int x_start, int y_start, int x_end, int y_end, char
color);
Description Draws a line on Glcd.
Parameters :
- y_start: y coordinate of the line start. Valid values: 0..63
Parameter color determines the line color: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts each dot.
Returns Nothing.
Example // Draw a line between dots (0,0) and (20,30)
SPI_Glcd_Line(0, 0, 20, 30, 1);
Notes For x and y axis layout explanation see schematic at the bottom of this page..
SPI_Glcd_V_Line
Prototype void SPI_Glcd_V_Line(char y_start, char y_end, char x_pos, char color);
Description Draws a vertical line on Glcd.
Parameters - y_start: y coordinate of the line start. Valid values: 0..63
- x_pos: x coordinate of vertical line. Valid values: 0..127
Parameter color determines the line color: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts each dot.
Returns Nothing.
SPI_Glcd_V_Line(5, 25, 10, 1);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
546
SPI_Glcd_H_Line
Prototype void SPI_Glcd_H_Line(char x_start, char x_end, char y_pos, char color);
Description Draws a horizontal line on Glcd.
- y_pos: y coordinate of horizontal line. Valid values: 0..63
Returns Nothing.
SPI_Glcd_H_Line(10, 50, 20, 1);
Notes None.
SPI_Glcd_Rectangle
Prototype void SPI_Glcd_Rectangle(char x_upper_left, char y_upper_left, char x_bottom_
right, char y_bottom_right, char color);
each dot.
Returns Nothing.
Example // Draw a rectangle between dots (5,5) and (40,40)
SPI_Glcd_Rectangle(5, 5, 40, 40, 1);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
547
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Glcd_Rectangle_Round_Edges
Prototype void SPI_Glcd_Rectangle_Round_Edges(unsigned short x_upper_left, unsigned
short y_upper_left, unsigned short x_bottom_right, unsigned short y_bottom_
right, unsigned short round_radius, unsigned short color);
Returns Nothing.
Requires Glcd needs to be initialized, see SPI_Glcd_Init routine.
Example // Draw a rounded edge rectangle between dots (5,5) and (40,40) with the
radius of 12
SPI_Glcd_Rectangle_Round_Edges(5, 5, 40, 40, 12, 1);
Notes None.
SPI_Glcd_Rectangle_Round_Edges_Fill
Prototype void SPI_Glcd_Rectangle_Round_Edges_Fill(unsigned short x_upper_left,
unsigned short y_upper_left, unsigned short x_bottom_right, unsigned short
y_bottom_right, unsigned short round_radius, unsigned short color);
Description Draws a filled rounded edge rectangle on Glcd with color.
The parameter color determines the color of the rectangle border: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts each
dot.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Glcd needs to be initialized, see SPI_Glcd_Init routine.
Example // Draws a filled rounded edge rectangle between dots (5,5) and (40,40) with
the radius of 12
SPI_Glcd_Rectangle_Round_Edges_Fill(5, 5, 40, 40, 12, 1);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
548
SPI_Glcd_Box
Prototype void SPI_Glcd_Box(char x_upper_left, char y_upper_left, char x_bottom_right,
char y_bottom_right, char color);
Description Draws a box on Glcd.
Parameters - x_upper_left: x coordinate of the upper left box corner. Valid values: 0..127
- y_upper_left: y coordinate of the upper left box corner. Valid values: 0..63
- x_bottom_right: x coordinate of the lower right box corner. Valid values: 0..127
- y_bottom_right: y coordinate of the lower right box corner. Valid values: 0..63
The parameter color determines the color of the box fill: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts each dot.
Returns Nothing.
Example // Draw a box between dots (5,15) and (20,40)
SPI_Glcd_Box(5, 15, 20, 40, 1);
Notes None.
SPI_Glcd_Circle
Prototype void SPI_Glcd_Circle(int x_center, int y_center, int radius, char color);
The parameter color determines the color of the circle line: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts each dot.
Returns Nothing.
SPI_Glcd_Circle(50, 50, 10, 1);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
549
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Glcd_Circle_FIll
Prototype void SPI_Glcd_Circle_Fill(int x_center, int y_center, int radius, char
color);
The parameter color determines the color of the circle : 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts each dot.
Returns Nothing.
SPI_Glcd_Circle_Fill(50, 50, 10, 1);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
550
SPI_Glcd_Set_Font
Prototype void SPI_Glcd_Set_Font(const code char *activeFont, char aFontWidth, char
aFontHeight, unsigned int aFontOffs);
Description Sets font that will be used with SPI_Glcd_Write_Char and SPI_Glcd_Write_Text routines.
Parameters None.
Returns - activeFont: font to be set. Needs to be formatted as an array of char
- aFontWidth: width of the font characters in dots.
- aFontHeight: height of the font characters in dots.
- aFontOffs: number that represents difference between the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24
character set and regular ASCII set (eg. if ‘A’ is 65 in ASCII character, and ‘A’ is 45 in the mikroC PRO
for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 character set, aFontOffs is 20). Demo fonts supplied with the library have
an offset of 32, which means that they start with space.
The user can use fonts given in the file __Lib_GLCDFonts file located in the Uses folder or create
his own fonts.
List of supported fonts:
- Font_Glcd_5x7
- Font_Glcd_Character8x7
For the sake of the backward compatibility, these fonts are supported also:
- System3x5 (equivalent to Font_Glcd_System3x5)

- FontSystem5x7_v2 (equivalent to Font_Glcd_System5x7)
- font5x7 (equivalent to Font_Glcd_5x7)
- Character8x7 (equivalent to Font_Glcd_Character8x7)
Example // Use the custom 5x7 font “myfont” which starts with space (32):
SPI_Glcd_Set_Font(myfont, 5, 7, 32);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
551
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Glcd_Write_Char
Prototype void SPI_Glcd_Write_Char(char chr1, char x_pos, char page_num, char
color);
Description Prints character on Glcd.
Parameters - chr1: character to be written
- x_pos: character starting position on x-axis. Valid values: 0..(127-FontWidth)
- page_num: the number of the page on which character will be written. Valid values: 0..7
The parameter color determines the color of the character: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts each dot.
Returns Nothing.
Use the SPI_Glcd_Set_Font to specify the font for display; if no font is specified, then the default
Font_Glcd_System5x7 font supplied with the library will be used.
Example // Write character ‘C’ on the position 10 inside the page 2:
SPI_Glcd_Write_Char(‘C’, 10, 2, 1);
SPI_Glcd_Write_Text
Prototype void SPI_Glcd_Write_Text(char text[], char x_pos, char page_num, char
color);
Description Prints text on Glcd.
- x_pos: text starting position on x-axis.
- page_num: the number of the page on which text will be written. Valid values: 0..7
The parameter color determines the color of the text: 0 white, 1 black, and 2 inverts each dot.
Returns Nothing.
Use the SPI_Glcd_Set_Font to specify the font for display; if no font is specified, then the default
Font_Glcd_System5x7 font supplied with the library will be used.
Example // Write text “Hello world!” on the position 10 inside the page 2:
SPI_Glcd_Write_Text(“Hello world!”, 10, 2, 1);
MikroElektronika
552
SPI_Glcd_Image
Prototype void SPI_Glcd_Image(const code char *image);
Parameters - image: image to be displayed. Bitmap array can be located in both code and RAM memory (due to
the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 pointer to const and pointer to RAM equivalency).
Returns Nothing.
Example // Draw image my_image on Glcd
SPI_Glcd_Image(my_image);
SPI_Glcd_PartialImage
Prototype void SPI_Glcd_PartialImage(unsigned int x_left, unsigned int y_top, unsigned
Returns Nothing.
SPI_Glcd_PartialImage(10, 12, 10, 15, 16, 32, image);
MikroElektronika
553
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Library Example
The example demonstrates how to communicate to KS0108 Glcd via the SPI module, using serial to parallel convertor
MCP23S17.
const code char truck_bmp[1024];

void Delay2s(){ // 2 seconds delay function

Delay_ms(2000);
}
void main() {
char counter;
char *someText;
#define COMPLETE_EXAMPLE

PortExpander
SPI_Glcd_Init(0); // Initialize Glcd via SPI

SPI_Glcd_Fill(0x00); // Clear Glcd
Delay2s();
while(1) {
SPI_Glcd_Image(truck_bmp); // Draw image
Delay2s(); Delay2s();
#endif
Delay2s;
SPI_Glcd_Box(62,40,124,56,1); // Draw box

SPI_Glcd_Rectangle(5,5,84,35,1); // Draw rectangle
SPI_Glcd_Line(0, 63, 127, 0,1); // Draw line
Delay2s();
for(counter = 5; counter < 60; counter+=5 ) { // Draw horizontal and vertical line
Delay_ms(250);
SPI_Glcd_V_Line(2, 54, counter, 1);
SPI_Glcd_H_Line(2, 120, counter, 1);
}
MikroElektronika
554
Delay2s();
SPI_Glcd_Set_Font(Character8x7, 8, 8, 32); // Choose font, see __Lib_GLCDFonts.c
in Uses folder
SPI_Glcd_Write_Text("mikroE", 5, 7, 2); // Write string
#endif
for (counter = 1; counter <= 10; counter++) // Draw circles

SPI_Glcd_Circle(63,32, 3*counter, 1);
Delay2s();
SPI_Glcd_Box(12,20, 70,63, 2); // Draw box
Delay2s();
SPI_Glcd_Fill(0xFF); // Fill Glcd

SPI_Glcd_Set_Font(Character8x7, 8, 7, 32); // Change font
SPI_Glcd_Write_Text(someText, 5, 1, 2); // Write string
Delay2s();
SPI_Glcd_Set_Font(System3x5, 3, 5, 32); // Change font

someText = "3X5 CAPITALS ONLY";
Delay2s();
SPI_Glcd_Set_Font(font5x7, 5, 7, 32); // Change font

Delay2s();
SPI_Glcd_Set_Font(FontSystem5x7_v2, 5, 7, 32); // Change font

someText = "5x7 Font (v2)";
Delay2s();
#endif
}
}
MikroElektronika
555
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
HW Connection
SPI Glcd HW connection
MikroElektronika
556
SPI Lcd Library

The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a library for communication with Lcd (with HD44780 compliant
controllers) in 4-bit mode via SPI interface.
For creating a custom set of Lcd characters use Lcd Custom Character Tool.
Important :
number of Lcd modules.
SPI Lcd Library.
- For MCUs with multiple SPI modules it is possible to initialize all of them and then switch by using the SPI_Set_
Active() routine. See the SPI Library functions.
- This Library is designed to work with the mikroElektronika's Serial Lcd Adapter Board pinout, see schematic at the
bottom of this page for details.

Library Routines
- SPI_Lcd_Config
- SPI_Lcd_Out
- SPI_Lcd_Out_Cp
- SPI_Lcd_Chr
- SPI_Lcd_Chr_Cp
- SPI_Lcd_Cmd
MikroElektronika
557
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Lcd_Config
Prototype void SPI_Lcd_Config(char DeviceAddress);
Description Initializes the Lcd module via SPI interface.
Returns Nothing.


PortExpander
SPI_Lcd_Config(0); // initialize Lcd over SPI interface
Notes None.
SPI_Lcd_Out
Prototype void SPI_Lcd_Out(char row, char column, char *text);
Description Prints text on the Lcd starting from specified position. Both string variables and literals can be passed
as a text.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Lcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Lcd_Config routine.
SPI_Lcd_Out(1, 3, “Hello!”);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
558
SPI_Lcd_Out_Cp
Prototype void SPI_Lcd_Out_CP(char *text);
Description Prints text on the Lcd at current cursor position. Both string variables and literals can be passed as a
text.
Returns Nothing.
SPI_Lcd_Out_CP(“Here!”);
Notes None.
SPI_Lcd_Chr
Prototype void SPI_Lcd_Chr(char Row, char Column, char Out_Char);
Description Prints character on Lcd at specified position. Both variables and literals can be passed as character.
Parameters - Row: writing position row number
- Column: writing position column number
- Out_Char: character to be written
Returns Nothing.
SPI_Lcd_Chr(2, 3, ‘i’);
Notes None.
SPI_Lcd_Chr_Cp
Prototype void SPI_Lcd_Chr_CP(char Out_Char);
Description Prints character on Lcd at current cursor position. Both variables and literals can be passed as
character.
Parameters - Out_Char: character to be written
Returns Nothing.
Example // Write character “e” at current cursor position:
SPI_Lcd_Chr_Cp(‘e’);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
559
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Lcd_Cmd
Prototype void SPI_Lcd_Cmd(char out_char);
Returns Nothing.
SPI_Lcd_Cmd(_LCD_CLEAR);
Notes Predefined constants can be passed to the routine, see Available SPI Lcd Commands.
SPI_Lcd_Cmd
SPI Lcd Command Purpose
_LCD_RETURN_HOME Return cursor to home position, returns a shifted display
MikroElektronika
560
Library Example
Default Pin Configuration

Use SPI_Lcd_Init for default pin settings (see the first figure below).

char *text = "mikroElektronika";


}
void main() {

SPI_Lcd_Config(0); // Initialize Lcd over SPI interface

SPI_Lcd_Cmd(_LCD_CLEAR); // Clear display
SPI_Lcd_Cmd(_LCD_CURSOR_OFF); // Turn cursor off
SPI_Lcd_Out(1,6, "mikroE"); // Print text to Lcd, 1st row, 6th column
SPI_Lcd_Chr_CP('!'); // Append '!'
SPI_Lcd_Out(2,1, text); // Print text to Lcd, 2nd row, 1st column
// SPI_Lcd_Out(3,1,"mikroE"); // For Lcd with more than two rows

// SPI_Lcd_Out(4,15,"mikroE"); // For Lcd with more than two rows
Delay_ms(2000);
// Moving text
Spi_Lcd_Cmd(_LCD_SHIFT_RIGHT);
Move_Delay();
}

Spi_Lcd_Cmd(_LCD_SHIFT_LEFT);
Move_Delay();
}

Spi_Lcd_Cmd(_LCD_SHIFT_RIGHT);
Move_Delay();
}
}
MikroElektronika
561
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Lcd HW connection by default initialization (using SPI_Lcd_Init)
MikroElektronika
562
SPI Lcd8 (8-bit interface) Library

The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a library for communication with Lcd (with HD44780 compliant
controllers) in 8-bit mode via SPI interface.
For creating a custom set of Lcd characters use Lcd Custom Character Tool.
Important :
number of Lcd modules.
SPI Lcd8 Library.
- For MCUs with multiple SPI modules it is possible to initialize all of them and then switch by using the SPI_Set_Active()
routine. See the SPI Library functions.
- This Library is designed to work with the mikroElektronika's Serial Lcd/Glcd Adapter Board pinout, see schematic at
the bottom of this page for details.

Library Routines
- SPI_Lcd8_Config
- SPI_Lcd8_Out
- SPI_Lcd8_Out_Cp
- SPI_Lcd8_Chr
- SPI_Lcd8_Chr_Cp
- SPI_Lcd8_Cmd
MikroElektronika
563
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Lcd8_Config
Prototype void SPI_Lcd8_Config(char DeviceAddress);
Description Initializes the Lcd module via SPI interface.
Returns Nothing.

...

SPI1_Init(); // Initialize SPI module used
with PortExpander
SPI_Lcd8_Config(0); // intialize Lcd in 8bit mode
via SPI
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
564
SPI_Lcd8_Out
Prototype void SPI_Lcd8_Out(unsigned short row, unsigned short column, char *text);
Description Prints text on Lcd starting from specified position. Both string variables and literals can be passed as
a text.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Lcd needs to be initialized for SPI communication, see SPI_Lcd8_Config routine.
SPI_Lcd8_Out(1, 3, “Hello!”);
Notes None.
SPI_Lcd8_Out_Cp
Prototype void SPI_Lcd8_Out_CP(char *text);
Description Prints text on Lcd at current cursor position. Both string variables and literals can be passed as a
text.
Returns Nothing.
SPI_Lcd8_Out_Cp(“Here!”);
Notes None.
SPI_Lcd8_Chr
Prototype void SPI_Lcd8_Chr(unsigned short row, unsigned short column, char out_
char);
Description Prints character on Lcd at specified position. Both variables and literals can be passed as character.
Parameters - row: writing position row number
- column: writing position column number
- out_char: character to be written
Returns Nothing.
SPI_Lcd8_Chr(2, 3, ‘i’);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
565
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Lcd8_Chr_Cp
Prototype void SPI_Lcd8_Chr_CP(char out_char);
Description Prints character on Lcd at current cursor position. Both variables and literals can be passed as
character.
Parameters - out_char: character to be written
Returns Nothing.
Example Print “e” at current cursor position:
// Write character “e” at current cursor position:

SPI_Lcd8_Chr_Cp(‘e’);
Notes None.
SPI_Lcd8_Cmd
Prototype void SPI_Lcd8_Cmd(char out_char);
Returns Nothing.
SPI_Lcd8_Cmd(_LCD_CLEAR);
Notes Predefined constants can be passed to the routine, see Available SPI Lcd8 Commands.
MikroElektronika
566
Available SPI Lcd8 Commands

SPI Lcd8 Command Purpose
_LCD_RETURN_HOME Return cursor to home position, returns a shifted display
Library Example
This example demonstrates how to communicate Lcd in 8-bit mode via the SPI module, using serial to parallel convertor
MCP23S17.
char *text = "mikroElektronika";


}
void main() {

MikroElektronika
567
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Lcd8_Config(0); // Initialize Lcd over SPI interface

SPI_Lcd8_Cmd(_LCD_CLEAR); // Clear display
SPI_Lcd8_Cmd(_LCD_CURSOR_OFF); // Turn cursor off
SPI_Lcd8_Out(1,6, "mikroE"); // Print text to Lcd, 1st row, 6th column
SPI_Lcd8_Chr_CP('!'); // Append '!'
SPI_Lcd8_Out(2,1, text); // Print text to Lcd, 2nd row, 1st column
// SPI_Lcd8_Out(3,1,"mikroE"); // For Lcd with more than two rows

// SPI_Lcd8_Out(4,15,"mikroE"); // For Lcd with more than two rows
Delay_ms(2000);
// Moving text
Spi_Lcd8_Cmd(_LCD_SHIFT_RIGHT);
Move_Delay();
}

Spi_Lcd8_Cmd(_LCD_SHIFT_LEFT);
Move_Delay();
}

Spi_Lcd8_Cmd(_LCD_SHIFT_RIGHT);
Move_Delay();
}
}
MikroElektronika
568
SPI Lcd8 HW connection
MikroElektronika
569
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI T6963C Graphic Lcd Library

The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a library for working with Glcds based on TOSHIBA T6963C
controller via SPI interface. The Toshiba T6963C is a very popular Lcd controller for the use in small graphics modules.
It is capable of controlling displays with a resolution up to 240x128. Because of its low power and small outline it is
most suitable for mobile applications such as PDAs, MP3 players or mobile measurement equipment. Although this
controller is small, it has a capability of displaying and merging text and graphics and it manages all interfacing signals
to the displays Row and Column drivers.
Important :
number of T6963C based Glcd modules. So, additional external power supply for these modules may be required.
- Glcd size based initialization routines can be found in setup library files located in the Uses folder.
- The user must make sure that used MCU has appropriate ports and pins. If this is not the case the user should adjust
initialization routines.
- The library uses the SPI module for communication. The user must initialize the appropriate SPI module before using
the SPI T6963C Glcd Library.
- For MCUs with multiple SPI modules it is possible to initialize both of them and then switch by using the SPI_Set_
Active() routine. See the SPI Library functions.
- This Library is designed to work with mikroElektronika's Serial Glcd 240x128 and 240x64 Adapter Boards pinout, see
schematic at the bottom of this page for details.
- To use constants located in __Lib_SPIT6963C_Const.h file, user must include it the source file : #include
"__SPIT6963C.h".
Some mikroElektronika's adapter boards have pinout different from T6369C datasheets. Appropriate relations between
these labels are given in the table below :
Adapter Board T6369C datasheet

RS C/D
R/W /RD
E /WR
External dependencies of SPI T6963C Graphic Lcd Library

The implementation of SPI T6963C Graphic Lcd Library routines is based on Port Expander Library routines.
MikroElektronika
570
Library Routines
- SPI_T6963C_config
- SPI_T6963C_writeData
- SPI_T6963C_writeCommand
- SPI_T6963C_setPtr
- SPI_T6963C_waitReady
- SPI_T6963C_fill
- SPI_T6963C_dot
- SPI_T6963C_write_char
- SPI_T6963C_write_text
- SPI_T6963C_line
- SPI_T6963C_rectangle
- SPI_T6963C_rectangle_round_edges
- SPI_T6963C_rectangle_round_edges_fill
- SPI_T6963C_box
- SPI_T6963C_circle
- SPI_T6963C_circle_fill
- SPI_T6963C_image
- SPI_T6963C_PartialImage
- SPI_T6963C_sprite
- SPI_T6963C_set_cursor
- SPI_T6963C_clearBit
- SPI_T6963C_setBit
- SPI_T6963C_negBit
The following low level library routines are implemented as macros. These macros can be found in the __SPIT6963C.h
header file which is located in the SPI T6963C example projects folders.
- SPI_T6963C_displayGrPanel
- SPI_T6963C_displayTxtPanel
- SPI_T6963C_setGrPanel
- SPI_T6963C_setTxtPanel
- SPI_T6963C_panelFill
- SPI_T6963C_grFill
- SPI_T6963C_txtFill
- SPI_T6963C_cursor_height
- SPI_T6963C_graphics
- SPI_T6963C_text
- SPI_T6963C_cursor
- SPI_T6963C_cursor_blink
MikroElektronika
571
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_Lcd8_Cmd
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_config(unsigned int width, unsigned char height, unsigned
char fntW, char DeviceAddress, unsigned char wr, unsigned char rd, unsigned
char cd, unsigned char rst);
Description Initializes T6963C Graphic Lcd controller.
Display RAM organization:

The library cuts RAM into panels : a complete panel is one graphics panel followed by a text panel
(see schematic below).
+---------------------+ /\
+ GRAPHICS PANEL #0 + |
+ + |
+ + |
+ + |
+---------------------+ | PANEL 0
+ TEXT PANEL #0 + |
+ + \/
+---------------------+ /\
+ + |
+ + |
+ + |
+---------------------+ | PANEL 1
+ TEXT PANEL #1 + |
+ + |
+---------------------+ \/
Parameters - width: width of the Glcd panel

- height: height of the Glcd panel
- fntW: font width
- DeviceAddress: SPI expander hardware address, see schematic at the bottom of this page
- wr: write signal pin on Glcd control port
- rd: read signal pin on Glcd control port
- cd: command/data signal pin on Glcd control port
- rst: reset signal pin on Glcd control port
Returns Nothing.

MikroElektronika
572

...
// Initialize SPI module

SPI1_Init();
SPI_T6963C_Config(240, 64, 8, 0, 0, 1, 3, 4);
Notes None.
SPI_T6963C_writeData
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_writeData(unsigned char data_);
Description Writes data to T6963C controller via SPI interface.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See SPI_T6963C_Config routine.
Example SPI_T6963C_writeData(data_);
Notes None.
SPI_T6963C_writeCommand
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_writeCommand(unsigned char data_);
Description Writes command to T6963C controller via SPI interface.
Parameters - data_: command to be written
Returns Nothing.
Example SPI_T6963C_writeCommand(SPI_T6963C_CURSOR_POINTER_SET);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
573
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_T6963C_setPtr
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_setPtr(unsigned int p, unsigned char c);
Description Sets the memory pointer p for command p.
Parameters - p: address where command should be written
- c: command to be written
Returns Nothing.
Example SPI_T6963C_setPtr(SPI_T6963C_grHomeAddr + start, SPI_T6963C_ADDRESS_
POINTER_SET);
Notes None.
SPI_T6963C_waitReady
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_waitReady();
Description Pools the status byte, and loops until Toshiba Glcd module is ready.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Example SPI_T6963C_waitReady();
Notes None.
SPI_T6963C_fill
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_fill(unsigned char v, unsigned int start, unsigned int
len);
Description Fills controller memory block with given byte.
Parameters - v: byte to be written
- start: starting address of the memory block
- len: length of the memory block in bytes
Returns Nothing.
Example SPI_T6963C_fill(0x33,0x00FF,0x000F);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
574
SPI_T6963C_dot
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_dot(int x, int y, unsigned char color);
Description Writes a char in the current text panel of Glcd at coordinates (x, y).
Returns - x: dot position on x-axis

- y: dot position on y-axis
- color: color parameter. Valid values: SPI_T6963C_BLACK and SPI_T6963C_WHITE
Example SPI_T6963C_dot(x0, y0, SPI_T6963C_BLACK);
Notes None.
SPI_T6963C_write_char
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_write_char(unsigned char c, unsigned char x, unsigned char
y, unsigned char mode);
Parameters - c: char to be written
- x: char position on x-axis
- y: char position on y-axis
- mode: mode parameter. Valid values: SPI_T6963C_ROM_MODE_OR, SPI_T6963C_ROM_MODE_
XOR, SPI_T6963C_ROM_MODE_AND and SPI_T6963C_ROM_MODE_TEXT
Mode parameter explanation:
- OR Mode: In the OR-Mode, text and graphics can be displayed and the data is logically “OR-ed”. This
is the most common way of combining text and graphics for example labels on buttons.
- XOR-Mode: In this mode, the text and graphics data are combined via the logical “exclusive OR”.
This can be useful to display text in negative mode, i.e. white text on black background.
- AND-Mode: The text and graphic data shown on display are combined via the logical “AND
function”.
- TEXT-Mode: This option is only available when displaying just a text. The Text Attribute values are
stored in the graphic area of display memory.
For more details see the T6963C datasheet.

Returns Nothing.
Example SPI_T6963C_write_char(“A”,22,23,SPI_T6963C_ROM_MODE_AND);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
575
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_T6963C_write_text
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_write_text(unsigned char *str, unsigned char x, unsigned
char y, unsigned char mode);
Parameters - str: text to be written
- x: text position on x-axis
- y: text position on y-axis
- mode: mode parameter. Valid values: SPI_T6963C_ROM_MODE_OR, SPI_T6963C_ROM_MODE_
XOR, SPI_T6963C_ROM_MODE_AND and SPI_T6963C_ROM_MODE_TEXT
This can be useful to display text in negative mode, i.e. white text on black background.
- AND-Mode: The text and graphic data shown on the display are combined via the logical “AND
function”.

Returns Nothing.
Example SPI_T6963C_write_text(“Glcd LIBRARY DEMO, WELCOME !”, 0, 0, SPI_T6963C_ROM_
MODE_XOR);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
576
SPI_T6963C_line
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_line(int x0, int y0, int x1, int y1, unsigned char
pcolor);
Parameters - x0: x coordinate of the line start
- y0: y coordinate of the line end
- x1: x coordinate of the line start
- pcolor: color parameter. Valid values: SPI_T6963C_BLACK and SPI_T6963C_WHITE
Returns Nothing.
Example SPI_T6963C_line(0, 0, 239, 127, SPI_T6963C_WHITE);
Notes None.
SPI_T6963C_rectangle
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_rectangle(int x0, int y0, int x1, int y1, unsigned char
pcolor);
Parameters - x0: x coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner
- y0: y coordinate of the upper left rectangle corner
- x1: x coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner
- y1: y coordinate of the lower right rectangle corner
Returns Nothing.
Example SPI_T6963C_rectangle(20, 20, 219, 107, SPI_T6963C_WHITE);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
577
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_T6963C_rectangle_round_edges
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_rectangle_round_edges(int x0, int y0, int x1, int y1, int
round_radius, unsigned char pcolor);
Returns Nothing.
Example SPI_T6963C_rectangle_round_edges(20, 20, 219, 107, 12, SPI_T6963C_WHITE);
Notes None.
SPI_T6963C_rectangle_round_edges_fill
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_rectangle_round_edges_fill(int x0, int y0, int x1, int y1,
int round_radius, unsigned char pcolor);
Returns Nothing.
Example SPI_T6963C_rectangle_round_edges_fill(20, 20, 219, 107, 12, SPI_T6963C_
WHITE);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
578
SPI_T6963C_box
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_box(int x0, int y0, int x1, int y1, unsigned char pcolor);
Description Draws a box on the Glcd
Parameters - x0: x coordinate of the upper left box corner
- y0: y coordinate of the upper left box corner
- x1: x coordinate of the lower right box corner
- y1: y coordinate of the lower right box corner
Returns Nothing.
Example SPI_T6963C_box(0, 119, 239, 127, SPI_T6963C_WHITE);
Notes None.
SPI_T6963C_circle
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_circle(int x, int y, long r, unsigned char pcolor);
Description Draws a circle on the Glcd.
Parameters - x: x coordinate of the circle center
- y: y coordinate of the circle center
- r: radius size
Returns Nothing.
Example SPI_T6963C_circle(120, 64, 110, SPI_T6963C_WHITE);
Notes None.
SPI_T6963C_circle_fill
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_circle_fill(int x, int y, long r, unsigned char pcolor);
Description Draws a filled circle on the Glcd.
- r: radius size
Returns Nothing.
Example SPI_T6963C_circle_fill(120, 64, 110, SPI_T6963C_WHITE);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
579
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_T6963C_image
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_image(const code char *pic);
Parameters - pic: image to be displayed. Bitmap array can be located in both code and RAM memory (due to the
mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 pointer to const and pointer to RAM equivalency).
Returns Nothing.
Example SPI_T6963C_image(my_image);
Notes Image dimension must match the display dimension.
Use the integrated Glcd Bitmap Editor (menu option Tools › Glcd Bitmap Editor) to convert image to
a constant array suitable for displaying on Glcd.
SPI_T6963C_PartialImage
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_PartialImage(unsigned int x_left, unsigned int y_top,
unsigned int width, unsigned int height, unsigned int picture_width, unsigned
int picture_height, code const unsigned short * image);
Returns Nothing.
SPI_T6963C_PartialImage(10, 12, 10, 15, 16, 32, image);
Use the integrated Glcd Bitmap Editor (menu option Tools › Glcd Bitmap Editor) to convert image to a
constant array suitable for displaying on Glcd.
MikroElektronika
580
SPI_T6963C_sprite
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_sprite(unsigned char px, unsigned char py, const code char
*pic, unsigned char sx, unsigned char sy);
Description Fills graphic rectangle area (px, py) to (px+sx, py+sy) with custom size picture.
Parameters - px: x coordinate of the upper left picture corner. Valid values: multiples of the font width
- py: y coordinate of the upper left picture corner
- pic: picture to be displayed
- sx: picture width. Valid values: multiples of the font width
- sy: picture height
Returns Nothing.
Example SPI_T6963C_sprite(76, 4, einstein, 88, 119); // draw a sprite
Notes If px and sx parameters are not multiples of the font width they will be scaled to the nearest lower
number that is a multiple of the font width.
SPI_T6963C_set_cursor
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_set_cursor(unsigned char x, unsigned char y);
Description Sets cursor to row x and column y.
Parameters - x: cursor position row number
- y: cursor position column number
Returns Nothing.
Example SPI_T6963C_set_cursor(cposx, cposy);
Notes None.
SPI_T6963C_clearBit
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_clearBit(char b);
Description Clears control port bit(s).
Parameters - b: bit mask. The function will clear bit x on control port if bit x in bit mask is set to 1.
Returns Nothing.
Example // clear bits 0 and 1 on control port
SPI_T6963C_clearBit(0x03);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
581
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_T6963C_setBit
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_setBit(char b);
Description Sets control port bit(s).
Parameters - b: bit mask. The function will set bit x on control port if bit x in bit mask is set to 1.
Returns Nothing.
Example // set bits 0 and 1 on control port
SPI_T6963C_setBit(0x03);
Notes None.
SPI_T6963C_negBit
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_negBit(char b);
Description Negates control port bit(s).
Parameters - b: bit mask. The function will negate bit x on control port if bit x in bit mask is set to 1.
Returns Nothing.
Example // negate bits 0 and 1 on control port
SPI_T6963C_negBit(0x03);
Notes None.
SPI_T6963C_displayGrPanel
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_displayGrPanel(unsigned int n);
Description Display selected graphic panel.
Parameters - n: graphic panel number. Valid values: 0 and 1.
Returns Nothing.
Example // display graphic panel 1
SPI_T6963C_displayGrPanel(1);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
582
SPI_T6963C_displayTxtPanel
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_displayTxtPanel(unsigned int n);
Description Display selected text panel.
Parameters - n: text panel number. Valid values: 0 and 1.
Returns Nothing.
Example // display text panel 1
SPI_T6963C_displayTxtPanel(1);
Notes None.
SPI_T6963C_setGrPanel
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_setGrPanel(unsigned int n);
Description Compute start address for selected graphic panel and set appropriate internal pointers. All subsequent
graphic operations will be preformed at this graphic panel.
Returns Nothing.
Example // set graphic panel 1 as current graphic panel.
SPI_T6963C_setGrPanel(1);
Notes None.
SPI_T6963C_setTxtPanel
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_setTxtPanel(unsigned int n);
Description Compute start address for selected text panel and set appropriate internal pointers. All subsequent
text operations will be preformed at this text panel.
Returns Nothing.
Example // set text panel 1 as current text panel.
SPI_T6963C_setTxtPanel(1);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
583
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_T6963C_panelFill
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_panelFill(unsigned char v);
Description Fill current panel in full (graphic+text) with appropriate value (0 to clear).
Parameters - v: value to fill panel with.
Returns Nothing.
Example clear current panel
SPI_T6963C_panelFill(0);
Notes None.
SPI_T6963C_grFill
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_grFill(unsigned char v);
Description Fill current graphic panel with appropriate value (0 to clear).
Parameters - v: value to fill graphic panel with.
Returns Nothing.
SPI_T6963C_grFill(0);
Notes None.
SPI_T6963C_txtFill
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_txtFill(unsigned char v);
Parameters - v: this value increased by 32 will be used to fill text panel.
Returns Nothing.
SPI_T6963C_txtFill(0);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
584
SPI_T6963C_cursor_height
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_cursor_height(unsigned char n);
Description Set cursor size.
Parameters - n: cursor height. Valid values: 0..7.
Returns Nothing.
Example SPI_T6963C_cursor_height(7);
Notes None.
SPI_T6963C_graphics
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_graphics(unsigned int n);
Description Enable/disable graphic displaying.
Parameters - n: graphic enable/disable parameter. Valid values: 0 (disable graphic dispaying) and 1 (enable
graphic displaying).
Returns Nothing.
Example // enable graphic displaying
SPI_T6963C_graphics(1);
Notes None.
SPI_T6963C_text
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_text(unsigned int n);
Description Enable/disable text displaying.
Parameters - n: text enable/disable parameter. Valid values: 0 (disable text dispaying) and 1 (enable text
displaying).
Returns Nothing.
Example // enable text displaying
SPI_T6963C_text(1);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
585
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
SPI_T6963C_cursor
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_cursor(unsigned int n);
Description Set cursor on/off.
Parameters - n: on/off parameter. Valid values: 0 (set cursor off) and 1 (set cursor on).
Returns Nothing.
SPI_T6963C_cursor(1);
Notes None.
SPI_T6963C_cursor_blink
Prototype void SPI_T6963C_cursor_blink(unsigned int n);
Description Enable/disable cursor blinking.
Parameters - n: cursor blinking enable/disable parameter. Valid values: 0 (disable cursor blinking) and 1 (enable
cursor blinking).
Returns Nothing.
Example // enable cursor blinking
SPI_T6963C_cursor_blink(1);
Notes None.
Library Example
The following drawing demo tests advanced routines of the SPI T6963C Glcd library. Hardware configurations in this
example are made for the EasydsPIC3 board and dsPIC30F4013.
#include "__SPIT6963C.h"
/*
* bitmap pictures stored in ROM
*/
const code char mikroE_240x128_bmp[];
const code char einstein[];

void main() {
char txt1[] = " EINSTEIN WOULD HAVE LIKED mE";
char txt[] = " GLCD LIBRARY DEMO, WELCOME !";
MikroElektronika
586
unsigned char panel; // Current panel

unsigned int i; // General purpose register
unsigned char curs; // Cursor visibility
unsigned int cposx, cposy; // Cursor x-y position
ADPCFG = 0xFFFF;
TRISB0_bit = 1; // Set RB0 as input


// // If Port Expander Library uses SPI2 module

// SPI2_Init(); // Initialize SPI module used with PortExpander
/*
* init display for 240 pixel width and 128 pixel height
* 8 bits character width
* data bus on MCP23S17 portB
* control bus on MCP23S17 portA
* bit 2 is !WR
* bit 1 is !RD
* bit 0 is !CD
* bit 4 is RST
* chip enable, reverse on, 8x8 font internaly set in library
*/
SPI_T6963C_Config(240, 128, 8, 0, 2, 1, 0, 4);

Delay_ms(1000);
/*
* Enable both graphics and text display at the same time
*/
SPI_T6963C_text(1);
panel = 0;
i = 0;
curs = 0;
cposx = cposy = 0;
/*
* Text messages
*/
SPI_T6963C_write_text(txt, 0, 0, SPI_T6963C_ROM_MODE_XOR);
SPI_T6963C_write_text(txt1, 0, 15, SPI_T6963C_ROM_MODE_XOR);
MikroElektronika
587
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
/*
* Cursor
*/
SPI_T6963C_cursor_height(8); // 8 pixel height
SPI_T6963C_set_cursor(0, 0); // move cursor to top left
SPI_T6963C_cursor(0); // cursor off
/*
* Draw rectangles
*/
SPI_T6963C_rectangle(0, 0, 239, 127, SPI_T6963C_WHITE);
/*
* Draw a cross
*/
SPI_T6963C_line(0, 0, 239, 127, SPI_T6963C_WHITE);
SPI_T6963C_line(0, 127, 239, 0, SPI_T6963C_WHITE);
/*
* Draw solid boxes
*/
SPI_T6963C_box(0, 0, 239, 8, SPI_T6963C_WHITE);
SPI_T6963C_box(0, 119, 239, 127, SPI_T6963C_WHITE);
/*
* Draw circles
*/
SPI_T6963C_circle(120, 64, 10, SPI_T6963C_WHITE);
SPI_T6963C_sprite(76, 4, einstein, 88, 119); // Draw a sprite
SPI_T6963C_setGrPanel(1); // Select other graphic

panel
SPI_T6963C_image(mikroE_240x128_bmp); // Draw an image
#endif
for(;;) { // Endless loop

/*
* If RB0 is pressed, display only graphic panel
*/
MikroElektronika
588
if(RB0_bit) {
SPI_T6963C_text(0);
Delay_ms(300);
}
/*
* If RB1 is pressed, toggle the display between graphic panel 0 and graphic panel
1
*/
else if(RB1_bit) {
panel++;
panel &= 1;
SPI_T6963C_displayGrPanel(panel);
Delay_ms(300);
}
#endif
/*
* If RB2 is pressed, display only text panel
*/
else if(RB2_bit) {
SPI_T6963C_text(1);
Delay_ms(300);
}
/*
* If RB3 is pressed, display text and graphic panels
*/
else if(RB3_bit) {
SPI_T6963C_text(1);
Delay_ms(300);
}
/*
* If RB4 is pressed, change cursor
*/
else if(RB4_bit) {
curs++;
if(curs == 3) curs = 0;
switch(curs) {
case 0:
// no cursor
break;
case 1:
// blinking cursor
break;
case 2:
// non blinking cursor
break;
}
MikroElektronika
589
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Delay_ms(300);
}
/*
* Move cursor, even if not visible
*/
cposx++;
if(cposx == SPI_T6963C_txtCols) {
cposx = 0;
cposy++;
if(cposy == SPI_T6963C_grHeight / SPI_T6963C_CHARACTER_HEIGHT) {
cposy = 0;
}
}
SPI_T6963C_set_cursor(cposx, cposy);
Delay_ms(100);
}
}
MikroElektronika
590
HW Connection
SPI T6963C Glcd HW connection
MikroElektronika
591
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
T6963C Graphic Lcd Library

The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a library for working with Glcds based on TOSHIBA T6963C
controller. The Toshiba T6963C is a very popular Lcd controller for the use in small graphics modules. It is capable of
controlling displays with a resolution up to 240x128. Because of its low power and small outline it is most suitable for
mobile applications such as PDAs, MP3 players or mobile measurement equipment. Although small, this contoller has
a capability of displaying and merging text and graphics and it manages all the interfacing signals to the displays Row
and Column drivers.
Important :
- When using this library with dsPIC33 and PIC24 family of MCUs be aware of their voltage incompatibility with certain
number of T6963C based Glcd modules. So, additional external power supply for these modules may be required.
- ChipEnable(CE), FontSelect(FS) and Reverse(MD) have to be set to appropriate levels by the user outside of the
T6963C_Init() function. See the Library Example code at the bottom of this page.
- Glcd size based initialization routines can be found in setup library files located in the Uses folder.
- The user must make sure that used MCU has appropriate ports and pins. If this is not the case the user should adjust
initialization routines.
Some mikroElektronika's adapter boards have pinout different from T6369C datasheets. Appropriate relations between
these labels are given in the table below :
Adapter Board T6369C datasheet

RS C/D
R/W /RD
E /WR
MikroElektronika
592

The following variables
must be defined in all
Description : Example :
projects using T6963C
Graphic Lcd library:
extern sfr unsigned char T6963C_dataPort
T6963C Data Port.
int T6963C_dataPort; at PORTB;
extern sfr sbit sbit T6963C_ctrlwr at
Write signal.
T6963C_ctrlwr; LATF2_bit;
extern sfr sbit sbit T6963C_ctrlrd at
Read signal.
T6963C_ctrlrd; LATF1_bit;
extern sfr sbit sbit T6963C_ctrlcd at
Command/Data signal.
T6963C_ctrlcd; LATF0_bit;
extern sfr sbit sbit T6963C_ctrlrst
Reset signal.
T6963C_ctrlrst; at LATF4_bit;
extern sfr sbit sbit T6963C_ctrlwr_
T 6 9 6 3 C _ c t r l w r _ Direction of the Write pin. Direction at TRISF2_
Direction; bit;
extern sfr sbit sbit T6963C_ctrlrd_
T 6 9 6 3 C _ c t r l r d _ Direction of the Read pin. Direction at TRISF1_
Direction; bit;
extern sfr sbit sbit T6963C_ctrlcd_
Direction of the Command/
T6963C_ctrlcd_ Direction at TRISF0_
Data pin.
Direction; bit;
extern sfr sbit sbit T6963C_ctrlrst_
T 6 9 6 3 C _ c t r l r s t _ Direction of the Reset pin. Direction at TRISF4_
Direction; bit;
MikroElektronika
593
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Library Routines
- T6963C_init
- T6963C_writeData
- T6963C_writeCommand
- T6963C_setPtr
- T6963C_waitReady
- T6963C_fill
- T6963C_dot
- T6963C_write_char
- T6963C_write_text
- T6963C_line
- T6963C_rectangle
- T6963C_rectangle_round_edges
- T6963C_rectangle_round_edges_fill
- T6963C_box
- T6963C_circle
- T6963C_circle_fill
- T6963C_image
- T6963C_PartialImage
- T6963C_sprite
- T6963C_set_cursor
The following low level library routines are implemented as macros. These macros can be found in the __T6963C.h
header file which is located in the T6963C example projects folders.
- T6963C_clearBit
- T6963C_setBit
- T6963C_negBit
- T6963C_displayGrPanel
- T6963C_displayTxtPanel
- T6963C_setGrPanel
- T6963C_setTxtPanel
- T6963C_panelFill
- T6963C_grFill
- T6963C_txtFill
- T6963C_cursor_height
- T6963C_graphics
- T6963C_text
- T6963C_cursor
- T6963C_cursor_blink
MikroElektronika
594
SPI_T6963C_cursor
Prototype void T6963C_init(unsigned int width, unsigned char height, unsigned char
fntW);
Description Initalizes the Graphic Lcd controller.
Display RAM organization:

The library cuts the RAM into panels : a complete panel is one graphics panel followed by a text panel
(see schematic below).
+---------------------+ /\
+ + |
+ + |
+ + |
+---------------------+ | PANEL 0
+ TEXT PANEL #0 + |
+ + \/
+---------------------+ /\
+ + |
+ + |
+ + |
+---------------------+ | PANEL 1
+ TEXT PANEL #1 + |
+ + |
+---------------------+ \/
Parameters - width: width of the Glcd panel
- height: height of the Glcd panel
- fntW: font width
Returns Nothing.
- T6963C_dataPort: Data Port

- T6963C_ctrlwr: Write signal pin
- T6963C_ctrlrd: Read signal pin
- T6963C_ctrlcd: Command/Data signal pin
- T6963C_ctrlrst: Reset signal pin
- T6963C_ctrlwr_Direction: Direction of Write signal pin
- T6963C_ctrlrd_Direction: Direction of Read signal pin
- T6963C_ctrlcd_Direction: Direction of Command/Data signal pin
- T6963C_ctrlrst_Direction: Direction of Reset signal pin
MikroElektronika
595
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Example // T6963C module connections

char T6963C_dataPort at PORTB; // DATA port
sbit T6963C_ctrlwr at LATF2_bit; // WR write signal

sbit T6963C_ctrlrd at LATF1_bit; // RD read signal
sbit T6963C_ctrlcd at LATF0_bit; // CD command/data signal
sbit T6963C_ctrlrst at LATF4_bit; // RST reset signal
sbit T6963C_ctrlwr_Direction at TRISF2_bit; // WR write signal
sbit T6963C_ctrlrd_Direction at TRISF1_bit; // RD read signal
sbit T6963C_ctrlcd_Direction at TRISF0_bit; // CD command/data signal
sbit T6963C_ctrlrst_Direction at TRISF4_bit; // RST reset signal
// Signals not used by library, they are set in main function

sbit T6963C_ctrlce at LATF3_bit; // CE signal
sbit T6963C_ctrlfs at LATF6_bit; // FS signal
sbit T6963C_ctrlmd at LATF5_bit; // MD signal
sbit T6963C_ctrlce_Direction at TRISF3_bit; // CE signal direction
sbit T6963C_ctrlfs_Direction at TRISF6_bit; // FS signal direction
sbit T6963C_ctrlmd_Direction at TRISF5_bit; // MD signal direction
// End T6963C module connections
...
// init display for 240 pixel width, 128 pixel height and 8 bits character
width
T6963C_init(240, 128, 8);
Notes None.
T6963C_writeData
Prototype void T6963C_writeData(unsigned char mydata);
Description Writes data to T6963C controller.
Parameters - mydata: data to be written
Returns Nothing.
Requires Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See the T6963C_init routine.
Example T6963C_writeData(AddrL);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
596
T6963C_writeCommand
Prototype void T6963C_writeCommand(unsigned char mydata);
Description Writes command to T6963C controller.
Parameters - mydata: command to be written
Returns Nothing.
Example T6963C_writeCommand(T6963C_CURSOR_POINTER_SET);
Notes None.
T6963C_setPtr
Prototype void T6963C_setPtr(unsigned int p, unsigned char c);
Description Sets the memory pointer p for command p.
Parameters - p: address where command should be written
- c: command to be written
Returns Nothing.
Example T6963C_setPtr(T6963C_grHomeAddr + start, T6963C_ADDRESS_POINTER_SET);
Notes None.
T6963C_waitReady
Prototype void T6963C_waitReady();
Description Pools the status byte, and loops until Toshiba Glcd module is ready.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Example T6963C_waitReady();
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
597
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
T6963C_fill
Prototype void T6963C_fill(unsigned char v, unsigned int start, unsigned int len);
Description Fills controller memory block with given byte.
Parameters - v: byte to be written
- start: starting address of the memory block
- len: length of the memory block in bytes
Returns Nothing.
Example T6963C_fill(0x33,0x00FF,0x000F);
Notes None.
T6963C_dot
Prototype void T6963C_dot(int x, int y, unsigned char color);
Description Draws a dot in the current graphic panel of Glcd at coordinates (x, y).
Parameters - x: dot position on x-axis
- y: dot position on y-axis
- color: color parameter. Valid values: T6963C_BLACK and T6963C_WHITE
Returns Nothing.
Example T6963C_dot(x0, y0, pcolor);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
598
T6963C_write_char
Prototype void T6963C_write_char(unsigned char c, unsigned char x, unsigned char y,
unsigned char mode);
Parameters - c: char to be written
- x: char position on x-axis
- y: char position on y-axis
- mode: mode parameter. Valid values: T6963C_ROM_MODE_OR, T6963C_ROM_MODE_XOR,
T6963C_ROM_MODE_AND and T6963C_ROM_MODE_TEXT
This can be useful to display text in the negative mode, i.e. white text on black background.
function”.

Returns Nothing.
Example T6963C_write_char(‘A’,22,23,T6963C_ROM_MODE_AND);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
599
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
T6963C_write_text
Prototype void T6963C_write_text(unsigned char *str, unsigned char x, unsigned char
y, unsigned char mode);
Parameters - str: text to be written
- x: text position on x-axis
- y: text position on y-axis
- mode: mode parameter. Valid values: T6963C_ROM_MODE_OR, T6963C_ROM_MODE_XOR,
T6963C_ROM_MODE_AND and T6963C_ROM_MODE_TEXT
This can be useful to display text in the negative mode, i.e. white text on black background.
function”.

Returns Nothing.
Example T6963C_write_text(“Glcd LIBRARY DEMO, WELCOME !”, 0, 0, T6963C_ROM_MODE_
XOR);
Notes None.
T6963C_line
Prototype void T6963C_line(int x0, int y0, int x1, int y1, unsigned char pcolor);
Parameters - x0: x coordinate of the line start
- x1: x coordinate of the line start
- pcolor: color parameter. Valid values: T6963C_BLACK and T6963C_WHITE
Returns Nothing.
Example T6963C_line(0, 0, 239, 127, T6963C_WHITE);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
600
T6963C_rectangle
Prototype void T6963C_rectangle(int x0, int y0, int x1, int y1, unsigned char
pcolor);
Returns Nothing.
Example T6963C_rectangle(20, 20, 219, 107, T6963C_WHITE);
Notes None.
T6963C_rectangle_round_edges
Prototype void T6963C_rectangle_round_edges(int x0, int y0, int x1, int y1, int round_
radius, unsigned char pcolor);
Returns Nothing.
Example T6963C_rectangle_round_edges(20, 20, 219, 107, 12, T6963C_WHITE);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
601
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
T6963C_rectangle_round_edges_fill
Prototype void T6963C_rectangle_round_edges_fill(int x0, int y0, int x1, int y1, int
round_radius, unsigned char pcolor);
Returns Nothing.
Example T6963C_rectangle_round_edges_fill(20, 20, 219, 107, 12, T6963C_WHITE);
Notes None.
T6963C_box
Prototype void T6963C_box(int x0, int y0, int x1, int y1, unsigned char pcolor);
Description Draws a box on Glcd
Parameters - x0: x coordinate of the upper left box corner
- y0: y coordinate of the upper left box corner
- x1: x coordinate of the lower right box corner
- y1: y coordinate of the lower right box corner
Returns Nothing.
Example T6963C_box(0, 119, 239, 127, T6963C_WHITE);
Notes None.
T6963C_circle
Prototype void T6963C_circle(int x, int y, long r, unsigned char pcolor);
- r: radius size
Returns Nothing.
Example T6963C_box(0, 119, 239, 127, T6963C_WHITE);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
602
T6963C_circle_fill
Prototype void T6963C_circle_fill(int x, int y, long r, unsigned char pcolor);
- r: radius size
Returns Nothing.
Example T6963C_circle_fill(120, 64, 110, T6963C_WHITE);
Notes None.
T6963C_image
Prototype void T6963C_image(const code char *pic);
Parameters - pic: image to be displayed. Bitmap array can be located in both code and RAM memory (due to the
mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 pointer to const and pointer to RAM equivalency).
Returns Nothing.
Example T6963C_image(my_image);
MikroElektronika
603
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
T6963C_PartialImage
Prototype void T6963C_PartialImage(unsigned int x_left, unsigned int y_top, unsigned
Returns Nothing.
Requires Toshiba Glcd module needs to be initialized. See T6963C_init routine.
T6963C_PartialImage(10, 12, 10, 15, 16, 32, image);
T6963C_sprite
Prototype void T6963C_sprite(unsigned char px, unsigned char py, const code char *pic,
unsigned char sx, unsigned char sy);
Description Fills graphic rectangle area (px, py) to (px+sx, py+sy) with custom size picture.
Parameters - px: x coordinate of the upper left picture corner. Valid values: multiples of the font width
- py: y coordinate of the upper left picture corner
- pic: picture to be displayed
- sx: picture width. Valid values: multiples of the font width
- sy: picture height
Returns Nothing.
Example T6963C_sprite(76, 4, einstein, 88, 119); // draw a sprite
Notes If px and sx parameters are not multiples of the font width they will be scaled to the nearest lower
number that is a multiple of the font width.
MikroElektronika
604
T6963C_set_cursor
Prototype void T6963C_set_cursor(unsigned char x, unsigned char y);
Description Sets cursor to row x and column y.
Parameters - x: cursor position row number
- y: cursor position column number
Returns Nothing.
Example T6963C_set_cursor(cposx, cposy);
Notes None.
T6963C_clearBit
Prototype void T6963C_clearBit(unsigned int b);
Description Clears control port bit(s).
Parameters - b: bit mask. The function will clear bit x on control port if bit x in bit mask is set to 1.
Returns Nothing.
Example // clear bits 0 and 1 on control port
T6963C_clearBit(0x0003);
Notes None.
T6963C_setBit
Prototype void T6963C_setBit(unsigned int b);
Description Sets control port bit(s).
Parameters - b: bit mask. The function will set bit x on control port if bit x in bit mask is set to 1.
Returns Nothing.
Example // set bits 0 and 1 on control port
T6963C_setBit(0x0003);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
605
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
T6963C_negBit
Prototype void T6963C_negBit(unsigned int b);
Description Negates control port bit(s).
Parameters - b: bit mask. The function will negate bit x on control port if bit x in bit mask is set to 1.
Returns Nothing.
Example // negate bits 0 and 1 on control port
T6963C_negBit(0x0003);
Notes None.
T6963C_displayGrPanel
Prototype void T6963C_displayGrPanel(unsigned int n);
Description Display selected graphic panel.
Returns Nothing.
Example // display graphic panel 1
T6963C_displayGrPanel(1);
Notes None.
T6963C_displayTxtPanel
Prototype void T6963C_displayTxtPanel(unsigned int n);
Description Display selected text panel.
Returns Nothing.
Example // display text panel 1
T6963C_displayTxtPanel(1);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
606
T6963C_setGrPanel
Prototype void T6963C_setGrPanel(unsigned int n);
Description Compute start address for selected graphic panel and set appropriate internal pointers. All subsequent
graphic operations will be preformed at this graphic panel.
Returns Nothing.
Example // set graphic panel 1 as current graphic panel.
T6963C_setGrPanel(1);
Notes None.
T6963C_setTxtPanel
Prototype void T6963C_setTxtPanel(unsigned int n);
Description Compute start address for selected text panel and set appropriate internal pointers. All subsequent
text operations will be preformed at this text panel.
Returns Nothing.
Example // set text panel 1 as current text panel.
T6963C_setTxtPanel(1);
Notes None.
T6963C_panelFill
Prototype void T6963C_panelFill(unsigned char v);
Description Fill current panel in full (graphic+text) with appropriate value (0 to clear).
Parameters - v: value to fill panel with.
Returns Nothing.
Example clear current panel
T6963C_panelFill(0);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
607
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
T6963C_grFill
Prototype void T6963C_grFill(unsigned char v);
Description Fill current graphic panel with appropriate value (0 to clear).
Parameters - v: value to fill graphic panel with.
Returns Nothing.
T6963C_grFill(0);
Notes None.
T6963C_txtFill
Prototype void T6963C_txtFill(unsigned char v);
Parameters - v: this value increased by 32 will be used to fill text panel.
Returns Nothing.
T6963C_txtFill(0);
Notes None.
T6963C_cursor_height
Prototype void T6963C_cursor_height(unsigned char n);
Description Set cursor size.
Parameters - n: cursor height. Valid values: 0..7.
Returns Nothing.
Example T6963C_cursor_height(7);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
608
T6963C_graphics
Prototype void T6963C_graphics(unsigned int n);
Description Enable/disable graphic displaying.
Parameters - n: graphic enable/disable parameter. Valid values: 0 (disable graphic dispaying) and 1 (enable
graphic displaying).
Returns Nothing.
Example // enable graphic displaying
T6963C_graphics(1);
Notes None.
T6963C_text
Prototype void T6963C_text(unsigned int n);
Description Enable/disable text displaying.
Parameters - n: on/off parameter. Valid values: 0 (disable text displaying) and 1 (enable text displaying).
Returns Nothing.
Example // enable text displaying
T6963C_text(1);
Notes None.
T6963C_cursor
Prototype void T6963C_cursor(unsigned int n);
Description Set cursor on/off.
Parameters - n: on/off parameter. Valid values: 0 (set cursor off) and 1 (set cursor on).
Returns Nothing.
T6963C_cursor(1);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
609
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
T6963C_cursor_blink
Prototype void T6963C_cursor_blink(unsigned int n);
Description Enable/disable cursor blinking.
Parameters - n: cursor blinking enable/disable parameter. Valid values: 0 (disable cursor blinking) and 1 (enable
cursor blinking).
Returns Nothing.
Example // enable cursor blinking
T6963C_cursor_blink(1);
Notes None.
Library Example
The following drawing demo tests advanced routines of the T6963C Glcd library. Hardware configurations in this
example are made for the dsPICPRO2 board and dsPIC30F6014A.
#include "__T6963C.h"
// T6963C module connections

char T6963C_dataPort at PORTB; // DATA port
sbit T6963C_ctrlwr at LATF2_bit; // WR write signal

sbit T6963C_ctrlrd at LATF1_bit; // RD read signal
sbit T6963C_ctrlcd at LATF0_bit; // CD command/data signal
sbit T6963C_ctrlrst at LATF4_bit; // RST reset signal
sbit T6963C_ctrlwr_Direction at TRISF2_bit; // WR write signal
sbit T6963C_ctrlrd_Direction at TRISF1_bit; // RD read signal
sbit T6963C_ctrlcd_Direction at TRISF0_bit; // CD command/data signal
sbit T6963C_ctrlrst_Direction at TRISF4_bit; // RST reset signal
// Signals not used by library, they are set in main function

sbit T6963C_ctrlce at LATF3_bit; // CE signal
sbit T6963C_ctrlfs at LATF6_bit; // FS signal
sbit T6963C_ctrlmd at LATF5_bit; // MD signal
sbit T6963C_ctrlce_Direction at TRISF3_bit; // CE signal direction
sbit T6963C_ctrlfs_Direction at TRISF6_bit; // FS signal direction
sbit T6963C_ctrlmd_Direction at TRISF5_bit; // MD signal direction
// End T6963C module connections
/*
* bitmap pictures stored in ROM
*/
const code char mikroE_240x128_bmp[];
const code char einstein[];
MikroElektronika
610
void main() {
char txt1[] = " EINSTEIN WOULD HAVE LIKED mE";
char txt[] = " GLCD LIBRARY DEMO, WELCOME !";
unsigned char panel; // Current panel

unsigned int i; // General purpose register
unsigned char curs; // Cursor visibility
unsigned int cposx, cposy; // Cursor x-y position
TRISB8_bit = 1; // Set RF0 as input

T6963C_ctrlce_Direction = 0;
T6963C_ctrlce = 0; // Enable T6963C
T6963C_ctrlfs_Direction = 0;
T6963C_ctrlfs = 0; // Font Select 8x8
T6963C_ctrlmd_Direction = 0;
T6963C_ctrlmd = 0; // Column number select
// Initialize T6963C
T6963C_init(240, 128, 8);
/*
* Enable both graphics and text display at the same time
*/
T6963C_graphics(1);
T6963C_text(1);
panel = 0;
i = 0;
curs = 0;
cposx = cposy = 0;
/*
* Text messages
*/
T6963C_write_text(txt, 0, 0, T6963C_ROM_MODE_XOR);
T6963C_write_text(txt1, 0, 15, T6963C_ROM_MODE_XOR);
/*
* Cursor
*/
T6963C_cursor_height(8); // 8 pixel height
T6963C_set_cursor(0, 0); // Move cursor to top left
T6963C_cursor(0); // Cursor off
MikroElektronika
611
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
/*
* Draw rectangles
*/
T6963C_rectangle(0, 0, 239, 127, T6963C_WHITE);
/*
* Draw a cross
*/
T6963C_line(0, 0, 239, 127, T6963C_WHITE);
T6963C_line(0, 127, 239, 0, T6963C_WHITE);
/*
* Draw solid boxes
*/
T6963C_box(0, 0, 239, 8, T6963C_WHITE);
T6963C_box(0, 119, 239, 127, T6963C_WHITE);
/*
* Draw circles
*/
T6963C_circle(120, 64, 10, T6963C_WHITE);
T6963C_sprite(76, 4, einstein, 88, 119); // Draw a sprite
T6963C_setGrPanel(1); // Select other graphic panel
T6963C_image(mikroE_240x128_bmp); // Draw an image
#endif
for(;;) { // Endless loop

/*
* If RF0 is pressed, display only graphic panel
*/
if(RB8_bit) {
T6963C_graphics(1);
T6963C_text(0);
Delay_ms(300);
}
MikroElektronika
612
/*
* If RF1 is pressed, toggle the display between graphic panel 0 and graphic panel
1
*/
else if(RB9_bit) {
panel++;
panel &= 1;
T6963C_displayGrPanel(panel);
Delay_ms(300);
}
#endif
/*
* If RF2 is pressed, display only text panel
*/
else if(RB10_bit) {
T6963C_graphics(0);
T6963C_text(1);
Delay_ms(300);
}
/*
* If RF3 is pressed, display text and graphic panels
*/
else if(RB11_bit) {
T6963C_graphics(1);
T6963C_text(1);
Delay_ms(300);
}
/*
* If RF4 is pressed, change cursor
*/
else if(RB12_bit) {
curs++;
if(curs == 3) curs = 0;
switch(curs) {
case 0:
// no cursor
T6963C_cursor(0);
break;
case 1:
// blinking cursor
T6963C_cursor(1);
break;
case 2:
// non blinking cursor
T6963C_cursor(1);
break;
}
Delay_ms(300);
}
MikroElektronika
613
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
/*
* Move cursor, even if not visible
*/
cposx++;
if(cposx == T6963C_txtCols) {
cposx = 0;
cposy++;
if(cposy == T6963C_grHeight / T6963C_CHARACTER_HEIGHT) {
cposy = 0;
}
}
T6963C_set_cursor(cposx, cposy);
Delay_ms(100);
}
}
HW Connection
T6963C Glcd HW connection
MikroElektronika
614
TFT Library
Thin film transistor liquid crystal display (TFT-LCD) is a variant of liquid crystal display (LCD) which uses thin-film
transistor (TFT) technology to improve image quality (e.g., addressability, contrast).
TFT LCD is one type of active matrix LCD, though all LCD-screens are based on TFT active matrix addressing.
TFT LCDs are used in television sets, computer monitors, mobile phones, handheld video game systems, personal
digital assistants, navigation systems, projectors, etc.
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a library for working with HX8347-D 320x240 TFT Lcd controller.
The HX8347-D is designed to provide a single-chip solution that combines a gate driver, a source driver, power supply
circuit for 262,144 colors to drive a TFT panel with 320x240 dots at maximum.
The HX8347-D is suitable for any small portable battery-driven and long-term driving products, such as small PDAs,
digital cellular phones and bi-directional pagers.
External dependencies of TFT Library

The following variables
must be defined in all
Description : Example :
projects using TFT
library:
extern sfr char TFT_ char TFT_DataPort at
TFT Data Port.
DataPort; LATE;
extern sfr char TFT_ Direction of the TFT Data char TFT_DataPort_
DataPort_Direction; Port. Direction at TRISE;
extern sfr sbit TFT_ sbit TFT_WR at LATD13_
Write signal.
WR; bit;
extern sfr sbit TFT_ sbit TFT_RD at LATD12_
Read signal.
RD; bit;
extern sfr sbit TFT_ sbit TFT_CS at LATC3_
Chip Select signal.
CS; bit;
extern sfr sbit TFT_ Command/Register Select sbit TFT_RS at LATB15_
RS; signal. bit;
extern sfr sbit TFT_ sbit TFT_RST at LATC1_
Reset signal.
RST; bit;
extern sfr sbit TFT_ sbit TFT_WR_Direction
Direction of the Write pin.
WR_Direction; at TRISD13_bit;
extern sfr sbit TFT_ sbit TFT_RD_Direction
Direction of the Read pin.
RD_Direction; at TRISD12_bit;
extern sfr sbit TFT_ Direction of the Chip Select sbit TFT_CS_Direction
CS_Direction; pin. at TRISC3_bit;
extern sfr sbit TFT_ Direction of the Register sbit TFT_RS_Direction
RS_Direction; Select pin. at TRISB13_bit;
extern sfr sbit TFT_ sbit TFT_RST_Direction
RST_Direction; at TRISC1_bit;
MikroElektronika
615
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Library Routines
- TFT_Init
- TFT_Set_Index
- TFT_Write_Command
- TFT_Write_Data
- TFT_Set_Active
- TFT_Set_Font
- TFT_Write_Char
- TFT_Write_Text
- TFT_Fill_Screen
- TFT_Set_Pen
- TFT_Set_Brush
- TFT_Dot
- TFT_Line
- TFT_H_Line
- TFT_V_Line
- TFT_Rectangle
- TFT_Rectangle_Round_Edges
- TFT_Circle
- TFT_Image
- TFT_PartialImage
- TFT_Image_Jpeg
- TFT_RGBToColor16bit
- TFT_Color16bitToRGB
MikroElektronika
616
TFT_Init
Prototype void TFT_Init(unsigned int display_width, unsigned char display_height);
Returns Nothing
Description Initializes TFT display in the 8-bit working mode.
Parameters :
- width: width of the TFT panel

- height: height of the TFT panel
- TFT_DataPort: Data Port

- TFT_WR: Write signal pin
- TFT_RD: Read signal pin
- TFT_CS: Chip Select signal pin
- TFT_RS: Register Select signal pin
- TFT_RST: Reset signal pin
- TFT_DataPort_Direction: Direction of Data Port
- TFT_WR_Direction: Direction of Write signal pin
- TFT_RD_Direction: Direction of Read signal pin
- TFT_CS_Direction: Direction of Chip Select signal pin
- TFT_RS_Direction: Direction of Register Select signal pin
- TFT_RST_Direction: Direction of Reset signal pin

Example // TFT display connections
char TFT_DataPort at LATE;
sbit TFT_WR at LATD13_bit;
sbit TFT_RD at LATD12_bit;
sbit TFT_CS at LATC3_bit;
sbit TFT_RS at LATB15_bit;
sbit TFT_RST at LATC1_bit;
char TFT_DataPort_Direction at TRISE;

sbit TFT_WR_Direction : at TRISD13_bit;
sbit TFT_RD_Direction at TRISD12_bit;
sbit TFT_CS_Direction at TRISC3_bit;
sbit TFT_RS_Direction at TRISB15_bit;
sbit TFT_RST_Direction at TRISC1_bit;
// End of TFT display connections
// Initialize 240x320 TFT display

TFT_Init(240, 320);
MikroElektronika
617
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
TFT_Set_Index
Prototype void TFT_Set_Index(unsigned short index);
Returns Nothing
Description Accesses register space of the controller and sets the desired register.
Parameters :
- index: desired register number.

Requires TFT module needs to be initialized. See the TFT_Init routine.
Example // Access register at the location 0x02
TFT_Set_Index(0x02);
TFT_Write_Command
Prototype void TFT_Write_Command(unsigned short cmd);
Returns Nothing
Description Accesses data space and writes a command.
Parameters :
- cmd: command to be written.

Example // Write a command
TFT_Write_Command(0x02);
TFT_Write_Data
Prototype void TFT_Write_Data(unsigned int _data);
Returns Nothing
Description Writes date into display memory.
Parameters :
- _data:data to be written.
Example // Send data
TFT_Write_Data(0x02);
MikroElektronika
618
TFT_Set_Active
Prototype void TFT_Set_Active(void (*Set_Index_Ptr)(unsigned short), void (*Write_
Command_Ptr)(unsigned short), void (*Write_Data_Ptr)(unsigned int));
Returns Nothing
Description This function sets appropriate pointers to a user-defined basic routines in order to enable multiple
working modes.
Parameters :
- Set_Index_Ptr: Set_Index handler.

- Write_Command_Ptr: _Write_Command handler.
- Write_Data_Ptr: Write_Data handler.
Requires None.
Example // Example of establishing 16-bit communication between TFT display and
PORTD, PORTE of MCU :
void Set_Index(unsigned short index) {

TFT_RS = 0;
Lo(LATD) = index;
TFT_WR = 0;
TFT_WR = 1;
}
void Write_Command(unsigned short cmd) {

TFT_RS = 1;
Lo(LATD) = cmd;
TFT_WR = 0;
TFT_WR = 1;
}
void Write_Data(unsigned int _data) {

TFT_RS = 1;
Lo(LATE) = Hi(_data);
Lo(LATD) = Lo(_data);
TFT_WR = 0;
TFT_WR = 1;
}
void main(){
TRISE = 0;
TRISD = 0;
TFT_Set_Active(Set_Index,Write_Command,Write_Data);
TFT_Init(320, 240);
.....
}
MikroElektronika
619
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
TFT_Set_Font
Prototype void TFT_Set_Font(const char far *activeFont, unsigned int font_color, char
font_orientation);
Returns Nothing
Description Sets font, its color and font orientation.
Parameters :
- activeFont: desired font. Currently, only TFT_defaultFont (Tahoma14x16) is supported.

- font_color: sets font color :
Value Description
CL_AQUA Aqua color
CL_BLACK Black color
CL_BLUE Blue color
CL_FUCHSIA Fuchsia color
CL_GRAY Gray color
CL_GREEN Green color
CL_LIME Lime color
CL_MAROON Maroon color
CL_NAVY Navy color
CL_OLIVE Olive color
CL_PURPLE Purple color
CL_RED Red color
CL_SILVER Silver color
CL_TEAL Teal color
CL_WHITE White color
CL_YELLOW Yellow color
- font_orientation: sets font orientation :
Value Description
FO_HORIZONTAL Horizontal orientation
FO_VERTICAL Vertical orientation

Example TFT_Set_Font(TFT_defaultFont, CL_BLACK, FO_HORIZONTAL);
MikroElektronika
620
TFT_Write_Char
Prototype void TFT_Write_Char(unsigned int c, unsigned int x, unsigned int y);
Returns Nothing.
Description Writes a char on the TFT at coordinates (x, y).
- c: char to be written.
- x: char position on x-axis.
- y: char position on y-axis.
Example TFT_Write_Char(‘A’,22,23,);
TFT_Write_Text
Prototype void TFT_Write_Text(unsigned char *text, unsigned int x, unsigned int y);
Returns Nothing.
Description Writes text on the TFT at coordinates (x, y).
Parameters :
- text: text to be written.

- x: text position on x-axis.
- y: text position on y-axis.
Example TFT_Write_Text(“TFT LIBRARY DEMO, WELCOME !”, 0, 0,);
MikroElektronika
621
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
TFT_Fill_Screen
Prototype void TFT_Fill_Screen(unsigned int color);
Returns Nothing.
Description Fills screen memory block with given color.
Parameters :
- color: color to be filled :

Value Description
CL_AQUA Aqua color
CL_BLUE Blue color
CL_GRAY Gray color
CL_LIME Lime color
CL_NAVY Navy color
CL_RED Red color
CL_TEAL Teal color

Example TFT_Fill_Screen(CL_BLACK);
MikroElektronika
622
TFT_Dot
Prototype void TFT_Dot(int x, int y, unsigned int color);
Returns Nothing.
Description Draws a dot on the TFT at coordinates (x, y).
Parameters :
- x: dot position on x-axis.

- y: dot position on y-axis.
Value Description
CL_AQUA Aqua color
CL_BLUE Blue color
CL_GRAY Gray color
CL_LIME Lime color
CL_NAVY Navy color
CL_RED Red color
CL_TEAL Teal color

Example TFT_Dot(50, 50, CL_BLACK);
MikroElektronika
623
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
TFT_Set_Pen
Prototype void TFT_Set_Pen(unsigned int pen_color, char pen_width);
Returns Nothing.
Description Sets color and thickness parameter for drawing line, circle and rectangle elements.
Parameters :
- pen_color: Sets color.
Value Description
CL_AQUA Aqua color
CL_BLUE Blue color
CL_GRAY Gray color
CL_LIME Lime color
CL_NAVY Navy color
CL_RED Red color
CL_TEAL Teal color
- pen_width: sets thickness.

Example TFT_Set_Pen(CL_BLACK, 10);
MikroElektronika
624
TFT_Set_Brush
Prototype void TFT_Set_Brush(char brush_enabled, unsigned int brush_color, char
gradient_enabled, char gradient_orientation, unsigned int gradient_color_
from, unsigned int gradient_color_to);
Returns Nothing.
Description Sets color and gradient which will be used to fill circles or rectangles.
Parameters :
- brush_enabled: enable brush fill.
Value Description
1 Enable brush fill.
0 Disable brush fill.
- brush_color: set brush fill color.
Value Description
CL_AQUA Aqua color
CL_BLUE Blue color
CL_GRAY Gray color
CL_LIME Lime color
CL_NAVY Navy color
CL_RED Red color
CL_TEAL Teal color
MikroElektronika
625
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Description - gradient_enabled: enable gradient
Value Description
1 Enable gradient.
0 Disable gradient.
- gradient_orientation: sets gradient orientation :
Value Description
LEFT_TO_RIGHT Left to right gradient orientation
TOP_TO_BOTTOM Top to bottom gradient orientation
- gradient_color_from: sets the starting gradient color.
Value Description
CL_AQUA Aqua color
CL_BLUE Blue color
CL_GRAY Gray color
CL_LIME Lime color
CL_NAVY Navy color
CL_RED Red color
CL_TEAL Teal color
MikroElektronika
626
Description - gradient_color_to: sets the ending gradient color.
Value Description
CL_AQUA Aqua color
CL_BLUE Blue color
CL_GRAY Gray color
CL_LIME Lime color
CL_NAVY Navy color
CL_RED Red color
CL_TEAL Teal color

Example // Enable gradient from black to white color, left-right orientation
TFT_Set_Brush(0, 0, 1, LEFT_TO_RIGHT, CL_BLACK, CL_WHITE);
TFT_Line
Prototype void TFT_Line(int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2);
Returns Nothing.
Parameters :

Example TFT_Line(0, 0, 239, 127);
MikroElektronika
627
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
TFT_H_Line
Prototype void TFT_H_Line(int x_start, int x_end, int y_pos);
Returns Nothing.
Description Draws a horizontal line on TFT.
Parameters :
- x_start: x coordinate of the line start.

- x_end: x coordinate of the line end.
- y_pos: y coordinate of horizontal line.
TFT_H_Line(10, 50, 20);
TFT_V_Line
Prototype void TFT_V_Line(int y_start, int y_end, int x_pos);
Returns Nothing.
Description Draws a vertical line on TFT.
Parameters :
- y_start: y coordinate of the line start.

- y_end: y coordinate of the line end.
- x_pos: x coordinate of vertical line.
TFT_V_Line(5, 25, 10);
MikroElektronika
628
TFT_Rectangle_Round_Edges
Prototype void TFT_Rectangle_Round_Edges(unsigned int x_upper_left, unsigned int
y_upper_left, unsigned int x_bottom_right, unsigned int y_bottom_right,
unsigned int round_radius);
Returns Nothing.
Description Draws a rounded edge rectangle on TFT.
Parameters :

Example TFT_Rectangle_Round_Edges(20, 20, 219, 107, 12);
TFT_Circle
Prototype void TFT_Circle(int x_center, int y_center, int radius);
Returns Nothing.
Description Draws a circle on TFT.
Parameters :
- x: x coordinate of the circle center.

- y: y coordinate of the circle center.
- r: radius size.
Example TFT_Circle(120, 64, 110);
TFT_Image
Prototype void TFT_Image(unsigned int left, unsigned int top, code const far unsigned
short * image, unsigned short stretch);
Returns Nothing.
Description Displays an image on a desired location.
Parameters :
- left: position of the image’s left edge.

- top:position of the image’s top edge.
- stretch: stretches image by a given factor (if 2, it will double the image.).
Example TFT_Image(0, 0, image, 1);
MikroElektronika
629
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
TFT_Partial_Image
Prototype void TFT_Partial_Image(unsigned int left, unsigned int top, unsigned int
width, unsigned int height, code const far unsigned short * image, unsigned
short stretch);
Returns Nothing.
Parameters :
- left: left coordinate of the image.

- top: top coordinate of the image.
- stretch: stretches image by a given factor (if 2, it will double the image.).
the coordinate (10,12)
TFT_PartialImage(10, 12, 10, 15, image, 1);
TFT_Image_Jpeg
Prototype char TFT_Image_Jpeg(unsigned int left, unsigned int top, code const far
unsigned short *image);
Returns - 0 - if image is loaded and displayed successfully.
- 1 - if error occured.
Description Displays a JPEG image on a desired location.
Parameters :
- left: left coordinate of the image.

- top: top coordinate of the image.
Example TFT_Image_Jpeg(0, 0, image);
MikroElektronika
630
TFT_RGBToColor16bit
Prototype unsigned int TFT_RGBToColor16bit(char rgb_red, char rgb_green, char rgb_
blue);
Returns Returns a color value in the following bit-order : 5 bits red, 6 bits green and 5 bits blue color.
Description Converts 5:6:5 RGB format into true color format.
Parameters :
- rgb_red: red component of the image.

- rgb_green: green component of the image.
- rgb_blue: blue component of the image.
Example color16 = TFT_Image_Jpeg(150, 193, 65);
TFT_Color16bitToRGB
Prototype void TFT_Color16bitToRGB(unsigned int color, char *rgb_red, char *rgb_green,
char *rgb_blue);
Returns Nothing.
Description Converts true color into 5:6:5 RGB format.
Parameters :
- color: true color to be converted.

- rgb_red: red component of the input color.
- rgb_green: green component of the input color.
- rgb_blue: blue component of the input color.
Example TFT_Color16bitToRGB(start_color, &red_start, &green_start, &blue_start);
MikroElektronika
631
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
HW Connection
TFT HW connection
MikroElektronika
632
Touch Panel Library

The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a library for working with Touch Panel.
External dependencies of Touch Panel Library

The following variables must be defined in Description: Example:
all projects using Touch Panel Library:
extern sfr sbit DriveA; DriveA line. sbit DriveA at LATC13_bit;
extern sfr sbit DriveB; DriveB line. sbit DriveB at LATC14_bit;
extern sfr sbit DriveA_Direction; Direction of the DriveA pin. sbit DriveA_Direction at
TRISC13_bit;
extern sfr sbit DriveB_Direction; Direction of the DriveB pin. sbit DriveB_Direction at
TRISC14_bit;
Library Routines
- TP_Init
- TP_Set_ADC_Threshold
- TP_Press_Detect
- TP_Get_Coordinates
- TP_Calibrate_Bottom_Left
- TP_Calibrate_Upper_Right
- TP_Get_Calibration_Consts
- TP_Set_Calibration_Consts
MikroElektronika
633
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
TP_Init
Prototype void TP_Init(unsigned int display_width, unsigned int display_height,
unsigned int readX_ChNo, unsigned int readY_ChNo);
Description Initialize touch panel display. Default touch panel ADC threshold value is set to 3900.
Parameters
- display_width: set display width.
- display_height: set display height.
- readX_ChNo: read X coordinate from desired ADC channel.
- readY_ChNo: read Y coordinate from desired ADC channel.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Before calling this function initialize ADC module.
Example ADC1_Init(); // Initalize ADC module

TP_Init(128, 64, 6, 7); // Initialize touch panel, dimensions 128x64
Notes None.
TP_Set_ADC_Threshold
Prototype void TP_Set_ADC_Threshold(unsigned int threshold);
Description Set custom ADC threshold value, call this function after TP_Init.
Parameters
- threshold: custom ADC threshold value.
Returns Nothing.
Requires TP_Init has to be called before using this routine.
Example TP_Set_ADC_Threshold(3900); // Set touch panel ADC threshold
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
634
TP_Press_Detect
Prototype char TP_Press_Detect();
Description Detects if the touch panel has been pressed.
Parameters None.
Returns - 1 - if touch panel is pressed.

- 0 - otherwise.
- DriveA: DriveA.
- DriveB: DriveB.
- DriveA_Direction: Direction of DriveA pin.
- DriveB_Direction: Direction of DriveB pin.
Example // Touch Panel module connections

sbit DriveA at LATC13_bit;
sbit DriveB at LATC14_bit;
sbit DriveA_Direction at TRISC13_bit;
sbit DriveB_Direction at TRISC14_bit;
// End Touch Panel module connections
if (TP_Press_Detect()) {
...
}
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
635
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
TP_Get_Coordinates
Prototype char TP_Get_Coordinates(unsigned int *x_coordinate, unsigned int *y_
coordinate);
Description Get touch panel coordinates and store them in x_coordinate and y_coordinate parameters.
Parameters
- x_coordinate: x coordinate of the place of touch.
- y_coordinate: y coordinate of the place of touch.
Returns - 1 - if reading is within display dimension range.

- 0 - if reading is out of display dimension range.
Requires Nothing.
Example if (TP_Get_Coordinates(&x_coord, &y_coord) == 0) {

...
}
Notes None.
TP_Calibrate_Bottom_Left
Prototype void TP_Calibrate_Bottom_Left();
Description Calibrate bottom left corner of the touch Panel.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example TP_Calibrate_Bottom_Left(); // Calibration of bottom left corner
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
636
TP_Calibrate_Upper_Right
Prototype void TP_Calibrate_Upper_Right();
Description Calibrate upper right corner of the touch panel.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example TP_Calibrate_Upper_Right(); // Calibration of upper right corner
Notes None.
TP_Get_Calibration_Consts
Prototype void TP_Get_Calibration_Consts(unsigned int *x_min, unsigned int *x_max,
unsigned int *y_min, unsigned int *y_max);
Description Gets calibration constants after calibration is done and stores them in x_min, x_max, y_min and
y_max parameters.
Parameters
- x_min: x coordinate of the bottom left corner of the working area.
- x_max: x coordinate of the upper right corner of the working area.
- y_min: y coordinate of the bottom left corner of the working area.
- y_max: y coordinate of the upper right corner of the working area.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example TP_Get_Calibration_Consts(&x_min, &y_min, &x_max, &y_max); // Get

calibration constants
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
637
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
TP_Set_Calibration_Consts
Prototype void TP_Set_Calibration_Consts(unsigned int x_min, unsigned int x_max,
unsigned int y_min, unsigned int y_max);
Description Sets calibration constants.
Parameters
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example TP_Set_Calibration_Consts(148, 3590, 519, 3370); // Set calibration

constants
Notes None.
Library Example
The following drawing demo tests routines of the Touch Panel library:
// Glcd module connections

MikroElektronika
638

sbit GLCD_RS at LATF0_bit;
sbit GLCD_RW at LATF1_bit;
sbit GLCD_EN at LATF4_bit;
sbit GLCD_RST at LATF5_bit;
sbit GLCD_RS_Direction at TRISF0_bit;
sbit GLCD_RW_Direction at TRISF1_bit;
sbit GLCD_EN_Direction at TRISF4_bit;
sbit GLCD_RST_Direction at TRISF5_bit;
// End Glcd module connections
// Touch Panel module connections

sbit DriveA at LATC13_bit;
sbit DriveB at LATC14_bit;
sbit DriveA_Direction at TRISC13_bit;
sbit DriveB_Direction at TRISC14_bit;
bit write_erase;
char pen_size;
char write_msg[] = “WRITE”; // GLCD menu messages
char clear_msg[] = “CLEAR”;
char erase_msg[] = “ERASE”;
unsigned int x_coord, y_coord;
void Initialize() {
ADPCFG = 0xFF3F; // set AN6 and AN7 channel pins as analog
DriveA_Direction = 0; // Set DriveA pin as output

DriveB_Direction = 0; // Set DriveB pin as output
Glcd_Init(); // Initialize GLCD

Glcd_Fill(0); // Clear GLCD
ADC1_Init(); // Initalize ADC module

TP_Init(128, 64, 6, 7); // Initialize touch panel
TP_Set_ADC_Threshold(3900); // Set touch panel ADC threshold
}
void Calibrate() {
Glcd_Dot(0,63,1); // Draw bottom left dot

Glcd_Write_Text(“TOUCH BOTTOM LEFT”,12,3,1);
TP_Calibrate_Bottom_Left(); // Calibration of bottom left corner
Delay_ms(1000);
MikroElektronika
639
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Glcd_Dot(0,63,0); // Clear bottom left dot

Glcd_Dot(127,0,1); // Draw upper right dot
Glcd_Write_Text(“ “,12,3,1);
Glcd_Write_Text(“TOUCH UPPER RIGHT”,12,4,1);
TP_Calibrate_Upper_Right(); // Calibration of upper right corner
Delay_ms(1000);
}
void main() {
Initialize();
Glcd_Write_Text(“CALIBRATION”,12,3,1);
Delay_ms(1000);
Calibrate();
Glcd_Fill(0);
Glcd_Write_Text(“WRITE ON SCREEN”, 20, 5, 1) ;
Delay_ms(1000);

Glcd_V_Line(0,7,0,1);
Glcd_Write_Text(clear_msg,1,0,0);
Glcd_Write_Text(erase_msg,98,0,0);
// Pen Menu:
Glcd_Rectangle(41,0,52,9,1);
Glcd_Box(45,3,48,6,1);
Glcd_Box(66,3,67,4,1);
Glcd_Dot(83,3,1);
write_erase = 1;
pen_size = 1;
while (1) {
if (TP_Press_Detect()) {
// After a PRESS is detected read X-Y and convert it to 128x64 space
if (TP_Get_Coordinates(&x_coord, &y_coord) == 0) {
if ((x_coord < 31) && (y_coord < 8)) {
Glcd_Fill(0);
MikroElektronika
640
// Pen Menu:
Glcd_Box(45,3,48,6,1);
Glcd_Box(66,3,67,4,1);
Glcd_Dot(83,3,1);
Glcd_Write_Text(clear_msg,1,0,0);
if (write_erase)
else
Glcd_Write_Text(write_msg,98,0,0);
}
// If write/erase is pressed
if ((x_coord > 96) && (y_coord < 8)) {
if (write_erase) {
write_erase = 0;
Glcd_Write_Text(write_msg,98,0,0);
Delay_ms(500);
}
else {
write_erase = 1;
Delay_ms(500);
}
}
// If pen size is selected

if ((x_coord >= 41) && (x_coord <= 52) && (y_coord <= 9))
pen_size = 3;
pen_size = 2;
pen_size = 1;
if (y_coord < 11)

continue;
switch (pen_size) {
case 1 : {
if ( (x_coord >= 0) && (y_coord >= 0) && (x_coord <= 127) && (y_coord <= 63) )
Glcd_Dot(x_coord, y_coord, write_erase);
break;
}
MikroElektronika
641
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
case 2 : {
if ( (x_coord >= 0) && (y_coord >= 0) && (x_coord <= 127-1) && (y_coord <= 63-1) )
Glcd_Box(x_coord, y_coord, x_coord + 1, y_coord + 1, write_erase);
break;
}
case 3 : {
if ( (x_coord >= 1) && (y_coord >= 1) && (x_coord <= 127-2) && (y_coord <= 63-2) )
Glcd_Box(x_coord-1, y_coord-1, x_coord + 2, y_coord + 2, write_erase);
break;
}
}
}
}
}
}
MikroElektronika
642
Touch Panel TFT Library

The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a library for working with Touch Panel for TFT.
External dependencies of Touch Panel TFT Library

defined in all projects using Touch Description: Example:
Panel TFT Library:
extern sfr sbit DriveX_Left; DriveX_Left line. sbit DriveX_Left
at LATB13_bit;
extern sfr sbit DriveX_Right; DriveX_Right line. sbit DriveX_Right
at LATB11_bit;
extern sfr sbit DriveY_Up; DriveY_Up line. sbit DriveY_Up
at LATB12_bit;
extern sfr sbit DriveY_Down; DriveY_Down line. sbit DriveY_Down
at LATB10_bit;
extern sfr sbit DriveX_Left_ Direction of the DriveX_Left pin. sbit DriveX_
Direction; Left_Direction
at TRISB13_bit;
extern sfr sbit DriveX_Right_ Direction of the DriveX_Right pin. sbit DriveX_
Direction; Right_Direction
at TRISB11_bit;
extern sfr sbit DriveY_Up_ Direction of the DriveY_Up pin. sbit DriveY_Up_
Direction; Direction at
TRISB12_bit;
extern sfr sbit DriveY_Down_ Direction of the DriveY_Down pin. sbit DriveY_
Direction; Down_Direction
at TRISB10_bit;
Library Routines
- TP_TFT_Init
- TP_TFT_Set_ADC_Threshold
- TP_TFT_Press_Detect
- TP_TFT_Get_Coordinates
- TP_TFT_Calibrate_Min
- TP_TFT_Calibrate_Max
- TP_TFT_Get_Calibration_Consts
- TP_TFT_Set_Calibration_Consts
MikroElektronika
643
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
TP_TFT_Init
Prototype void TP_TFT_Init(unsigned int display_width, unsigned int display_height,
unsigned int readX_ChNo, unsigned int readY_ChNo);
Description Initialize TFT touch panel display. Default touch panel ADC threshold value is set to 900.
Parameters
- display_width: set display width.
- display_height: set display height.
- readX_ChNo: read X coordinate from desired ADC channel.
- readY_ChNo: read Y coordinate from desired ADC channel.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Before calling this function initialize ADC module.
Example ADC1_Init(); // Initalize ADC module

TP_TFT_Init(320, 240, 13, 12); // Initialize touch panel
Notes None.
TP_TFT_Set_ADC_Threshold
Prototype void TP_TFT_Set_ADC_Threshold(unsigned int threshold);
Description Set custom ADC threshold value, call this function after TP_TFT_Init.
Parameters
- threshold: custom ADC threshold value.
Returns Nothing.
Requires TP_TFT_Init has to be called before using this routine.
Example TP_TFT_Set_ADC_Threshold(900); // Set touch panel ADC threshold
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
644
TP_TFT_Press_Detect
Prototype char TP_TFT_Press_Detect();
Description Detects if the touch panel has been pressed.
Parameters None.
Returns - 1 - if touch panel is pressed.

- 0 - otherwise.
- DriveX_Left: DriveX_Left pin.

- DriveX_Right: DriveX_Right pin.
- DriveY_Up: DriveY_Up pin.
- DriveY_Down: DriveY_Down pin.
- DriveX_Left_Direction: Direction of DriveX_Left pin.
- DriveX_Right_Direction: Direction of DriveX_Right pin.
- DriveY_Up_Direction: Direction of DriveY_Up pin.
- DriveY_Down_Direction: Direction of DriveY_Down pin.
Example // Touch Panel module connections

sbit DriveX_Left at LATB13_bit;
sbit DriveX_Right at LATB11_bit;
sbit DriveY_Up at LATB12_bit;
sbit DriveY_Down at LATB10_bit;
sbit DriveX_Left_Direction at TRISB13_bit;
sbit DriveX_Right_Direction at TRISB11_bit;
sbit DriveY_Up_Direction at TRISB12_bit;
sbit DriveY_Down_Direction at TRISB10_bit;
if (TP_TFT_Press_Detect()) {
...
}
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
645
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
TP_TFT_Get_Coordinates
Prototype char TP_TFT_Get_Coordinates(unsigned int *x_coordinate, unsigned int *y_
coordinate);
Description Get touch panel coordinates and store them in x_coordinate and y_coordinate parameters.
Parameters
- x_coordinate: x coordinate of the place of touch.
- y_coordinate: y coordinate of the place of touch.
Returns
- 1 - if reading is within display dimension range.
- 0 - if reading is out of display dimension range.
Requires Nothing.
Example if (TP_TFT_Get_Coordinates(&x_coord, &y_coord) == 0) {

...
}
Notes None.
TP_TFT_Calibrate_Min
Prototype void TP_TFT_Calibrate_Min();
Description Calibrate bottom left corner of the touch Panel.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example TP_TFT_Calibrate_Min(); // Calibration of bottom left corner
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
646
TP_TFT_Calibrate_Max
Prototype void TP_TFT_Calibrate_Max();
Description Calibrate upper right corner of the touch panel.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example TP_TFT_Calibrate_Max(); // Calibration of upper right corner
Notes None.
TP_TFT_Get_Calibration_Consts
Prototype void TP_TFT_Get_Calibration_Consts(unsigned int *x_min, unsigned int *x_
max, unsigned int *y_min, unsigned int *y_max);
Description Gets calibration constants after calibration is done and stores them in x_min, x_max, y_min and
y_max parameters.
Parameters
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example TP_TFT_Get_Calibration_Consts(&x_min, &y_min, &x_max, &y_max);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
647
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
TP_TFT_Set_Calibration_Consts
Prototype void TP_TFT_Set_Calibration_Consts(unsigned int x_min, unsigned int x_max,
unsigned int y_min, unsigned int y_max);
Description Sets calibration constants.
Parameters
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example TP_TFT_Set_Calibration_Consts(173, 776, 75, 760); // Set calibration

constants
Notes None.
HW Connection
MikroElektronika
648
UART Library
The UART hardware module is available with a number of dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 MCUs. The mikroC PRO for
dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 UART Library provides comfortable work with the Asynchronous (full duplex) mode.
Important:
- UART library routines require you to specify the module you want to use. To select the desired UART module, simply
- Switching between the UART modules in the UART library is done by the UART_Set_Active function (UART modules
have to be previously initialized).
- Number of UART modules per MCU differs from chip to chip. Please, read the appropriate datasheet before utilizing
this library.
Library Routines
- UARTx_Init
- UARTx_Init_Advanced
- UARTx_Data_Ready
- UARTx_Tx_Idle
- UARTx_Read
- UARTx_Read_Text
- UARTx_Write
- UARTx_Write_Text
- UART_Set_Active
MikroElektronika
649
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
UARTx_Init
Prototype void UARTx_Init(unsigned long baud_rate);
Description Configures and initializes the UART module.
The internal UART module module is set to:
- continue operation in IDLE mode

- default Tx and Rx pins
- loopback mode disabled
- 8-bit data, no parity
- 1 STOP bit
- transmitter enabled
- generate interrupt on transmission end
- interrupt on reception enabled
- Address Detect mode disabled
Parameters
- baud_rate: requested baud rate
Returns Nothing.
Requires Routine requires the UART module.
Example // Initialize hardware UART1 module and establish communication at 2400

bps
UART1_Init(2400);
Notes Refer to the device data sheet for baud rates allowed for specific Fosc.
For the dsPIC33 and PIC24 MCUs, the compiler will choose for which speed the calculation is to be
performed (high or low). This does not mean that it is the best choice for desired baud rate.
If the baud rate error generated in this way is too big then UARTx_Init_Advanced routine, which allows
speed select be used.
UART library routines require you to specify the module you want to use. To select the desired UART
Switching between the UART modules in the UART library is done by the UART_Set_Active function
(UART modules have to be previously initialized).
Number of UART modules per MCU differs from chip to chip. Please, read the appropriate datasheet
MikroElektronika
650
UARTx_Init_Advanced
Prototype // dsPIC30 prototype
void UARTx_Init_Advanced(unsigned long baud_rate, unsigned int parity,
unsigned int stop_bits);
// dsPIC33 and PIC24 prototype

void UARTx_Init_Advanced(unsigned long baud_rate, unsigned int parity,
unsigned int stop_bits, unsigned int high_low_speed);
Description Configures and initializes the UART module with user defined settings.
Parameters - baud_rate: requested baud rate

- parity: parity and data selection parameter.
Valid values:
Data/Parity Mode
8-bit data, no parity _UART_8BIT_NOPARITY
8-bit data, even parity _UART_8BIT_EVENPARITY
8-bit data, odd parity _UART_8BIT_ODDPARITY
9-bit data, no parity _UART_9BIT_NOPARITY
- stop_bits: stop bit selection parameter.
Valid values:
Stop bits
One stop bit _UART_ONE_STOPBIT
Two stop bit _UART_TWO_STOPBITS
- high_low_speed: high/low speed selection parameter. Available only for dsPIC33 and PIC24
MCUs.
Valid values:
High/Low Speed
Low Speed UART _UART_LOW_SPEED
Hi Speed UART _UART_HI_SPEED
MikroElektronika
651
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Returns Nothing.
Requires Routine requires the UART module.
Example // dsPIC30 family example

// Initialize hardware UART1 module and establish communication at 2400 bps,
8-bit data, even parity and 2 STOP bits
UART1_Init_Advanced(2400, 2, 1);
// dsPIC33 and PIC24 family example

// Initialize hardware UART2 module and establish communication at 2400 bps,
8-bit data, even parity, 2 STOP bits and high speed baud rate calculations
UART2_Init_Advanced(2400, 2, 1, 1);
Notes Refer to the device data sheet for baud rates allowed for specific Fosc.
UART library routines require you to specify the module you want to use. To select the desired UART
Switching between the UART modules in the UART library is done by the UART_Set_Active function
(UART modules have to be previously initialized).
MikroElektronika
652
UARTx_Data_Ready
Prototype unsigned UARTx_Data_Ready();
Description The function tests if data in receive buffer is ready for reading.
Parameters None.
Returns - 1 if data is ready for reading

- 0 if there is no data in the receive register
Requires Routine requires at least one UART module.
Used UART module must be initialized before using this routine. See UARTx_Init and UARTx_Init_
Advanced routines.
Example unsigned receive;

...
// read data if ready
if (UART1_Data_Ready())
receive = UART1_Read();
Notes UART library routines require you to specify the module you want to use. To select the desired UART
MikroElektronika
653
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
UARTx_Tx_Idle
Prototype char UARTx_Tx_Idle();
Description Use the function to test if the transmit shift register is empty or not.
Parameters None.
Returns - 1 if the data has been transmitted

- 0 otherwise
Advanced routines.
Example // If the previous data has been shifted out, send next data:
if (UART1_Tx_Idle() == 1) {
UART1_Write(_data);
}
MikroElektronika
654
UARTx_Read
Prototype unsigned UARTx_Read();
Description The function receives a byte via UART. Use the UARTx_Data_Ready function to test if data is ready
first.
Parameters None.
Returns Received byte.
Advanced routines.
Example unsigned receive;

...
// read data if ready
if (UART1_Data_Ready())
receive = UART1_Read();
MikroElektronika
655
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
UARTx_Read_Text
Prototype void UARTx_Read_Text(char *Output, char *Delimiter, char Attempts);
Description Reads characters received via UART until the delimiter sequence is detected. The read sequence is
stored in the parameter output; delimiter sequence is stored in the parameter delimiter.
This is a blocking call: the delimiter sequence is expected, otherwise the procedure exits (if the
delimiter is not found).
Parameters
- Output: received text
- Delimiter: sequence of characters that identifies the end of a received string
- Attempts: defines number of received characters in which Delimiter sequence is expected. If
Attempts is set to 255, this routine will continuously try to detect the Delimiter sequence.
Returns Nothing.
Advanced routines.
Example Read text until the sequence “OK” is received, and send back what’s been received:

Delay_ms(100);
while (1) {
if (UART1_Data_Ready() == 1) { // if data is received
UART1_Read_Text(output, “OK”, 10); // reads text until ‘OK’ is
found
UART1_Write_Text(output); // sends back text
}
}
MikroElektronika
656
UARTx_Write
Prototype void UARTx_Write(unsigned char data);
Description The function transmits a byte via the UART module.
Parameters
- data: data to be sent
Returns Nothing.
Advanced routines.
Example unsigned char data = 0x1E;

...
UART1_Write(data);
MikroElektronika
657
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
UARTx_Write_Text
Prototype void UARTx_Write_Text(char * UART_text);
Description Sends text via UART. Text should be zero terminated.
Parameters
- UART_text: text to be sent
Returns Nothing.
Advanced routines.
Example Read text until the sequence “OK” is received, and send back what’s been received:

Delay_ms(100);
while (1) {
if (UART1_Data_Ready() == 1) { // if data is received
UART1_Read_Text(output, “OK”, 10); // reads text until ‘OK’ is
found
UART1_Write_Text(output); // sends back text
}
}
MikroElektronika
658
UART_Set_Active
Prototype void UART_Set_Active(unsigned (*read_ptr)(), void (*write_ptr)(unsigned
char _data), unsigned (*ready_ptr)(), unsigned (*tx_idle_ptr)());
Description Sets active UART module which will be used by UARTx_Data_Ready, UARTx_Read and UARTx_
Write routines.
Parameters Parameters:
- read_ptr: UARTx_Read handler

- write_ptr: UARTx_Write handler
- ready_ptr: UARTx_Data_Ready handler
- tx_idle_ptr: UARTx_Tx_Idle handler
Returns Nothing.
Requires Routine is available only for MCUs with multiple UART modules.
Advanced routines.
Example UART1_Init(9600); // initialize UART1 module

RS485Master_Init(); // initialize MCU as Master
UART_Set_Active(&UART1_Read, &UART1_Write, &UART1_Data_Ready, &UART1_Tx_Id

le); // set UART1 active
RS485Master_Send(dat,1,160); // send message through UART1
UART_Set_Active(&UART2_Read, &UART2_Write, &UART2_Data_Ready, &UART2_Tx_Id

le); // set UART2 active
RS485Master_Send(dat,1,160); // send through UART2
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
659
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Library Example
This example demonstrates simple data exchange via UART. If MCU is connected to the PC, you can test the example
from the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 USART communication terminal, launch it from the drop-down menu
Tools › USART Terminal or simply click the USART Terminal Icon .
char uart_rd;
void main() {

Delay_ms(100); // Wait for UART module to stabilize
// U1MODEbits.ALTIO = 1; // un-comment this line to have Rx and Tx pins on their

alternate
// locations. This is used to free the pins for other module,
namely the SPI.
UART1_Write_Text(“Start”);
UART1_Write(10);
UART1_Write(13);

if (UART1_Data_Ready()) { // If data is received,
uart_rd = UART1_Read(); // read the received data,
UART1_Write(uart_rd); // and send data via UART
}
}
}
MikroElektronika
660
HW Connection
RS232 HW connection
MikroElektronika
661
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
USB Library
Universal Serial Bus (USB) provides a serial bus standard for connecting a wide variety of devices, including computers,
cell phones, game consoles, PDA’s, etc.
USB Library contains HID routines that support HID class devices, and also the generic routines that can be used with
vendor specified drivers.
USB HID Class

The HID class consists primarily of devices that are used by humans to control the operation of computer systems.
Typical examples of HID class devices include:
- Keyboards and pointing devices, for example: standard mouse devices, trackballs, and joysticks.
- Front-panel controls, for example: knobs, switches, buttons, and sliders.
- Controls that might be found on devices such as telephones, VCR remote controls, games or simulation
devices, for example: data gloves, throttles, steering wheels, and rudder pedals.
- Devices that may not require human interaction but provide data in a similar format to HID class devices,
for example, bar-code readers, thermometers, or voltmeters.
Many typical HID class devices include indicators, specialized displays, audio feedback, and force or tactile feedback.
Therefore, the HID class definition includes support for various types of output directed to the end user.
Descriptor File
Each project based on the USB library should include a descriptor source file which contains vendor id and name,
product id and name, report length, and other relevant information. To create a descriptor file, use the integrated USB
HID terminal of mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24(Tools › USB HID Terminal). The default name for descriptor
file is USBdsc.c, but you may rename it.
Library Routines
- HID_Enable
- HID_Read
- HID_Write
- HID_Disable
- USB_Interrupt_Proc
- USB_Polling_Proc
- Gen_Enable
- Gen_Read
- Gen_Write
MikroElektronika
662
HID_Enable
Prototype void HID_Enable(char *readbuff, char *writebuff);
Description Enables USB HID communication.
Parameters
- readbuff: Read Buffer.
- writebuff: Write Buffer.
These parameters are used for HID communication.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example HID_Enable(&readbuff,&writebuff);
Notes This function needs to be called before using other routines of USB HID Library.
HID_Read
Prototype char HID_Read(void);
Description Receives message from host and stores it in the Read Buffer.
Parameters None.
Returns If the data reading has failed, the function returns 0. Otherwise, it returns number of characters
received from the host.
Requires USB HID needs to be enabled before using this function. See HID_Enable.
Example // retry until success

while(!HID_Read())
;
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
663
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
HID_Write
Prototype char HID_Write(char *writebuff, char len);
Description Function sends data from Write Buffer writebuff to host.
Parameters
- writebuff: Write Buffer, same parameter as used in initialization; see HID_Enable.
- len: specifies a length of the data to be transmitted.
Returns If the data transmitting has failed, the function returns 0. Otherwise, it returns number of transmitted
bytes.
Example // retry until success

while(!HID_Write(&writebuff,64))
;
Notes Function call needs to be repeated as long as data is not successfuly sent.
HID_Disable
Prototype void HID_Disable(void);
Description Disables USB HID communication.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Example HID_Disable();
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
664
USB_Interrupt_Proc
Prototype void USB_Interrupt_Proc(void);
Description This routine is used for servicing various USB bus events. Should be called inside USB interrupt
routine.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example void USB1Interrupt() iv IVT_ADDR_USB1INTERRUPT {

USB_Interrupt_Proc();
}
Notes Do not use this function with USB_Polling_Proc, only one should be used. To enable servicing through
interrupt, USB_INTERRUPT constant should be set (it is set by default in descriptor file).
USB_Polling_Proc
Prototype void USB_Polling_Proc(void);
Description This routine is used for servicing various USB bus events. It should be periodically, preferably every
100 microseconds.
Parameters None.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example while(1) {
USB_Polling_Proc();
kk = HID_Read();
if (kk != 0) {
for(cnt=0; cnt < 64; cnt++)
writebuff[cnt]=readbuff[cnt];
HID_Write(&writebuff,64);
}
}
Notes Do not use this functions with USB_Interrupt_Proc. To enable servicing by polling, USB_INTERRUPT
constant should be set to 0 (it is located in descriptor file).
MikroElektronika
665
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Gen_Enable
Prototype void Gen_Enable(char* readbuff, char* writebuff);
Description Initialize the USB module of the MCU.
Parameters
- readbuff: Read Buffer.
- writebuff: Write Buffer.
Returns Nothing.
Requires USB needs to be enabled before using this function. See HID_Enable.
Example Gen_Enable(&readbuff,&writebuff);
Notes None.
Gen_Read
Prototype char Gen_Read(char *readbuff, char length, char ep);
Description Generic routine that receives the specified data from the specified endpoint.
Parameters
- readbuff: Received data.
- length: The length of the data that you wish to receive.
- ep: Endpoint number you want to receive the data into.
Returns Returns the number of received bytes, otherwise 0.
Example while(Gen_Read(readbuff,64,1)==0)
;
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
666
Gen_Write
Prototype char Gen_Write(char* writebuff, char length, char ep);
Description Sends the specified data to the specified endpoint.
Parameters
- writebuff: The data that you want to send.
- length: the length of the data that you wish to send.
- ep: Endpoint number you want to send the data into.
Returns Returns the number of transmitted bytes, otherwise 0.
Example while(Gen_Write(writebuff,64,1)==0)
;
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
667
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Library Example
This example establishes connection with the HID terminal that is active on the PC. Upon connection establishment,
the HID Device Name will appear in the respective window. After that software will wait for data and it will return
received data back. Examples uses USBdsc.c descriptor file, which is in the same folder, and can be created by the
HID Terminal.
char cnt;
char readbuff[64];
char writebuff[64];
void USB1Interrupt() iv IVT_ADDR_USB1INTERRUPT {

USB_Interrupt_Proc();
}
void main(void){
AD1PCFGL = 0xFFFF;
HID_Enable(&readbuff,&writebuff);
while(1){
while(!HID_Read())
;
for(cnt=0;cnt<64;cnt++)
writebuff[cnt]=readbuff[cnt];
while(!HID_Write(&writebuff,64))
;
}
}
HW Connection
MikroElektronika
668
DSP Libraries
mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 includes various libraries for DSP engine. All DSP routines work with fractional
Q15 format.
Digital Signal Processing Libraries

- FIR Filter Library
- IIR Filter Library
- FFT Library
- Bit Reverse Complex Library
- Vectors Library
- Matrices Library
MikroElektronika
669
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
FIR Filter Library

mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 includes a library for finite impulse response (FIR) filter. All routines work with
fractional Q15 format.
A finite impulse response (FIR) filter is a type of a digital filter, whose impulse response (the filter’s response to a delta
function) is finite because it settles to zero in a finite number of sample intervals.
Library Routines
- FIR_Radix
FIR_Radix
Prototype unsigned FIR_Radix(unsigned FilterOrder, const unsigned *ptrCoeffs,
unsigned BuffLength, unsigned *ptrInput, unsigned Index);
Description This function applies FIR filter to ptrInput.
Parameters - FilterOrder: order of the filter + 1
- ptrCoeffs: pointer to filter coefficients in program memory
- BuffLength number of input samples
- ptrInput: pointer to input samples
- Index: index of current sample
Returns
with :
N - buffer length
k - current index
Requires Nothing.
Example const unsigned BUFFFER_SIZE = 32;
const unsigned FILTER_ORDER = 20;
const COEFF_B[FILTER_ORDER+1] = {
0x0000, 0x0048, 0x0133, 0x02D3, 0x052B, 0x0826,
0x0BA0, 0x0F62, 0x1329, 0x16AA, 0x199A, 0x16AA,
0x1329, 0x0F62, 0x0BA0, 0x0826, 0x052B, 0x02D3,
0x0133, 0x0048, 0x0000
};
ydata unsigned input[BUFFFER_SIZE]; // Input buffer
unsigned inext; // Input buffer index
...
unsigned CurrentValue;
CurrentValue = FIR_Radix(FILTER_ORDER+1, // Filter order
COEFF_B, // b coefficients of the filter
BUFFFER_SIZE, // Input buffer length
input, // Input buffer
inext); // Current sample
Notes Input samples must be in Y data space.
MikroElektronika
670
IIR Filter Library

mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 includes a library for Infinite Impulse Response (IIR) filter. All routines work
with fractional Q15 format.
A infinite impulse response (IIR) filter is a type of a digital filter, whose impulse response (the filter’s response to a delta
function) is non-zero over an infinite length of time.
Library Routines
IIR_Radix
IIR_Radix
Prototype unsigned IIR_Radix (const int BScale, const int AScale, const signed *ptrB,
const signed *ptrA, unsigned FilterOrder, unsigned *ptrInput, unsigned
InputLen, unsigned *ptrOutput, unsigned Index);
Description This function applies IIR filter to ptrInput.
Parameters - BScale: B scale factor.
- AScale: A scale factor.
- ptrB: pointer to B coefficients (in program memory).
- ptrA: pointer to A coefficients (in program memory).
- FilterOrder: order of the filter + 1.
- ptrInput: address of input samples.
- InputLen: number of samples.
- ptrOutput: pointer to output samples. Output length is equal to Input length.
- Index: index of current sample.
Returns
Requires Nothing.
Example const unsigned int BUFFER_SIZE = 8;
const unsigned int FILTER_ORDER = 6;
const signed int COEFF_B[FILTER_ORDER+1] = {0x0548, 0x1FAE, 0x4F34, 0x699B,
0x4F34, 0x1FAE, 0x0548};
const signed int COEFF_A[FILTER_ORDER+1] = {0x4000, 0xB3FE, 0x5389, 0xD4D8,
0x10DD, 0xFCB0, 0x0052};
const unsigned int SCALE_B = 2;
const unsigned int SCALE_A = -1;
unsigned int inext; // Input buffer index
ydata unsigned int input[BUFFER_SIZE]; // Input buffer
ydata unsigned int output[BUFFER_SIZE]; // Output buffer
...
unsigned int CurrentValue;
CurrentValue = IIR_Radix(SCALE_B,
SCALE_A,
COEFF_B, // b coefficients of the filter
COEFF_A, // a coefficients of the filter
FILTER_ORDER+1, // Filter order + 1
input, // Input buffer
BUFFER_SIZE, // Input buffer length
output, // Input buffer
inext); // Current sample
Notes Input and output samples must be in Y data space.
MikroElektronika
671
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
FFT Library
mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 includes a library for FFT calculation. All routines work with fractional Q15 format.
Library Routines
- FFT
FFT
Prototype void FFT(unsigned log2N, const unsigned *TwiddleFactorsAddress, unsigned

*Samples);
Description Function applies FFT transformation to input samples, input samples must be in Y data space.
- f(n): array of complex input samples

- WN: TwiddleFactors
- N = 2m, mϵZ
The amplitude of current FFT sample is calculated as:
Parameters - log2N: buffer length (must be the power of 2).

- TwiddleFactorsAddress: address of constant array which contains complex twiddle factors. The
array is expected to be in program memory. See Twiddle Factors for adequate array values.
- Samples: array of input samples. Upon completion, complex array of FFT samples is placed in the
Samples: parameter.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example ydata unsigned InputSamples[512];
...
// Perform FFT (DFT), 7 stages, 128 samples of complex pairs
FFT(8, TwiddleCoeff_256, InputSamples);
Notes Complex array of FFT samples is placed in Samples parameter. Input Samples are arranged in manner
Re,Im,Re,Im... (where Im is always zero). Output samples are arranged in the same manner but Im
parts are different from zero. Output samples are symmetrical (First half of output samples (index from
0 to N/2) is identical as second half of output samples(index from N/2 to N).
Input data is a complex vector such that the magnitude of the real and imaginary parts of each of its
elements is less than 0.5. If greater or equal to this value the results could produce saturation. Note
that the output values are scaled by a factor of 1/N, with N the length of the FFT. input is expected in
natural ordering, while output is produced in bit reverse ordering.
MikroElektronika
672
Twiddle Factors:
TwiddleCoeff_64
const unsigned TwiddleCoeff_64[64] = {
0x7FFF, 0x0000, 0x7F62, 0xF374, 0x7D8A, 0xE707, 0x7A7D, 0xDAD8,
0x7642, 0xCF04, 0x70E3, 0xC3A9, 0x6A6E, 0xB8E3, 0x62F2, 0xAECC,
0x5A82, 0xA57E, 0x5134, 0x9D0E, 0x471D, 0x9592, 0x3C57, 0x8F1D,
0x30FC, 0x89BE, 0x2528, 0x8583, 0x18F9, 0x8276, 0x0C8C, 0x809E,
0x0000, 0x8000, 0xF374, 0x809E, 0xE707, 0x8276, 0xDAD8, 0x8583,
0xCF04, 0x89BE, 0xC3A9, 0x8F1D, 0xB8E3, 0x9592, 0xAECC, 0x9D0E,
0xA57E, 0xA57E, 0x9D0E, 0xAECC, 0x9592, 0xB8E3, 0x8F1D, 0xC3A9,
0x89BE, 0xCF04, 0x8583, 0xDAD8, 0x8276, 0xE707, 0x809E, 0xF374};
TwiddleCoeff_128
0x7FFF, 0x0000, 0x7FD9, 0xF9B8, 0x7F62, 0xF374, 0x7E9D, 0xED38,
0x7D8A, 0xE707, 0x7C2A, 0xE0E6, 0x7A7D, 0xDAD8, 0x7885, 0xD4E1,
0x7642, 0xCF04, 0x73B6, 0xC946, 0x70E3, 0xC3A9, 0x6DCA, 0xBE32,
0x6A6E, 0xB8E3, 0x66D0, 0xB3C0, 0x62F2, 0xAECC, 0x5ED7, 0xAA0A,
0x5A82, 0xA57E, 0x55F6, 0xA129, 0x5134, 0x9D0E, 0x4C40, 0x9930,
0x471D, 0x9592, 0x41CE, 0x9236, 0x3C57, 0x8F1D, 0x36BA, 0x8C4A,
0x30FC, 0x89BE, 0x2B1F, 0x877B, 0x2528, 0x8583, 0x1F1A, 0x83D6,
0x18F9, 0x8276, 0x12C8, 0x8163, 0x0C8C, 0x809E, 0x0648, 0x8027,
0x0000, 0x8000, 0xF9B8, 0x8027, 0xF374, 0x809E, 0xED38, 0x8163,
0xE707, 0x8276, 0xE0E6, 0x83D6, 0xDAD8, 0x8583, 0xD4E1, 0x877B,
0xCF04, 0x89BE, 0xC946, 0x8C4A, 0xC3A9, 0x8F1D, 0xBE32, 0x9236,
0xB8E3, 0x9592, 0xB3C0, 0x9930, 0xAECC, 0x9D0E, 0xAA0A, 0xA129,
0xA57E, 0xA57E, 0xA129, 0xAA0A, 0x9D0E, 0xAECC, 0x9930, 0xB3C0,
0x9592, 0xB8E3, 0x9236, 0xBE32, 0x8F1D, 0xC3A9, 0x8C4A, 0xC946,
0x89BE, 0xCF04, 0x877B, 0xD4E1, 0x8583, 0xDAD8, 0x83D6, 0xE0E6,
0x8276, 0xE707, 0x8163, 0xED38, 0x809E, 0xF374, 0x8027, 0xF9B8};
MikroElektronika
673
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
TwiddleCoeff_256
0x7FFF, 0x0000, 0x7FF6, 0xFCDC, 0x7FD9, 0xF9B8, 0x7FA7, 0xF695,
0x7F62, 0xF374, 0x7F0A, 0xF055, 0x7E9D, 0xED38, 0x7E1E, 0xEA1E,
0x7D8A, 0xE707, 0x7CE4, 0xE3F4, 0x7C2A, 0xE0E6, 0x7B5D, 0xDDDC,
0x7A7D, 0xDAD8, 0x798A, 0xD7D9, 0x7885, 0xD4E1, 0x776C, 0xD1EF,
0x7642, 0xCF04, 0x7505, 0xCC21, 0x73B6, 0xC946, 0x7255, 0xC673,
0x70E3, 0xC3A9, 0x6F5F, 0xC0E9, 0x6DCA, 0xBE32, 0x6C24, 0xBB85,
0x6A6E, 0xB8E3, 0x68A7, 0xB64C, 0x66D0, 0xB3C0, 0x64E9, 0xB140,
0x62F2, 0xAECC, 0x60EC, 0xAC65, 0x5ED7, 0xAA0A, 0x5CB4, 0xA7BD,
0x5A82, 0xA57E, 0x5843, 0xA34C, 0x55F6, 0xA129, 0x539B, 0x9F14,
0x5134, 0x9D0E, 0x4EC0, 0x9B17, 0x4C40, 0x9930, 0x49B4, 0x9759,
0x471D, 0x9592, 0x447B, 0x93DC, 0x41CE, 0x9236, 0x3F17, 0x90A1,
0x3C57, 0x8F1D, 0x398D, 0x8DAB, 0x36BA, 0x8C4A, 0x33DF, 0x8AFB,
0x30FC, 0x89BE, 0x2E11, 0x8894, 0x2B1F, 0x877B, 0x2827, 0x8676,
0x2528, 0x8583, 0x2224, 0x84A3, 0x1F1A, 0x83D6, 0x1C0C, 0x831C,
0x18F9, 0x8276, 0x15E2, 0x81E2, 0x12C8, 0x8163, 0x0FAB, 0x80F6,
0x0C8C, 0x809E, 0x096B, 0x8059, 0x0648, 0x8027, 0x0324, 0x800A,
0x0000, 0x8000, 0xFCDC, 0x800A, 0xF9B8, 0x8027, 0xF695, 0x8059,
0xF374, 0x809E, 0xF055, 0x80F6, 0xED38, 0x8163, 0xEA1E, 0x81E2,
0xE707, 0x8276, 0xE3F4, 0x831C, 0xE0E6, 0x83D6, 0xDDDC, 0x84A3,
0xDAD8, 0x8583, 0xD7D9, 0x8676, 0xD4E1, 0x877B, 0xD1EF, 0x8894,
0xCF04, 0x89BE, 0xCC21, 0x8AFB, 0xC946, 0x8C4A, 0xC673, 0x8DAB,
0xC3A9, 0x8F1D, 0xC0E9, 0x90A1, 0xBE32, 0x9236, 0xBB85, 0x93DC,
0xB8E3, 0x9592, 0xB64C, 0x9759, 0xB3C0, 0x9930, 0xB140, 0x9B17,
0xAECC, 0x9D0E, 0xAC65, 0x9F14, 0xAA0A, 0xA129, 0xA7BD, 0xA34C,
0xA57E, 0xA57E, 0xA34C, 0xA7BD, 0xA129, 0xAA0A, 0x9F14, 0xAC65,
0x9D0E, 0xAECC, 0x9B17, 0xB140, 0x9930, 0xB3C0, 0x9759, 0xB64C,
0x9592, 0xB8E3, 0x93DC, 0xBB85, 0x9236, 0xBE32, 0x90A1, 0xC0E9,
0x8F1D, 0xC3A9, 0x8DAB, 0xC673, 0x8C4A, 0xC946, 0x8AFB, 0xCC21,
0x89BE, 0xCF04, 0x8894, 0xD1EF, 0x877B, 0xD4E1, 0x8676, 0xD7D9,
0x8583, 0xDAD8, 0x84A3, 0xDDDC, 0x83D6, 0xE0E6, 0x831C, 0xE3F4,
0x8276, 0xE707, 0x81E2, 0xEA1E, 0x8163, 0xED38, 0x80F6, 0xF055,
0x809E, 0xF374, 0x8059, 0xF695, 0x8027, 0xF9B8, 0x800A, 0xFCDC};
TwiddleCoeff_512
0x7FFF, 0x0000, 0x7FFE, 0xFE6E, 0x7FF6, 0xFCDC, 0x7FEA, 0xFB4A,
0x7FD9, 0xF9B8, 0x7FC2, 0xF827, 0x7FA7, 0xF695, 0x7F87, 0xF505,
0x7F62, 0xF374, 0x7F38, 0xF1E4, 0x7F0A, 0xF055, 0x7ED6, 0xEEC6,
0x7E9D, 0xED38, 0x7E60, 0xEBAB, 0x7E1E, 0xEA1E, 0x7DD6, 0xE892,
0x7D8A, 0xE707, 0x7D3A, 0xE57D, 0x7CE4, 0xE3F4, 0x7C89, 0xE26D,
0x7C2A, 0xE0E6, 0x7BC6, 0xDF61, 0x7B5D, 0xDDDC, 0x7AEF, 0xDC59,
0x7A7D, 0xDAD8, 0x7A06, 0xD958, 0x798A, 0xD7D9, 0x790A, 0xD65C,
0x7885, 0xD4E1, 0x77FB, 0xD367, 0x776C, 0xD1EF, 0x76D9, 0xD079,
0x7642, 0xCF04, 0x75A6, 0xCD92, 0x7505, 0xCC21, 0x7460, 0xCAB2,
0x73B6, 0xC946, 0x7308, 0xC7DB, 0x7255, 0xC673, 0x719E, 0xC50D,
0x70E3, 0xC3A9, 0x7023, 0xC248, 0x6F5F, 0xC0E9, 0x6E97, 0xBF8C,
0x6DCA, 0xBE32, 0x6CF9, 0xBCDA, 0x6C24, 0xBB85, 0x6B4B, 0xBA33,
MikroElektronika
674
0x6A6E, 0xB8E3, 0x698C, 0xB796, 0x68A7, 0xB64C, 0x67BD, 0xB505,

0x66D0, 0xB3C0, 0x65DE, 0xB27F, 0x64E9, 0xB140, 0x63EF, 0xB005,
0x62F2, 0xAECC, 0x61F1, 0xAD97, 0x60EC, 0xAC65, 0x5FE4, 0xAB36,
0x5ED7, 0xAA0A, 0x5DC8, 0xA8E2, 0x5CB4, 0xA7BD, 0x5B9D, 0xA69C,
0x5A82, 0xA57E, 0x5964, 0xA463, 0x5843, 0xA34C, 0x571E, 0xA238,
0x55F6, 0xA129, 0x54CA, 0xA01C, 0x539B, 0x9F14, 0x5269, 0x9E0F,
0x5134, 0x9D0E, 0x4FFB, 0x9C11, 0x4EC0, 0x9B17, 0x4D81, 0x9A22,
0x4C40, 0x9930, 0x4AFB, 0x9843, 0x49B4, 0x9759, 0x486A, 0x9674,
0x471D, 0x9592, 0x45CD, 0x94B5, 0x447B, 0x93DC, 0x4326, 0x9307,
0x41CE, 0x9236, 0x4074, 0x9169, 0x3F17, 0x90A1, 0x3DB8, 0x8FDD,
0x3C57, 0x8F1D, 0x3AF3, 0x8E62, 0x398D, 0x8DAB, 0x3825, 0x8CF8,
0x36BA, 0x8C4A, 0x354E, 0x8BA0, 0x33DF, 0x8AFB, 0x326E, 0x8A5A,
0x30FC, 0x89BE, 0x2F87, 0x8927, 0x2E11, 0x8894, 0x2C99, 0x8805,
0x2B1F, 0x877B, 0x29A4, 0x86F6, 0x2827, 0x8676, 0x26A8, 0x85FA,
0x2528, 0x8583, 0x23A7, 0x8511, 0x2224, 0x84A3, 0x209F, 0x843A,
0x1F1A, 0x83D6, 0x1D93, 0x8377, 0x1C0C, 0x831C, 0x1A83, 0x82C6,
0x18F9, 0x8276, 0x176E, 0x822A, 0x15E2, 0x81E2, 0x1455, 0x81A0,
0x12C8, 0x8163, 0x113A, 0x812A, 0x0FAB, 0x80F6, 0x0E1C, 0x80C8,
0x0C8C, 0x809E, 0x0AFB, 0x8079, 0x096B, 0x8059, 0x07D9, 0x803E,
0x0648, 0x8027, 0x04B6, 0x8016, 0x0324, 0x800A, 0x0192, 0x8002,
0x0000, 0x8000, 0xFE6E, 0x8002, 0xFCDC, 0x800A, 0xFB4A, 0x8016,
0xF9B8, 0x8027, 0xF827, 0x803E, 0xF695, 0x8059, 0xF505, 0x8079,
0xF374, 0x809E, 0xF1E4, 0x80C8, 0xF055, 0x80F6, 0xEEC6, 0x812A,
0xED38, 0x8163, 0xEBAB, 0x81A0, 0xEA1E, 0x81E2, 0xE892, 0x822A,
0xE707, 0x8276, 0xE57D, 0x82C6, 0xE3F4, 0x831C, 0xE26D, 0x8377,
0xE0E6, 0x83D6, 0xDF61, 0x843A, 0xDDDC, 0x84A3, 0xDC59, 0x8511,
0xDAD8, 0x8583, 0xD958, 0x85FA, 0xD7D9, 0x8676, 0xD65C, 0x86F6,
0xD4E1, 0x877B, 0xD367, 0x8805, 0xD1EF, 0x8894, 0xD079, 0x8927,
0xCF04, 0x89BE, 0xCD92, 0x8A5A, 0xCC21, 0x8AFB, 0xCAB2, 0x8BA0,
0xC946, 0x8C4A, 0xC7DB, 0x8CF8, 0xC673, 0x8DAB, 0xC50D, 0x8E62,
0xC3A9, 0x8F1D, 0xC248, 0x8FDD, 0xC0E9, 0x90A1, 0xBF8C, 0x9169,
0xBE32, 0x9236, 0xBCDA, 0x9307, 0xBB85, 0x93DC, 0xBA33, 0x94B5,
0xB8E3, 0x9592, 0xB796, 0x9674, 0xB64C, 0x9759, 0xB505, 0x9843,
0xB3C0, 0x9930, 0xB27F, 0x9A22, 0xB140, 0x9B17, 0xB005, 0x9C11,
0xAECC, 0x9D0E, 0xAD97, 0x9E0F, 0xAC65, 0x9F14, 0xAB36, 0xA01C,
0xAA0A, 0xA129, 0xA8E2, 0xA238, 0xA7BD, 0xA34C, 0xA69C, 0xA463,
0xA57E, 0xA57E, 0xA463, 0xA69C, 0xA34C, 0xA7BD, 0xA238, 0xA8E2,
0xA129, 0xAA0A, 0xA01C, 0xAB36, 0x9F14, 0xAC65, 0x9E0F, 0xAD97,
0x9D0E, 0xAECC, 0x9C11, 0xB005, 0x9B17, 0xB140, 0x9A22, 0xB27F,
0x9930, 0xB3C0, 0x9843, 0xB505, 0x9759, 0xB64C, 0x9674, 0xB796,
0x9592, 0xB8E3, 0x94B5, 0xBA33, 0x93DC, 0xBB85, 0x9307, 0xBCDA,
0x9236, 0xBE32, 0x9169, 0xBF8C, 0x90A1, 0xC0E9, 0x8FDD, 0xC248,
0x8F1D, 0xC3A9, 0x8E62, 0xC50D, 0x8DAB, 0xC673, 0x8CF8, 0xC7DB,
0x8C4A, 0xC946, 0x8BA0, 0xCAB2, 0x8AFB, 0xCC21, 0x8A5A, 0xCD92,
0x89BE, 0xCF04, 0x8927, 0xD079, 0x8894, 0xD1EF, 0x8805, 0xD367,
0x877B, 0xD4E1, 0x86F6, 0xD65C, 0x8676, 0xD7D9, 0x85FA, 0xD958,
0x8583, 0xDAD8, 0x8511, 0xDC59, 0x84A3, 0xDDDC, 0x843A, 0xDF61,
0x83D6, 0xE0E6, 0x8377, 0xE26D, 0x831C, 0xE3F4, 0x82C6, 0xE57D,
0x8276, 0xE707, 0x822A, 0xE892, 0x81E2, 0xEA1E, 0x81A0, 0xEBAB,
0x8163, 0xED38, 0x812A, 0xEEC6, 0x80F6, 0xF055, 0x80C8, 0xF1E4,
0x809E, 0xF374, 0x8079, 0xF505, 0x8059, 0xF695, 0x803E, 0xF827,
0x8027, 0xF9B8, 0x8016, 0xFB4A, 0x800A, 0xFCDC, 0x8002, 0xFE6E};
MikroElektronika
675
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Bit Reverse Complex Library

mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 includes a Bit Reverse Complex Library for DSP engine. All routines work with
fractional Q15 format.
Library Routines
- BitReverseComplex
BitReverseComplex
Prototype void BitReverseComplex(unsigned log2N, unsigned *ReIm);

Description This function does Complex (in-place) Bit Reverse re-organization.
Parameters - N: buffer length (must be the power of 2).
- ReIm: output sample(from FFT).
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example ydata unsigned InputSamples[512];
...
// Perform FFT (DFT), 7 stages, 128 samples of complex pairs
// Twiddle factors are taken from the <TwiddleFactors.c>
FFT(8, TwiddleCoeff_256, InputSamples);
// DFT butterfly algorythm bit-reverses output samples.

// We have to restore them in natural order
BitReverseComplex(8, InputSamples);
Notes Input samples must be in Y data space.
MikroElektronika
676
Vectors Library
mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 includes a library for working and using vectors. All routines work with fractional
Q15 format.
Library Routines
- Vector_Set
- Vector_Power
- Vector_Subtract
- Vector_Scale
- Vector_Negate
- Vector_Multiply
- Vector_Min
- Vector_Max
- Vector_Dot
- Vector_Correlate
- Vector_Convolve
- Vector_Add
Vector_Set
Prototype void Vector_Set(unsigned *input, unsigned size, unsigned value);
Description Sets size elements of input to value, starting from the first element.
Parameters - input: pointer to original vector
- size: number of vector elements
- value: value written to the elements
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example unsigned vec2[3] = {1,1,1};
Vector_Set(vec2, 3, 0x4000);
Notes - size must be > 0
- Length of input is limited by available RAM
MikroElektronika
677
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Vector_Power
Prototype unsigned Vector_Power(unsigned numElems, unsigned *srcV);
Description Function returns result of power value (powVal) in radix point 1.15
Parameters - numElems: number elements in vector(s)
- srcV: pointer to source vector
Returns
Requires Nothing.
Vector_Power(3, vec1);
Notes - [W0..W2] used, not restored
- [W4] used, not restored
- AccuA used, not restored
- CORCON saved, used, restored
Vector_Subtract
Prototype void Vector_Subtract(unsigned *dest, unsigned *v1, unsigned *v2, unsigned
numElems);
Description This function does subtraction of two vectors.
dstV[n] = v1[n] - v2[n], n ϵ [0, numElems-1]

Parameters - dest: result vector
- v1: first vector
- v2: second vector
- numElems: must be less or equal to minimum size of two vectors.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
unsigned vec2[3] = {1,1,1};
unsigned vecDest[3];
Vector_Subtract(vecDest, vec1, vec2, 3);

Notes - AccuA used, not restored.
- CORCON saved, used, restored.
MikroElektronika
678
Vector_Scale
Prototype void Vector_Scale(unsigned N, int ScaleValue, unsigned *SrcVector, unsigned
*DestVector);
Description This function does vector scaling with scale value.
dstV[n] = sclVal * srcV[n], n ϵ [0, numElems-1]

Parameters - N: buffer length (number of elements to be scaled)
- ScaleValue: scale value
- SrcVector: pointer to original vector
- DestVector: pointer to scaled vector
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Vector_Scale(3, 2, vec1, vecDest);

Vector_Negate
Prototype void Vector_Negate(unsigned *srcVector, unsigned *DestVector, unsigned
numElems);
Description This function does negation of vector.
dstV[n] = (-1)*srcV1[n] + 0, n ϵ [0, numElems]

Parameters - srcVector: pointer to original vector
- destVector: pointer to result vector
- numElems: number of elements in vector(s)
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example unsigned vecDest[3];
Vector_Negate(vec1, vecDest, 3);

Notes - Negate of 0x8000 is 0x7FFF
- [W0]..[W5] used, not restored
MikroElektronika
679
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Vector_Multiply
Prototype void Vector_Multiply(unsigned *v1, unsigned *v2, unsigned *dest, unsigned
numElems);
Description This function does multiplication of two vectors.
dstV[n] = srcV1[n] * srcV2[n], n ϵ [0, numElems-1]

Parameters - v1: pointer to first vector
- v2: pointer to second vector
- dest: pointer to result vector
- numElems: number elements in vector(s) (must be less or equal to minimum size of two vectors)
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
unsigned vConDest[10];
Vector_Multiply(vec1, vConDest, vec2, 3);

Vector_Min
Prototype unsigned Vector_Min(unsigned *Vector, unsigned numElems, unsigned
*MinIndex);
Description This function finds minimal value in vector.
minVal = min (srcV[n]), n ϵ [0, numElems-1]
If srcV[i] = srcV[j] = minVal, and i < j, then MinIndex = j.

Parameters - Vector: pointer to original vector
- numElems: number of elements in vector
- MinIndex: pointer to index of minimum value
Returns Minimum value (minVal).
Requires Nothing.
unsigned index;
unsigned rslt;
rslt = Vector_Min(vec1, 3, &index);

MikroElektronika
680
Vector_Max
Prototype unsigned Vector_Max(unsigned *srcV, unsigned numElems, unsigned
*MaxIndex);
Description This function find maximal value in vector.
maxVal = max (srcV[n]), n ϵ [0, numElems-1]
If srcV[i] = srcV[j] = maxVal, and i < j, then maxIndex = j.

Parameters - srcV: pointer to original vector
- MaxIndex: pointer to index of maximum value
Returns Minimum value (maxVal).
Requires Nothing.
unsigned index;
unsigned rslt;
rslt = Vector_Max(vec1, 3, &index);

Vector_Dot
Prototype unsigned Vector_Dot(unsigned *v1, unsigned *v2, unsigned numElems);
Description Function calculates vector dot product.
Returns Dot product value :
Requires Nothing.
unsigned rslt;
rslt = Vector_Dot(vec2,vec2,3);
- [W4..W5] used, not restored
MikroElektronika
681
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Vector_Correlate
Prototype void Vector_Correlate(unsigned *v1, unsigned *v2, unsigned *dest, unsigned
numElemsV1, unsigned numElemsV2);
Description Function calculates Vector correlation (using convolution).
where:
x[n] defined for n Î [0, N)
y[n] defined for n Î [0, M), M £ N
r[n] defined for n Î [0, N+M-1)
- numElemsV1: number of the first vector elements
- numElemsV2: number of the second vector elements
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example unsigned vConDest[10];
Vector_Correlate(vec2,vec2,vConDest,3,3);
Notes [W0..W7] used, not restored
MikroElektronika
682
Vector_Convolve
Prototype void Vector_Convolve(unsigned *v1, unsigned *v2, unsigned *dest, unsigned
numElemsV1, unsigned numElemsV2);
Description Function calculates Vector using convolution.
, n ϵ [0, M)
, n ϵ [M, N)
, n ϵ [N, N+M-1)

- numElemsV1: number of the first vector elements
- numElemsV2: number of the second vector elements
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
unsigned vConDest2[10];
Vector_Convolve(vec2,vec2,vConDest2,3,3);
- [W8..W10] saved, used, restored
MikroElektronika
683
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Vector_Add
Prototype void Vector_Add(unsigned *dest, unsigned *v1, unsigned *v2, unsigned
numElems);
Description Function calculates vector addition.
dstV[n] = srcV1[n] + srcV2[n] , n ϵ [0, numElems-1)
Parameters - dest: pointer to result vector

- v1: pointer to first vector
- numElemsV1: number of vector(s) elements
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Vector_Add(vecDest, vec1, vec2, 3);

MikroElektronika
684
Matrices Library
mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 includes a library for operating and working with matrices. All routines work
with fractional Q15 format.
Library Routines
Matrix_Transpose
Matrix_Subtract
Matrix_Scale
Matrix_Multiply
Matrix_Add
Matrix_Transpose
Prototype void Matrix_Transpose(unsigned *src, unsigned *dest, unsigned numRows,
unsigned numCols);
Description Function does matrix transposition.
dstM[i][j] = srcM[j][i]
Parameters - src: pointer to original matrix

- dest: pointer to result matrix
- numRows: number of rows in the source matrix
- numCols: number of cols in the source matrix
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example int mx1[6] = {1,2,3,4,5,6};
int mxDest[9];
Matrix_Transpose(mx1, mxDest, 2,3);

Notes [W0..W5] used, not restored
MikroElektronika
685
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Matrix_Subtract
Prototype void Matrix_Subtract(unsigned *src1, unsigned *src2, unsigned *dest, unsigned
num_rows, unsigned num_cols);
Description Function does matrix subtraction.
dstM[i][j] = srcM1[i][j] - srcM2[i][j]

Parameters - src1: pointer to the first matrix
- src2: pointer to the second matrix
- dest: pointer to the result matrix
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example int mx1[6] = {1,2,3,4,5,6};
int mx2[6] = {2,2,2,2,2,2};
int mxDest[9];
Matrix_Subtract(mx1, mx2, mxDest, 2, 3);

- AccuB used, not restored
Matrix_Scale
Prototype void Matrix_Scale(unsigned ScaleValue, unsigned *src1, unsigned *dest,
unsigned numRows, unsigned numCols);
Description Function does matrix scale.
dstM[i][j] = sclVal * srcM[i][j]

Parameters - ScaleValue: scale value
- src1: pointer to the original matrix
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example int mx1[6] = {1,2,3,4,5,6};
int mxDest[9];
Matrix_Scale(0x4000, mx1, mxDest, 2,3);

- numRows*numCols < 214
MikroElektronika
686
Matrix_Multiply
Prototype void Matrix_Multiply(unsigned *src1, unsigned *src2, unsigned *dest, unsigned
numRows1, unsigned numCols2, unsigned numCols1Rows2);
Description Function does matrix multiplication.
with:
i ϵ [0, numRows1-1]
j ϵ [0, numCols2-1]
k ϵ [0, numCols1Rows2-1]
Parameters
- src1: pointer to the first matrix
- dest: pointer to result matrix
- numRows1: number of rows in the first matrix
- numCols2: number of columns in the second matrix
- numCols1Rows2: number of columns in the first matrix and rows in the second matrix
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example int mx1[6] = {1,2,3,4,5,6} ;
int mx2[6] = {2,2,2,2,2,2} ;
int mxDest[9];
Matrix_Multiply(mx1,mx2,mxDest,2,2,3);

- [W8..W13] used, and restored
MikroElektronika
687
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Matrix_Add
Prototype void Matrix_Add(unsigned *src1, unsigned *src2, unsigned *dest, unsigned
numRows, unsigned numCols);
Description Function does matrix addition.
dstM[i][j] = srcM1[i][j] + srcM2[i][j]
Parameters
- src1: pointer to the first matrix
- numRows1: number of rows in the first matrix
- numCols2: number of columns in the second matrix
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example int mx1[6] = {1,2,3,4,5,6};
int mx2[6] = {2,2,2,2,2,2};
int mxDest[9];
Matrix_Add(mx1,mx2, mxDest,2,3);
Notes
- [W0..W4] used, not restored
- AccuA used, not restored.
- CORCON saved, used, restored.
- numRows1*numCols2 < 214
MikroElektronika
688
Standard ANSI C Libraries

- ANSI C Ctype Library
- ANSI C Math Library
- ANSI C Stdlib Library
- ANSI C String Library
ANSI C Ctype Library

The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a set of standard ANSI C library functions for testing and mapping
characters.
Important:
- Not all of the standard functions have been included.

- The functions have been mostly implemented according to the ANSI C standard, but certain functions have been
modified in order to facilitate dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 programming. Be sure to skim through the description before using
standard C functions.
Library Functions
- isalnum
- isalpha
- iscntrl
- isdigit
- isgraph
- islower
- ispunct
- isspace
- isupper
- isxdigit
- toupper
- tolower
MikroElektronika
689
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
isalnum
Prototype unsigned int isalnum(char character);
Description Function returns 1 if the character is alphanumeric (A-Z, a-z, 0-9), otherwise returns zero.
Example res = isalnum(‘o’); // returns 1

res = isalnum(‘\r’); // returns 0
isalpha
Prototype unsigned int isalpha(char character);
Description Function returns 1 if the character is alphabetic (A-Z, a-z), otherwise returns zero.
Example res = isalpha(‘A’); // returns 1

res = isalpha(‘1’); // returns 0
iscntrl
Prototype unsigned int iscntrl(char character);
Description Function returns 1 if the character is a control or delete character(decimal 0-31 and 127), otherwise
returns zero.
Example res = iscntrl(‘\r’); // returns 1

res = iscntrl(‘o’); // returns 0
isdigit
Prototype unsigned int isdigit(char character);
Description Function returns 1 if the character is a digit (0-9), otherwise returns zero.
Example res = isdigit(‘o’); // returns 1

res = isdigit(‘1’); // returns 0
MikroElektronika
690
isgraph
Prototype unsigned int isgraph(char character);
Description Function returns 1 if the character is a printable, excluding the space (decimal 32), otherwise
returns zero.
Example res = isgraph(‘o’); // returns 1

res = isgraph(‘ ‘); // returns 0
islower
Prototype unsigned int islower(char character);
Description Function returns 1 if the character is a lowercase letter (a-z), otherwise returns zero.
Example res = islower(‘0’); // returns 1

res = islower(‘A’); // returns 0
ispunct
Prototype unsigned int ispunct(char character);
Description Function returns 1 if the character is a punctuation (decimal 32-47, 58-63, 91-96, 123-126),
otherwise returns zero.
Example res = ispunct(‘.’); // returns 1

res = ispunct(‘1’); // returns 0
isspace
Prototype unsigned int isspace(char character);
Description Function returns 1 if the character is a white space (space, tab, CR, HT, VT, NL, FF), otherwise
returns zero.
Example res = isspace(‘ ‘); // returns 1

res = isspace(‘1’); // returns 0
MikroElektronika
691
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
isupper
Prototype unsigned int isupper(char character);
Description Function returns 1 if the character is an uppercase letter (A-Z), otherwise returns zero.
Example res = isupper(‘A’); // returns 1

res = isupper(‘a’); // returns 0
isxdigit
Prototype unsigned int isxdigit(char character);
Description Function returns 1 if the character is a hex digit (0-9, A-F, a-f), otherwise returns zero.
Example res = isxdigit(‘A’); // returns 1

res = isxdigit(‘P’); // returns 0
toupper
Prototype unsigned int toupper(char character);
Description If the character is a lowercase letter (a-z), the function returns an uppercase letter. Otherwise, the
function returns an unchanged input parameter.
Example res = toupper(‘a’); // returns A

res = toupper(‘B’); // returns B
tolower
Prototype unsigned int tolower(char character);
Description If the character is an uppercase letter (A-Z), function returns a lowercase letter. Otherwise, function
returns an unchanged input parameter.
Example res = tolower(‘A’); // returns a

res = tolower(‘b’); // returns b
MikroElektronika
692
ANSI C Math Library

The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a set of standard ANSI C library functions for floating point math
handling.
Important:
Library Functions
- acos
- asin
- atan
- atan2
- ceil
- cos
- cosh
- exp
-fabs
- floor
- frexp
- ldexp
- log
- log10
- modf
- pow
- sin
- sinh
- sqrt
- tan
acos
Prototype double acos(double x);
Description Function returns the arc cosine of parameter x; that is, the value whose cosine is x. The input parameter
x must be between -1 and 1 (inclusive). The return value is in radians, between 0 and Π (inclusive).
Example doub = acos(0.5); // doub = 1.047198
MikroElektronika
693
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
asin
Prototype double asin(double x);
Description Function returns the arc sine of parameter x; that is, the value whose sine is x. The input parameter
x must be between -1 and 1 (inclusive). The return value is in radians, between -Π/2 and Π/2
(inclusive).
Example doub = asin(0.5); // doub = 5.235987e-1
atan
Prototype double atan(double f);
Description Function computes the arc tangent of parameter f; that is, the value whose tangent is f. The return
value is in radians, between -Π/2 and Π/2 (inclusive).
Example doub = atan(1.0); // doub = 7.853982e-1
atan2
Prototype double atan2(double y, double x);
Description This is the two-argument arc tangent function. It is similar to computing the arc tangent of y/x, except
that the signs of both arguments are used to determine the quadrant of the result and x is permitted to
be zero. The return value is in radians, between -Π and Π (inclusive).
Example doub = atan2(2., 1.); // doub = 4.636475e-1
ceil
Prototype double ceil(double x);
Description Function returns value of parameter x rounded up to the next whole number.
Example doub = ceil(0.5); // doub = 1.000000
MikroElektronika
694
cos
Prototype double cos(double f);
Description Function returns the cosine of f in radians. The return value is from -1 to 1.
Example doub = cos(PI/3.); // doub = 0.500008
cosh
Prototype double cosh(double x);
Description Function returns the hyperbolic cosine of x, defined mathematically as (ex+e-x)/2. If the value of x
is too large (if overflow occurs), the function fails.
Example doub = cosh(PI/3.); // doub = 1.600286
exp
Prototype double exp(double x);
Description Function returns the value of e — the base of natural logarithms — raised to the power x (i.e. ex).
Example doub = exp(0.5); // doub = 1.648721
fabs
Prototype double fabs(double d);
Description Function returns the absolute (i.e. positive) value of d.
Example doub = fabs(-1.3); // doub = 1.3
floor
Prototype double floor(double x);
Description Function returns the value of parameter x rounded down to the nearest integer.
Example doub = floor(15.258); // doub = 15.000000
MikroElektronika
695
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
frexp
Prototype double frexp(double value, int *eptr);
Description Function splits a floating-point value into a normalized fraction and an integral power of 2. The return
value is the normalized fraction and the integer exponent is stored in the object pointed to by eptr.
ldexp
Prototype double ldexp(double value, int newexp);
Description Function returns the result of multiplying the floating-point number num by 2 raised to the power n (i.e.
returns x * 2n).
Example doub = ldexp(2.5, 2); // doub = 10
log
Prototype double log(double x);
Description Function returns the natural logarithm of x (i.e. loge(x)).
Example doub = log(10); // doub = 2.302585E
log10
Prototype double log10(double x);
Description Function returns the base-10 logarithm of x (i.e. log10(x)).
Example doub = log10(100.); // doub = 2.000000
MikroElektronika
696
modf
Prototype double modf(double val, double *iptr);
Description Function returns the signed fractional component of val, placing its whole number component into the
variable pointed to by iptr.
Example doub = modf(6.25, &iptr); // doub = 0.25, iptr = 6.00
pow
Prototype double pow(double x, double y);
Description Function returns the value of x raised to the power y (i.e. xy). If x is negative, the function will
automatically cast y into unsigned long.
Example doub = pow(10.,5.); // doub = 9.999984e+4
sin
Prototype double sin(double f);
Description Function returns the sine of f in radians. The return value is from -1 to 1.
Example doub = sin(PI/2.); // doub = 1.000000
sinh
Prototype double sinh(double x);
Description Function returns the hyperbolic sine of x, defined mathematically as (ex-e-x)/2. If the value of x is
too large (if overflow occurs), the function fails.
Example doub = sinh(PI/2.); // doub = 2.301296
MikroElektronika
697
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
sqrt
Prototype double sqrt(double x);
Description Function returns the non negative square root of x.
Example doub = sqrt(10000.); // doub = 100.0000
tan
Prototype double tan(double x);
Description Function returns the tangent of x in radians. The return value spans the allowed range of floating point
in the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24.
Example doub = tan(PI/4.); // doub = 0.999998
tanh
Prototype double tanh(double x);
Description Function returns the hyperbolic tangent of x, defined mathematically as sinh(x)/cosh(x).
Example doub = tanh(-PI/4.); // doub = -0.655793
MikroElektronika
698
ANSI C Stdlib Library

The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a set of standard ANSI C library functions of general utility.
Important:
Library Functions
- abs
- atof
- atoi
- atol
- div
- ldiv
- uldiv
- labs
- max
- min
- rand
- srand
- xtoi
abs
Prototype int abs(int a);
Description Function returns the absolute (i.e. positive) value of a.
Example result = abs(-12); // result = 12
MikroElektronika
699
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
atof
Prototype double atof(char *s);
Description Function converts the input string s into a double precision value and returns the value. Input string
s should conform to the floating point literal format, with an optional whitespace at the beginning. The
string will be processed one character at a time, until the function reaches a character which it doesn’t
recognize (including a null character).
Example doub = atof(“-1.23”); // doub = -1.23
atoi
Prototype int atoi(char *s);
Description Function converts the input string s into an integer value and returns the value. The input string s
should consist exclusively of decimal digits, with an optional whitespace and a sign at the beginning.
The string will be processed one character at a time, until the function reaches a character which it
doesn’t recognize (including a null character).
Example result = atoi(“32000”); // result = 32000
atol
Prototype long atol(char *s);
Description Function converts the input string s into a long integer value and returns the value. The input string s
should consist exclusively of decimal digits, with an optional whitespace and a sign at the beginning.
The string will be processed one character at a time, until the function reaches a character which it
doesn’t recognize (including a null character).
Example result = atol(“-32560”); // result = -32560
div
Prototype div_t div(int number, int denom);
Description Function computes the result of division of the numerator number by the denominator denom; the
function returns a structure of type div_t comprising quotient (quot) and remainder (rem), see Div
Structures.
Example dt = div(1234,100);
MikroElektronika
700
ldiv
Prototype ldiv_t ldiv(long number, long denom);
Description Function is similar to the div function, except that the arguments and result structure members all have
type long.
Function computes the result of division of the numerator number by the denominator denom; the
function returns a structure of type ldiv_t comprising quotient (quot) and remainder (rem), see Div
Structures.
Example dl = ldiv(-123456, 1000);
uldiv
Prototype uldiv_t uldiv(unsigned long number, unsigned long denom);
Description Function is similar to the div function, except that the arguments and result structure members all have
type unsigned long.
Function computes the result of division of the numerator number by the denominator denom; the
function returns a structure of type uldiv_t comprising quotient (quot) and remainder (rem), see
Div Structures.
Example dul = uldiv(123456,1000);
labs
Prototype long labs(long x);
Description Function returns the absolute (i.e. positive) value of long integer x.
Example result = labs(-2147483647);
max
Prototype int max(int a, int b);
Description Function returns greater of the two integers, a and b.
Example result = max(123,67); // function returns 123
MikroElektronika
701
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
min
Prototype int min(int a, int b);
Description Function returns lower of the two integers, a and b.
Example result = min(123,67); // function returns 67
rand
Prototype int rand();
Description Function returns a sequence of pseudo-random numbers between 0 and 32767. The function will
always produce the same sequence of numbers unless srand is called to seed the start point.
Example while(1)
result = rand()
;
srand
Prototype void srand(unsigned x);
Description Function uses x as a starting point for a new sequence of pseudo-random numbers to be returned by
subsequent calls to rand. No values are returned by this function.
Example srand(9);
xtoi
Prototype unsigned xtoi(char *s);
Description Function converts the input string s consisting of hexadecimal digits into an integer value. The input
parameter s should consist exclusively of hexadecimal digits, with an optional whitespace and a sign
at the beginning. The string will be processed one character at a time, until the function reaches a
character which it doesn’t recognize (including a null character).
Example result = xtoi(“1FF”); // result = 511
MikroElektronika
702
Div Structures
typedef struct divstruct {

int quot;
int rem;
} div_t;
typedef struct ldivstruct {

long quot;
long rem;
} ldiv_t;
typedef struct uldivstruct {

unsigned long quot;
unsigned long rem;
} uldiv_t;
MikroElektronika
703
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
ANSI C String Library

The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides a set of standard ANSI C library functions useful for manipulating
strings and RAM memory.
Important:

Library Functions
- memchr
- memcmp
- memcpy
- memmove
- memset
- strcat
- strchr
- strcmp
- strcpy
- strlen
- strncat
- strncpy
- strspn
- strncmp
- strstr
- strcspn
- strpbrk
- strrchr
- strtok
memchr
Prototype void *memchr(void *p, char n, unsigned int v);
Description Function locates the first occurrence of char n in the initial v bytes of memory area starting at the
address p. The function returns the pointer to this location or 0 if the n was not found.
For parameter p you can use either a numerical value (literal/variable/constant) indicating memory
address or a dereferenced value of an object, for example &mystring or &PORTB.
Example char txt[] = “mikroElektronika”;

res = memchr(txt, ‘e’, 16); // example locates first occurrence of the
letter ‘e’ in the string ‘txt’ in the first 16 characters of the string
MikroElektronika
704
memcmp
Prototype int memcmp(void *s1, void *s2, int n);
Description Function compares the first n characters of objects pointed to by s1 and s2 and returns zero if
the objects are equal, or returns a difference between the first differing characters (in a left-to-right
evaluation). Accordingly, the result is greater than zero if the object pointed to by s1 is greater than the
object pointed to by s2 and vice versa.

char txt_sub[] = “mikro;
res = memcmp(txt, txt_sub, 16); // returns 69, which is ASCII code of the
first differing character - letter ‘E’
memcpy
Prototype void *memcpy(void *d1, void *s1, int n);
Description Function copies n characters from the object pointed to by s1 into the object pointed to by d1. If
copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined. The function returns
address of the object pointed to by d1.

char txt_sub[] = “mikr;
res = memcpy(txt+4, txt_sub, 4); // string ‘txt’ will be populated with

the first 4 characters of the ‘txt_sub’ string, beginning from the 4th
character
// routine returns the address of the first
populated character, if memory areas of the strings don’t overlap
memmove
Prototype void *memmove(void *to, void *from, int n);
Description Function copies n characters from the object pointed to by from into the object pointed to by to. Unlike
memcpy, the memory areas to and from may overlap. The function returns address of the object
pointed to by to.

char txt_sub[] = “mikr;
res = memmove(txt+7, txt_sub, 4); // string ‘txt’ will be populated with first
4 characters of the ‘txt_sub’ string, beginning from the 7th character
// routine returns the address of the first
populated character (memory areas of the object may overlap)
MikroElektronika
705
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
memset
Prototype void *memset(void *p1, char character, int n);
Description Function copies the value of the character into each of the first n characters of the object pointed
by p1. The function returns address of the object pointed to by p1.
memset(txt, ‘a’, 2); // routine will copy the character ‘a’ into each of
the first ‘n’ characters of the string ‘txt’,
strcat
Prototype char *strcat(char *to, char *from);
Description Function appends a copy of the string from to the string to, overwriting the null character at the end
of to. Then, a terminating null character is added to the result. If copying takes place between objects
that overlap, the behavior is undefined. to string must have enough space to store the result. The
function returns address of the object pointed to by to.

char *res;
txt[3] = 0;
res = strcat(txt, “_test”); // routine will append the ‘_test’ at the
place of the first null character, adding terminating null character to the
result
// routine returns the address of the ‘txt’
string
strchr
Prototype char *strchr(char *ptr, char chr);
Description Function locates the first occurrence of character chr in the string ptr. The function returns a pointer
to the first occurrence of character chr, or a null pointer if chr does not occur in ptr. The terminating
null character is considered to be a part of the string.

char *res;
res = strchr(txt, ‘E’); // routine will locate the character ‘E’ in the
‘txt’ string, and return the address of the character
MikroElektronika
706
strcmp
Prototype int strcmp(char *s1, char *s2);
Description Function compares strings s1 and s2 and returns zero if the strings are equal, or returns a difference
between the first differing characters (in a left-to-right evaluation). Accordingly, the result is greater
than zero if s1 is greater than s2 and vice versa.
Example char txt = “mikroElektronika”;

char txt_sub = “mikro”;
int res;
res = strcmp(txt,txt_sub); // compares strings ‘txt’ and ‘txt_sub’ and

returns returns a difference between the first differing characters, in this
case 69
strcpy
Prototype char *strcpy(char *to, char *from);
Description Function copies the string from into the string to. If copying is successful, the function returns to. If
copying takes place between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined.

char txt_sub = “mikro_test”;
int res;
res = strcpy(txt,txt_sub); // copies string ‘txt_sub’ to ‘txt’
strlen
Prototype int strlen(char *s);
Description Function returns the length of the string s (the terminating null character does not count against
string’s length).

int result;
result = strlen(txt); // calculates the length of the ‘txt’ string, result

= 16
MikroElektronika
707
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
strncat
Prototype char *strncat(char *to, char *from, int size);
Description Function appends not more than size characters from the string from to to. The initial character of
from overwrites the null character at the end of to. The terminating null character is always appended
to the result. The function returns to.

char *result;
txt[5] = 0;
result = strncat(txt,txt_sub,4); // routine appends first 4 characters
from the string ‘txt_sub’ at the place of first null character in the ‘txt’
string
strncpy
Prototype char *strncpy(char *to, char *from, int size);
Description Function copies not more than size characters from string from to to. If copying takes place
between objects that overlap, the behavior is undefined. If from is shorter than size characters,
then to will be padded out with null characters to make up the difference. The function returns the
resulting string to.

int res;
res = strncpy(txt,txt_sub,4); // copies first 4 characters form the string

‘txt_sub’ to ‘txt’
strspn
Prototype int strspn(char *str1, char *str2);
Description Function returns the length of the maximum initial segment of str1 which consists entirely of characters
from str2. The terminating null character at the end of the string is not compared.

int res;
result = strspn(txt,txt_sub); // routne returns 4
MikroElektronika
708
strncmp
Prototype int strncmp(char *s1, char *s2, char len);
Description Function lexicographically compares not more than len characters (characters that follow the null
character are not compared) from the string pointed by s1 to the string pointed by s2. The function
returns a value indicating the s1 and s2 relationship:
Value Meaning
< 0 s1 “less than” s2
= 0 s1 “equal to” s2
> 0 s1 “greater than” s2

int res;
res = strncmp(txt_sub,txt,3); // compares the first 3 characters from the

string ‘txt’ with the sting ‘txt_sub’ and returns a difference
strstr
Prototype char *strstr(char *s1, char *s2);
Description Function locates the first occurrence of the string s2 in the string s1 (excluding the terminating null
character).
The function returns pointer to first occurrence of s2 in s1; if no string was found, function returns 0.
If s2 is a null string, the function returns 0.

char *res;
res = strstr(txt_sub,txt);
MikroElektronika
709
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
strcspn
Prototype char *strcspn(char * s1, char *s2);
Description Function computes the length of the maximum initial segment of the string pointed to by s1 that
consists entirely of characters that are not in the string pointed to by s2.
The function returns the length of the initial segment.

char *res;
res = strcspn(txt_sub,txt);
strpbrk
Prototype char *strpbrk(char * s1, char *s2);
Description Function searches s1 for the first occurrence of any character from the string s2. The terminating null
character is not included in the search. The function returns pointer to the matching character in s1. If
s1 contains no characters from s2, the function returns 0.

char *res;
res = strpbrk(txt_sub,txt);
strrchr
Prototype char *strrchr(char * ptr, char chr);
Description Function searches the string ptr for the last occurrence of character chr. The null character
terminating ptr is not included in the search. The function returns pointer to the last chr found in
ptr; if no matching character was found, function returns 0.
res = strrchr(txt_sub,’k’); // returns the pointer to the ‘k’ character of

the ‘txt’ string
MikroElektronika
710
strtok
Prototype char *strtok(char *s1, char *s2);
Returns The strtok function returns a pointer to the first character of a token, or a null pointer if there is no
token.
Description A sequence of calls to the strtok function breaks the string pointed to by s1 into a sequence of tokens,
each of which is delimited by a character from the string pointed to by s2. The first call in the sequence
has s1 as its first argument, and is followed by calls with a null pointer as their first argument. The
separator string pointed to by s2 may be different from call to call.
The first call in the sequence searches the string pointed to by s1 for the first character that is not
contained in the current separator string pointed to by s2. If no such character is found, then there are
no tokens in the string pointed to by s1 and the strtok function returns a null pointer. If such character
is found, it is the start of the first token.
The strtok function then searches from there for a character that is contained in the current separator
string. If no such character is found, the current token extends to the end of the string pointed to by
s1, and subsequent searches for a token will return a null pointer. If such a character is found, it is
overwritten by a null character, which terminates the current token. The strtok function saves a pointer
to the following character, from which the next search for a token will start.
Each subsequent call, with a null pointer as the value of the first argument, starts searching from the
saved pointer and behaves as described above.
Example char x[10] ;
void main(){
strcpy(x, strtok(“mikroEl”, “Ek”));

strcpy(x, strtok(0, “kE”));
MikroElektronika
711
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Miscellaneous Libraries
- Button Library
- Conversions Library
- PrintOut Library
- Setjmp Library
- Sprint Library
- Time Library
- Trigonometry Library
Button Library
The Button Library provides routines for detecting button presses and debouncing (eliminating the influence of contact
flickering upon pressing a button).
Library Routines
- Button
strrchr
Prototype unsigned int Button(unsigned int *port, unsigned int pin, unsigned int time,
unsigned int active_state);
Description The function eliminates the influence of contact flickering upon pressing a button (debouncing). The
Button pin is tested just after the function call and then again after the debouncing period has expired.
If the pin was in the active state in both cases then the function returns 255 (true).
Parameters
- port: button port address
- pin: button pin
- time: debouncing period in milliseconds
- active_state: determines what is considered as active state. Valid values: 0 (logical zero) and
1 (logical one)
Returns
-255 if the pin was in the active state for given period.
- 0 otherwise
Requires Nothing.
Example if (Button(&PORTD, 0, 1, 1))

PORTB = 0xFF;
...
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
712
unsigned int oldstate;
void main() {
TRISD = 0xFFFF; // initialize portd as input
TRISB = 0x0000; // initialize portb as output
do {
if (Button(&PORTD, 0, 1, 1)) // detect logical one state
oldstate = 1;
if (oldstate && Button(&PORTD, 0, 1, 0)) { // detect logical one to logical zero
transition
LATB = ~LATB; // toggle portb
oldstate = 0;
}
} while(1);
}
MikroElektronika
713
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Conversions Library
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 Conversions Library provides routines for numerals to strings and BCD/
decimal conversions.
Library Routines
You can get text representation of numerical value by passing it to one of the following routines:
- ByteToStr
- ShortToStr
- WordToStr
- IntToStr
- LongToStr
- LongWordToStr
- FloatToStr
- WordToStrWithZeros
- IntToStrWithZeros
- LongWordToStrWithZeros
- LongIntToStrWithZeros
- ByteToHex
- ShortToHex
- WordToHex
- IntToHex
- LongWordToHex
- LongIntToHex
- Rtrim
- Ltrim
The following functions convert decimal values to BCD and vice versa:
- Bcd2Dec
- Dec2Bcd
- Bcd2Dec16
- Dec2Bcd16
MikroElektronika
714
ByteToStr
Prototype void ByteToStr(unsigned short input, char *output);
Description Converts input byte to a string. The output string has fixed width of 4 characters including null character
at the end (string termination). The output string is right justified and remaining positions on the left (if
any) are filled with blanks.
Parameters
- input: byte to be converted
- output: destination string
Returns Nothing.
Requires Destination string should be at least 4 characters in length.
Example unsigned short t = 24;

char txt[4];
...
ByteToStr(t, txt); // txt is “ 24” (one blank here)
Notes None.
ShortToStr
Prototype void ShortToStr(short input, char *output);
Description Converts input signed short number to a string. The output string has fixed width of 5 characters
including null character at the end (string termination). The output string is right justified and remaining
positions on the left (if any) are filled with blanks.
Parameters
- input: signed short number to be converted
Returns Nothing.
Example short t = -24;

char txt[5];
...
ShortToStr(t, txt); // txt is “ -24” (one blank here)
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
715
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
WordToStr
Prototype void WordToStr(unsigned input, char *output);
Description Converts input word to a string. The output string has fixed width of 6 characters including null character
at the end (string termination). The output string is right justified and the remaining positions on the left
(if any) are filled with blanks.
Parameters
- input: word to be converted
Returns Nothing.
Example unsigned t = 437;

char txt[6];
...
WordToStr(t, txt); // txt is “ 437” (two blanks here)
Notes None.
IntToStr
Prototype void IntToStr(int input, char *output);
Description Converts input signed integer number to a string. The output string has fixed width of 7 characters
including null character at the end (string termination). The output string is right justified and the
remaining positions on the left (if any) are filled with blanks.
Parameters
- input: signed integer number to be converted
Returns Nothing.
Example int j = -4220;

char txt[7];
...
IntToStr(j, txt); // txt is “ -4220” (one blank here)
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
716
LongToStr
Prototype void LongToStr(long input, char *output);
Description Converts input signed long integer number to a string. The output string has fixed width of 12 characters
including null character at the end (string termination). The output string is right justified and the
remaining positions on the left (if any) are filled with blanks.
Parameters
- input: signed long integer number to be converted
Returns Nothing.
Example long jj = -3700000;

char txt[12];
...
LongToStr(jj, txt);
// txt is “ -3700000” (three blanks here)
Notes None.
LongWordToStr
Prototype void LongWordToStr(unsigned long input, char *output);
Description Converts input unsigned long integer number to a string. The output string has fixed width of 11
characters including null character at the end (string termination). The output string is right justified
and the remaining positions on the left (if any) are filled with blanks.
Parameters
- input: unsigned long integer number to be converted
Returns Nothing.
Example unsigned long jj = 3700000;

char txt[11];
...
LongWordToStr(jj, txt);
// txt is “ 3700000” (three blanks here)
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
717
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
FloatToStr
Prototype unsigned char FloatToStr(float fnum, unsigned char *str);
Description Converts a floating point number to a string.
The output string is left justified and null terminated after the last digit.
Parameters
- fnum: floating point number to be converted
- str: destination string
Returns
- 3 if input number is NaN
- 2 if input number is -INF
- 1 if input number is +INF
- 0 if conversion was successful
Example
float ff1 = -374.2;
float ff2 = 123.456789;
float ff3 = 0.000001234;
char txt[15];
...
FloatToStr(ff1, txt); // txt is “-374.2”
FloatToStr(ff2, txt); // txt is “123.4567”
FloatToStr(ff3, txt); // txt is “1.234e-6”
Notes Given floating point number will be truncated to 7 most significant digits before conversion.
MikroElektronika
718
WordToStrWithZeros
Prototype void WordToStrWithZeros(unsigned int input, char *output);
Description Converts input word to a string. The output string has fixed width of 6 characters including null character
at the end (string termination).
The output string is right justified and remaining positions on the left (if any) are filled with zeros.
Parameters
- input: unsigned integer to be converted
Returns Nothing.

char txt[6];
...
WordToStrWithZeros(t, txt); // txt is “0437” (one zero here)
Notes None.
IntToStrWithZeros
Prototype void IntToStrWithZeros(int input, char *output);
Description Converts input integer to a string. The output string has fixed width of 7 characters including null
character at the end (string termination).
The output string is right justified and remaining positions on the left (if any) are filled with zeros.
Parameters
- input: integer number to be converted
Returns Nothing.

char txt[7];
...
IntToStrWithZeros(t, txt); // txt is “-03276” (one zero here)
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
719
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
LongWordToStrWithZeros
Prototype void LongWordToStrWithZeros(unsigned long input, char *output);
Description Converts input longword to a string. The output string has fixed width of 11 characters including null
character at the end (string termination).
The output string is right justified and the remaining positions on the left (if any) are filled with zeros.
Parameters
- input: unsigned long number to be converted
Returns Nothing.

char txt[11];
...
LongWordToStrWithZeros(t, txt); // txt is “0012345678” (two zeros)
Notes None.
LongIntToStrWithZeros
Prototype void LongIntToStrWithZeros(long input, char *output);
Description Converts input signed long integer number to a string. The output string has fixed width of 12 characters
including null character at the end (string termination).
The output string is right justified and the remaining positions on the left (if any) are filled with zeros.
Parameters
- input: signed long number to be converted
Returns Nothing.

char txt[12];
...
LongIntToStrWithZeros(j, txt); // txt is “-0012345678” (one zero here)
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
720
ByteToHex
Prototype void ByteToHex(char input, char *output);
Description Converts input number to a string containing the number’s hexadecimal representation. The output
string has fixed width of 3 characters including null character at the end (string termination).
Parameters
- input: byte to be converted
Returns Nothing.

char txt[3];
...
ByteToHex(t, txt); // txt is “02”
Notes None.
ShortToHex
Prototype void ShortToHex(unsigned short input, char *output);
Parameters
- input: signed short number to be converted
Returns Nothing.

char txt[3];
...
ShortToHex(t, txt); // txt is “9C”
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
721
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
WordToHex
Prototype void WordToHex(unsigned input, char *output);
Parameters
- input: unsigned integer to be converted
Returns Nothing.

char txt[5];
...
WordToHex(t, txt); // txt is “0457”
Notes None.
IntToHex
Prototype void IntToHex(int input, char *output);
Parameters
- input: signed integer number to be converted
Returns Nothing.

char txt[5];
...
IntToHex(j, txt); // txt is “8000”
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
722
LongWordToHex
Prototype void LongWordToHex(unsigned long input, char *output);
Parameters
- input: unsigned long integer number to be converted
Returns Nothing.
Example unsigned long jj = 65535;

char txt[9];
...
LongWordToHex(jj, txt); // txt is “0000FFFF”
Notes None.
LongIntToHex
Prototype void LongIntToHex(long int input, char *output);
Parameters
- input: signed long integer number to be converted
Returns Nothing.
Example long int jj = -2147483648;

char txt[9];
...
LongIntToHex(jj, txt); // txt is “80000000”
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
723
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Dec2Bcd
Prototype unsigned short Dec2Bcd(unsigned short decnum);
Description Converts input unsigned short integer number to its appropriate BCD representation.
Parameters
- decnum: unsigned short integer number to be converted
Returns Converted BCD value.
Requires Nothing.
Example unsigned short a, b;

...
a = 22;
b = Dec2Bcd(a); // b equals 34
Notes None.
Bcd2Dec
Prototype unsigned short Bcd2Dec(unsigned short bcdnum);
Description Converts 8-bit BCD numeral to its decimal equivalent.
Parameters
- bcdnum: 8-bit BCD numeral to be converted
Returns Converted decimal value.
Requires Nothing.
Example unsigned short a, b;

...
a = 34;
b = Bcd2Dec(22); // b equals 22
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
724
Dec2Bcd16
Prototype unsigned Dec2Bcd16(unsigned decnum);
Description Converts unsigned 16-bit decimal value to its BCD equivalent.
Parameters
- decnum unsigned 16-bit decimal number to be converted
Returns Converted BCD value.
Requires Nothing.
Example unsigned a, b;
...
a = 2345;
b = Dec2Bcd16(a); // b equals 9029
Notes None.
Bcd2Dec16
Prototype unsigned Bcd2Dec16(unsigned bcdnum);
Description Converts 16-bit BCD numeral to its decimal equivalent.
Parameters
- bcdnum 16-bit BCD numeral to be converted
Returns Converted decimal value.
Requires Nothing.
Example unsigned a, b;
...
a = 0x1234; // a equals 4660
b = Bcd2Dec16(a); // b equals 1234
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
725
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Rtrim
Prototype char *Rtrim(char *string);
Description Trims the trailing spaces from array given with *string
Parameters
- string: array to be trimmed.
Returns The function returns the address of the first non-space character.
Requires Nothing.
Example char *res;
res = Rtrim(“ mikroe”); // trims the trailing spaces and returns the
address of the first non-space character
Notes None.
Ltrim
Prototype char *Ltrim(char *string);
Description 66
Trims the leading spaces from array given with *string
Parameters
- string: array to be trimmed.
Returns The function returns the address of the first non-space character.
Requires Nothing.
Example char *res;
res = Ltrim(“ mikroe”); // trims the leading spaces and returns the address
of the first non-space character
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
726
PrintOut Library
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides the PrintOut routine for easy data formatting and printing.
Library Routines
-PrintOut
PrintOut
Prototype void PrintOut(void (*prntoutfunc)(char ch), const char *f,...);
Description PrintOut is used to format data and print them in a way defined by the user through a print handler
function.
Parameters
- prntoutfunc: print handler function
- f: format string
The f argument is a format string and may be composed of characters, escape sequences, and
format specifications. Ordinary characters and escape sequences are copied to the print handler in
order in which they are interpreted. Format specifications always begin with a percent sign (%) and
require additional arguments to be included in the function call.
The format string is read from left to right. The first format specification encountered refers to the
first argument after the f parameter and then converts and outputs it using the format specification.
The second format specification accesses the second argument after f, and so on. If there are more
arguments than format specifications, the extra arguments are ignored. Results are unpredictable
if there are not enough arguments for the format specifications. The format specifications have the
following format:
% [flags] [width] [.precision] [{ l | L }] conversion_type
Each field in the format specification can be a single character or a number which specifies a particular
format option. The conversion_type field is where a single character specifies that an argument is
interpreted as a character, string, number, or pointer, as shown in the following table:
MikroElektronika
727
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Parameters
conversion_type Argument Type Output Format
d int Signed decimal number
u unsigned int Unsigned decimal number
o unsigned int Unsigned octal number
x unsigned int Unsigned hexadecimal number using
0123456789abcdef
X unsigned int Unsigned hexadecimal number using
0123456789ABCEDF
f double Floating-point number using the format [-]dddd.dddd
e double Floating-point number using the format [-]d.dddde[-]
dd
E double Floating-point number using the format [-]d.ddddE[-]
dd
g double Floating-point number using either e or f format,
whichever is more compact for the specified value and
precision
c int int is converted to an unsigned char, and the
resulting character is written
s char * String with a terminating null character
p void * Pointer value, the X format is used
% <none> A % is written. No argument is converted. The complete
conversion specification shall be %%.
The flags field is where a single character is used to justify the output and to print +/- signs and blanks,
decimal points, and octal and hexadecimal prefixes, as shown in the following table.
flags Meaning
- Left justify the output in the specified field width.
+ Prefix the output value with + or - sign if the output is a signed type.
s p a c e Prefix the output value with a blank if it is a signed positive value. Otherwise, no blank is
(‘ ‘) prefixed.
# Prefix a non-zero output value with 0, 0x, or 0X when used with o, x, and X field types,
respectively. When used with the e, E, f, g, and G field types, the # flag forces the
output value to include a decimal point. In any other case the # flag is ignored.
* Ignore format specifier.
The width field is a non-negative number that specifies a minimum number of printed characters. If a
number of characters in the output value is less than width, blanks are added on the left or right (when
the - flag is specified) in order to pad to the minimum width. If the width is prefixed with 0, then zeros
are padded instead of blanks. The width field never truncates a field. If the length of the output value
exceeds the specified width, all characters are output.
MikroElektronika
728
Parameters The precision field is a non-negative number that specifies the number of characters to print,
number of significant digits, or number of decimal places. The precision field can cause truncation or
rounding of the output value in the case of a floating-point number as specified in the following table.
flags Meaning of the precision field

d, u, o, x, X The precision field is where you specify the minimum number of digits that will
be included in the output value. Digits are not truncated if the number of digits
in an argument exceeds that defined in the precision field. If the number of
digits in the argument is less than the precision field, the output value is padded
on the left with zeros.
f The precision field is where you specify the number of digits to the right of the
decimal point. The last digit is rounded.
e, E The precision field is where you specify the number of digits to the right of the
g The precision field is where you specify the maximum number of significant
digits in the output value.
c, C The precision field has no effect on these field types.
s The precision field is where you specify the maximum number of characters in
the output value. Excess characters are not output.
The optional characters l or L may immediately precede conversion_type to respectively specify

long versions of the integer types d, i, u, o, x, and X.
You must ensure that the argument type matches that of the format specification. You can use type
casts to ensure that the proper type is passed to printout.
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.
Example Print mikroElektronika example’s header file to UART.
void PrintHandler(char c){
UART1_Write(c);
void main(){
UART1_Init(9600);
Delay_ms(100);
MikroElektronika
729
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Example PrintOut(PrintHandler, “/*\r\n”

“ * Project name:\r\n”
“ PrintOutExample (Sample usage of PrintOut()
function)\r\n”
“ * Copyright:\r\n”
“ (c) MikroElektronika, 2006.\r\n”
“ * Revision History:\r\n”
“ 20060710:\r\n”
“ - Initial release\r\n”
“ * Description:\r\n”
“ Simple demonstration on usage of the PrintOut()
function\r\n”
“ * Test configuration:\r\n”
“ MCU: PIC30F4013\r\n”
“ Dev.Board: EasydsPIC4A\r\n”
“ Oscillator: HS, %10.3fMHz\r\n”
“ Ext. Modules: None.\r\n”
“ SW: mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33
and PIC24\r\n”
“ * NOTES:\r\n”
“ None.\r\n”
“ */\r\n”, Get_Fosc_kHz()/1000.);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
730
Setjmp Library
The Setjmp library contains functions and types definitions for bypassing the normal function call and return
discipline.
jmp_buf is an array of unsigned int type suitable for holding information needed to restore a calling environment. Type
declaration is contained in the sejmp.h header file which can be found in the include folder of the compiler.
Library Routines
- Setjmp
- Longjmp
Setjmp
Prototype int Setjmp(jmp_buf env);
Description This function saves calling position for a later use by Longjmp.
Parameters
- env: buffer suitable for holding information needed for restoring calling environment
Returns
- 0 if the return is from direct invocation
- nonzero value if the return is from a call to Longjmp (this value will be set by the Longjmp
routine)
Requires Nothing.
Example jmp_buf buf;

...
Setjmp(buf);
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
731
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Longjmp
Prototype void Longjmp(jmp_buf env, int val);
Description Restores calling environment saved in env buffer by the most recent invocation of Setjmp. If there
has been no such invocation, or the function containing the invocation of Setjmp has terminated in the
interim, the behavior is undefined.
Parameters
- env: buffer holding the information saved by the corresponding Setjmp invocation
- val: value to be returned by the corresponding Setjmp function
Returns Nothing.
Requires Invocation of Longjmp must occur before return from the function in which Setjmp was called
encounters.
Example jmp_buf buf;

...
Longjmp(buf, 2);
Notes None.
Library Example
This example demonstrates function cross calling using the Setjmp and Longjmp functions. When called, Setjmp
saves its calling environment in its jmp_buf argument for a later use by Longjmp. Longjmp, on the other hand,
restores the environment saved by the most recent invocation of Setjmp with the corresponding jmp_buf argument.
MikroElektronika
732
#include <Setjmp.h>
jmp_buf buf; // Note: Program flow diagrams are indexed according

// to the sequence of execution
void func33(){ // 2<------------|

// |
Delay_ms(1000); // |
// |
asm nop; // |
Longjmp(buf, 2); // 3---------------->|
asm nop; // | |
// | |
} // | |
// | |
void func(){ // 1<--------| | |
// | | |
portb = 3; // | | |
if (Setjmp(buf) == 2) // 3<----------------|
portb = 1; // 4-->| | |
else // | | |
func33(); // 2------------>|
// | |
// 4<--| |
} // 5----->| |
// | |
void main() { // | |
// | |
PORTB = 0; // | |
TRISB = 0; // | |
// | |
asm nop; // | |
// | |
func(); // 1-------->|
// |
asm nop; // 5<-----|
Delay_ms(1000);
PORTB = 0xFFFF;
}
MikroElektronika
733
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Sprint Library
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 provides the standard ANSI C Sprintf function for easy data formatting.
Note: In addition to ANSI C standard, the Sprint Library also includes two limited versions of the sprintf function
(sprinti and sprintl)
These functions take less ROM and RAM and may be more convenient for use in some cases.
Functions
- sprintf
- sprintl
- sprinti
sprintf
Prototype void sprintf(char *wh, const code char *f,...);
Returns The function returns the number of characters actually written to destination string.
Description
sprintf is used to format data and print them into destination string.
Parameters:
- wh: destination string

- f: format string
The f argument is a format string and may be composed of characters, escape sequences, and
format specifications. Ordinary characters and escape sequences are copied to the destination string
in the order in which they are interpreted. Format specifications always begin with a percent sign (%)
and require additional arguments to be included in the function call.
The format string is read from left to right. The first format specification encountered refers to the
first argument after f and then converts and outputs it using the format specification. The second
format specification accesses the second argument after f, and so on. If there are more arguments
than format specifications, then these extra arguments are ignored. Results are unpredictable if there
are not enough arguments for the format specifications. The format specifications have the following
format:
% [flags] [width] [.precision] [{ l | L }] conversion_type

Each field in the format specification can be a single character or a number which specifies a particular
format option. The conversion_type field is where a single character specifies that the argument is
interpreted as a character, string, number, or pointer, as shown in the following table:
MikroElektronika
734
Description conversion_type Argument Type Output Format

d int Signed decimal number
u unsigned int Unsigned decimal number
o unsigned int Unsigned octal number
x unsigned int Unsigned hexadecimal number using
0123456789abcdef
X unsigned int Unsigned hexadecimal number using
0123456789ABCEDF
f double Floating-point number using the format [-]dddd.dddd
e double Floating-point number using the format [-]d.dddde[-]
dd
E double Floating-point number using the format [-]d.ddddE[-]
dd
g double Floating-point number using either e or f format,
whichever is more compact for the specified value and
precision
c int int is converted to an unsigned char, and the
resulting character is written
s char * String with a terminating null character
p void * Pointer value, the X format is used
% <none> A % is written. No argument is converted. The complete
conversion specification shall be %%.
The flags field is where a single character is used to justify the output and to print +/- signs and blanks,
decimal points, and octal and hexadecimal prefixes, as shown in the following table.
flags Meaning
- Left justify the output in the specified field width.
+ Prefix the output value with + or - sign if the output is a signed type.
s p a c e Prefix the output value with a blank if it is a signed positive value. Otherwise, no blank is
(‘ ‘) prefixed.
# Prefix a non-zero output value with 0, 0x, or 0X when used with o, x, and X field types,
respectively. When used with the e, E, f, g, and G field types, the # flag forces the
output value to include a decimal point. In any other case the # flag is ignored.
* Ignore format specifier.
The width field is a non-negative number that specifies the minimum number of printed characters.
If a number of characters in the output value is less than width, then blanks are added on the left or
right (when the - flag is specified) to pad to the minimum width. If width is prefixed with 0, then zeros
are padded instead of blanks. The width field never truncates a field. If a length of the output value
exceeds the specified width, all characters are output.
MikroElektronika
735
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Parameters The precision field is a non-negative number that specifies a number of characters to print, number
of significant digits or number of decimal places. The precision field can cause truncation or rounding
of the output value in the case of a floating-point number as specified in the following table.
flags Meaning of the precision field

d, u, o, x, X The precision field is where you specify the minimum number of digits that will
be included in the output value. Digits are not truncated if the number of digits
in an argument exceeds that defined in the precision field. If the number of
digits in the argument is less than the precision field, the output value is padded
on the left with zeros.
f The precision field is where you specify the number of digits to the right of the
e, E The precision field is where you specify the number of digits to the right of the
g The precision field is where you specify the maximum number of significant
digits in the output value.
c, C The precision field has no effect on these field types.
s The precision field is where you specify the maximum number of characters in
the output value. Excess characters are not output.
The optional characters l or L may immediately precede conversion_type to respectively specify

long versions of the integer types d, i, u, o, x, and X.
You must ensure that the argument type matches that of the format specification. You can use type
casts to ensure that the proper type is passed to sprintf.
sprintl
Prototype void sprintl(char *wh, const code char *f,...);
Description The same as sprintf, except it doesn’t support float-type numbers.
sprinti
Prototype void sprinti(char *wh, const code char *f,...);
Description The same as sprintf, except it doesn’t support long integers and float-type numbers.
MikroElektronika
736
Library Example
This is a demonstration of the standard C library sprintf routine usage. Three different representations of the same
floating poing number obtained by using the sprintf routine are sent via UART.
double ww = -1.2587538e+1;
char buffer[15];
void main(){

Delay_ms(10);
UART1_Write_Text(“Floating point number representation”); // Write message on UART
sprintf(buffer, “%12e”, ww); // Format ww and store it to buffer

UART1_Write_Text(“rne format:”); // Write message on UART
UART1_Write_Text(buffer); // Write buffer on UART
sprintf(buffer, “%12f”, ww); // Format ww and store it to buffer

UART1_Write_Text(“rnf format:”); // Write message on UART
sprintf(buffer, “%12g”, ww); // Format ww and store it to buffer

UART1_Write_Text(“rng format:”); // Write message on UART
}
MikroElektronika
737
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Time Library
The Time Library contains functions and type definitions for time calculations in the UNIX time format which counts the
number of seconds since the “epoch”. This is very convenient for programs that work with time intervals: the difference
between two UNIX time values is a real-time difference measured in seconds.
What is the epoch?

Originally it was defined as the beginning of 1970 GMT. (January 1, 1970 Julian day) GMT, Greenwich Mean Time, is
a traditional term for the time zone in England.
The TimeStruct type is a structure type suitable for time and date storage. Type declaration is contained in __Time.h
which can be found in the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 Time Library Demo example folder.
Library Routines
- Time_dateToEpoch
- Time_epochToDate
- Time_dateDiff
Time_dateToEpoch
Prototype long Time_dateToEpoch(TimeStruct *ts);
Description This function returns the UNIX time : number of seconds since January 1, 1970 0h00mn00s.
Parameters
- ts: time and date value for calculating UNIX time.
Returns Number of seconds since January 1, 1970 0h00mn00s.
Requires Nothing.
Example #include “__Time.h”

...
TimeStruct ts1;
long epoch ;
...
//what is the epoch of the date in ts ?
epoch = Time_dateToEpoch(&ts1) ;
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
738
Time_epochToDate
Prototype void Time_epochToDate(long e, TimeStruct *ts);
Description Converts the UNIX time to time and date.
Parameters
- e: UNIX time (seconds since UNIX epoch)
- ts: time and date structure for storing conversion output
Returns Nothing.
Requires Nothing.

...
TimeStruct ts2;
long epoch ;
...
//what date is epoch 1234567890 ?
epoch = 1234567890 ;
Time_epochToDate(epoch, &ts2) ;
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
739
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Time_dateDiff
Prototype long Time_dateDiff(TimeStruct *t1, TimeStruct *t2);
Description This function compares two dates and returns time difference in seconds as a signed long. Result is
positive if t1 is before t2, result is null if t1 is the same as t2 and result is negative if t1 is after t2.
Parameters
- t1: time and date structure (the first comparison parameter)
- t2: time and date structure (the second comparison parameter)
Parameters None.
Returns Time difference in seconds as a signed long.
Requires Nothing.

...
TimeStruct ts1, ts2;
long diff ;
...
// how many seconds between these two dates contained in ts1 and ts2
buffers?
diff = Time_dateDiff(&ts1, &ts2) ;
Notes None.
MikroElektronika
740
Library Example
Demonstration of Time library routines usage for time calculations in UNIX time format.
#include “__Time.h”
TimeStruct ts1, ts2;

long epoch;
long diff;
void main() {
ts1.ss = 0;
ts1.mn = 7;
ts1.hh = 17;
ts1.md = 23;
ts1.mo = 5;
ts1.yy = 2006;
/*
* What is the epoch of the date in ts ?
*/
epoch = Time_dateToEpoch(&ts1); // 1148404020
/*
* What date is epoch 1234567890 ?
*/
epoch = 1234567890;
Time_epochToDate(epoch, &ts2); // {0x1E, 0x1F,0x17, 0x0D, 0x04, 0x02, 0x07D9}
/*
* How much seconds between this two dates?
*/
diff = Time_dateDiff(&ts1, &ts2); // 86163870
}
MikroElektronika
741
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Trigonometry Library
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 implements fundamental trigonometry functions. These functions are
implemented as look-up tables. Trigonometry functions are implemented in integer format in order to save memory.
Library Routines
- sinE3
- cosE3
sinE3
Prototype int sinE3(unsigned angle_deg);
Description The function calculates sine multiplied by 1000 and rounded to the nearest integer:
result = round(sin(angle_deg)*1000)
Parameters
- angle_deg: input angle in degrees
Returns The function returns the sine of input parameter multiplied by 1000.
Requires Nothing.
Example int res;

...
res = sinE3(45); // result is 707
Notes Return value range: -1000..1000.
MikroElektronika
742
cosE3
Prototype int cosE3(unsigned angle_deg);
Description The function calculates cosine multiplied by 1000 and rounded to the nearest integer:
result = round(cos(angle_deg)*1000)
Parameters
- angle_deg: input angle in degrees
Returns The function returns the cosine of input parameter multiplied by 1000.
Requires Nothing.
Example int res;

...
res = cosE3(196); // result is -193
Notes Return value range: -1000..1000.
MikroElektronika
743
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
CHAPTER 10
Tutorials
Managing Project
Projects
The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 organizes applications into projects, consisting of a single project file
(extension .mcpds) and one or more source files (extension .c). mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 IDE allows
you to manage multiple projects (see Project Manager). Source files can be compiled only if they are part of a project.
The project file contains the following information:
- project name and optional description,

- target device,
- device flags (config word),
- device clock,
- list of the project source files with paths,
- header files (*.h),
- binary files (*.mcl),
- image files,
- other files.
Note that the project does not include files in the same way as preprocessor does, see Add/Remove Files from
Project.
MikroElektronika
744
New Project
The easiest way to create a project is by means of the New Project Wizard, drop-down menu Project › New Project or
by clicking the New Project Icon from Project Toolbar.
New Project Wizard Steps

Start creating your New project, by clicking Next button:
Step One - Select the device from the device drop-down list:
MikroElektronika
745
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Step Two - Enter the oscillator frequency value:
Step Three - Specify the location where your project will be saved:
MikroElektronika
746
Step Four - Add project file to the project if they are avaiable at this point. You can always add project files later using
Project Manager:
Step Five - Select inital Library Manager state:
MikroElektronika
747
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Step Six - Click Finish button to create your New Project:
Related topics: Project Manager, Project Settings
New Project
The easiest way to create a project is by means of the New Project Wizard, drop-down menu Project › New Project or
by clicking the New Project Icon from Project Toolbar.
New Project Wizard Steps

Start creating your New project, by clicking Next button:
MikroElektronika
748
Step One - Select the device from the device drop-down list:
Step Two - Enter the oscillator frequency value:
MikroElektronika
749
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Step Three - Specify the location where your project will be saved:
Step Four - Add project file to the project if they are avaiable at this point. You can always add project files later using
Project Manager:
MikroElektronika
750
Step Five - Select inital Library Manager state:
Step Six - Click Finish button to create your New Project:
Related topics: Project Manager, Project Settings
MikroElektronika
751
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Customizing Projects
You can change basic project settings in the Project Settings window. You can change chip, and oscillator frequency.
Any change in the Project Setting Window affects currently active project only, so in case more than one project is open,
you have to ensure that exactly the desired project is set as active one in the Project Manager. Also, you can change
configuration bits of the selected chip in the Edit Project window.
Managing Project Group

mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 IDE provides convenient option which enables several projects to be open
simultaneously. If you have several projects being connected in some way, you can create a project group.
The project group may be saved by clicking the Save Project Group Icon from the Project Manager window.
The project group may be reopened by clicking the Open Project Group Icon . All relevant data about the project
group is stored in the project group file (extension .mcdsgroup)
Add/Remove Files from Project

The project can contain the following file types:
- .c source files
- .h header files
- .mcl binary files
- .pld project level defines files
- image files
- .ihex EEPROM files
- .hex, .asm and .lst files, see output files. These files can not be added or removed from project.
- other files
MikroElektronika
752
The list of relevant files is stored in the project file (extension .mcpds).
To add a file to the project, click the Add File to Project Icon or press Insert button on your keyboard. Each
added source file must be self-contained, i.e. it must have all necessary definitions after preprocessing.
To remove file(s) from the project, click the Remove File from Project Icon or press Delete button on your
keyboard.
Project Level Defines:

Project Level Defines (.pld) files can also be added to project. Project level define files enable you to have defines that
are visible in all source files in the project. A file must contain one definition per line in the following form:
<symbol>=<value>
Define a macro named symbol. To specify a value, use =<value>. If =<value> is omitted, 1 is assumed. Do not enter
white-space characters immediately before the “=”. If a white-space character is entered immediately after the “=”, the
macro is defined as zero token. This option can be specified repeatedly. Each appearance of symbol will be replaced
by the value before compilation.
For example, lets make a project level define named pld_test. First of all, create a new file with the .pld extension,
pld_test_file.pld.
Next, open it, and write something like this:
pld_test=3
Once you have done this, save the file. In the Project Manager, add pld_test_file.pld file by right-clicking the
Project Level Defines node.
In the source code write the following:
#if pld_test == 3
...
#endif
There are number of predefined project level defines. See predefined project level defines
Note: For inclusion of the header files (extension .h), use the preprocessor directive #include. See File Inclusion for
more information.
Related topics: Project Manager, Project Settings, Edit Project
MikroElektronika
753
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Add/Remove Files from Project

The project can contain the following file types:
- .c source files
- .h header files
- .mcl binary files
- .pld project level defines files
- image files
- .ihex EEPROM files
- .hex, .asm and .lst files, see output files. These files can not be added or removed from project.
- other files
The list of relevant files is stored in the project file (extension .mcpds).
To add a file to the project, click the Add File to Project Icon or press Insert button on your keyboard. Each
added source file must be self-contained, i.e. it must have all necessary definitions after preprocessing.
To remove file(s) from the project, click the Remove File from Project Icon or press Delete button on your
keyboard.
MikroElektronika
754
Project Level Defines:

Project Level Defines (.pld) files can also be added to project. Project level define files enable you to have defines that
are visible in all source files in the project. A file must contain one definition per line in the following form:
<symbol>=<value>
Define a macro named symbol. To specify a value, use =<value>. If =<value> is omitted, 1 is assumed. Do not
enter white-space characters immediately before the “=”. If a white-space character is entered immediately after the
“=”, the macro is defined as zero token. This option can be specified repeatedly. Each appearance of symbol will be
replaced by the value before compilation.
For example, lets make a project level define named pld_test. First of all, create a new file with the .pld extension,
pld_test_file.pld.
Next, open it, and write something like this:
pld_test=3
Once you have done this, save the file. In the Project Manager, add pld_test_file.pld file by right-clicking the
Project Level Defines node.
In the source code write the following:
#if pld_test == 3
...
#endif
There are number of predefined project level defines. See predefined project level defines
Note: For inclusion of the header files (extension .h), use the preprocessor directive #include. See File Inclusion for
more information.
Related topics: Project Manager, Project Settings, Edit Project
MikroElektronika
755
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Source Files
Source files containing source code should have the extension .c. The list of source files relevant to the application
is stored in project file with extension .mcpds, along with other project information. You can compile source files only
if they are part of the project.
Use the preprocessor directive #include to include header files with the extension .h. Do not rely on the preprocessor
to include source files other than headers — see Add/Remove Files from Project for more information.
Managing Source Files
Creating new source file

To create a new source file, do the following:
1. Select File › New Unit from the drop-down menu, or press Ctrl+N, or click the New File Icon from the File
Toolbar.
2. A new tab will be opened. This is a new source file. Select File › Save from the drop-down menu, or press Ctrl+S, or
click the Save File Icon from the File Toolbar and name it as you want.
If you use the New Project Wizard, an empty source file, named after the project with extension .c, will be created
automatically. The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 does not require you to have a source file named the same
as the project, it’s just a matter of convenience.
Opening an existing file
1. Select File › Open from the drop-down menu, or press Ctrl+O, or click the Open File Icon from the File
Toolbar. In Open Dialog browse to the location of the file that you want to open, select it and click the Open button.
2. The selected file is displayed in its own tab. If the selected file is already open, its current Editor tab will become
active.
Printing an open file

1. Make sure that the window containing the file that you want to print is the active window.
2. Select File › Print from the drop-down menu, or press Ctrl+P.
3. In the Print Preview Window, set a desired layout of the document and click the OK button. The file will be printed
on the selected printer.
Saving file
1. Make sure that the window containing the file that you want to save is the active window.
2. Select File › Save from the drop-down menu, or press Ctrl+S, or click the Save File Icon from the File
Toolbar.
MikroElektronika
756
Saving file under a different name

2. Select File › Save As from the drop-down menu. The New File Name dialog will be displayed.
3. In the dialog, browse to the folder where you want to save the file.
4. In the File Name field, modify the name of the file you want to save.
5. Click the Save button.
Closing file
1. Make sure that the tab containing the file that you want to close is the active tab.
2. Select File › Close from the drop-down menu, or right click the tab of the file that you want to close and select Close
option from the context menu.
3. If the file has been changed since it was last saved, you will be prompted to save your changes.
Search Paths
You can specify your own custom search paths: select Project › Edit Search Paths... option from the drop-down
menu:
MikroElektronika
757
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Following options are available:
Icon Description
Add Search Path.
Remove Search Path.
Purge Invalid Paths.
Paths for Source Files (.c)

You can specify either absolute or relative path to the source file. If you specify a relative path, mikroC PRO for
dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 will look for the file in following locations, in this particular order:
1. the project folder (folder which contains the project file .mcpds),
2. your custom search paths,
3. mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 installation folder > Uses folder.
Paths for Header Files (.h)

Header files are included by means of preprocessor directive #include. If you place an explicit path to the header file
in preprocessor directive, only that location will be searched.
You can specify either absolute or relative path to the header. If you specify a relative path, mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33
and PIC24 will look for the file in following locations, in this particular order:
1. the project folder (folder which contains the project file .h),
2. mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 installation folder > Include folder.
3. your custom search paths
Related topics:File Menu, File Toolbar, Project Manager, Project Settings
MikroElektronika
758
Edit Project
Edit Project gives you option to change MCU you wish to use, change its oscillator frequency and build type. Also, Edit
Project enables you to alter specific configuration bits of the selected device.
As you alter these bits, appropriate register values will be updated also. This can be viewed in the Configuration
Registers pane.
When you have finished configuring your device, you can save bit configuration as a scheme, using button.
In case you need this scheme in another project, you can load it using button.
There is also a button which lets you select default configuration bit settings for the selected device.
Related topics: Project Settings, Customizing Projects
MikroElektronika
759
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Source Files
Source files containing source code should have the extension .c. The list of source files relevant to the application is
stored in project file with extension .mcpds, along with other project information. You can compile source files only if
they are part of the project.
Use the preprocessor directive #include to include header files with the extension .h. Do not rely on the preprocessor
to include source files other than headers — see Add/Remove Files from Project for more information.
Managing Source Files
Creating new source file

To create a new source file, do the following:
1. Select File › New Unit from the drop-down menu, or press Ctrl+N, or click the New File Icon from the File
Toolbar.
2. A new tab will be opened. This is a new source file. Select File › Save from the drop-down menu, or press Ctrl+S, or
click the Save File Icon from the File Toolbar and name it as you want.
If you use the New Project Wizard, an empty source file, named after the project with extension .c, will be created
automatically. The mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 does not require you to have a source file named the same
as the project, it’s just a matter of convenience.
Opening an existing file
1. Select File › Open from the drop-down menu, or press Ctrl+O, or click the Open File Icon from the File
Toolbar.
In Open Dialog browse to the location of the file that you want to open, select it and click the Open button.
2. The selected file is displayed in its own tab. If the selected file is already open, its current Editor tab will become
active.
Printing an open file

1. Make sure that the window containing the file that you want to print is the active window.
2. Select File › Print from the drop-down menu, or press Ctrl+P.
3. In the Print Preview Window, set a desired layout of the document and click the OK button. The file will be printed
on the selected printer.
Saving file
2. Select File › Save from the drop-down menu, or press Ctrl+S, or click the Save File Icon from the File
Toolbar.
MikroElektronika
760
Saving file under a different name

2. Select File › Save As from the drop-down menu. The New File Name dialog will be displayed.
3. In the dialog, browse to the folder where you want to save the file.
4. In the File Name field, modify the name of the file you want to save.
5. Click the Save button.
Closing file
1. Make sure that the tab containing the file that you want to close is the active tab.
2. Select File › Close from the drop-down menu, or right click the tab of the file that you want to close and select Close
option from the context menu.
3. If the file has been changed since it was last saved, you will be prompted to save your changes.
Search Paths
You can specify your own custom search paths: select Project › Edit Search Paths... option from the drop-down
menu:
MikroElektronika
761
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Following options are available:
Icon Description
Add Search Path.
Remove Search Path.
Purge Invalid Paths.
Paths for Source Files (.c)

You can specify either absolute or relative path to the source file. If you specify a relative path, mikroC PRO for
dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 will look for the file in following locations, in this particular order:
1. the project folder (folder which contains the project file .mcpds),
2. your custom search paths,
3. mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 installation folder > Uses folder.
Paths for Header Files (.h)

Header files are included by means of preprocessor directive #include. If you place an explicit path to the header file
in preprocessor directive, only that location will be searched.
You can specify either absolute or relative path to the header. If you specify a relative path, mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33
and PIC24 will look for the file in following locations, in this particular order:
1. the project folder (folder which contains the project file .h),
2. mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 installation folder > Include folder.
3. your custom search paths
Related topics:File Menu, File Toolbar, Project Manager, Project Settings,
MikroElektronika
762
Clean Project Folder

This menu gives you option to choose which files from your current project you want to delete.
Files marked in bold can be easily recreated by building a project. Other files should be marked for deletion only with a
great care, because IDE cannot recover them.
Related topics: Customizing Projects
MikroElektronika
763
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Compilation
When you have created the project and written the source code, it’s time to compile it. Select Project › Build from the
drop-down menu, or click the Build Icon from the Build Toolbar. If more more than one project is open you
can compile all open projects by selecting Project › Build All Projects from the drop-down menu, or click the Build All
Projects Icon from the Build Toolbar.
Progress bar will appear to inform you about the status of compiling. If there are some errors, you will be notified in
the Messages Window. If no errors are encountered, the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 will generate output
files.
Output Files
Upon successful compilation, the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 will generate output files in the project folder
(folder which contains the project file .mcpds). Output files are summarized in the table below:
Format Description File Type

Intel HEX Intel style hex records. Use this file to program .hex
MCU.
Binary mikro Compiled Library. Binary distribution of .mcl
application that can be included in other projects.
List File Overview of MCU memory allotment: instruction .lst
addresses, registers, routines and labels.
Assembler File Human readable assembly with symbolic names, .asm
extracted from the List File.
Assembly View
After compiling the program in the mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24, you can click the View Assembly icon
or select Project › View Assembly from the drop-down menu to review the generated assembly code (.asm file) in a
new tab window.
Assembly is human-readable with symbolic names.
Related topics: Project Menu, Project Toolbar, Messages Window, Project Manager, Project Settings
MikroElektronika
764
Creating New Library
mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 allows you to create your own libraries. In order to create a library in mikroC
PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 follow the steps bellow:
1. Create a new source file, see Managing Source Files

2. Save the file in one of the subfolders of the compiler’s Uses folder:
DriveName:\Program Files\Mikroelektronika\mikroC PRO for dsPIC\Uses\
3. Write a code for your library and save it.
4. Add __Lib_Example file in some project, see Project Manager. Recompile the project.
If you wish to use this library for all MCUs, then you should go to Tools › Options › Output settings, and check
Build all files as library box.
This will build libraries in a common form which will work with all MCUs. If this box is not checked, then library will
be built for selected MCU.
Bear in mind that compiler will report an error if a library built for specific MCU is used for another one.
5. Compiled file __Lib_Example.mcl should appear in ...\mikroC PRO for dsPIC\Uses\ folder.
6. Open the definition file for the MCU that you want to use. This file is placed in the compiler’s Defs folder:
DriveName:\Program Files\Mikroelektronika\mikroC PRO for dsPIC\Defs\
and it is named MCU_NAME.mlk, for example 30F4013.mlk
7. Add the the following segment of code to <LIBRARIES> node of the definition file (definition file is in XML format):
<LIB>
<ALIAS>Example_Library</ALIAS>
<FILE>__Lib_Example</FILE>
<TYPE>REGULAR</TYPE>
</LIB>
8. Add Library to mlk file for each MCU that you want to use with your library.
9. Click Refresh button in Library Manager
10. Example_Library should appear in the Library manager window.
Multiple Library Versions

Library Alias represents unique name that is linked to corresponding Library .mcl file. For example UART library for
30F4013 is different from UART library for 30F6014 MCU. Therefore, two different UART Library versions were made,
see mlk files for these two MCUs. Note that these two libraries have the same Library Alias (UART) in both mlk files.
This approach enables you to have identical representation of UART library for both MCUs in Library Manager.
Related topics: Library Manager, Project Manager, Managing Source Files
MikroElektronika
765
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Using Microchip MPLAB® IDE with mikroElektronika compilers

This new feature will boost your productivity by enabling you to import your code in a non-mikroElektronika enironment
- Microchip’s MPLAB®.
With the introduction of COFF File in mikroElektronika compiler, it is possible to debug and analyze your code through
a software or hardware simulator.
Debugging Your Code

If your program has been built correctly, the compiler should generate a .hex file and a .cof file. The cof file
contains all the information necessary for high-level debugging in MPLAB®, and it should be loaded by selecting the
File › Import... menu in the MPLAB®.
Once you have done this, you have two choices: either to use MPLAB® ICD 2 Debugger, if you have the appropriate
hardware, or MPLAB® Simulator.
Trademarks:
The Microchip name and logo, the Microchip logo, Accuron, dsPIC, KEELOQ, KEELOQ logo, microID, MPLAB,
PIC, PICmicro, PICSTART, PRO MATE, rfPIC and SmartShunt are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology
Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries.
Related topics: COFF File, Using MPLAB® ICD 2 Debugger, Using MPLAB® Simulator
Using MPLAB® ICD 2 Debugger

Important:
- It is assumed that MPLAB® and USB drivers for MPLAB® ICD 2 Debugger are previously installed.
- Procedure described below is also relevant for MPLAB® ICD 3 Debugger.
- Be sure to import compiled .hex file prior to importing .cof file, because it contains configuration bit settings which
are essential for the proper functioning of the user code.
To successfully use MPLAB® ICD 2 Debugger with generated .cof file, follow the steps below:
1. First of all, start mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 and open the desired project. In this example, UART
project for EasydsPIC4A board and dsPIC30F4013 will be opened.
2. Open Tools › Options › Output settings, and check the “Generate COFF file” option, and click the OK button.
3. After that, compile the project by pressing Ctrl + F9.
4. Connect USB cable and turn on power supply on EasydsPIC4A.
5. Program the MCU by pressing F11.
6. Connect external power supply, USB cable from PC and modular interface cable to the MPLAB® ICD 2
Debugger’s appropiate sockets, like on the picture below :
MikroElektronika
766
7. Connect second end of the modular interface cable to the ICD (RJ12) socket of EasydsPIC4A :
MikroElektronika
767
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
8. Put the J11 and J10 Jumpers in the correct position, as showed in the picture below:
9. Next, open MPLAB®, and select the appropriate device by choosing Configure › Select Device... :
10. After device selection, click on the File › Import. Open file dialog box should appear. Then, go to the project folder
and open the generated HEX file, UART.hex.
Note: This is very important, because hex file contains configuration bit settings which are essential for the proper
functioning of the user code.
MikroElektronika
768
11. Next, click the File › Import. Open file dialog box should appear. Then, go to the project folder and open the
generated COFF file, UART.cof:
MikroElektronika
769
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
12. Then, select the MPLAB® ICD 2 from the Debugger › Select Tool menu for hardware debugging:
13. Complete the MPLAB® ICD 2 Setup Wizard from the Debugger menu (if needed).
MikroElektronika
770
14. After completing MPLAB® ICD 2 Setup Wizard, click on the Debugger › Connect:
MikroElektronika
771
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
15. Finally, click on the Debugger › Program:
MikroElektronika
772
16. Now, you can start debugging the code by clicking Step Over button on the Debug toolbar, or by pressing
F8:
Related topics: COFF File, Using MPLAB® Simulator
Using MPLAB® Simulator

Note: It is assumed that MPLAB® is previously installed.
1. First of all, start mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 Help and open the desired project. In this example, UART
project for EasydsPIC4A board and dsPIC30F4013 will be opened.
2. Open Tools › Options › Output settings, and check the “Generate COFF file” option, and click the OK button.
3. After that, compile the project by pressing Ctrl + F9.
4. Next, open MPLAB®, and select the appropriate device by choosing Configure › Select Device... :
MikroElektronika
773
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
MikroElektronika
774
5. After device selection, click on the File › Import. Open file dialog box should appear. Then, go to the project folder
and open the generated COFF file, UART.cof :
MikroElektronika
775
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
6. Then, select the MPLAB® SIM from the Debugger › Select Tool menu for software debugging:
MikroElektronika
776
7. Now, you can start debugging the code by clicking Step Over button on the Debug toolbar, or by pressing
F8:
Related topics: COFF File, Using MPLAB® ICD 2 Debugger
MikroElektronika
777
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
Frequently Asked Questions

This is a list of frequently asked questions about using mikroElektronika compilers.
If your question is not answered on this page, please contact mikroElektronika Support Desk.
Can I use your compilers and programmer on Windows Vista (Windows 7) ?

Our compilers and programmer software are developed to work on and tested on Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows
ME, Windows XP (32 and 64 bit), Windows Vista (32 and 64 bit) and Windows 7 (32 and 64 bit) and they work fine on
these operating systems.
You can find the latest drivers on our website.
I am getting “Access is denied” error in Vista, how to solve this problem ?

Please turn off User Account Control (UAC). This should make your software fully functional. To do this, follow the path
in your Windows Vista (logged in as administrator) Control Panel › User Accounts › Turn User Account Control on
or off, uncheck Use User Account Control (UAC) and click OK.
What are differences between mikroC PRO, mikroPascal PRO and mikroBasic PRO
compilers ? Why do they have different prices ?
Basically, there is little differences between these compilers. mikroC PRO is standardized with ANSI C, and it is much
more complex and it is far more difficult to write the compiler for it. We used a lot more resources for making it than what
we used for mikroPascal and mikroBasic. We also worked on some very complex topics such as floating point, typedef,
union, a completely new debugger and many other. Because of that there is difference in price.
Why do your PIC compilers don’t support 12F508 and some similar chips ?
Unfortunately our PIC compilers don’t support 12F508 and similar chips because these chips are designed to use 12-bit
wide instructions. Our compiler support MCUs which use 14-bit or wider instructions.
What are limitations of demo versions of mikroElektronika’s compilers ?

The only limitation of the free demo version is that it cannot generate hex output over 2K of program words. Although it
may sound restrictive, this margin allows you to develop practical, working applications without ever thinking of demo
limit. If you intend to develop really complex projects in one of our compilers, you should consider purchasing the
license key.
Why do I still get demo limit error when I purchased and installed license key ?
If you are first time installing and registering compiler, you need to follow instructions exactly as described in registration
procedure. License is valid only for the computer from which request is made, so license requested from one computer
won’t work on another computer. You can find on our site manual and video describing in detail how to get your license.
If you previously had an older version of our compiler and have working license key for it but it doesn’t work with new
compiler, you have to repeat registration procedure from the new compiler and you will get a new license.
MikroElektronika
778
I have bought license for the older version, do I have to pay license for the new version
of the compiler ?
No, once you pay for the license key you get a lifetime license. When we release a new major release of the compiler,
you might need to repeat registration procedure from your new compiler and you will get new license free of charge.
Do your compilers work on Windows Vista (Windows 7) ?

Yes!
What does this function/procedure/routine do ?

Please see your compiler’s Help where all of the functions are explained in detail.
I try to compile one of the provided examples and nothing happens, what is the
problem?
You need to open project, not file. When you want to open an example, go to Project › Open Project, then browse
through projects and choose project file. Now you will be able to compile and program with success.
Can I get your library sources ? I need to provide all sources with my project.
It is our company’s policy not to share our source code.
Can I use code I developed in your compilers in commercial purposes ? Are there some
limitations ?
Regarding your code, there are no limitations. Your application is your own property and you can do whatever you like
with it. If you want to include some of code we provide with our compilers or on our site, you may include them in your
project, however, you are not allowed to charge your users for these.
Why does an example provided with your compilers doesn’t work ?

All of the examples provided with our compilers are tested and work fine. You need to read commented header of the
example and be sure that you have used the same MCU example is written for and that you have hardware connections
(DIP switches, jumpers etc.) set as described.
Your example works if I use the same MCU you did, but how to make it work for another
MCU ?
You should read your MCU’s datasheet. Different MCUs can have different pin assignments and may require different
settings. If you need help regarding this, you can find free online books on our website and recommend you starting
there. You can also ask for help on our forum.
MikroElektronika
779
mikoC PRO for dsPIC
I need this project finished, can you help me ?

We currently do not do custom projects, however, we can give you some directions when you start working on your
project and come to a problem. Also, our forum is very active community and as you can find there experts in different
fields, we encourage you to look for help there.
Do you have some discount on your compilers/development systems for students/

professors ?
Since large percentage of our customers are schools, laboratories and students, our prices are already scaled for these
kinds of users. If you plan ordering more than one of our products, see special offers page on our website. Also, you
can contact our Sales Department and see if you are eligible for some additional discount.
I have a question about your compilers which is not listed here. Where can I find an
answer ?
Firstly, look for it in your compiler’s Help. If you don’t find an answer there, please create a support ticket on our
website.
MikroElektronika
780
MikroElektronika
781
If you want to learn more about our products, please visit our website at www.mikroe.com
If you are experiencing some problems with any of our products or just need additional information, please place your ticket at
www.mikroe.com/en/support
If you have any questions, comments or business proposals, do not hesitate to contact us at [email protected]

Mikroc Dspic Manual v100 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mikroc Dspic Manual v100 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mikroc Dspic Manual v100 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

mikroC PRO for dsPIC ™

mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 is a full-featured C compiler

Advanced Edit Toolbar 81

Metacharacters - Subexpressions 113

COFF File Generation 161

Types Conversions 222

Bitwise Shift Operators 243

Preprocessor Directives 258

CAN_MASK Constants 285

External dependencies of Graphic Lcd Library 374

Library Routines 399

OneWire Library 432

Managing Project 744

Frequently Asked Questions 778

mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24 IDE

Introduction to mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24

Copyright (c) 2002-2010 mikroElektronika. All rights reserved.

What’s new in mikroC PRO for dsPIC30/33 and PIC24

- Optimization issues in specific cases when destination variable is in Rx space.

- Error in Code Explorer in case void interrup is defined (without brackets).

- Communication to programmer concerning supported chips.

Software License Agreement

IMPORTANT - READ CAREFULLY

HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES

Phone: + 381 11 36 28 830

Who Gets the License Key

How to Get License Key

After Receving the License Key

Main Menu Options

Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts, Toolbars

Open source file for editing or image file for viewing.

Reopen recently used file.

Save changes for active editor.

Close active source file.

Close all opened files.

Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts, File Toolbar, Managing Source Files

Redo last change.

Cut selected text to clipboard.

Copy selected text to clipboard.

Paste text from clipboard.

Delete selected text.

Select all text in active editor.

Find text in active editor.

Find next occurence of text in active editor.

Find previous occurence of text in active editor.

Replace text in active editor.

Go to line to the desired line in active editor.

Advanced Code Editor options

Uncomment selected code or remove single line comment if there is no selection.

Indent selected code.

Outdent selected code.

Changes selected text case to lowercase.

Changes selected text case to uppercase.

Changes selected text case to titlercase.

Regular expressions option

Related topics: Keyboard shortcuts, Edit Toolbar, Advanced Edit Toolbar

Show/Hide Bookmarks window.

Show/Hide Code Explorer window.

Show/Hide Library Manager window.

Advanced Edit Toolbar 81

Metacharacters - Subexpressions 113

COFF File Generation 161

Types Conversions 222

Bitwise Shift Operators 243

Preprocessor Directives 258

CAN_MASK Constants 285

External dependencies of Graphic Lcd Library 374

Library Routines 399

OneWire Library 432

Managing Project 744

Frequently Asked Questions 778